Jideobi Odunze's Comic Reviews

Reviewer For: Geeked Out Nation, Analog Addiction, Beyond The Panel, IGN Reviews: 2692
8.5Avg. Review Rating

8.2
4001 A.D. #1

May 4, 2016

4001 A.D. #1 was a solid start. They addressed the things we don't know, the things we should know, and didn't fear getting into a big confrontation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
A Voice in the Dark: Get Your Gun #1

Sep 24, 2014

A Voice In The Dark: Get Your Gun #1 really is a great jumping-on point for new readers. All you really need to know is that Zoey killed Mandy and that things will not go as planned when it comes to getting away with it. After that you just go along for the ride because it's all about getting into the mind of a killer who challenges the cliches of most others.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
A Voice in the Dark: Get Your Gun #2

Jan 14, 2015

A Voice In The Dark: Get Your Gun #2 covers a lot of ground in only the second issue. From Zoey's personal life to the case Detective Dunst is struggling to close, there is much to see which makes you question just what led to Zoey's eventual downfall. We know how it starts, though there remains much more when getting away with murder is never that simple.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Abe Sapien (2013) #2

May 2, 2013

It was interesting that even though the first place Abe went to was a church in order to rest, the priest there was actually welcoming to him. What was happening around the world was nothing new to the man which was why he wasn't scared when he first encountered Abe. Though we then switch over to the B.P.R.D. officers who are hunting Abe thinking he is the cause for everything happening. Something to point out is odd for them to do because he's one of them and is very humane. Here Allie was able to show what people really thought of monsters like himself and how they are lumped together as trouble and nothing else. Even more so when the towns people turned on their own priest for asking them to be at peace with those who were transformed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Action Comics (2016) #1015

Sep 25, 2019

As someone who jumped into Action Comics #1015 to get more Naomi? This is a book worth picking up. This was the best thing that they could do for this new hero giving her the opportunity to cross paths with major heroes. That is how you create faith in new characters picking up greater relevance. Where DC dropped the ball with those who came last year is that they had their books, and nothing else. Right now Naomi exists outside of her books, even the Wonder Twins exist outside of their book. I for one look forward to what comes next in the following issue!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Adventures of the Super Sons #1

Aug 1, 2018

Adventures of the Super Sons #1 is the same team, but an all-new adventure for Superboy and Robin. This one issue was a good reminder of what we have been missing from the Super Sons, and will continue to miss as when this miniseries is over. You don't get this kind of energy towards superheroics, snark, or action anywhere else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Adventures of the Super Sons #2

Sep 5, 2018

Adventures of the Super Sons #2 was another fun issue for the embrace in being evil that we have received from The Gang. We now know how they came to be, what motivates them, and what is at stake for the Super Sons if they do not put a stop to their plans. It was an interesting approach to this discovery, and hopefully the next issue fully addresses how this Rex Luthor fully created this persona from who he used to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Adventures of the Super Sons #3

Oct 3, 2018

Adventures of the Super Sons #3 was a page-turner for those who were not prepared for what happens when losing your powers to gold kryptonite might not be the worst situation to be put in. This issue also embraced yet again what is fun about being a villain. Though this time around, with a stronger focus on the cliches that you can't help but run into when your greatest mistake is not simply becoming your own villain.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Age of Apocalypse (2015) #1

Jul 8, 2015

The artwork for Age of Apocalypse #1 is surprisingly good. They chose a good art team to handle this series because as stated above, a lot goes on in this first issue and you need those who can handle this amount of work carrying through an acceptable level of quality throughout. That is pretty much what you got from this issue. Particularly when it comes to the action. There was no shortage of that and the fights were as intense as they looked. You did not expect that first one to start or end the way it did, though it sends a message that they aren't holding back which is what you should want to see from a series that isn't meant to hold your hand. The coloring was excellent with that said. Not a time that you didn't feel like these power players weren't giving all that they had in this conflict. Warm colors, cold colors and those that matched to the tone of the story all stood out most when necessary.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Age of Ultron #7

May 2, 2013

The artwork has remained consistent which matches the tone of the story. Peterson best portrays this with both the inking and the crosshatch-like detail.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Age of Ultron #8

May 20, 2013

Not to say that this issue was bad, but when standing next to every issue leading up to now, it has completely derailed from the main story progression. At this point now we are wondering where is the real threat, where is Ultron? Yes, killing Pym changed this, but the future just seems so very different from what should have been the fallout from the fight Cap and his team had in Ultron's future. Now we have a fight unraveled between Tony and Morgana, technology versus magic. In a way, it seems the story is leaning towards a similar story that took place in Justice League Dark when the team found themselves trapped in a magic world at war with those who use technology.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.7
Age of Ultron #9

Jun 7, 2013

The one redeemable part of this story was Wolverine's death by his past self. That was something that didn't really click with me till they actually said it had to be done in order to avoid a paradox. Aside from this, we can only hope that the last issue delivers.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.3
Age of Ultron #10

Jun 19, 2013

In the end the book started off great. But as it was called Age of Ultron, there just wasn't much Ultron. those first four issues really gave us something to look forward to as they took him on, but when all the complications of time came into play, the story fell apart. Sadly that was basically it for the event until the very end which most readers saw coming long ago. The one redeemable thing about this event is what is to come out of it as a fallout. We have "Hunger", a good number of refreshing bookings with unique teams to be released, and some new characters who were long forgotten taking spotlight. Aside from this, the story didn't feel like it was something worth jumping into at all.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.7
Age of Ultron #10AI

Jun 27, 2013

In the end it serves as a decent lead up to the upcoming Avengers AI, nothing more nothing less. We know he's the center point of this storyline and for once it seems they might actually be able to make Pym seem like a likable hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Agents Of S.H.I.E.L.D. #1

Jan 13, 2016

Agents Of S.H.I.E.L.D. #1 left a good impression showing us that they can bring the Agents Of S.H.I.E.L.D. team from the show to the comics properly while moving into new territory with these characters all the same. Overall they do the spy game right which is the kind of book Marvel needs occupying the shelves at the moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Alien (2021) #1

Mar 24, 2021

To say that no one is safe by the end of Alien #1 is quite the understatement. This story so far should be a breath of fresh air for Alien fans who want to see that Marvel can keep up with the quality books we had gotten before they took the license.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #1

Dec 28, 2016

Aliens Vs Predator: Life And Death #1 raises the stakes in a way where you really can't predict how this will end. So many different variables involved and not many you could see seeing eye to eye. Human, Xenomorph, Engineer, Predator, who would have thought all these forces clashing was possible till now?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #3

Feb 22, 2017

With the way Aliens Vs Predator: Life And Death #3 ends, it's going to be one heck of a pain waiting for the next issue as it is also the end. I don't know how this will end, but that is what you love about a story like this. We are at a point where there may not be another chapter to follow Life And Death. This could be it and guess what? I might be just fine with that because this has been an exciting story that went on longer than I initially guessed it would.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Alien vs. Predator: Life and Death #4

Mar 29, 2017

Aliens Vs Predator: Life and Death #4 was every bit of satisfying for how this last stand against the Xenomorphs played out. There's one more part to follow, and while this conflict comes out of left field I enjoy that nothing is ever so simple for these stories. Some say that you know what to expect from these stories, but they clearly have proven us wrong from start to finish of Life and Death. This has been an exciting story that went on longer than I initially guessed it would and glad for it with what we have to take away.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Aliens: Dead Orbit #1

Apr 26, 2017

Aliens: Dead Orbit #1 is yet another story with potential. Life out in space already is no safe venture, but when you throw in the danger of Xenomorphs you are stepping into the absolute worst case scenario. We see this mess of a ship and just the taste of what goes wrong is enough to make you want to know the full story. Not to mention the need to understand what will make this engineer so special enough to survive this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Aliens: Dead Orbit #2

May 31, 2017

With this second issue, Aliens: Dead Orbit becomes just as worthwhile of your time as any other of the books out on shelves from the AvP franchise. This book isn't about the action, it is about reminding you of what it means to fear the Xenomorphs and feel helpless in the face of this danger.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Aliens: Dead Orbit #4

Dec 13, 2017

Aliens: Dead Orbit #4 was as tragic as it gets when you find your world turned upside down by an encounter with xenomorphs. For as much as you find yourself rooting for Wascylewski to make it to the end, reaching that point was heartbreaking when understanding what the end of the line tends to mean regardless. There are no happy endings for even the survivors. This was another addition to the AvP collection that you will hopefully treasure because it offers you the terror and fear that consumes you with every passing issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Aliens: Defiance #1

Mar 30, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #1 is the start of a new adventure you want to see through to the end. A main character you want to learn more about, intentions you want to see further explored. We should want to see how far Zula and these synthetics are willing to go to protect something bigger than themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Aliens: Defiance #2

May 25, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #2 made progress, though above all gave us some excellent character development from Hendricks. From the start of this you wanted to know more about her, and luckily this creative team struck a balance between delivering that, action, horror, and suspense. Perfect recipe for a memorable story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Aliens: Defiance #3

Aug 17, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #3 is exciting because we have finally gotten down to brass tacks dealing with the big picture. This has always been about more than just saving humanity from the Aliens. This is about saving humanity from Weyland because no matter what goes wrong in the AvP Universe, they are at the center of it all. Curiosity killed the cat, but it seems this cat is putting up a fight for the sake of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aliens: Defiance #4

Aug 31, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #4 continues striking that balance between a book that can be personal, that is dark, and full of mysteries when it comes to intentions and motivations.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Aliens: Defiance #5

Sep 28, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #5 raises the stakes higher than they have been before and grabs you more than their actions before having in mind that what they do next will make the statement of how far they are willing to go to eliminate all possibilities of the Xenomorphs being exploited as weapons.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Aliens: Defiance #6

Oct 26, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #6 keeps catching you off guard and keeps you at the edge of your seat. The consequences are real and the motivations are personal. It is truly refreshing to have such organic characters standing as heroes which is funny to say about a title like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aliens: Defiance #7

Dec 7, 2016

Aliens: Defiance #7 really is a must read. If you are reading any of the AvP books out on shelves, this one should also be on your list if you want a story with a strong cast and plot. This reads as organically as it should when you deliver characters who should and do see the big picture behind the encounters with the Xenomorphs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aliens: Defiance #9

Jan 25, 2017

Overall this is as tense as it can get when Aliens: Defiance #9 throws us into an all or nothing effort for this team to make it out in one piece. Zula makes a big decision here that you wouldn't have seen coming at the start of this series. Her endgame isn't clear, but you would hope that Zula keeps herself on guard for the worst case scenario. The AvP franchise and this creative team surely know how to break an egg to make an omelet.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Aliens: Defiance #10

Mar 29, 2017

Short, sweet, but most importantly to the point. Aliens: Defiance #10 shook things up for either the best or for the worse, though we'll have to wait till the next issue to grasp the gravity of this situation for Zula, Davis and Hollis.Not many get the opportunity to go back to Earth from this, so we are heading into some unknown territory.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Aliens: Defiance #11

Apr 26, 2017

Would it have been better if they simply allowed themselves to perish in space? Would the mercy of xenomorphs be easier to cope with than seeing that the human threat could be just as terrifying? You knew it would be difficult to move forward with this story, but Aliens: Defiance #11 for the fast read it was made you wish this all wasn't really happening. There is only one glimmer of hope left, and right now that is all it seems.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Aliens: Defiance #12

Jun 21, 2017

Had to do some digging by the end of Aliens: Defiance #12, but it sucks that this is the end of the series. The minute this started to feel like a conclusion, the reality began to set in. Part of me knew it wasn't going to be that long of an ongoing book, so there was always the fear of when that end would come because this story was so good.Aliens: Defiance changed the game for what kind of story could come of this franchise. A diverse lead, a different kind of main character, and a whole new kind of adventure going against Weyland-Yutani.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Aliens: Dust to Dust #1

Apr 25, 2018

Aliens: Dust to Dust #1 was a solid start to this new encounter with the Xenomorphs. It never gets any easier to follow these unsuspecting humans who are staring down death itself, but the thrill is in how they survive. Never before has the word survive been harder to say when it is a kid we are hoping to see this through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Aliens: Dust to Dust #2

Jul 11, 2018

Aliens: Dust to Dust #2 hasn't yet broke any new ground for an Aliens story, but I do think it has potential to with the right encounter with the Xenomorphs. The story only has to redeem itself from that one bump at the end which was hard to ignore. Human problems are key, but only if they don't make you cringe so hard.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Aliens: Dust to Dust #3

Oct 24, 2018

Aliens: Dust to Dust #3 was hard to get through, which is new for me to have to say about an issue of Aliens. Normally I would say that they hit the mark, but not with Dust to Dust. It could have been much more than what it turned out to be. I think I would have been more open to what was unfolding here if there wasn't such a long wait between issue two and three. You lose a lot of trust in the story when readers are given that much room to stew on what they have read so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Aliens: Dust to Dust #4

Jan 9, 2019

I did get to the end of Aliens: Dust to Dust #4 feeling like I wanted more from this story than what they gave us. It's hard not to when this was another story where majority of the characters bit the dust. As I said before, we didn't even get those deaths in gruesome detail either. If we are being fair, then you could say that this story served as another perfect example of where humanity becomes their own worst enemy.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Aliens: Fire and Stone #1

Sep 24, 2014

For a start, Aliens: Fire And Stone #1 has some potential. We just have to see what the big picture is in this series when they aren't just trying to survive. That is a big part itself just to see how everyone reacts to this situation, though you are still put in a position where you question where this could possibly lead them in issue to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Aliens: Life and Death #1

Sep 21, 2016

Aliens: Life And Death #1 is the start of another chapter with potential. Everything matters and nothing is irrelevant when the name of the game is survival and no man left behind (so to speak).

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aliens: Life and Death #2

Oct 19, 2016

Aliens: Life And Death #2 is a step up for the fact that they are willing to break boundaries with this team. Surviving means something different to them, and it's refreshing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Aliens: Life and Death #3

Nov 16, 2016

Aliens: Life And Death #3 sends us on that last stretch of this chapter showing us what the stakes are between saving Chris and making sure the Xenomorphs see to their impending doom. These situations are never easy, so it is continuously entertaining that they are able to shake things up in ways we haven't seen before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Aliens: Life and Death #4

Dec 21, 2016

Another chapter closes, but we aren't done with this tale just yet. Aliens: Life And Death #4 was an excellent end to a perfect act of heroism by the likes that we haven't had the pleasure of in a long while. And with that mysterious ending, you surely want to look towards Aliens Vs. Predator: Life and Death with anticipation seeing as though the worst is yet to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Aliens: Rescue #1

Jul 24, 2019

A solid start to this new chapter, and gave us plenty to look forward to as Alec Brand sets off to find his heroes. Aliens: Rescue #1 gets you asking a lot of questions, and that's never a bad thing with these stories. Especially when this has been an ongoing story since the events of Aliens: Defiance.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Aliens: Rescue #2

Aug 21, 2019

Overall, Aliens: Rescue #2 was a solid transition into what comes next for Alec when he meets his heroes and gets up to date on the mission. There were some places where they could have given us a little more, but there is always time to make up for this when we know that no mission ever goes so smooth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Aliens: Resistance #1

Jan 23, 2019

Aliens: Resistance #1 serves as a strong start for this next chapter in the lives of Amanda Ripley and Zula Hendricks. These are survivors on a mission, and that mission is the next craziest thing to taking on Xenomorphs. As I said above, it is a great feeling as an Aliens fan to know that there is always a plan for these characters that a team-up like this is possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aliens: Resistance #2

Feb 27, 2019

Aliens: Resistance #2 gives us another solid issue for everything compelling about these characters and the fight that they are ready to see through to the end. If you didn't understand what was personally at stake for both Zula and Amanda, then you now have a better idea of that and what they are now joining forces to combat.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Aliens: Resistance #4

May 8, 2019

As a continuation of both Aliens: Defiance and the video game Alien: Isolation, and being the first comic in the franchises to serve as a direct sequel to a game, Aliens: Resistance was another thrilling chapter to the ever expanding adventure in this universe. You couldn't have asked for two better leads, or two follow one of the most ambitious attempts to put an end to the twisted use of the Xenomorphs by a corrupt corporation. I do hope that this isn't the last we see of these characters and characters like them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
All-New X-Men #11

May 3, 2013

I will say that whatever it is that Mystique is plotting, though nothing that directly impacted the X-Men till now is a well placed sub plot to keep the All New X-Men and Uncanny from overlapping to often. It's great that they have some connection, but Bendis made a great move by making sure that Cyclops wasn't really seen as the villain when there is a real one still out there.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
All-New X-Men #12

Jun 7, 2013

The one thing that remains consistent is the use of heavy colors and inking. Also the shading too which makes many situations feel more serious, something that you should feel given the problems the X-Men face right now. Though some expressions were off, it was those from Jean especially that stood out because of the emotion it had to display and you surely felt it from her.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
All-New X-Men #13

Jun 27, 2013

It really feels like another X-Men book that stands on its own. Sure it connects to the rest, but they face their own obstacles and as usual with any X-Men team, nothing is ever certain to go their way as we see a now rampaging Jean Grey under the influence of the Phoenix. I do have to say that it is a questionable move by Bendis. You have to ask yourself how he will explain this because the Phoenix is dead, unless he will leave that answer up to the mysteries of time, which would be a bit disappointing. Aside from this the coloring and inking is solid and remains consistent.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
All-New X-Men #14

Jul 18, 2013

This was a great issue and as usual there is more to expect from this book as the longer the Original X-Men remain in this timeline the more dangerous the risk being that this is a sensitive period for mutants all over. The coloring is what I love most at this moment and the bold colors is something you love to see stand out when big fights such as this break out. It just works great when it comes to mutants.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
All-New X-Men #15

Aug 8, 2013

As a lead up to Battle of The Atom, I say that this makes the event clearer. We already know that the X-Men of the future come to the present and it's because of the original X-Men's presence in the present. While this was a heartwarming story, you can already see how it has direct consequences, mainly noticeable when Hank kissed Jean and you could see the line of Beasts in the background. This indicates that it could have some impact on his mutations, if he even has them at all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
All-New X-Men #16

Sep 5, 2013

While Battle of The Atom #1 laid the foundation for this event crossover to begin, this issue really set things in motion. It had emotion, humor, suspense, and a treat for all the fans whether new or current. Where I said that this story had promise, now I can also say it will be filled with surprises because what we saw now is more than likely nothing compared to what's to come later on.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
All-New X-Men #17

Oct 3, 2013

Good issue that added some depth to this plot, though that's all that can really be said about it. It was short and I do feel that a bit more could have gone into this specific issue to make you care about this real team. Everything is too vague and feels as though we're being teased instead of entertained. You are basically left with more questions than answers. Hopefully it picks up the pace with this new revelation, and that would be best when we are at part 6.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
All-New X-Men #18

Nov 16, 2013

Simple and good jumping on point for All New X-Men which sets them on a new journey. They are on their own now with the aid of Kitty and together they have a lot more potential than they did at the Jean Grey school. With the focus back on them we can now address things that were forgotten when the issue of sending them back to their time was still a concern. Good things are coming for this team and we all know what that means for those who kept track of the next event to unfold for this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
All-New X-Men #29

Jul 9, 2014

Overall, All-New X-Men #29 was the end of a fight that brought about some good changes in characters who needed that push. This book should always be about the development of the Original X-Men and the other younger mutants they interact with. That is what we got here and who knows where Bendis takes things from here be it connecting to The Last Will And Testament of Charles Xavier, but hopefully the focus doesn't change from what is most important to the readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
All-New X-Men #37

Mar 12, 2015

All-New X-Men #37 is a full package which gives us the character development from two characters who have fallen to the background as of late. They have ways to go as individuals still, though after this issue you want to see more of them tackling this as a group seeing as they are both strong heroes who overcome their obstacles.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Amazing X-Men (2013) #1

Nov 7, 2013

Good start though you do hope things start to pick up a bit from here. I do feel that a bit too much time was wasted showing us how the school is normally and we do kind of have an idea of how the school runs by now. Firestar should hopefully be a good new addition to the team though I think there was an easier way of bringing her into the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Amazing X-Men (2013) Annual #1

Jun 4, 2014

Amazing X-Men Annual #1 is the Storm focused story that fans deserved. Not the greatest, but it captured everything you like about Storm and the progress she's made up to this very point. If there was any reason to say that she was one of the most powerful members of the X-Men, Nero certainly made that certain.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
America Chavez: Made in the USA #1

Mar 3, 2021

All in all, America Chavez Made in USA #1 is a book worth giving a shot. You are going to walk away anxious to get to know this hero in ways you never did before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
America's Got Powers #6

Jul 11, 2013

Being the second to last issue of this book, everything has led to that final moment and you can only hope that it delivers on what will be the defining moment of the story. What comes next is something you want to look forward to and the best way for this story to end is for Ross to turn that dial up and make everything that has happened up to this point mean something.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Amethyst #1

Feb 26, 2020

If you're looking for fantasy adventure in your pull-list? Amethyst #1 should be a great addition as a book that will offer mystery, adventure, and exploration. Three things that are surely enough to give you just the fantastical experience you need.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Amethyst #2

Mar 25, 2020

Credit where it is due that this is a book which knows how to deliver. So far this has been an adventure full of emotion, discovery, and even a bit of fun along the way. Certainly an experience you are going to get anywhere else in the DC Universe. Amethyst #2 was satisfying for everything we had to look forward to from it, and how it all further added to the investment we have in the stakes which have now been raised.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Amethyst #3

Jun 10, 2020

Overall, Amethyst #3 took advantage of everything you would expect from a girl Amethyst's age who faces a race against time, and little room for compromise. A lot can go right under the right circumstances, though so much can go wrong too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Amethyst #4

Jul 22, 2020

This story started out as simply a mission for Amy to save her people, but right now it has evolved into something much more. Amethyst #4 re-established what is at stake for Amy herself. The deeper she goes into this conspiracy, the more she needs to grow in order to handle things better than she has before.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Amethyst #6

Dec 16, 2020

I was overall satisfied with the conclusion of Amethyst #6. This book right here is an underrated gem from the DC Universe, and I couldn't help but find myself hopefully that some day this book sees a continuation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Angel & Faith Season 10 #1

Apr 2, 2014

Overall this was a good start to big things which are in store for Angel & Faith. Of course it is possible to have that fear that the balance between both halves of the story can fall into question, though for now things are looking good for the future. My only question that comes out of this is whether Angel & Faith will have more ties to Buffy, or if it will stand on its own as something that might not call upon the need to know what occurs between each.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Angel & Faith Season 10 #2

May 7, 2014

Angel & Faith Season 10 #2 continues to stay true to who these characters are while sending them on different paths. When going between Buffy and Angel & Faith, the way the two contrast is handled very well. You know they are two different stories in the same world, yet at the same time offer you something emotionally that the other doesn't. Just in Angel & Faith you have a contrast in tones which allows you to get a lot more out of a single issue than you'd expect. Angel and Faith are loners yes, but both have the heart to carry their own stories. This issue is a good representation of that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Angel & Faith Season 10 #3

Jun 4, 2014

Angel & Faith Season 10 #3 really plays on the trust that Angel and Faith lack and fail for that lack of it. Nothing too big has happened so far, but a genuine build up like we've seen which stays true to their characters is what's best for the story. I do expect something big to come soon, though hopefully that happens within a pacing that we can agree on. Nothing is going to come easy for these two and the excitement comes from how they handle their situations.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Angel & Faith Season 10 #4

Jul 2, 2014

Angel & Faith Season 10 #4 is the end of Angel and Faith questioning the new path they have taken, and start going along for the ride. Not only did they feel new to their environments, we did too and that is the best way to get us into this season. You definitely don't need to know everything that happens before this season and there's enough reason to get into it if you just know the type of people both Angel and Faith are.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Angel & Faith Season 10 #5

Aug 6, 2014

This issue of Angel & Faith is the start of something new which has a lot of potential if it capitalizes on the twist we are given at the end of the previous issue. There is obviously something more to this seen on the surface and it only takes someone like Amy stepping into the picture to signal that others are taking advantage of this new world they live in. In general this is a good transition in Angel's side of the story that both gives him more meaning and explores where he is at mentally/emotionally at this moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Angel & Faith Season 10 #6

Sep 3, 2014

In general things are looking good for Angel & Faith with this issues conclusion. Faith has a new-found motivation and role, while Angel is confronted by yet another old frenemy. We don't know what the future holds for either character and that's great. They're forging a new path for themselves, and it's all about surviving the experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Angel & Faith Season 10 #7

Oct 1, 2014

This story arc so far is the best time to get into Angel & Faith if you are a fan of either character. A lot more has been established as to what you can expect from these two and Victor Gischler isn't afraid to go over-the-top into the supernatural while keeping one foot planted on reality to show growth with them. There has been a lot of character development from season 10, and it is for the better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Angel & Faith Season 10 #8

Nov 5, 2014

Angel & Faith: Season 10 #8 is still making progress on both sides of the story while upping the stakes at the same time. Both Angel and Faith find themselves in a bid and it's all about what they can do in a pinch that will determine how they walk out of their respective situations.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Angel & Faith Season 10 #9

Dec 3, 2014

Angel & Faith: Season 10 #9 hits you with big surprises from Amy and the last person you expected to be behind what happened to Reilly and his squad. Leaving you anticipating what comes next when it seems power is what drives the plot on both ends which can only go so wrong as with most who seek it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel & Faith Season 10 #11

Feb 4, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #11 concludes having a lot going on and much to look forward to now that everyone is in one place. Who knows what comes next, though one thing is certain which is expect the unexpected in Magic Town as always.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Angel & Faith Season 10 #12

Mar 4, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #12 is a solid issue that puts the focus on two unlikely character returns in the series. It is simply enjoyable that you can go into Angel & Faith knowing that it is not always going to be about those two specifically, and much of your favorite characters have just a good of a chance as anyone else to possibly make an appearance. One that matters which is most important.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Angel & Faith Season 10 #13

Apr 1, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #13 is the start of big things to come. What was pretty much inevitable Victor Gischler wasted no time getting into when the urgency is met. Anything can happen from here when what everyone has been trying to avoid blows up right in their faces at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Angel & Faith Season 10 #14

May 6, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #14 is one of the better issues from the series when you see what happens when these different people start acting like a team. It almost feels nostalgic even though you know nothing is really permanent when it comes to Angel, Faith, and all the rest involved.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel & Faith Season 10 #15

Jun 3, 2015

Be it Buffy or Angel & Faith you never get bored with a good fight against abused magic. There is a lot to be creative with when it comes to magic, and that was properly taken advantage of by the art team. What's notable about these witches are that they aren't powerful or any less human than the average. It's easy to tell they are up to no good. They come off as the kind who dabble in it and it shows by the way they apply magic to their own needs. That manipulation is seen by the fear they instilled in those they sought to control. Will Conrad never fails in capturing those human features that bring a character to life. Especially when it comes to those such as Spike who he gets the smug look just right. Beyond this the quality of the artwork is consistent which is all you could really ask for with a story more grounded.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Angel & Faith Season 10 #16

Jul 1, 2015

Visually what appeals the most so far about Angel & Faith is that no matter who has taken over for art aside from Will Conrad, it has always looked as if it is all the same person. You can see the differences in style, but nothing drastic that would take you out of the story. Which means the quality is there with cleans pencils, shading, and character structure. It is nice when multiple people can share the same level of understanding of what the characters should look like compared to their tv counterparts. It was the more normal things that stood out in this issue that grab your attention first. This is Faith's story and those little things you take notice of that Cliff Richards captures like the picture of her and Giles, the way she fit into that gym teacher uniform, or just the way she reacts to Brandt needing her help as the next best thing when Angel is gone. Those things means a lot when you add them up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Angel & Faith Season 10 #17

Aug 5, 2015

A crossover story that has managed to be something completely different from what you thought it would be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel & Faith Season 10 #18

Sep 2, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #18 was a great conclusion to this Fred and Faith adventure. It's different, we got to see a favorite character from the past. And the way this story arc ended there will be more to this down the road. This was worth the read as a story you don't necessarily had to read Buffy to enjoy or understand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Angel & Faith Season 10 #19

Oct 7, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #19 is a solid start to this new story arc despite being a fast read. Angel, Faith and the rest know what they're up against, the stakes have been set, and again anything can happen which will make for a thrilling story not knowing what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel & Faith Season 10 #20

Nov 4, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #20 is intense and it is because the decision to take advantage of an exciting character with so much more to her than what is seen on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel & Faith Season 10 #21

Dec 2, 2015

Angel & Faith Season 10 #21 overall escalated this situation in terms of threat and personal stake in the fight. Things are only going to gt worse before they get any better, and it will be exciting to see how they come together to overcome everything Archaeus throws their way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel & Faith Season 10 #22

Jan 6, 2016

Angel & Faith Season 10 #22 was a plan put into motion with an uncertain outcome. That classic good versus bad moment that always makes for a classic climax and end to an arc. Like other confrontations this story arc ends on a note which teases what's to come next. There has been that statue which holds value for some mysterious reason and now Archaeus finds it in his possession after so long. Could it turn the tides for him? Who knows.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel & Faith Season 10 #23

Feb 3, 2016

Angel & Faith Season 10 #23 was a fairly quick read, but it achieved the purpose of getting us hyped for some big stuff to come with the next issue. A fight you don't want to miss for sure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Angel & Faith Season 10 #24

Mar 2, 2016

Things can get worse or they can surprisingly get better from here in Angel & Faith. Though one thing can be assured which is that no matter how this ends, there will be something we don't see coming till the moment comes.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Angel & Faith Season 10 #25

Apr 6, 2016

Angel & Faith Season 10 #25 brings to a close this chapter in their lives. Hopefully with the somewhat recent announcement that there will be a Buffy The Vampire Slayer season 11, will also come a Angel & Faith Season 11 in the near future. This isn't one of those series you want to let slip because the quality was always there from the very first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel & Faith Season 9 #10

Jan 7, 2015

Angel & Faith #10 is the end to another chapter in the lives of Angel and Faith which shows more growth for them as individuals, while also providing a little more purpose along the way. For Faith in particular as we await what the future has in store for her as she makes her way back to Magic Town.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #1

May 29, 2019

Angel #1 gives you hope for what this re-imagining of the vampire with a soul has in store for us. As they said, this is a brand new, modern take on one of the most iconic vampires in pop culture, and every opportunity was taken to attract both new readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #2

Jun 26, 2019

If you weren't sold by the first issue of Angel, this second issue gives you much more confidence in investing where this book takes us. Some things are the same, though equally there is just as much new about Angel's story. If you thought it wouldn't be the same dark tale, they also made sure we knew that the dangers will hit you just as hard.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Angel (2019) #3

Jul 31, 2019

Angel #3 was a fast read, but it got us to a good place in this story. From here, we got a very good idea as to what's in store for us investing in this book. They are very much sticking to everything we know about the history of Angel, while at the same time throwing in their own unique twists which make this both updated and refreshing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel (2019) #4

Aug 28, 2019

As the first story arc ends for Angel, it is safe to say that this is a book to have faith in for its ability to tread new territory while still giving us everything that we love about Angel's corner of the Buffyverse. Angel #4 succeeded in doing this and at the same time laying the foundation for our hyped event of the year, .

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #5

Sep 25, 2019

Overall Angel #5, or the prelude to Hellmouth for Angel, walked a fine line between pushing this story into the big crossover event, and taking Angel through that next step on his end towards closing the door in Sunnydale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #6

Oct 23, 2019

There was a lot of things to look forward to from Angel #6, and it was a thrill that this part of the tie-in would focus on everyone else left behind from Angel's world. This is one of the more character driven issues of the series, and managed to also satisfy in some quick action which assured us that Fred and Gunn have just as much to offer as new additions to this re-imagining of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #7

Nov 27, 2019

Angel #7 was another worthwhile issue that proves how everything going on within the Hellmouth isn't all that's important. Angel left behind two pieces to a big puzzle who are out in the world and getting into their own kind of trouble. The kind which fortunately brought us to a character we haven't seen in a LONG time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Angel (2019) #8

Dec 18, 2019

Another tie-in issue bites the dust and continues making us as interested in what goes on outside of the Hellmouth, as we are in what is unfolding within. Angel #8 marks the start of something exciting when Spike offers his own brand of heroics which varies so differently from the gloomy vampire. This could go right, or it could go very wrong. Only time will tell!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #9

Feb 26, 2020

From one situation right into the next. It doesn't seem like there will be a dull day for this team. Especially now that they have the charismatic Spike now joining the party. For how long? Who knows! But let's all really let it sink in that we have gotten to a point where we are actually picking up a book titled Angel & Spike.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel (2019) #10

Mar 25, 2020

If there was any reservations towards the changes in direction to this book, I would say that by the end of Angel & Spike #10 you can feel more confident in seeing that nothing major has changed. This is still a personable story, still action-packed, and just as mysterious for all the things which can hit out of nowhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Angel (2019) #11

Jun 24, 2020

The events of Angel & Spike #11 puts a lot into perspective in terms of the direction this plot is taking. The threats are becoming more clear, the players involved in this current battle, even the things these character will have to do to stand against them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel (2019) #12

Jul 22, 2020

After Hellmouth, it's a bold new world for these heroes. The events of Angel & Spike #12 proved that much to be true, and much more. This is Wolfram & Hart like we have never seen them before, and it makes you wonder how they are going to deal with an enemy they didn't take seriously enough till now.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel (2019) #16

Nov 25, 2020

All in all, I think maybe this book was always going to reach an end like this. Not the exact end that this landed on, but a wrap-up in general because this book didn't really leave you with the same sense of investment as the last Angel series did. Different is good, but you have to also gun for different that you can sell readers on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel Season 11 #1

Jan 18, 2017

Angel Season 11 #1 takes us into uncharted territory. Who would have guessed time travel of all thing is something we would experience now? Definitely an adventure you would look forward to knowing that there might be an inevitable meeting with the very reason why Angel's past is so shameful to him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Angel Season 11 #2

Feb 15, 2017

Angel Season 11 continues on a solid path. I admit I wasn't entirely sold on where we were going after the first issue, but this second issue has me strapped in for whatever comes next. Illyria was the perfect character to build interest in and the results are exactly what we look for when desiring the lack of restriction Angel's corner of the Buffyverse opens us to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Angel Season 11 #3

Mar 15, 2017

Overall Angel Season 11 #3 makes some bold moves as the next issue brings us to the conclusion of the first story arc. This is character exploration that we were treated to open up season 11 to. Angel is cool, but it also goes without saying that it is those he surrounds himself with who keep things interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Angel Season 11 #4

Apr 19, 2017

It took some time to roll with this first arc, but now it is safe to say that we still have two good halves of the Buffyverse going strong into their new seasons. Angel Season 11 #4 wrapped up the first leg of this brand new adventure. Taking us deep into the heart of a character you wouldn't have expected to understand this well until now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel Season 11 #5

May 24, 2017

Angel Season 11 #5 treads some dangerous waters as running into Angelus and Darla is way worse than the idea of running into Illyria during her full-on Old One days. The story started off slowly, though at the same time it was a fast read when everything comes down to retrieving the artifact before Angelus and Darla, or from them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Angel Season 11 #6

Jun 21, 2017

With Angel Season 11 #6, Angel has to escape Angelus, keep Fred safe, and figure out what to do with the jewel-like beetle. That is a lot going on and a lot to handle all at once, but for all this going on in a short amount of time it was exciting. I've had my skepticism about this story and the risks taken, though each issue they are proving that it is all about the steps you take to think outside the box in approach.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Angel Season 11 #11

Nov 22, 2017

With the conclusion of Angel Season 11 #11, I did find myself just a bit disappointed that there are still so many questions and very few answers to engage you in this story. It feels like we've been going through an adventure without any real direction. I want to know exactly what is at stake by confronting this threat, what exactly IT is, and what started all of this in the first place. I hope that the final issue will address that and much more if we are to be satisfied with what we have gotten out of this twelve-issue season.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Angel Season 11 #12

Dec 20, 2017

Because of who I am, I stuck with this to see it to the end. However, Angel Season 11 #12 turned out to be lackluster for what you expect from a story coming out of the Buffyverse. With season 11 you looked forward to that next big thing after Magic Town, and an adventure through time that ultimately neglected itself in the end wasn't entirely worth the wait. It was a risky move to fall on time travel and it did no pay off. This all started with Angel tormented by memories of his past which linked to a big bad coming in the future. Though what was the big bad exactly? What was there memorable about what Angel did to stop this big bad?

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
Animal Man (2011) #20

May 2, 2013

Compared to the previous books, the artwork was very weak. The difference between the cover art which was vibrant, and then the interior art which came off dull was significant. Much of the appeal was already lost with the story, and the artwork left little to keep you going.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ant-Man (2020) #1

Feb 5, 2020

If you are on the fence about Ant-Man #1? Go for it! This first issue was entertainment value that you need in your pull-list. What are you going to lose having fun with the one hero who will show you more than most that the little guy shouldn't be overlooked?

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Anthem (2019) #1

Feb 20, 2019

For the sake of collector's value, that is probably the best way that I could recommend picking up Anthem #1. They probably could have chosen a story that better eased you into the story that would begin February 22nd. That might change with the second issue, but this is what we have right now. This might actually be one of those books where you will have to read it twice once you actually play the game to better appreciate what unfolds within these pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Aquaman (2016) #25

Jun 21, 2017

Aquaman #25 was worth the wait t get into this new story arc, and to have one of the best artists you could ask for on a book like this. This is a familiar story with unique qualities to it. I will say it didn't quite feel like an anniversary issue, but that didn't stop it from being a great issue in general. Underworld should be worth seeing through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Aquaman (2016) #40

Sep 19, 2018

If you wanted action, heart, and the meaning of sacrifice, Aquaman #40 was the full package. Normally a story like this might be where they pull the plug on Atlantis on the surface, but I think we all walk away happy that this was not the case. At the end of the day this story served as a perfect representation of the human fear of foreign enemies. What do we do when something seems like it surpasses us in power? We unfortunately try to nuke it. There's your daily dose of reality in comic form.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Archer & Armstrong #0.2014

Feb 5, 2014

In the end this was a well constructed tale that sets up Archer and Armstrong to go up against Bloodshot and H.A.R.D. Corps when Mission Improbable begins. Again showing just how big this world is becoming when you could see both teams interact. That is the one thing you should take out of this most and when they send HA.R.D. Corps after you, that means you are a big threat. Just another reason why you may want to pick up this book, and stay tuned for that event.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Archer & Armstrong #19

Apr 2, 2014

This was another solid issue of Archer & Armstrong being on part 3. From the way this issue ends, I have high hopes for the future of the Valiant Universe just for the fact that they are properly able to lead from one book to the next. We'll have to see what the conclusion of Mission: Improbable has in store for them, but things are still only going to get worse before they get any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Archie (2015) #2

Aug 20, 2015

Overall a great transition into the second issue for Archie and proves this creative team knows their approach and direction to satisfy those who have given this series a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Archie (2015) #3

Sep 30, 2015

Archie #3 is yet again another exciting issue in this all-new series that reinvigorates the story for a new generation as well as the old. Veronica has made her entrance and things are taking more of a unique turn than before.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Archie (2015) #4

Nov 25, 2015

Archie #4 gives us the answers we wanted though the execution could have used a bit more work. The moment itself was great, though most before that didn't carry the build up of anticipation needed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Armor Hunters #1

Jun 11, 2014

It is also worth mentioning that the sneak previews at the end for Armor Hunters: Harbinger #1 and Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #1 were great additions to this issue. After what we've seen from this first issue of Armor Hunters it is good to have an idea as to how this will affect the other books connected to it. They prove to have potential and the connections they make to the world around them have a lot to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Armor Hunters #2

Jul 9, 2014

Armor Hunters #2 gives us a vulnerable Earth set against impossible odds, and put into a situation in which they will need the best of the best to rise to the occasion once more. The pieces have been put into place and the armor hunters have made their big play in response, what comes next is something we shouldn't want to miss as the war escalates.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Armor Hunters #3

Aug 13, 2014

As this issue of Armor Hunters concludes the world continues to descend into pandemonium. The fate of everyone is just about up in the air right now and anything goes when the fight is now at ground level.Valiant's summer crossover sensation rockets toward a climax so big it's going to register on the Richter scale. That is no exaggeration when it's doubtful anyone will walk out of this the same as when it began.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Armor Hunters #4

Sep 24, 2014

The summer's biggest crossover event went out with a big bang and Armor Hunters has changed the way the Valiant Universe progresses as a whole. Heroes are now acknowledged, powers are real to the public, threats beyond this world are real. The possibilities are now endless now that these characters can be who they want to be, and who the world needs them to be when the call comes for heroes to save the day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Armor Hunters: Aftermath #1

Oct 1, 2014

Armor Hunters: Aftermath #1 is the epilogue that Armor Hunters deserved for such a monumental crossover event. Robert Venditti understands these character very well and where they need to go from here. X-O Manowar, Harbinger Renegades, Unity, Bloodshot, all of them are taking a different direction from here which you want to anticipate for the knowledge of what's next for them as the new frontline of defense for the people of Earth

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #1

Jul 23, 2014

Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #1 stands on its own as one focused on Bloodshot, while having a smooth transition from Armor Hunters. Joe Harris has a good grasp on what makes Bloodshot tick and wastes no time making sure there is progression without losing us to what can be covered in the other books tying into this event. As a mini series this is worth picking up if you are either a fan of Bloodshot or just want to know all that goes on in Armor Hunters without missing details.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #2

Aug 20, 2014

Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #2 gave us a little bit of story, and a whole lot of action. Joe Harris brings out the best in these characters while showing what they are capable of when the pressure is on. We'll see what happens next as Bloodshot's far from done, these feels like only a taste of what Bloodshot has to offer the world and M.E.R.O..

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #3

Sep 17, 2014

Armor Hunters: Bloodshot #3 is a tie-in worth picking up because if you're invested in the Valiant Universe, then you want to know what is happening in every corner of the world. What happens in this issue has great relevance towards that upcoming final issue of Armor Hunters when Malgam is not only a big player in the conflict, but a liability that needed to be removed from the board. You read it to see what new tricks Bloodshot has up his sleeve, but you stay for the action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Armor Hunters: Harbinger #2

Aug 20, 2014

Armor Hunters: Harbinger #2 answers the question of what can possibly go wrong when kinds enter a war they can't comprehend anymore than the adults. Even “professionals” make mistakes. Things aren't looking good in Mexico and what beast has been unleashed, aside from the hunters just may prove to be more than the bargained for. At the end of the day, Armor Hunters: Harbinger is a title you can pick up without being too invested in the Armor Hunters event. It's fairly self-contained and you care a bit more for what's in store for these heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Armor Hunters: Harbinger #3

Sep 10, 2014

There isn't a single tie-in I could say you want to overlook. Armor Hunters: Harbinger is one of those you want to be reading if you find yourself invested in the Armor Hunters event. A self-contained story that manages to get a lot of characterization for this group in only 3 issues. For three issuesArmor Hunters: Harbinger is worth picking up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Asgardians of the Galaxy #1

Sep 5, 2018

Asgardians of the Galaxy #1 was a delightful surprise. Overall a strong debut for a Marvel book, which is a big accomplishment. As I said above, this was a motley crew thrown together, and the fun comes from the fact that Asgardians know the battle in front of them and nothing else. Throw in an enemy who challenges them in new and interesting ways and you are in for one heck of a war for the fate of the galaxy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Astonishing X-Men (2004) #61

Apr 19, 2013

In this issue you felt the stakes raised higher than they ever could. They lost many friends, allies, and had to cope with it faster than they could in order to do what had to be done when it was all or nothing. Many of these heroes you would not have taken too seriously yet in this very situation they were able to step up and become someone admirable to an extent.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Astonishing X-Men (2004) #62

May 10, 2013

It's a good change for the story to come and you can tell how intense this story could potentially become with Iceman being an omega class mutant to add. The fact that all his ex-girlfriends suddenly emerged seems a bit risky and questionable, but we can only hope there is a good reason for it. Maybe as the cover shows, there is another side of him that he isn't aware of. Mystique's involvement is questionable as well given her stance on the X-Men in All New X-Men. The only part that seemed unnecessary was the short bit with Thor, unless he's to to be important to the story later on. Overall it seems that this issue was built on potential scenarios that would or will take place as time progresses.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Astonishing X-Men (2017) #1

Jul 19, 2017

Around this time you would normally look for that one obscure X-book. From this line-up of X-books I would have said Generation X before this week, but now I would say Astonishing X-Men is that book. Not a bad thing either. Not only do they bring together an unlikely team, but they are brought together to face down one of the most dangerous villains for the X-Men. Their reaction to this person pulling the strong is the same as ours.

View Issue       View Full Review
5
Avengers & X-Men: Axis #1

Oct 8, 2014

It hurts to say it but Avengers & X-Men: Axis #1 just isn't worth $4.99. They have to change the direction of this story with the next issue if they want readers to care to continue with this story. That's if they haven't given up already because a book like this which will be shipping out that fast a month needs to deliver in the very first issue, Avengers & X-Men: Axis #1 did not. There may be those few tie-ins as usual that surprise you, though the main story just doesn't seem to scream buy me. In fact those who are already annoyed with how consistent events are thrown at us may now have that fuel to keep pushing their reasons against it with some justification.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Avengers (2012) #10

Apr 25, 2013

Weaver did excellent with this issue between his shading, inking and the general expressions of pain and fear throughout that was consistent.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers (2012) #11

May 9, 2013

In the end what we take out of this is that Shang-Chi has now learned to adapt, and adapting for him is to know that he can rely on the use of weapons in combat. Tradition is always something he follows, yet even that can change. It was interesting in the end to find out that with his own fight he found out A.I.M.'s true intentions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Avengers (2012) #12

May 24, 2013

But back to the message of the story this issue tries to convey. Life is short, and the only way to preserve it is with hope. Those like Hyperion and Thor have seen the beginning and end of life, stripped away so fast with nothing to cling to. They want to show these kids that they have a purpose even though they are not like everyone else. They have the opportunity to cherish life and answer a higher calling. In the end it's all about virtue and understanding the gifts you were given with others lack. Hickman succeeded in making something meaningful out of a situation that seemed to be grim and that is something we all expect from him. This book has been built upon morals and Hickman portrays this in every possible way from beginning to end. The biggest shocker is the sudden appearance of the Evolutionary, someone who would gain a lot from this kind of situation. It's a great twist that will lead to something exciting to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Avengers (2012) #13

Jun 6, 2013

As usual the art is the one thing that stands out most in this book. Between the realistic nature of every character spotlighted, and the back and forth between vibrant colors and those that are a bit faded for different effects.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Avengers (2012) #14

Jun 20, 2013

It has been a complex story, layered with mystery and that is what makes it exciting. The art and style of the book again has been stunning, hasn't been anything less since the start of this book. I honestly cannot just stop and look at their facial features and not feel as though this is real.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Avengers (2012) #15

Jul 4, 2013

Overall, like I said the book sure does create more questions than answers, yet that is what keeps you engaged in it. You want to know what the root of the problem is and see how they handle every obstacle which is thrown at them. Aside from this the art is again just as awesome as it has been since the start of the book and that is the one thing you have to give it credit for, having the combination of great writers and artists.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Avengers (2012) #16

Jul 18, 2013

Despite these minor concerns, it's hard to say that what we do see and understand isn't good enough. It certainly is because what is going on right now is something which none of them can comprehend and they're working against the clock to fight a threat which proves to be out of their league. What will be the redeeming factor right now is how the Avengers manage to fend off this new foe. What we like to see from the Avengers is how they overcome obstacles such as this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Avengers (2012) #17

Aug 8, 2013

As the Prelude to Infinity, the team set up was the best way to end it. Sure it was predictable as to who they were going to recruit in the end, but just the fact that they did shows progression. The one fear for this book had always been the pacing, but Hickman surely has proven that he is capable of handling this storyline which also managed to unravel itself as it was filled with mystery in the beginning.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Avengers (2012) #18

Aug 22, 2013

A solid issue heading into the war. You see the stakes, you see the cooperation and everything is finally being put into motion. We all knew that heading into this there was little chance of success and the best thing Hickman could do was deliver on this. Making this alliance which is very rare look as though they are taking the fight to the builders and strip that first victory away from them in an instant. One third of their fleet is a lot in just one issue, so we'll have to see where that slight cliffhanger leads us.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Avengers (2012) #19

Sep 12, 2013

Great issue in which you aren't distracted by the fighting or finding it necessary to feel drawn into this war. There's just so much packed into this event and even if you find it overwhelming, its chaotic fun. In the sense that they are all facing a threat which has forced them all in a situation in which they fear it may be their last stand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers (2012) #20

Sep 26, 2013

In general you have to appreciate how direct this storyline is. Not once does it every divert from the issue at hand, and it manages to throw surprises at you at every turn. The every end you would not have seen coming. Given everything that has occurred, and the pride of those involved, what Cap decides as their next move is one that will have a big impact on this event.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Avengers (2012) #21

Oct 17, 2013

Avengers #21 is that change, that defining moment for this story that is so grand in scope. Funny that even as things are reaching an end, Hickman manages to still hit you with more questions. What is it that Captain Universe lost? Was that her speaking? Or her host? So many questions left and we will be left wondering till the conclusion of this story knowing that this issue ended with things going from bad to worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Avengers (2012) #22

Oct 31, 2013

Solid issue, though this would have been the appropriate time to have said things were dragging on a bit. When coming from the events of the last issue of Infinity, you want to maintain some of that same momentum and it completely dropped here. There was a sense of urgency to stop Thanos now, yet that was it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers (2016) #677

Jan 24, 2018

Through the unfolding events of Avengers #677, this was yet another satisfying chapter to No Surrender. We may not see the full picture just yet, but we know enough to understand exactly what is at stake here. Well maybe all that is needed to know is at stake when two warring groups decide Earth should be a playground for their battles against one another. Nonetheless, next week holds interest for these heroes racing against time to find out who is behind this madness.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Avengers (2016) #678

Jan 31, 2018

The first Avenger does indeed fall by the end of Avengers #678, and honestly? I'm not so sure that I could feel all too bothered by it. Not completely in a bad way because that hero who pays the ultimate price in turn will help the others better understand the game. I'm just hoping that these obstacles removed from play will allow for more focus on what matters to these Avengers who need to get it together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers (2016) #682

Feb 28, 2018

One Avenger would gamble everything to save thousands, and it was one heck of a gamble from the unlikeliest hero. Avengers #682 continues to prove that you can have a big action story like No Surrender and still find genuine balance through character development and exploration. Last week it was refreshing to further our understanding of Voyager, and the feeling was no different when Red Wolf and Hawkeye jump into the fray.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Avengers (2016) #683

Mar 8, 2018

Expect the unexpected. I think that sums up No Surrender in a nutshell so far. There's something to love about an Avengers story where you just can't predict how this will end. Avengers #683 was full of shock, yet at the same time it was filled with the heart that reminds us that this is a superhero story at the core.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers (2016) #684

Mar 15, 2018

Bruce Banner is not home, and neither was Voyager ever. Just when things were looking up for the Avengers, the game gets flipped right on its head through two agents of chaos. With the events of Avengers #684, the dial has been cranked to 11 when the Avengers really need to start asking themselves how badly they want to win this game or save the world, because someone may not walk away from this in one piece.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Avengers (2016) #685

Mar 22, 2018

This was indeed the fight of the Avenger's lives as they are facing dangers from all sides. Nothing new for the Avengers, but this really is it if they can't pull a rabbit out of their hat. Avengers #685 cranked the dial to eleven when this was the time where a hero really has to ask how important their life is to save the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Avengers (2016) #686

Mar 29, 2018

When the dust has settled, the game ended in a way that you couldn't have predicted. When it comes to an Avengers event, it is sad to say that a lot of the time you can see the finish line before you get there. This story, plot, and the events of Avengers #686 prove that with the right hands on deck you can still dig into that well of creativity for something we haven't seen yet. At the end of this issue there was no doubting that the end of one terror would only bring the start of another.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers (2016) #687

Apr 4, 2018

Avengers #687 was another great issue where the character writing stood out more than anything else. An event story never has to be one big action to the next. The story is worthwhile when every action has a response and reaction such as what these heroes and Voyager did. Having a moment to sort trough your feelings never hurts in the longrun.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Avengers (2016) #689

Apr 18, 2018

Avengers #689 was an exciting exploration of what it means to be an Avenger. Some creative teams will miss that mark, but not this one. I don't think they have ever once forgotten to capture the significance and that is what has made No Surrender so captivating. Ask for the full package of an event, and what you have is this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Avengers (2016) #690

Apr 25, 2018

I must say, I don't know how you can top this. There will always be a better Avengers story to come, but honestly this one had everything you could have wanted from a superhero story. Nothing intricate or too smart either, because that is not the only way to go big. The action was thrilling, the heroes/villains were engaging, and every twist and turn kept us guessing till the bitter end. Avengers #690 wrapped this up very well through substance over everything else. Overall, this was a heartwarming farewell to another era of the Avengers when next week move on to the next formation.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Avengers (2018) #39

Dec 9, 2020

I definitely expected a bit more from Avengers #39, but even then I would rather judge this story in particular for what unfolds in the present. Rather than for what happened in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Avengers (2018) #40

Dec 31, 2020

In the end, I would say that the events of Avengers #40 made me want to see more of what this story has in store. You just never know when it comes to the Phoenix if the story will impress, or flop. Everything comes down to execution and the levels of excitement you can generate using this entity once more to fuel a plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers (2018) #41

Jan 20, 2021

If at the end of the first chapter you were still on the fence? I would say that Avengers #41 does much more to give you a reason to invest in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Avengers Arena #8

Apr 27, 2013

As usual the art remains consistent and in a way that captures the detail of both the characters and the environments.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers Arena #9

May 9, 2013

What has been delivered so far is that it's not just murdering of young adult heroes. There is a story and a reason for everything occurring which as we can tell will be unravel as time progresses.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers Arena #10

Jun 7, 2013

What you come to enjoy from this series is the amount of detail put into the environment by Burchielli. And everything pops out be it injuries, like Nico's, and how well he makes it look like a game overall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Avengers Arena #11

Jun 27, 2013

Overall this is a book that I urge many readers out there to pick up. Never mind who will die or who you might never see again. Care for those that get that treatment and chance to prove who they really are when the opportunity presents itself. The layout of the story remains arcade-like, the art makes you feel that emotion poured into the story, and in the end it keeps you engaged which is what counts most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers Arena #12

Jul 11, 2013

With that said, I do have to wonder what Arcade has been doing this whole time. In most adaptations of this concept, the person in charge was seen more often than Arcade has been and it feels a bit off. Nothing that has actually held the story back, but it's something that you still think about when he finally appears after 11 issues. Aside from this it was a solid issue and conclusion to a first act. The fighting definitely felt as if they were in a game, and it was nice to finally see one that wasn't one-sided. The art has remained consistent and I really can't wait to see what's in store next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Avengers Arena #13

Aug 15, 2013

While nothing big to transition Avengers Arena into Boss Level, it was a solid issue that addressed something about the story plot which made all the difference about its direction going into the next story arc. Loose ends were cut on Arcade's end and with that out-of-the-way, the game can continue. The art in this issue was much better, something I would have preferred to see during any of the previous issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers Arena #14

Aug 29, 2013

Great start to Boss Level and you can see that Dennis Hopeless is ready with his finger on that trigger. It's coming down to the wire and it is emphasized that we know there will be losses and the heroes know there will be losses as well. If the story continues at this pace, even picking it up just a bit to carry to the end, this would be an excellent way to show those who aren't reading it not to dismiss it for a copy of Battle Royale.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Avengers Arena #15

Sep 12, 2013

Great issue and what you'd expect from this book as we approach the conclusion. There will be loss and a lot of drama, that much has been delivered and what we should have in store for us being Boss Level. Now we can only question if they can all stay together and find a way out or turn against each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers Arena #16

Oct 11, 2013

Aside from this there were some inconsistencies with the art, even though overall it was clean with bold colors and inking. This still doesn't stop Avengers Arena from having a set up to the finale we have been anticipating. Who will die? Who will be the hero of this story? Will any of them be the same who survive? All reasons to read this book and want to get to that ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Avengers Arena #17

Nov 16, 2013

Here we have seen the most substance this book can offer. We've seen them all at their best, but now we see them at their worst. It has always been about survival, and when it comes down to the final days that doesn't change. The story progression has felt so natural up to this point and you just love how much of a role Apex plays into this. Though her fate is known, we still know that as that one character who actually played the game, she played it well. There's so much in store for this final issue and it seems that it won't be ending on a happy note.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Avengers Arena #18

Nov 27, 2013

Avengers Arena is one of the most underrated of the Marvel NOW! titles. It doesn't get the credit it deserves and surely is entitled to it, you should give it a read and you surely won't regret it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Avengers Undercover #1

Mar 12, 2014

There is so much potential that you see from this first issue of Avengers Undercover. We've seen the damage, we see that conflict of interest between them considering how Avengers Arena mentally affected them, and we see just where this story is heading with a clear direction. We know now why they are infiltrating the Masters of Evil, and we now know the risk. So from here we will see how the longer the teens spend undercover, the more they descend into darkness, and as they start to build relationships with these multi-layered criminals, the line between good and evil blurs. The risk will always be that getting exposed will spell their end. Knowing Dennis Hopeless is writing we can expect that no punches will be pulled when action calls.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Avengers Undercover #2

Apr 9, 2014

A solid issue for Avengers Undercover. Questions are being answered while leaving room for more to be asked along the way. There is a real stake in the situation they find themselves in and it's good to have those defining choices forced upon them at such an early stage of the book rather than drag it out. I want to now see just what happens when they reach that point of no return, and who will actually be able to go against the temptations that already seem to have gotten the better of a few.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Avengers Undercover #3

Apr 23, 2014

Overall Avengers Undercover is going in the right direction so far. It's not as if I'd doubt that things can only get better from here, but there is always that risk when it comes to working with younger heroes. Dennis Hopeless knows what he's doing with them and what he wants from them, that much is what makes this one of the books from Marvel involving younger heroes a must read. Still remains easy to get into as well if you haven't read Avengers Undercover.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers Undercover #4

May 14, 2014

Avengers Undercover #4 ends on a note where you can certainly agree with what is being done for these characters and the story itself. Hopeless obviously cares for these characters and it shows when there's so much depth stacked over each of them as time goes by. They could have all fallen one-dimensional and yet their interactions with each other and the world help to shape who they might become with the right or wrong influence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Avengers Undercover #5

Jun 11, 2014

Avengers Undercover #5 is where anything goes from here on out. The issue ends with open-ended questions, many of which will lead them down a path of either redemption or evil. Sure that could possibly lead to some changes from these young superhumans that could be agreed or disagreed upon, but in the end they are thinking about their place in the world which counts most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Avengers Undercover #6

Jun 25, 2014

With how Avengers Undercover #6, anything can happen from there though nonetheless one course of action will be bad. We are left with Cammi's fate unknown, and know anothers' fate is up in the air as well. When their backs are up against the wall to pull this move off without getting caught, these are the kinds of situations they should find themselves in. Avengers Undercover continues to capture that inner struggle that young heroes go with because their futures are always up in the air.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Avengers Undercover #7

Jul 9, 2014

Avengers Undercover #7 gives us a little bit of everything and more. We get answers, more questions, twists, and the emotional impact that is always expected from this series. There was a real focus on Nico which is necessary. She was the most damaged from Avengers Arena having died and there needed to be some exploration of where she stands mentally.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers Undercover #8

Aug 13, 2014

What you really take out of Avengers Undercover by the end of this issue is the fun that can be had while being a villain. In the Marvel Universe we are past the simplistic actions by villains who want to make a quick buck. Avengers Undercover shows what happens when they start thinking big, and also start working as a team. Of course you still have to see how that lasts when it counts the most, but it doesn't change that villain perspective that you don't get to see that often. Whatever comes next now that Zemo has initiated his plan will be something you don't want to miss because as Madame Masque said, it's a game changer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Avengers Undercover #9

Aug 27, 2014

That much closer to the end of Avengers Undercover with issue #9 and this is the heroes tale you expect from them even if not all of them you have seen as much as you may want. Baron Zemo has been a great villain, so have the rest as well giving them a distinct voice that sets them apart from the rest. The same with the heroes as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Avengers Undercover #10

Sep 10, 2014

Hats go off to Dennis Hopeless, Kev Walker, Tigh Walker, and Jean-Francois Beaulieu for sticking with this to the bitter end. This is a story which should be told and had to be told. Where these characters go from here is unknown, but one thing for certain is that their place in the Marvel Universe is now cemented for anything to happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Avengers World #1

Jan 10, 2014

Great start that shows that this story has a lot of potential. The Avengers is the book you pick up if you want something on a global scale to invest in. They do great with big sci-fi scenarios and have proven so up to this point. Read this for the scale of the books, quality of the writing, and the art is consistently phenomenal. You just hope that as this story progresses that neither Hickman or Nick Spencer lose what makes this stand out from the other Marvel NOW! titles.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Avengers World #15

Nov 21, 2014

Avengers World #15 throws down the gauntlet when the inverted/evil comes knocking on any and all doors of those who stand and stood in their way. Much needs to be addressed, though surely you want to see what these last-minute additions to the roster have to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Avengers World #16

Dec 10, 2014

Avengers World #16 is everything you could have wanted and so much more when a great wrong has been made right. Nick Spencer and Frank J. Barbiere make a great team and made this story one of the most worthy of telling that is connected to the Axis event. I do have to admit I had my fears with the first part of this story, but that all took a full 180 with Avengers World #16 and that meant creating something memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Avengers World #17

Feb 19, 2015

Avengers World #17 is perfect in so many ways. From the story to the art you feel the emotion pouring from thee two people as we find out how that baby came to be. Valentine's Day may have been last week, though if this issue came out before that day, surely this moment here would have made the list for Geeked Out Nation's most memorable romantic scenes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Avengers World #18

Mar 4, 2015

Avengers World #18 continues to show how even being an Avengers title, you can pick up this series and enjoy it for the characters you like who are given the spotlight they haven't gotten before. This is a new Sunspot we are seeing molded and the next issue will show how far he is willing to go to make an impact on the fate of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Avengers World #20

Apr 23, 2015

Avengers World #20 is another issue in a story progressively getting better with every question answered about what these Avengers have been up to during that skip in time. We're reaching an end soon, but it has been one heck of an adventure with characters that deserve those self-contained issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Avengers World #21

May 20, 2015

Avengers World #21 is a great end to the series with Namor Vs Thanos being unexpected, and thrilling. This series will seriously be missed because all you could ever ask for with a title like this is that balance between story and art, and yet the creative team for Avengers World gave us that and so much more no matter who was handling what.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bankshot #1

Jun 28, 2017

I would say that Bankshot #1 got my attention. This first issue leaves you with more than enough interest in getting the full picture. We know the motivations for what drives Marcus to do what he does, we know just who he is looking for revenge against, and we know just what he is willing to do to get the job done. However, there is still so much to get into. Including whether we can really call this Marcus King a hero of any sort.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Barb Wire (2015) #2

Aug 5, 2015

Barb Wire #2 continues with some solid artwork as we explore the thrilling life of Barbara. She is always on the move trying to get the money to keep the bar open. One bounty after the other and those are the exciting parts considering how good she is at that part of her life. Intense yet humorous seeing Barb Wire take on guys twice her size and constantly have to yell for these two others to lend a hand despite the fact that they are also twice her size to be doing nothing. With that said, her expressions are something to note because you constantly see how stressed she is a majority of the time. Sometimes you do want to see her crack a smile, though Barbara doesn't quite have that luxury as captured properly throughout. In general the street-level style of Barb Wire keeps things fresh as we see different parts of Steel Harbor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Barb Wire (2015) #3

Sep 2, 2015

Another solid issue overall where you want to root for Barb Wire knowing that her job does suck, even if she is good at what she does.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Barb Wire (2015) #4

Oct 7, 2015

Barb Wire #4 marks the end to the first story arc for the series. It really is this issue that ropes you into the series if the other issue did not already. We know who Barbara is, what kind of lifestyle she lives, what she has to do to make a living, and the crap she has to deal with on a regular basis.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Barb Wire (2015) #5

Nov 4, 2015

For where this new story arc leads Barabara next, Barb Wire #5 is a great start to another plot with potential. Who knows why she still does what Barbara does with these constant dangers and surprises, but for what it is worth you want to see how she can get out of this in on piece.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Barb Wire (2015) #6

Dec 2, 2015

Barb Wire #6 continues to show why Barb Wire is so good at what she does. She is thrilling for the risks she takes, and it will take a lot more than agents or supers to keep her down.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Barb Wire (2015) #7

Jan 6, 2016

Barb Wire #7 answers a lot of questions you may have had about this series. And surely enough this issue gives Barb Wire that big push into acknowledging the world around her that is less than human.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Barb Wire (2015) #8

Feb 3, 2016

This issue was a fast read, but Barb Wire #8 did not disappoint as a conclusion to this story arc. Another end to another storyline which I would recommend new readers jump in if they can.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Batgirl (2011) #21

Jun 14, 2013

Overall you felt the emotion not only from the pain that Barbara feels, but from the grim nature that she finds herself in when she confronts the Ventriloquist who shows how twisted she really is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Batgirl (2011) #22

Jul 10, 2013

Where buttons have been pushed up to now, things are only going to get worse for Batgirl. While not good for her, story-wise this is great. This is the kind of situation you like to find her in. It's as they say, anyone in the Bat Family is at their most dangerous when backed against a wall. I believe that is what we will see very soon and even so it won't be a position Barbara finds comfortable to be in. The dark tone that the art gave off is what I really liked in this issue. Mainly that of the confrontation between Gordon and Batman, I feel that that specific part was drawn very well. Aside from that I enjoy the detail put into their emotions and expressions, that's what I expected to see from this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Batgirl (2011) #23

Aug 15, 2013

This issue is one that shows you why Batgirl is one book you should be reading. If not for the story which Gail handles exceptionally well, but the art as well which I have come to appreciate. The coloring and inking very clean in the beginning and changed to match the situation Barbara and Ricky found themselves towards the end. This isn't even mentioning the beautiful cover art seen above.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Batgirl (2011) #24

Oct 10, 2013

Her narration is something that consistently sets the tone for this book. Even if it feels as though she's constantly talking to herself, you get an idea of how badly everything is effecting her, how her thoughts are so mixed with emotion and confusion. Made this a very believable situation that she finds herself in and that is why this was such an intense book to read. Momentum is still being cranked up and Gail Simone makes it certain that you can still expect so much more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Batman (2011) #21

Jun 13, 2013

So overall it feels like Batman and is another look into the world they created for him at the start of the New 52. As I said before, a bit predictable aside from those few inclusions that bring about an interesting twist. Of course there's much more to expect from the story to come and Snyder sure does show that he has something planned.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Batman and Robin (2011) #21

Jun 20, 2013

This issue left you feeling emotional. Your sympathies have to go out to Barbara because of how she is written to handle every situation that Tomasi puts her in. The mix of dark tones and really just the style of this book made it as depressing as it really was. Situations which have made her strong enough to be the one to tell Bruce when enough is enough. It's been an emotional roller coaster and a good balance of action in between. In the end it all comes down to taking back their lives when they seemed to have been crumbling down in front of them. The one thing all members of the Bat Family have in common is their uncanny ability to rise up when their backs are against the wall and that was displayed here. Sure Batman remains a mess, but Batgirl walks out a little bit stronger than she was before.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Batman and the Outsiders (2019) #10

Feb 12, 2020

As someone who picked this book up on a whim, it was a solid issue of Batman and the Outsiders. I can see where people would enjoy this book, while also having the perspective to see where it could have been a bit better than what was produced.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Batman and the Signal #1

Jan 3, 2018

Batman & the Signal #1 is a great start to this new miniseries that challenges what it means to be a hero in Gotham. Duke's perspective on the world is refreshing. His engagement with the citizens, the challenge he faces with the rise of metahumans, and just always having that room for growth. Everyone else seems so set on how the world works to them, and here you have Duke with much to learn and offer being driven by motivations that don't simply stem from tragedy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batman and the Signal #2

Feb 21, 2018

Batman and the Signal #2 cranks the dial with a great sense of pacing. Many questions were asked, and almost just as many were answered. Gotham during the day truly is a different kind of world of its own. It's hard to believe that it really took the emergence of the Signal to get this kind of experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Batman and the Signal #3

Apr 25, 2018

Batman and the Signal #3 was a good conclusion to the introduction of the hero Gotham needs during the day. Some developments did leave me wishing for a bit more from the Signal, and you never know when the next time will be that you see a hero like Signal. He may appear in another Bat-Family book, but there was so much left unanswered that you would have hoped to have addressed to some extent by the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batman Incorporated (2012) #10

Apr 25, 2013

The artwork in this issue was a bit underwhelming at points. Mainly during those moments such as he interaction between Nightwing and Red Robin, their facial expressions looked very rushed and weird. Besides that, the inking was well done to say the least to capture the emotion the story tried to create.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Batman Incorporated (2012) #11

May 24, 2013

There was a lot of teamwork implemented within this issue which was nice to see and they definitely do have a dynamic. While Canary might not be much of a combatant given her size, her sonic voice can be used for various situations. The one thing that can be taken out of this is that while they may be new to Batman Inc., they will be involved in the fight against Leviathan, of course given by the fact that we are met by the same Batman who took the Man-Bat serum and is wearing a large suit of armor ready to go into battle.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.8
Batman Incorporated (2012) #12

Jul 3, 2013

It just really felt like a letdown. The lack of emotional attachment to anyone didn't do it any favors either. Talia didn't care for Leviathan, Batman didn't, and just about everyone else would rather see him dead. Just seemed like a fight with an empty shell of a villain and in some ways that just felt like a turn off from the very beginning. Hopefully the conclusion or what comes next may make up for this lackluster climax because I'd hope this isn't the best Morrison can do with this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.9
Batman Incorporated (2012) #13

Aug 1, 2013

Overall it was the conclusion we needed, but not the one we deserved. It could have been a whole lot better and I can only hope that they can turn things around after this story arc because there is just no appeal to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) #21

Jun 27, 2013

It was a great issue for the action, though that was really about it when you step back and reflect on what you read. It would have been great to really know what was going through his mind at the time, but it seemed like they focus was more on putting a knife in his side and twisting it to see how far Batman would go for justice. Not bad but it leaves you wanting more from it than you got. The artwork on the other hand was solid and gave you a good image of how brutal Batman can be when crossed.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Batman: The Dark Knight (2011) #22

Jul 26, 2013

Overall there's not much I can really say about this issue. I was expecting a lot more from this and it kept me wanting when I was through.The grim style of the book fit for a villain like Clayface, but right now things are too subtle for me to have enjoyed this as I thought I would. The next issue does show that the pace may pick up as he makes his move against Clayface, so we can only hope that it actually does.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Batwing #20

May 3, 2013

Down the road what seems to set the tone for the story is his attitude towards being Batwing. He's unsure of his ability, he likes to be independent, and he doesn't quite take orders as well. That will get him into more trouble than he has already and I'm sure that Palmiotti can handle.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batwing #21

Jun 7, 2013

The art by Pansica has also made the actions portrayed look real. The fine lines used allow for more details between the design of he characters, making the blood actually look like blood, and even making the environment around them stand out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batwing #22

Jul 4, 2013

The characterization again is great. Luke is a take charge guy, serious about being Batwing, sarcastic, witty, and has that drive to make any situation thrilling. Definitely the daredevil and that allows room for more freedom when throwing him into the next adventure or fight. The coloring was good, narration better, overall a solid issue. The dynamic between him and Batman is great and we can only hope to see what happens when the training wheels are taken off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Batwing #23

Aug 8, 2013

This issue shows how exciting Batwing can be on a street level, and street level is what need to see more of from a hero like Batwing. Along with his witty dialogue, sarcastic nature, and approach to heroics, it should be an interesting tale as he tests his metal. Just like Nightwing or Batgirl, this is one that is worth picking up because it's just thrilling to see how Batwing will pull himself out of each danger he faces. It looks serious, but at the same time it's one that has fun with the tone. That's what you get from the use of fine penciling that really shows the detail in the characters and the environment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Batwing #24

Oct 3, 2013

I do have to point out how Palmoitti and Gray show off how smart Luke is. You forget how smart he is till you see his reaction to all the tech at his disposal to repair the Batwing suit. Not to mention he can do the repairs all by himself. Between the fight sequences and the one page in which Batwing uses infrared vision to search for Lady Vic looked well done. Maintains that gritty look while also having great use of shadows.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Batwing #25

Nov 7, 2013

This was a story that has been told a million times over, yet the collaborative work of Justin Gray and Jimmy Palmiotti turned this into something unique to Luke. This was basically his first enemy and villain. Not that it was ever his intention to have one, but circumstance put him into this position and it was handled well enough that you want to see Russ come back for his vengeance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batwing #26

Dec 4, 2013

Batwing consistently is getting better with the team of Jimmy Palmoitti and Justin Gray. They know what works best for his character and that is keeping him active. Luke is a character who seems to love what he does even when he finds himself in a tough situation. There is always that lingering thought as to what will happen next and anything is possible dealing with Luke and he is a character that you can jump into the action with. There just doesn't seem to be a dull moment with him. As Luke or Batwing they have a good handle of making sure you see enough of both no matter what his next fight is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Batwing #27

Jan 8, 2014

This tie-in to Gothtopia shows just how wrong things can go when there is no order. Luke's world has been turned upside down and he has no way of knowing what's wrong. Justin Gray and Jimmy Palmiotti really started something that puts some fear into the reality that anyone in this story can be in danger. Finding out what happened and who is behind this makes it all the more urgent that they solve because Luke really has never been this vulnerable before. Though in the grand scheme things still seem a bit vague, I can say you should still follow this book and see how the plot unfolds.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batwing #28

Feb 5, 2014

The collaborative writing of both Justin Gray and Jimmy Palmiotti turned this into something exciting. Here is where Batwing separates himself from Batman. Someone more willing to do what it takes to save those closest to him. I think many should appreciate something like this because the members of the Bat Family have their tendency of playing it safe, luckily Justin Gray and Jimmy Palmiotti seem to get the idea that different is certainly better. If wanting a story from Gothtopia that really throws its hero into the fray, Batwing is definitely worth picking up as one that takes more risk.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Batwing #29

Mar 5, 2014

A great issue for Batwing that shows the problems that comes with family getting caught in the cross-hairs of super-powered conflicts. What makes it clever alone is the fact that while it seems like Batwing vs. Menace on the surface, it's really Luke vs. Russ since neither side is really aware of who the other really is. More than enough reason to keep reading this book because you want to see what will happen when they finally confront each other, and you really want to see just how Luke will survive the forces within Gotham Underground that look to tear him apart.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Batwing #30

Apr 2, 2014

Big things are in store for Batwing and he might just find himself in over his head. He's playing on Menace's turf and quite frankly he might not be in the proper mindset to make it out of this inevitable encounter. This storyline has proved to show so much of what Luke is capable of when facing the possibility of being pushed to that point of no return for a hero. What comes next is something I anticipate and hopefully it does not disappoint considering everything Luke has been put through.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Batwing #31

May 8, 2014

Everything about this issue of Batwing is what you would expect when Luke loses that control between both parts of his world. There is a lot of sympathy to give and you surely want to stay tuned for the next issue knowing that things can only get worse for Batwing and Luke. Jimmy Palmiotti and Justin Gray haven't pulled any punches so far and I wouldn't expect that to change any time soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batwing #32

Jun 4, 2014

With Batwing #32 comes the end to what was possibly the darkest situation Luke could have found himself in since becoming Batwing. It's sad that we only have two issues left of this series, but it really hasn't disappointed since and here's to those last two issues leaving Luke on a good note. Pretty much anything can go from here and all reasons why you want to see Batwing to the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Batwing #33

Jul 2, 2014

With Batwing #33 comes the realization that this is the second to last issue of the series. Justin Gray and Jimmy Palmiotti have done some awesome things, even with this issue of Batwing that makes you wish there was a little more time to show what else Batwing has to offer like the rest in the Bat Family. Not to mention what more there is to explore with the lives of Luke's family now that their picking up the pieces of a nightmarish tragedy. Obviously things are fragile between them and you want to go along with the ride as they come to terms with how things are now with Tammy and their bonds with each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Batwing #34

Aug 6, 2014

Batwing #34 ended on a good note and you reach this end you find contentment that Batwing has grown to be the hero that stands before you in that final panel. You are reminded why heroes do what they do, and why Luke continues to be Batwing despite all the heartache he has been through. Where ever he ends up from here, you can only hope someone treats him with the same respect that this creative team has.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Birthright #1

Oct 8, 2014

At the end of the day, Birthright takes a simple concept seen through fantasy stories of our past, and toys with the unanswered questions left by a journey created by destiny. Not to mention the end being the opposite of what you might expect of this series gives you more than enough reason to see just where Joshua Williamson intends to take this story when things aren't as hopeful as appear.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Birthright #2

Nov 5, 2014

In the end, Birthright #2 covers a decent amount of ground while cranking up the intensity only in the second issue. With a series like this it is smart to avoid teasing or dragging something on that would keep readers from feeling like this is a story to invest in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Birthright #3

Dec 3, 2014

Birthright #3 is the right time that we are able to get progress and a grasp as to what we can expect from this series. Mikey has his motivations in the real world, Mikey has his demons to conquer in Terrenos, and it's a race against time on both ends. Things will get worse before they get any better and that is what draws you in to this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Birthright #4

Jan 7, 2015

With the conclusion of Birthright #4 it becomes that much harder for the impossible to seem as such when Mikey and gang come face to face with the first of the mages he seeks. Fantasy continues to meet reality head on in a way which pulls no punches.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #5

Feb 4, 2015

As exciting as the end of Birthright #4 left us, issue #5 takes things a step further with a twist at the end which you don't see coming. While what's going on right now with Mikey hunting down the mages grabs your attention, that twist gives you more reason to anticipate the answers that the past hold for a better grasp of the good, bad and everything in-between.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #6

Apr 8, 2015

Birthright #6 gives us more to wonder about this growing world(s), and sets us up for more exploration to come. All sides of this conflict are given proper time to develop and that is something which should be consistently pressed for as we are far from hitting that climax in this plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Birthright #7

May 13, 2015

If much of what Birthright has delivered didn't get you emotionally, surely the end of this issue did. It has been said that Joshua Williamson pulls no punches, and that was the case here from the whole creative team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Birthright #8

Jun 10, 2015

In the end you take a chance on a title like Birthright because the creative team do take a risk to go places unexplored with readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #9

Jul 22, 2015

Artistically it is the fantasy elements which stand out most visually in Birthright #9. It really catches you off guard storywise finding out how immoral a spell like the Diviner is, and yet be a spell that creates so much beauty where ever it touches. Not including the hunters, but the environment in particular. It goes without saying how beautiful it all looks in design. That is as literal as it gets when the Mages say “…We will send Terrenos to him.” And it goes without saying that the colors bring it all together between the visions Mikey gets, the environment changes and just the way in which the Diviner is captured as the bear. It's a challenging appearance because it looks spiritual, yet this bear is one that looks like it's falling apart.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #10

Aug 19, 2015

In general the flashbacks played a big role in progressing the story in Birthright. For this very issue they were used creatively to not only further our understanding, but those like Brennan as well. That is even though he makes you cringe at how naive he can be. At the end of the day that is what they're there for and Joshua Williamson you appreciate for his ability to place them where they aren't taking up time or distracting us from what is going on currently.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #11

Nov 11, 2015

Birthright #11 was the perfect transition from the previous story arc. Ging us a better grasp of the Nevermind, what it does to people like the Pale Rider, how Mikey has progressed with age, and where the relationship between Mikey and Brennan lies now that Mikey is seen for who he really is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #12

Dec 9, 2015

The story keeps evolving with the characters naturally. We know the direction some characters are heading in. Questions are asked, answers are given, and greater mysteries dug up now that intentions have been made clear to some extent.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Birthright #13

Jan 13, 2016

Birthright #13 finds a great balance between action and emotion. Things got personal for Mikey and those are the moments you never overlook since that is when his defenses are at their lowest. He's vulnerable, and that's where we learn more than we would have when he was trying to save face.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Birthright #14

Feb 17, 2016

Birthright #14 covered a lot of ground shaking up what made this a linear adventure for all. Nothing is as it seems, and all easier said than done when the Mages hold so much power. The next issue should hopefully show us what they can all accomplish when working together instead of questioning each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #15

Mar 23, 2016

If fans didn't have enough to talk about, Birthright #15 delivered so much more with the wait till June for more answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #16

Jun 8, 2016

Birthright #16 turned into more than you thought it to be, while also shaking up where you thought this story was headed. All it took was a major reveal to an unsuspecting family, and a little dabbling in magic to turn this world upside down for better or for worse. Only time can tell though it is good to have Birthright back on shelves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Birthright #17

Jul 13, 2016

Birthright #17 gets you with a little bit of oh no, and a whole lot of oh yeah! One of the best cliffhangers this has ended on, and even with so much going on you care for every bit of it knowing that with 17 issues we have grown so much with these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #18

Aug 10, 2016

It's the Rhodes family versus the world at this point and Birthright #18 pulled no punches showing that when the world wants them to move, they will stand together and prove they are stronger together. There is something so uplifting about the way Birthright shines a light on family values and bonds which should never be thrown away without a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Birthright #19

Sep 14, 2016

Birthright #19 still wows you for all the right reasons for the fact that they take risks. Pushing the boundaries of what it means to fight for the fate of two very different worlds.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Birthright #20

Oct 26, 2016

Birthright #20 was a lot to take in between the emotional weight of this war and the consequences it bears for everyone involved. Hurts even worse that we have so many questions right now and we'll have to wait until January next year before any can be answered. Nonetheless, again no better time to be a fan of this world, story, and it's characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #21

Jan 11, 2017

As far as character driven issues go, I would say that Birthright #21 is a favorite. This is the kind of exploration that makes the world of Birthright so engaging. To be able to further explore Terrenos, the lives of those who live here, and their stakes in this war is a treat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Birthright #22

Feb 8, 2017

Birthright #22 gets down to some important conversations that you were looking forward to. Whether it was between Mastema, Wendy and Rya or the Rhodes family they got into the things that need to be said to move forward. With everyone having something to gain and lose it matters that most are on the same page about what needs to be done for the sake of their worlds or loved ones.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Birthright #23

Mar 22, 2017

Birthright #23 you would have thought was simply about Rya's escape or her pregnancy, but there was so much to take in that happened in such a short amount of time. We got character development, exciting action, tugging at some emotional strings, overall this issue of Birthright sits right as the full package.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Birthright #24

May 17, 2017

Just when you had some idea of where this story was heading, it only took one move to flip this right on its head. Birthright #24 opens the flood gates to new problems, and all will be forced to confront what they believe about what they're fighting for. This could come next month, or the month after, but very interested in how this all leads into the #25 anniversary issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Birthright #25

Jun 14, 2017

Birthright #25 brings us to the end of another story arc. I felt very satisfied in what has come out of this latest story arc. Plenty of character development, memorable moments, and enough to take away from this issue that made it special as an anniversary issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Birthright #26

Sep 13, 2017

Birthright #26 was a tame welcoming back into this series. As the issue to a new story arc, it was easy to understand the path that this family is now taking to save themselves and the world. Its good to see that the break was worth the wait that we can jump back into Birthright without feeling as though they weren't putting in the same effort that they usually do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Birthright #27

Oct 11, 2017

Birthright #27 takes its time to tell a good story. Anyone could complain that nothing too big has happened in these past two issues, but it doesn't always have to be action that pushes us forward. We now know what is holding them back from getting through to Mikey, and we also know a little more about these soldiers who have come out of nowhere looking for the Rhodes family. Call this an adventure or a journey, though that only comes with what happens between point A and point B.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #28

Nov 8, 2017

Birthright #28 picks up the pace in a big way. The best thing about a story like this is that you do allow them to tell their story. Everything matters when there are so many pieces to this puzzle that you must explore to genuinely feel captivated by this world. Every truth has a lie, and every action has a consequence which all seem to be learning the hard way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Birthright #29

Jan 3, 2018

That look of horror on the cover of Birthright #29 makes so much sense when this family is presented with the choice they must make to save Mikey. This family is being challenged in the worst of ways and I hope they do try to answer this requirement to save Mikey in a way that will genuinely impact us. I think we all know who might step up to the plate, but I would love to be proven wrong in assumption.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #30

Feb 21, 2018

Birthright #30 is one of those issues from this series that make you fall in love with the story all over again. Every character decision matters, counts, has an impact on us and our need to see them evolve through this journey. The world of fantasy can be dark and full of terrors, but every now and then it can be a beautiful thing from the right perspective.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Birthright #31

Sep 12, 2018

Birthright #31 was an excellent starting point for the new story arc. We got two character explorations for the price of one story told. A big accomplishment if you ask me. Nothing is black and white in this universe, and I love that about what it means for each and every one of these characters to fight for what they believe in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #32

Oct 10, 2018

Birthright #32 was a mixed bag of feelings about this family's next step in reclaiming their lives. They find a new spark of motivation to move forward, they tackle the things still holding them back, and they re-affirm what is most important to them at the end of the day. The development with Brennan and Kallista at the end was just the icing on the cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #33

Nov 14, 2018

Birthright #33 covered a lot of ground in one issue. Excellent character moments, twists, and pacing that has assured us that this story will not keep us waiting too long with build-up. This is a story where everything good has to be earned. So the dark twist we are given should leave us anticipating how our heroes overcome their next obstacle.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #34

Dec 12, 2018

Another great month for Birthright. Issue #34 was the perfect way to close things out for this year. Not in a way that ends another story, but simply keeping up with the same momentum and high that keeps us coming back for more. This family is about to tackle round two of their family troubles, and hopefully this one doesn't end with an actual loss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Birthright #35

Jan 9, 2019

Birthright #35 gave us one of the biggest turning points for the series. This series is essentially a series of unfortunate events, but there is no denying how excited you could end up being when that is not the case. What happens when this family is finally together and on the same page? What can they accomplish? What lengths will they go to hold on to what they have now? Through the events of this issue, these questions will hold our anxiousness for more till the next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birthright #36

Jun 5, 2019

It's a good feeling to have Birthright back on shelves. Birthright #36 served as a great transition into what we should anticipate from this next phase in the story. When there's not too much that this family has holding them back, there's much more room to buckle down and focus on what's truly important.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #37

Jul 3, 2019

Excitement levels are rising after what has been set up through the events of this issue. Even more so when this creative team tells us that this will likely be the LAST quiet issues. So expect that after Birthright #37 that things are only going to get better as we get closer to the end of this story!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #38

Aug 7, 2019

Birthright #38 satisfies your needs if you were awaiting that next action-packed issue. The events of this issue will definitely get some readers talking when this twist changes everything about the way you saw this ending. There's more to this fight for the fate of Terrenos and Earth than simply fixing the gate. As they said, Birthright goes cosmic! And there's no telling what that means for everyone who thought swords and sorcery were going to be the end all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #39

Sep 4, 2019

This was one of the most insane issues of Birthright because this is as bad as it gets without dealing with King Lore. If he is supposed to be the ultimate villain, this is a terrifying development when his own daughter can give our heroes this much of a run for their money. Will words win the day? Some other unexpected force out there? Or does Mikey still hold some card we haven't seen yet? Questions like this will keep us coming back for more!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #40

Oct 2, 2019

I've said it multiple times that the big selling point for this series is how they crash fantasy into reality, and never before has that been more true than what happens in this chapter. Birthright #40 hits you in a big way because after everything we learned about Mastema and her upbringing? There was only one way that this confrontation with the daughter of Lore could have ended. What that sets up will have us all eager to see what comes next!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Birthright #41

Feb 5, 2020

As the start of a new story arc, Birthright #41 changes your expectations of this last stretch in a big way. The game has changed, the stakes are higher than ever before, and we even learned some major details about the story of Lore which makes you rethink a lot of what got us to this point in the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #43

May 20, 2020

The interior art was spectacular! I expected nothing less from this art team, and they brought their A-game for the way that they set the stage for the final battle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #44

Jun 17, 2020

So, was Birthright #44 worth the wait? It absolutely was! There was action, heart, and visual appeal to everything which unfolded in this issue. But the story is not done yet. We know better than to assume anything that comes next when the barrier is still broken, and a monster horde still exists on Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Birthright #45

Jul 22, 2020

Overall, I was satisfied with the events of Birthright #45. If I'm being honest, I was feeling reluctant towards the direction this story was taking. I was not sure if they were going to take a predictable route, or give us something new. In the end I was thrilled that they went with an end result to the battle that was more symbolic more than anything else.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Birthright #46

Feb 10, 2021

What can I say, it's good to have Birthright back in the pull-list. This was one of the strongest starts I have seen for a new story arc in a good while. Issue #46 sets us on one last adventure for the Rhodes family, and hopefully this leads to the ending this family deserves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Birthright #47

Mar 10, 2021

in the end, things got good by the end of Birthright #47. Not the direction you thought this arc would take us, but so far they did not fail to string us along for the ride set in motion.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Bizarro #1

Jun 4, 2015

With the start of DC YOU comes a little something for everyone to read from the DC Universe. For readers who choose to pick up Bizarro, they are in store for something simple and humorous. This is a series that you would give a chance for the same reason that you would read Harley Quinn. The series stays true to the character, but also has fun with him in a way that was not possible before. This isn't Bizarro being used as a weapon, or him being a villain, it's just a fun play on the simplicity of his intelligence in a way that opens for many possibilities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Black Knight (2015) #1

Nov 18, 2015

Black Knight #1 is a new series that takes a risk going to a place none of the other ongoing title of the All-New All-Different line are willing to explore. There may actually be a Weirdworld title out there, but it doesn't quite captivate you the way this series does with so many questions and mysteries to keep you guessing what comes next. And being Weirdworld you almost certainly will not know what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Black Knight (2015) #2

Dec 9, 2015

Black Knight #2 shows why this is not a series you want to sleep on for what it has to offer. The Avengers are going to have to think twice if they thought taking Dane back to Earth would be so simple.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Black Knight (2015) #3

Jan 13, 2016

Black Knight #3 was satisfying for everything w have come to learn about the events which have led to this Black Knight vs. the Avengers clash. And the best part is that even with a decided victor by the end of the issue, there is still more to it than just winning.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Black Knight (2015) #4

Feb 10, 2016

The end to Black Knight #4 really does make you want to know what happens next. With one issue left you can only just wish for a satisfying end to what had a lot of potential if given more time to grow.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Black Knight (2015) #5

Mar 9, 2016

Black Knight will be missed. Hopefully if enough people go out and buy this last issue or the trade there will be a reconsideration down the road, though for now the way this story left things off Dane is satisfying.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #1

Nov 1, 2017

Real-world issues in a super-hero world. I don't think there is ever a better string of words to put together to grab a reader's attention today. We like to see real heroes dealing with the things that matter to us in the world that we live in. Black Lightning is the genuine article and Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands is not a story to sleep on for that bit of truth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #2

Dec 6, 2017

Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #2 continues to prove why this is a must read for a miniseries. Nothing is really off limits here and this is not a book you should sleep on if you want one that is unapologetic towards addressing the corruption and bigotry in the world. There are some comic fans out there who just don't get it, and think these stories aren't meant for comics, but hopefully there are enough out there who see that this is one to shine a light on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #3

Jan 3, 2018

Things got real in Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #3 whether we are talking about what actually happens, what could have happened, or the stories told of where things did go wrong. This issue was all about the horrors of past tragedies and trying your best to make sure that history does not repeat itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #4

Feb 7, 2018

This here was that time for heroes to rise to the occasion. It doesn't always take someone with powers to save the day, but it doesn't hurt when you need that someone to give you a fighting chance. The events of Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #4 were memorable for all the ways that things can go wrong when crime like this is either going to come knocking at your front door or plot from the shadows.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #5

Mar 7, 2018

Black Lightning and Tobias Whale coming face to face for the first time was well worth the wait. This is what happens when you pit two enemies against each other, and with real determination to take the other down. Is this the trap to end Black Lightning once and for all? That much we'll have to wait for, but Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #5 was exciting for the execution of that moment and everything leading up to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #6

Apr 4, 2018

They didn't lie, the surprises kept coming right through the very last page of this story. I was satisfied by the way Black Lightning: Cold Dead Hands #6 concluded this story. This was a story worth telling and following, and I'm glad that DC was bold enough to let it be told. Some publishers would have mishandled a title like this to make it an ongoing and then pull the plug without allowing a genuine story to start and finish.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Black Magick #1

Oct 28, 2015

Black Magick #1 is an exciting new start to a series that will test the dangers that come with those who practice magic. We haven't seen the price of it yet, though it has been established the lines those who mess with these forces will cross to get what they want.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Black Magick #2

Nov 25, 2015

Black Magick #2 was a solid transition into opening up the developing plot of this series. More to question about the man who Rowan killed, the people who were forcing him to make an attempt on her life, and the possibilities that there is more to it all that they aren't seeing yet. This is grim, mysterious, and captivating with characters who are real.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Black Magick #3

Dec 30, 2015

Black Magick #3 makes progress moving forward from part three of Awakening. Nothing is confirmed, but we are making good time moving all the pieces into the right place, and revealing what we as the readers need to know with time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Black Magick #4

Jan 27, 2016

Black Magick #4 upped the stakes of this plot as things are only going to get worse before they get any better. Excellent cliffhanger too that should hold our excitement for the next issue when it seems like we might be losing a character we were only just starting to connect with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Black Magick #5

Feb 24, 2016

Black Magick #5 brings about an end to our first story arc ‘Awakening'. This was truly a trial by divination that got the blood pumping. Starting off with such a heartfelt moment and leading into something which caught us at the edge of our seats.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Black Magick #6

Jun 28, 2017

Black Magick has returned and with this story I feel more drawn into this story than I ever was before. A fleshing out like this is never needed at the start of a book to invest in it, but it is always appreciated when that moment comes and they nail exactly what you wanted to get out of it. Black Magick #6 was a strong welcome back while teasing what we have to look forward to when the coming issues take us back into the current plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Black Magick #9

Nov 29, 2017

Black Magick #9 takes big steps forward towards something bigger approaching. Through 'Awakenings II' part three, the enemy has been revealed, and an enemy has been confronted. That was more than enough takeaway for one issue, with the very end of the issue building up anticipation for the next. Does curiosity kill the cat, or the intruder?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Black Panther (2016) #2

May 11, 2016

This series is continuing to pick up momentum with Black Panther #2. Great focus on character development, drawing that line in the sand with this conflict, and getting into those aspects of Wakanda that sets this nation apart from whatever else is going on around the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Black Panther (2016) #3

Jun 29, 2016

Black Panther gets better and better with every passing issue. I don't think there is a corner of the Marvel Universe that feels this engaging and worthy of exploration as Wakanda does now.While Civil War II stuff goes on tying up other stories in its web, this is one that you will enjoy for its ability to be self-contained.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Black Panther (2016) #4

Jul 28, 2016

How this story arc concluded was one heck of a way to leave readers at the end of Black Panther #4. Things were only going to get worse before they got any better, yet you couldn't have prepared for how wrong things could go. They did not pull punches and unfortunately this is the reality of a nation crumbling at it's own feet. This is as real as it gets and that means something for a nation like Wakanda in the Marvel Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Black Panther (2016) #5

Aug 11, 2016

Black Panther #5 overall is where we are finding ourselves exposed to the extremes. These for the most part are things that will happen in foreign affairs and you are glad Marvel has taken the chance on one that isn't getting caught up in the ridiculousness of what is going on with the rest of the world. It is all about Wakanda, what it means to rule this nation, to be a citizen of this nation, and what it means to genuinely fight for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Black Science #1

Nov 27, 2013

Black Science is a must read if you want a sense of mystery and exploration. A truly stunning beginning that makes you want more. Remender makes you feel so much from this, especially sympathy, and you just want to know why. The one flaw of any scientist is to be overconfident and obsessive, it kills. You see so much self loathing through the thoughts in his head that consistently flow throughout the issue. An urge for that sense of wonder can come at the price of regret, something he is learning the hard way. Add this book to your pull list now if you want something that will keep you at the edge of your seat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Black Terror (2019) #1

Oct 2, 2019

At the end of Black Terror #1, did this first issue meet expectations as a new reader? It did and then some. I found myself understanding this character in a way that I didn't before. We got to know him as Black Terror, and as the man who tried desperately to draw a line in the sand between the two. What comes next is going to be a thrill, because it's impossible for a Golden Age hero to truly leave it all in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Blackout #1

Mar 26, 2014

This was a solid start for Blackout. Even better considering that this isn't the first time some have seen him, having his initial introduction in Dark Horse Presents. It helps when with this first issue there isn't time wasted on trying to flesh out Scott's character, they jump straight into the action and all you need to know is that Scott is possibly biting off more than he can chew trying to look for answers. As an action and adventure, I think we should definitely hope he does to be able to see more of what he is capable of with the Blackout suit when put against whatever supernatural threats he may face along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Blackout #2

Apr 30, 2014

Blackout #2 did leave me wanting a bit more from it in terms of getting to know Scott, though it's hard to argue that this hasn't been a fun adventure so far. It feels like we are just as new to this world that Scott has stepped into as he is and that is a good thing. So definitely stick with this book because from other books that I've read like it, things will become clear with time. It may even just blow you away when you least expect it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Blackout #3

Jun 4, 2014

Blackout #3 is a good sign of things to come. We got a glimpse of Scott's past, an idea of what else the Blackout suit can do other than just teleport, and the threat is certainly one which can push him to levels necessary to become more than just who he was before. Now I wanted to overlook this, but the King Tiger story at the end I feel is something which might have to give because I want more from each issue of Blackout where pages are used for King Tiger.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Blackout #4

Aug 13, 2014

This might be it for Blackout for the time being, but Frank Barbiere set Scott on the right path towards finding the answers he seeks. Even tossed in an extra question which could shake things up if there were another story arc to come in the near future. Where ever this leads the Blackout series in the Dark Horse shared world, luckily he is now established in a way that he isn't just that character of circumstance and may even move up towards being a hero along the way. Anything is possible and it's because these four issues were used to expand on Scotts world and the threats he faces now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Bloodshot #24

Oct 1, 2014

Again Bloodshot #24 is a solid issue with a well thought out story that fills in that time before Bloodshot gets back to finding his place in this new Valiant Universe. Read it if you like Bloodshot, though you could just as easily wait for issue #25 if this sounds like it may be filler to you. At the end of the day Bloodshot #24 is worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Bloodshot #25

Nov 5, 2014

Whatever direction the Valiant Universe takes Bloodshot from here, Bloodshot #25 is the best time to reintroduce ourselves to who Bloodshot was, and who he is now. Also the best time for new readers to jump into the action before a new story arc takes off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #0.2014

Feb 26, 2014

Bloodshot and the H.A.R.D. Corps #0 is worth the read if you are a fan of either Bloodshot or H.A.R.D. Corps. After how the last issue ended, this was the perfect time to take a look back and realize just how good some of these new recruits have it compared to those of the past. This is the one book from Valiant where you take a look at the action, and are able to be brought down to a level where you re-evaluate what these characters are sacrificing the minute Project Rising Spirit has leverage over them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #14

Sep 18, 2013

The P.R.S. proves to be just as interesting as the rest of the world they are connected to. While being the villains they provide entertainment in their aggressive stance towards what they believe is justice for humanity. It's a perspective you come to enjoy and how it ties into the other books as you go through them all makes it something worth following.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #15

Oct 16, 2013

This is building up to be an intense story and you know things won't be easy for the H.A.R.D. Corps. The team they have created is to an extent a walking time bomb. Bloodshot has reason to join them, but teams are built on trust and there's reason for everyone to question what they have gotten themselves into. Now that Bloodshot has been rescued, he now gets a second chance to do what he does best and do it right. He may not have his full freedom, but he'll do things his way. That much gives this book a lot of potential as everyone has room to grow as an individual and team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #16

Nov 20, 2013

Bloodshot and H.A.R.D. Corps is the most thrilling stories you can experience from Valiant's line up. You love this book because it is that high-octane read that catches you visually. Not because of the action, but for being able to grab you with the suspense. You know how bad things are going to get for this team, and you know that they will. What they go up against is a force out of their league and for most of this it can turn into a suicide mission at any moment. That is what's so exciting about this book, anything can happen. No punches are pulled and again things are only going to get worse for them before it gets any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #17

Dec 18, 2013

This book lives up to the name of the story, this is certainly the H.A.R.D. way in terms of what they have went through here and their duty as the H.A.R.D. Corps. While there is a lot of action to find entertaining throughout, Joshua Dysart and Christos Gage are able to make this story a lot more than just that. The sense of self sacrifice seen in this issue really means a lot. These aren't the same heroes that you'd see in X-Force or Suicide Squad who have the skill to do the impossible. They are only human as thus bring a lot more to the table when it comes to depending on each other and not letting the “job” dictate what is right and what is wrong. Just another reason why Bloodshot and H.A.R.D. Corps is a must read from Valiant.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #18

Jan 8, 2014

For the start of this two-part”Get Some” arc, Christos Gage and Joshua Dysarthave really taken that next stop with this over-the-top action that is thrown at these characters. You really don't know how to feel when these people are thrown into something they aren't prepared for. You can see this and it makes every situation that much more dire knowing that the next mission could be their last. Rising Spirit has no shortage of enemies and it's the last thing they need when they each carry something in them others would kill to abuse for their own use. Overall great jump on point for new readers and that cliffhanger at the very end definitely makes you question their fate next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #19

Feb 19, 2014

This was a good end to “Get Some” which gave us some closure to Palmer's past, left room to take Bloodshot in a different direction, and looked into Vagabond's past to let us understand the person he became to join this team. Whatever comes next in the #0 issue hopefully gives us more insight and understanding in those other areas of this book which isn't as clear as the rest. We have gotten a good balance of character and concept from Joshua Dysart and Christos Gage so far, something which should continue for this series to grow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #20

Mar 12, 2014

Mission: Improbable is the crossover that Valiant fans deserve from Bloodshot and H.A.R.D. Corps, and Archer & Armstrong. Action from start to finish and both sides manage to catch you off guard trying to beat the other. This crossover brings out something exciting from Bloodshot and the H.A.R.D. Corps members as what they thought was a mission where they finally get to kill someone worth it turns into something which throws them all for a loop despite everything they have gone through up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #21

Apr 10, 2014

Mission: Improbable I believe to be a success in my book. It does what it needs to do and didn't waste any time between. Everyone had their presence throughout and plenty of surprises were thrown in to keep you on your toes. It was a lot more than just the action and the end of this issue of Bloodshot And H.A.R.D. Corps leaves you with many questions as to what the future holds for that and Archer & Armstrong. This including the upcoming book that will be centered around the Generation Zero kids.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #22

May 14, 2014

Overall this was a great start for what could possibly be the end of H.A.R.D. Corps. I mean we already know Bloodshot will make it out of this no doubt, and we also know this will be leading to the end of this title. So whatever comes next will surely and hopefully be leading down a road towards the closure this book has so rightly deserved as one which never pulled punches.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bloodshot & H.A.R.D. Corps #23

Jun 11, 2014

Bloodshot and H.A.R.D. Corps #23 marks the end of a great story and the beginning of something new. H.A.R.D. Corps may be out of the picture by now, something which everyone should know by now if you follow the VALIANT FIRST line-up, but there's no overlooking the fact that the next time we see them we should all be in for a treat. If Christos Gage is still on this book surely there will be blood, that much we are assured.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Bloodshot U.S.A. #1

Oct 26, 2016

Bloodshot U.S.A. #1 is a must read whether you have been following the story from Bloodshot Reborn to now, or just jumping in now because this is new reader friendly. There a lot of potential to take advantage here with numerous Bloodshots in action, unlikely enemies, and an organization to take down that may be over their heads. We all know Kozol, and you want to see if this can be that hit he has needed for so long.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Bloodshot: Reborn #1

Apr 15, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #1 was an excellent start and chock full of emotion that you could only feel when giving Bloodshot that human element and weakness we all carry. Again regret is a powerful emotion, and that is what sold every moment of this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bloodshot: Reborn #2

May 20, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #2 leaves you with a lot of questions that you want to see answers to as things progress. At this point it is impossible to tell what will come next, but we do know is that body counts will raise, and sanity levels might just drop further than what is already unhealthy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Bloodshot: Reborn #3

Jun 17, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn is also the book to be reading because of the interior artwork. Impressive all the way through when having these characters look so real engages you in a way that allows you to experience what they are going through. The self-destruction of Ray is seen through the way he carries himself. Nothing about his expressions or habits says he's someone who is happy about his life. Then you have the aggressive side to Kay which has come out quite suddenly when you see that her innocent smiles are not enough to influence Ray to do anything she suggests, being a voice in his head and all. Something you start to notice and like about Agent Festival is her calm demeanor. With everything that has gone on there are few times where you see her show any expression that would make her seem unprofessional. Aside from this some of these pages are drawn out so well that even without a narration to them they could tell their own story about some of these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bloodshot: Reborn #4

Jul 8, 2015

Beyond this the constant changing of hues for each scene is something that should be pointed out because that usually indicates how you should feel about what's going on at that moment. That is to say that most of this is very grim in general.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bloodshot: Reborn #5

Aug 5, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #5 is an indication that we have been spoiled by beautiful artwork. You open this issue and with the art team for this issue comes a more simplistic style from what we are used to. Of course not to say that it's bad, though that would be your initial reaction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Bloodshot: Reborn #6

Sep 16, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #6 is a good start for what's to come as Ray's hunt is thrown into full gear. Again a good start to a new story arc, though not recommended to just jump in. Magic is written into a more vital role, more depth to other characters explored, and a twist none of us saw coming till it happened.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bloodshot: Reborn #7

Oct 7, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #7 keeps us at the edge of our seats with good reason when this fight for the nanites continues to escalate as the number infected dwindles.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot: Reborn #9

Dec 23, 2015

Bloodshot Reborn #9 ended ‘THE HUNT' on an excellent note. Whether you came into this series already a fan of Bloodshot or a new fan, the simple takeaway from this epic finale is “Welcome to my world”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bloodshot: Reborn #10

Jan 27, 2016

Bloodshot Reborn #10 holds a lot of potential exploring another pivotal point in Bloodshot's life. He's fighting against time and it will be fun to see how he could possibly come out on top.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Bloodshot: Reborn #11

Feb 24, 2016

Bloodshot Reborn #11 cranks the dial to eleven and it is no longer Ray we are left with. One unfortunate event after the next we were subjected to in order to experience the despair of this future and they didn't pull a punch.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Bloodshot: Reborn #13

May 25, 2016

‘The Analog Man' comes to an end with Bloodshot Reborn #13 and it was marvelous. Character driven, emotion driven, gave us more action than we deserved, and perfect execution throughout leading us straight into the next story being ‘Deathmate'.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bloodshot: Reborn #16

Aug 31, 2016

Bloodshot Reborn #16 is a step up as each issue is progressively better than the last. We are working up to something big and you want to root for Bloodshot all the way as he proves he is not as obsolete as those like Kozol make him out to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Bloodshot: Reborn #18

Oct 5, 2016

Bloodshot Reborn #18 brings another chapter to an end while setting us up for what comes next. After what they have done with these characters here, I'm sure a lot of us want to see what the Valiant Universe has in store for them when they jump into their next war. That is hoping they all make the journey back to land.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Blossoms 666 #1

Jan 23, 2019

Blossoms 666 #1 is a new story with potential. This is the Blossom Twins as you have never seen them before. There will be some work that has to be put into the second issue to give us something to be fully invested in, but for now Blossoms 666 is a chilling start to a new brand of horror lurking within the heart of Riverdale.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Blossoms 666 #3

Apr 17, 2019

Blossoms 666 #3 shook things up for the best when the stakes couldn't be higher. Each Blossom is working their own angle, and the only question is how far they will be willing to go to win. Does it end with corrupting Betty Cooper? Or will a twin have to be taken out in order to assure victory? Only time will tell!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Blossoms 666 #4

May 29, 2019

Blossoms 666 #4 was for the most part all about Julian, and there was no better time to finally get to know this surprise new character. With that said, not everything is known, and I'm anxious to get to know the full story as well. As they say, the devil is in the details.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Blossoms 666 #5

Jul 17, 2019

Overall, it could have been better, but you do understand the intent at the same time. Blossoms 666 #5 was an interesting conclusion to this part of their game. This is unique in the realm of What If for the Archie Universe. Who would have ever thought of a version of Riverdale where the richest family had this much audacity to play with people's lives as if they were actual toys?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Book Of Death #1

Jul 15, 2015

Book of Death #1 drove us straight into the action and this is yet another event you want to follow in its entirety. Things will only get worse from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Book Of Death #2

Aug 18, 2015

If you are not reading Book of Death from Valiant then you are missing out on a memorable event. Read it to see just what kind of force can single-handily mop the floor with the Valiant Universe's best, read it to see what it means to be a Geomancer, and how far Gilad will go to protect Tama.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Book Of Death #3

Sep 23, 2015

Progress is made through Book of Death #3 as we approach the last stretch of this event. A lot of ground will need to be covered in the final issue, though we at least go into it with a full understanding of the plot and this possible future.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Book Of Death #4

Oct 21, 2015

Book of Death #4 is a beautiful conclusion to this event which shows again that you don't need to drag out a story or make tie-ins necessary to read in order to enjoy. In four issues they created a memorable story with stunning visuals between the present and future. Valiant you appreciate that much more because event after event they give you a reason to want to pay for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Book Of Death: The Fall of Harbinger #1

Sep 30, 2015

If you are reading Book of Death, then Book of Death – Fall of Harbinger #1 is another must read tie-in as it hits you just as hard as the others. Fall of Bloodshot, Ninjak, Harbinger, you care for how they die and they all passed in a manner most acceptable to their character. Everyone dies at some point, and this is how they go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Book Of Death: The Fall Of X-O Manowar #1

Oct 21, 2015

After reading Book of Death – The Fall of X-O Manowar, a fellow editor and I both agree that Valiant Comics should make one book exploring more of what the Book of Death future has to offer. This is the end of the X-O Manowar, yet it feels like the start of something new. Something that doesn't have to end with Book of Death. Maybe this will be the future of the Valiant Universe. Though until that point it would be cool to see what exactly these heroes have been through up to that point. These stories make readers care about those things even if we know there isn't enough time to go in-depth.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Bounce #1

Jun 22, 2013

David Messina's style shows to be very smooth, something I feel fits this type of story and hero. What stands out most is the effects that change between feeling like it's actually a comic and the inverted colors. Overall it's not as bad as some make it out to be. Sure it's not something that wows you for a first issue, but it is still interesting and shows some potential for issues to come. Nothing big came out of this issue, but this is something you want to follow because something will come out of this and of course more is to be unraveled about the story later on.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Bounce #2

Jun 27, 2013

Aside from this the art remains solid, standing out is the comic book style the other world brings. Still unclear what that world is but both the design and layout of it looks very unique to this book. This includes those negative effects that show the transition from this world and the real world. In the end the issue leaves you feeling a bit unsatisfied, but it still has potential if the story can be more condensed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Bounce #3

Jul 25, 2013

This story proves to be just as mature as Joe Casey has said it is. For most of this issue things were pretty settle, as settle as they can get, and then the next thing you know people are being battered and torn in half by a new powered guy who looks like a monster. The best thing to come out of this situation is seeing Jasper jump into action and the way he did definitely reminds you of Spider-Man.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Bounce #4

Aug 22, 2013

As I said before, the story has become more condensed. And now that things have slowed down as well, it allows more explorations and focus on not only Jasper, but the intent of the story as a whole. Especially the military as they are trying to find the source and world where those powers originate. If you felt that the book was fuzzy on meaning, you should go back to the second issue and make your way back up knowing it only gets better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Bounce #5

Sep 18, 2013

Overall good pacing as the story continues to unfold. The rules of this world are set, we are now to be properly introduced to the other world, and everything is slowly falling into place as the once confusing story is easier to make sense of. If you had dropped this book because you were lost, definitely stay with it because you might like what you find an understanding.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Bounce #6

Oct 23, 2013

Overall this was a very solid issue. Ending with The Vamp makes her big move against The Bounce. Now things are coming full circle as all different sides to this story are now having some influence on each other and a crazy new world is now about to get a bit crazier. What does this story have in store for Jasper? Who knows, but lets hope it's not his end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Bounce #7

Nov 16, 2013

Overall this is what we should want to see more of from The Bounce. David Messina does a great job capturing the intense nature of this issue. The despair of it all considering we are supposed to be seeing how this world is being turned upside down and exposed after the emergence of those such as Jasper. Characterization was what this story had been needing, and it came at a great time where you needed to know what went on within their heads to continue with its progression. Nothing is as it seems and the suspense Casey creates makes you feel a lot more invested to question what comes next. You'd already figure things are going to get worse before they get better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bounce #8

Dec 18, 2013

This issue has definitely made some progress transitioning from how the last issue ended. The only problem that comes out of this issue is that while you find some clarity, you are left again wondering what Jasper will do next. We know he seeks answers, though his lack of direction can be somewhat puzzling at this point. In the end you see that this story is slowly reaching it's climax. You can question the intentions though have faith that everything will make sense in the grand scheme with the note that this issue ends on. It is an interesting way that this issue ended.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Bounce #9

Jan 29, 2014

Things are really looking up for this book as everyone is getting closer to the answers they have seeked since the start. The development of the plot is excellent because nothing is just given to you and instead you are aware of only what you need to know. This is definitely a turning point for the story because now there is a simple direction we are led in. Something linear that creates more interactions for Jasper when others have met untimely fates. Again if you are not reading this book now you are missing out on a great story and stunning interior art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Bounce #10

Feb 26, 2014

It is when you reach this issue that you truly feel that The Bounce has truly grasped you. You wouldn't want to miss this issue because for things to be coming full circle now means that you will be in for that climax to this story that dares to take you where other superhero books have not. Whatever comes next will really define where Jasper goes from here and that depends on how he deals with the confrontation he finds himself in at the end. Just one of the many reasons why if you're reading this now that you should want to pick up that next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Bounce #11

Mar 26, 2014

The Bounce continues to get better with each passing issue as the real threat reveals itself. We have our answers, we have our cause, and we have our master plan set in motion which will determine the future of this book. This was a well planned story which just needed that time to grow and give you something meaningful as you processed the mysteries it held. I really hope that the end to this chapter in Jasper's life delivers because what's to come looks big.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Bounce #12

May 14, 2014

The Bounce #12 ends in a fashion that signals a conclusion, yet raises an eyebrow to the possibility of more to come. I'd hope that there is more to come because this story arc felt like an origins for Jasper. As if there's more in this world Joe Casey and David Messina created to explore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Brain Boy: The Men from G.E.S.T.A.L.T. #1

May 20, 2014

Brain Boy: The Men from G.E.S.T.A.L.T. #1 is a great start to something bigger for Brain Boy as he starts to meet his match. This could have easily been another simple smash and grab where you know Brain Boy has the enemy beat, yet this twist here offers a different approach. Whatever happens next is surely something we haven't seen before and with that said we can only hope that whatever note this story left off on with the last story arc manages to be addressed somewhere between the second and fourth issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Brain Boy: The Men from G.E.S.T.A.L.T. #2

Jun 18, 2014

Brain Boy: The Men From G.E.S.T.A.L.T. #2 shows some progress, not too much, but enough as things start to escalate. For a mini series it certainly isn't something too demanding of our need for a grand scheme. There is a build up and we already know what this is all leading up to from the first issue. The pieces are falling into place and we just have to stay tuned to figure out why things happened the way they did.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Britannia (2016) #1

Sep 21, 2016

Britannia #1 is another new story that was worth the wait. This creative team is engaging with the story of a Detectioner who has gotten much more than he bargained for. You want that next issue just to see what this one man can accomplish being groomed for just this very task and role in the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Britannia (2016) #2

Oct 12, 2016

Britannia #2 dives deeper into this mental thriller giving us more investment in a world where you don't really expect to expect the unexpected. Solid and steady progression in the story and even better character development all the way through.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Britannia (2016) #4

Dec 14, 2016

Like any of the other stories Valiant has created for us recently, Britannia became another must read as one you don't want to underestimate for the things unknown. You hold tight to the unexpected, the unpredictability, and the fun in a journey where the destination is only as good as the obstacles that get you there. The way Britannia ends it seems like they have plans for this story to see another volume, and to that I would say bring on the next big case for Antonius the Detectioner.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #1

Jan 23, 2019

Our welcome back to the Hellmouth for the first time was indeed worth the wait. My confidence about this new start to Buffy The Vampire Slayer was shaky up to this point, but right now I feel that we are already in a comfortable place after the events of this first issue. This was endearing, it had action, and it reminded us of the true vulnerabilities these characters faced in their early days.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #2

Feb 27, 2019

If you weren't invested in Buffy the Vampire Slayer after the first issue, the second issue brings out more of the potential that this series has to offer. I mean, who would be crazy to still need a reason to pick up a new issue of Buffy? If you're a fan, then you know what you want from this series, and a new experience just sweetens the deal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #3

Mar 13, 2019

Buffy the Vampire Slayer #3 set the bar for supernatural encounters in this series. A great balance of being endearing and action-packed, just how you like this series. Once again I can't recommend this enough as a series that doesn't fail to hit the mark in giving you everything from the early days and so much more. Anyone who says a story can't have more depth in comic form hasn't picked up an issue of Buffy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #4

Apr 17, 2019

As one door closes, another one opens. This new story arc gave us a lot to look forward to from Buffy and friends as they take their next steps in finding balance in their lives. No stone was left unturned whether it was what went on within the halls, at home, or in their heads.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #5

Jun 5, 2019

Talk about an emotional roller coaster. Buffy the Vampire Slayer #5 impressed me with how bold this creative team has been to only five issues in put a main character in this kind of danger. One does not simply turn into a vampire and turn back. To say that Buffy and Willow experienced a shockwave of grief from this tragedy almost feels like an understatement. As I've said before, new situations are what will continue to make this trip back to the early days worthwhile.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #6

Jul 3, 2019

Credit where it is due that this creative team is willing to take Buffy and company to new places as well. Buffy the Vampire Slayer #6 proved that even at this stage these kids are willing to go above and beyond to save the lives of those closest to them. This issue was overall adventurous, engaging, and clever for the twists thrown in here and there.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #7

Aug 7, 2019

Buffy the Vampire Slayer #7 brilliantly captures your heart through the direct consequence to Willow giving up half of her soul to save Xander. Both of these character have been through a lot, and for better or for worse we know that these hard times are what will mold them into the pillars of idolization that they will become in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #8

Sep 4, 2019

The Buffy the Vampire Slayer prelude for Hellmouth was a great set-up for how and why this event is called what it is. No time was wasted at all in bringing everything full circle between the mysterious circumstance of Joyce Summers' new museum exhibit, and the dreams both Buffy and Xander have had warning them of what might possibly come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #9

Nov 6, 2019

By the end of this issue there was a huge twist they threw our way. Definitely one that was teased, but there was no way to prepare for how they would introduce this new character into the story. This development begs so many questions, and that isn't a bad thing either. Especially when we still don't know what is happening on the other side of the Hellmouth. There could easily be some unforeseen consequences to a slayer crossing over into the other world and leaving their post on Earth. All in all, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #9 gives us confidence in what the tie-ins have to offer outside of Buffy and Angel as the main characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #10

Dec 4, 2019

I don't think I could ever love this book more for what this creative team is currently doing with the series. This is called Buffy the Vampire Slayer, but no one ever said the rest of the characters in Buffy's orbit couldn't stand out in this capacity. Familiar characters matter, new characters get more depth, and they are all offered new situations they never would have faced in the show. This is how you do a tie-in for a crossover event.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #11

Jan 8, 2020

Since the start of the Hellmouth tie-in, there has been no denying how refreshing this story has been following the lives of the rest of The Scoobies and town in a world without Buffy. She couldn't have left at a worst time, but there is no better way to challenge the mettle of these other characters when they only have each other to rely on to save the day.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #12

Feb 5, 2020

To say that the stakes couldn't be higher would be one heck of an understatement after what we got out of Buffy the Vampire Slayer #12. This is that point where you could really say that this is a tie-in worth investing your time in. Getting a new slayer is cool for the fact that Kendra is new altogether, but that was just one piece of many thing which needed to fall into place when it mattered most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #13

Mar 4, 2020

Hellmouth is not the end of Kendra's story, and Buffy the Vampire Slayer #13 should make most of us comfortable with seeing more of her in what's to come. Once again this is a great time to be a Buffy fan when everywhere we turn there is something new to take in. Surely enough we all want to at some point see Faith introduced, though what's wrong with shaking things up where there was actually another slayer activated before her?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #14

May 20, 2020

There was no lie, this issue answers the question of what happened to Buffy. I walked away satisfied with the state she finds herself in, among other changes which have come with a post-Hellmouth world. Overall, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #14 did well to set the tone for everything to follow. Things are going to be different now, and this also creates a lot of room for this creative team to play around with the new possibilities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #15

Jul 1, 2020

Another solid issue after the events of Buffy the Vampire Slayer #15. You would think that the Hellmouth was the worst of the worst that these guys would have to deal with right now, and then you would be wrong. That was just the prelude to much more that Buffy and company would have to deal with. The big question is how they will overcome this with the odds stacked against them so high.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #16

Aug 5, 2020

All in all, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #16 was well-done for the bold move they made to already set things in motion with this supposed big bad. This is one that gets you asking some big questions, because how in the world is Xander still alive? Does this have something to do with the Hellmouth still? Only time will tell!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #17

Sep 2, 2020

Now I don't know if this stand-alone entirely changes everything we knew about the Watchers, but it certain changed a lot that we once knew about Wesley Wyndam-Pryce. Buffy the Vampire Slayer #17 was a solid break from the madness and drama to explore an area of the Buffyverse which was usually neglected in stories past.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #18

Oct 7, 2020

What came of Buffy the Vampire Slayer #18 was a hard sell this month. There were things we needed to see from this story, and sadly that was not delivered. Not in the way that it should or could have been.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #21

Jan 6, 2021

Overall, I was happy to say that Buffy the Vampire Slayer #21 was one of those rare issues from this series which genuinely left me wanting to see more. Though that is only if the plot continues to play to the strengths of untold stories, and we maintain the visual appeal we have received from this particular art team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019) #22

Feb 3, 2021

In the end, Buffy the Vampire Slayer #22 turned out to be one of the better issues, and gives me more hope for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): Every Generation #1

Jun 3, 2020

All in all, if you're a Buffy fan, then Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Every Generation #1 is a must-read. These are the times where new is everything. This book right here offers you a satisfying amount of new content to sink your teeth into. Added depth to a slayer we have already met, a slayer from another culture, and a slayer entangled in the madness Angelus unleashed upon the world during his time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): The Chosen Ones #1

Aug 28, 2019

Buffy the Vampire Slayer: The Chosen Ones #1 is a book worth having in your Buffy collection. There is never a time where it isn't welcoming to see just how many slayers existed before Buffy. They awaken at different ages, different corners of the world, and in different situations. I don't think we have been introduced to one slayer yet who shared in the same experience awakening.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer (2019): Faith #1

Feb 24, 2021

Overall, the secrets of Faith the Vampire Slayer was worth dedicating an issue too. Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Faith #1 gave us plenty to look forward to as Faith's involvement in Sunnydale matters grows.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #1

Mar 19, 2014

With the conclusion to Buffy Season 10 #1 it's definitely time for another game change. From what I've seen I have faith in what this story can accomplish with this new direction. We don't know what to expect, and neither does Buffy and that is a side you want to see from her as she questions how to handle these supposed new rules and how to help her friends who to some extent are picking up the pieces of past personal issues. This isn't to say she's not the same badass because surely she is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #2

Apr 23, 2014

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #2 is a solid issue from its transition with the first. We get to see how they all react to each others presence, the question of why things have been upside down is addressed, and certain characters have their moments which provided needed depth. I believe with what we know now, there is good reason to stick with this book to see what Buffy has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #3

May 21, 2014

This issue of Buffy The Vampire Slayer not only reminds us of the entertainment value that it carries, but it also reminds us that things can easily take a turn for the worst when you let your guard down. We had our comedic interactions between Dawn, Xander and Dracula, but then we also had something more genuine from Buffy and Willow as they tracked down one of those new vampires as a study specimen. Such that you can only get from Buffy and there's no questioning what more you can get out of it as a fan and reader.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #4

Jun 18, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #4 mixes a little old with a little new. While the situation is new, an old face reappears which escalates the problem from what it originally was. The rules are now the least of their problems when they can't fix what the rules have already created.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #5

Jul 23, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #5 gave you a fight to stop Maloker, save Dracula, wrest Xander from Dracula's control, and much more. You wonder how so much can be packed into a single issue and not feel lost, yet this is something you can always expect from the Buffy books and have it transition so well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #6

Aug 20, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #6 is a good start for moving Buffy and the gang along in a struggle that requires them to both be more aware of who they are and what the world needs them to be as adults. There wasn't much action in this issue, but what we got was some necessary preparation of their characters as individuals for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #7

Sep 17, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #7 is another down to Earth story that focuses on two characters who deserve that focus needed for individual growth. We got emotion, humor, and of course action. There could be no action in this issue and you just enjoy it because Spike and Xander are being real with each other. Just like any two guys that are down on their luck when it comes to love.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #8

Oct 22, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #8 is an emotional rollercoaster of an issue that covers a lot of bases between emotional struggles, dealing with the past, and dealing with the worst case scenario when it comes to the Vampyr book.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #9

Nov 19, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #9 brings about an end to “Return to Sunnydale” and hits all the right notes as this series should. We want to grow with these characters and one thing after the other this season they have learned from their mistakes, encounters, the new rules and become that much more of a better person than they were the day before. Gone are the days of teenage drama when that only takes them a step back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #10

Dec 24, 2014

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #10 escalates the problem that is managing the Vampyr book and watching their backs for enemies that have power outside their grasp. The reveal of this new enemy makes you cringe, yet at the same time makes you scratch your head when wondering who this "old friend" is. Just more reason to see where this new story arc takes us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #11

Jan 21, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #11 overall made some big moves and addressed many things you thought this series might not have the time to cover. With a cast of characters this size you'd worry that it would be a rush job to reach every corner of this world both supernatural and personal, but Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #11 proves that there is a plan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #12

Feb 18, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer #12 does a lot for us that keeps us invested in the characters even though the plot surrounding The Sculptor took a backseat. This is that point where we get to see if Buffy and Spike really have changed after all that they have been through. All of them have been tested in some way in this season, and now it's their turn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #13

Mar 18, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #13 shows some changes with characters that you can only agree with. These are people first and slayers, Wicca, geniuses or whatever second. If we can continue on this consistent quality of character driven storylines, damn whenever these forces of evil decide to show their mugs.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #14

Apr 22, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #14 is a step in the right direction overall from a personal approach to Buffy and Spike. This is that example of what makes season 10 of Buffy The Vampire Slayer stand out from the others and the best time for any Buffy fan to jump back into this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #15

May 20, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #15 is a set up for something bigger that can only happen when Buffy The Vampire Slayer and Angel & Faith crossover yet again. There's a lot to look forward to when both worlds have a lot to address before confronting Archaeus.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #16

Jun 17, 2015

The great thing about having Rebekah Isaacs on art as usual is the down to Earth approach she takes to drawing these characters. It's the little things that matter which you take notice of whether it is Buffy's constantly changing hairstyles or everyone elses choice of clothing. Not to mention the dynamic between her and Dan Jackson is notable when taking note of how our cast can be thrown into a fight at any point and you aren't distracted by the supernatural. The colors don't overpower what's going on around those like Willow and Giles, and you certainly enjoy when you are exposed to something new magically. That takes creativity to pull of consistently. Aside from this it is always good to see that visually there are no punches pulled showing what can happen to any of them in the middle of a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #17

Jul 22, 2015

Definitely one of the more favorable issues of Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 so far because this is the main cast in their element. Suited up, armed with their weapon of choice, and doing what they do best. For example, it wasn't too shocking though equally as exciting when seeing what Andrew brings to the table with his tech. With as many characters that are involved in this story, it as always is impressive when there is a solid use of space to make sure everyone looks relevant. To see that is just as important as their conversations with one another and the art team nailed it to the very end. Beyond this you have to like the way Archaeus is captured as the villain because it's what he tends to have up his sleeve that is most dangerous compared to taking on the heroes upfront.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #18

Aug 19, 2015

Archaeus himself has been a well written villain as well. One that one would hope we haven't seen the last of. He came in a plan, and he executed with killer intent. A villain you appreciate when he makes the heroes think on their feet. Ultimately will lose, but doesn't go down without a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #19

Sep 23, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #19 is an emotional rollercoaster. Yet again another example of how this creative team have knocked it out of the park with this season 10. It's not just about fighting evil anymore, it's about living their lives the best they can as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #20

Oct 21, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #20 aside from that one question about Anya is perfect for everything else. The twist about Anya's ghost, the subject of rape, and the emotional weight of it all which makes season 10 so beautifully written.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #22

Dec 23, 2015

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #22 does not beat around the bushes that adulthood is no joke when it comes to moving forward or getting left behind. Growth and personal growth means a lot in the grand scheme of life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #23

Jan 20, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #23 was big for Andrew, though also for many others as well. As focused as things seemed they would be towards Andrew, it was the smart decision to make sure there was a balance in everyone else's story that is connected to the choices he makes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #24

Feb 17, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #24 upped the stakes in this fight in a way that you don't expect, bringing back that challenge the Hell Lords create when real life is kicking their butts to such an extent already.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #25

Mar 23, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #25 was a great emphasis of what they all still risk every day they are out there fighting the supernatural which aim to destroy their world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #26

Apr 20, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #26 shook The Scoobies in a way they may never be able to recover. Seeing that for as much good as they have tried to do, things have only gotten so much worse. And an interesting contrast compared to the lives Xander and Dawn are now living in a hell dimension.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #27

May 18, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #27 is where we hit that boiling point because you have no idea just how this will possibly end. Nothing could possibly be the same by the time we reach the finale. On their own, overpowered, barely able to work together anymore, and self-destructive. Not a good recipe for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #28

Jun 22, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #28 is a big step up from everything our heroes have been through since the battle with the Hell Lords. Taking us back to a place where we have found hope and optimism in familiar bonds. The same kind of atmosphere that made you fall in love with season 10 in the first place.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #29

Jul 20, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #29 hits the escalation point and this creative team does not pull punches at all. If you were looking for the fight that would unquestionably define the future of the Scoobies, it starts here. We may be getting a season 11 of Buffy The Vampire Slayer, but no one said we will get there in one piece.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 10 #30

Aug 24, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 10 #30 is the kind of finale you dream of. Everyone always wants to go blockbuster big. Big from start to finish. Though that has never been necessary for Buffy. All any fan or reader could ever desire is simply great storytelling. That is what we got along with consistently pleasing artwork since issue one. I for one am ready for them to bring on season 11 because what could go wrong? This is life for the Scoobies, and it is a life we can relate to on some levels.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #1

Nov 23, 2016

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #1 sets us on a new direction where there is just as much to lose this time around if not more when peace has been broken. No one ever said maintaining peace between two worlds was going to be that simple, and they are going to learn this the hard way pretty soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #2

Dec 21, 2016

For Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #2, Buffy maybe facing being divided from the people for whom she cares the most is the least of her worries. Any fan right now might find themselves hurting by the end of this issue, but you ask how can things can get worse and this is what you get. From here hopefully we take that next step in a more personal perspective from the supernatural world now that the government has made their move.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #3

Jan 25, 2017

This creative team is pulling no punches. Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #3 took big steps in addressing just what Buffy and friends are up against. And more so what they are willing to sacrifice for the greater good. The world can fall apart any day, but when it goes through drastic change it is a call to action for the scoobies when all their accomplishments are about to be for nothing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #4

Feb 15, 2017

Things can only get worse before they get any better by the end of Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #4. The writing here has been spot on with o much maturity displayed in how Buffy, Spike and Willow handle keeping themselves and those around them safe. This doesn't come without risk, but they couldn't have made it this far if they weren't ready.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #5

Mar 22, 2017

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #5 really stood as a statement for what it is Buffy, Willow and Dawn are fighting for. As Spike said himself they are going to have to make some compromises and this issue was only a taste. It's good that at the end of the day this creative team is not looking to hold our hands as this isn't the kind of story where you should hold back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #6

Apr 19, 2017

What more can I say than I love season 11 of Buffy. It really was only a matter of time before the world decided they didn't want the supernatural living among them. Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #6 was the reality check that everyone needed. This was a game of survival the minute the world decided there needed to be a camp for these people and creatures, and the stakes have indeed been raised.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #7

May 24, 2017

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #7 kills me because these are the kind of decisions our Scoobies have to make in a world that just isn't welcoming to who and what they are anymore. This creative team took a real problem, a first world situation for people who are treated different and turned it into one of the most heart-crushing developments in the Buffyverse so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #8

Jun 21, 2017

Right in the feels sound proper after you read Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #8. This has been one tragedy after the next for our heroes, but that is a day in the life. What we all fail to realize is how much Buffy and the Scoobie redefine what it means to be a hero whether you have power or not. It's what you do that nobody else will, damning the consequences.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #9

Jul 19, 2017

Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11 #9 shook things up in a big way. This war is far from over, but every obstacle they have fought through proved why they are the heroes who you shouldn't underestimate. The power helps you overcome barriers, but its the skill, experience, character, and friends that get you through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #10

Aug 30, 2017

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #10 is a wake-up call to why stopping the draining of magic from the world is now more urgent than ever before. Giving us a taste of what magic looks like in the hands of the government is a step in the right direction when the worst is yet to come, and what has already is terrifying.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #11

Sep 27, 2017

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #11 is where we hit a turning point in the war for the world of magic, but also where we start to reach a climax. We've seen magic in the wrong hand, but never like this. Never with that drive to have it all with little consequence for the world around you.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 #12

Oct 25, 2017

You cheered, you went through the motions, and you panicked at the edge of your seat. This finale to Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 11 was everything and the full package. Season 11 has been a thrilling experience from start to finish and they never once let up on the punches. Buffy and The Scoobies redefine what it means to be a hero whether you have power or not. It's what you do that nobody else will, and damning the consequences. Overall this creative team took a real problem, a first world situation for people who are treated different and turned it into one of the most heart-crushing developments in the Buffyverse so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11: Giles #1

Feb 28, 2018

Buffy Season 11: Giles #1 had a shaky start, though the story evened out by the end. This is a new experience for Giles and this is a great time to get into what other ways he will have to adjust being this age again. At the end of the day it is cool just to know that this is what Giles was up to when the craziness with the Safe Zone was unfolding.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11: Giles #2

Mar 28, 2018

Buffy Season 11: Giles #2 was a solid step forward for a second issue. Progress was made furthering the mystery behind the disappearances in this school, while at the same time furthering our exploration of what really goes through the head of this teenage Giles. He's clearly become much more than simply being the guardian or magical assistance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11: Giles #3

Apr 25, 2018

Buffy Season 11: Giles #3 was the strongest issue of this series so far. The plot may not be straightforward or too captivating of your attention, but the character exploration more than makes up for that right now. This issue was a good reminder of how rich the Buffyverse can be when you're not focusing on the usual Scoobies or familiar faces.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Buffy The Vampire Slayer Season 11: Giles #4

May 23, 2018

By the end of Buffy Season 11: Giles #4, it was the emotional weight of the story when it came to Giles and Roux that really stood out more than anything else. The plot honestly suffered from lack of interest put into in contrast to having this mysterious vampire with a past and present to unravel. If someone else tackles a story like this, then it will need to be able to strike a better balance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #1

Jun 20, 2018

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #1 was everything that you could have hoped for it to be. This was a welcome back into Buffy and the Scoobies world, and it warms the heart to see how growing up has really defined who they have become. Now normally things dealing with time travel wouldn't interest me, but this here is what you can produce when the plot is done right in a supernatural world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #2

Jul 18, 2018

Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #2 was a roller coaster of emotions as these heroes are faced with what they know happens and what they are willing to do to defy destiny. By the end of this issue I found much more comfort in how this creative team aims to handle the theme of time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #3

Aug 22, 2018

Through the events of Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #3, it seems that destiny is not written in stone, but was it the twist you were prepared for? That is what shook up a story that really would have played into the concept of fate a little strong if this issue ended any other way. I'm glad that they found such a crushing way to keep readers on their toes. I'm sure that there is no one who isn't dying after putting this issue down to see what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #4

Sep 19, 2018

By the end of Buffy the Vampire Slayer Season 12: The Reckoning #4, I felt like I was ready to put the book down and say I'm hyped for the new show. This final season was the perfect love letter to fans and this series. To see the way they have grown, fought for each other, fought for a better future. A true coming of age story that challenged what it is like connecting to a world that you're either prepared for, or have to adjust to. The supernatural world is a doozie, but so is the real world, and who couldn't forget every moment where we could relate to their hurdles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #2

Nov 13, 2019

Expect the unexpected, but expect horrors nonetheless. Hellmouth #2 introduced us to a new world of fighting evil. One where the true obstacles exist in your head. In the case of Buffy and Angel, that is more than enough obstacles to overcome. The best takeaway was understanding that this is all treading new territory, no matter how experienced you think you are.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #3

Dec 11, 2019

Just when you think you knew where all of this was leading to, the events of Hellmouth #3 shakes up your expectations. Not a bad thing either when this is a story where you should want to expect the unexpected. I think we've all come to a point now as fans of Buffy The Vampire Slayer where we know that there will always be something more to worry about than a vampire.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #4

Jan 15, 2020

As the penultimate issue, Hellmouth #4 met expectations when getting us to that point where things could not have gotten any worse for these heroes who get in their own way more than the big bad herself. It should be very interesting to see what can turn the tides of this situation when it is almost impossible right now to see the light at the end of the tunnel.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Buffy the Vampire Slayer/Angel: Hellmouth #5

Feb 12, 2020

With the conclusion of Hellmouth #5, BOOM! Studios and this creative team nail their first major event for the Buffy franchise. If you told me this is where we would find ourselves a year later after the debut? I would not have believed you. So far this franchise is in good hands with creators who know how to satisfy us with familiar content, while at the same time introducing us to so much more that is new territory.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Spike: Into the Light #1

Jul 17, 2014

Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Spike " Into the Light is a story that you want to read not only for the fact that James Marsters writes it, but because you like Spike. James Marsters is the best person to handle the character since he played him, and he was on the spot from beginning to end. There was an emotional connection and a sense of realism to him that made you convinced that as a vampire he has a soul.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Willow (2020) #1

Jul 8, 2020

Hellmouth was the starting point for a lot of characters, but none more than Willow. When you know already what the future holds for her, it makes you wonder how this franchise will get her to that point. It all starts with what Willow experiences in this limited-time series. Everything about this story is already a breath of fresh air. A new setting, new characters, and more unique situations to explore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Willow (2020) #2

Aug 12, 2020

After the events of Willow #2, it wasn't hard to believe that it might be easier just to stay in Abhainn. There's a magic to this place which can't be explained, but you can see it in the effect it leaves on the people of this town. I believe we're all just waiting for this to be too good to be true.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Buffy the Vampire Slayer: Willow (2020) #3

Sep 9, 2020

Overall, another solid issue of Willow. This isn't a story to sleep on if you're looking for something from the Buffyverse right now that is genuinely its own thing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Buffy: The High School Years - Freaks and Geeks #1

Jun 1, 2016

Buffy: The High School Years " Freaks & Geeks is not one you want to miss if you are invested in the Buffyverse. Any should be on board with the idea of possibly continuing with books like this from the early days, and with this creative team. This made a perfect edition to the ever-growing book collection of seasons following after the show.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Buffy: The High School Years - Glutton for Punishment #1

Oct 19, 2016

Buffy: The High School Years – Glutton for Punishment is another story worthy of adding the collection of Buffy stories that make up the Buffyverse. It would be a shame if they did not keep it going from here because these have been a treat so far. Especially during a time where we are still waiting for the new season to begin.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Cable (2020) #1

Mar 11, 2020

This is definitely Cable like we have never seen him before. Up to this point I didn't think twice about this younger version of him, and yet this first issue breathes new life into what we were only seeing on the surface. Cable #1 is easy to get into, offers a new perspective on Krakoa, and provides excellent set-up for big developments coming for this island.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Cable (2020) #2

Jul 29, 2020

Overall, a solid issue of Cable for issue #2. While I may be for this younger Cable, I do think that they need to do a bit more with the story in the next issue to assure us that this book is worth our investment for more than the first arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Captain America (2012) #25

Oct 1, 2014

Captain America #25 brings one chapter closed for Steve and Sam, while opening the doors for many new opportunities in their new roles. The mantle has finally been passed, with as much hype as they built up to this reveal, we now have our new Captain America. Only time will tell what this means for the Marvel Universe as everyone has something different to offer in that position of authority and symbolism.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #1

Nov 13, 2014

Captain America and the Mighty Avengers #1 is an intriguing start for the series when you know what big things are heading the Mighty Avenger's way when their message to the world might give them more than they bargained for. Captain America has a whole new mission statement in mind for Earth's Mightiest Heroes, and what he wants just might kill them. That is the selling point that will continue to differ Mighty Avengers from other team books out there right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #2

Nov 26, 2014

Whatever comes next, Captain America and the Mighty Avengers #2 dropped the biggest bomb on fans when you know the eventuality of this war between Avengers will get messy. Especially when the Avengers both have everything to gain and lose from making sure they are the sole heroes of Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #5

Feb 19, 2015

Captain America & The Mighty Avengers #5 shows again how much potential comes with this team when together and apart. It is impressive that Al Ewing can handle so much going on at once and still make it all connect without distracting too much from the bigger picture.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #6

Mar 18, 2015

Captain America and The Mighty Avengers #6 takes some high risk with a story that challenges the continuity and what we thought we knew of what's going on. The next issue will be very important in selling whatever is in store for us and The Mighty Avengers when their backs look to be against the wall.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #7

Apr 16, 2015

This issue is a must read when everything comes together and makes sense. We get action, character moments that are memorable, and a conclusion to story points which had questionable ends. Obviously Secret Wars may have some influence on how these storylines wrapped up, but it is good writing by Al Ewing that brought everything together in relevance to each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #8

May 13, 2015

It's issues like this which makes you hopeCaptain America and The Mighty Avengers is a title surviving Secret Wars. If it doesn't continue, a lot of really good characters won't have a book and that would be terrible. Very useful heroes left with untapped potential like Monica if that were the case.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Captain America And The Mighty Avengers #9

Jun 10, 2015

With the flip of the last page you have to applaud the effort put into Captain America and The Mighty Avengers because the conclusion of this title marks this as one of the last titles standing at the end of the world. That is a fact pointed out by Al Ewing and it would be a challenge to argue against that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Captain Marvel (2016) #4

Apr 21, 2016

Captain Marvel #4 keeps up with that escalation of events which in turn keeps us at the edge of our seats. It is all or nothing at this point and hopefully they don't let up on this great balance between character writing and plot development.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Captain Marvel (2016) #5

May 27, 2016

Captain Marvel #5 wraps up the first arc and I do have to say it leaves you wanting more. Captain Marvel is not the hero you want to sleep on. She gets around, she enjoys what she does even when it gets stressful, and she's a lot more down to Earth than your average hero. This was an excellent set up to what this will have in store for us as we also have the best cast for her to work off of. First time in a while you can say you really like Brandt which is an accomplishment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Captain Marvel (2016) #6

Jun 30, 2016

Captain Marvel #6 may be where the tie-in to Civil War II begins, but this team knows how to keep your attention when this is still Carol's show. With the Gages you knew that this would still put character writing above all, and that is more than enough reason to keep Captain Marvel on your pull list for the time being.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Captain Marvel (2016) #7

Jul 29, 2016

Captain Marvel #7 pulls us deeper into Civil War II, but continues to keep one foot on what readers still want from Captain Marvel as a solo book. Great balance between character and story development. Better on character development when honestly you want to root for Carol just for her heart being in the right place. If you read some other solo books then you might see where the problems arise, but until then you enjoy the direction this is heading from her point of view.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Captain Marvel (2016) #8

Aug 25, 2016

Lonely at The Top really begins to live up to the name when we are genuinely starting to understand the pressure Carol has been placed under in Captain Marvel #8. She didn't ask for those who cause her actions to be questioned, she didn't ask for the questions that challenge her decisions in general. It's just what happens when you are at the top and your every move is under a microscope.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Captain Marvel (2019) #1

Jan 9, 2019

Captain Marvel #1 is a debut with so much potential for where Carol Danvers goes from her re-entry into Earth. To say that the life of Captain Marvel is a full plate is an understatement, but half the fun with this hero is following every obstacle and challenge which pushes her to stand tall. You can't always get up if you aren't facing real problems.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Captain Midnight #7

Jan 22, 2014

Eduardo Francisco really knows how to handle the action that this story delivers. What I liked most was seeing how battered Captain Midnight came to be during his fight with Hollow as the rest of that Memorial was being torn apart as well. Stefani Rennee also is great on colors with everything from the explosions to knowing how much to use throughout. If you are interested in following this new world that Dark Horse is creating, Captain Midnight should definitely be the first on your list. The most established superhero so far and one that shows that being a hero is more than just having powers. There are many layers to this story and the element of time makes it one you want to invest your time in to see how everything connects, changing your perspective of everything going on right now in this continuity.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Captain Midnight #8

Feb 26, 2014

A solid issue that follows up after Captain Midnight starts questioning the whereabouts of Chuck. Not as exciting as everything else that has happened recently, but both a necessary and vital part of this story that needed to be addressed to push Captain Midnight towards what he has to do next now that he's in the present. He's frustrated and in a state where he's unpredictable, so I'd say that there is a good reason to want to know what he will do when he finally confronts Fury Shark.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Captain Midnight #9

Mar 26, 2014

This was a solid issue that takes to showing how much Captain Midnight cares for his friends, Chuck in particular. While I did say that Rick's commentary was an interesting approach, getting through to the end I much rather would have preferred not to have to read it when I was more drawn towards the action. With that said this was the most intense issue I have read up to this point and I love how well it was handled to the very end, the dialogue from Captain Midnight especially as he came to terms with everything he had ignored.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Captain Midnight #10

Apr 30, 2014

If this issue of Captain Midnight was set to show us what was at stake in this fight, the message is clear. We have our connections to Project Black Sky, we have our revelations, our reunion, and that tragic moment that was inevitable. Captain Midnight is hitting all the right notes and I can only hope that continues as this title is the bridge to the rest of the books ongoing at this time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Captain Midnight #11

May 28, 2014

With the conclusion to Captain Midnight #11, there's so much more to look forward to and no better time to get invested in this story before things start to blow up in proportion. Surely what this is leading up to is nothing you want to miss if you have been itching to see a legitimate team-up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Captain Midnight #12

Jun 25, 2014

With the conclusion of Captain Midnight #12, we are given a Jim who isn't new to being a hero, but now faces the burden of being one. That is how you handle writing a real hero and why this new chapter for Captain Midnight should be defining for the rest of the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain Midnight #13

Jul 30, 2014

Captain Midnight #13 continues to challenge the idea of the type of hero the world needs. As the foundation for this world of heroes around him, this is the idealistic storytelling which doesn't lose focus on what is most relevant to progression. Surely things will only get worse before they get better, and this issue gives reason to go along for the ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Captain Midnight #14

Aug 27, 2014

Captain Midnight #14 is the series you want to be reading if you are looking for a hero that captures everything pure about heroism, even if it also comes as a weakness. The way this issue ends leaves us with many questions of the character's fates all across the board, but that is more than enough reason to anticipate what Captain Midnight #15 has in store for us.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Captain Midnight #15

Sep 24, 2014

Captain Midnight #15 is the end of something memorable, and the start of something new. An embrace that was built upon with care for not only what it meant for Jim as Captain Midnight, but for those who have stepped up in either his shadow or their own as heroes in this world that is growing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Captain Midnight #16

Oct 29, 2014

Captain Midnight #16 is an issue worth reading just for the heck of it as a Halloween special when Joshua Williamson is able to take advantage of the opportunity to not only gives us more of Jones, but to challenge both he and Captain Midnight's belief in magic.That is something we haven't gotten from this series so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain Midnight #18

Dec 24, 2014

Captain Midnight #18 is the confrontation which was an eventuality since the day Chuck made his deal with Fury Shark. This issue shows the extent of how far he will go to make a change in the world. The only question left to ask is at what cost will this come at. The responsibility of power has never been stronger till now.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Captain Midnight #19

Jan 28, 2015

Captain Midnight #19 is an intense moment and end to what is only part of a bigger conspiracy. One that will push Jim to take the direct action which had been neglected for a lack of clarity on the big picture.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Captain Midnight #20

Feb 25, 2015

Captain Midnight #20 is the start of what will lead to that bigger picture and fight for the future. We know the who, and the why, though now we wait for all the pieces to come into play when that moment of conflict begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain Midnight #21

Mar 25, 2015

Captain Midnight #21 is the start to big things to come for our heroes as they look for trouble, and trouble finds them. How they hold up as a team is anyone's guess, though we'll have to wait till the next issue to see how well they is pulled off and executed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain Midnight #22

Apr 29, 2015

Captain Midnight #22 is another exciting issue that brings us closer to that dreadful end of the series and crossover. There is a lot to take from this issue knowing that the Archon is holding nothing back now to get what he wants from Captain Midnight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Captain Midnight #23

May 27, 2015

Captain Midnight #23 sets us up for the end and who really knows what that has in store for us knowing that nothing after the last issue tells you the fate of any of these characters in the Dark Horse shared world. But if we know anything from this issue, there will be many pieces to pick up when all is said and done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Captain Midnight #24

Jun 24, 2015

Just like the issue before, this one had a lot going on and yet there was a good handle of capturing every angle of the fight. Whether it was Cap's fight against Archon or the rest taking on the Chosen, the art team were able to fit it all so that you knew all of this was going on at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #0.1

Oct 31, 2013

As somewhat of a prologue into Cataclysm, this issue did what it set forth to do. Earth and the Ultimates are now aware of what's heading their way, they know the risk, what's a stake, and now the first pain of loss. That's only a small fraction of what's to come and considering the state of the Ultimate Universe up to this point, expect nothing short of heroes at their best and nothing held back.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #1

Nov 7, 2013

Great way of showing just how screwed Earth may be that there is a cosmic level threat such as Galactus on Earth and no one is prepared. Considering everything they have been through up to this point, you just know that fighting Galactus will bring about the same excitement which makes this book one that keeps you at the edge of your seat. Anything can happen and we just have to hope that it isn't the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Cataclysm: The Ultimates Last Stand #5

Feb 27, 2014

Cataclysm " The Ultimates' Last Stand #5 is the ending to the event that fans of the Ultimate Universe deserved. So much happened here that you can only get from the Ultimate Universe and only from someone like Bendis writing it. Call it dramatic or anti-climatic, but this is how you do a story about the end of the world, anything else you have gotten is a tease compared to this when no risk is taken. Now we are just left to see how these heroes who remain pick up the pieces in Survive. A new generation of heroes and Ultimates is upon us and the end of this story is only the start of a new to begin.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cataclysm: Ultimate Spider-Man #1

Nov 16, 2013

Overall, Cataclysm: Ultimate Spider-Man #1 should be what puts these heroes to the test when standing against what very well may be their end. Between Cloak, Dagger, and Bombshell, they really got all the characterization they could have needed in this issue. It's all about progression for those like themselves and all for this moment which we hope isn't their last. The style of Dave Marquez again is very welcomed. His attention to details between the characters and the environment is on point. Then aside from that the coloring is clean with a lot of variation for depth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Cataclysm: Ultimate X-Men #1

Nov 27, 2013

Overall this is a great introduction for the X-Men as Cataclysm begins. A fight that probably is not their own they find themselves stuck in the middle. The only part of this story that might throw you off is how they end up where they are by the end of the issue. It does now connect the events unfolding now to Hunger, yet also leaves you with a lot of questions. Hopefully the next issue brings more clarity to their new situation, but that's not to say that this wasn't exciting as they fight for their lives against the Gah Lak Tus swarm.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Cataclysm: Ultimate X-Men #3

Jan 22, 2014

In the end, the future of the X-Men and all mutantkind rested on Rogue's shoulder's and it brought out the best in her. To return home, a sacrifice hadt be made, and while you had an idea of who that may be, it did not change the impact it could have on you and the story. Overall this felt like a story of self-sacrifice and delivered on that from start to finish. This could possibly be the end for the Ultimate X-Men as a whole since there hasn't been any sign of a relaunch, but it was a story worth telling and following just to be given an ending like this. You would be missing out to dismiss this title for being a tie-in because it stands on it's own while giving us everything from these characters that they have to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cataclysm: Ultimates #2

Dec 11, 2013

Cataclysm: Ultimate Comics Ultimates #2 brings out the chaotic nature of this event. The perspective that we see it in is more on a ground level, but that just shows how grim things look for the Ultimates. As each of them fall that's just another new threat they have to face that is more dangerous than the rest. This doesn't stop Hercules who is really able to let loose and I think both Joshua Hale Fialkov and Mukesh Singh are able to have fun with that. With that said if the action is not enough, you may be left wanting more from this. Yes it does live up to the name, but this could easily end up like every other situation they find themselves in and it is just tries to one-up with each passing issue. Who knows, but that is a good reason to keep following this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Cataclysm: Ultimates #3

Jan 15, 2014

At the very end this was an issue that made you see the reality of this event. When you aren't a big hero, you are someone like one the members on this team who has everything to lose and still jump into the fray damning the consequences. Cataclysm: Ultimates is a high-octane thrill that may fall a bit short in the end, does not fail to entertain.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Catwoman (2011) #19

Apr 20, 2013

The art is definitely better as the colors and inking really made her character pop. That's something you expect when you read a book of a character like Catwoman.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Catwoman (2011) #21

Jun 27, 2013

Not a bad issue, but you feel that it could be better. Maybe next issue, but till then the back and forth between both sides just doesn't hold much interest till something actually happens to draw it closer to a finish or draw it to a finish because at this moment I can't help but want this storyline to speed up. The art remains to be the most appealing part of this book so far, great use of shades and the colors are smooth. Hopefully it does not remain that way and the story picks up.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Catwoman (2011) #22

Jul 25, 2013

So like I said before, it could be better. Not to say it's bad, but this isn't a book I would continue to read in hopes of it getting better when better hasn't come in a long time. Something interesting may come next issue though I couldn't keep my hopes up for it even if I wanted to.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Catwoman (2011) #23

Aug 28, 2013

Aside from this, what this all comes down to really is the lead up to the introduction of the Joker's daughter. She is that element of this story which remains unknown and given she shares the same appearance of Joker during Death of The Family, she could come with some twists of her own worth seeing. While there is nothing too exciting about what's happening in this issue, you are at least set up for something worth your attention in the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Catwoman (2011) #50

Mar 11, 2016

Catwoman #50 brought about a conclusion to 'Run Like Hell' as another story from this volume which you would be crazy to miss out on. Selina is not the woman to mess with and from the first flip of the page to the last this statement is made to all who thought she is easy pickings to cross. The story at the end of this issue as well is worth the read. Not always that we will get to see some of Selina before she became Catwoman. Even for a short, probably better than what you're getting out of the TV series Gotham.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Catwoman (2011) #51

Apr 13, 2016

Catwoman #51 is the start of something more personal to Selina and this will be a tough steal for her when getting that Faceless Mask means confronting someone she thought was long since dead. The answer to that question is something to anticipate along with a war of factions that will only get worse before it gets any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Catwoman (2011) #52

May 11, 2016

This creative team understands what this series can be, and they pull no punches to cross that line to do so. There are no heroes hero. So if you're looking for simple smash and grabs, you came to the wrong place.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Catwoman (2011) Annual #1

May 30, 2013

This is the kind of story we want to read when it comes to Catwoman. Gang violence, someone taking advantage of the innocent, something real. That is the kind of situations in which Catwoman involves herself in and Noncenti was able to bring her back into her environment. Where she could've been trying to get revenge for Penguin taking a hefty part of her money from heists, she was out to send a message to him for his corruption in the city. Killing, threatening, poisoning kids with addictive ice cream, that's where someone like Catwoman draws the line. Even as a thief she has morals and that is what Noncenti shows in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Catwoman (2018) #1

Jul 4, 2018

Catwoman #1 puts Selina in one of her most vulnerable states as of late. She's down, she's been kicked while she's down, and now she's pissed when now is not the time for her to lose control of her life. A cat is always dangerous when you put their back against the wall. I do hope this series touches upon a new side of Selina and Catwoman that we haven't seen before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Catwoman (2018) #28

Dec 16, 2020

All in all, Catwoman #28 was an exciting introduction of Catwoman and the Strays. There's nothing like that well-executed issue which reminds you that Catwoman will always be the wrong one to cross.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Champions (2016) #22

Jul 11, 2018

Champions right now is a book I wish I was following more closely before. This is one of the more engaging of the ongoing Marvel titles out there and delivers genuine storytelling. I was having a conversation earlier today and I was thinking “We really don't need Marvel thinking of a Young Avengers movie, what we actually need are Champions.”

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Champions (2016) #23

Aug 8, 2018

There is no rest for the Champions, that much is assured to us through the events of this issue. I was taken back by the balance of action, character development, and one heck of a twist that once again changes everything we knew about the direction this story was taking.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Champions (2016) #24

Sep 12, 2018

You couldn't have asked for a more powerful issue of Champions, and this year was the best time to tell it. This foe only wins when we keep silent, when we forget why we speak up against it, when we let despair keep us from hoping for better. I was touched, and this is was the joy needed to be felt as a reader of superhero stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2016) #25

Oct 3, 2018

As the 25th issue milestone for Champions, this was the perfect statement that this books has so much more to offer than your average superhero team book. They go through the things that you find genuine about the importance of heroes to one another, they tackle the importance of sacrifice, and emphasize the importance of having a sense of duty to those who matter. Aside from that? This is a brand new adventure full of wonder and excitement.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2016) #26

Nov 7, 2018

Champions #26 struck a great balance between action and story progression. We learned a lot about Weirdworld, the unique ways that the rest of the team integrated into this new Weirdworld, and what it will take for this world to be returned to what it once was. Getting back home is just the icing on the cake.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Champions (2016) #27

Dec 12, 2018

Champions #27 wraps this up perfectly. As one of three books that took a leap into Weirdworld, it was commendable how they added their own spin to the ever-shifting landscape, while at the same time showing that there are connections to what happened when Deadpool and Weapon H were here. Great action, character moments, and substance to balance out the final battle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Champions (2016) Annual #1

Dec 19, 2018

Champions Annual #1 was a worthwhile experience stepping into the shoes of Marvel's newest young hero. Amka Aliyak is a hero you are either newly getting to know, or getting to know better than you did before. A special supersized issue was the best use of time to flesh out the backstory of a character when the average issue can only offer so much to satisfy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2019) #1

Jan 2, 2019

This new era for Champions began giving us the full package. The action delivered was satisfying, our first taste of adventure from them was bold, and the drama was heartbreaking. This iteration of Champions won't just be about the work they do, it will be testing their fortitude in living up to the name. It's not about how high you climb, or how far you fall. Being a young hero is about what you are willing to do to stand tall when everything goes wrong.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Champions (2019) #2

Feb 6, 2019

Jim Zub really knows how to pull the rug from under your feet. This is about the second issue of Champions he has written where for me he hits all the right notes with real world situations for a hero. Champions #2 showed us exactly what consequences you can face when a young hero taking on the world. Every action has a reaction, every decision has a consequence. You are picking your poison to the best of your ability as a hero when things get tough.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Champions (2019) #6

Jun 12, 2019

Champions #6 served as a strong reminder of what we should always come to expect when this global team takles a global threat. It's not just about beating the bad guys. It's about doing so while making sure that nothing no matter how small is neglected. The people, the cities, the homes. All the things that Avengers might overlook they

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2019) #7

Jul 10, 2019

Overall, this trip to space was refreshing for Champions. After so much that has happened, breaking away for just an issue to address the whereabouts of a teammate was worthwhile. This was a dangerous game that Sam was playing to have Kaldera help him to get his helmet back, but at the same time it was fun for so much that could have gone wrong. Well, so much that could have been worse than the kind of trouble she brought him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2019) #8

Aug 7, 2019

Champions #8 brings the return of Sam Alexander and Nova to a close. Considering how the next two issues look based on the covers, we all pretty much knew that this was going to be the return of Nova. However, the devil is in the details and fortunately that did not betray us in this issue. It was fun, chaotic, and enlightening for the direction that this team is now taking.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2019) #9

Sep 4, 2019

Sam Alexander getting his power back was worth the wait, and so was what we got out of Champions #9 too. This situation that the team now faces was perfect for the opportunity created to explore how this team can rise above what initially caused some of them to part ways. The heart put into this chapter was wonderful, and reminds us of what we will be missing from our Marvel books once this story concludes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Champions (2019) #10

Oct 2, 2019

With the conclusion of Champions #10, this is it for this team book. However, where one door closes for the Champions, another is open where they can pop up just about anywhere in the Marvel Universe. So far we have Incoming to look forward to in December, and that at least tells you that this book had the impact it needed. At the end of the day, this book accomplished what it needed to. This is an established young hero team, many of these young heroes have finally come into their own, and they offer something different from the Avengers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Champions (2020) #1

Oct 7, 2020

They didn't lie, Champions #1 kicks off a dramatic new era of Champions that will define the future of Marvel's teen heroes. This first issue succeeded in sending the message that the world still needs heroes, even if the world doesn't want them right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Charmed (2017) #1

Mar 8, 2017

Charmed #1 is a solid start. This creative team knew how to bring us back into this story without feeling like they had to take us all the way to the start. I would recommend this to anyone who loves a good book about witchcraft. Charmed is the full package, satisfying with much that this new book series has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Charmed (2017) #2

Apr 12, 2017

The story is picking up with momentum through Charmed #2. As I mentioned, the episodic approach to this works for Charmed as a book. From here they just need to keep pressing all the things that we like about exploring the lives of the Charmed Ones and the foes who know how to create a challenge.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Charmed (2017) #3

May 10, 2017

There were some hits and misses here, but we are still getting somewhere as all sides are preparing for something big. Charmed #3 was shaky compared to the issues before, but how this issue ends does leave some promise with a greater obstacle than what the Charmed Ones were already facing.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Charmed (2017) #4

Jun 21, 2017

A better issue this time around as we get a stronger introduction to the demon that is Djall, and a new player who shakes things up. Charmed #4 still managed to have at least one problem that was hard to overlook, but altogether an improvement at a crucial stage of the plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Children of the Atom (2021) #1

Mar 10, 2021

Children of the Atom #1 as a start was solid. I think that this creative team will have their work cut out for them if them want to make this book worth the investment compared to the other books with established mutants.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cloak and Dagger (2018) #1

Jun 6, 2018

If you wanted more Cloak & Dagger, this first issue did not disappoint and was a satisfying entrypoint back into their world. Not your average superhero story, and not your average superpowered duo either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cloak and Dagger (2018) #2

Jul 5, 2018

Cloak & Dagger #2 pulled no punches when what started out as space between the two has pushed into conflict when neither know how to talk to the other anymore. Mistrust is indeed their enemy when emotions run high and leaving very little room for the kind of compromise that saves lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Cloak and Dagger (2018) #3

Aug 2, 2018

Cloak & Dagger #3 was a hit and miss kind of issue in contrast to the previous two chapters. the story would have benefited from more focus on what was either going on in the present or the back. When being tossed back and forth and from two different perspectives, that is when you risk things getting a bit messy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cloak and Dagger (2018) #4

Sep 5, 2018

Cloak & Dagger #4 was one of the better issues so far with a straightforward investigation, clarity to a fight with Grey, and urgency added to the dangers that both Cloak and Dagger face on their own.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Cloaks #1

Sep 3, 2014

Cloaks #1 has a lot of potential for a mini series focused on exposing the real magic of illusions. All this creative team has to do is make sure we know who Adam is behind the mask, give us a plot that we understand, and gives us mysteries that can be solved within the span of these four issues. Adam is a likable character and the concept is interesting enough for you to invest your time in. How will Adam handle working with this clandestine Black Ops organization? Only way to find out is to pick up the next issue of Cloaks.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cloaks #2

Oct 1, 2014

Cloaks #2 is a solid issue that shows a decent amount of progression as Adam reluctantly agrees to join the ranks of the CLOAKS black-ops organization and is immediately thrown into his first mission. The threat is established, we have our character moment between Adam and Blockstone, while we are given more questions to ponder as there's more to this than meets the eye.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Cloaks #3

Nov 5, 2014

Now with one issue left you do worry how Cloaks will manage to wrap this story up. There has been a lot going on between these three issues and while it has been fun here and there, we do find ourselves thrown all over the place just to keep progress going without given too much time to process it all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Colder: The Bad Seed #1

Oct 22, 2014

Expect the unexpected with Colder, and Colder: The Bad Seed #1 has that written all over it. Being an ongoing, Paul Tobin and Juan Ferreyra have a lot more time to develop this story and it should be a treat to see what they can do with more manageable time. This is a ripe world that started with Nimble Jack, and can go anywhere from there with Swivel picking up the pieces to figuring out the mysteries of Declan's past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Colder: The Bad Seed #2

Nov 26, 2014

Colder: The Bad Seed #2 is crazy, mind bottling, and preps us up to find out the things about Declan's past which would make sense out of how he is able to do what he does.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Colder: The Bad Seed #3

Dec 24, 2014

Colder: The Bad Seed #3 was just mind-blowing when this is one of those stories where some ends are just up to you to decide. You feel sorry that Reece was dragged into this and where this issue leaves both she and us definitely will have you needing that next one to see just what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Colder: The Bad Seed #4

Jan 28, 2015

Colder: The Bad Seed #4 brings a lot of the story and plot into perspective for us, and for Reece. Declan's fate is still up in the air, though while you want to see him saved, you also really want to see just what can happen when Swivel has his way with growing a plant

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Colder: The Bad Seed #5

Feb 25, 2015

Colder: The Bad Seed #5 hits all the right notes as this confrontation between Swivel, Declan and Reece comes to a close. A good focus on character development, many things unknown now known, and a solid setup for much more to come after this issue. If you want a horror story that aims to be unpredictable, Colder: The Bad Seed is the book that you should pick up. A dark tale that you appreciate Dark Horse gave a second chance to continue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Colder: Toss The Bones #2

Oct 29, 2015

With Colder: Toss The Bones #2, that someone who is sitting in your home, unseen, grinning a gap-toothed smile, and waiting to feast stole the show once again. This new volume has been memorable because they brought back a character who is memorable with everything he does and says.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Colder: Toss The Bones #3

Nov 25, 2015

Colder: Toss The Bones #3 shows exactly what happens when Nimble Jack becomes your roommate. His currency is not the kind of rent one would look for, and not for the trouble he brings with him. He may have spent most of this time toying with them, but it seems now that they really have something to fear from Jack now that they are aware of his plans till its time for his meal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Colder: Toss The Bones #4

Dec 30, 2015

Colder: Toss The Bones #4 was another thrilling issue that sets us up for the final showdown. Reece and Declan have come a long way to lose to someone like Nimble Jack. This issue emphasized how far they are willing to go to prove it.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Colder: Toss The Bones #5

Jan 27, 2016

The conclusion to Colder: Toss the Bones was everything you could have wanted from what this series delivers, and for what note it leaves us on to make us hope that there is more to come after.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Collapser #1

Jul 17, 2019

Collapser #1 is indeed a superhero story that could only come from DC's Young Animal imprint. This creative team took advantage of the room to run wild with an impossible scenario, and the colorful language to capture everything insane about the way that Liam James' life has been flipped on its head.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Collapser #2

Aug 14, 2019

If the first issue didn't get you, this second one surely should! When it comes to a book like Collapser, you want to aim for satisfaction, even if it is pretty early. These first issue issues throw both us and Liam right into the fire in a way that gets you excited for what comes next. We know as much about this black hole, or Collapser, as Liam. Part of the thrill is how we figure this out before Liam's world comes crashing down.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Collapser #3

Sep 11, 2019

Collapser #3 closes one door for Liam James, and opens the door to a new world of opportunity for the nursing home employee now turned superhero/DJ. In the case of Liam, with great power comes great fame. The only question is what kind of dangers he will open himself up to with a target on his back bigger than the hole in his chest. Issue #3 out of 6 was the best time to flesh out this world, explain the black hole, and set us up for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Collapser #4

Oct 9, 2019

Overall, Collapser continues to astonish this month when apparently the worst that Liam could deal with also includes himself. I mean, what do you expect from a guy who went from having crippling anxiety and nothing else, to everything you could dream of? Half the battle is preparing for all the dangers which might soon come your way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Collapser #5

Nov 13, 2019

It's a mad world, and a crazy world, but at the end of the day this is Liam's world. Collapser #5 was enlightening for the way it opened us up to the dreams which Liam wish could be his reality, and it was also terrifying for everything these dreams were masking. The big thing was once more being shown that this is a story where you expect the unexpected when so much of this issue hits you with twists and turns you couldn't have braced for.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Collapser #6

Dec 4, 2019

This book is a hit for DC. More readers should be turning their attention to books like this which aim to give us something fresh from the superhero genre. Real problems to battle, unique visuals, engaging storytelling. Collapser #6 was the full package and leaves you wanting more. I hope there is more because this book rewards you for your investment in these characters and the world around them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Conan And The People of The Black Circle #1

Oct 16, 2013

Overall it is a fun start to a great adventure. It looks amazing as well, having a style that looks digitally painted. Everything stands out and the characters are very detailed. It has a lot of potential if it keeps up with this momentum and pacing. The twist at the very end is one you really don't see coming and just another reason why you want to keep following this story if you have picked it up. I recommend this book if you are either a fan of Conan, or just love something that you know will deliver on action, with a bit of mystic elements taking focus.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Constantine (2013) #5

Jul 25, 2013

Definitely not what I expected and it's nice to see that Constantine does actually want what's best for the world when the need is there. May not be the best way to handle such situations, but he gets the job done in the end. Now we are just left with one question, which is if he will survive “bleeding out”. Chances are slim, but it's still Constantine we're talking about.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Constantine (2013) #6

Aug 15, 2013

Aside from this is was a well enough build up to what will make things go from bad to worse for John. We all know he has a thing for mystic artifacts and likes to keep them in his possession. Now that they are in the hands of someone who has nothing good to do with them, he's now in a world of trouble. Just about anything can happen and there aren't many he can turn to in this situation. Especially when Trinity War is occurring at the same time. Decent issue, but that's all it really was because his death and obvious resurrection fell flat.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Constantine (2013) #8

Nov 16, 2013

Good issue in terms of it being Constantine, but there was much interesting about it. You would probably find yourself saving more time and money just waiting till the next issue where the story actually continues from where we last saw him. Great art work as usual, that much remains consistent throughout this book bringing about that grim atmosphere that comes with exploring the mystic world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Constantine (2013): Futures End #1

Sep 10, 2014

Constantine: Future's End #1 fully takes advantage of the con man Constantine is with the build up to a trick that no one could have seen coming. He's the type of guy to pull a rabbit out of his hat at the very last-minute after jerking your chain that he can't. This issue is dark, emotional, and brings Constantine down to Earth in a way which kind of humbles a man who always thinks himself the smartest man in the room.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Contagion #1

Oct 3, 2019

Overall Contagion #1 has some problems, but for the most part you read it with the mind that you are open to the creative approach more than anything else. At the end of the day, the appeal of books like this has to be the things these creative teams are willing and able to do in order to be refreshing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Crackdown (2019) #1

Feb 20, 2019

The world of Crackdown explodes onto the pages of this first issue. These aren't your normal soldiers and The Agency plays by their own rules. Dynamite found themselves a winner with this one so long as this creative teams improves on some of the areas where they need to dial back on the text.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Croak #1

Sep 6, 2016

Overall Croak #1 is a book that has potential for where it can go knowing that they aren't going for any plot that you are familiar with when it comes to camping in the woods. There's an avoidance of the predictable and that is what they must stick to in order to grab us when the true horror begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Croak #2

Nov 9, 2016

Croak is definitely an independent book that you don't want to sleep on. If the first issue didn't already hook you, surely this second issue will for all the ways it is refreshing for this genre.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Croak #3

Dec 7, 2016

By the end of Croak #3 I can agree as to why Croak #1 was one of the best selling digital books for Alterna in 2016. In terms of digital releases in general, this is a book you want to give a shot if you're into something with a definitive start and end with no bull****.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cryptocracy #1

Jun 29, 2016

Cryptocracy #1 is the start of something fun and adventurous for people who are virtually gods now feeling as though their whole way of life is about to crumble beneath them. Just what can go wrong when your ultimate power is secrecy, And that is the one thing being used against you? That is what we aim to explore and much more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Curse Words #10

Nov 15, 2017

Curse Words #10 was all action from start to finish and changed the game in a big way. Just when you thought that Wizord was finally getting what he wanted from this fight against Sizzajee, it didn't take long for the other variables to turn their influence into a new problem to deal with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Curse Words #11

Feb 14, 2018

Curse Words #11 was a solid set-up for what's to come in this story. Plenty of wheels are turning here and no one is left without a stake in this madness whether on Earth or Hole World. I would have loved if they actually got around to Hole World's story with that said, because that was something we were led on to look forward to from this issue specifically.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Curse Words #12

Mar 14, 2018

Curse Words #12 was a fun issue for how they have pushed two important angles in this story. Magic is now working itself into normality on Earth, people are trying to understand how much they really have to fear about the unknown, and there is anticipation for everyone to figure out that the Hole World is not out of the picture yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Curse Words #14

May 16, 2018

Curse Words #14 brings us to that point where we have to either brace for the best, or the worst with what comes next. I'm not so sure about the twist at the end of this issue, but everything else was a great step forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #1

Jul 22, 2015

The artwork is astounding. When a risk is taken with a title like this you fear for how it will look visually, and they got a good art team behind Cyborg. Just another sign of the positive change DC is looking to make with their DCYou initiative. This is the best that Cyborg has been drawn and more so when this new form captures his more human features. It is the best form he could have taken at this time just because he is questioning how he is looked at being majority machine. Aside from this they did a lot right starting with the design of these aliens. We don't know who they are, but they do look terrifying in form. Then there is the more technical effects from Cyborgs abilities that the colors bring out, features as well on his body. And just the way flashbacks and holograms overlap is impressive too. The layout as well of the panels is easy to follow which you could sometimes fear when displayed the way they are.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #2

Aug 26, 2015

Cyborg #2 shows progress for this series while finding a balance between concept and character development. Through these two issues it should be safe to say that you get to know Victor Stone better than you thought you did before. That is what we should always be able to take from this series going forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #3

Oct 7, 2015

Cyborg #3 gets intense and cements Victor as his own man in this solo adventure. One where again this invasion is one that only he can combat. He has allies, finds his betrayer, and deals feel feelings of pain for what he has gone through.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg #4

Oct 28, 2015

Cyborg #4 is action packed and it gets personal with the fate of the world at stake. The story keeps getting better and so does the artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #5

Dec 2, 2015

Cyborg #5 answers many questions and sets us up for that big play Victor and friends will have to make in order to stop the Technosapiens while they still can.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Cyborg #6

Dec 23, 2015

Cyborg #6 brings an end to “Techno-Takedown” in a big way that will change the life of Victor for both his personal life and his life as Cyborg. The line between the two is closer than ever, but it seems soon we should be exploring what manages to keep that divide.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #7

Jan 27, 2016

Cyborg #7 was a great start to a new storyline which will change Victor's life for better or for worse when it seems the world is ready to define who he is for him after the technosapien invasion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg #8

Feb 24, 2016

With the conclusion of Cyborg #8 is now public enemy #1. That much you saw coming, though what led to this moment was an excellent read. There is a lot at stake here and it starts with taking a stand when the government extends their reach a bit too far for the sake of control.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg #9

Mar 23, 2016

Cyborg #9 captures Victor in the light we wish most other stories would. A hero who has friends in high places to help him when his back is against the wall. A Justice League member who is treated like an equal. A person who deserves the chance to decide how his own body is used knowing that line between man and machine is now more blurred than ever.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Cyborg #11

May 25, 2016

Cyborg #11 was the right kind of conclusion you could want out of the ‘Cybernetic Registration' story arc. It didn't need to be in your face with something climatic. It just needed to stay true to how genuine this book has always been from the start. Hopefully that is how it will end as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg #12

Jun 22, 2016

If this is the last issue as I'd assume, Cyborg #12 wraps up the series quite nicely. Would it have been nice to have the original creative team stick around to the end? Sure, but the good thing is that we at least made it to the end never losing what made Cyborg stand out from some of the other titles. It's human, engaging, makes you think about the way we look at others and how we want to be viewed ourselves. You couldn't have asked for a better story that represented the importance of the person behind the mask.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cyborg (2016) #1

Sep 21, 2016

It is safe to say that there is potential after finishing Cyborg #1. From here it just needs to keep moving forward because that is what we need most from this character who doesn't always get this kind of chance for exposure. Steps forward, not back. And hopefully not forget the things that did change drastically about him that shouldn't completely change with a new creative team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg (2016) #6

Dec 8, 2016

Like I've been saying, you're missing out if you're really overlooking Cyborg and what this book has to offer in comparison to the rest on shelves. Great characters, fresh concepts, engaging on a human level. Cyborg #6 really makes you think about the things going on in Victor's head that he doesn't say himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg (2016) #7

Dec 21, 2016

Cyborg #7 made a lot of progress for a single issue and lands us right where we need to be for a confrontation Victor was not prepared for. What's so great again about this book is that as action-packed as it is, you aren't allowed to overlook the underlying messages about culture and human rights projected through Cyborg's perspective of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cyborg (2016) #8

Jan 4, 2017

Cyborg #8 does indeed get us where we need to be in this plot that is more than what you might assume. It was a smart choice making this not too straightforward when nothing is ever too simple dealing with Cyborg and the world he comes from. The story of Cyborg is complex, its relatable, and its engaging. What more could you ask for right now?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg (2016) #9

Feb 1, 2017

Cyborg #9 sets the stage for what's to come when Cyborg and Exxy take the fight to Anomoly. The villain has been fleshed out, the urgency has been set, and motivations have been cleared out which brings us to actions that you expect to be decisive for the sake of Silas and Variant's lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg (2016) #10

Mar 1, 2017

Cyborg #10 brings new interest to this fight against Anomaly and whoever it really is pulling his strings. They are proving now that they are willing to go the distance in order for this to be Cyborg's story and world. He has his own heroes and his own villains to make Detroit as relevant as any other big state or city out there.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Cyborg (2016) #11

Apr 5, 2017

At the end of the day I believe Cyborg #11 is a solid issue, but a story that could have been told any time other than now. Timing is how you do a story like this justice. Victor is bound to run into trouble just from the things he doesn't remember till now, though there are more vital things to take care of where this simply feels like a distraction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyborg (2016) #13

Jun 7, 2017

Cyborg #13 is one of the better issues as of late. Great character development, plot development, we got to see a familiar face spring into action again, and once again they are taking advantage of the things you can do in this book that haven't been seen before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cyborg (2016) #14

Jul 5, 2017

Cyborg #14 takes us right into the thick of just what the heck is going on and I feel more invested than I ever did before. We have solved some of the most nagging mysteries and we now have the full picture as to why everything has happened the way they did between Anomaly's actions and what brought everyone here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cyborg (2016) #15

Aug 2, 2017

Cyborg #15 was a step up from the issues before. Knowing what exactly is going on matters more than anything else at this stage. Cyborg never disappoints when there is action, so there is always room for that when there are plenty of other things to address beforehand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Cyborg (2016) #16

Sep 6, 2017

I will admit that much of what this story had turned into upon entering this world left me skeptical about where this was taking us. You could see a finish line then until it became one development after the other for this plot that left you wondering just what the heck was really going on. Cyborg #16 luckily made sense of a lot of things that could have killed our interest in the rest of 'Singularity Aftermath'.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Cyborg (2016) #17

Oct 4, 2017

Are you ready for Cyber-Geddon? Cyborg #17 took Cyborg(s), Beast Boy and Variant into battle with an army of deadly mecha-humans in their epic and final cybernetic showdown with Anomaly. Was it worth the wait? I would say so as this is what you expect when numerous technologically advanced beings come to a clash.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Cyborg (2016) #18

Nov 1, 2017

Cyborg #18 was a wonderful end to a story arc that I couldn't quite tell if I had loved till everything finally came full circle. The pay-off was great for all the things that unfolded whether it was engaging or just a bit confusing for what didn't fit at that point in time. This was one of those stories where you had to let the story tell itself and allow yourself to be open to where this corner of the DC Universe can take you in contrast to other stories/heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Cyborg (2016) #19

Dec 6, 2017

Cyborg #19 is the start of a story which defines what being a hero means for Victor on a larger scale. Before it meant being a hero to Detroit, being a hero to those who are machine/ai, now we are addressing the importance of that word when you take away the location or the labels. It was only a matter of time before someone took that bold step to help Victor see that a lot of his problems really are just in his head, for better and for worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Cyborg (2016) #20

Jan 3, 2018

‘Wretched of the Earth' comes to an end with Cyborg #20, and this was a memorable story told for the experience alone. There is nothing worthwhile for Victor if he is taking steps back. We want to see him grow with every new experience and find a new appreciation for what he is as Cyborg. This was a well-written cast of characters, beautiful change in setting, and meaningful on so many levels because everyone was touched in some way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Cyborg (2016) #21

Apr 4, 2018

Cyborg #21 was a good start to a stronger exploration of Victor's corner of the universe. This was a great time to develop to enemies, ways for Victor to spring into action, and further address his reputation as Cyborg. There really hasn't been much worry at all about the future of this title with the creator back in charge of Cyborg's story. He didn't disappoint when he said he was taking him in an all new and different direction, with a brand-new cast and all-new baddies.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cyborg (2016) #22

May 2, 2018

Cyborg #22 was a solid step forward getting to know both sides of this intriguing situation Victor has found himself in. On one hand there is an enemy he has yet to figure out, and on the other hand he has allies who are still not to be fully trusted. Its a tough world for Victor when everywhere he turns there are those who he can't fully rely on to have pure intentions for scientific advancements.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Cyborg (2016) #23

Jun 6, 2018

Cyborg #23 had a rocky start, but it was only when something genuinely began to unfold that this story has been able to pick up. There has been too much runaround, and too little action. No one has to come to blows, but something always needs to happen in some way. That is what this arc has been lacking, and now has made up for as Cyborg finds himself faced with an enemy driven to survive at all costs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Cyborg: Rebirth #1

Sep 7, 2016

Cyborg: Rebirth #1 was a solid start. The actual first issue will be the dealbreaker, but this at the very least gives you something to look forward to with the foundation set from reintroducing us to Victor's world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Cyclops (2014) #1

May 8, 2014

Cyclops #1 is a book that should definitely change the way readers look at Cyclops. I have great expectations of where this adventure will take Cyclops and Corsair, both having a lot of ground to cover as father and son. This issue brought out feelings I didn't think I would have because of how bad these two want this relationship to work, and I have faith that Rucka can keep that consistent as things progress. If you are skeptical about this book, you should definitely give it a try.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Cyclops (2014) #2

Jun 4, 2014

The resort world of Dixzit, where Scott flirts with aliens and Corsair shows off more of his skills,and notoriety. How the issue ended was fairly open-ended and the answers it might lead to are something we can all anticipate. Secrets to be revealed and they can lead to all kinds of reactions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Cyclops (2014) #3

Jul 31, 2014

Cyclops #3 is as down to Earth as things can get for a space adventure. While you initially picked up this series to see what happens when younger Cyclops crosses paths with the Starjammers, you enjoy more the focus on just the bond between him and Corsair. You almost are left hoping it could easily just be them both together for the entirety.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Cyclops (2014) #4

Aug 27, 2014

Cyclops #4 continues to take both character and action to give you a space adventure you won't soon forget. This is the Cyclops story that we need and one that you wouldn't have any other way than what we get right here. The Summers aren't the perfect family, but the attempt to be one that's less dysfunctional is a step in the right direction for the sake of both their futures.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Cyclops (2014) #5

Sep 24, 2014

At the end of the day Cyclops #5 puts Cyclops and Corsair on a path that we can feel comfortable with going forward. There's less tension between the two and they work very well together when they are willing to put their trust in one another. This was the best way to put Cyclops on a path where he acts more mature rather than angry. He's a teen yes, though living a life where being grown up is the best option to survive.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Cyclops (2014) #6

Oct 22, 2014

This team has its work cut out for them with this new story arc and it starts with grabbing us with the same sense of adventure that we got with the first story arc. Our interest was piqued through exploration and seeing a lot of what the Universe has to offer while giving us a natural relationship between Corsair and Scott. Scott can be a teen without being clumsy and feeling unwelcome. Cyclops #7 will be the time to show us a clear direction for this series that keeps us coming back for issues after that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
D4VE (IDW) #1

Feb 28, 2015

D4VE #1 is funny, it's sad, it's just a mixed bag of emotions that comes with showing how even robots can fail at the game called life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
D4VE2 #1

Sep 16, 2015

D4VE2 # 1 is a good start to this new mini series. Easy to follow after the time gap of a year, and just as easy for a new reader to just pick up from here from the recap we get of past events. Great character development, humor, and twist that will really shake up the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
D4VE2 #2

Oct 7, 2015

D4VE2 #2 is another fun issue which continues to capture the normal lives that these robots live. That they try to live. And how two visitors can change everything for the direction of this series moving forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
D4VE2 #3

Nov 11, 2015

D4VE2 #3 really does hit you with a surprise by the end of the issue that changes everything. With everything that has gone right and wrong, now D4VE is faced with the opportunity to change it all hopefully for the better.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
D4VE2 #4

Dec 2, 2015

D4VE2 #4 overall really toyed with our emotions. Many times teasing endings that really could have crushed us, but at the very end giving us one that for the first time in a while isn't completely heartbreaking. Any who are fans of D4VE should surely hope that there is more to come. This was not the title to sleep because as a mini series it delivers what most ongoings take more issues to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
D4VEocracy #1

Jan 25, 2017

D4VEocracy #1 shines a light on the human elements that both continue to make this series fun, and the qualities that bring us to a full understanding of why. That has always been praiseworthy. Yet we've come to that point where it was time to recognize that it's the things that make humans so flawed which drives every action before us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
D4VEocracy #2

Mar 8, 2017

A real election period is what we are thrust into by the end of D4VEocracy #2. The world is split on who they want and with a book like this that will come with greater consequences to anticipate. Again D4VE's world mirrors our world so well and this was the best time for a story like this to show us exactly what we were like during that time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Damage (2018) #1

Jan 17, 2018

I had a good feeling about this New Age of DC Heroes, and they are off to a good start with Damage #1. This is the best time to introduce new heroes and concepts that take us beyond the same stories retold. If you are looking for a reason to invest in Damage, I think they gave us good reason to. New characters, creative, not quick to reveal everything at once, but gives us just enough to anticipate how this story branches into the rest of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Damage (2018) #2

Feb 21, 2018

If you are still on the fence about Damage, then I would say give it a shot. No matter what other readers may say about familiarity, that doesn't change the fact that this is a new kind of character for the DC Universe. It was only a matter of time before they had to deal with this consequence of creation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Damage (2018) #3

Mar 21, 2018

First impressions are everything right? Ethan and Damage left one heck of an impression on the world when laying waste to a city, a team of heavy-hitter villains, and Wonder Woman. Damage #3 found a good balance between story development and action, while making sure that in the end we know where the issues to follow will take us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Damage (2018) #4

Apr 18, 2018

Damage #4 throws these two into their next big encounter. It's good to see that not everything they have to deal with is because of Colonel Jonas or a lack of control over Damage. This is a unique experience which this creative team is taking full advantage of through the challenges of being a monster in the DC Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Damage (2018) #5

May 16, 2018

Damage #5 is a good issue for anyone who wanted to see more of Ethan this time around. It is good to consistently remind readers that there can be a balance to the storytelling and action. Not expecting too much of one over the other is what creates more satisfaction and investment in what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Damage (2018) #6

Jun 20, 2018

Another action-packed issue of Damage this week. Whether it is trouble that they stumble upon, or throw themselves into, the momentum never lets up and that is what gets you from start to finish with anticipation for what comes next. You have to hand it to Damage as well for the fact that this series is making leaps for having a new character who is interacting with established heroes and villains left and right. It hasn't felt forced yet, and that is all you can ask for moving forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Damage (2018) #7

Jul 18, 2018

You came for the action in Damage #7, but you stayed for the character development for Colonel Jonas. As much as you want to see of Ethan and Damage, there is no denying that Jonas is a character of interest when there was so much until now that was shrouded in mystery. We now move forward with a stronger understanding of what drives her actions and why getting Damage back is so important for what she believes in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Damage (2018) #8

Aug 15, 2018

Damage #8 had a good balance between being informative and delivering on the action that you expect from this series. Overall this issue really opened our eyes to the argument that is what it means to be a soldier and the difference between being that and being a superhero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Damage (2018) #9

Sep 19, 2018

Damage #9 brings this story arc to a close, but the war is far from over. I like that it was established in this issue what it takes for the war to end for Ethan, and what will keep it going for Colonel Jonas. Nothing is definite, and that keeps you guessing what the future holds for Damage in the DCU.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Damage (2018) #10

Oct 17, 2018

As the start to a new story arc, Damage #10 really gets us hyped up for what this new direction has in store for us. There's putting an end to the Damage Program, and then there is getting through the Justice League. After his skirmish with Wonder Woman near the beginning, that attention was bound to come around for him again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Damage (2018) #11

Nov 21, 2018

Damage #11 was another thrilling chapter for this duo. When these two are on the same page, they are a force to be reckoned with. That much they made sure everyone knew as they took on this Justice League strike team. The only questioning remaining is if that will be enough when it comes down to Damage versus Superman.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Damage (2018) #12

Dec 19, 2018

The first year of Damage's story wraps up nicely, with an excellent transition into something new for this duo. Damage #12 gave us a satisfying brawl between these two powerhouses, pulled no punches, and brought it to a close in a way that was believable for the Justice League. Not every situation is going to be one where you can punch your way out of it, and that was true for both sides.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Damage (2018) #13

Jan 23, 2019

Damage #13 was fairly to the point this time around. Ethan was given a choice in what came next for him, and he chose doing things the hard way. You can't fault him, but you also want to see him show a bit more growth too. Hopefully this new experience for Ethan and Damage is a step in the right direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Damage (2018) #14

Feb 20, 2019

Damage #14 was a fast read, but got us to where we needed to be for Ethan to begin understanding where he has been going wrong in his concept of trust. This could all come from understanding what it really means to be a monster, or understanding that there might always bare a greater responsibility as a monster.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Damage (2018) #16

Apr 17, 2019

When taking risks on books like this you need results when the future is not certain. Ethan and Damage could be heroes at this point, established in their own corner by now, but a few issues too many kept this book from grabbing eyes the way it could or should have. With that said, still a solid story that gave us characters worth seeing more of down the road.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Damage (2018) Annual #1

Aug 22, 2018

Damage Annual #1 overall gave us a story worth telling as we now have the full details on what led to the mission where everything changed for Ethan, and what happened during the mission where Ethan/Damage finally broke free of what was keeping them from grasping what they were being used for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #1

Aug 20, 2014

There's a lot to read in this new #1 for Dark Horse Presents, and a great time to hop on board if looking for a reason to give this anthology a chance. Some better than others, and some with the potential to be something good with time to develop the plot. Dark Horse Presents certainly lives up to the reputation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #2

Sep 17, 2014

It wouldn't be Dark Horse Presents without something familiar, and Aliens is that series included. While it seems like a side story, it is one that you would read just because you know how intense Alien stories can be. Aliens: Field Report jumps into the action quickly throwing soldiers into the fray who weren't exactly prepared for what they would encounter like most, and you take interest in how they handle themselves in this situation. Aside from this it's great to see that Ripley is not a forgotten character in this war with the aliens. Whatever comes with Aliens: Fire and Stone, this was a good way of building up to the release of that series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #3

Oct 15, 2014

It's hard to say exactly how you might feel about Age of Reptiles: Baby Turtles considering this is one of those rare stories where the art tells the story. The baby turtles do have a strong presence in this story, but so does every other creature in that world as what we are looking at is basically showing their circle of life so to speak. All in all it is worth reading just for the artwork, it really is gorgeous.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #4

Nov 19, 2014

It's been a while since a superhero story popped up in Dark Horse Presents, and this one a bit different as well when it takes place during a different time, the past to be exact. But that isn't the part that really catches your attention. What does is that you have this guy who can do the impossible, and looks like he's trying to do good, but you still don't find yourself trusting him 100%. The detective doesn't either, so you definitely want to see where that leads. The interior art is probably one of the best seen so far in terms of quality pencils and colors. The Mighty comes off valiant on top of looking like a pulp story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #5

Dec 17, 2014

Seeing Declan Shalvey's name you knew that as a new story Double Tap had to be something worth reading. A page turner that played on suspense as you had no clue what was in store for these two who obviously failed their task and have to explain themselves for it. Definitely a gritty crime comic Murder Book when you see just what happens after they plead their case. It catches you off guard and leaves you wondering if there is any more to this when there is much you don't know. Though with that said this is one of those stories where you enjoy it for how little you know. The pacing was great and the layout coming from Declan Shalvey really helped move things along moving from point to point in the story. What stands out most is his signature style of making great use of grey tones to show depth and detail.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #6

Jan 21, 2015

A murder story all the way, Hot Shot hit's all the right points from seeing the death, to the emotion felt from the death, to unraveling the mystery behind it. Hot Shot follows the same formula as any other crime story out there, but takes the initiative to add that unique twist at the end which separates it from the rest out there. Another story you find appealing because of both the drawing and the applications of shading. The shading in particular which brings out that dark tone which you expect when the centered around death and corruption. A solid story in the end that you take for what it is when met with a decisive end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #7

Feb 18, 2015

Overall this 200th issue of Dark Horse Presents was jammed packed. 83 pages over the usual 48 and something there for everyone. Some stories felt a bit rushed, one or two just a little bit hard to follow, but overall still more that you were able to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #8

Mar 18, 2015

Overall this was a solid issue of Dark Horse Presents that had some good stories to offer this week. It seemed like the darker tales hold more interest and there should be enough reason from most to anticipate the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Dark Horse Presents (2014) #9

Apr 15, 2015

Overall this was a very good issue of Dark Horse Presents that was a big step up from the previous issue. Much of the stories are picking up, finding their footing and giving you a reason to say they are worth that spot on Dark Horse Presents.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
DC / Hanna-Barbera: Super Sons/Dynomutt Special #1

May 30, 2018

They took a big risk with this dark encounter for Super Sons/Dynomutt Special #1, but I think this creative team nailed it. Everything to love about Dynomutt and Blue Falcon they put into this story and focus on what makes them such an iconic duo. I don't think I have ever felt more touched by a superhero team that is a man and his best friend. There was no regret at all picking up this crossover as one that was the full package. Heart, action, and the pain/understanding of loss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased #2

Jun 5, 2019

if you didn't know what you were in store for in this book, DCeased #2 made sure that everyone was on the same page. They set the stakes, they set the tone, and they assured us that no one is safe. It helped more than anything else that there was a distinction created between zombies and what these anti-living are.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased #3

Jul 3, 2019

With each passing issue I do find myself feeling more confident in what this story has to offer. DCeased #3 gave us more of an emotional fallout from the first day of this infection. With everyone aware of what's happening around them, this is that chapter where you begin taking in that balance between hope and despair.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DCeased #4

Aug 7, 2019

This was true madness unleashed upon the world. DCeased #4 was a great issue for the way that this creative team has decided to shake things up. This was the best time for them to show how destructive these infected can be, and the pulled no punches. Not to mention with one heck of a cliffhanger as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased #5

Oct 2, 2019

You can definitely see where DCeased is trying to be more than what some readers initially summed it to be. They still find ways to indulge and have fun in the violence and gore, but there is no denying how they are able to weave a compelling story through really caring about the characters involved and the collapsing world around them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased #6

Oct 30, 2019

When all is said and done, DCeased is a book that has no impact on main continuity of the DC Universe. Yet at the same time that doesn't matter. This was a story worth telling, an experience that will rock your world, and one worth talking about for all the ways that it challenges the cliche of most apocalyptic stories set in a superhero world. Now part of me wants to believe this is he end, but I couldn't help noticing that there was something about this final chapter that wasn't too conclusive. It makes you feel like there could be more, and could you argue with that possibility?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) #1

Jul 8, 2020

Once again, if you picked up this book expecting more hope at the end of the world? DCeased: Dead Planet #1 will set your expectations right. This is not a story that will fill you with hope. I think we should all be grateful that this creative team did not decide to play games with us. That rug was pulled out from under our feet fast, so that we know that there is no such thing as a rescue mission to a dying world going right.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) #2

Aug 5, 2020

All in all, a solid transition into the second issue for DCeased: Dead Planet. If there was one thing we knew by the end of this issue, it was that they were jumping into this with momentum and execution. There's no time to slow down when the stakes have been set so high from the start.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) #3

Sep 2, 2020

In the end, DCeased: Dead Planet #3 added a lot of clarity to what we should expect from this story. It's not just the unliving that these heroes are going to have to worry about, and apparently not all the answers are going to be found on Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) #4

Oct 7, 2020

All in all, DCeased: Dead Planet #4 was a big one. This was a heist which will go down in history for New Genesis, but as I said above, not for the reasons you braced for! To call what was unleashed at the end a new horror is quite the understatement.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
DCeased: Dead Planet (2020) #7

Jan 20, 2021

After the end to DCeased: Dead Planet #7? I really would be shocked if this wasn't talked about for years to come. When you think of post-apocalyptic stories, or how even to finish one? DCeased is the story that should come to mind.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased: Hope At World's End #1

May 20, 2020

All in all, DCeased: Hope at World's End #1 lived up to the name fast. Through the eye(s) of one Jimmy Olsen we got to take a trip down memory lane to remember the tragedy that was these people seeing their world crumble around them. This issue served its purpose to send the message that there is still hope that the living can reclaim what is left of the Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Hope At World's End #2

Jun 2, 2020

And here we thought Wonder Woman was the worst that anyone had to fear from this disaster. When you've seen how swiftly Black Adam mows through the infected in his kingdom, it makes you wonder what kind of damage someone like this is capable of outside of those walls. DCeased: Hope at World's End #2 served as a good reminder that reclaiming Earth is going to be easier said than done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
DCeased: Hope At World's End #3

Jun 17, 2020

All in all, another must-read for the DCeased series. Hope at World's End #3 answered the question you couldn't do without in a story like this, and approached it with heroism and thrill. It was through issues like this where you could really getting into the idea that there is hope at the end of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased: Hope At World's End #4

Jul 1, 2020

By the end of DCeased: Hope at World's End #4, we walk away with a better understanding of how some heroes step up to the plate, while once more arriving at a new destination which challenges what it means to be safe in this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased: Hope At World's End #5

Jul 15, 2020

DCeased: Hope at World's End #5 was worth the wait for our first taste of what the new Trinity was supposed to look like. This issue was equal parts light-hearted, and endearing for a story that can even bring out the best in a kid like Damian Wayne.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Hope At World's End #6

Jul 29, 2020

Overall, before you call it a war, remember what kind of story this is first. It was great to get back into this story with DCeased: Hope at World's End #6. For the focus on Wink, The Aerie, and all the madness inbetween.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: Hope At World's End #7

Aug 12, 2020

All in all, DCeased: Hope at World's End #7 brings another contained story to a close. Now we know what happened to those who thought Jotunhueim was the safest place to keep from the blighted. One less haven, which makes surviving this world that much harder than it was before.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
DCeased: Hope At World's End #8

Aug 26, 2020

With the conclusion of Hope at World's End #8, we were graced by yet another story which captures your heart. If there is anyone who can accomplish that with a story like this? It would be this creative team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DCeased: Hope At World's End #9

Sep 9, 2020

In the end, DCeased: Hope at World's End #9 is one of those issues you will come to appreciate for the way that it adds context to the first DCeased story. That first act came and went pretty fast, so everything like what we are getting in this story is important towards addressing every obstacle and attempt in saving the world in greater depth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
DCeased: Hope At World's End #14

Nov 18, 2020

At the end of the day, it wasn't really a question of if the Gotham Garden was going to stand the numbers of the Anti-Life Army stepping to their front door, because we know already that the garden has plenty of time left. Through the events of DCeased: Hope at World's End #14, we were looking forward to see why this garden is able to continue existing and protecting who is left.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
DCeased: The Unkillables #1

Feb 19, 2020

Surely we all want to see what came next after the first book, when will you really get the chance to see how the villains survive during an apocalyptic event? DCeased: Unkillables #1 proves again why the right people were put together to give us something that is more than what is your average zombie story. Because these aren't zombies, but this is definitely the end of the world. It's always going to be worth seeing how those final days play out whether villain or anti-hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
DCeased: The Unkillables #2

Mar 18, 2020

Just like the first issue, DCeased: Unkillables #2 keeps you at the edge of your seat for the ensuing chaos which does not discriminate between hero, anti-hero, or villain. There's always moments to experience happiness with this creative team, but even now they know how to play with your emotions when nothing lasts forever.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
DCeased: The Unkillables #3

May 20, 2020

How this story ended warmed my heart. Before this issue hit, there was many ways in which you could have assumed they had no plans for anyone making it out of this in one piece. However, there couldn't be these other books to look forward to if there wasn't something on Earth left to save. DCeased: Unkillables #3 was a roller coaster of emotions as we truly got to see what survival looks like right now. It's not easy, and it doesn't come without brave souls stepping up to the plate. This was a story worth telling, and honestly some others could take queues from a story like this that doesn't get lost in the violence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dead Drop #1

May 6, 2015

Dead Drop #1 is a great start to this mini series. Who knows what other challenges these other characters will have to face in order to stop these terrorists, but if it is as exciting as this chase Aric was sent on, then that next issue should be worth picking up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Dead Drop #2

Jun 3, 2015

Much of this story you want to take seriously for Dead Drop #2, though it is easy you find yourself humored by Archer running the streets without his pants. Visually you can see how that affects his confidence in the way he moves and speaks. That naivety is mostly seen from his expressions, more notable when speaking to the “terrorist” who clearly sees the big picture Archer is missing. The pacing of the issue is still up there getting our characters from point to point. This is a chase and neither the girl or Archer make any unnecessary stops. In fact it is good to point out how well the effects were adding to show the speed at which they are moving be it train or car. Aside from this when you question Neville's intentions, that is also mainly from what is seen than said which adds to the conspiracy theory.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dead Drop #3

Jul 15, 2015

Dead Drop has been the mini series of interest from Valiant right now. One that takes a different direction to story telling than the rest and takes advantage of characters in a way they have not been seen before. Definitely some left field choices as stated before in the last two reviews for this series. That on top of things not being what they seem with these so-called terrorists and something being off about Neville himself makes you wonder just what this story will come to when we reach that end.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Dead Drop #4

Aug 26, 2015

Dead Drop as a whole is a solid mini series despite having those somewhat predictable issues wrapping up the story at the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Deadman: Dark Mansion of Forbidden Love #1

Oct 5, 2016

Deadman: Dark Mansion of Forbidden Love #1 was a very good start to a story you feel invested in from start to end. Great characters, a constantly evolving story, and mystery which keeps you on your toes for what comes next. Some might look at romance and roll their eyes, yet Deadman: Dark Mansion of Forbidden Love takes a different approach into that world which leaves you wanting more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Deadpool (2018) #1

Jun 10, 2018

Deadpool is indeed back in business. It seems that his time being a big star superhero has been put on halt for the Merc With a Mouth getting back to his roots. This first issue was action-packed, beautifully violent, exposed, witty, and just about anything that you would associate with Deadpool in general. If you are looking for humor without the need for sympathy, then this is the book that needs to be in your pull-list.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Deadpool (2018) #2

Jul 4, 2018

As I said above. Deadpool may be the hero you need, but he surely was not the one you ask for. Everything is coming up Deadpool in issue #2, and if the first issue didn't almost grab you? This one does without a doubt. He's back to doing what he does the best and does it very when while driving everyone mad in the process. Nothing is more memorable than seeing what it is like when this guy of all mercenaries faces off against and end of the world threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Deadpool (2018) #3

Aug 1, 2018

Deadpool #3 is what a day in the life of this ***hole looks like when you don't know whether to call him a mercenary or hero after all of this madness. This creative team embraces what shouldn't make sense, what barely does, and the entertainment value in turning the world being your playground.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Deadpool (2018) #4

Sep 5, 2018

Deadpool #4 was everything you could hope for and more. It had a definite start and finish to this journey through Weirdworld, and what more can I say except that this world is never one to overlook for the unique experience. It's never the same, and nor should it ever when you throw Deadpool into the mix.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Deadpool (2018) #5

Oct 4, 2018

Deadpool #5 was worth the issue given to another misadventure. This one may not have had to do with a job or personal demon coming back to haunt him, but the entertainment value was all you needed at the end of the day. I mean, I still stand by the fact that is was a bit early for a Halloween early since October only just began.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Deadpool (2018) #7

Dec 5, 2018

Deadpool #7 was worth the hype for another holiday special. If I haven't said it already, Scottie Young is made to write Deadpool. He gets the kind of dark humor this book offers, and there is never a dynamic with artists that doesn't nail the over the top savagery that comes with taking on a new mark.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Deadpool (2018) #8

Jan 2, 2019

Another issue of Deadpool that gave us a definite start and finish to his latest shenanigans. This was a mission for the books for everything ridiculous, violent, and unfortunate for the Merc With a Mouth who crossed paths with the one person you wish he could remember. Part of me wants to call it a dirty move from this creative team, but at the same time is it great to know that certain things have not been overwritten.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Deadpool (2018) #9

Feb 6, 2019

Deadpool #9 so far is one of my favorites of this run. There's something to appreciate about a creative team that simply aims to give you the full experience with the Merc With a Mouth. He can be serious, he can be sincere, and he will always be consistently funny. Getting a balance of all these things with each passing issue makes this book easily recommended.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Deadpool (2018) #13

Jun 6, 2019

Deadpool #13 so far is a solid tie-in to the WotR event. One might hesitate with books when they break off to do tie-ins, though this is an exception for the way that it stays Deadpool. This one may not be action-packed, but the next one surely will be. For this chapter you simply sat back to enjoy the hilarity in Wade going to a place where the jokes pretty much write themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Deadpool (2018) #14

Jun 19, 2019

So, is the War of the Realms tie-in for Deadpool worth buying?Just like the others it does prove to be worth your money. It started off a bit slow, but things picked up in a Deadpool-like fashion. You laugh, you cringe, and you find those one or two moments where you have to go WTF because anyone relying on Deadpool is almost screwed if they do not have the right exit strategy.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Deadpool Kills Deadpool #1

Jul 4, 2013

Aside from this the story has some promise, and I say that now because we know what to expect down the road. Of course with that said it's all up to Cullen Bunn to be able to deliver on this because when it comes to Deadpool its hit and miss with execution being very vital in its success. The one thing you are left questioning is if this book will take itself seriously. The previous story arc did and this one seems like it might have that conflict between being funny yet dark. Hopefully there will be a balance that doesn't make you feel as if it has no real purpose.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #1

Nov 7, 2014

Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #1 surely stands out as its own thing despite spinning out of the events following immediately after Death of Wolverine. There are characters worth following, plenty to explore about them and what they can do. Not only this but anticipate what Weapon X might do to get them back or where they fit into this world now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #2

Nov 20, 2014

Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #2 shows that this series has a lot of potential spinning out of the death of a beloved character to many fans. From here one has to wonder what they will do next, what next Weapon X will throw at them, and who they could possibly turn to for help that would better tie these newly created characters to the rest of the Marvel Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #3

Dec 3, 2014

Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #3 puts us at the halfway point on this group of escapee's mission to free themselves of The Weapon X Program's grasp when now it has become a matter of life or death.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #5

Jan 8, 2015

With the conclusion of Death of Wolverine: The Weapon X Program #5 there is a lot to look forward to moving on with these characters. There's a clear-cut direction and much to still be explored with them. If you're not reading The Logan Legacy you should definitely do yourself a favor and pick it up now to know where they are presently and their fates.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Death of X #1

Oct 5, 2016

Overall Death of X #1 gives you reason to see this to the end. The only question is if they are willing to satisfy us with the answers we have been seeking for longer than we should have been waiting. They without a doubt need to prioritize selling us on the direction things have taken and why we should or have been rolling with it up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Death of X #2

Oct 19, 2016

While the belief is still that Marvel needs to save us the pain and reboot the X-Men, there remains just the slightest bit of respect for the explanation of events up to this point even if this again is a story that should have been told long ago. Death Of X #2 gets further in-depth into these unfortunate events that surprisingly ties well enough into how the X-Men were before the cringeworthy relaunch.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Death of X #3

Nov 2, 2016

Death Of X #3 was a slow burn, but it at the very least gets you to look forward to how this concludes. That next issue is it, and from there it is anyone's choice whether they want to care what is being done to the X-Men anymore or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Death of X #4

Nov 23, 2016

Death Of X #4 finally gives us the truth behind Cyclops' death which was satisfactory even if part of you hoped they would possibly screw this up too. The other death didn't impact you as much, but how these events were orchestrated at the end is some of the best writing we might ever get in terms of X-Men post-Secret Wars.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Death Vigil #1

Jul 9, 2014

Death Vigil #1 has the right concept and style for those it manages to grab by the end of the issue. If you like magic or necromancy, then this series is for you. If you just like the idea of a grim reaper being a hero to the living, then this is most certainly the series for you. It was handled very well and leaves room for a lot to be explored from this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Death Vigil #2

Aug 13, 2014

Death Vigil #2 keeps giving us that mix of magic, fantasy and drama. Now that there has been an establishment of the threat, characters, and stakes in this war now we can move on to something more progressive. In terms of seeing the Vigil in more of an offensive position or doing more of the things they say they do as death knights.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Death Vigil #3

Sep 10, 2014

Death Vigil #3 continues to be very grounded for a supernatural tale, striking a balance between their job as reapers and their lives as people. Many could easily strip these reapers of their humanity to make them seem cooler, but for this story it is better that we see them as people before reapers. Same goes for the necromancers as well who could all be throwaway used as filler for villains, but they have personality to them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Death Vigil #4

Oct 8, 2014

Death Vigil #4 is the issue we needed which gave us clarity about what Clara is capable of, and what we really need to know about the enemy in order for the plot to progress. At this point Death Vigil is ready to start jumping into the real fight now that both sides seemed prepared for what the other has to throw at them. Mysteries are fine, though when most still aren't aware of how far the series will go after these 8 issues, the more they know the better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Death Vigil #5

Nov 12, 2014

Death Vigil #5 is the start of something big, and luckily this is one of those series that gives you those extra pages needed to jump straight into the action. The pacing is on point and the escalation of the conflict is exciting when Maria Benes' plan is set in motion.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Death Vigil #8

Aug 22, 2015

Buy the single issues, especially Death Vigil #8 next month. Preoder that issue, buy the trades, show Image that they made a mistake not pushing a series like Death Vigil that had so much potential. Just another fan favorite series that fell through the cracks, but it will be remembered for what it accomplished these 8 issues. A creative plot, concept, an appealing cast of characters, and a quality of artwork that spoils you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Deathlok (2014) #1

Oct 30, 2014

Deathlok #1 is a decent start that pretty much almost anyone can pick up. The costume is familiar, the name is the same, though this is a completely different Deathlok. If you want high-octane action then this feels like the kind of series that will deliver on it if the writer takes full advantage of the type of character Deathlok is.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Deathlok (2014) #2

Nov 26, 2014

Overall there is a lot to expect from this series considering this is a new character being brought to life. This Deathlok has potential when there is depth to him that should be enough to care for him as a person and living weapon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Deathlok (2014) #3

Dec 17, 2014

Overall for a somewhat short issue Deathlok #3 handles a lot between Deathlok's missions, his life at home, SHIELD agent Andrea Hope's progress in pursuit of him, and her meeting with an Avenger for some assistance. Everything is going well for this issue though with everything progressing at such a rate we either need longer issues or more focus placed on certain parts of the story so it doesn't feel rushed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Deathlok (2014) #4

Jan 14, 2015

Overall Deathlok #4 is a solid issue that covers a lot in a short amount of time. Some parts including Agent Hope and JJ could pick up a bit or use a bit more clarity, though the direction the story is taking with Henry Haynes has been great and should continue to be a priority.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Deathmatch #5

Apr 28, 2013

Jenkins definitely has something big planned for both heroes and villains in the end and the progression to that point has been well paced for being on it's fifth issue. Whatever comes next will be a defining moment either in their favor if they can reassess their situation or not if they aren't able to pull together and find out who is the real threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Deathmatch #6

May 31, 2013

Deathmatch #6Written by: Paul JenkinsArt by: Carlos MagnoAs time is running out, Deathmatch #6 shows us how the heroes start to crumble as their backs are against the wall. Again, not only are they losing numbers in battles they cannot avoid, losing numbers to the many villains the heroes are stuck with mutually, more to their attempts at escaping, but now to a force that is so powerful that even the arena is powered to keep it contained.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Deathmatch #7

Jul 4, 2013

Aside from this the momentum of this book is admirable. The pacing in general. Between the fights and them trying to figure out the situation they're in you find yourself really pulled into this story. Sure some of the fights seem rushed, but you wouldn't want to waste too much time on fights that don't have a major impact on the conflict at hand. Everything no matter how small works as a piece of a puzzle, and as a layered story it manages to remain on track while diving into what makes these characters tick. Normally you'd expect spectacle over substance in a book like this though Jenkins manages to take advantage of both.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Deathmatch #8

Aug 15, 2013

Again this is one book you should want to pick up if not for the freedoms and liberties Paul Jenkins takes to make this story unique. This plays with the concept of fighting for your life and takes a more seriously approach to it that you find more engaging when the rest have a tendency to rely on humor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Deathmatch #9

Sep 5, 2013

Overall we are approaching what looks like the end with the final four left to fight for their lives. It's still a fight to survive, but also a fight to find the answers to why this is happening. Though Sable seems to be the person to figure this out, Manchurian looks to be the man with the answers. While not much of a surprise, he has many secrets behind that big brain and that's something we should hopefully be able to explore in the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Deathmatch #10

Oct 10, 2013

Whatever the next issue has in store for us, it is the game changer. I have said this before and I was wrong, but that just proves how clever the writing is. This has already proven to be so much more than all the other books out there which put heroes and villains against each other to fight to the death. The concept here was very elaborate and you can see the layers that constantly appeared and unfolded.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Deathmatch #12

Dec 11, 2013

With the conclusion to this vaunted superhero maxiseries, you have to feel very impressed with what Paul Jenkins accomplished. Between the fights and them trying to figure out the situation they're in you find yourself really pulled into this story. Normally you'd expect spectacle over substance in a book like this though Jenkins manages to take advantage of both. Whatever comes next is worthy of keeping your investment in this story. If you are not invested yet, this is one book that you should pick up and see for yourself just how different it is from those like it.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.9
Deathstroke (2011) #20

May 8, 2013

The only character you really do come out liking is Terra. She maintains the same attitude and presence as she takes the fight to Jericho. Without her involvement in the fight or story overall, everything would've fell flat. If anything this story arc shows that Slade is better when he isn't working with a team. As a solo issue you would expect him to do his thing being an assassin, but Jordan didn't deliver on this, especially up to the end. The artwork remains solid, though that is the only thing that held up aside from Terra's presence.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Deathstroke: Rebirth #1

Aug 10, 2016

Deathstroke: Rebirth #1 I feel could have been a bit better in terms of you really getting what is going on with the plot. You come here to see a different side to Deathstroke which we are getting to, though it feels like what we get next has a whole lot of explaining to do when it comes to drawing us in with payoff.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dejah Thoris #1

Feb 3, 2016

Dejah Thoris #1 is an excellent introduction to a new direction for the character. Falling so far, following how she fell, and then anticipating how she will rise. If those first few pages were any indication of what excitement she will deliver in this series, there is reason enough to look forward to that next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Dejah Thoris #2

Mar 2, 2016

Dejah Thoris #2 is where the story really gets started and from here things can get better or they can get worse for Dejah being so close to the enemy. The focus on substance over style is working for this series and should stay the priority when Dejah is a character with much potential to explore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Dejah Thoris #3

Apr 13, 2016

Dejah Thoris #3 is where things escalate within the army of Barsoom and within the walls of Helium. No one is safe and that keeps us all at the edge of our seats for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Dejah Thoris #4

May 11, 2016

Dejah Thoris #4 overall was good for the focus on developing Dejah, moving John Carter into a position where he can be of more use, and shaking up what you thought this all might lead to when there's more to this story than what was seen on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Dejah Thoris #5

Jun 15, 2016

The search for answers in Dejah Thoris #5 leads to some dark place for our hero, yet that is where we again see her rise to the occasion. Even if that is met with loss along the way. This would be no easy quest, that much we have known, and it is thrilling to see what else will “try” to stand in her way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Dejah Thoris (2018) #0

Jan 10, 2018

I don't know a thing about Edgar Rice Burroughs' beloved book “A Princess of Mars”, but Dejah Thoris #0 felt like motivation to look up what that book is to better get to know this character. She's fierce and she is compassionate for someone who just may save her planet or cause more trouble simply trying. If there is something actually following this #0 issue, then they nailed the motivation to pick it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dejah Thoris (2018) #1

Feb 7, 2018

Dejah Thoris #1 is the start of yet another series that I feel nailed what is needed to be invested in what this story has to offer. Great character development, plenty of new introductions, and provided a lot of potential towards exploration which should play a big role in what's to come. Dejah is not a character to underestimate and I hope this creative team continues to show us why.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dejah Thoris (2018) #2

Mar 7, 2018

Where it was hard to say where this book was taking us after the events of the first issue, Dejah Thoris #2 has begun to put things into perspective and start building a story off of Dejah's misadventures. She was bound to deal with some obstacles, and while one did disappoint in the beginning of the issue, the familiar face to follow was a great step forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Dejah Thoris (2018) #3

Apr 4, 2018

With each passing issue, this series pulls us in more. Dejah Thoris #3 took big leaps to make this experience for Dejah exciting. Every choice she makes will have a direct response or consequence, but how she gets out of these situations is what helps her break from the mold.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dejah Thoris (2018) #4

May 9, 2018

Dejah Thoris #4 was a strong issue for the exploration I felt that we were missing up to this point. They got us from point A to point B, and did not pull punches when it came to the dangers that this group faces with every choice they make.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Dejah Thoris (2018) #5

Jun 13, 2018

Dejah Thoris #5 brings us to the end of the first story arc, and I am stunned by the way this creative team has given us yet another journey into the world of Mars that opens the doors to more than the usual war and politics.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Dejah Thoris (2018) #7

Aug 8, 2018

Dejah Thoris #7 threw us straight into the next mission and what that has in store for the Helium princess when trust is the enemy. An excellent transition from the previous story arc, with pacing and suspense you are once again set to brace yourself for the worst there is to overcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Dejah Thoris (2018) #8

Sep 12, 2018

Dejah Thoris #8 was a great transition from the start of this story arc. The enemy is known, the stakes are set, and now there is only how the warriors of Helium will turn things around when the odds are stacked against them. There's nothing like the thrill of battle when the heroes are underestimated.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Dejah Thoris (2018) #10

Nov 21, 2018

Through the events of Dejah Thoris #10, I have to say that this was a story worth seeing to the bitter end. This was anything but the way you assumed this to conclude for the princess, if you are new to these stories like me. All I ever knew was who Dejah Thoris was while captured by the Green. Everything I have now come to understand about her time before, created a memorable experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Devolution #1

Jan 20, 2016

Devolution #1 that had an interesting start to attract your attention. It just needs to make sure to capitalize on those things which appeal, and make sure to address those things that might go over a reader's head keeping in mind that this is only five issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dial H For Hero (2019) #1

Mar 27, 2019

Dial H for Hero #1 gives us yet another ambitious title from Wonder Comics. If you don't know what the Hero Dial is? Now you know and what we have seen in this first issue only scratches the surface of what this artifact can unleash upon the DC Universe. Miguel is a host with potential for everything that he represents as someone who knows how to be bold and take a risk, yet at the same time needing to understand that all choices have consequences.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dial H For Hero (2019) #2

Apr 24, 2019

Dial H for Hero #2 checked off every box that could have kept you on the fence about where you see yourself keeping up with this book. As an ambitious book for Wonder Comics, it is so far being approached with the sense that readers need to feel satisfied by the end of the issue. That is how I felt at least when the ball got rolling with momentum.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dial H For Hero (2019) #3

May 22, 2019

Dial H for Hero #3 was a wild ride that you wish you didn't have to get off from. Summer's backstory was more than satisfactory, the action was creative, and the hero creations were not only bold, they were unique. To say that they are never before seen is quite the understatement, and that continues to make this book memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dial H For Hero (2019) #4

Jun 26, 2019

Without a doubt, Dial H for Hero is one of the most obscure books from DC right now and it is worth your attention for everything new you can only see once within these pages. I look forward to what the next issue offers because as someone new to this series, there's no other place in the DC Universe like where we're about to go. The reveal of the secret origins of the Heroverse is something to get excited for.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dial H For Hero (2019) #5

Jul 24, 2019

All the answers you've been waiting for are right here, and yet there was so much more to discover along the way! Dial H for Hero #5 was one of the strongest issues so far in the series, and once again left me happy that they decided to bump this series up to twelve issues. It would have been a crime to let this series end after only six. Maybe there would have been a second part in some months or the next year, but would you have really wanted to wait after everything now revealed to us? After what Mr. Thunderbolt is able to unleash upon the world at the end of this issue?

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dial H For Hero (2019) #6

Aug 28, 2019

You get to be a hero, and you get to be a hero, and you get to be a hero! Dial H for Hero #6 went off the rails with the reality that Thunderbolt created in Metropolis where just about everyone who answered the call was granted power. All the chaos this book could muster, they threw it all at us in one issue. Though this is not to say that there wasn't a balance of some standout endearment from Miguel finally digging deep to find the hero that lies within him. By the end of the issue, I wondered how they would continue to push the envelope, and the twist they hit us with was more than satisfactory for those of us who were not prepared to learn that there is still more to the Heroverse that we do not understand.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dial H For Hero (2019) #7

Sep 25, 2019

At the end of the day, was it worth spending a whole issue to get the inside story through the eyes of the ordinary people transformed by the powerful H-Dial? Yes! Yes it was. Dial H for Hero #7 took the creativeness to new heights as the H-Dial exposed a genuine wonder that this artifact is able to offer those in need. It's a good feeling knowing that you can be just as eager for an issue like this as you would be for ‘The Secret Origin of Mister Thunderbolt' to come next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dial H For Hero (2019) #8

Oct 23, 2019

The best takeaway from Dial H for Hero #8 was the challenge in asking yourself who is really the bad guy. The one who wants to save everyone? Or the one who actually knows how to save everyone? Sounds to me like two guys who want to do the right thing, and that is what makes this conflict so compelling right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Dial H For Hero (2019) #9

Nov 20, 2019

Dial H for Hero #9 changed the game in a big way for Miguel and Summer. Once again taking us to that place where we question what makes a hero in the case of someone who wants freedom from everything that seems to be pulling his strings. Saving the multiverse is going to be easier said than done when the hero of the story can't help being the biggest obstacle himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Die #1

Dec 5, 2018

Has Die #1 lived up to the hype? I would not believe anyone who said this did not. It was everything as advertised when the world of real and fantasy clash. There was real emotion, terror, build-up, and a sense of wonder when actually exposed to what these guys got themselves into. Seeing is believing. You know, I might also toss in some elements of 'It' seen too. This may be bold to say, but definitely one of the best debuts for an original story this year.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #2

Jan 9, 2019

Die #2 gave us a lot more to invest in this tale. This is not the kind of story where you so easily get lost in the wonders of escapism. Like Jumanji, and like any game that ever involved removing you from your old life, Die is a sharp reminder that the rules are always important to keep in mind. Especially the kind of rules that keep you on your toes about consequences in Die being just as real in the outside world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Die #3

Feb 6, 2019

Through the events of Die #3 this creative team continues to redefine what it means to experience a Dungeons & Dragons kind of world. Everything seems so exciting from the outside, till the rules become very real. There is no book out there like Die, and that is why this isn't the book you should sleep on. Not if you want adventure, depth, and exploration in many ways.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Die #6

Aug 7, 2019

There was no better way to ease us back into this story than with a new arc that begins with some jaw-dropping character exploration. If you thought that this was going to be one of those stories where everyone starts remembering all the things they loved about the game? You would be proven wrong, and reminded so trough the events of Die #6.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Die #7

Sep 4, 2019

Even among the biggest joke of the party, you can still find tragedy. Die #7 continued to remind us that there is no one trapped here who is running to something, or away. It is also through the events of this issue where you might begin seeing where this fracture of the party might be leading to. Escaping Die was never going to be that easy, but neither will staying.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Die #8

Oct 2, 2019

It seems like a thing now where with each passing issue they choose one character more than any other to get to know better. It wasn't easy to see at first who they chose this time around, but when the time came? I'm glad it was Matt. His story, his power, and what he's fighting for is all-compelling. The message was well received through the events of Die #8 seeing just how much some of these characters have grown since the decisions they made the last time they were in this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #9

Nov 6, 2019

‘Split the Party' has definitely taken many meanings in this arc, and continued to do so through the events of Die #9. It was clever how the creative team found some ways in this chapter to show us that even if it comes time to go home, there might be some other things to worry about given the new information on this world. Overall going home is still going to be easier said than done, but this wouldn't be much of a story if it were ever going to be that straightforward, would it?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Die #10

Dec 4, 2019

As the end of the story arc for ‘Split The Party' Die #10 changed the game in a dramatic way moving forward. There was no preparing yourself for what the driving force would be that keeps this party existing in this realm longer than they wanted. Either they will be their undoing, this world, or something else that they did not take into account while finding new reasons to extend their stay.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Die #11

Jun 24, 2020

With the conclusion of Die #11, they have marked the start of a new game. Where one side is trying to actually play the game again, while the other has no interest in giving any more of their time to it. Things will indeed eventually get messy when every minute in the realm of Die is another minute where the game could put them through the same hell that it did in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #12

Jul 22, 2020

As part two of the new story arc, Die #12 created a proper sense of perspective towards what you might call the long-game. Getting home was always going to be easier said than done, and times like this were the best time to remember why that is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #13

Sep 2, 2020

In the end, whether you got everything in one go, or two, Die #13 was monumental towards shaking up this story with a new sense of direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #14

Oct 7, 2020

In the end, Die #14 did not disappoint one bit. This creative team is just revving up for some big moments to unfold, and right now there's no telling how this party is ever going to return to their lives unshaken by this experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Die #15

Nov 18, 2020

There was no lie about this issue. The board has been flipped. By the conclusion of Die #15, the story has been shaken up in a way that you could not have braced for when the party first began warring.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Divinity #1

Feb 11, 2015

Divinity starts of with a solid foundation, with much more that we are going to have to be patient to understand. Is Abram still the same man who left Earth to explore the far reaches of space all those years ago? Is he the hero or villain?What does the future hold for David? Who knows, but the second issue should be worth checking out to start getting answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Divinity #2

Mar 18, 2015

Divinity #2 proves just how ambitious this title aims to be and the quality of writing Valiant wants to put on shelves with this new initiative. In the previous review of the first issue it was stated that this issue would determine if Divinity is really that must buy title, and that much is the case. This is one series that deserves to be put out there something many should be able to get into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Divinity #3

Apr 22, 2015

Divinity #3 delivers on a powerful roller-coaster of emotions for a guy who really has gotten a lot more than he bargained for. There is a price for power and discovery and no person is an exception to that as we see from this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Divinity II #1

Apr 20, 2016

As story and character driven as the first volume of Divinity. Divinity II #1 is the start of a new sci-fi saga that will rock the foundation of the Valiant Universe in a way they can't imagine when Valentina will possibly do all the things you know they fear Abram is capable of as pretty much a god.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Divinity II #2

May 25, 2016

Divinity II #2 wasted no time showing us what can be done to this world, and what can still be done to it when the mission for Myshka to bring Russia to glory takes a dramatic turn. And for the worst of the Valiant Universe. How do you truly stop a god fueled by rage? That is the question we look forward to being answered by the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Divinity II #3

Jun 22, 2016

Divinity II #3 is the most powerful issue of both volumes of Divinity. It feels like everything was leading to this moment where we not only can address what can go wrong when these powers are abused, but what happens when there is a full understanding of what these powers allow on a human level. For something so out of this world, Divinity is as down to Earth as they come and that pulls you in more than you could imagine.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Divinity II #4

Jul 27, 2016

Divinity II #4 was a great end to another chapter of Divinity. There is no other book worthy of recommendation as Divinity is. You care about the story, the characters, the world built through the artwork. You couldn't imagine any other way to have given the first story a sequel than how things played out here. Not to mention the subtle things which will lead into Divinity III. Probably what will be the most anticipated of the new books announced for Valiant's next wave of books.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Django / Zorro #1

Nov 14, 2014

Django Zorro #1 is exactly what happens when you put two vigilantes together who actively search out evil and corruption to kick its ass. Sure you could want a bit more from it as a first issue considering nothing big happened, but you still finish this issue satisfied that you get a taste of what to expect from these two. We can at least be thankful that there wasn't the cliche of them going the distance with only a tease as to who they were.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Django / Zorro #3

Feb 4, 2015

Big things are coming in Django Zorro #3, and this issue served it's purpose of putting our heroes where they need to be for the their adventure to really get moving. Django now knows the company he keeps, and that changes everything when he was sure of himself that he knew how things should be handled rather than with “sophistication”.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Django / Zorro #4

Feb 25, 2015

Django Zorro #4 is an okay issue compared to the last, though that is only due to this series not having that pacing which you'd expect to keep you at the edge of your seat. You want to see Django do what he does best, you want to see some tag team action between Django and Zorro. That looks like it will come near the end, which is fine, though you also don't want to lose readers holding out till the very end to reach that climax. For a series that picks up after Django Unchained, you don't want to jump into that next chapter of his life only to see him spending more time in a role where he has to keep his head down. Especially for the reputation he had picked up.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Doctor Doom (2019) #1

Oct 9, 2019

Well, that's one way to knock the big guy off of his throne! It's not often that you will see a king like Doom knocked down a peg like this, and you have to love it because that is never without some big plan that is set into motion that he can't power his way out of. Doctor Doom #1 was thrilling, personal, and still found room to be action-packed. As I said above, the book is worth it for the fresh experience that isn't Doom getting up to his normal shenanigans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Doctor Mirage (2019) #1

Aug 28, 2019

No matter the hero, the supernatural experience is never something to pass up. Certainly not for Doctor Mirage who takes us right back into the realm of life and death. And as they, this is a gripping tale when we are exploring the lengths that someone is willing to go to defy death for the one they love most. Don't you want to see that happy ending? Because I sure do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Doctor Strange (2015) #1

Oct 7, 2015

Doctor Strange #1 is an excellent start to a series that shows us how Doctor Strange lives his days as the Sorcerer Supreme. When he has fun, we do too. There is potential here and hopefully this creative team continues to capitalize on it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Doctor Strange (2015) #2

Nov 4, 2015

Doctor Strange #2 is another exciting adventure we follow with Stephen Strange through the Sanctum Sanctorum and the things he knows that most mortals will probably be glad to be unaware of. Big things are coming for him and it is good that through all this chaos there is some sort of plot forming with pacing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Doctor Strange (2015) #3

Dec 2, 2015

Doctor Strange #3 delivers again with another fun adventure while revealing the true plot behind all the things Doctor Strange was finding wrong with what was crossing over into his dimension.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Doctor Strange (2015) #4

Jan 6, 2016

Doctor Strange #4 is where things start to escalate. It's been a slow burn, though it is good to see that they know how to crack the dial when the time calls for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Doctor Strange (2015) #5

Feb 4, 2016

Doctor Strange #5 hit with a serious reality check. The Empirikul are not to be underestimated, the cost of magic is not to be overlooked, and this does not seem like the kind of war where magic will win the day for these magical beings.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Doctor Strange (2015) #6

Mar 10, 2016

Doctor Strange #6 is where the stakes feel real. It is one thing when all the other universes are falling, yet anther thing when its the universe you connect with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2015) #8

May 25, 2016

Doctor Strange #8 was a great set up for what will be all hell breaking loose now that we finally know what lies underneath the cellar. While the price of magic has been a consistent topic, never before have we seen what that price is. We know the cost to the caster, though seeing the price overall is a whole different monster to deal with. Quite literally.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2015) #9

Jun 23, 2016

Doctor Strange #9 is a fast read, though a solid set-up for the final confrontation to come. You could call this a war, but at the end of the day it is a new experience for all when the importance of magic is being established on a global scale. There is something to admire about the exploration of lives that would be nothing without magic in there lives to some extent.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Doctor Strange (2015) #10

Aug 4, 2016

While still being a conclusion to ‘LAST DAYS OF MAGIC', Doctor Strange #10 still leaves you with some answers moving forward. The status quo for the Sorcerer Supreme has definitely been shaken along with the state of the magic world as a whole. If this was their intention from the start, then surely it will be welcomed for whatever comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Doctor Strange (2015) #12

Oct 6, 2016

‘Blood in The Aether' leads us on another adventure to that will keep us at the edge of our seats. Doctor Strange is not the same man we left off with, neither is this world either. Some aim to rebuild, to adjust, to take advantage of the state things have been left in. It feels like a fight for the soul of magic now, and that is what will determine the future of it as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2015) #14

Nov 16, 2016

There's no rest for the Sorcerer Supreme. That much is clear as day when by the end of Doctor Strange #14 you come to understand that things can only get worse as he has quite the persistent/driven rogue gallery.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Doctor Strange (2015) #15

Dec 21, 2016

Doctor Strange #15 ups the stakes in a big way for everyone who wants a piece of the Doctor. He's had his run of luck, but it seems that it has run out backed into a corner. Some say this may be when you're at your most dangerous, but how this issue leaves us off the danger might be far too great.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Doctor Strange (2015) #16

Jan 26, 2017

Doctor Strange #16 brings this next chapter to a close in a way only expected when diving into the deep end of this corner of the Marvel Universe. What you can never deny Doctor Strange as a book is that this isn't your ordinary superhero story with a happy ending. We are too good for that and this creative team understands fully.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2015) #17

Feb 16, 2017

Doctor Strange #17 is where things really get dark. I know that is something they said this book would be as a whole, but this was the first time you could really look at a villain and say that is a problem that needs to be taken care of immediately. Mister Misery is beyond the cliche, and he takes personal to the next level. It should be fun to see what happens when Doctor Strange is done giving out chances for this monster of his own creation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Doctor Strange (2015) #18

Mar 1, 2017

Its issues like Doctor Strange #18 that hits you hard when you realize that there will be a time soon when this run will end, new creative team and all. But until then this story with Doctor Strange versus Mister Misery is going stronger than one would expect. These are the lengths a person will go to save their best friend.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Doctor Strange (2015) #384

Jan 17, 2018

Magic has truly taken on a deeper meaning through this volume of Doctor Strange. This story arc? That takes the price of magic and paying your tab to a whole new level. The events of Doctor Strange #384 probably proved why the Vishanti made the decision they did at the end of that tournament.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Doctor Strange (2015) #385

Feb 14, 2018

Winning has never felt so empty, has it? How do you move forward knowing that you were no better than Loki of all people? The action was satisfying, on top of the treat of never knowing what was going to actually happen till it did. The next issue should surely shake things up as Stephen starts to pick up the pieces of what he is left with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Doctor Strange (2015) #386

Mar 1, 2018

If you thought that what happened to Strange in the arc before was bad? This Damnation tie-in challenged the very thought that he has dealt with the worst. Doctor Strange #386 took that little bit of hope that you may have had for the guy finally picking up the pieces of his life, and shattered them quite literally.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Doctor Strange (2015) #387

Mar 14, 2018

‘Damnation' part two was a big step forward from the first part. If you're looking for a Doctor Strange story that will pull no punches to show how dangerous his world can be? This is the book for you. Doctor Strange #387 plays with the good doctor's emotions, and plays with ours as well. You definitely would anticipate that next issue when that light at the end of the tunnel is looking dim.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Doctor Strange (2015) #390

May 25, 2018

Doctor Strange #390 I'm going to assume is where they hand this story off for the next person, and to bring Doctor Strange into the next phase of the Marvel Universe. I don't know if this is going to be a book worth picking up still after, but I can speak for what Doctor Strange has been up to now, and the only word that comes to mind is astonishing. I don't think we've ever been this engaged in Strange's world whether it was Jason Aaron or Donny Cates writing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Doctor Strange (2018) #1

Jun 6, 2018

The Space-Explorer Supreme takes flight, and this first issue was an excellent set-up for what this new run and creative team has to offer. Doctor Strange #1 killed any of the skepticism I had about picking up where the last story left off. You never know with Marvel relaunches these days, so it makes a big difference when a new creative team knows when a story needs to continue evolving and progressing rather than hit with a blank slate.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Doctor Strange (2018) #2

Jun 20, 2018

If you couldn't find the place to jump into Doctor Strange's story before, this is not the time to miss jumping into a new space adventure experience that he has never had before. The best hero tales are when they are thrown out of their element. That is when heroes rise and pull off the impossible. Issue #2 captured that shining moment perfectly with a first real taste of magic without consequence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2018) #3

Jul 4, 2018

The adventures of the magician and the archanologist took one heck of an interesting turn through the events of Doctor Strange #3. This creative team impressed me because they took a tie-in and made it their own. That is the kind of product any reader should hope for a series, even though it is still a bad habit for Marvel to always be so quick to throw ongoing stories into an event's orbit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Doctor Strange (2018) #4

Aug 22, 2018

Doctor Strange #4 is just another issue that proves why this is the series you need to follow if you want to understand the world of magic in a way you couldn't have before. The possibilities in magic are limitless, and we couldn't have asked for a better creative team to open those doors.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Doctor Strange (2018) #6

Oct 3, 2018

To say something bizarre happening since Stephen took off into the cosmos was an understatement after the craziness of Doctor Strange #6. We're back on Earth, there's a new mission, and a whole new set of problems to tackle which should challenge the Sorcerer Supreme beyond what happens when he lets curiosity get the best of him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Doctor Strange (2018) #7

Nov 7, 2018

Doctor Strange #7 took what has felt questionable about this change in course for Strange's story, and added a bit more thrill to where it might take us. The enemy behind it all was a bit of a let down, but hopefully what follows in the next issue will make up for what you probably could or should have seen coming a mile away.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Doctor Strange (2018) #9

Dec 6, 2018

Doctor Strange #9 restored a lot of faith in this series that was slipping for me. It's all about the new right now. New enemies, new situations, bold solutions. You have to keep on this and execute with consistency for the best results.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Doctor Strange (2018) #10

Jan 30, 2019

I can't say that Doctor Strange #10 was worth the price, but it was worthy of what we got in terms of the answers we've been waiting for since the first issue. We now know what is meant by a price paid for magic, and who deals out the bill. That just leaves us with what comes after skipping the bill for this long, and crossing the person who keeps the tab.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Doctor Strange (2018) #11

Feb 21, 2019

Doctor Strange #11 brought this story arc to a close in the most spectacular of ways for the Sorcerer Supreme and friends. Strange is only at his best when he is aware of his own shortcomings as a person, and he is only as strong as the people he chooses to surround himself with. I'm glad that this chapter in his life was as much a personal journey as it was action-packed and fantastical.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Tomorrow #1

Feb 19, 2020

If you are someone new to Doctor Tomorrow like me? Then I would say that this first issue was more than enough to peak your interest. If someone who was familiar with the old Doctor Tomorrow, you may find this take refreshing as a start. All in all, Doctor Tomorrow #1 sets the stage for a new kind of hero in this universe who challenges the impossible through a new lens.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Tomorrow #2

Mar 18, 2020

If you were probably on the fence about what you thought of Doctor Tomorrow, this second issue delivers on much more that should get you invested in what's to come. This confrontation with Hadrian is supposed to be massive, but the devil is in the details. Anticipation for next month's issue should be high considering the way that context can change an experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Tomorrow #3

Jun 24, 2020

Doctor Tomorrow #3 could have been your run of the mill issue where it's just the big climatic battle for the fate of the world, and nothing more. It made a huge difference that there was a better takeaway from this issue than that. I would say that through the events of this issue they found the smartest way to keep our interest in what the rest of this book has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Doctor Tomorrow #4

Jul 29, 2020

By the end of Doctor Tomorrow #4, I felt more confident in saying that we have gotten somewhere good in the story. Normally I would say it comes down to being patient with the story, but with a book like this, it would have definitely helped if they did more from the start to have made sure we weren't dragging our feet from issues to issue before things improved.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Doctor Who: The Eleventh Doctor #1

Jul 24, 2014

Doctor Who: The Eleventh Doctor #1 again is slow on the build up, but it proves to have the same potential as the show. We have the Doctor back on his feet after the second Big Bang, we have a newly introduced character and companion, and we now have a story set that can go pretty much in any direction Al Ewing so chooses for the Doctor.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Doctor Who: The Eleventh Doctor #3

Oct 1, 2014

Doctor Who: The Eleventh Doctor #3 was going somewhere with this story, even laid down the foundation for a larger mystery to uncover at the end, though as I said before the execution needed work. Especially when we have ended two issues now that left us with more questions than answers. Maybe everything is leading up to a bigger picture, but that remains to be seen or clear.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Dodge City #1

Mar 7, 2018

Dodge City #1 had a solid start, with potential for much more that there is to learn about the world of dodgeball. This creative team chose an interesting approach that we haven't seen before, and that might be the best thing that this book has going for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Domino (2018) #3

Jun 13, 2018

Domino #3 is another fun issue that puts the solider of fortune to the test. You would think that life is easy when you have the power to practically have everything go your way, and then you pick up this series to find out that you would be wrong. This shake-up to her life and relationships is clever when most who handle this character might fall victim to Deadpool-like mercenary shenanigans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Domino (2018) #4

Jul 11, 2018

The plot thickens through the events of Domino #4. Excellent story progress, and character focus all around. This creative team really knows what they are doing with these characters to give us pure entertainment and engagement at the same time with a mutant who doesn't always have that time to slow down and figure herself out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Domino (2018) #5

Aug 9, 2018

Domino #5 overall was a thrilling issue for everything that kept you on the edge about Neena controlling her powers and both Diamondback and Outlaw finding out the hard way that Topaz and Desmond are as dangerous as it gets when driven by so much pain.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Dr. Strange (2019) #1

Dec 26, 2019

If you were on the fence about getting into this new run, then Dr. Strange #1 puts some of those reservations at ease. Overall it is a great concept, though at the expense of the very things that were a bit more thought-provoking about the run before. Hopefully this balance Stephen is trying to get out of being a doctor again will make it easier in overlooking what this takes away from our further exploration of the magic world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Dr. Strange (2019) #2

Jan 29, 2020

Some would say that with the first issue this book looked like it was in good hands, though I would dare to say that after the events of Dr. Strange " Surgeon Supreme #2? Now it feels like this book is in good hands to take us into the next chapter in the life of Stephen Strange with the challenge of being both the sorcerer supreme and a neurosurgeon again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Dr. Strange (2019) #3

Feb 12, 2020

Overall, Dr. Strange " Surgeon Supreme #3 was an enjoyable experience for the unique situation that Strange was thrown into. Magic is engaging when you can explore it, and they did not fail to give us that one element to this series which should never be ignored. Where there was confidence before in this creative team, now there is appreciation for what has not been lost about key selling points.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dr. Strange (2019) #4

Mar 4, 2020

This first story arc is going with momentum and hitting all the right notes. There's nothing about this situation that doesn't get the wheels in your brain turning because they want to believe it's one person, when it could be something else entirely. Dr. Strange " Surgeon Supreme #4 accomplished that while also continuing to strike a perfect balance between both halves of Stephen's life that he is fighting to keep from interfering with the other.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Dr. Strange (2019) #5

Jul 8, 2020

There was a lot of takeaway from this issue of Dr. Strange " Surgeon Supreme, by the end. They packed a lot of discoveries and revelations into this issue, and I for one was satisfied with who the mastermind turned out to be. It was one of those things where you may find yourself wondering why you didn't think of said person orchestrating this chaos, but it worked because anyone would have assumed this was a strictly magic problem.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Endless Winter (2020): Justice League #1

Dec 2, 2020

Overall, I would say that the events of Justice League: Endless Winter #1 left me intrigued to see where DC is going with this crossover event. That is, if it will really be worth getting pulled from one superhero book into the next in order to keep up with what's now unfolding. If the Justice League is not enough to stop the Frost King, who else will step up to handle this new enemy?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Eternal Warrior (2013) #2

Oct 16, 2013

This issue is all about trying to restore that balance which puts the world at risk. Father and daughter now reunited because they were born to fight, they belong in the war zone, killing is almost all they know and it makes them feel alive. Though it comes with a twist Greg Pak has thrown that makes this a must book to all. The Eternal Warrior is going to take the fight to Earth herself. It's one thing to break all the rules, and challenge death itself, but Earth? You sure as hell want to pick up this book and follow what comes next to see how this story plays out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Eternal Warrior (2013) #3

Nov 20, 2013

What makes this such a thrilling tale is that you see what it means to be loyal, and what it feels like to be truly betrayed. That feeling carries so much influence over a person's actions and for these two that is the difference between duty and quite literally raising hell to find the answer to their call. This issue is centered around the secrets to that call and the end is every indication as to why some truths are best to be hidden. It's one that will change the world of Gilad and Xaran, both finding out that they got more than they bargained for in the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Eternal Warrior (2013) #4

Dec 18, 2013

Excellent issue that gives us a taste of what is in store for us, Gilad, and Xaran. They have taken the fight to Earth itself and now they must face down the legion of swords at her command. You read this to see just how two of history's most feared warriors can survive the divine wrath that they have wrought. The intensity continues to pick up here and that is something that goes hand in hand with this type of story. Bad things are to come and bloodshed is all but inevitable considering how events are unfolding. This is one book you don't want to miss out on if you like a book that keeps you at the edge of your seat. The end of this issue surely will and what comes next is worth waiting for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Eternal Warrior (2013) #5

Jan 22, 2014

As a new jump-on point this is a good start for Eternal Emperor. You may be left with some questions from the previous story arc if someone who followed the story from the start, but if a new reader there isn't much to know aside from the fact that Gilad killed the gods and brought about this future we see. Read this book if you want to see real action from someone who has been there and done it all. That will be what is to come after Gilad sees what he must do next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Eternal Warrior (2013) #6

Feb 12, 2014

Eternal Warrior has not ceased to slow down the momentum and it has been for the best. You get action, there are real consequences for actions, and you can see the bleak atmosphere that hangs over everyone's heads once you find out how things got so bad and how they will get worse. From Eternal Warrior to Eternal Emperor there is never a dull moment when you are waiting for Gilad to jump into the next fight or those subtle moments where you dig into those years of wisdom that influence his actions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Eternal Warrior (2013) #7

Mar 26, 2014

Great issue of Eternal Warrior that sets things in motion for a point of no return. There's no telling what's in store for them all as they make their next move, but all that is known is that they do it having their best interest in mind. That is what I like to see and again anything can happen when no one is untouchable. Even though some may still really want to know what caused this future, you still read this and care that it skips through time and gives you reason to brush off those questions as it clearly is able to stand on it's own.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Eternal Warrior (2013) #8

Apr 23, 2014

Far removed from the modern-day was the Eternal Warrior, Gilad and this was a story worth telling to show us a future that could be. Eternal Warrior #8 wrapped up Eternal Emperor surprisingly focusing on the emotional values rather than action, which I didn't mind at all. Now I just hope that with this over we can probably get some idea as to the real fallout from where the last story arc ended. It's just something you can't ignore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Eternal Warrior: Awakening #1

May 10, 2017

The Eternal Warrior's 25th anniversary here continues to satisfy with Eternal Warrior: Awakening #1 as the second of four standalone specials. This story had a definite start and finish to it that surely leaves you wanting more, and that is the effect f the Eternal Warrior when he has lived quite the exciting life. Many stories to tell, and still many more. Well for now, two more in celebration of this anniversary.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel #1

Nov 5, 2014

Eternal Warrior has returned at long last to our pull lists with another series of his own. This story though not an ongoing has a lot of potential as long as we stick to a Gilad that is someone we admire as that warrior who has been there, done that, and looks for meaning in the things he has to do.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel #2

Dec 3, 2014

Overall this issue is okay. Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel #3 will have to make up for this in a big way when the previous two stories ahead of this had more compelling stories to them. There needs to be something we can take away from this when it ends and that needs to be something which makes this stories memorable to some extent because right now you really could move on from it and not miss much.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel #3

Jan 7, 2015

With the conclusion of Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel, this story was probably the least memorable of those which came before. An ending which was slightly underwhelming and had the makings to be a lot more if more than 3 issues was put into it. Eternal Warrior: Days of Steel had potential, it just came down to execution which didn't quite happen with the exception of few moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Eternity #1

Oct 25, 2017

Eternity #1 was worth the wait and the hype. Abram and Myshka are going where no other Valiant hero has gone before, and probably ever will go. A lot of what we are introduced to in this first issue definitely leaves you wanting more when for as much as we do know, there's a whole lot more to discover.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Eternity #2

Nov 29, 2017

Eternity #2 proves why this is the quality you get out of your story/art when you strive to breathe life into new characters, worlds, and concepts that pull you in to a memorable experience. This unfolding plot is the perfect challenge to throw at beings who would call themselves gods, only to face down entities that can honestly make them feel small.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Eternity #3

Dec 27, 2017

Through the conclusion of Eternity #3, for better or for worse Abram and Myshka have found their purpose in this chaos. The time for taking in the sights and questioning the new/different has passed. Now there is nothing in front of these two, but the child and what lies at the heart of this problem. We still don't know what force exactly set all this in motion and that is what hurts to overlook. Eternity right now is the full package with so much to absorb between the exploration, action, and self-discovery.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Eternity #4

Jan 31, 2018

Eternity #4 does indeed bring this story that will forever expand the boundaries of the Valiant to a close. As far as new stories go, I'm glad that this one has succeeded so much in proving that original ideas in a universe like this can flourish with quality work put into it. I don't know if the next chapter will still be called Eternity, go back to Divinity, or take on a new name, but whatever form it takes I hope that Valiant understands that we want more from this corner of the Valiant Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Evil Ernie: Godeater #1

Aug 3, 2016

Evil Ernie: Godeater #1 was a fast read, though it gives you much to look forward to with Ernie being pulled into the thick of this end of the world situation. He's fun, he's foul mouthed, and there's always something entertaining about a guy like him who is reluctant to be the hero or soldier.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #1

Nov 15, 2017

Evolution #1 kicks off the new global phenomenon that you don't want to sleep on. Some will tell you that you should welcome change, not fear it, but Evolution from the start will tell you that there is plenty to fear when you are talking about real change. The kind that will change every life forever.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #2

Dec 20, 2017

Things are getting real in the world of Evolution by the end of this second issue. You can definitely see how much work this creative team has put into this book that Skybound allowed them to experiment with. Still not too certain who is handling what here, but for now I like that mystery because you are looking at this like a single moving organism than a bunch of pieces.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Evolution #3

Jan 17, 2018

Through the events of Evolution #3, the plot thickens and no one is safe when there is no turning back from that initial experience. No one here is affected the same way and that is probably the best thing this story has going from it. These perspectives are unique, and these characters have so much to lose in their own way. This is a book you don't want to overlook as the excitement lies within the mystery.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #4

Feb 21, 2018

Evolution #4 was a great step forward for this story when the focus this time around leaned more towards substance and context. The experience from these three characters is so drastically different and that is allowing for exploration of a phenomenon that usually might be limited or weighed down by cliche. Everything about Evolution so far is refreshing as they tap into the human condition when faced with the unknown that takes place within the body.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Evolution #5

Mar 21, 2018

Evolution #5 pulled no punches taking us into the thick of this phenomenon. You're either exposed to this world unraveling, or you should be bracing for that moment of revelation. This is how you take someone's life and flip it upside down.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #6

Apr 18, 2018

You get what you ask for, that seems to be the theme of Evolution #6. At this point now everyone in some way has found themselves directly involved in the undergoing of this rapid evolution. Drastic measures were definitely taken, secrets were brought to light, and relationships are shaken to the core. No stone was left unturned for those who have refused their chance at blissful ignorance to what is unfolding around them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Evolution #7

Jun 20, 2018

Evolution #7 is taking full advantage of the momentum that has built up. There is no one too far in the dark about this phenomenon anymore, and every choice made from this point forward matters more than ever. Particularly when there are more lives at risk than that of our main three characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #8

Jul 18, 2018

Evolution #8 continues to take big steps forward, and right now progress is key. Not to mention momentum because what keeps us coming back for more is the anticipating to see how bad things can get before they get any better. If there is such a thing as getting better in this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #10

Sep 19, 2018

Big things are unfolding through the events of Evolution #10. We got a taste of the terrifying, and the beautiful. It was pretty much the best of both worlds, with the added layer that the horror can also come from humanity. Abe is a twisted man for better or for worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Evolution #11

Oct 17, 2018

As far as the climax goes for this second arc, I think the events of Evolution #11 nailed what we needed to get out of the story at this point. The character decisions matter more than they ever did before, and they did not disappoint either. The horror is the way they have taken in reveal of the Evolved to them. An experience only human in response whether agreed with or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Evolution #12

Nov 21, 2018

Evolution #12 brings us to the end of the second arc, and now is where you can say that this story truly takes off. Both sides of this conflict are fully aware of the situation, for the most part, and the name Kavalis is not much of a mystery anymore. Now we just need to see what happens now that there is no turning back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #13

Jan 16, 2019

Evolution #13 was a great return for this series, and this new story arc nailed the kind of progress we needed to see from this story right now. The situation is getting worse, everyone has made their beds, and now they have to lie in it. The only questions remains as to who will survive this experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Evolution #14

Feb 20, 2019

Evolution #14 takes us leaps further into the transformation that this world is taking on. You are either accepting the changes that come with the evolved, fighting back, or just looking to survive the experience. The pay-off from this issue was perfect for finally getting us to a point where stories can begin drawing connections to one another. That is when you know we are approaching that climax.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Evolution #16

Apr 17, 2019

Evolution #16 might just be one of the best issues from this series. Possibly the best if you ask me. For a horror book, you just don't expect this kind of heart to be poured into the story. It worked even if as I said, it was fleeting. Aside from this, it was great to see this continued climb towards big things unraveling with bolder moves made by our main characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Evolution #17

Jul 17, 2019

After the events of this issue, it's hard to believe that the end times of humanity are here. Evolution #17 took that next big step with our main characters. Some of them are right where they were meant to be, while others are still following a path that might easily lead to ruin. Only time will tell of course, and that's what keeps you coming back for more!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Evolution #18

Sep 25, 2019

I was genuinely satisfied by the conclusion they gave us through the events of Evolution #18. For Claire, Abe, and Hannah, their stories came full circle from the random people they were at the start who had no idea what they were about to be introduced to. We got horror, we got endearment, and we got consistent character engagement. These are characters you can miss, but at least this book ended on a note where you could try to fill in some blanks yourself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Excalibur (2019) #1

Oct 30, 2019

Just like Marauders, Excalibur #1 embarks us on a new journey that takes mutants where they dare not go. Magic and mutants have never mixed too well in the past, but in this Dawn of X, it's a bold new world where there is no ruling out anything that could give mutantkind a further edge over their competitors. The big takeaway from this first issue is that the creation of the Krakoan Nation did not just ruffle the feather of those on Earth. That tells you enough about the heads this move will turn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Excalibur (2019) #2

Nov 21, 2019

There was some action, though for the most part Excalibur #2 continues to lay the foundation for this journey into the Otherworld. I only hope that in the issues to come, they do just a bit more to add some appeal to these characters. They all have been written to have something to worry about or fight for, but those things at the same time they should be careful not to lose themselves with. It can be very easy for something like Jubilee worrying about Shogo to be one too many things to follow or focus on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Extremity #1

Mar 1, 2017

Extremity #1 is a strong representation of what any reader likes about Skybound's books. These stories and characters push boundaries most comics aren't bold enough to. This first issue of Extremity holds so much potential for what happens when you strip what someone lives for from them literally. How do you make yourself feel whole again? This is a story that aims to live up to its name and you should brace for every moment of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Extremity #2

Apr 5, 2017

I think the letter at the end of the issue said it better than I could have as Extremity continues as a shining example of the heart and clear perspective which pulled me in to a number of Skybound titles. This story goes well beyond the action of seeking vengeance. Even as I use that word quite often, these past two issues have given us so much more that breathes life into this world and those who inhabit it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Extremity #4

Jun 7, 2017

By the end of this issue it was easy to get consumed in the path Thea and Jerome have taken against the Paznina. This allowed us to be caught off guard and open to the fact that there is more than one path to take in this story. The weight of war and hate weighs on more than those two, and more than those two can b negatively affected in the process. Extremity #4 went the distance to reinforce what we were in store for when these characters fear what will be sacrificed for the sake of taking down the Paznina.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Extremity #5

Jul 5, 2017

Extremity #5 was more of a question as to far Jerome is willing to go. Thea may have the biggest decision to make regarding the path she wants to take but it takes moments and experiences like she has had now to understand what it means to lose yourself. Rollo understands this and chance encounter understands this as well. I love that there is this line where not everyone is willing to cross. Thea is walking it and I'm anxious to see where she falls soon enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Extremity #6

Aug 2, 2017

Extremity #6 brings this first story arc to a close and really does change the trajectory of the story as a whole. What seemed like working up to an expected outcome was really just closing one door and opening another. I'm glad with the way this issue ended because there's now so much more opportunity to explore what this world has to offer. The good, the bad, the fantastic, everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Extremity #7

Oct 4, 2017

Extremity #7 is another step taken in Thea and Rollo's journey. They see new places, they meet important people, but above all they are understanding a world beyond their own. There is a sense of satisfaction from the direction we are heading in when these two staying with the Roto would have easily turned bland after some time. I think I speak for most when I say it more captivating to experience someone overcoming such hate and despair than to sink in it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Extremity #8

Nov 1, 2017

Extremity #8 shows that no action comes without a direction reaction or consequence. Thea and Rollo face unparalleled danger from the unknown while tackling a noble cause, and you have Annora who shows a drive we haven't seen before from the princess. Just focusing on these two areas right now is wise when we have so much room to connect with these characters and the struggles they face.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Extremity #9

Dec 6, 2017

If I had a book I wanted to recommend all my friends to read,so far right now that book would be Extremity after the events of this issue. Everything leading up to this moment was beautiful. Extremity engulfs you in the darkness of this world, but allows you to see that you don't have to take it. You can rise above the pain, the grief, and loss. You never get over those things, but you don't have to let it define your every move. No book on shelves right now will put that better for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Extremity #10

Jan 3, 2018

With only a few issues left in the series, Extremity #10 as they say is not pulling any punches. This is not just about a war between Roto or Paznina anymore, it is about saving these people from themselves. Extremity and this creative team has done a standout job of capturing what it means to be human. The pain, the compassion that you try to extend to those who need it most, the harm you do to yourself and others. All things that play a big part in this world and how it turns.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Extremity #11

Feb 7, 2018

The final battle did indeed start, and by the end of Extremity #11 we are left with nothing but dread for how this will all end. These two factions are sooner to kill each other than work together, and this monster has a high chance of being able to kill them before they can eliminate the other. There are plenty of ways this story could hit this first half of the finale, but this was not one that you could have predicted. The human element plays a big part in this story and that leaves so much to chance when its anything goes from here. Even with the big clash that this concluded on.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Extremity #12

Mar 7, 2018

I will keep saying it till another book affects me this much, but Extremity has set the bar for fantasy stories alike. You can have it all in a world like this. The wonder, excitement, pain, and loss. There's no limit to what your characters can experience like these did. Not when it comes to how people can drown in hate, lose themselves to vengeance, or how they can dig themselves out of that hole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #1

Feb 26, 2020

Action spectacular is the right way to describe Falcon & Winter Soldier #1. When this story began? This creative team hit the ground running with what comes from Bucky and Sam joining forces. Pacing and momentum will be key in every issue after this one keeping us at the edge of our seats for this high-octane action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #2

Mar 25, 2020

Falcon & Winter Soldier #2 was entertainment value at its finest. When someone hypes up a train scene? It should look a little something like this! It would be a crime if you got anything less. This creative team understands the concept of going big or going home with a book featuring two action heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Falcon & Winter Soldier (2020) #3

Sep 30, 2020

All in all, it is good to have Falcon & Winter Soldier back on shelves. The satisfaction I felt from issue #3 more than made up the wait they made us endure since March. Hopefully this is the start of this book returning to a proper release schedule again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Falcon (2017) #1

Oct 11, 2017

Falcon #1 and as a series serves as the best follow-up to the disaster that was Captain America working for HYDRA. This is not the book to sleep on if you want a story with heart to it. The whole HYDRA event didn't stick with me, but when you take the perspective of someone who is affected as a fried to Steve, of someone who is seen as stained by that association, even to his own people, a story like that may have been worth it. We couldn't get to where we are with Falcon getting back to basics without that nightmare.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Falcon (2017) #2

Nov 8, 2017

‘Take Flight' part 2 wasted little time addressing the villainous motives behind this riot that may just eat Chicago from the inside out. A lot happened in just one issue which you didn't expect for it being the second. Momentum is key right now and they are taking full advantage of what that produces in a story that is fast and to the point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Falcon (2017) #3

Dec 13, 2017

Falcon #3 showed that this is not the story you probably thought this would be. From the minute they introduced Blackheart as the villain, this became something bigger than your usual street-level problems. If there was any way to truly test the resolve of a hero like Falcon, they found the right obstacle to throw his way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Falcon (2017) #4

Jan 31, 2018

With the end to ‘Take Flight' part four, Falcon #4 was a powerful issue for everything that is at stake in this fight against Blackheart. Identity came into question, the idea of what it means to be a hero, and how to rise to the occasion when there are people who depend on you.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Falcon (2017) #5

Feb 14, 2018

Falcon #5 is a defining issue for what it means to be a hero in a post-HYDRA Cap world. Sam needed a wake-up call, and he sure as hell got one. Overall this chapter had excellent character development, a strong focus on the relevance of this cast of characters, and the wide appeal of a story with substance. This creative team never lost focus of what was engaging to the action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Falcon (2017) #6

Mar 14, 2018

Falcon #6 is the start of another story with potential as we have another opportunity to further explore the person we know as Sam Wilson. The best thing about a solo book like this is the ability to see what these characters have to offer on their own, and at the same time it is also what can come off addressing the importance of the person behind the mask. Rayshaun's part in this issue was small, but it was worthwhile to see that on his own he is learning the same thing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Falcon (2017) #8

May 25, 2018

Falcon #8 brings this vampiric adventure to a close, as well as Mephisto's response to what was really a big hit to his ego. This series continues to stand out for the ability to think outside the box in dangers a hero like Falcon can face, strike a balance between who the characters are in costume and outside of it, while also addressing the importance of having a stable supporting cast.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Fallen Angels (2019) #1

Nov 13, 2019

Through the events of Fallen Angels #1, we take a deeper exploration into what this age of peace means to the more battle-hardened. Certainly not a book that you want to just jump into without knowing what's going on in the mutant world currently, but it does manage to stand on its own if you can get past that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Fantastic Four (2018) #1

Aug 8, 2018

Personally I was a bit disappointed that there was no actual return in this first issue. It was teased, though this was more of a catching up with those left on Earth more than anything else. The only reason I could give them a pass right now is because this creative team went out of their way to make it known through the Skottie Young story that next month is where we will without a doubt get our return.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Fantastic Four (2018) #3

Nov 14, 2018

Everything we have been waiting for was indeed in this very issue. Fantastic Four #3 was a satisfying execution of the full reunion that was met with both thrilling action and sincere character moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Fantastic Four (2018) #4

Nov 28, 2018

While I found the plot for this issue questionable at first because of the introduction of the Fantastix, Fantastic Four #4 quickly found a way to serve its purpose for closing one door and opening another. I look forward to what the future holds for this family when they aren't simply going back to their old life. It's all new moving forward and that is the breath of fresh air that we all need with their integration back into the Marvel Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Fantastic Four (2018) #6

Jan 16, 2019

Overall it is going to take some time to get used to having the Devourer of Worlds back instead of The Lifebringer, but under these circumstances who could argue with an opportunity to see Doctor Doom versus Galactus? Overall, Fantastic Four #6 was a thrilling start to this new story arc, “Herald o Doom”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Far Sector #1

Nov 13, 2019

Far Sector #1 so far gives us one of our most unique spins to the legacy of the Green Lanterns. Sometimes it all really comes down to how you introduce these heroes. Jo isn't your average Green Lantern, this isn't your average murder investigation, and it seems that even Jo being here has some mystery to it for us to unravel. After this debut issue, I anticipate the kind of story this creative team will be able to tell that other Lantern teams could not in the main publication.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Far Sector #2

Dec 11, 2019

So far this creative team has set-up a brilliant mystery here. How do you draw the line between what you read on their faces, and what they express through their words? Where do you drawn the line between having real emotions and simulating it out of basic habit? Far Sector #2 assured us all that finding the answers to all of this is going to be easier said than done.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Far Sector #3

Jan 22, 2020

Jo may be a rookie, but that does not suggest that she is no stranger to the kind of job she has been requested to deal with. Far Sector #3 sweeps you off your feet because this creative team pulled no punches creating a real argument for having the freedom to express emotions, versus feeling nothing for your own safety. Murder mystery are great, but you have to love the way this story has suddenly evolved into something much more engaging.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #4

Feb 26, 2020

Everyone right now is looking at their favorite Green Lantern for the 80th Anniversary, but for me that Lantern just so happens to be Green Lantern Jo Mullein. That may be a quick decision after only four issues, but none share a personality and use of the ring quite like this. Far Sector #4 solidified that choice through the tackling of relevant themes that we see in our own world, and handled with such brilliance towards accuracy and proper engagement.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #5

Mar 25, 2020

Overall, getting the full story of Jo was worth waiting five issues. To say she represented something real before was an understatement after the reveal of her past. Even after that, there are still a couple more questions to ask about the ring specifically. What is the power source? What happens after a year with this experimental ring? Who specifically is this person who her the ring? Though the answers for that will come in good time, Far Sector #5 answered everything else which was a must for us to better connect with this new Lantern.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Far Sector #6

Jun 3, 2020

Overall, Far Sector #6 made the wait for this issue worth it. Real problems that we can connect with, and real problems that not many books out there are bold enough to address.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #7

Aug 5, 2020

Far Sector #7 was excitement on many levels, literally. I'm happy that they have decided to continue Far Sector on a new bimonthly schedule. It is a crime to have to wait so long to see what happens next in this conspiracy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Far Sector #8

Oct 7, 2020

Overall, Far Sector #8 did not let us down for showing us exactly why Jo would be disgusted to realize she's facing the same kind of bureaucracy nonsense she has experienced back home on Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Far Sector #9

Dec 2, 2020

All in all, Far Sector #9 was another insightful issue which perfectly sets up for the next big thing to unfold.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Far Sector #10

Feb 3, 2021

As the climax, Far Sector #10 did not let us down one bit. It was a satisfying climax to what has changed the game entirely. We now move forward with a better understanding of what is really at stake here, and who the true enemy is.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Fearscape #1

Sep 19, 2018

What is destiny? If you thought this was going to be one of those stories, Henry Henry laughs in the face of that expectation. Fearscape #1 is a story of great opportunity given to the least deserving. One of the best debuts I've seen this year. How does a man like Henry play hero to a place like Fearscape? Is there truly weight to the words of a plagiarist? As the reader, you are almost left fearing for the wrong reasons, and that is a feeling we aren't privileged enough to experience from other stories of the like.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Firefly (2018) #1

Nov 14, 2018

Firefly #1 gave me high hopes for what BOOM! Studios can offer with their shot at exploring this verse. These characters are given a voice that you resonate with, and its all the same fun shenanigans that only they can get themselves into trying to simply survive.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Firefly (2018) #2

Dec 19, 2018

Firefly #2 was equal parts heartwarming and heartbreaking. This creative team did not skip a beat giving us the soul of this franchise in just two issues so far. They have my faith right now that they can do this story and these characters justice. All they have to do is continue tapping into that well of potential and things that haven't been touched yet by other creatives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Firefly (2018) #3

Jan 16, 2019

Firefly #3 was a heck of an eye-opener to what actually made Mal and Zoe so wanted after the events of the war. What they did had to be significant, and the reveal did not disappoint. The only question now is how they will get out of this in one piece. We know they will, but you always brace yourself for how that will happen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Firefly (2018) #4

Feb 27, 2019

Firefly #4 overall was a strong representation of what makes this story and crew stand the test of time. The jobs tend to have a chaotic formula to them, but that is what you get when you hop aboard the Serenity. You expect the unexpected, and prepare yourself for everything that will go wrong before the job is done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Firefly (2018) #5

Apr 24, 2019

This chapter of Firefly was fun, personal, and continues to shake things up when no one is safe ever. Firefly isn't one of those stories where you let your guard down for a second. Not when even now Mal and Zoe find themselves in greater dangers than they started with.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Firefly (2018) #6

May 15, 2019

This issue of Firefly had a lot going on, but I was overall impressed by the quality writing that went into all of it. Mostly when it came to the pacing which could have easily been rushed or clunky if handled any differently.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Firefly (2018) #8

Jul 17, 2019

Toss everything you thought this was leading to, and prepare yourselves for a new war altogether! Firefly #8 played a bold game shaking things up for everyone who thought they were ready to play hero. I personally can't wait to see what happens when everyone crosses paths once more to figure out just how things got this out of hand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Firefly (2018) #26

Feb 24, 2021

Firefly #26 in the end did make me interested in this series again. I'm still surprised that it actually made it all the way to twenty-six issues, yet also impressed that they could find a place this deep in the story to say “Here's what you've been missing out on!”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Firefly: Brand New 'Verse #1

Mar 24, 2021

All in all, I felt like by the end of Firefly: Brand New ‘Verse #1, I felt myself excited for the issues to follow in a way that I haven't been before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Five Ghosts #16

Apr 8, 2015

Five Ghosts #16 plays with your emotions and really takes that leap to make this another life or death memorable adventure for Fabian and Sebastian. Their fates are up in the air with that cliffhanger, but with how this issue ended you'd bet there has to be interest in what Frank Barbiere has in store for us in a world where you expect the unexpected.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Five Ghosts #17

Jul 22, 2015

Five Ghosts #17 is the finale to another story arc that kept us at the edge of or seats wondering if this was it for any of these characters we have attached ourselves to throughout.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Five Ghosts: Special #1

May 13, 2015

Overall, Five Ghosts: Special #1 is an issue worth picking up for exploration, a laugh, and to help show support a book that deserves to have reached this far to deserve a special.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Flash (2016) #1

Jun 22, 2016

Flash #1 proves that DC is really coming around with these Rebirth titles. Don't look at this as a form of reboot or relaunch, look at it as a restructuring of DC's stories and for the best. When you are asking the importance of being a superhero? These are the books you will probably be turning to right now as far as the big two are concerned.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Flash (2016) #2

Jul 13, 2016

Flash #2 makes Barry's life more complicated than it already is with all the weight that comes with being the Flash. This issue has heart, it's action-packed, reminds you of how great it is to be a superhero, and the quality of the artwork continues to improve. This creative team hasn't let up with their momentum and hopefully that shouldn't change anytime too soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Flash (2016) #3

Jul 27, 2016

Flash #3 continues to live up to what is making Rebirth so great. No reason why this one shouldn't be on your pull-list when it reminds you of everything you love about superheroes. The struggles of a normal life, the struggles of having superpowers, training those new to understand them, and facing a threat which will take you to places you haven't gone before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Flash (2016) #4

Aug 10, 2016

‘Lightning Strikes Twice' part four was an action-packed and entertaining issue of Flash. You love the characters, there is a great build up to this plot that doesn't rely on shock value, and you really do want to see what the world has in store for Barry when he is actively taking control of his life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Flash (2016) #5

Aug 24, 2016

Flash #5 was personal, it was fun, and yet it still knew when to pull the ripcord and remind you of the danger that has been lurking around the corner. No reason why this one shouldn't be on your pull-list right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Flash (2016) #10

Nov 9, 2016

‘The Speed of Darkness' part one is a great start to a new story rich with giving us the best of both worlds between Wally and Barry. If there is any book from DC on shelves that will remind you of what it means to be a superhero at the core, that will be The Flash.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Flash (2016) #11

Nov 23, 2016

‘The Speed of Darkness' part 2 adds clarity to what this story arc was meant to become. Flash #11 put character development and plot progression above all else and that is what made this better than it could have been if Shade turned out to be just like any other villain they turn into on the streets.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Flash (2016) #12

Dec 14, 2016

Flash #12 brings us to the end of ‘The Speed of Darkness' in the most satisfying way. What's the point in a superhero story these days if they simply do more of the same? This creative team continues to aim for the sky with proving that heroes can evolve past repetitiveness. That is all you can ask while still being able to see your favorite heroes doing what they do best.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Flash (2016) #13

Dec 28, 2016

Flash #13 is another nice issue to take in for the value in what goes on in a superheroes life outside of kicking and punching. The importance of love, friendship, family that can drive some of the most genuine of intentions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Flash (2016) #14

Jan 11, 2017

Flash #14 was the best time for ‘Rogues Reloaded'. I guess you could call this their Rebirth story as well. It seems that just about everyone is getting that sort of treatment, so it was only a matter of time before The Rogues began making their presence known again, as they always do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Flash (2016) #23

May 31, 2017

As a prelude to ‘Running Scared', The Flash #23 was a solid catch-up and an even better transition into the next big problem. Probably the worst case scenario for The Flash and those close to him, but this feels like the next step towards finding out just what the heck is going on in Rebirth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Flash (2016) #24

Jun 14, 2017

If you thought this was ever going to be a happy story, then The Flash #24 was the best wake-up call you could ask for. Unsettling doesn't even begin to describe the reminder of just how dangerous it is for a villain like Reverse Flash to be allowed into your personal life. Someone so fast, with little humanity, and struggles even more than Barry to let the past go.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Flash (2016) #26

Jul 12, 2017

Flash #26 created the most challenging question for Barry that he has had to make up to this point. To spend forever alone or doom the future, that is one heck of a choice to give a broken man. Luckily ‘Running Scared' revealed another kind of hero that you should never overlook. One who Barry and The Flash should never overlook. Especially with the sacrifice Barry makes to understand this as it seems Reverse-Flash will figure this out the hard way.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Flash (2016) #27

Jul 26, 2017

After the events of The Flash #27 there's no way you can see things going back to normal. The life of a hero is hard when keeping secrets to protect those closest to you can easily become your downfall when they can also feel betrayed upon learning the truth. Patterns are the weakness of any superhero story and luckily this creative team addresses how this will always come back to bite someone like Barry.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Flash (2016) #32

Oct 11, 2017

The Flash #32 felt like stepping into a different world altogether, yet in a good way. This creative team doesn't play it safe which is something to appreciate when looking for every new arc to be refreshing compared to the last. New powers to explore, new dynamics, more problems, and a treat at the end to anyone who was onboard for the Godspeed story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Flash (2016) #34

Nov 8, 2017

Ha, you think the craziness has ended, but there seems to be no sign of sanity in the life of Barry and Wally anytime too soon. Friends and trust are in short supply for these two which they continue to learn the hard way. This was a touching issue for the most part as they almost lead us into a false sense of security. Well that is if you were like me and ignored the words on the cover.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Flash (2016) Annual #1

Jan 31, 2018

As the ‘Flash War' prelude, The Flash Annual #1 was a satisfying set-up for this supposedly big Flash story of 2018. By the end of this issue it was clear as to what this turning point would be for the Flash family, and while its hard to assume what would set those wheels into motion for there to be a Flash War, there is only one kind of person who could dare. This story is as bold as it gets, and I hope the creative team for this approaching War will think on their feet about what will separate this from anything else involving messing with time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Flash: Rebirth (2016) #1

Jun 8, 2016

Flash: Rebirth #1 is one you should definitely not read until you have read Rebirth #1. I mean you shouldn't read any of them till you read that issue, but you will love yourself for that and then seeing what Flash: Rebirth #1 has to deliver.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #1

Oct 17, 2013

This is a great start to a story that has a lot of promise if executed correctly. Good casting choice, Really by the end of this first issue, you see that these aren't the same villains that are usually getting beat around. They have a lot of potential, and when set free in this capacity, they can do so much more than you'd expect. It's intense, yet with a bit of humor tossed in the mix. The gritty style is also a good match to the tone of this story, something you can take serious given the situation they find themselves in. This is recommended if you like villains, or just want something different.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #2

Nov 21, 2013

Forever Evil " Rogues Rebellion in general is a fun read that you should pick up if you're following the events of Forever Evil. Not as great as the first issue, but that doesn't diminish it's entertainment value. The confrontations between them Deathstorm and Power Ring, Parasite, and ending up with Poison Ivy is something which again makes this fun. Some could argue that the pattern could show no direction, but I believe that exploration through this now broken world is just as important to focus on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #3

Dec 18, 2013

The Rogues way seems to be the best way. If you were a fan of Superior Foes of Spider-Man, this book has definitely progressed in a similar fashion that brings about that same quality in writing. There is a bond with this team that you have to appreciate is taken some time to flesh out. Under these circumstances you'd expect them to fall apart. It would be predictable for them to and yet Buccellato completely avoids that cliche which could have easily made you lose interest with this story. This once again is a book you should definitely pick up if you want a book that takes of the opportunities Forever Evil has opened up in terms of storytelling.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #4

Jan 15, 2014

The Rogues really can't catch a break and that is where the excitement keeps building. You don't know what will happen next, but when everyone wants them, it's all about seeing how resourceful they can be to get themselves out of the next jam. Truly you never find a dull moment here as the action is ongoing and there is no where to hide for them. Things are reaching a climax and the next issue has a lot of promise when they find themselves hitting another snag in the road, quite literally.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #5

Feb 12, 2014

In the end this is just another exciting issue as the Crime Syndicate is just throwing every available resource they can at the Rogues to make sure that they answer for their refusal to obey. Though we know that there really isn't a chance that the Rogues will be killed so easily, it's great to be able and read this also knowing that they are being put through hell along the way. Them against the world at this point and you want to root for the underdogs being the villains with golden hearts.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Forever Evil: Rogues Rebellion #6

Mar 26, 2014

The Rogues of Central City proved themselves worth of their name at the end of the day. In a world where they were subject to do as they're told, they still did what they wanted knowing the consequence. I stand by saying that this is the best story to come out of Forever Evil and take advantage of the potential that comes from it. It's just sad that this was only six issues because you really want to see more of what can be done with this team. Hopefully someone sees what can be done with them and jumps at the opportunity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #1

Jan 9, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #1 is that kind of book that you would recommend to readers who want superhero stories where the importance of the hero is what's behind the mask. Fixing damages, carrying your groceries, or just being a friendly neighbor matters. This creative team gets that, and I can't wait to see more of what this Spidey has to offer the people who surround him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #2

Jan 24, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #2 was another thrilling issue for the steps we are taking in the life of this Peter Parker. He's at that point in his life where everything is pretty much easier said than done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #3

Feb 21, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man is really living up to the mission statement so far. This rescue for Leilani may have exploded into something big, but all the same this is the lengths that you would expect Spider-Man to go for a fellow neighbor. Not to mention, the introduction of The Rumor has been worth it. A great reminder that age does not change how badass an older hero can be.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #6

May 8, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #6 to me turned out to be one of the most memorable issues of Spider-Man we have gotten in a long time. The past two issues have been the most memorable. It is so very important to realize the kind of stories you can produce when your focus is always substance over style. I don't think I'm being too bold when I say that this book redefines what it means to be a superhero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #7

Jun 13, 2019

Not all superheroes wear capes! An issue like this is exactly what we needed to send a remind that this IS the Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man. A Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man looks out for his community and the little people, and the people look out for each other as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #8

Jun 27, 2019

The World's Worst Detective indeed! Though in the best way possible of course! Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #8 was another exciting issue for everything that it turned out to be that was very down to Earth. Another issues reminding us of the strength in storytelling that you can get from a book that captures the impact you can have by just being a neighborhood hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #9

Jul 31, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #9 is all about The Rumor, and it was a story worth telling for a secret past you would never have known like this without her help. Things got a little more interesting for those who thought that Marnie was just your average person who woke up one day to discover she has powers. Her story was rich with history, culture, and twists as we also came to understand Hellminth in the process.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #10

Aug 14, 2019

Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man #10 brings us to the end of the second arc, and what an ending it was. I loved how endearing this book has been so far. Never once letting us forget what it really means to be a superhero. That means looking for the best solution to a problem that doesn't always have to be fighting, seeing the best in everyone, and showing people that you can be more than your failings. And Spider-Man of all heroes should know how to overcome that.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man (2019) #11

Aug 28, 2019

What can I say? Welcome back Mary Jane. It was nice to spend some time with our Friendly Neighborhood Mary Jane this week. As I said above, what makes a hero is what you do that makes a difference in someone else's life. It can be as simple as making sure someone is taking care of themself, or showing someone that there is more to their situation than what it looks like on the surface. Simple acts of love and kindness go a long way which again makes Friendly Neighborhood Spider-Man one of the most real Marvel books on shelves right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Frostbite #1

Sep 28, 2016

Frostbite #1 really is a science-fiction action miniseries unlike any other. not one that you should sleep on because for a miniseries no time was wasted throwing us into the thick of this world and their problems. Williamson, Alexander and Luis NCT all understand that this is a miniseries as well, making sure that every flip of the page fleshed this story out more than the last.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Future Imperfect (2015) #1

Jun 5, 2015

Overall this was a solid first issue because it did not leave you wanting in terms of what this series has in store for us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future Imperfect (2015) #2

Jul 1, 2015

The one problem that a series like Future Imperfect suffers from is the emphasis on the fact that this world is futuristic through future slang. It's really not appealing at all. We can see that this world is from a different time and don't need diction that comes off cheesy. A word I really hate to use yet have to because this is a constant that needs to be addressed no matter how small. Aside from this, while we did get to know who this Thing is in Future Imperfect, we don't know much about this rivalry between him and the Maestro. It assumes that everyone knows and that is not the case. Especially when they talk about the past a lot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future State (2021): Justice League #1

Jan 13, 2021

In the end, I would say that Future State: Justice League #1 was a bold started for what it turned out to be. This is definitely one of those books where you would want to give the next issue a go to see how you really feel about the direction taken.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future State (2021): Swamp Thing #1

Jan 6, 2021

If there was any Future State book that I would recommend most, it would have to be Future State: Swamp Thing. This one is fueled by imagination and undeniably can stand on its own. You don't need to know anything extra about Swamp Thing to just jump right into this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future State (2021): Suicide Squad #1

Jan 27, 2021

All in all, Future State: Suicide Squad #1 was worth the read. Some books are going to be a must-read, and some you are going to take a chance on. Future State: Suicide Squad is one of those that you may thank yourself for giving a chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future State (2021): The Next Batman #1

Jan 6, 2021

Despite my feelings about Future State, I will say that The Next Batman #1 is a story worth looking forward to more from. We're traversing a different kind of Gotham where the dangers are different enough to shake-up the game. Not to mention we have a Batman who knows better how to look out for the little guy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Future State (2021): Justice League #2

Feb 10, 2021

All in all, Future State: Justice League #2 served as a proper introduction to what we should expect from this new Justice League. The pacing was a bit off, but the conclusion was worth being patient for things to fall into place.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Generation X (2017) #1

May 17, 2017

This was a satisfying start to Generation X. You can't revitalize the X-Men franchise without a book like this which develops the activities within the school. The Gold team is the team that takes action, the Blue team has their own battles, others are flying solo to figure themselves out. So that leaves this book to show us again what it means to be a student in the Xavier Institute for Mutant Education and Outreach. Again its welcoming to new readers, and treats the older readers who wanted more from these characters as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Generation X (2017) #2

May 31, 2017

Generation X #2 was a taste of what this cast of characters can come to expect from the new Xavier Institute. This issue made the statement that things are going to work differently with the students and they backed this up from the way they approached handling the Purifiers to how Jubilee explained all of this to the students.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Generation X (2017) #4

Jul 12, 2017

There was action, there was drama, but more than anything else there was a sharp reminder of mutant life from one who has been ignored for too long. Generation X #4 really captured the potential of this book and that is what will separate this one from other X-books on shelves from this point forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Generation Zero #1

Aug 24, 2016

Generation Zero #1 is a good start to bringing back these young heroes who should not be forgotten. It is easy for young heroes to get lost in the shuffle, even the popular ones. But Valiant knows how to keep things connected, and they make sure you get what you want out of all the characters you love in some manner. This first issue set the tone, the direction of this story, and left us with potential for where this can go.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ghost (2013) #3

Apr 16, 2014

Whatever comes next I hope that it doesn't lose the momentum that Ghost has been building up on. The truth about who Elisa is becomes clearer with each passing issue and I would be sorely disappointed if the progress made towards that isn't something I can say was worth me investing my time into taking interest in. The next issue should definitely address what it is that Ghost will lose in the process of doing what is necessary for her to find out who she was.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ghost (2013) #4

Jun 4, 2014

Through this issue of Ghost we now see what set the wheels in motion for Elisa to become the hero she is today. It may not be the greatest start, but there is something genuine about it that you just can't ignore. Kelly Sue made this fun, sad, and as down to Earth as it could possibly be for someone like Ghost. You couldn't possibly mix all those elements together so well and yet she does. With any issue of Ghost that comes after this, seeing that kind of character development is something which this series could use more of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Ghost (2013) #5

Jun 25, 2014

Ghost #5 has a good start so far. There might be a little more dialogue than I'd like from Ghost thinking to herself as she acts, but it's nothing too distracting from a worthwhile story. Chris Sebela brings about some new potential for Ghost, we just have to see if he can make those executions to keep us coming back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ghost (2013) #6

Jul 2, 2014

Ghost #6 treads on new territory that brings some much-needed depth to Elisa. It's very easy to write a character who can phase through anything she wants, but it takes a lot more effort to throw something at her which challenges what she's capable of. There was always a fear that Ghost could beat anyone who wasn't also a Ghost, but with this issue those fears have been laid to rest and replaced with interest to see how she makes a comeback with tact.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ghost (2013) #7

Aug 13, 2014

Ghost #7 is a step in the right direction challenging Elisa's humanity when those who want her head have all but thrown theirs away for power. Tough choices she will definitely have to make and you want to see what consequences those will have for her when we've already seen some less than sane actions just in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Ghost (2013) #8

Sep 24, 2014

There's so much to say about this story arc considering all that Elisa has been through, but all you need to know is that she's not the woman to mess with. Elisa is still vulnerable sure, but now you can see how different she is and will be now that there is an acceptance of what she has become. Her future is still a mystery, though the present holds answers that makes us want to see what that future has in store for us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ghost (2013) #9

Nov 5, 2014

Ghost #9 is the start of a fight that's more down to Earth for our supernatural wonder. Punching demons in the face is one thing, but there's so much more that can happen and influence this world when Elisa wants to take the fight to the streets and make a real difference in people's lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Ghost (2013) #10

Dec 3, 2014

Ghost #10 ends with Elisa's war on crime in Chicago is attracting the interests of the city's powerful, and a question of if it is possible for Elisa to push forth with this war on crime without losing close ones along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ghost (2013) #11

Jan 7, 2015

Ghost #11 is the start of something big or something dark for Elisa. There's revenge to be had and you'd pray for these guys who decided they wanted to send a message to her. Elisa got it loud and clear, but so did Ghost.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Ghost (2013) #12

Feb 4, 2015

Ghost #12 wraps up another chapter in Elisa's life worth exploration. She's growing as a person, figuring out her place in a world where there is always a fight around the corner, and trying to live up to someone who saw something to admire in what Elisa is capable of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ghost-Spider (2019) #1

Aug 21, 2019

Ghost Spider #1 has fun with the idea that reinventing yourself is as simple as moving from one universe into the next. You ask yourself what it would be like to travel somewhere that no one knows you to start over, and this book takes that to the next level. After what this first issue sets up? I look forward to how Gwen will balance two lives like this. Trouble is clearly going to follow her no matter where she decides to spend her time most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ghost-Spider (2019) #2

Sep 25, 2019

Overall, Ghost Spider #2 took steps forward to better give us an idea as to what we should expect from this first arc. A lot of what they promised that we should get from this second issue, we got and then some. We got insight into this villain from the past, as well as friends who may or may not be what they seem on the surface. It should be interesting to see what happens once things start actually playing out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Go Go Power Rangers #1

Jul 26, 2017

Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #1 I feel proved me wrong in what little faith I had in it to be worthy of investing time in. These are moments you don't want to overlook for the Rangers. Every hero needs a good origin, and this is a stage in their lives where they have to understand just what they are getting themselves into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #2

Aug 30, 2017

Go Go Power Rangers #2 got creative in the way this creative team decided they wanted to build up these characters. We see them working up to the day when they become Rangers, and it is a great contrast to the current struggles they are going through while adjusting to this new way of life. Nothing is easy for them and the fun is in getting to that point where this is at the very least manageable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #3

Sep 20, 2017

A lot happened throughout Go Go Power Rangers #3. I find myself very impressed by the pacing in this issue that we got character development, we got action, and we got some great dialogue between Rita and her latest monster creation. This creative team knows exactly what they want us to get out of this stage of the Rangers' lives and they do so with almost flawless execution.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Go Go Power Rangers #4

Oct 18, 2017

Rita is not the villainess to mess with as Go Go Power Rangers #4 proves. Every monster matters, as well as every loss. And even then that never means that Rita won't come back stronger and more dangerous than she was the last time. This situation really put the Rangers through some loops to figure out what they can accomplish on their own, as a team, and what still holds them back from settling into their roles as Earth's protectors.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #5

Dec 27, 2017

Go Go Power Rangers #5 takes the high school experience and cranks the dial when adding saving the world to the list. This team is learning the hard way that this is all trial and error for both of their lives and that is the hardest reality check you could receive. Especially when danger is right around the corner. Early days don't mean easier days which is the best you can ask for from this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #6

Jan 24, 2018

Through the events of Go Go Power Rangers #6, the Rangers' personal lives do begin to deteriorate, though not how you would have imagined before picking up this issue. They are running into the kind of problems that they would have needed to deal with during the early days. The problems adjusting to this new life, and trying not to work against each other is the big focus that holds your attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #7

Feb 28, 2018

Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #7 took what could have been your average Homecoming Dance issue, and made it their own through use of the right storyline and plot points. It wasn't about the action either, so it is welcomed when you can have an issue that won't suffer from just telling a story and growing the characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Go Go Power Rangers #8

Mar 21, 2018

Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #8 brings another satisfying story to a close. This book is the one you want if you desire a Power Rangers story that takes us somewhere others have not yet. To get to know the Rangers before they are sure of themselves, and to get to know the Rita that we are supposed to fear. At this stage that was the best takeaway with Shattered Grid right around the corner.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #9

May 2, 2018

In the end, Go Go Power Rangers #9 succeeds in bringing the younger team into the fold in a way that is unique to how everyone else has been dragged into this war for the fate of Rangers as a whole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Go Go Power Rangers #10

Jun 6, 2018

Thing shave now gotten real. The stakes are real, no one is safe, and every action matters when these Power Rangers slowly getting sucked into the chaos that is Shattered Grid. Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #10 is the one you have been waiting for, and it did not disappoint for the action or reveal of the Ranger Slayer's unique Zord.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Go Go Power Rangers #11

Jul 4, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #11 had action, it had heart, and there was no shortage of emphasizing that this story has now been pulled into the crossover event. This team may not have come across Lord Drakkon yet, but everything matters right now when it comes down to the things that could potentially change the future, or send this team further down the path to where they are in present-present time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Go Go Power Rangers #12

Aug 1, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #12 continues to impress through a perfect balance of pushing its own story forward while finding new and interesting ways to walk the line of what's going on in Shattered Grid. It's all smart writing considering the respect towards how fragile this point in time is whether you are Lord Drakkon or the Rangers themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Go Go Power Rangers #13

Oct 10, 2018

Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #13 was definitely a good point to jump back into their story and how they can begin focusing on their problems again without the influence of Shattered Grid to steal their attention. The early days still hold their appeal when every new situation is a different experience from the last.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #14

Nov 14, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #14 continued to take advantage of the thrill that comes with exploration. This is the Rangers' first taste of off-planet adventure, their first taste of what it means to have to cover for one another, and this is yet another treat to what fruits Rita has to pick from her conquests.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Go Go Power Rangers #15

Dec 13, 2018

Go Go Power Rangers #15 was a great issue for everything that this story arc has been leading to for Rita, Trini, and Jason. Nothing about the end product that we got from them was anything you would have seen coming last month. This relationship is refreshing, and what Rita recovered was a big treat to longtime fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Go Go Power Rangers #16

Jan 9, 2019

It was fun when the Power Rangers switched up costumes and powers in Mighty Morphin, and the same could be said for the circumstances of this story arc. Saban's Go Go Power Rangers #16 shows us exactly why the Rangers in the present timeline would be so comfortable in changing colors. Aside from that? This is a piece to the origin of the Green Power Coin that is one for the history books. The early days are nothing to overlook when there's so much depth to give to things that to some extent may have needed explanation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #17

Feb 13, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #17 is full of all sorts of twists and turns whether from the perspective of the Rangers or Rita. This new chapter has started with a bang and gives us a lot to anticipate next month. This month has proved that Rita is willing to flip every stone to get what she wants, and the Rangers learn that their list of allies is not as small as it seems.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #20

May 15, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #20 was definitely the kind of issue we needed from this series to cement what it means to make the hard call for these heroes. Again, you kind of knew how this was going to turn out, but that didn't change the arguments or idea that even short a short time these Rangers could feud over the lines they could cross to save more innocents.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #21

Jul 10, 2019

The big question here is, are we getting the same exploration of the Power Rangers mythos that initially made you invest in this book? The answer to that is, yes. Go Go Power Rangers #21 assures us that the mission statement for this story is still the same. It just takes place at a different point in time which better connects with the Mighty Morphin Power Rangers series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #22

Aug 14, 2019

Go Go Power Rangers #22 continued to shake things up. The theme this month seemed to focus on coping mechanisms, and surely enough many of us out there can relate to how that gets us through our days. Everyone reacts to something differently, and we saw this explored to a degree through the Rangers in their normal lives. Aside from this, again it was great to see how the events of Shattered Grid could catch up. Hopefully they execute this in a way that it doesn't matter if you actually read that event or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #23

Sep 11, 2019

Shattered Grid may not have been too long ago, but the trip down some of the more climatic moments was more than welcomed in this issue. Go Go Power Rangers #23 did a lot and kept you at the edge of your seat when these Rangers have reached a point where it takes more than compromise or strenuous flashbacks to hold them back. The only question is when enough is enough with the stakes becoming more personal with each passing attack. That is where I hope this creative team pushes the envelope most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #24

Oct 9, 2019

Was it worth spending an issue seeing the events of the past issue from the perspective of Bulk & Skull? Of course it was! Why wouldn't it be? Go Go Power Rangers #24 took a step back and gave us something refreshing from what is currently ongoing. I can't argue with the spotlight being on two guys who are fun, and help you to remember that this can be fun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #25

Nov 13, 2019

If I'm being perfectly honest, I was never too certain how I was going to feel about this story arc. Though after these past few issues? They have won my confidence that they are still trying to give us a memorable experience by bringing the chaos of Shattered Grid back to the Rangers' doorstep.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Go Go Power Rangers #27

Jan 15, 2020

All in all, Go Go Power Rangers #27 was awesome from start to finish. This is a book that leaves you asking, “Why can't the show or new movie be like this?”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #28

Jan 29, 2020

It's not as if there isn't a reason for everything that was ever lacking about Rita Repulsa as the main villain of this franchise, but this issue and numerous others before were welcomed for what they revealed to us about this evil empress who simply has no chill. To think that she could see so much of her own destruction that she caused and still find reason to continue on that evil path? If you had any doubt in your mind that Rita was evil through and through, Go Go Power Rangers #28 assured you that this is one villain who can't be redeemed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Go Go Power Rangers #29

Feb 12, 2020

By the end of Go Go Power Rangers #29, the set-up was enough to create interest in what's going to happen with the Omega Rangers' first encounter with the unknown. And by the end we are given reason to anticipate what either will go right, or very wrong with Tommy adjusting to his new role as leader while half the team is away.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Go Go Power Rangers #30

Mar 11, 2020

Go Go Power Rangers #30 did not disappoint one bit in giving us the best of both worlds from two different storylines. Following the Omega Rangers in space is quite the experience so far, and Lord Zedd continues to prove that he is a force to be reckoned with when someone has something he wants. That he could give Promethea and half the Rangers a run for their money was the best way to make the statement that he is not to be taken lightly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Go Go Power Rangers #31

May 27, 2020

All in all, Go Go Power Rangers #31 served as a great set-up for the changes which lie ahead. From the minute this mission was presented to Jason, nothing was going to be the same moving forward. It sucks that here we are beginning to say goodbye to the original team, but this is what Go Go Power Rangers has been preparing us for since day one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Go Go Power Rangers #32

Jun 10, 2020

With the conclusion of Go Go Power Rangers #32, one journey ends, to lead to the start of something new. I'm happy t say that this was a story I was there for from the first issue, to the last. This is what you look for from your licensed books when they are supposed to give you an experience you couldn't get in another medium.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Go Go Power Rangers: Forever Rangers #1

Jun 19, 2019

You couldn't have asked for a better way for this creative team to wrap up this story. One that impressively took only twenty issues to tell. Saban's Go Go Power Rangers: Forever Rangers #1 is worth the extra pages that went into it, and they did not waste one page to make sure we put this down satisfied. One only has to wonder what comes next. The end of one big story is only the start of the next one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
GoGetters #1

Feb 19, 2014

This is a great first issue for GoGetters. You know what to expect from this book and it doesn't fail to give you a taste of that from start to finish. Maya Diaz and George Harrison have a dynamic that you don't get much of in other books. Sure others may do what they do with more finesse, but the recklessness of it all is what sets it apart. You surely won't find a dull moment when they don't seem like the type to sit back and relax knowing there's money to be made.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Going to the Chapel #1

Sep 4, 2019

Is Going to the Chapel #1 worth taking a chance on? I would say, yes. It was entertaining for a start, the story is well put together, and it finds away to stand out from stories similar. The book only requires a little more reason to invest in these characters. After that? I couldn't find a reason not to add Going to the Chapel to your pull-list.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Gotham By Midnight #12

Dec 24, 2015

Truthfully it would be disappointing if Gotham by Midnight was not on the best of lists for any horror fans. This series may have come to an end sooner than we liked, but it was one hell of a ride from start to finish. This story was contained, action-packed, full of supernatural elements unique to the Midnight Shift's talents, and had some consistent character development.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Gravetrancers #1

Nov 29, 2017

Gravetrancers #1 is a story that puts you on edge for all the ways a trip to a cemetery can go wrong. To me this felt like more of a mental thriller which is a great change of pace in contrast to some of the other horror books on shelves. One of the last situations you would like to find yourself in that will turn your world upside down. I don't know how either of these two will walk out of this feeling anything like who they were before they arrived, if they even make it out of this, but that makes you look forward to and brace yourself for the issues to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Gravetrancers #2

Jan 31, 2018

Gravetrancers #2 took steps forward in taking us into the thick of this madness. Little time was wasted in addressing how wrong things can go when you're addicted to this drug, how deep this conspiracy runs in the town, and what it will take to escape this nightmare.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Arrow (2016) #1

Jun 15, 2016

Green Arrow #1 sets the tone for what we can expect from this first arc and it will be groundbreaking. Read it for Ollie growing into a better person, his developing relationship with Dinah, and where he goes from here after getting hit harder than he has in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Arrow (2016) #2

Jul 6, 2016

Green Arrow #2 is a roller coaster of emotions for this being the second issue. Not too much hope we are getting here with the position Oliver has been put in, but how else do you evolve someone like him into the hero he needs to be if you don't first strip him of everything that blinds him to what he's truly fighting for?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Green Arrow (2016) #3

Jul 20, 2016

Green Arrow #3 is where Oliver starts to take back his life and they don't look like they are going to be letting up on the intensity of this story until he does. Great action, story development, and pacing spread out through multiple characters having their part to play.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Green Arrow (2016) #4

Aug 3, 2016

Green Arrow #4 sets the bar for what everyone is fighting for. Great story progression, character development, character dynamics, and pacing for so much that happens in a short amount of time. This is a fast paced plot and they don't let you forget this. Being a street-level hero is no walk in the park, and neither will it ever be when toppling major crime organizations like The Ninth Circle.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Green Arrow (2016) #5

Aug 17, 2016

Green Arrow #5 closes one chapter in Oliver Queen's life and sets up for another with a couple reversals/twists that without a doubt change your perception of everything that has happened so far. You think this was taking one direction, and by the end it takes another. Great for keeping everyone on their toes like this has from the very start. There is no denying that this has been a treat worth looking forward to twice a month, and being worth picking up twice a month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Arrow (2016) #6

Sep 7, 2016

Green Arrow #6 is the start of another story with the potential for memorable character development and storywriting. Emiko was the right choice to explore with this new arc and as I've pointed out before Benjamin Percy succeeded in making a standout cast that you care about enough that you can wait to get back to Oliver later.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Green Arrow (2016) #8

Oct 5, 2016

Green Arrow #8 marks the start of another story arc which engages us personally, romantically, and through a plot that transitions well enough from the conflict with the Ninth Circle. You had a feeling there was something wrong with this island, even if the name says it all, but you look forward to what Green Arrow and friends can do when they are really on the same page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Arrow (2016) #9

Oct 19, 2016

We got a lot out of Island of Scars with Green Arrow #9. This was a fight for the future of this tribe and the continued crippling of the Ninth Circle along the way. The journey back to Seattle begins, though this remains a memorable detour along the way for the obstacles thrown in their way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Green Arrow (2016) #12

Dec 7, 2016

Green Arrow #12 hit harder than so many other issues before and at the start of a new arc. The “Emerald Outlaw” is going to be a gut-wrenching storyline for everything that can go wrong when your enemy knows you almost as well as you know yourself. Reclaiming your life has never been a harder line of words to write till now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Green Arrow (2016) #15

Jan 18, 2017

The ‘Emerald Outlaw' has been one heck of a storyline since Oliver and friends made their way back to Seattle. Green Arrow #15 presses forward with the escalation of these enemies who prove that a vigilante is not the worst thing for people to fear. Compared to other A-list hero books, you have to appreciate that Green Arrow sticks to the same tone throughout. You want a story that pulls no punches? Look no further.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Green Arrow (2016) #16

Feb 1, 2017

Green Arrow #16 connects with some real world relations, hits with a big reveal, and warms the heart with the importance of valuing those you consider family. ‘The Emerald Outlaw' is shaping up to be the full package so far in this series. Some jaws might drop by the very end of the issue, but that is how they get us with the idea that there are no consequences for this fight of Seattle's soul.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Green Arrow: Rebirth #1

Jun 1, 2016

Green Arrow: Rebirth #1 has so much potential following this Green Arrow who feels more familiar. He's growing as a person, and we surely want to watch as this relationship between him and Black Canary develops as well. Definitely a must read alongside the other Rebirth debuts which so far have not disappointed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Green Hornet (2018) #1

Mar 7, 2018

Overall I would say this was a solid start for a pulp story where the mantle has changed hands. That is something we haven't seen in a good while, and its hard to argue that this isn't the best time when even the Gold Key characters have gone through some changes of their own. The anticipation for next issue and beyond is that we get to see more of what Mulan is capable of and what makes her tick.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Green Hornet: Reign of the Demon #1

Dec 23, 2016

With the conclusion of Green Hornet: Reign Of The Demon #1, Green Hornet and Kato might have gotten more than they have bargained for. Unprepared for something that could be worse than the reputation they created for themselves, something worse than what they'd be willing to do to keep the streets clear, and worse than simply being misunderstood as a hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Guardians of the Galaxy & X-Men: The Black Vortex: Alpha #1

Feb 5, 2015

The Black Vortex #1 had an explosive start and set the tone for whatever there is to come after that ending which was delivered. A bit shaky in some areas, though gets better by the end of the issue. Clearly things will only get worse before they get better, and some characters seem like thy will be changed either for better or worse. Either way if you're looking for more action and Guardians/X-Men team-ups, then this is the story for you to pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #2

Apr 26, 2013

It's a slow paced story so far, but as for what has happened in this issue, it proved to still be exciting which is why the pacing can be overlooked. Whatever comes next is going to be more intense as J-Son seems to have a hidden agenda that he's trying to play.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #3

Jun 13, 2013

Then where there was fear of the story moving slow, this issue starts to set things into motion as you know something big is going to happen. Although Bendis has made sure that remains a mystery, you see all the pieces slowly moving into place as things don't seem so linear. The only thing that takes away from this issue being any better is that the Guardians weren't present throughout a majority of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #4

Jun 27, 2013

Sarah Pichelli's art style is very fun. The way she handles the action really sells it alongside the dialogue. The lighting and light use of colors you take notice of and everything overall is smooth. Again this issue sets up for something to be excited for as Gamora will still have to watch her back like the others.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #5

Aug 1, 2013

As I said before I liked that the plot is now clear. Not just for Guardians but Avengers and New Avengers as well. All tying in to Trinity, Hunger, Inhumanity, and more. There have been subtle pokes at the tears in space-time, but none like this which I really appreciated since many have not the slightest clue as to what to expect.Seeing Thanos as someone who has a part in what's to come wasn't surprising, but his motivations were which made things make sense.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #6

Sep 26, 2013

It was an entertaining issue overall, despite nothing much happening that you really were already aware of. Again it would have been great but the timing of the issue's release is very late. I want to feel that Angela really has some importance to this event and for them to only get back to her now makes you question if that is really the case at this point. There could have even been a better approach to this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #7

Oct 17, 2013

Guardians of The Galaxy does what other books have neglected since the events of Age of Ultron. They are addressing the fact tat there is rips in space and time, the catalyst for everything going on right now. And the cliffhanger at the end of this issue shows that because Earth is the cause, the consequences are to follow soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Guardians of the Galaxy (2013) #8

Oct 31, 2013

Decent tie-in to say the least that finally connects them to the main fight, even if it is coming close to an end. Might be next issue, but the pacing of this book has been inconsistent, for the most part it needs to quicken up a bit because this issue did feel a bit dull. Hopefully with the re-emergence of a new character at the end gives us that sense of excitement back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #1

Jan 23, 2020

Overall, if you haven't been keeping up with the Guardians? There is no better time than now with the release of Guardians of the Galaxy #1 to jump back into the action. Again, this is the kind of book you can sink your teeth into because it goes that extra mile to add depth to your favorite heroes. They have established themselves as a family, while at the same time drawing that line in the sand between what they will sit out for, and what they will stand tall to protect. You couldn't ask for more than that. I hope this creative team drives this story through.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #2

Feb 19, 2020

In just two issues, this book climbs to a must read of new Marvel books to release this year. Guardians of the Galaxy #2 pulled no punches with the reality of looking for war. Nothing is guaranteed between the difficulty you face, the challenges you will have to overcome, or the guarantee that everyone will make the return trip. Again, to say that the Guardians' first mission comes to a cataclysmic end is one heck of an understatement once you reach it yourself.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #3

Mar 18, 2020

Overall, Guardians of the Galaxy #3 did not waste this opportunity to show how integral Peter was to the foundation of this family. The loss of someone like him changes everything, where the loss of a certain person to blame for the loss was not so much. It should be interesting to see what being a guardian now means when fighting for something other than the fate of the universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Guardians of the Galaxy (2020) #4

Jul 15, 2020

Overall, a solid issue that Guardians of the Galaxy #4 turned out to be. If I'm being honest, I did have my reservations about the direction that this book has been taking, but at the same time it is hard to deny that this is a new experience to indulge in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Gutter Magic #1

Jan 13, 2016

Gutter Magic #1 is an action-packed urban fantasy tale which sets the bar for any of this kind to follow throughout the year. Great sense of world building and character appeal. Definitely a new title you don't want to miss getting into because it could easily be a mini series that could come back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Gutter Magic #2

Feb 10, 2016

Gutter Magic #2 grabs you with just how wrong things can go for Cinder when the things he does affect more than just him. He may be able to get out of most situations he gets himself into, though the same can't be said for those who end up getting caught in his mess.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Gutter Magic #3

Mar 9, 2016

From sibling rivalry, to a vengeful Shiver, to a dragon assault, Gutter Magic #3 really picked up the intensity in a short amount of time. Even if this wasn't all worth it when Cinder gets to his destination, the adventure was worth it for every stunt he has pulled to reach that point.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Gutter Magic #4

Apr 20, 2016

With the way Gutter Magic #4 ends, it makes you cross your fingers that this may not be the end. For four issues you loved Cinder and Blacktooth for everything they were willing to put on the line to find magic. You loved this world even more for the potential created from simply building upon the lives of people who take magic and a life of magic for granted.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Halo: Collateral Damage #1

Jun 6, 2018

Halo: Collateral Damage #1 is a great start to a mission that changes a lot about the war between humanity and the Covenant. A good feeling overall to be back at a point where the rules of engagement were pretty simple. The Spartans are evolving in the way they battle, and the Covenant aren't ceasing in their relentless acts of aggression against the defenseless colonies.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Halo: Collateral Damage #2

Jul 4, 2018

A new war is developing here, and this mini is so far providing the perfect experience for everyone to come to terms with what it means to fight on the same side. We might know that when all is said and done that Master Chief and Blue Team will walk out of this in one piece, but that doesn't mean you don't want to see how they overcome some big obstacles in the early days.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Halo: Collateral Damage #3

Aug 15, 2018

Halo: Collateral Damage #3 was another memorable addition to the Halo comic franchise for what it had to offer differently from the other stories. This was the first in a while that took a step back towards past events, but it was still a point in time worth journeying back to for more Blue Team in their prime.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Halo: Escalation #1

Dec 11, 2013

Overall Halo: Escalation #1 is a great transition from the events of Halo 4. They are set on a clear path and Chris Schlerf shows the knowledge and capability to be able to connect this story to the Covenant civil war with the Arbiter and the Brute Ambassador. Again we see that this story is much more than Chief and that the Halo Universe has much to offer in a story that goes beyond the games. The Arbiter, Fire Team Majestic and much more have a part in this, what more could you ask for? 343 had set the stage and now as fans of Halo we can keep up with it's natural progression knowing that this is all very new. You don't even have to be a fan per say, as this is something new going on right now that you can read without needing to go back to anything previous to understand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Halo: Escalation #2

Jan 8, 2014

The story is very much starting to pick up and quickly from the first issue which is what shows how much potential this book has. There is a good balance between action and storytelling that doesn't leave you questionable about what takes place. Whatever comes next is definitely something worth paying attention to because things are not really as they seem. They are a lot worse and there is more than what is seen on the surface. The mysterious that come with the story of Halo shines through this story and that is reason enough to pick up this book if not already.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Halo: Escalation #3

Feb 26, 2014

In the end, what I thought would have just been a good start for this series turned into something great. There is definitely potential to this progressing storyline and I can tell things can only get more interesting from here. There's a clear idea of what to expect, while still leaving much room to be surprised a long the way which is what I have always liked about Halo. Shooting Covies or Prometheans in the face can be fun, but this book looks to dive deeper than that which is what we look for in all Halo stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Halo: Escalation #4

Mar 26, 2014

Halo Escalation #4 is a good transition from the failed peace negotiation. Questions are raised, the enemy is uncertain yet clear as being a substantial threat, and characters are put on the spot as they deal with this unexpected situation. Great balance from this issue in particular which is what I want to see more of when things start to heat up because any time spent unnecessarily can really hurt a story like this that needs to hit the right points.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Halo: Escalation #5

Apr 23, 2014

Overall I think Halo Escalation is head in a good direction if Schlerf can keep doing what he's doing now. The story is progressing naturally, yet at the same time giving Halo fans something to look forward to with certain stories coming full circle. I would look forward to the next issue just to see how everyone handles this revelation they got while under duress.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Halo: Escalation #6

May 28, 2014

Halo Escalation #6 ends on a note which gives you faith in what's in store for the Halo Universe in the comics.The very end of this issue had me taken back. Some might think that what you saw in that last page was small, but it means big things for the Halo Universe if something comes from it in time. That was a great little addition which always spells trouble in a good way. Aside from this the Halo universe still remains on the brink of a new galactic war.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #7

Jun 25, 2014

Halo: Escalation #7 is a good starting point for what is to come from this series. Brian Reed is someone who knows what direction to take the story and knows how to write these characters in a way that appeals to Halo fans whether new or old. Where the next issue takes us will be something Halo fans should want to stick around for as it should hopefully make sense of where Chief ends up now in recent time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Halo: Escalation #8

Jul 23, 2014

Halo: Escalation #8 is a good start to a situation that no pun intended has really escalated in a short amount of time. While I could have said before was a good time to get into the comics if you want to know more about the direction the Halo Universe is taking, but right now with this very issue is where you must pick up the book. Anyone can just play the game, but if you want to play the game and actually understand why things happen the way they do? Start reading Halo: Escalation now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Halo: Escalation #9

Aug 27, 2014

In the end, Halo: Escalation #9 is on the right path that the Halo Universe should be taking. Brian Reed continues to appeal to Halo fans and understands how to tell this story without losing you in the chaos. If you're a new reader and feel lost, honestly this probably just isn't the right title for you. Someone can't expect you to know the lore, but they also can't be expected to hold your hand through this story. There's an attempt to give us the best of both world, and you just have to be invested enough to go along for the ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Halo: Escalation #10

Sep 24, 2014

While Halo: Escalation #10 leaves much to be desired when it comes to the conclusion of "The Next 72 Hours" and what this means for the future of Master Chief, it's hard not to say that this wasn't exciting. It's the little things you discover and the fast paced action that keeps you coming back for more. If you've been wanting to see Master Chief make his way back into a relevant role in the Halo comics then this is worth picking up. Just hopefully the next story with him in it gives us more insight as to how he ends up where he is in that desert before Halo 5.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Halo: Escalation #11

Oct 22, 2014

A lot can go right, and a lot can go wrong with this new story arc. It's uncertain what the pay off will be from this story as a whole since only the beginning, though hopefully what happens here is something we can take as memorable going forward. Duffy Boudreau has a handle of giving the characters their own voices, though it all comes down to giving us something which sets this story apart from the previous story arcs in terms of moving us forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Halo: Escalation #12

Nov 26, 2014

This certainly was another conclusion of another action-packed chapter of the Halo saga. If you had any doubts as to what Duffy Boudreau has to offer the Halo Universe, surely this issue should have put them to rest.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Halo: Escalation #13

Dec 24, 2014

Halo: Escalation #13 is a step in the right direction and this will be the fight that changes everything. It took a while to get to this part of the story, though it is better now than never when the stakes have never been higher. The only way to disappoint now is if we aren't taken on an exploration of this Universe that shows us things we haven't seen before, more things Forerunners left behind as their "gifts".

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #14

Jan 28, 2015

Halo: Escalation #14 is a solid example of how interesting Halo can get when we get o those more important story plots which connects everything together. Halo: Escalation is a canon story, however it is the hunt for the Janus Key like this which grabs your attention most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Halo: Escalation #15

Feb 25, 2015

Halo: Escalation #15 is a step up from the previous issue moving things along with high intensity. No battle is ever small when it comes to the UNSC Vs the Covenant. This one is no different and all the same just as important as if they were handling the Didact himself knowing whoever has both halves of the key has access to everything the Forerunners left behind for the Reclaimers, aka the humans.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Halo: Escalation #16

Mar 25, 2015

Honestly we need more issues like Halo: Escalation #16, and more stories that get into the thick of it like this story arc. Wherever the end of Spartan Ops season 2 was heading, this opens up to a new world of possibilities from the ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #17

Apr 22, 2015

Halo: Escalation #17 is the start of a story arc worth giving a shot if you want more of what the Halo Universe has to offer outside of the main storylines. It won't always be about Chief, Halsey, or the UNSC. That is what makes this story arc stand out like others which dare to do something different.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Halo: Escalation #18

May 27, 2015

Halo: Escalation #18 brings about the end to yet another story arc that adds to the always growing Halo Universe with every passing issue with a worthwhile character joining the ranks of the Spartan IVs.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #19

Jun 24, 2015

With Douglas Franchin off of Halo: Escalation again came the fear that we might just go back to okay art. For a licensed title like Halo: Escalation okay just is not enough. Especially when at issue #19. So when Ian Richardson's name came up it was a question then of what this guy can bring to the table, and he really did impress. He and Denis Freitas on inks did as the art for this issue was as clean and polished as it ever has been. There are places where perspective took away from the detail and proportions however. Though when things were in view Ian Richardson's efforts could be seen as like Franchin he pushed for that likeness that we should see from the Sangheili's physiology and the realism that we should get from the human elements of the story. It should also be mentioned how well they handle making the textures stand out be it armor, metals, clothing, skin, or structures.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #20

Jul 29, 2015

Halo: Escalation #20 had a lot going on visually throughout the issue. That is what was impressive in this issue because it was all handled with quality work. Artists before struggled with these kinds of scenes and they didn't come out as appealing, but Ian Richardson shows that he understands uniformity and perspective. Especially when these ships are falling apart from the portals opening up incorrectly. Aside from this it catches your attention how Halsey and Jul are drawn together. It is important to recognize how these two continue to butt heads. Particularly when Halsey is constantly both the voice of reason and very bold when engaging Jul when he starts to get threatening. The colors for the most part are great, except when it comes to the capturing of the portals opening and what not because it is hard to tell what is actually going on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Escalation #21

Aug 26, 2015

With part three of The Absolute Record, Halo: Escalation #21 takes us to that critical moment where a powerful new combatant enters the fray and is all that stands between all sides of this conflict and the Absolute Record. This is again a vital chapter of the Halo series as everything the humans have been groomed to accomplish over the years has been for this point in time. Where they face what the Forerunner left for them as keepers of the mantle of the Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Halo: Escalation #22

Sep 23, 2015

Halo: Escalation #22 is a strong issue for this story arc as we approach the climax. We don't know what the future holds, or what the Absolute Record will unlock for the Halo Universe, but one thing is for sure that this creative team has given us a reason to see this through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Halo: Escalation #23

Oct 28, 2015

Halo: Escalation #23 is the issue you don't want to miss if you're planning on picking up Halo 5: Guardians this week or if you already did. The Chief and Locke have their own fight, but this is just as important keeping in mind that all these other key players in the Halo Universe are doing their part to fight for the future of humanity.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Halo: Escalation #24

Nov 25, 2015

Halo: Escalation #24 is a great end that doesn't answer all questions leading up to Halo 5, but as the conclusion of Halo: Escalation this was perfect. This review is based on of the connection between the comics and the game, though just speaking for the comic series itself this creative team made a memorable story that shouldn't be ignored because Halo is not all about the video game, and Halo is not just about Master Chief.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Halo: Lone Wolf #1

Jan 2, 2019

Halo: Lone Wolf #1 meets expectations for Halo fans who have been anticipating this release since the announcement. Spartan Linda-058 was the perfect choice as the star for this book when she is equal parts badass, engaging, and unique to most other Spartans in action. This mission should have some interesting twists for her, and I do hope they take advantage of the fragile line that you walk concerning human threats in the Halo universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Halo: Lone Wolf #2

Feb 6, 2019

What we got out of Halo: Lone Wolf #2 so far makes it easier to say that this is one of the best Halo books that Dark Horse has put out. There was an excellent story that is matched by quality artwork. Spartans with personality is never a bad thing and this story right now proves that.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Halo: Rise of Atriox #1

Aug 30, 2017

I must say that I was expecting a little more from Halo: Rise of Atriox #1 as the first chapter. As someone foreign to Halo Wars, and new to the villain that is Atriox, it didn't feel like they were giving me enough invest in. I'm sure that those who have played the game might feel that in some areas this might come off as dry when depth isn't given to these characters or what is going on around them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Halo: Rise of Atriox #2

Sep 20, 2017

Halo: Rise of Atriox #2 was the start of this monster's rise to power. Again it does help to understand the story of Halo Wars before getting into this book, but this second issue was a big step up. This creative team knew what they needed to bring out in Atriox for him to rise above the role that he and the Jiralhanae were given by the Covenant. Not only that, but filled in all the gaps that the game couldn't to get the full picture through a chain of events from his perspective.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Halo: Rise of Atriox #3

Oct 18, 2017

After the events that unfolded in Halo: Rise of Atriox #3, it really is hard not to like a guy like Atriox. He's more than just another Jiralhanae. He's strong, leads by example, and sets an example for what he wants the Banished to stand for in contrast to the UNSC and Covenant. I love what's going on in the Halo main story right now, but following a story like this so far? I can't help but want to see what happens if he had a bigger part to come beyond Halo Wars.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Halo: Rise of Atriox #4

Dec 13, 2017

Halo: Rise of Atriox #4 was a solid chapter where Atriox proves once again that he is the capable leader worthy of the Covenant's fear. This is how you flesh out a character without the labels of hero or villain. Here there are only individuals and groups who are fighting for the causes they have been led to believe in. Against the humans I still can't see myself rooting for Atriox, but going up against the Covenant it is team Atriox all the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Halo: Rise of Atriox #5

Feb 7, 2018

If I know the Halo lore well enough, they don't do something like this without a purpose. With the conclusion to Halo: Rise of Atriox #5, this feels like it has been one big set-up for more. Almost as if they are pushing to fill a void left by the destruction of the Covenant. If that void were to be filled by the Banished? I'm all for it because the events Halo: Rise of Atriox is exactly how you show what this universe has to offer. Heroes, villains, means nothing if there's no substance to them and their actions.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Halo: Tales from Slipspace #1

Nov 16, 2016

Halo: Tales from Slipspace HC is a must have. For the new stories, for the stories bringing more depth to this universe, and for the stories which further address those things we were only able to theorize about before. As far as anthologies go this one is the most impressive that I've read thus far with all the stories having the kind of quality deserving of the money you put into it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Hank Johnson, Agent of Hydra #1

Aug 29, 2015

Hank Johnson – Agent of HYDRA #1 is worth the read if not only to see how much worse his life can get. Things won't get any better for Hank and the excitement is that this guy has survived the worst.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Harbinger (2012) #0.2014

Mar 19, 2014

The original creative team of Joshua Dysart and Khari Evans is what this #0 issue needed and deserved knowing what comes next. The story is deep, it's told in an interesting manner, and it looks great. We know the psiots are going to war, and everything that has happened up to this point is all for the approaching conflict. The stage has been set now and still leaves much room to be surprised as now that we know the whereabouts of the Bleeding Monk, the next question is what comes next?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Harbinger (2012) #13

Jun 21, 2013

All in all it's entertaining to see how this team handles the situation when they face someone well out of their league. You can see their inexperience throughout the whole issue as some of them still do not know the extent of their powers while caused either failures or slight loss of control. I like the bold use of colors, along with their use of lights and shadows even though it can be more consistent. This is a dire situation which should hopefully bring out the best in everyone.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Harbinger (2012) #14

Jul 25, 2013

Overall it was a great issue, and even better highlighting what I might say is the best of Faith. You really wouldn't expect so much of her given her powers compared to the rest but she really stood out.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #15

Aug 15, 2013

No words can really explain how you'd feel after reading this issue. The happiness was there, the emotion, the heartbreak, the shock. You just could not have seen this coming when you initially picked up this issue. Whatever this leads to, you will find yourself engaged in the story because if Joshua has not gotten your attention with that last act, you have to question if you have a soul. If you aren't reading this book right now, you are seriously missing out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Harbinger (2012) #16

Sep 18, 2013

Great issue that is leading towards something interesting from this group. Nothing is as it really seems and what you want to see is how the can overcome something they never saw coming. Well one person has, but we'll see if things go their way because that is something you don't want to trick yourself into thinking at any point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Harbinger (2012) #17

Oct 23, 2013

This untold story was one worth telling. Not only to fill in missing gaps in this story, but give us a better understanding of what is going on at this moment. Everyone is being affected by the events occurring right now and that is the world which has been shaping around them since the start. Much to look forward to as the story continues to change hands. What are Harada's plans for Peter? That's something only time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Harbinger (2012) #18

Nov 16, 2013

Overall there's some interesting progress made here. This is considering how the last issue ended with Monica who still holds importance to their escape from this illusion. The Perfect Day is coming to an end and when the dark truth behind it is revealed, the Foundation just might realize they got more than they bargained for. The only part of this issue that was really lacking was the style used to portray the world Harada created for Peter. Just didn't look all too appealing throughout, was more inconsistent compared to the other half which was well done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Harbinger (2012) #19

Dec 11, 2013

Overall I think that what Dysart has done is ever so slightly push the buttons of the Renegades up to this point. I like it because you see that no matter how far they run, Harada is always going to try to find them and all hell breaks loose for them when that happens. They have been pushed to the point where there is no turning back. From the looks of it they will be taking the fight to Harada obviously and when they do, not only will Peter undertake the mental battle of his life, the Renegades will also be throwing themselves into a conflict that could easily decide their fate. All that aside the ending to this issue is one that makes you feel a bit emotional, just a little bit to realize what Harada as put everyone through whether enemy, or ally because of his actions as of late.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Harbinger (2012) #20

Jan 15, 2014

This issue shows us just how fun of a book Harbinger can be because it mirrors a real world. Now we will see what happens in a world where the idea of superpowers is revealed and Harada's back is against the wall to not only make good of the situation, but keep his secrets hidden for the sake of his foundation and those involved. If there was any reason to pick up this book, it would be to see how this group of misfits fair when the odds are finally in their favor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Harbinger (2012) #21

Feb 12, 2014

This issue brought things down to Earth in a way that makes you find the real importance in this story. A lot more characterization put into place between these characters that shows where their head is at as they prepare to make their move. This is the best time to get into Harbinger knowing that the lid is about to be blown clean off the existence of psiots.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Harbinger (2012) #22

Apr 23, 2014

Harbinger #22 is where things get real and I finished this issue wanting to know what comes next. Truthfully I was put off from the fact that it was announced so early that a Renegade would die, but actually reading this issue I forgot any of that frustration and my mind is set on finding out who will bite the dust. With something this big you have to hope that the delivery of that death is one memorable and do that character justice. We have stuck with this same cast from the start and it would be depressing to lose one for the sake of having a major death.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Harbinger (2012) #23

May 28, 2014

Harbinger #23 is a roller-coaster of emotions that leaves you hurt that you are losing a character who has been with you since the start, and yet satisfied by how that Renegade's death was handled. After this issue anything goes for all who are left in this fight. I really wish there was something I could say that could have gone better, though if I'm being honest with myself it's just not possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
Harbinger (2012) #24

Jun 16, 2014

Harbinger #24 is an end to the conflict which it deserved. You couldn't have asked for a better way to be left as we head into new territory for the world of Harbinger. Joshua Dysart makes you care about these characters, everything good and bad which happens to them throughout. If you felt nothing after reading this, it's hard to say it was a problem with the story or art. Whatever comes next after this is something to really look forward to.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Harbinger (2012) #25

Jul 16, 2014

Joshua Dysart and Khari Evans truly delivered a devastating climax to the second year of Harbinger that any fan could have wanted. This is the most down to Earth series in Valiant and it's hard to argue why when these care characters you connect with and go through things that many of us do or have. Matt Kindt gives us a reason to care about these characters, the plot, and surely set the foundation for many things to happen involving the Harbingers in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Harbinger Wars #3

Jun 15, 2013

Overall Harbringer Wars has managed to deliver on being an intense story where no punches are pulled with Dysart. Clayton Henry and Pere Perez together on art just blows you away. Only adds to the atmosphere of the story which already has your full attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Harbinger Wars #4

Jul 18, 2013

Overall it was very well handled and I couldn't have asked for a better outcome because I actually was losing hope that they'd make it out of this alive. Dysart really pushing you to the edge of your seat wondering what would go wrong because not much has really gone right for them. Even with the conflict over, you wonder what is in store for them next when this looks to be far from over.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Harbinger Wars 2 #1

May 30, 2018

It's hard to say if I should be cheering for Livewire and the rest of these psiots or fear for them. Harbinger Wars 2 #1 set the stage for what is to be a hell of an uphill battle for this group of people who might have gotten too ahead of themselves in this war for survival. But then again, isn't that when those like them are at their most dangerous? This will definitely get worse before it gets any better when everyone is looking to make that big powerplay or show of strength early on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Harbinger Wars 2 #2

Jun 27, 2018

A lot of things happen in Harbinger Wars 2 #2. I'm not sure that I would say that we can see where this is heading in terms of a big clash or anything decisive, but right now we do see how far both sides are willing to go to fight for their people. Still an uphill fight for the psiots, and the anticipation is high to see how they can manage to turn things in their favor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Harbinger Wars 2 #3

Jul 25, 2018

I was looking forward to big things unfolding in this third issue of Harbinger Wars 2, and to that extent I was not disappointed. Everyone in some way showed their true colors here and that said a lot about what is at stake in this war. Some things that happened here you wish could have been the same when the first war happened, or when the “massacre” happened.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Harbinger Wars 2 #4

Aug 29, 2018

Of all the hype, I think I can say that after the events of Harbinger Wars 2 #4, this was definitely the most impactful and ambitious Valiant event so far. Absolutely no one came out of this unscathed. I don't know what fate awaits the psiots till next month, but for now this is exactly what you want to see when a group of people fight for their equality and safety in a world that fears/hates difference.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Harbinger Wars 2: Prelude #1

May 2, 2018

As the spark to Harbinger Wars 2, this creative team nailed what anticipation this prelude was supposed to generate. It was all about understand what would lead to this war and who lies at the heart of this madness. The wrong thing was done for the right reasons, I'm sure we've all heard that before, and for that very reason we are left invested in where the true fight for the future of psiots begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Harbinger Wars 2: Aftermath #1

Sep 26, 2018

Overall, this was a great conclusion to the war. The worst case scenario for the Harbinger Wars was everyone dying at the hands of their enemies. This? This was the best case scenario to what you could probably call the start to psiots fighting back for their place in this world. Harbinger Wars 2: Aftermath #1 tied up all the loose ends for Amanda moving forward, while at the same time setting her up for her next mission as her new solo series approaches.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Harbinger: Omegas #1

Aug 6, 2014

Harbinger: Omegas #1 is the beginning of brand new mini-series detailing the lives of these two omega-powered rivals andsetting the stage for what happens next. The revelation that psiots walk among us is going to have a very big impact on the world and this issue shows us just how the world reacts in the face of a threat they cannot comprehend. The hunters are one thing, but a tyrant like Harada is another thing completely.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Harbinger: Omegas #3

Oct 29, 2014

Harbinger: Omegas #3 is the end to what is really only the first step for the psiots finding their place in the world. Faith joining Unity, Harada having his own solo series called Imperium, and who knows what else from there now that the opportunities are open.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Harbinger: Renegade #0

Nov 8, 2017

Harbinger Renegade #0 was without a doubt a great set-up for what should be the most consequential Valiant event of all time. This revelation at the heart of the Harbinger mythos changed a lot about what you thought you knew about those who came before. Not all of them are as divine, or with good intentions. If you were looking to see what kind of tone and atmosphere this sequel should carry, Harbinger Renegade #0 is the story to make sure you pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Harbinger: Renegade #1

Nov 16, 2016

Harbinger Renegades #1 was a satisfying start to genuinely making the psiots relevant in the Valiant Universe again. Their place in it specifically because the core idea of what it means to be a psiot is not something you can get from someone so villainous as Harada.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Hawkeye (2012) #13

Oct 17, 2013

In the end, seeing Clint and Barney Barton come to the realization that they are brothers and need each other was that last touch to make this a brilliant issue. We get that story where action isn't needed, and we can just see the hero for who he is. Clint is just a man, and it's what makes you relate to him in every way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Hawkman (2018) #1

Jun 13, 2018

Hawkman #1 was a solid start for delivering action, character exploration, and depth to a character that can be hit or miss depending on the version they try to capture. The tie-in to Dark Nights: Metal is assumed to be big, but nothing that you would feel you need to have read from the event to understand what drives Carter Hall to go to such lengths to piece together his past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Hawkman (2018) #2

Jul 11, 2018

Hawkman #2 takes us deeper into the mystery of Hawkman's many incarnations. We may walk away with a few more questions than answers, but this is a story where you have to be willing to accept that these questions will get you from one issue into the next no matter how long they take to answer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hawkman (2018) #3

Aug 8, 2018

Pacing, action, and discovery made Hawkman #3 another standout issue. This plot has picked up in momentum and it has been for the best that they haven't let go of that momentum yet. That is what keeps us at the edge of our seats not knowing what to expect along with Carter Hall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hawkman (2018) #4

Sep 12, 2018

Hawkman #4 overall was a solid issue. Another cool interaction with another Hawkman, another cool aerial combat scene, and plenty of wonder to take from the artwork that captured the beauty of the scenery.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Hawkman (2018) #5

Oct 10, 2018

It did not hurt one bit at a stage like this for Hawkman to find himself able to run into a familiar face. Hawkman #5 opened us up to what has been a thrilling next destination for Carter Hall when finally able to find some direction in his mission. He just needed the right nudge, even if that meant fighting a planet that isn't too welcoming to strangers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Hawkman (2018) #6

Nov 14, 2018

Hawkman #6 brings another chapter to a close for Carter Hall. This objective was daring, it was rewarding, and it was full of sincerity towards the meaning of having a friend you can count on. I was never prepared to actually get the origin in this issue, and that was fine since there was so much else to enjoy in the perfect climatic setting.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Hawkman (2018) #7

Dec 12, 2018

The origin story that Hawkman #7 gave us was worth the wait. Hawkman has been a lot of things, but this revelation changes everything that Carter Hall thought he knew about himself and his past lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Hawkman (2018) #8

Jan 16, 2019

Hawkman #8 proves once again that there is nothing wrong with having a superhero book like Hawkman that is endearing. The destination is only as important as what you get out of the journey. This introduction to Catar-Ol of Krypton was as heartwarming as the reunion of Carter Hall and Ray Palmer. You think you have gotten the best out of the story one minute, and then you would be proven wrong with another excellent issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hawkman (2018) #9

Feb 13, 2019

Hawkman #9 was a fast read, but all the same got us to where we need to be when the Deathbringers make their presence know on Earth. Great set-up, execution, and finishing things off with a taste of what we have to anticipate when it is all or nothing against a force that is deadlier than what we were led to believe initially. Never take for granted a book that knows how to keep you at the edge of your seat between mysteries and revelations.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkman (2018) #12

May 8, 2019

Hawkman is a book that any reader should feel satisfied to have followed for the entirety of this story arc. This creative team proved that there is no such thing as a hero to overlook when given the right direction and set on the right adventure. Hawkman #12 brought this to a satisfying close with action, engagement, and pay-off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #13

Jun 12, 2019

Every book deserves that one solid story that has a beginning and end for the issue. Hawkman #13 didn't give us the room to forget why this book differs from others on shelves. If you are looking for a book that genuinely creates immersion through exploration and discovery, Hawkman is that book for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Hawkman (2018) #14

Jul 10, 2019

As the start to a new story arc for Hawkman, this was an interesting step to take forward for a story that you would have expected to exist more on its own before tying into anything else. I say this, but Hawkman #14 is a great issue for what it turned out to be. This is part of the Year of The Villain storyline, but it is still all Hawkman at the end of the day. A lowly villain made dangerous by an offer, and challenging one Carter Hall who already has enough to deal with to have another personal vendetta thrown his way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #15

Aug 14, 2019

Overall, Hawkman #15 gives you a bit more confidence in this new direction taken for Carter Hall. Still a Hawkman story at the core, and one that still presses the issue that realizing his destiny was only step one of deciding his own future. We are here to figure out if he can find meaning to these nightmares, or if they will get the best of him on top of the pressures of his current life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #16

Sep 11, 2019

For anyone who thought that this new story arc would ignore what Carter Hall is now experiencing after remembering his first life? Hawkman #16 assures you that everything comes with patience. Even as a technical tie-in to an event, this is still a book that aims to stay true to what was already unfolding before the madness of the ‘Year of the Villain'.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #17

Oct 9, 2019

As one door closes, another one is blasted wide open. By the end of this story arc, it has become pretty clear what was meant by blood and war being in the forecast in Carter Hall's future. Knowing his past was only the start to understanding the kind of person he would become. Hawkman #17 gave us a taste of what that person looks like, and it was more than reason enough to anticipate what the next issue has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #18

Nov 13, 2019

Hawkman #18 definitely unleashed a new kind of monster into a Doom-filled universe. The best takeaway from this issue was a better understanding of why we ended up with another version from a past life in contrast to the actual darkness within Carter. I only wish that a bit more time was also spent addressing how Hawkman was actually infected. Doom won, but the connection to the Batman Who Laughs is currently missing. The worst thing you can do to a reader is make them feel like they may have missed something.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hawkman (2018) #23

May 5, 2020

All in all, I felt myself drawn back into the series through the events of Hawkman #23. This brought the Sky Tyrant story to an end, while at the same time setting us up for something big to come next. It didn't hurt either that fans of Hawkman and Hawkgirl were given a scene we were all looking forward to by the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Hawkman (2018) #24

Jun 17, 2020

If there's one reason to recommend this book to DC readers, it would be the fact that Hawkman is one of the most consistent books they have to offer. Where we are right now in Hawkman #24, has been issues in the making since Carter had that first flashback of his past lives. A story that had to work its way all the way to the beginning, to work towards an end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Hawkman (2018) #25

Jul 8, 2020

I can't say it enough that this isn't a book you should sleep on. Hawkman #25 again made the statement that the best solo books are the ones which represent a creative team's ability to tell a story they put thought into. It was at this point in the story that everything finally came full circle, and even then it might be too soon to say when the fight is not over, which means Carter has not taken full advantage of everything his past lives have offered.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Hawkman (2018) #26

Aug 12, 2020

I have to say that I'm satisfied with how this story came to a close with the conclusion to Hawkman #26. This is what it looks like when you weave a story together that acknowledges everything you love about the characters involved. I walked away from this story with a greater appreciation for Hawkman and Hawkwoman than I ever had before. I even walked away from this story knowing much more about them than I ever did before. That is the greatest gift for any reader to experience from this. Aside from this, still happy as well that there is more to come beyond this issue. It's a brave new world for these heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Hawkman (2018) #27

Sep 9, 2020

All in all, it's back to the world of the living for Hawkman and Hawkwoman, but there's no rest for these two. Not even when this is their last life to live.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Hellions (2020) #1

Mar 25, 2020

I don't know if it's good to be bad, but Hellions #1 made the statement that it pays to keep your enemies close. This will be the Dawn of X book to look forward to if you want a story that is not only action-packed, but one that will keep you guessing at every turn. Nothing should ever be trusted to be straightforward when Mister Sinister is involved. Him or even this band of misfits thrown together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Herocorp Knights #2

Feb 24, 2016

Herocorp Knights #2 is a title which continues to hold potential with all these moving pieces and a plot which has escalated pretty quick. Characters you want to see explored in-depth, and powers you want to see explored because the creative team made that push to make their powersets unique.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Heroes In Crisis #1

Sep 26, 2018

This series isn't what I would calling emphasizing the hero behind the mask, but rather the person. Sometimes we forget that superheroes aren't invincible. That doesn't have to mean physically invincible either. Heroes in Crisis #1 shines a light on the truth that every fight can take something out of you, every loss, and every injury. It does take someone brave to get up and do the same thing again, but that doesn't mean they have it together while doing so.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Heroes In Crisis #3

Nov 28, 2018

Heroes in Crisis #3 continues this commendable story told through the perspective of heroes who all wear their flaws on their sleeves. If you didn't believe the things that made some of these heroes vulnerable or insecure, this book makes you think twice. It is also a lesson to writers out there that punching and kicking is fun, but you lose a lot of substance when you ignore what we can also learn from these characters at the same time. You can survive the worst and that never means you don't lose a little bit of yourself each time in the process.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Heroes In Crisis #4

Jan 2, 2019

Heroes in Crisis #4 was a roller coaster of emotions, and you have to love the feelings this story is able to bring out of you for it. No matter how many heroes pour their souls into their confessions, it never gets any easier. This creative team is doing their job when you are reminded of how vulnerable and human these heroes are.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Heroes In Crisis #5

Jan 30, 2019

Heroes in Crisis #5 was definitely one of the stronger issues of this book. There's a lot going on at this point, but there is an appreciation for the sense of urgency that this creative team has put into this story, as well as the pay-off that we get with each passing issue. For such a personal story, Heroes in Crisis continues to be the full package for one involving superheroes on such a scale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Heroes In Crisis #6

Feb 27, 2019

This issue will leave you just a bit split because you got everything you could have wanted about the inner workings of Sanctuary, but everything else such as what created this crisis or who that hero actually is, you still have to wait for. Even if the events of Heroes in Crisis #6 somewhat tell you who that hero actually is, nothing was actually revealed as fact just yet. Till then, this was an engaging issue for the characters who this creative team decided to focus on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Heroes In Crisis #8

Apr 24, 2019

Ignoring the questions that would ultimately bring this down. As it is? Heroes in Crisis #8 was a work of art. So much emotion was poured into speaking to the part of a heroes life that we dare not explore. The parts which show us that no one is impervious to the things that break normal people.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Heroes In Crisis #9

May 29, 2019

Like I said, Heroes in Crisis is far from a perfect book, but the message sings true. We invest in these heroes, villains, people, because they are every bit as flawed as we are. No mask, tights, or cape can hide this truth. Heroes in Crisis is not just another gimmick, because a gimmick is sold to you for shock value. When you get past everything tragic, the message in this story is all that matters. Call that being “political”, but this is what it means for your heroes to live in the real world, as we do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hit-Girl (2018) #1

Feb 23, 2018

The little monster has made her return in a big way. Hit-Girl #1 was everything you could have hoped for when asking what happens when she's off on her own. Does she find a proper replacement for Dave? Hell no. Does age calm the beast within? Not one bit. With no power comes no responsibility and Hit-Girl is exercising that freedom in every way possible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Hit-Girl (2018) #2

Mar 28, 2018

With Hit-Girl #2, I don't even know what number to say they cranked the dial to. It surely was past ten, and I'd hate to say anything less than double. This girl is bloodthirsty and this is a prime example of what you are in store for when she is off her leash. One would assume Mano might be somewhat of an influence here, but it is all Hit-Girl, all day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Hit-Girl (2018) #4

May 23, 2018

Hit-Girl #4 brings us to the end of our first destination for Mindy, and this was one hell of a spectacle. Mark Millar and this creative team fully embraced everything that is absurdly violent about this world. There has never been a time to love Hit-Girl more than when she is on her own and having no one to tell her she is too much. Canada beware.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Hit-Girl (2018) #5

Jun 20, 2018

This story arc could have been the dealbreaker having switched up the creative team, but I have to say that there is still potential for this psychotic 12-year-old doing what she does best. Canadian hospitality is not enough to keep Hit-Girl from getting to her next target. The fun this time around is that her target is not willing to go down without a fight. Not to mention she might have actually poked the bear this time around too (no pun intended).

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Hit-Girl (2018) #6

Jul 25, 2018

Hit-Girl #6 put me more at ease about this second adventure. I was skeptical for how the first issue turned out, but the character focus made up for a lot that I thought this was lacking in the beginning.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Hit-Girl (2018) #7

Aug 23, 2018

Hit-Girl versus Billy Baker and his gang is probably the best thing to come of this story arc so far. That's not saying too much, but for what it is I have to say I was impressed when the time came to deliver on the kind of action we come to anticipate from this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Horizon #1

Jul 15, 2016

Overall Horizon has a lot of potential for where it can go exploring the concept of fighting for your home. It was a fast read, and there wasn't too much plot development, but we at least know our main character and her intentions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Horizon #2

Aug 17, 2016

Horizon #2 I would say served it's purpose of pulling you into the story and making you care about these characters. Hopefully a little more as things progress when there seems to be much more to learn about them than what we are seeing on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Horizon #7

Jan 25, 2017

Overall, Horizon #7 proved that they are playing a long game to continue adding depth to a story that could have easily been mistaken as straightforward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hot Damn #1

Apr 13, 2016

Hot Damn #1 is the book you need to have on your pull-list right now. Normally I might say that a book like Hot Damn is down to Earth, but it is as down to hell as you can get while writing its own rules. There is a lot to take in, though that is the beauty of a book like this with no boundaries. And there is still more to this plot as it thickens with Teddy's fate.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Hot Damn #2

May 4, 2016

Hot Damn #2 keeps taking things to the next level and for that this is a book you must be reading. Like you are seriously missing out on something truly creative and fun for what they bring to life within these pages.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Hot Damn #3

Jun 29, 2016

So much goes on in Hot Damn #3 and it is beautiful for how this world continues to grow in the process. what you take most from books like this is that there is always exploration to look forward to and this creative team meets us every step of the way along with character development and stunning visuals.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Hot Damn #4

Aug 3, 2016

Hot Damn #4 as usual gives us the full package in story development, character appeal, and stunning artwork. If you want a book that will really make you think about the way you live your life, this is the book for you to pick up because Hot Damn plays no games. Well it does, but things get real when they do.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
House Of M (2015) #1

Aug 19, 2015

Visually House of M #1 did not disappoint. Marco Failla is the right artist for this tie-in when he brings the necessary level of energy for one that is full of action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
House of X #1

Jul 25, 2019

If you were hesitant about the direction of the X-Books like me? Then House of X #1 might begin to ease your worries. It may be too soon to drop your guard until Powers of X comes out next week, but for now this feels like the start of something memorable in the X-Men's history. Without a doubt this is one of the strongest debuts for an X-Men book next to X-Men: Red. This is the time to genuinely fight the urges that past writers fell prey to. We need new, but we also need what makes the X-Men who they are at the core. This is them fighting the kind of fight that they should have long ago.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
House of X #2

Aug 7, 2019

House of X #2 succeeded in giving us complete faith in Hickman's vision for the X-Men. As I said, the second issue always matters most. Big ideas require a strong follow through. That he did with a captivating story told over the span of lifetimes, and surprisingly through just one person. Who would have thought that it could be someone on the outside who could have such an impact on the fate of the mutants?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
House of X #3

Aug 28, 2019

House of X #3 is another focused issue and I can't argue with the choice to show us what happened, or what happens when the X-Men make this move to stop the creation of Nimrod. Will this be the actual timeline played out? Or is what we're seeing right now what happens after Moira X brings the information to stop Nimrod to the X-Men? You never know when it comes to Hickman, but you definitely sit eager to find out how this ends, because it started off with one heck of a bang!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
House of X #4

Sep 4, 2019

I'm not going to lie, this issue broke me. I was ready for a lot of things to happen, especially knowing that some part of this mission was going to be a disaster. However, nothing could have prepared us for how this mission was going to play out from start to finish. It began with a bang in House of X #3, and from there it was a slow snuffing of the lights till there was nothing left. With that said, I'm still ready for some sort of twist to this, but that doesn't change what has happened in this moment. You can't unsee your favorite X-Men going through an experience like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
House of X #6

Oct 2, 2019

House of X #6 brings this revolutionary tale of Mutantkind's rise to a conclusion, and I couldn't be prouder of Marvel and this creative team taking the mutant problem seriously again. Survival is not just about facing extinction time and time again, it's also about the wonder in how you adapt to the world around you. This is the first time where you could say that the mutants genuinely adapted with all the resources and allies they have had to take advantage of for YEARS. I don't think I have ever felt this excited for what comes next in the X-Books. The Dawn of X-Men is going to be a line of books to look forward to!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Howling Commandos Of S.H.I.E.L.D #1

Oct 28, 2015

Howling Commandos of S.H.I.E.L.D. #1 is an interesting new take on the Howling Commandos. The team does have potential, the story is entertaining, and has a lot to offer when exploring this side of the Marvel Universe we don't see enough of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hulk (2016) #3

Feb 22, 2017

I haven't felt touched like this in a good while. Hulk right now even being on issue #3 is not the book you want to sleep on. There isn't a stronger story out there from Marvel that tries to address all the things that can ruin you in the business of being a superhero. Not everything you can bounce back from, and Jen will have one hell of a climb to anything normal. Just losing control of her Hulk is bad enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Hulk (2016) #4

Mar 22, 2017

Hulk #4 takes us straight into the escalation of this story arc. This was the best time for Maise to start taking matters into her own hands and her actions felt real from someone who for someone who fights for control of what she has left. If you're looking at the big picture, then this could easily be Jen, and that makes this well-thought out in the longrun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Hulk (2016) #6

May 31, 2017

‘Deconstructed' has been a great first story arc for Hulk. I figured that there would be more to this book than simply Jen anchored down by past events. This creative team made a solid effort to forge a new path for Jen and find a new strength in her that I don't think she has displayed before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Hulk (2016) #7

Jun 14, 2017

Hulk #7 starts ‘Let Them Eat Cake', and they did not hold back with what throws Jen into the action once more. This creative team is on the right track where Jen can have this engaging rehabilitation and still deal with other things going on around her. Now it is also more set in stone that this is a new kind of Hulk we are dealing with. One who wears the scars on her sleeve quite literally which can mean anything if Jen isn't careful.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Hulk (2016) #8

Jul 12, 2017

I don't know about you, but I don't see too much struggle in figuring out this new Hulk persona. Hulk #8 was an excellent transition into Jen trying to figure out the kind of hero she wants to be. Sure she turned down the hero life, but that was always to be short-lived. ‘Let The Eat Cake' part two is the start of a return to form that you know will also still have bumps in the road consider this isn't She-Hulk we're dealing with anymore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hulk (2016) #9

Aug 9, 2017

Hulk #9 I would say is a bit of a fast read, but it gets straight to the point here that this is all leading to what will be an unfortunate encounter. No one asks to become a monster, and yet that can happen to people who don't deserve it. When you are Oliver, you don't have the human features of someone gamma radiated. This book has been great for the depth it has given to this corner of the world where you find yourself dealt with the worst of hands.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Hunger #1

Jul 25, 2013

Again it delivers on the start of what could be the end. Not much hope when you have to face a combo of the greatest force to roam the galaxy. Fliakov didn't waste time and went straight into this story knowing it's part one of a four-part series, pacing and all was done well to introduce those involved. The art style as well really fit that cosmic setting. Most notable the use of light colors.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hunger #2

Aug 8, 2013

Rick Jones was the best character to use in this situation because this is all new to him. He has never seen the evils that the Universe holds, he has never seen the evils that people can act against each other, and he has never faced a threat such as Galactus. It's a story built up like a hero rising to the occasion. Being given a power so great, and a responsibility that comes with it that only he can carry. Sounds like Spider-Man that I'm describing, but that is just the way it is and so far Fialkov has created a story worth following from the Ultimate Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Hunger #3

Oct 3, 2013

What's the worst that can happen? Well we'll just see about that with the conclusion of Hunger to come. This has been a very unique story, seeing characters who have been almost forgotten for a long time now. Characters that quickly became major players in an event that will determine the fate of the Ultimate Universe. Solid story and great art. Really makes you feel like this is a problem of galactic proportions. The bold colors, stars, the detail put into everything including the swarm. Kirk proves to be able to handle a lot going on in the same panel which made this that much appealing visually.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Hunger #4

Oct 17, 2013

This was an epic conclusion to Cataclysm, the catalyst to it as well given how he made his way to Earth. Great pacing for four issues and not once did it not forget to remind you of how dangerous both Galactus and the Gah Lak Tus swarm are. The art is great as well given how much Kirk had to handle with the swarm and just all the blasting and explosions going on all over the place, so much goes on in a single issue and you have to commend him for being able to pull off how great it looks. If you are a fan of the Ultimate Universe, and find yourself interested in the Cataclysm event, this mini series is a must buy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Iceman (2017) #1

Jun 7, 2017

This new ongoing is rich with potential for Iceman who is not like other X-Men that get solo books purely based on popularity. I felt the same intrigue that I did when they finally gave Storm her own book because this was deserved and a long time coming for all the things new to discover. It is a time for Iceman to build his own legacy, but even more important to have a capable creative team that can get him to that point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Iceman (2017) #3

Jul 26, 2017

Iceman #3 dodged the real conversation, but so much of this was genuine from a family trying their hardest to come together and an enemy who shows them real fear through delusion. I hope this isn't the last we see of the Purifiers as they do bring out a different side to the X-Men that goes beyond the usual vendetta.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iceman (2017) #4

Aug 23, 2017

This issue takes us deeper into Iceman' world when we are now seeing the struggles of being a teacher on top of everything else. Iceman #4 was fun, another personal story, and brought back a fan favorite for a short time. It means a lot that they can find a balance between his life as an X-Man and as Bobby figuring himself out. You know what to expect from Bobby, but it doesn't mean you can prepare yourself for what life throws at him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Iceman (2017) #6

Oct 4, 2017

This new story arc turned out much better than I had anticipated. There were fears for if this is when the book might start to lose us, but a different direction didn't mean losing what this has been at the core. That big tag which says Legacy I'm sure inspired this choice in story to tell. Iceman #6 gave us an Iceman who has some interesting friends, ways to go building himself up outside of being an X-Man, and up to the challenge when it comes to taking that first step following acceptance of being gay.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Iceman (2017) #8

Dec 6, 2017

Iceman continues to be the full package of the mutant experience from a different perspective. Bobby lives a very different life from everyone else who doesn't have a time-displaced younger self or parents that will still somewhat communicate with them. He has come a long way since the start of this series and you definitely want to see where he can go next with more confidence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Immortal Hulk #7

Oct 10, 2018

Some will say that World War Hulk is the best there is, but honestly right now I would argue that the Immortal Hulk gives that version a run for his money. The terror, the cunning, and the lack of restriction makes this Hulk your worst nightmare. While you ultimately knew this could only end two ways for the Avengers, the fun was in how they each found out that they got more than they bargained for. For just the action alone this was both an awesome and memorable issue. The end? That leaves some questions that should hopefully hold us till the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Immortal Hulk #9

Nov 21, 2018

Immortal Hulk #9 is another winner this month. Its a crazy world to live in where the Hulk is not your biggest worry, or the people who are after him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #11

Jan 2, 2019

Immortal Hulk #11 got my head turning in the best way. I did not think one of the most engaging issues would come of a trip to Hell. Not like this, and that is what continues to make this series so standout. It's not about the scare tactics or the things you do for shock, it is the way you set a stage and embrace everything out of the ordinary in the Hulk's orbit.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #18

May 30, 2019

Immortal Hulk #18 was a wild ride. Overall there was a lot of clarity given to who is controlling what part of Bruce and Hulk, and revelations found in what enemies have been plotting in the background. Right now this creative team is setting the right mood to really question what kind of monster is the worst. The one that is right in front of you? The one who you underestimate? Or is it the one who has been lurking in the shadows for years? Only time will tell, but we are all invested to find out for better or for worse!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #19

Jun 12, 2019

Something did come, and it definitely did wear the face of a friend. We may not know what the hell happened when this friend found her target, or even who her true target is, but it was all chilling. Immortal Hulk #19 continued to genuinely shake up what you define as a monster. If you ever thought the Hulk was up there as the stuff of nightmares, this story continues to prove you wrong time after time.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #20

Jul 3, 2019

This is the kind of action-packed issue of Immortal Hulk that makes you fall in love with the book all over again. This was the full package between heart, discovery, and loads of action. Things did get a bit strange at the very end, but it also gets the wheels turning in your head since the lore of Bruce Banner is being blown wide open.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #21

Jul 17, 2019

Its time to fight fire with fire! So to speak. Immortal Hulk #21 was the perfect issue taken to allow everyone to reintroduce themselves to who General Fortean is, and the depths to his madness. One would have thought Thunderbolt Ross/Red Hulk was the greatest threat to anyone with gamma running through their veins, but then here comes General Fortean saying, “Hold my Beer”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #22

Aug 7, 2019

Immortal Hulk #22 was a thrilling issue for everything that has now been set up for team gamma. Words were exchanged, and we now know what is going through the mind of everyone involved in this new war of the Hulks. If General Fortean didn't have everyone's attention before? He has their full attention now that this has become personal. Motivated by a tortured Rick Jones, motivated by a slain Langkowski. The next issue is going to be action-packed for sure!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #23

Sep 4, 2019

Immortal Hulk #23 so far is everything you could have wanted from these two forces clashing. It has all come down to this moment, and even now this creative team has not failed to throw surprises at us. When playing for keeps like this? You can bet that a couple of things will turn your stomach to make the point that this isn't your average hero versus villain scenario.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #24

Oct 2, 2019

We all knew how this confrontation was going to end between the Immortal Hulk and Fortean Abomination, but knowing that and what would happen in the events of this battle are two very different things. Immortal Hulk #24 lived up to everything that was expected from these two forces clashing. This may have been an indulgence of two monsters smashing, but there was no denying that this was also this creative team having fun with the pure horror of it all that kept us at the edge of our seats.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #26

Nov 6, 2019

Immortal Hulk #26 has changed the game in a big way. Who would have ever thought that it would be Banner like this that is so dangerous to the world around him? The build-up to this point was worth it because I'm sure there was not a single reader who hasn't been wondering for countless issues what was meant by Banner and his other personas wanting to destroy the world. Now we know he means the human world, and who doesn't want to see the greatest war he could start?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #27

Nov 21, 2019

The Hulk makes his first move, and Immortal Hulk #27 succeeds in creating excitement for what will come now that Team Gamma has gotten the attention of The Minotaur. Its one thing to come after Roxxon, but it is another thing entirely to actually get away with hurting them. For as much bravado as Agger has picked up after accepting his true form as The Minotaur, what comes next should be him putting his money where his mouth is when the time arrives to take action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Hulk #28

Dec 11, 2019

If anyone thought that was it for Roxxon, this issue said otherwise. Immortal Hulk #28 assured us that this is one business man who is not ready to let go of the new opportunities now afforded to him, in spite of current losses.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Hulk #29

Jan 8, 2020

Overall, momentum is going strong with Immortal Hulk #29. One would think that things would slow down a bit with more storylines to balance between, but this creative team nailed all of these different elements connecting at just the right points.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #30

Jan 29, 2020

Simply astounding is this chapter of Immortal Hulk. This creative team went above and beyond to give us what war with the Hulks looks like. Taking on the world like this changed the game drastically. Public opinion matters, saving “people” matters, there being a city left standing when all is said and done matters. The only one who wins is the one who is not blamed for all of this destruction in the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Hulk #31

Feb 12, 2020

For better or worse, the game changed for the Hulk by the end of this chapter. If you thought that this was ever going to be a war that could be won through brute force alone, then the team-up of the Minotaur and The Living Hulk say otherwise with the conclusion of Immortal Hulk #31.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #32

Mar 11, 2020

Right now, Xemnu redefines what powerful means. Who knew that all this time there was something this powerful on the back-burner that no other writer was brave enough to bring back into the world of the Hulk? Immortal Hulk #32 is the chapter which makes you appreciate the involvement of Xemnu more than you thought you would have initially. Like I said, it is refreshing that not every challenge is going to be met through a slobber-knocker.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Immortal Hulk #33

Mar 25, 2020

Every time you think you have seen it all, this creative team tells you to wait. The best kind of horror is the kind which hits you out of nowhere, and this issue nailed every notable scene where it delivered. Immortal Hulk #33 will give you the chills, will satisfy your need for action, and keep you coming back for more with a stunning twist to a problem no one saw coming.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #34

Jun 24, 2020

When life gives you a Green Door, why not walk through it until you understand what's on the other side? Immortal Hulk #34 may have been an issue designed to give insight into The Leader's involvement, but it also created a chilling experience for the insanity that comes with purposefully looking into the abyss. In The Leaders case? It does tend to look back.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #35

Jul 15, 2020

Back into the main story with Immortal Hulk #35, and once more we are reminded that the work Banner is trying to accomplish is easier said than done. There's nothing more dangerous than an enemy right under your nose. Unfortunate that this is something which Banner and friends are going to have to find out the hard way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #36

Aug 12, 2020

Overall, Immortal Hulk #36 went the distance to flip Banner's plans on its head. Nothing which unfolded here is what anyone would have imagined possible when going outside for only a ribbon cutting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Immortal Hulk #37

Sep 16, 2020

Overall, Immortal Hulk #37 changed the game drastically. This is The leader like you have never seen him before. Its anyone's guess right now how anyone is going to stop what's coming, because there is no power greater than ‘The Keeper of the Green Door'.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #40

Nov 18, 2020

Overall, this was a very exciting issue of Immortal Hulk. Issue #40 shook up the battle in a big way through big moves and revelations.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Hulk #41

Dec 16, 2020

All in all, this was a solid issue of Immortal Hulk #41. Not the rematch you were prepared for, but you had to appreciate that there was so much more to where this was leading than what was initially let on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Immortal Hulk #42

Jan 13, 2021

By the end of Immortal Hulk #42, there's some big changes to prepare for in the new year. Just when you think you have seen everything, still this creative team tells you you haven't seen everything yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal Hulk #44

Mar 10, 2021

All in all, Immortal Hulk #44 was brutal. It really is never a good day to be a Hulk.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Immortal She-Hulk #1

Sep 23, 2020

Overall, this issue was worth the wait. It's good to know that through the events of Immortal She-Hulk #1, there is no one in the Hulk Family who is being left out or unaffected by the madness of the Green Door. What was once thought of to be a gift is seeming like a curse at this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Imperium #1

Feb 2, 2015

Imperium #1 is the start to something big that has the potential to rock the Valiant Universe to its core. It's not enough for someone to tell you the world needs help. It's something on a different level when that help is forced upon you. What will keep us anticipating the issues to come will be the delivery on those dark things Harada and the other psiots will have to do for what they believe to be the greater good.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Imperium #2

Mar 4, 2015

Imperium #2 was a step up from the first issue which is a good sign for the series. This series has proven to put characterization above action and that works when we are introduced to characters worth caring for. Gravedog has a lot to offer and surely you want to see more involvement from him in the bigger picture after this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Imperium #3

Apr 8, 2015

Imperium #3 continues putting character above plot and that is what works best for this series. We have not reached that climax yet, so getting to these big players introduced and introduced properly is a big thing. None have disappointed so far, so hopefully Broken Angel keeps our attention like Mech Major and those before him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Imperium #5

Jun 3, 2015

And it wasn't enough to just have Kozol speak as though he was cracking under the pressure. We had to see it too. That much is present up to that very breaking point with Kozol's frantic search for the truth. He was serious, yet it was through that mask where you see how he was as paranoid as can be. Suspicious of everything around him, second guessing, making questionable judgements, that is believable through the facial expressions and that sold each passing moment. As for Broken Angel, it was just as amusing to see how she reacts to the things around her. Without eyes it is a bit more difficult to show full emotions, and yet the art team makes it work through varying gestures, smiles, and light exposure to her face so that you are focusing only on what she is trying to emote.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Imperium #6

Jul 1, 2015

As for Angela Peace Baingana itself, you have to love what is going on with this character when this body has no power to fear. No powers, gadgets, fighting skills. Just a really smart brain and somehow that is the most lethal weapon we have come across thus far. As stated before, Angela Peace Baingana's perspective on the conflict is what grabs you more than anything else. It sees more than just the greed or power. “Peace” sees opportunity which leads to some humorous quips during what you'd expect to be a serious situation.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Imperium #7

Aug 5, 2015

The only downside to this issue is that it kinda goes all over the place with Harada trying to overcome the displacements Divinity is throwing him into. They want to show the strength of Divinity's displacement powers and at times because of the page count it felt like we are being rushed through. Visually and storywise that was the main difficulty with reading Imperium #7. Now with that said, you still do find yourself impressed because the big picture is that this is a fight and Harada is on the ropes. The most excitement you get is seeing Harada stretching his powers far and thin to not only break these worlds Divinity has created, but also hold on to reality when he is aware of the situation.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Imperium #8

Sep 2, 2015

Imperium #8 is a solid end to shortly bringing back a character that many Valiant fans loved instantly from his recent mini series. Who knows if we'll see Divinity again till the next mini, but for now he has left his mark on Harada and Imperium as a series in a big way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Imperium #9

Oct 7, 2015

Imperium #9 is a great start to getting us back on track with Harada not only working towards his perfect future, but sending a message to those who are against it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Imperium #10

Nov 11, 2015

Imperium #10 is building up to be an excellent event in this series as the Plantings start to make their biggest move yet in years against Harada. They have suffered, lost, and feared since Harada first discovered them. So when this happens you can tell this fight will come to a head with an all or nothing goal in mind. This is as emotional as things can get when you can experience what it is to be the unfortunate that Harada has stepped over in his ascension to power.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Imperium #11

Dec 16, 2015

Imperium #11 shakes things up showing why this is the darker corner of the Valiant Universe that you don't want to skip out on. There's much to offer when its a fight for the future, choice, pride, and self-preservation.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Imperium #12

Jan 20, 2016

This will be a memorable story arc for Imperium because at the end of the day this was a good look at the type of person Harada really is now. He is still a monster in his own right, and the same can be said for LV-99, though now there is more of a grasp as to the type of world Harada aims to create after his confrontation with the Plantings.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Imperium #13

Feb 17, 2016

Imperium #13 is a new start to a story following more people Harada effects with his mission to rule the world for the sake of peace. Things get personal, and if the previous arc taught us anything that is when things get nasty. The next issues should hopefully show us just how bad things can get for people who get in Harada's way, and aren't going to go down without a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Imperium #14

Mar 17, 2016

Imperium #14 felt more like set-up though leading to something we don't want to miss. Will Harada kill someone who is like a daughter to him? Can Gravedog survive the wrath of those he betrayed? These are the kinds of questions we should want answered moving into Imperium #15.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Imperium #15

Apr 27, 2016

Imperium #15 was the step up it needed to be for this being the third chapter of ‘STORMBREAK'. Plenty more to look forward to and still no one is safe when right now it seems like all or nothing to stop Harada.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Imperium #16

May 25, 2016

Imperium #16 brings ‘Stormbreak' to a close shaking things up again with how far Harada is willing to go for this future. This series really makes you wonder if all this is and will be worth it. It is one thing to see that future, it is another thing entirely to stomach the losses along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Incoming #1

Dec 27, 2019

Overall, I have gotten through the big hype that is Incoming #1, and it sucked to close it feeling like it wasn't enough for me to pick up the second. I enjoyed the heroes who played a part in the first act, the artists involved, though that was about it really. They could have done so much better with this one, and the best takeaway from this shouldn't have been what it sets up for other books.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Incursion #1

Feb 20, 2019

Through the events of Incursion #1, this creative team met the hype that this debut had built up to. They pulled no punches in this first chapter when we are quickly hit with the reality that there is much more to fear than the Master Darques of the world, or the Toyo Haradas. Not when you have a villain the likes of Imperatrix Virago who has been there and done that on so many other planets before Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infinite Frontier (2021) #0

Mar 3, 2021

Overall, still skeptical after Infinite Frontier #0, but this does not mean that I'm not against going into these new stories with a more opened mind than what I jumped in with initially.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Infinity #1

Aug 15, 2013

Great start to Infinity and this is one book worth picking up regardless of you views of Marvel events. You're definitely missing out if your someone who enjoys the Avengers title. It has the same feel, and the artistic nature carries over into this book which is a plus to me. Do yourself a favor and add this to your list if you haven't already.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Infinity #2

Sep 5, 2013

Shocking twist to the end of this issue and certainly a game changer. When you thought Thanos' motivations were clear, you are hit with something which puts the plot into perspective. This is what Hickman does and it is what he does best. Adding layers just when you think you know everything and what's to come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Infinity #3

Sep 20, 2013

Hickman, Opena, and Weaver delivered again as a cohesive team. Even though there are more artists involved than Opena and Weaver, they all are able to bring something to the table which makes this event look so stunning in visuals. It's cohesive and it has remained consistent throughout which is all that you could ask from a creative team of artists. You have that tone, galactic atmosphere, dark feel from their urgency, and best of all the handling of the characters anatomies which is most detailed.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Infinity #4

Oct 10, 2013

This was an astounding issue of Infinity that turns the tide of the war. Time after time Hickman delivers on those moments that really stand out and those last few pages of this issue are enough to make you want more, the next issue could not come any sooner.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Infinity #5

Oct 31, 2013

The fight isn't over yet, and there's one more world that needs saving. Earth has been the reason for everything going on and it ends with Earth and keeping Thanos from having his way with both his son and the world. Now both stories between Avengers and New Avengers collide and it is what we've been waiting for all this time considering they are fighting for the same reasons. I mean there could be a little more focus on the New Avenger's side of the story, but that is what remains of this epic tale. Aside from this the collaboration between Jerome Opena and Dustin Weaver consistently is on point and captures what makes this event so great.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Infinity Heist #1

Sep 26, 2013

Only problem is at the very end with a twist that doesn't really click. Hopefully we don't lose a main character this early, but I hope that the explanation is good enough to satisfy a reason to keep reading this mini series. Creating such stories like this is the one thing that Infinity has provided the Marvel Universe. We get to see characters that haven't been seen in a while and they are given some relevance, even if it is just for this short time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Infinity Heist #2

Oct 24, 2013

Even as a light as things have been till this point, you see the danger of what they've gotten themselves into. Blizzard, Whirlwind, and Firebrand are going to have to step up to the plate if they want to prove themselves because the end shows just why they are trying to be more than what those like Spymaster dismiss them as. They may be villains, but Tieri has given a reason for you to care about them and anything can happen from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Infinity Heist #3

Nov 29, 2013

As the third part to this story, you do appreciate that even if Heist stands on it's own from whatever is going on with the rest of the world, the story still has a big influence from Infinity. It's obvious that otherworldy forces would take advantage of the Earth being unguarded to such extent, but you wouldn't have seen this coming which is what a book like this allows you to experience. It's another fun book from a villain's perspective and meets that same quality of writing. Overall it's something new and the mature tone of it all makes it something convincing as this is one score they don't feel like failing yet again when things are right for the taking. With the next issue being the last, we can only hope that Tieri can go out with a bang to make this one to remember.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Infinity Heist #4

Jan 8, 2014

This was an out of this world story that took advantage of an event that brought about so many opportunities. Heist is a great distraction from everything world threatening and one that you don't have to take as serious as the rest tied to it. This story overall turned out to be a fun adventure to jump into without feeling like you're investing your time into something you might not be able to commit to. I'd recommend that if you were still on the fence about this book to give it a shot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Infinity: The Hunt #1

Sep 12, 2013

As a tie in to Infinity this one is still odd, yet holds some value. We see how Wakanda is affected, Atlantis, and even the place where everyone is meeting. No one is safe which is something this event has proven in every book so far. We just have to see how Matt Kindt handles this cast because aside from Avengers Arena we haven't had this many young heroes sharing the same book before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Infinity: The Hunt #2

Oct 4, 2013

Where you feared that this would have actually gone the safe path of them doing those games, this shows so much more promise. Potential that should be unlocked in a lot of these young heroes with their backs against their walls. Not to mention coming to enjoy some new young heroes who have some interesting skills. Looks great, feels mature, Sanders makes this look like something you can take seriously because you should despite having the nonchalant nature of Quintin Quire. Next to Infinity Heist, this is another book worth picking up as a mini series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Gods Among Us #14

Apr 19, 2013

If Damian is to be the one to die, it will more than likely be on Batman's head because while majority of the heroes are taking a more proactive role in the world, he remains to fight against the world they are trying to make. A world where they can avoid such disasters before they can happen. This book overall has made an exciting world where the heroes are basically playing as gods. While this issue itself is nothing too big, it certainly is a great build up on something to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Injustice: Gods Among Us #15

Apr 25, 2013

The artwork remains to impress as the thorough coloring and inking make the scenes pop out. The bold coloring is also complimented by sharp dialogue and a cliffhanger that has us all excited as we wit in anticipation for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #16

May 2, 2013

The spotlight had to be placed on Batman's narration at the very end. It showed just how much Damian's actions and Nightwing's death impacted him. This is not what he expected to happen and certainly didn't expect it to come from Damian, his own son. And to end it saying that his son is now dead. That's how you know that this situation means to him, to feel betrayed at the very moment that he needed those closest to him by his side. Even Harley Quinn was seen crying and had the same look of terror on her face as well as every person in that cell room including the villains who ceased their fighting immediately.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Injustice: Gods Among Us #17

May 8, 2013

If there was anyone to better portray the emotion to be felt from both sides, Selina was the best pick and did just that. Does make you question, for those who played the game, what she did to be arrested later on?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #18

May 15, 2013

So now what we have here is the set up for the fight to come. The line has been drawn and Batman has picked up those who are likely to join him and his cause. Solid issue and good pacing like the previous.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Injustice: Gods Among Us #19

May 22, 2013

Tom already shows how the heroes are taking things a bit into the extreme. Stripping Black Adam of his powers and nearly killing him because of how vulnerable he became. There is a line to be drawn and for those like Billy, he's losing himself and can't help it. Another solid issue that addresses the problem as it progressively becomes more intense.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Injustice: Gods Among Us #20

May 29, 2013

The one thing that you can take from this issue is how differently the characters are portrayed, mainly Lex Luther. It was definitely a curve ball not only to the readers, but to the Justice League that he knew all of their identities. You'd think that it's just because of his apparent close relationship to Superman that he figured this out, but even Superman himself was shown to be shocked. Again, a weaker issue compared to the last few previous, yet all the same clever writing from Tom Taylor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Injustice: Gods Among Us #21

Jun 5, 2013

Again if we are seeing how Superman and the heroes around him are becoming too aggressive, it was seen through Wonder Woman in this issue. Being someone deeply involved with war, Wonder Woman found herself at that war camp where the females were being taken advantage of. That's a recipe for danger when this happens in her presence. You can see how far they will go to bring about justice when she killed that soldier in cold blood and gave the men's weapons to the women, who then slaughtered them as Wonder Woman flew away. If she wasn't in the wrong then it was apparent just for the fact that she turned off her communicator

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Injustice: Gods Among Us #22

Jun 15, 2013

Overall it was another great issue by Superman's perspective. Even with Batman not in the issue it was still fun to see how easily he can affect the team with his “doubt bomb”. The artwork is probably the best it has ever been thanks to Mike Miller. Between the smooth colors and the design of every character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Injustice: Gods Among Us #23

Jun 19, 2013

Like I said, this was most likely going to be the issue in which Superman snapped, and snap he did. This issue will set the tone for most to come, and right now you see a man driven with the goal of preventing what happened to both Metropolis and Lois from ever occurring again. The artwork which was great last issue felt consistent though taken over by Tom Derenick. He was able to capture this moment which is very defining for the seriousness of this fight that is not only between the Justice League and Kalibak, but also between them and Batman as peace between them is not an option anymore.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Injustice: Gods Among Us #24

Jun 26, 2013

So all in all loving the direction. The kids gloves have come off and Tom Taylor has taken Superman to a place he cannot return from. What comes next will be his defining moments because as the next book shows the world will love him for the stance he has taken, no matter how aggressive he may seem to others. Now we see the fallout which is that divide as to what is justified of a hero and who is willing to do what has to be done to dispose of a life in order to save many. The art style continues to keep the book balancing both style and substance. Something you have to give credit where credit is due, this issue especially looking quite colorful if I might say.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Gods Among Us #25

Jul 3, 2013

Even as things have calmed down since Superman saved the world, you can tell this is just the calm before the storm. So many different emotions are set in motion and you never feel as though anyone who isn't Batman or Superman is a blind sheep. They all have an active voice in this situation and it gives depth to the multiple perspectives to take in the issue. The switch to Bruno Redondo on art fit this chapter because things are very grim and the dark use of colors and shadows brought that to the surface. Overall things will get worse before they get any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Injustice: Gods Among Us #26

Jul 10, 2013

Overall it seemed like this issue was set up to serve as a psychological evaluation of the situation. While nothing is wrong with that when it's good to delve into what is driving the story and his motivations, but when it's placed in as randomly as it felt, it was a bit disappointing as a transition from what occurred the last issue. The one thing I liked about this story so far is that the transitions from perspectives has always been smooth and I can only hope it gets back on track with the next issue. The least you can say is that you'd rather get this part out-of-the-way now because in the end it was an inevitable moment that they had to address. Aside from this it's great to see Tom Derenick back on art as he is really capable of capturing the facial expressions which really convey the emotions many of them are feeling at the moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Gods Among Us #27

Jul 17, 2013

Solid issue despite those few quirks. It's still something that needs to be addressed even if it is something that you might not find as interesting. To put it simply you could just say that it's all in the execution which would have made you look past how those moments fell flat. Still what comes next involving the “super pills” is something to anticipate because it is a great way to shift the direction of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Injustice: Gods Among Us #28

Jul 24, 2013

For context alone this was a great issue that furthers along the progression of the story. This is what I like to see from this book for the fact that it's not always fighting. There's just as much challenging of each others intelligence which is appreciated when those moments such as this show how tactical they can be knowing what each other are capable of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Injustice: Gods Among Us #29

Jul 31, 2013

As the last issue had shown, and as this issue shows, things are progressively picking up in intensity and who knows what the other will do next knowing there just is no trust. This could have easily been where it ends to have them go their own ways, but having Batman at the center of this ensures that there can only be one victor in the end and only one person can be right.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Injustice: Gods Among Us #30

Aug 7, 2013

The one issue I have to point out is that on page 9 of the book, the speech bubbles between the kid and Superman as they were flying was mixed up. It took me a while to figure out if it was just me, but it was definitely the book and it threw me off a bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Gods Among Us #31

Aug 14, 2013

Solid issue, great build up, good execution, and one cliffhanger that should leave you desperate to find out what happens next.Tom Derenick's style captures what makes you feel this way through the expressions of the characters involved. That is what sold every moment in this issue, from Green Arrows frustration, Batman's cold attitude, to Superman's shock at what takes place.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Injustice: Gods Among Us #32

Aug 21, 2013

This here is what you want to see when you continue with the progression of this story. You don't want to see Batman as the sole hero or Superman. You want to see how you could challenge two who would dare not cross each other and this is just one of the ways in which one trying to capitalize can go wrong. It was a great cliffhanger to end on as well seeing as there looks to be collateral damage from the fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Injustice: Gods Among Us #33

Aug 28, 2013

Once again, if you are not reading this book then you are not doing yourself any favors. This isn't another civil war among superheroes. This is them fighting for their ideology and what that stands for at this moment. That is what Tom Taylor has challenged and displayed time and time again. Doesn't pull any punches either given that someone human such as the Green Arrow could suffer such a fate.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Injustice: Gods Among Us #34

Sep 4, 2013

Week after week Tom has been able to deliver such an entertaining story with great character moments. He has proven with this series that he can handle as many characters and still find a way to give them the spotlight. That's something you won't get from many team books out there these days.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Injustice: Gods Among Us #35

Sep 11, 2013

A solid issue and a smart executed encounter between Batman and Superman. It's great to see everyone involved have some part in this story, but these two are the soul of the conflict and when they engage each other you know you will feel mixed emotions as you should.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Injustice: Gods Among Us #36

Sep 18, 2013

This is one of the best issues among some others which were that well written. It's hard to tell where the story goes from here, but one thing is for sure, and that's the real fight has begun. Batman has a way to fight back and given his skills, they will be more than a match for whatever Superman can throw at him.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Injustice: Gods Among Us Annual #1

Nov 16, 2013

Overall, this Annual is in every way as exciting as the main books. Tom Taylor has an excellent grasp on what makes Harley such a fun character that she can hold her own story. Smart, cynical, humorous, and now just as kick ass as those with powers thanks to that pill. This story is a testament to how amazing Taylor is as a writer and this story is a must read if you are a fan of the series. Both for the story and the art which Xermanico does astonishingly. Some things from a distance looked a bit lacking, but everything else in focus looks so real and alive.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Year Three #2

Oct 7, 2014

Injustice: Gods Among Us Year Three #2 is a solid start of what will be a war of superheroes, space cops, and now magic users. This is a world where everyone is affected by this conflict and that is what brings it to life. They can all be fighting, but if you can't show the collateral damage it means nothing. You need to get that emotional weight and investment, one which we have more of through Constantine. A guy who just wants revenge for his daughter's mother.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Injustice: Year Three #3

Oct 14, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #3 started steady and ended picking up the intensity as winning with magic against Superman is only one of their problems. If this was just them vs. Superman it would be a quick story, but getting these little sub-plots here and there are the best way to keep everyone involved and further engage us in what the world of Injustice has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Three #4

Oct 21, 2014

Again nothing too much happens in Injustice: Year Three #4, though it was a necessary set-up for getting Batman back into a proper role of leadership after Superman broke his back.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Injustice: Year Three #5

Oct 28, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #5 is a solid issue that keeps the story on the right track while teasing on things that may or may not be explored down the road. We don't get too much out of this issue, though there is no denying the varying emotions that you receive from both sides of this conflict. It's getting no easier for anyone involved and a lot more is at stake than what is seen on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Injustice: Year Three #6

Nov 4, 2014

This issue of Injustice serves it's purpose in showing us glimpses of future events. Cryptic and vague, yet enough to understand in terms of the big picture. The way that was handled was a clever way of taking advantage of what magic has to offer in this conflict.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Injustice: Year Three #7

Nov 11, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #7 is a solid issue which throws us into that next fight. Constantine has played his hand, so now it is time to see what he is capable of against Superman. We all may like the guy, but the fact of the matter is that Constantine is one of many characters whose fate is up in the air since not seen in the game. Could easily fail right now, yet anything still possible with Tom Taylor writing this.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Injustice: Year Three #8

Nov 18, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #8 is an alright issue just to see how hard it will be for Constantine to stop Superman, especially when he still feels the need to go off like a rogue. Also just another part of the story that enforces the idea that being with Constantine can be bad for your health. That is something which was learned the hard way in this issue. You might actually feel sorry for Ragman's involvement. Either way, hopefully the next part of the story gets things back on track with things that can catch us off guard.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Injustice: Year Three #9

Nov 25, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #9 is an eye opener that it doesn't matter how much good Superman tries to do if the people around him can't be trusted.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Injustice: Year Three #10

Dec 2, 2014

This issue ends in a way that sets us up for two big conflicts that will be inevitable. Even though the rebellion has fallen behind for some time, it is good to see that they are at the very least treating this like a game of chess to remove pieces from play that would hinder their advancement towards victory.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Year Three #11

Dec 9, 2014

Another fairly fast read for an issue, though Injustice: Year Three #11 is a solid one that takes its time to address everything Madame Xanadu foresaw to set up for what comes next. The order is not clear, but it is obvious that what she saw is an eventuality and unavoidable. So we know what to expect, but now it all comes down to the execution.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Injustice: Year Three #12

Dec 16, 2014

Injustice: Year Three #12 is another issue that emphasizes that those predictions from Madame Xanadu were not to be taken lightly. She said the emperor sleeps, and the emperor has slept. Now in the world of Injustice anything is still possible and knowing what we do from the game, Superman obviously won't stay asleep. The next question is how long will he sleep and/or who possibly will be the one to wake him up. Even with that to look forward to, you are left scratching your head as to why a down Superman is left where he fell. It would seem that a serious person would not leave him out in the open given the impossible has been made possible on multiple occasions.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Injustice: Year Three #14

Dec 30, 2014

If there were any way to leave a series that has been running this long, Tom Taylor leaves you full of admiration with the conclusion to Injustice: Year Three #14 and the end of "For The Man Who's Lost Everything". There' no doubting what the new writer will be able to bring to the table, but there is no forgetting this adventure Tom Taylor has taken us on through 3 volumes.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Injustice: Year Three #15

Jan 6, 2015

Injustice: Year Three #15 is a solid start for this new team with Brian Buccellato. There was no doubt that he can handle this and big things are still to come as Madame Xanadu's premonitions continue to come true. Any Injustice fan who might stop reading because Tom Taylor isn't writing anymore will be missing out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Injustice: Year Three #16

Jan 13, 2015

Injustice: Year Three #16 shows a lot of progress in a short amount of time. Much of what needed to be changed for the story to be able to move along without distractions. Now it's Superman Vs. Batman again, and both sides will really show what they have in store when things have gotten very personal as of recently.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Injustice: Year Two #1

Jan 8, 2014

The start of Year Two was nothing short of the same quality we got from before and that is a good sign of things to come. The focus on Oliver Queen and Dinah Lance brought out the more human side to this story seeing who they are beneath the mask and what stakes they had in a fight to show that they don't need someone protecting them. As long as there continues to be that focus on characters before concept, this story will go far. If you are a fan of the game or the first story, you would definitely want to see what comes next and see what direction things are going. It's out on Comixology now, the physical copy releases next week.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Year Two #2

Jan 22, 2014

In the end you enjoy this because for the time given to each character, it is more than enough to bring out the best this book has to offer which is the interactions and relations between the heroes. You can see here clearly that there is much more to expect now that everyone is choosing sides and it helps that Tom is taking the time to unravel the story to its full potential which we will get to. Digital or physical copy this book is worth reading as more than just another book based off of a comic, digging deeper for something enriching which you won't get anywhere else in the DCU.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #3

Feb 12, 2014

Solid issue overall that gives the Lanterns more relevance in this story. It's one thing to have Hal be given more of a role in this story, but now you have Guy and John Stewart who will be joining in soon enough. That is the type of involvement readers like to see from an event that has such an effect on the not just Earth but those that associate with them. This was a good set-up for what will come next which I'd consider to be another one of those points that will have a major impact of the direction the story takes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Injustice: Year Two #4

Feb 26, 2014

Overall a solid issue ofInjustice Gods Among Us " Year Two that served it's purpose in putting everyone where they need to be for what comes next. What keeps you drawn in at this point is seeing all these heroes on edge at the very thought of what the other side is capable of or will do to get ahead of the other. They have already proven how far they are willing to take this and from that one confrontation that took place in this issue, you can tell that something bad is going to be coming their way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Injustice: Year Two #5

Mar 11, 2014

Just when you think Injustice Year Two would slow up, Tom Taylor hits you with the next big thing. This is surely the next arc in a story that shows how things will only get worse before they get better. As much as enemies, betrayal, and lies hurt in this world, chapter 5 proves that the truth can hurt just as much if not worse. There's no questioning the legitimacy of the answer Superman got in this issue, and that is one you'd never be able to scrub from your brain once you have sat there and processed it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Injustice: Year Two #6

Mar 25, 2014

Injustice Year Two #6 is doing exactly what you want from this series. Big things are coming for all who are involved and Tom Taylor knows how to work those angles so that there's never a dull moment. For the number of characters you see in a chapter, in some way they all feel relevant to the bigger picture. That is something I continue to like as you know that everyone has a stake in this fight. Whatever is to come next with the Green Lanterns, all you need to know is that war is coming.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Injustice: Year Two #7

Apr 11, 2014

So while Injustice: Year Two #7 did spend time trying to show that similarity between Sinestro and Superman through a past we knew of, it was necessary for what is to come next. When you look at the situation Superman finds himself in, it doesn't matter if the person is good or bad. If you are able to show some validation towards what Superman wants, he will surely take your word. Any person in his shoes would be looking for someone who would agree with him and convince him that what he's doing is right.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Injustice: Year Two #8

Apr 22, 2014

So does this issue of Injustice confirm that things will indeed get crazy from here? Yes it does and I would love to see just how the Green Lanterns would fair against a highly motivated Superman who would not tolerate their interference. Surely after that little revelation from Ganthet their welcome on Earth is all but gone. Tom Taylor is building up to something big, and while some could complain about how much happens within each issue, I say that enough happens to make you want to pick up the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Injustice: Year Two #9

May 14, 2014

Just the way Injustice Year Two #9 ends, there is no reason why you wouldn't want to pick up the next issue. There is no other way to describe the Injustice series than saying this is batshit crazy. You would never pick up a book like this and never know who would bite the bullet next or how.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Injustice: Year Two #10

May 27, 2014

This issue of Injustice again was fairly short, but it was the right build up to an escalation in the fight which will do nothing but cement the views others have of Superman who are not on his side. As with the fight comes the addressing of a question which had begun this conflict between the Lanterns and Earth. One which would have been a disappointment to ignore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Injustice: Year Two #11

Jun 10, 2014

With the conclusion of Injustice Year Two #11, you can see where Superman is starting to find himself crossing that line between good and bad. The tough decisions he has to make in order to create the peaceful world he's pursuing is what we want to see at times like this. He's hurt, vulnerable and enough so that someone like Sinestro can tell him everything he wants to hear or needs to hear in order to manipulate him. We all know what this is all leading to, but how the characters figure it all out is what makes it real. One of the better qualities of the storytelling seen in Injustice.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Year Two #12

Jun 24, 2014

In the end, Superman having to decide the fate of the Green Lantern Corps was the highlight of Injustice: Year Two #12. Gordon creating his resistance to stand against the protectors is the reason you want to pick up the next issue. A war is brewing, it's inevitable, and it will be big. There pretty much is no reason for anyone to doubt that what's to come won't catch you off guard.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Injustice: Year Two #13

Jul 1, 2014

Injustice Year Two #13 is one of those issues of this series that you don't want to miss or overlook. It doesn't matter that it side tracked from what was going on in the previous issues. This was necessary and funny enough that you realize that a lot of Injustice carries entertainment value. We could want things to keep moving progressively, but where's the fun in that if you can't stop to smell the roses?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Injustice: Year Two #16

Jul 22, 2014

Injustice: Year Two #16 revs up the series for another big conclusion that might end in casualties on both sides. They all know the risk and do so knowing some may not see the sun rise the next day. It makes it that much easier for Tom Taylor to construct a confrontation in which he doesn't have to pull punches. And we don't want to see him pull punches in a world where almost anything goes. It's what separates Injustice from the rest out there that DC offers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Injustice: Year Two #18

Aug 5, 2014

Injustice: Year Two #18 is the beginning of the end and pushing characters to make characters that much more difficult of decisions. It's take no prisoners and pretty much everyone has taken their side. For us we should definitely stick with this and bare in mind not to attach ourselves to any of these characters because anyone of them could be the next to bite the dust, that is if you are reading this and haven't played the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Injustice: Year Two #19

Aug 12, 2014

At the finish of this issue, there is a feeling that you may wish certain fights you could see in-depth. Sure time won't exactly permit that kind of focus, but with so many great fights you've already seen in the Injustice series it's something you can't help but want. With that said, Injustice: Year Two #19 gives us an end that makes you excited for what's to come next. Obviously things are about to get very intense between the Lanterns and it will not end well, that much is assured unless you need to flip back to Mogo annihilating a quarter of the Yellow Lanterns in a single blast of willpower.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #20

Aug 19, 2014

It's very hard to say there was anything wrong with Injustice: Year Two #20. With so much that happens, you take it all in and can't believe this is all really happening. And it can only happen in a world such as Injustice. Whatever comes next might be hard to top this, but that doesn't mean it'll be any less exciting as we reach the climax of Year Two.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Injustice: Year Two #21

Aug 26, 2014

Injustice: Year Two #21 changes the tide of the battle in a way that still manages to catch you off guard. The rebellion is on the offensive and while we know their attack won't be a complete success for those of us who know how things proceed in the games, that doesn't mean what happens in-between is something we don't want to see. Anything can happen and anyone can be lost at any time. Nothing is certain, and surely nothing is promised either other than a story that pulls no punches.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Injustice: Year Two #22

Sep 2, 2014

Overall, Injustice: Year Two #22 was a great way to emphasize where we stand in terms of understanding who are the heroes and who are the villains in this story. It's very hard to argue against what you see and if you had any attachment to that very character, this was probably a shot to the gut(kinda literally too). The next issue should definitely capitalize on this moment to show just how the rest react to the actions of Superman.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Injustice: Year Two #23

Sep 9, 2014

Injustice: Year Two #23 is pretty much the point of no return for some of these characters. Superman is clearly the bad guy now with good intentions going down a dark path which he can't come back from now. At this point you are left wondering how many more will fall before Year Two's end because it's going to take a lot more than what the Resistance has to offer in order to bring the big man down.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Injustice: Year Two #24

Sep 16, 2014

Injustice: Year Two #24 ended on a note that both left you discouraged and hopeful for what the next year has in store. Superman is pretty much the villain now and the rebellion is going to have to re-evaluate their next approach to taking down Superman who is at a whole new level of power. What can challenge him now? Only Year Three has the answers to that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Invincible #125

Nov 7, 2015

Invincible #125 is an excellent second part to “Reboot?”. At this point there is reason enough to want to see where this series goes with the twist that Mark has the chance to correct mistakes of the past. And the question will be indeed if those changes will be for the best because well, butterflies. You don't need to know what happened before and that is the biggest plus keeping it in mind that Mark is updating you on those things as he is fixing them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Invincible #126

Dec 16, 2015

Invincible #126 in every way really does bring Invincible's world comes crashing down around him. April will be a long wait for the next issue, but this will leave a lasting anticipation till then. And hopefully we will also figure out just what this threat is that will doom Mark's world from the decision he makes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Invincible #127

Apr 20, 2016

Invincible #127 is a change with so much potential for the idea of not knowing what will come next. The threats, the salvaging of a damaged relationships, and so much to address that has changed over those years.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Invincible #128

May 18, 2016

Invincible #128 made good progress balancing the drama that comes with Mark's family pulling together, and the intensity that comes with the struggles Allen faces as he tries to tackle a threat that is very well over his head.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Invincible #129

Jun 15, 2016

Invincible #129 starts to get us back on track with the dangers of the Viltrum escalating, and managing to throw us a curveball at the end to another obstacle for Mark's family to overcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Invincible #130

Aug 24, 2016

Invincible #130 gives us some good set-up because the next issue looks to be where we get the pay-off from Mark pushing his luck avoiding the problems that are indirectly his whether he likes it or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Invincible #131

Nov 16, 2016

Invincible #131 gets you excited for how far Mark is pushed to get back into the fight, it makes you scared for the safety of his family considering he has given everything up for them, and the anger that these two of the Viltrum could be so heartless for what they are trying to do.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Invincible #132

Feb 1, 2017

‘The End of All Things' may be the chapter to bring Invincible to a close, but the events of Invincible #132 gets you pumped for what has been unleashed in Mark's family. This universe is at war, but I don't think it knows war yet with how personal this has become. This creative team knows what fans want from a story like this and they are delivering.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Invincible #133

Feb 15, 2017

‘The End of All Things' is going to break some hearts if this part one didn't already. Invincible #133 sets the foundation for where these heroes need to be and still get themselves to if they want to accomplish the impossible. For a book that has run for the past thirteen years, Kirkman and this creative team prove that they are looking to give this a deserved end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Invincible #134

Mar 15, 2017

It' all about the building blocks of this final confrontation as ‘The End of All Things' part two covered a decent amount of ground by the end of Invincible #134. Everyone involved now sees that taking out Thragg is the only option. If you were cringing that anyone could run away from this, Invincible #134 satisfies with a hard reality-check about a little thing called duty.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Invincible #135

Apr 19, 2017

While Invincible #135 is more than anything else set-up, it is well written because big things are coming in the next issue. That is where we will find out what it means to say “This is how we do things now”. One has to suspect we are in for a lot more than we think on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Invincible #136

May 17, 2017

For just the start to the real war, Invincible #136 leaves you wanting so much more. Mark and Eve's plan slowly unravels and every bit of it that comes into question makes you want the bigger picture more than you did when they initially took charge.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Invincible #137

Jun 21, 2017

‘The End of All Things' part five for the most part is set-up, but great nonetheless as all the pieces are put into play for what looks to be all or nothing against Thragg. I don't know what else Mark and Eve have up their sleeve, but Invincible #137 impresses you enough with how their actions break them from the mold. When you are trying to separate a universe like Invincible from others out there, this is how you make that statement.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Invincible #138

Jul 19, 2017

Wow, hard to believe that something like this could happen and we are only on part six of 'The End of All Things'. Invincible #138 was a punch right to the gut for anyone who thought this fight against Thragg wouldn't come without casualties that aren't side characters. Knowing Robert Kirkman stories, he isn't afraid to pull that trigger. And this was one of those times where he didn't even blink in doing so.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Invincible #139

Aug 16, 2017

‘The end of All Things' part seven was exciting from start to finish as a battle comes to an end, as throws us into the deciding confrontation for this war. You couldn't have asked for a better transition from the last issue than what we got from Invincible #139. Characters showed their true colors, some captured your heart through a sense of self-sacrifice, and others simply remind you of what it takes to be a hero when it counts.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Invincible #140

Sep 20, 2017

Invincible #140 gave us a powerful confrontation brought to an end, with beautiful dialogue to match. It's hard to imagine that there is four issues left of the series after a fight like this. They could probably have ended it there and I might have felt satisfied. Either way, now there is four issues to see what will come of this universe when such a catastrophic war has been brought to a decisive finish. I mean the description of the next issue tells us that we shouldn't start celebrating just yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Invincible #141

Oct 18, 2017

‘The End of All Things,' part nine got the blood pumping when you were looking for the next bad thing. Surprisingly they grabbed us through a character moment that couldn't have been done any other way than through a passing of the torch. Invincible #141 beautifully wrapped up one part and begins to throw us into what looks like the last stretch of this final arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Invincible #142

Nov 15, 2017

Invincible #142 was worth the all caps in description for the issue. 'Robot War' was intense and gave us action without the usual level of brutality involved. They wanted to address something more idealistic that these characters are fighting for and they did so perfectly. Tying up two big loose ends was a big accomplishment, and the second one gets you right in the feels.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Invincible #143

Dec 20, 2017

With the conclusion to Invincible #143, we do sadly have one more issue after this until the end. It's hard to say how this will end, which is no new feeling, but you do hope that this is leading to an end that won't leave you heartbroken. For as bright as the future looks, this is a universe where tragedy waits right around the corner.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Invincible #144

Feb 14, 2018

After seeing a series like Invincible through to the end, that was touching. Kirkman and this team really changed what you can do with a superhero universe. And they proved that they can pull off an impressively engaging finale like this without the reliance on action. Not many superhero stories could you get this kind of depth from knowing that there was no chance of a reset or relaunch. I do hope that I speak for many when I say that I can't wait for the movie now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Invincible Iron Man (2015) #10

Jun 3, 2016

Invincible Iron Man #10 sets the stakes for everybody who is involved in this conflict or about to be. It is a lot going on in a short amount of time, yet still holds the excitement of the sacrifice and lengths these characters will go for what they have to do.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Invincible Iron Man (2015) #11

Jul 7, 2016

The only thing that could have kept this from being perfect is just the thought that whatever happened here will have to be put on hold for Civil War II. Hard to say that with the conclusion of Invincible Iron Man #11 we will continue with the self-contained story this has been since issue #1, but if it will there will be no reason for Invincible Iron Man not to be on your pull-list till the relaunch.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Invincible Iron Man (2015) #12

Aug 4, 2016

Invincible Iron Man #12 is a solid issue for what we get out of the everyday life of Tony Stark. There definitely needs to be attention towards elements of Civil War II that will turn away readers, but also attention towards things that should affect the story from what we do know. Particularly the effect of losing Rhodey. The small outburst we got didn't entirely feel like enough.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Invincible Iron Man (2016) #1

Nov 9, 2016

Invincible Iron Man #1 is not the Marvel book you should sleep on for the potential to follow someone new. You will pick this up for the same reason you would Ms. Marvel or Moon Girl and Devil Dinosaur. There must always be a suit out there when now we neither have Tony or Rhodey.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Invincible Iron Man (2016) #2

Dec 21, 2016

Invincible Iron Man #2 begins to build a foundation for what's to come. A steady progression that is complimented by engaging moments that allow us to get to know Riri better. If you didn't know about her before, you're getting to know just as much as anyone else who is coming to understand what makes her tick.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Invincible Iron Man (2016) #3

Jan 19, 2017

Riri does face her first big Marvel villain, though that is yet to actually happen till the next issue. Regardless, Invincible Iron Man #3 made some big moves. This is a bold new direction for everyone who has ever had anything to do with Tony. His impact is clear as day, especially for the things he can make Riri confront just by being himself(as an AI of course).

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Invincible Iron Man (2016) #4

Feb 16, 2017

Invincible Iron Man #4 is another exciting issue that once again teaches Riri that what she has gotten herself into is no walk in the park. Being Tony Stark is not easy, so the same can't be said for Riri when she is practically picking up from where he left off. Most might try to create new villains and what not on the spot, though I will give Bendis credit that this is a villain he thought ahead of time to introduce and reintroduce when the time was right.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Iron Man (2012) #9

May 3, 2013

One thing to point out is that most readers would go into this book expecting the story of Tony's “secret origins”, yet this all instead lead up to it starting at the very end. Though it was an interesting twist to see that 451 actually knew Tony's father and has some connection to him through a plan that took a long time to execute.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Iron Man (2012) #10

May 20, 2013

The one thing that makes you wonder though is what the process actually was to make sure he was born. And did this process have some influence on his intelligence? Either way that doesn't affect the impact of this story as it was delivered cleverly enough to be memorable. When looking back at Tony's origins, this is a story that can be referenced to and even implemented in many stories to come. This may even influence some great stories in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Man (2012) #12

Jul 4, 2013

Overall it is one of the most thought out plots I've seen in a while and everything just makes sense the way each occurrence plays out. We are now learning things about Tony that you'd normally just ignore for the fact that he's a genius, yet now there seems to be a reason for everything that has either happened in his life or that makes him who he is today. If you fell off of the Iron Man books during the God Killer storyline, I'd highly recommend you not give up on the books so early because you are missing a story worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Iron Man (2012) #14

Aug 8, 2013

Once again I have to point out how gorgeous the art looks. Next to a fun story, the art is so well done that I find myself spending a good amount of time . Greg Land really knows how to make the expressions apparent. Whether happy, angry, shocked, he captures it marvelously and if I may say so myself it looks “cheeky”. Very unique style accompanied by the smooth colors.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Iron Man (2012) #15

Sep 5, 2013

Solid issue which leads to what may be the end of this story arc. It has been a great run so far and something which you never would have expected to be produced from Tony's past. Again this is that one tale of Iron Man that you have to give a chance because it shows what happens when you take a risk and explore some unknown areas of a character. How Tony makes it out of this alive is why you will want to anticipate the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Iron Man (2012) #16

Oct 3, 2013

Overall, The Secret Origins of Tony Stark is a great story. Had potential, was a fun adventure, and showed us a side of Tony which hasn't been seen in a long while.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Iron Man (2012) #17

Oct 24, 2013

If anything, this story will more than likely take us back to a Tony Stark that we are more familiar with. You are left with just as many questions as answers, and that is the best way to end a story like this. Didn't need to go big, just needed to be something that would make us excited to pick up another Iron Man book. So much emotion poured into this and ended on a very heartfelt note, you couldn't ask for anything more than that besides feeling shocked by the sudden revelation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Iron Man (2012) #18

Nov 7, 2013

This was an excellent start of a new chapter in the lives of Tony and Arno Stark. Seeing that there is a legitimate focus for the world and seeing a glimpse of what could possibly be the future of Earth if they succeed without the failure the simulation predicted. If you are not following this story then this is a good time to see something new from Tony.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Man (2012) #25

May 14, 2014

Iron Man #25 was entertaining from start to finish. Tony may seem one-tracked in his thought process, but you cannot blame him when facing such inhumane acts for the sake of power. Tony is just not that person and the things he did with that Iron Man suit proves that he's less than tolerant of entertaining the idea that this can be seen as sport.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Patriot #1

Mar 26, 2014

I think this is an excellent start for the Iron Patriot. He is now a public figure whether no matter what anyone says and he's made a statement about what his job and country means to him. That balance between politics, family, and heroics is something you can't help but love when they are all important parts of Rhodes' life right now which influence his actions. This is a book I would continue to follow just because of the effort put into giving a whole new level of relevance to a hero who has deserved that recognition for a long time now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Iron Patriot #2

Apr 24, 2014

Iron Patriot #2 shows that Ales Kot means business when he wants to put into question what is at stake for Rhodey in this new position of authority. The country is at stake, his family is at stake, his life is at stake, everything important to him is on the line right now. His family continues to play a pivotal role in this book and I hope that continues as this story progresses because you never want to lose focus on the people who shape the kind of person Rhodey is under the suit and as Iron Patriot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Iron Patriot #3

May 29, 2014

Als Kot is taking some big risks with Iron Patriot #3 and it is really for the best. He's bringing out something new that you could only see from Rhodey as he takes on this new position of power. The story may not be everyone's cup of tea, yet at the end of the day there is no disagreement that this stays true to everything you like about Rhodey whether he's War Machine or Iron Patriot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Iron Patriot #4

Jun 19, 2014

Iron Patriot #4 is a fairly fast read, and not too much happens, but nonetheless this is still a must read if you're a fan of Rhodey. No matter how long this title lasts, this is a defining moment for Rhodey and his family. They all have the best of intention with their actions, it's just the world they live in that makes it hard for them to be the good-hearted people we have known them to be, no matter how short.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Iron Patriot #5

Jul 31, 2014

Iron Patriot #5 is the end of something defining for the Rhodes family and the start of a new future for them, what's left of their family to put back together. It's sad to see that they didn't come out unscathed in this conflict, but the reality is that unless the writer is that reliant on a happy ending, you will get this kind of result without holding your hand. Who knows, maybe this is what could lead to us seeing a War Machine suit in one of the covers for Avengers “Time Runs Out“.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ironheart #1

Nov 28, 2018

So, was Ironheart #1 worth the wait? Without a doubt! Ironheart #1 took some bold steps towards Riri Williams starting to write her own story. This is a big time for Riri in terms of stepping out of her OWN shadow, and being able to see a hopeful future that doesn't reflect everything she taught herself to be pessimistic towards. By the end of this series, I want to see the pessimistic young hero become optimistic

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ironheart #2

Jan 16, 2019

Ironheart #2 was an excellent transition from the debut issue. So far this book is giving us exactly what we need from a developing young hero. This story has direction, heart (no pun intended), and it has a genuine call to action. To keep up with this quality work, this creative team just needs to continue striking that balance between character development, story progression, and everything else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ironheart #3

Feb 13, 2019

Ironheart #3 was both action-packed and personal in the best of ways. It helps that through this chapter we are also able to understand the point in time that this series is taking place for Riri. She is in a place where she has so much to prove, and little room to look for help from anyone but herself and present company.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ironheart #6

May 15, 2019

Ironheart #6 was an excellent one-shot issue that I do admit we should be able to see more of from superhero books. We got a definite start to a story, and a finish. Riri continued to work on herself, and in the process Miles was also able to fix something about himself that we had the opportunity to follow here instead of having to look out for the next Champions or Spider-Man.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ironheart #7

Jun 13, 2019

Ironheart #7 is the kind of fun you want more of from this series. We want to see Riri become the best person she can, we want to see her overcome all of her traumas, but you don't get to that point without good friends by your side and a little humor along the way to brighten your day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ironheart #8

Jul 10, 2019

This issue was a fast read, but Ironheart #8 was satisfying for the answers that Riri got about what the Ten Rings might be after, and insight into the next steps she needs to take in order to continue improving herself. Right now I think it is important to acknowledge what these young hero books are doing right in contrast to the older heroes. They are finding their way to become proper heroes in their own right, but more than that, they are striving towards being the best person they can be. Who you are in costume is only as important as you are behind the mask. Or helmet in Riri's case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ironheart #9

Aug 14, 2019

Riri in Wakanda has been one of the most unique experiences up to this point. This is what you get when you pair a girl from Chicago with a princess from a foreign nation. Ironheart #9 brought two worlds together, and it was fun for the humor in what two scientists like Riri and Shuri have to do in order to see that they are cut from the same cloth. I look forward to what cane be done when both from the start are on the same page!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ironheart #10

Sep 12, 2019

Ironheart and her new squad had quite the adventure this week. Excellent character development, satisfying action scenes, and one heck of a twist by the end of Ironheart #10. To even say that Riri was literally in for a surprise when she meets her match was quite the understatement. I would have initially assumed that Wakanda was just going to be another stop, but I'm glad that right now it has become something much more. This is the kind of environment where a genius like Riri thrives, even if she hasn't had too much time to learn everything she can from this place.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
IvX #1

Dec 15, 2016

Inhumans Vs. X-Men is and will be a tough sell to the very end, but they are at least putting the effort into making this worth our time knowing that this is it for the confusion that has been ‘How can we make the mutants go extinct this time?'.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
IvX #2

Jan 11, 2017

Inhumans Vs. X-Men #2 was a fast read, but it was quick to the punch. Some may want a bit more out of it, though it seems that will come once things do wind down. If they do that is.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
IvX #3

Jan 25, 2017

The events of this issue did come up lackluster for the most part, though Inhumans Vs. X-Men #3 did at least try to do more. When your story involves two large opposing forces clashing you're due for a struggle between action and story. This is where they have to overcome that hump because the quality did suffer from it this time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
IvX #4

Feb 8, 2017

Inhumans Vs. X-Men #4 was not without problems till the very end of the issue. They can't afford these kinds of problems with only two issues left in the crossover event. Things must be direct and to the point. Otherwise this would have been a wasted opportunity for Marvel to show that they are truly ready to get it together about the overall mutant situation.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
IvX #5

Feb 22, 2017

Inhumans Vs. X-Men #5 definitely could have been better as there seemed to be no true point to taking out the Inhumans when there was no sure-fire way to keep them where they were. It all came off as some way to set them up for the right fights. They were hit and miss though hopefully they make all of this worth it with Inhumans Vs. X-Men #6 next month wrapping up the crossover and showing us what plans Marvel really has for the mutant's future in this universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
IvX #6

Mar 8, 2017

Inhumans Vs. X-Men #6 couldn't have come sooner enough. This was a scenario and story that went on much longer than it should have ever. And that blame goes to none other than Marvel itself losing direction for a lot of big heroes such as the X-Men as of late. Time will tell with the new X-Men books to come if they can get it together, though there is always room for skepticism give what came before Inhumans Vs. X-Men, what came during Inhumans Vs. X-Men, and what comes after.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Jean Grey #11

Jan 31, 2018

Couldn't have asked for a better end to Jean Grey #11, and the solo series as a whole. This was one of those times where an alternate end was more than welcomed for someone who has grown on us so much as Young Jean. There was something I admired about her growth since Black Vortex, and she has been consistent with defying the odds ever since. Whatever the future holds for Jean Grey in the Marvel Universe, its good to have her around in a form that is self-aware of what makes her stronger than her past failings.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Josie and the Pussycats #5

Mar 8, 2017

For an end to the first story arc, Josie and The Pussycats #5 was impressive for all the personal growth and development that they needed to address if they wanted to move further with their careers. And that twist at the end? The next arc can't come sooner to figure out exactly what this new obstacle has in store for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Josie and the Pussycats #6

Apr 19, 2017

There were some mixed feelings here, but after letting everything sink in I believe that this would have done so much better if it were placed differently than at the start of a new arc. You could argue that is also the best place to get these kind of stories out of the way, but Josie and The Pussycats #5 as the conclusion to the first arc ended with the cliffhanger that got us here. That aside, a solid issue that carries most of the appeal that keeps you looking forward to Josie and The Pussycats each month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Josie and the Pussycats #7

May 31, 2017

They really did put the scare into us that Josie and The Pussycats #7 could spell the end for the band. What this creative team did here was impressive work that reminds you why this is a must read from Archie Comics. Josie and The Pussycats is a story of substance and manages to find different ways to make you smile.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Juggernaut (2020) #1

Sep 23, 2020

They didn't lie, this was a new bold new direction for the Juggernaut. So far I am sold for a story which takes all the right steps to redefine the Juggernaut in a world which tends to see him as a force for destruction.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Jughead: The Hunger vs. Vampironica #2

Jun 5, 2019

It was hard to say if this was a crossover worth investing in after the events of the first issue, but Jughead: The Hunger vs. Vampironica #2 does a better job of creating investment in what this story has to offer. There's still some questions that need to be answered about the twist to Vampironica's story. However, they made up for this for now by taking advantage of the fleshed out world of Jughead: The Hunger and it's engaging cast of characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Jughead: The Hunger vs. Vampironica #3

Jul 17, 2019

Jughead: The Hunger vs. Vampironica #3 was exactly what you come to expect for the second or third chapter of a crossover story. As I said above, they encounter each other, they have a problem with each other, and then they find common ground through the main villain. We haven't gotten to that last part yet, so the next step is this surprise appearance at the end adding the context we have anticipated getting full clarity into this plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice Inc. #1

Aug 20, 2014

Justice Inc. #1 does take a bit of time to pick up the pace, though in the end you are still left with that anticipation for what happens when the intensity picks up. Despite everything in-between, the main attraction to Justice Inc. is that this is a crossover between The Shadow, Doc Savage and The Avenger. Hopefully that does not disappoint, though for now we can say that this story has laid the necessary foundation for what's to come in the next five issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2011) #23

Aug 29, 2013

Sometimes the best way to conclude and event like this is with a cliffhanger, and boy was this one heck of a cliffhanger. If you were questioning picking this up because you were let down by past events, this will not disappoint. Sure some might want to see more of an actual “war”, but as I said before it really isn't needed to be emphasized to make a great event. With their first event over and done, the New 52 can now move into a new phase which should open doors for more refreshing stories.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2016) #14

Feb 2, 2017

One of the best issues so far of the series if you ask me. Justice League #14 got into so many big character moments and revelations that rock the very foundation of this team to its core. Not to mention at the worst possible time for them facing a threat that makes them seem well in over their heads.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Justice League (2016) #15

Feb 15, 2017

Literal race against time is being taken very seriously with this start to Timeless. Justice League #15 set one heck of a foundation to what is sure to send a few heads spinning if they haven't already. This feels ambitious and I'm glad they are taking some risks to give us something we haven't seen before. They just have to try not to lose us at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Justice League (2016) #16

Mar 1, 2017

Justice League #16 got a little hit and miss there, but by the end of the issue prove that this is a risky story that they put thought into to challenge these powerful heroes. Time may be the focus of the story and plot, but it also must be taken into account in the way this story arc is mapped out for the best result. Rushing is not an option which means from here we need to get the most out of what they have set up throughout time/history.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League (2016) #17

Mar 15, 2017

Nothing is too certain with the conclusion of ‘Timeless' part three, but we know that like most stories this is the Justice League's time to rise to the occasion. Justice League #17 gave us some answers that we needed to move forward, though there are still plenty of questions to address for things to come full circle. They just need to keep up with the current pacing without distraction in order for us to be able to see this through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Justice League (2016) #18

Apr 5, 2017

Things aren't perfect, but Timeless is getting us somewhere good. Justice League #18 played the smart game in focusing on where this story prospered the most. Other parts did suffer for this, but that is what happens when you stretch things a bit too far. Its understood why, but that's just how it is when working with a team book. You want to justify these heroes coming together, though at the same time you want all of them to be playing a big part.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Justice League (2016) #19

Apr 19, 2017

Now I don't know what this thing is coming for Earth, but part of me want to think I do. If it is, then maybe we are getting somewhere big with Justice League compared to other Rebirth books on shelves. Though until then Justice League #19 didn't leave us with the same punch as they could have to wrap up Timeless.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Justice League (2016) #21

May 17, 2017

Clearly there is a message to send through these past two story arcs, but there could have been better ways to go about this. Justice League #21 did enough at the end to salvage this, but you can't overlook that a lot of quality has been sacrificed for this enemy approaching that we knew as little about as we did when ‘Timeless' began.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Justice League (2016) #22

Jun 7, 2017

Criticisms aside for the idea of the story told, there was quality to it that more than made up for it. Justice League #22 I'd hope is a start for this book to once again hit us with some superhero values that are easily missed when the story/plot gets too big for its characters to grow.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Justice League (2018) #1

Jun 6, 2018

Justice League #1 I wish I could say I looked forward to more of. This was the first time where I felt turned off by the first issue because it wanted to be much more than it needed to be. I could probably see myself picking this up again with the next story arc, but this was all too much.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Justice League (2018) #8

Sep 19, 2018

I was very impressed by the events of Justice League #8. I can't say that I was very invested in the series at the start, but reaching this point in the plot I have to say that this is exciting. Some people will root for the heroes, but I found myself oddly captivated by the ambition of the villains. They are playing a dangerous game, and for better or worse you want to see what happens when their plans are followed through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League (2018) #9

Oct 3, 2018

Justice League #9 was another subtle issue that I enjoyed purely for the brilliant character exploration that this cast of heroes went through. These moments matter just as much as the punching and kicking. Who are these heroes when they aren't springing into action? Even a book like Justice League deserves a quality answer to that question.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League (2018) #10

Oct 17, 2018

Justice League #10 gives us very little room to breathe as the flood gates were quite literally blown open. While I did have questions about what got us to this point at the start of the issue, there was no overlooking the thrill in these heroes once again facing a threat that will take some extraordinary means to overcome.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League (2018) #11

Nov 7, 2018

Justice League #11 left us bracing for the worst when these heroes are seeing exactly what can come of the world when they aren't handling their problems with haste. That is how you end up with dead gods, a flooded world, and losses at every turn because your enemy just so happens to have things a bit more figured out than you. At the end of the day it is exciting to know that heroes of this caliber can still face dangers that can put their backs against the wall.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2018) #13

Dec 5, 2018

If anyone thought it was too risky to give you a villain's story within a heroes story? Justice League #13 says otherwise to that notion. I'm calling it now that this is probably the best issue that we have gotten out of this book so far. It is genius in the way that two of the very best villains could test their metal against one another. You knew how it was going to end for The Joker, but that didn't stop every obstacle and line of wit from him to rock you to the core.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League (2018) #14

Dec 19, 2018

Justice League #14 is an issue worth looking forward to when we are getting back to the mystery of the Totality. Side stories and Drowned Earth were cool, but this is where our investment in this book truly lies. So far, “Hawkworld” has flipped everything you thought you knew about the Hawkman/Hawkgirl history right on its head. In a good way of course. Nothing ventured, nothing gained for these heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League (2018) #15

Jan 9, 2019

overall, Justice League #15 takes us to a point where this story picks up momentum and a true sense of urgency. We all knew that there was much more to this planet than what we were seeing on the surface, and the reveal did not disappoint. Neither has the pacing which hasn't left us in too much suspense.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #17

Feb 6, 2019

Justice League #17 honestly impressed me. It was hard not feeling worry that this would have felt like a filler issue in contrast to the other issues that were self-contained. Once again I was reminded that this is a creative team to have faith in for their ability to emphasize the importance of a story with depth. Characters matter, and that is the best takeaway from a team book as ambitious as this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Justice League (2018) #18

Feb 20, 2019

Justice League #18 gives us another successful issue for the Legion of Doom story arc. Whoever told you you can't focus on the villains like this and create a compelling story is surely mistaken.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #22

Apr 17, 2019

It is not truly till the end of Justice League #22 that the final form of Perpetua takes her shape, but that was only as important as the opportunity to finally understand the origin of the multiverse. Credit where it is due because I had my doubts about the way this story would turn out. As I said above, it's easy to go overboard with these stories. You want to go big, and sometimes that comes at the price of losing readers in the process. For everyone's sake that was not the turnout.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #24

May 15, 2019

Overall, Justice League #24 was a rollercoaster of emotions from choices and decisions that this team was forced to make in unique situations. What you have to love about this book right now is that this creative team went big without going overboard. Here we are still captivated by everything genuine about these heroes, and they have accomplished this without the need to make this too intricate or in need of more explanation than necessary.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Justice League (2018) #25

Jun 5, 2019

Justice League #25 is so far the best issue to some out of this run so far. If you aren't reading Justice League? Shame on you. This is a team book at it's finest. This issue was the full package between genuine character moments, standout action sequences, plot progression, and exciting artwork. Let's not forget the insane way that they have suddenly made the end of the multiverse seem like it's not the worst possible end when the world has been taken by the villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #26

Jun 19, 2019

It's a brave new world for the omniverse as a whole. This fight for the future of everything is now beyond just the fight of the Justice League. Every person who has a stake in this made an exciting appearance, and I do hope there is more to encounter as the plot thickens. Justice League #26 served its purpose well in addressing what comes next and what these heroes have to do to prepare themselves for the worst to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #27

Jul 3, 2019

This issue was a bit of a fast read in contrast to the issues before, but you can't always expect something big to unfold. Right now Justice League is in that phase where once more they are setting up to something big. That big thing is the rise of Perpetua. At this stage you expect that the plot progresses with all the pieces being moved to the right place for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #28

Jul 17, 2019

Justice-Doom War is coming, and after the events of Justice League #28? You would be crazy to not be all in for what comes next! Nothing right now is what you prepared for at this stage in the story, and that is what keeps you coming back for more. This isn't that story where the heroes overcome obstacle after the next with little challenge. These are our gods among men struggling to beat back a team that you wouldn't have originally blinked twice at.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2018) #29

Aug 7, 2019

Justice League #29 may have been all about Jarro, but it was also one of the most engaging issues for diving into the fortitude a hero must achieve when faced with a crisis. These are the moments that genuinely define a hero, and Jarro has found his as an entity that was once called a conqueror.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #30

Aug 28, 2019

As the start to the Justice League/Doom War, I would say that they did more than enough to kickstart what has been issues in the making. There was a good introduction into what has happened up to this point, and they quickly set the tone for what's to come through a more genuine understanding of the stakes. Then they pulled no punches showing once more that these heroes will be facing an uphill battle to turn things around in their favor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #31

Sep 4, 2019

Through part two of the Justice League/Doom War, we got a better understanding of the kind of battle which has been set up by the Legion. They know exactly what they're doing, which is more than you can say for the heroes. Justice League #32 should be one to anticipate when the Legion still has no intention of allowing the League to get themselves together to easily.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #32

Sep 18, 2019

Part three turned out to be a very exciting chapter for The Justice Doom War. Justice League #32 gave us the best of both worlds, and that in itself impresses me because there is a lot going on at the same time right now. This is usually the part where a creative team might slip up while pulling us in too many directions, but this team knows what they are doing. Every piece of the story is engaging, and has a clear direction for where they will all converge as the final battle approaches.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #33

Oct 2, 2019

Overall, ‘The Justice Doom War' part four continues to raise the stakes in new and exciting ways. Just when you thought maybe you've seen everything that might knock you at the edge of your seat, they find new ways to show us that we haven't seen anything yet. Justice League #33 gives us a lot more to look forward to when once more it should be said that even turning the tides of this war is easier said than done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #34

Oct 16, 2019

It's not a war without the big bad on the field and fully empowered. Everything having to do with the mission in the past was engaging, the mission in the future was a thrill, but what went on in the present was unfortunately a letdown. They could have chosen a better path which actually took us by surprise, but they didn't. Hopefully the next phase of ‘The Justice Doom War' helps to overlook that part.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #35

Nov 6, 2019

All in all, Justice League #35 is one big celebration of doom, and the villains are preparing to do their victory lap across the multiverse. Now it will matter more than anything to see how these heroes find a way to turn things around. This isn't your average defeat. So one hopes this creative team really thought through where these heroes actually have room to rise up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #36

Nov 20, 2019

I wouldn't call this the most eventful issue of Justice League, but there was certainly a lot to take from it. There was a big power shift among the villains, the heroes stepping out of their void of perpetual mistakes, and a different kind of battle engaged when both sides come to a full clash.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #37

Dec 4, 2019

This one was definitely one of my favorite issues of the series so far. Justice League #37 was everything you could have hoped for from these heroes being able to slip back into their better qualities. As the last stretch of this story, it was only a matter of time before the Justice League was able to begin tipping the odds in their favor, but I'm glad that it was met with strong pacing and momentum jumping into it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2018) #38

Dec 18, 2019

We all awaited for this moment when the Justice League would rise higher than they ever did before in this event, and they did not disappoint when the moment came. It was nerve-wracking, it was brutal, and it was even heartbreaking. It is at times like this when you really want your patience and investment to be rewarded, and the events of Justice League #38 rewarded us well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2018) #39

Jan 29, 2020

It's never truly a war to remember if you can see how it ends. Justice League #39 found an excellent way to keep us all on our toes, because at the end of the day, where is the fun if everything is that straightforward? I found myself applauding this story because if you asked me how I felt about investing in an event book for a whole year? I would have laughed while moving on to the next book. For me, they have done great work to make this something worthwhile from start to finish.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #45

May 28, 2020

By the end of Justice League #45, I was glad that I didn't feel too disappointed by the change in direction that this book took. The new story does give you a reason to keep looking forward to more. Great action, character moments, and visual appeal.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #46

Jun 10, 2020

All in all, Justice League #46 delivered in giving us an understanding of just how bad things can get in a world where The Spectre is without his host. That is a world that you want to save from itself before there is nothing left to save.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League (2018) #47

Jun 24, 2020

With the conclusion of Justice League #47 comes the conclusion of this story arc, and this was one heck of a story to tell. If you ever wondered what would happen if the Judgement of God was neglected? Now you know, and thus it is hard to argue that there is a more important figure on Earth than The Spectre, and the man who has to be this force of nature's host.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) #49

Jul 15, 2020

How can the League save this world without interfering? Justice League #49 provided an excellent answer to that. I had my misgivings about the story unfolding here, but as with most things, you simply have to be patient and look towards what's beneath the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League (2018) #59

Mar 17, 2021

Getting to the end of Justice League #59, I felt like this book was once more worth having on your pull-list. This new creative team gave us an issue that was a breath of fresh air.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Justice League (2018) Annual #1

Jan 30, 2019

Talk about a multiversal meltdown, am I right? Justice League Annual #1 was all the hype for everything we got out of this moment that was a long time coming. For this run of Justice League, this might actually be the strongest issue of the series currently. This was that time for all sides of this war to play their hands, and not one person failed to stand out for what they had to give to their respective efforts. There was action, there was high stakes, and there was so much engaging when it came to these destinies being fulfilled.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League (2018) Annual #2

Sep 30, 2020

So, is Justice League Annual #2 worth the read? It surely is! This turned out to be so much more than what it seems on the surface, and didn't forget that this was a superhero story either. At the end of the day it was action-packed, but also wholesome storytelling.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League Dark #19

Apr 25, 2013

It was interesting to see how Colonel Trevor tried to get Deadman to spy on the JLA Dark for him, and even telling Deadman that he could give him something he desires, he is still hesitant knowing what Constantine is capable of.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Justice League Dark #21

Jun 27, 2013

This story arc, with its conclusion has shown just why they are the mystic Justice League. Flash's appearance in this story really sold how they work as a team because like he said they work together so well that you actually feel as though you are a part of a team. That's something that really stands out and you hope that with the next stories leading into the Trinity Wars will show this again. As usual the art style has been the most spectacular part of this book. Many vibrant colors, solid, detailed and just about everything really pops out. The effects look real and the fights look that much more appealing to the eyes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Justice League Dark #22

Jul 25, 2013

As the Justice League's introduction to this conflict you really see how important magic is and what kind of mysteries it creates. Nothing is as it seems and that is what makes this exciting. You never know what to expect when they are involved and while we know the end result it's nice to know we can expect something to still surprise us in between.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Justice League Dark #23

Aug 22, 2013

Aside from this, a good issue as the event comes to what I believe to be the climax as the villains are to make their move. Proves that DC can handle an event without overreaching. It's a condensed storyline and it's progression is swift enough that you don't see anything that is too unnecessary.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Justice League Dark #24

Oct 24, 2013

It was a solid issue with a focus on Constantine, though I wish there were a bit more to it overall. Visually stunning, and gave that characterization if his character that he deserved for a while, but beyond that I want to see more of a connection to what he has to do in order to fight back against the Crime Syndicate for his team. Maybe that is what he and the Healer are working towards, but even then it seems pretty vague as to what their intent is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League Dark (2018) #1

Jul 25, 2018

Justice League Dark #1 brings us back to the idea that “Magic problems require magic solutions.” This team may have come together reluctantly, but that is what you come to expect from characters who are not all that used to the idea of big super-heroics or that they can save the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Justice League Dark (2018) #2

Aug 22, 2018

There's one thing I have missed very much about Justice League Dark as a series, and that has been feeling a true sense of terror from the story. These past two issues embrace the dark corner of the universe that this takes place in, and that is a refreshing change of pace from the usual.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Justice League Dark (2018) #3

Sep 26, 2018

Justice League Dark #3 was the complete package of what you get when you mix magic with the stuff of nightmares. Magic in essence is bending reality to your will, and there was no better villain to take advantage of that meaning than the Upside-Down Man. He did not fail to make his presence known, and I hope this isn't the last we see of him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Justice League Dark (2018) #4

Oct 17, 2018

Justice League Dark #4 really gave us something to fear about the horrors that Hecate has in store for this world. It was one thing to know that she wanted to burn everything to remake the world for herself, but it was another thing entirely to grasp what it means for her to attack at the heart of everything magic. The panic, the loss, the chaos, all these things were the perfect recipe for a memorable third chapter to the Witching Hour.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #5

Nov 21, 2018

Justice League Dark #5 proves to us that the potential in storytelling and plot for this book is practically endless. I was captivated by the balance put into the character moments, the action, and every scene that took advantage of the wonders we needed to take from the world of magic. There is nothing else like this book out there right now and that is something to appreciate if you are looking for a full embrace.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Justice League Dark (2018) #6

Dec 12, 2018

Justice League Dark #6 was indeed bananas for the lengths that the JLD went in order to save Bobo from his fate, and for the urgency that had now kicked into overdrive after the confrontation between Doctor Fate and the Phantom Stranger. If it wasn't feeling like a war for the fate of magic in the issue before, the impression is set now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Justice League Dark (2018) #7

Jan 16, 2019

Justice League Dark #7 is yet another issue which cements JLD as one of the go-to books for a rush of horror from DC. This creative team taps into everything nightmarish about the Otherkind and lets it loose within these pages. If you thought the Upside-Down Man was the scariest sight to come across, then you were gravely mistaken. Or maybe you were treated to something wonderful if horror is your cup of tea?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #8

Feb 13, 2019

It may not have been till the very end of the issue that we actually see these Lords of Order, but this week's issue of Justice League Dark served as an exciting build-up to that introduction. With every passing scene you could feel this story revving up towards a big revelation, and the execution was successful because of everything that has made this situation more dire than it could ever be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #10

Apr 24, 2019

Justice League Dark #10 flips everything you thought you were able to piece together about this story right out the window. There was no better time to begin peeling back the layers of mystery, because once you do? All that is left is what you are willing to do to get the job done. Most of these characters aren't truly aware of the actual stakes. So it should be thrilling to see what happens when that is the case.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #11

May 22, 2019

Justice League Dark #11 was nightmare fuel, and I do think a little bit of that is just what we needed in the stage we are in the story. The stakes are real, the dangers are real, and we should be able to believe that with every twist or loss.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Justice League Dark (2018) #12

Jun 26, 2019

The events of Justice League Dark #12 made everything you experienced in this story worth the adventure. The story is far from over, and yet it has stirred such a thrill with every twist and turn that has challenged what it means to walk in both the normal world, and the world of magic. I felt as captivated with this story as I did with that of Justice League because we are swiftly reminded of what it means to stand for your ideals. When you don't, you end up like Nabu who sacrificed everything he stood for out of fear.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League Dark (2018) #13

Jul 24, 2019

Justice League Dark #13 served as more of an informative issue following the battle of chaos versus order. This may have been a slower issue, but not one scene was wasted setting this story up for what comes next between the fight for the fate of magic, and what doom now has to offer the world of magic.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #14

Aug 28, 2019

For anyone out there who may have also had reservations about the Dark Gifts influence in this story, I would say that the events of Justice League Dark #14 more than puts you at ease. Once more they give us something big to look forward to. Bigger than the Witching Hour, and bigger than the clash with the Lords of Order.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #15

Sep 25, 2019

Sometimes it's all a matter of waiting for things to get worse. The end of everything is definitely bad, but the journey to that point can always end up a terror. Justice League Dark #15 put everyone right where they needed to be for things to kick off, and Circe's Injustice League Dark did not waste their chance to make their presence known.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #16

Oct 23, 2019

They didn't lie, this is one of the deadliest chapters yet for the Justice League Dark. This is one of those stories where it does not pay to be a step behind, and boy did this team learn the hard way what happens when this is the case. If you didn't think the Injustice League Dark wasn't going to be much of a challenge, this chapter said otherwise!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #17

Nov 27, 2019

All in all, Justice League Dark #17 was a great issue for those of us who wanted a bit more depth from Circe. This by no way means that we need to sympathize with her, but it always goes a long way to understand what goes through her mind when she decides that this is what it means to have power and be in control.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #19

Jan 29, 2020

Like everything else this week, Justice League Dark found their conclusion to the influences of the Justice/Doom War. Also like some of the other books out there, credit where it is due that this creative team did not let this story slip away from them. Being tied in to an event never once took away from what made this story what it is. Many creators out there can take a page out of this team's book, because this is how you make a story your own.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #20

Feb 26, 2020

Justice League Dark #20 marks the start of something familiar, yet all the same thrilling. Once more this magic team has been thrown outside of their wheelhouse, and that is the best place for them to be when the this team overcoming great odds is peak excitement. I hope that this creative team blows he doors wide open to a world that is more extensive than it seems on the surface between the different kingdoms and their avatars.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #21

Mar 25, 2020

Never a dull moment with the Justice League Dark. You would think that this next part of their mission would be a bit more tame than what they had to do to stop Cerci, and then you jump into this new story arc to see that this creative team has no chill. Justice League Dark #20 opened the doors to the war of the Parliaments, but Justice League Dark #21 hit the ground running with everything that could go wrong for the world around this team when the balance has once more been jeopardized.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #22

Jun 3, 2020

At the end of the day, Justice League Dark is not the book you should sleep on right now. Just when you thought this book couldn't captivate you more than everything you have seen so far, issue #22 reminds you of the limitless potential in a book like this. While other books are quick to jump to the next thing, Justice League Dark remains one of the most consistent books which DC has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #23

Jun 24, 2020

As the conclusion to ‘The Parliament of Life', Justice League Dark #23 brought closure to a problem that was long past due for a solution. You have to appreciate a book like this which consistently delivers on decisive endings to the stories told. While also still making sure that there is both a natural and linear progression to everything that has been set in motion since the first story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League Dark (2018) #24

Jul 22, 2020

Justice League Dark #24 marks the start of something new for this team. With time after time being the target of forces which wanted to step on their mission to preserve the balance of magic, it is about time that this team found the strength to take the fight to their greatest enemy. Though only time will tell what it is actually going to take to overcome the kind of power they are dealing with.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #25

Aug 26, 2020

In the end, I was very impressed by the direction the story and plot took with the conclusion of Justice League Dark #25. If you had any concerns about where this was all leading, this issue right here was more than rewarding for holding onto that investment and patience for what has truly come full circle from the very first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #26

Sep 23, 2020

Justice League Dark #26 may not be the issue where the big battle reaches it's decisive end, but this creative team succeeded in setting up one heck of a climax to come next month. One which will make this an all or nothing encounter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League Dark (2018) #28

Nov 25, 2020

I was overall satisfied with the conclusion of Justice League Dark #28. Couldn't have pictured a better ending for this story because it perfectly took advantage of everything this team overcame to fight against the odds. I for one can't wait to see what comes next in Endless Winter. Sounds ominous, doesn't it?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League Dark (2018) Annual #1

Jul 31, 2019

Justice League Dark Annual #1 is a story worthy of your investment. This was the last stone left unturned from the initial attack from the Otherkind, and it has a strong connection to the set-up put in motion for the Year of the Villain event. This annual also reminds us that fixing the world of magic goes beyond what is written in the books.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Justice League of America (2013) #3

May 9, 2013

The end was a nice touch, though Martian Manhunter going through Selina's memories seemed like things we already knew about her. It was only interesting when we got to see what goes on in his mind, and by Selina's reaction to it, he's just as broken as her, and maybe even worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Justice League of America (2013) #5

Jun 27, 2013

As a conclusion to this storyline, I think that Geoff Johns has handled this team much better than I expected. Like Trevor said in the book and as I see myself this team has potential and the book overall has potential. I don't know what to expect from this, but surely it should be something exciting since their job is far from done in foiling the Secret Society's plans. What I liked most was the work put into it by Brett Booth. Everything from the crisp style, to the effects from everyone who wielded powers, it was all done very well. This and the structure of the environment around them because there was a lot of destruction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Justice League of America (2013) #7

Aug 15, 2013

Aside from this things are now coming into perspective and now there is a clear direction when everything up to now was a wild goose chase or a mystery. It was one thing for Superman to touch Pandora's Box, or for Pandora herself to allow someone as evil as Lex to touch it, but when it ends up in the hands of Wonder Woman, things are going to go bad for those who try to stop her. She was basically right, and now being corrupted by the one thing she set out to destroy without knowledge of what it can do is where everyone is going to find blame.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Justice League of America (2013) #8

Oct 17, 2013

Should be interesting in general to see how this plays out because the Justice League isn't dead. The Crime Syndicate told all the villains they are dead, and if Manhunter and Stargirl succeed, it will create a lot more chaos than what has already unfolded. There's a lot more to the prison as well than what's on the surface, some hints thrown out considering that mysterious figure and the odd appearance of only one half of Firestorm.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League of America (2013) #9

Nov 16, 2013

Justice League of America #9 is one interesting adventure which is a great distraction from everything else going on in the world. We now have a little more understanding of the prison they are all trapped in, but we have an even greater understanding of both Martian Manhunter and Stargirl. There may not be a lot of action, but the story is what stands out as it clearly possesses more depth than we could have anticipated. That is including the weird twist at the end which leaves you with a few questions you hope are explained next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Justice League of America (2017): Rebirth #1

Feb 8, 2017

This certainly is the roughest, toughest Justice League I have ever seen. Justice League Of America: Rebirth #1 rings a bell you can't unring with these heroes who are thrust into the most important task of their careers. Either their mission dooms them or it could be themselves, but you want to see them through it all when this team is unlike any on shelves right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League of America (2017) #1

Feb 22, 2017

Justice League Of America #1 has a lot of potential for a team you would expect to wreck and yet struggle figuring themselves out. Which is only human. They have gotten their message across for this first issue even if the enemy was a bit on the nose for emphasis.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League of America (2017) #2

Mar 8, 2017

It took some time as this issue progressed, but by the end of Justice League of America #2 there is more comfort towards the direction this book is taking. It wasn't the conflict itself that we needed to over-analyze or even the Extremists as individuals. What this comes down to is what they represent through their presence on our Earth and how it takes a team like this to stand against them. This creative team has set a solid foundation where the story can only get better through these heroes rising to the occasion.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Justice League Of America's Vibe #5

Jun 21, 2013

Overall Gates shows just how inexperienced Vibe is as a hero and with his own powers. While it adds to his character development, it does as well make him seems a bit too immature for someone who is working with A.R.G.U.S.. Like in previous issue he has been told that he really doesn't belong there and hopefully with what's to come next this is the next step in his story which is to get himself out before he digs himself any deeper than he already has. While the story is sub-par, the art style manages to be the best thing about it which kinda says something. So you hope that Gates can turn things up before this feels like it's going nowhere.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.4
Justice League Of America's Vibe #6

Jul 18, 2013

With that said, it seems this book might still have something to pick up from, though right now it's his connection to A.R.G.U.S. which I believe is weighing him down. I think that Sterling Gates needs to find a way to conclude this story in a way that Vibe can move on to a new chapter in his life and do so in a way that we the readers will still care to pick up the book afterwards.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #1

Dec 21, 2016

Whether you're in for the story or truth about what would happen if these two superpowers collide, Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad #1 sends the message that we are in for the best of both worlds. We are in store for as clash that will hopefully be as memorable as we hope it be for a fight you don't just wash over so casually.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #2

Dec 28, 2016

Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad #2 shook things up. Things could have ended any number of ways, but this is what we got and it was nothing like you could have predicted for what happens when these two teams clash. So far Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad is shaping up to be worth the risk DC has taken for their first big crossover event.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #3

Jan 4, 2017

Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad #3 gives readers a lot to look forward to when as usual Waller is getting a reality check as to what happens when she loses control. Control is everything to her, and not everyone is welcoming to this. Overall, Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad is shaping up to be worthy as a stepping stone for what Rebirth has to offer from the DC Universe at large.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #4

Jan 11, 2017

Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad #4 raised the stakes in a big way. This could only get worse before things could ever get any better. Waller opened Pandora's Box when she decided to cross someone like Max Lord, and there's no covering this one up when she just doesn't learn from her mistakes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #5

Jan 18, 2017

What's unleashed by the end of Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad #5 took this situation to a whole new level. From the first issue you could tell that this was building up to something bigger than just the Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad, and luckily that was the end game. They really thought this through delivering memorable action and character interactions that we wouldn't get anywhere else.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Justice League vs. Suicide Squad #6

Jan 25, 2017

A story like Justice League Vs. Suicide Squad was worth the wait. This was the best time for DC to pull this off with strong talent and direction for the DC Universe as a whole. The action was memorable, the characters were fun, the story had meaning, and the end leads to so much potential for all involved. This is how you do a crossover event the right way and make it worth the price.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #1

Sep 26, 2018

Justice League Odyssey #1 is a refreshing story that holds the name Justice League. This creative team took heroes who don't normally get enough spotlight, and gave them relevance beyond their imagination by the end of this first issue. For some this is highly anticipated if you followed the events of No Justice, but for the rest of us this is the start of a brave new frontier adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Justice League: Odyssey #2

Oct 24, 2018

Justice League Odyssey #2 was a great transition from the opening chapter. We knew what and who brought them to the Ghost Sector, and now we know that there might be a cost to what they uncover about this foretold destiny. This creative team is doing things with these heroes that is refreshing. If you are fans of a new sense of direction for them that's outside of their comfort zone, this is a book worth your investment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League: Odyssey #3

Nov 28, 2018

Justice League Odyssey #3 is not a book that you should sleep on from DC. This one is fun because you are simply along for the ride like the rest of the Odyssey team. You know as much as they do, and you are just as prepared as they are when the next twist comes their way that pushes them further towards this hyped up destiny as Old Gods.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Justice League: Odyssey #4

Jan 2, 2019

Justice League Odyssey #4 takes us deeper into the madness of these races of people worshiping gods they have never met. The reluctance and shock experienced this time around was fitting for what this Machine world had in store for the Odyssey team. Issue #5 should be one to anticipate when right now we are getting two very different reactions to being worshiped as a god.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #5

Jan 30, 2019

Justice League Odyssey #5 was met with excellent pacing and discovery which has taken us farther than you thought we would be at this point in the series. Exploration and adventure is great, but so is progress. It's great that this creative team is trying to give us all of that and much more. Especially now that it is currently more dangerous than it has ever been to find yourself in a place like the Ghost Sector.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Justice League: Odyssey #6

Feb 28, 2019

Now it also goes without saying that this issue was going to be a dealbreaker for those who were on the fence about switching up the writers for Justice League Odyssey. It was tough to say, but Dan Abnett made for a great replacement and gave us the kind of fresh perspective needed to maintain interest in this adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #10

Jun 12, 2019

Justice League Odyssey #10 continues to raise the stakes in a big way. The clock is ticking with the Source Wall energy sweeping through the Ghost Sector. Trust in the plan is put to the test, as well as their trust in each other. Obviously they are building up to something big coming their way and who wouldn't want to know what form that will take?

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Justice League: Odyssey #11

Jul 10, 2019

Justice League Odyssey #11 takes us to that stage in the plot where it is more important than ever that the JLO team tries to take control of this situation they have been thrown into. They have been playing Darkseid's game, but now was the time for them to show that they aren't just the pawns. Of course, easier said than done, though it wouldn't be exciting if you had it any other way. I look forward to seeing how this little bump in the road continues to challenge this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #12

Aug 14, 2019

Ouch, I think the Odyssey team may have taken more of a licking than the actual Justice League fighting to stop this impending doom. We all knew that Darkseid was going to knock them down a peg, but you couldn't have expected how easily that would be for him by the end of Justice League Odyssey #12. Next month should be very interesting, because there is no guessing how they will overcome this loss.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Justice League: Odyssey #13

Sep 11, 2019

By the end of Justice League Odyssey #13, I would say that my reaction to this was mixed. On one hand the twist was great, but on the other hand the direction that the story took from there was questionable. At least for now. The next issue is going to have to pull out the stops in order to convince us that this isn't where things begin to run too wild from what had an impressive focus before.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Justice League: Odyssey #14

Oct 9, 2019

Justice League Odyssey #14 again ended up being another mixed bag. The direction of the story is beginning to get better, though at the same time working over this hurdle where steering the story is involving too much need for shock value. That's not what we initially invested in this book for. That would be the exploration, discovery, and danger from both of those things. Not from troubles they get themselves into long the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Justice League: Odyssey #17

Jan 15, 2020

What can I say? Even jumping back into the story with Justice League Odyssey #17, still this book could be in a much better place than it is now. It feels like they wanted this grand idea that would bridge this story into the ‘Justice/Doom War' event, and bit off more than they could chew. I hate to get this harsh with a book, but that happens when you have expectations that aren't being met.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Justice League: Odyssey #18

Feb 5, 2020

Overall, Justice League Odyssey #18 was an improvement. There is only hope that the quality only goes up from here with both halves of the story converged and most on the same page about what needs to be done in order to both defeat Darkseid and save all of existence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #19

Mar 4, 2020

Right now I'm just happy that we have gotten to a point in this book where it feels right saying that the story is readable. Justice League Odyssey #19 gets us to a point where there is more confidence in the direction this book is taking as one which is far from done with the chaos in fighting for the fate of everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #20

May 12, 2020

Compared to other issues of Justice League Odyssey, this one left me very satisfied by the end. We re really getting somewhere and there is less twists and turns dragging out the plot progression. Overall, Justice League Odyssey #20 raised the stakes and gave you a genuine reason to anticipate what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Justice League: Odyssey #21

Jun 10, 2020

All in all, another great issue of Justice League Odyssey. Issue #21 continued to shake things up, because the message has been sent clear that this machine should not be used by either side. Though what does that mean for bringing an end to this conflict? Is there an actual plan to fall back on to stop Darkseid? Only time will tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Kick-Ass 3 #1

Jun 12, 2013

As per usual, Romita's art remains consistent as it did from Volume 1 to now. Solid coloring, good use of dark strokes, and as usual well done facial expressions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Kick-Ass 3 #3

Sep 12, 2013

Solid issue that shows some actual progress in story because the first two issues really didn't do much rather than explore Dave's personal life which isn't as interesting as when he puts on the mask. In the case of Dave, his most redeeming moment in this issue was that Dave gets a slight boost in confidence in response to how cool his real self is compared to Kick-Ass, which is something you'd think would have been realized long ago. I mean the movies touched base on this and it is only on the second.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Kick-Ass 3 #4

Nov 3, 2013

Still nothing big, but a change in the status quo is what Millar needed to focus on in order to keep this story alive. I'd say if you have been on the fence about this book, maybe just pick it up from here, but even then you have to question if this book still can pull through at this level. Millar will definitely have to crank it up a notch because high-octane action is what we expect from Kick-Ass.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Killers #1

Jul 31, 2019

Killers #1 gives the world of assassins a little more flavor. Just when you thought you saw everything the Ninja Programme had to offer? This new story shows you that there is much more to explore. After seeing what the first two killers are capable of, I can't wait to see what the rest have in store for us, and what the Jonin has in store for them as a whole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Killers #2

Aug 28, 2019

With the conclusion of Killers #2, we got a very good idea as to the direction that this story is taking. There had to be a reason why all these former operatives were being dragged into the game, a reason that they would risk everything for a sensei they have not seen in so many years. There had to be a reason that this series has been titled “Killers”. I believe we got our answer by the end, but even then there are still many answers to seek out in the issues to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Killers #4

Oct 16, 2019

There was action, character exploration, and big questions answered surrounding the secret agenda behind this offer from the Jonin. Killers #4 covered a lot of ground in a short amount of time, and did just enough to thrust us into the finale for this story next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Killers #5

Nov 6, 2019

They didn't lie, the end of this mini is only the beginning of something bigger. If you were on the fence about the direction this was all taking? Killers #5 gave us full confidence that Valiant tackled the concept of this book with something grand in mind. Throughout these five issues there was action, character development, exploration of the ninja world in a bold new way, and a decision by the end that would change the way we look at this corner of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
King In Black #1

Dec 2, 2020

By the end of King In Black #1, I would dare to say that this creative team made a believer out of me. This story so far not only changes everything you once knew about symbioses, it changes everything you thought you should fear from them too.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
King In Black: Return Of The Valkyries #1

Jan 6, 2021

In the end, I was overall satisfied with the first issue of King In Black: Return Of The Valkyries. Aside from that one plot point which wasn't entirely clear, this is the Valkryie story we have all been waiting for a long time now.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
King Thor #1

Sep 11, 2019

King Thor #1 truly does mark the end of a truly Marvelous era. In a world where everyone is simply pushing to write a quick story and jump to the next #1? This Thor epic spanned across the years and through multiple titles to get us to this penultimate moment. This is what you get when you tackle a franchise with the intention of making your story survivable. Everything was written, and everything mattered no matter how big or small the twist. King Thor holds the appeal of also being the first where we truly don't know how it will end. Even now when all seems hopeless, we know to never say never until all is said and done.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
King Thor #2

Oct 23, 2019

King Thor #2 turned out to be a roller coaster of emotions. We all jumped into this for one last big drawn-out battle, and so far we have walked away with so much more. The return of Gorr was amazingly executed, the dialogue was exciting, and the interactions between Thor and Loki was heartbreaking. This is how you make sure readers who have stuck through with this since the start get what they invested in all these years.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
King Thor #4

Dec 18, 2019

With the conclusion of King Thor #4, that's it. Seven years spanning and here we are at the culmination of everything the God of Thunder has been through since his first encounter with Gorr years ago. This was an epic in the making seven years ago, and ended turning this into exactly just that. I don't know what the next run of Thor will bring us, but that creative team will have some big shoes to fill if they aren't trying to captivate us with the embrace and terror of being a god.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
King Tiger #1

Aug 12, 2015

Even if you weren't completely sold on the concept for King Tiger, the interior artwork had to be worth giving this mini series a shot. You open that first page and the visuals are stunning. You always know you are in for something appealing to the eyes when the art team can produce such a visual of scenery. Be it the city, desert, or Rikki's house, the effort was there and it makes you feel like this story is taking place somewhere real.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
King Tiger #3

Oct 14, 2015

King Tiger #3 came with the intensity demanded from a plot that called for that all or nothing action. Solid balance of time given to the characters, prioritized the main plot, and delivered a satisfying fight sequence which showed off King Tiger's prowess. Hopefully the next issue will bring it all together seeing how big this moment is and the twist revealed at the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
King Tiger #4

Nov 11, 2015

King Tiger #4 is everything you could have wanted from the kind of series it is and more. Who knows what the future has in store for King Tiger, but if it holds a candle to anything delivered within the past four issues then this will be a series to look forward to hitting shelves again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Klarion #1

Oct 8, 2014

Klarion #1 is definitely the ongoing you didn't see coming, but it's worth reading again if you're a fan of DC's supernatural titles. With that said the issue is fairly short for a first issue. A lot happens and more pages could be used to make sure nothing is rushed. Klarion may be of a young age, but this is also something you can read without feeling like you aren't the intended audience since this feels like a title anyone can read. There's a good idea of what to expect from this series down the road in terms of the plot and Klarion as well since we see that there's more to him than meets the eye. His place in this town can go good or bad depending on how he controls himself, or is able to lay low(not likely).

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Klarion #2

Nov 12, 2014

Klarion #2 is a step in the direction, though still has ways to go in order to make sure that this is a story that we want to invest in. That means giving the time to connect with the characters, understand the state of the town, keep pressing the issue of power and responsibility, and as I said before push for those extra pages which can make all the difference.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Klarion #3

Dec 10, 2014

Klarion #3 almost feels like we have taken a step back when there isn't much to take from this compared to the previous two issues. This series is going to need a lot more than appealing visuals if it wants to make it as long as it could.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Klaus: The Life and Times of Joe Christmas #1

Dec 18, 2019

Whether you are a fan of the Klaus series, or just someone who wants to experience some holiday cheer in comic form. Klaus And The Life And Times Of Joe Christmas #1 is worth putting on your pull-list. This book makes a great statement at the end of the year that there are always ways to tell a story than what people expect when they flip open to that first page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Knuckleheads #1

Aug 27, 2013

Overall this is a fun book which has fun with the idea of superheroics. You'll laugh, and you'll get to the end wanting to see what happens next. The art style is clean and the facial expressions are handled very well. It doesn't try to be anything more than a book focused on humor and that is a reason to pick this up when other stories seem too intense.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Knuckleheads #2

Aug 27, 2013

While there's no sense of danger, the fun is in how they handle this situation. You see Trev who is probably crapping his pants still being a new to this, and his friend who kinda enjoys poking fun at his atempts. In other stories you don't see the friend so involved, and in this case it works for the story and overall tone displayed. The only issue I could find with this was that it was a bit short, though that still didn't stop it from being entertaining. Trev might have bitten off more than he can chew, though as a newly established hero, we should want to see how he digs himself out of this hole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Knuckleheads #3

Aug 27, 2013

Even doing this, the story still falls nothing short of hilarious. Taking every opportunity to make you laugh when things manage to get serious. As his first act in this book, I'd say that Knuckleheads has potential if it continues this pace and tries to be nothing more than it is now. Having meaning is good and all, but you still want something that you can get a genuine laugh out of. All within reason wince we do still want to see some growth from the main character and maybe more of an explanation as to who these aliens are that gave Trev the crystal fist. This book has done that for me in all three issues so far. Highly recommended that you pick up this book and support it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Knuckleheads #4

Nov 16, 2013

This pancakes and adventure-filled transition from the last issue was the best way for Winkeler to show us what is in store for us as this story progresses. Trev, his roommate Lance, Pizza Guy and Emma, the “hot drunk English chick,” are all likable characters and they are written so well together that you hope they don't separate any time soon. Together they are all a magnet for trouble, and that seems to be what you can expect at any moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Knuckleheads #5

Feb 6, 2014

Knuckleheads continues to be that book which you can't help to get through without a grin on your face. When the writer seems to be having a lot of fun writing their character, it translates into the book and that is what you get here. You may even spend some time trying to pick out all the references made which I find clever. It is a nice touch when the humor can also be subtle. You definitely want to pick up Knuckleheads because it deserves that attention being a book that entertains you without having to be completely over the top or violent, the humor just comes naturally with these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Knuckleheads #6

May 28, 2014

Knuckleheads #6 continues to be everything you expect in a superhero book that's not necessary weighed down by the clichs of one. Solid humor, great references that don't go over your head, visually appealing, and has its own pacing by which you're not left feeling bored. The way each issue ends in a way that makes you want to pick up the next issue and see what's in store for the Knucklefriends.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Knuckleheads #7

Jul 2, 2014

Knuckleheads #7 ended on a very shocking note. This has been a fun series that struck a balance between humor and some seriousness, but you did not see what happened coming at all. It's risky and that is what you like to see from such titles like this. Brian Winkeler pulled no punches and that is how things should be when things have escalated to this level. Surely the next issue of Knuckleheads is a must read to find out the fate of the Knucklefriends.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Knuckleheads #8

Aug 6, 2014

Knuckleheads #8 is the end that this series deserved to find that legitimacy to being a superhero story. Trevor isn't the best superhero out there, and his methods are unconventional, but Brian Winkeler and Robert Wilson IV's approach to this is one that you can't help but take interest in. This is a grown man forced to grow up, yet is living the dream of any kid out there. What happens next is a journey you don't want to let him walk alone on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Livewire (2018) #1

Dec 19, 2018

Color me impressed by this Livewire #1. It was satisfying and lived up to the hype for the one Valiant hero who has needed this chance for a solo series more than most. I will give this creative team credit that it probably couldn't have been this engaging if this took place at any point other than now. Welcoming to new readers, great introduction to this new chapter of Amanda's life, while also creating some new threats along the way. At this point you can say that for better or for worse, she is getting the full hero treatment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Livewire (2018) #2

Jan 24, 2019

Livewire #2 was one hell of a heartbreaker for anyone who wanted to see Amanda bounce back from this hurdle. To say that this creative team backed Amanda McKee into a corner felt like an understatement after what she has gone through this month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Livewire (2018) #3

Feb 13, 2019

With each passing week, we are seeing just how dangerous this world can be for someone who has made an enemy out of everyone. Livewire #3 gave us that anger from a different perspective, and one that we inevitably had to get around to in this series. It's not enough for psiots on the ground or on the run to speak their mind about their current situation. Sometimes it also has to come from someone who hits close to home.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Livewire (2018) #6

May 15, 2019

Livewire #6 wasted little time showing us just what there is to worry about when it comes to the Psiot Safety & Education Program. They may not wear evil on their sleeves like everyone else, but when the sales pitch sounds so painfully familiar? You know that you should brace yourself for what will come once the covers are pulled from this attempt at peace for young psiots.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Livewire (2018) #7

Jun 19, 2019

There wasn't too much of a surprise to the masterminds behind the Psiot Security and Education Program being uncovered, but Livewire #7 was another great chapter for Amanda who continues to find that her mission is easier said than done. For a hero like Liverwire, it is risky to not know everything. She doesn't know all the facts here, and that is proving to be dangerous for the situation she has put herself into.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Livewire (2018) #8

Jul 24, 2019

The climatic final issue of Livewire Arc 2: ‘Guardian' was captivating. If you forgot that this mission for Amanda is personal, this was your wake-up call. She stood her ground, she challenged was not right, and she let nothing get in her way. Even if the part of her that forgets how to rein it in gets the best of her. But this is a growing experience. Amanda is growing into a better person every step of the way, and we want to continue that journey with her too!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Livewire (2018) #9

Aug 21, 2019

Overall, Livewire #9 was a solid start to Amanda fighting this war on a different front. Still managing what lines she is willing to cross to make a difference, and discovering new enemies along the way. My hope for this new arc is that they really think outside the box when a political is not really her comfort zone.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Livewire (2018) #10

Sep 11, 2019

The name of the game is knowing the enemy as well as you know yourself. After the events of Livewire #10, its hard to say if Amanda is playing with that frame of mind. Everyone is asking if the public will be able to forgive her teaming up with the right politician, but the real question lies in this election ending with benefits for psiots. We've come too far in the psiot story to genuinely believe one man can change everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Livewire (2018) #11

Oct 9, 2019

If you were looking forward to Livewire #11 for big heroics, then you might walk away wanting more than what you actually got. But if you looked to this issue for a further exploration of John Wright's agenda in tackling the Psiot problem, then you will get a reveal which will keep you looking forward to what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Lobo (2014) #10

Sep 2, 2015

Lobo #10 is doing something new and worthy of attention when these are Lanterns being slaughtered. Familiar or not no one is safe when Sinestro makes his big play for power. Now we just have to sit back and watch when the others don't go down without a fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Loki (2019) #1

Jul 18, 2019

Loki #1 is a book worth having in your pull-list. In general, it is worth having a book on your pull-list from Marvel that you can have fun with. This is the same old Loki, but once more the experience is refreshing when he has to fight against his own nature to be the best version of himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Loki (2019) #2

Aug 14, 2019

Like I said above, Loki #2 gives you a lot more confidence in what this book has to offer. It's all fun and games with Loki, but at the end of the day you also want a story that engages you. It doesn't have to be complicated or over the top, but it just has to be something that shows you that there is a plan in mind for the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mae #1

May 18, 2016

Mae I can tell is going to be a book you want to keep an eye out. It has so much potential in story development, and just as much if not more in what can be created through Abbie's adventures in the other world that is crossing over into ours.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Maestro (2020) #1

Aug 19, 2020

In the end, Maestro #1 served as a solid start for his origin story. We know that this is supposed to answer how the world fell and the Maestro rose, though for this first issue the effort was placed primarily on the world which came before what most fans know.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Magneto (2014) #3

May 8, 2014

Magneto number one is certainly not a book for the light-hearted and I assure you that if you aren't, this is one of the best stories you will ever pick up to date centered around him. I mean if this is just Magneto cutting loose, I'd hate to see what happens when he faces a threat that truly calls for everything he has in his arsenal. Cullen Bunn knows what he's doing with Magneto and I have faith that he can find a way to keep the same tone while exploring this inner struggle he's dealing with at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Magnus #1

Jun 7, 2017

Whether you are a new reader or old, there is something to like about this Magnus. We know who she is, what she does, and what she has to do after this potential human/AI catastrophe. I think I speak for many when there is a draw-in to a story like this that gets you thinking about the way we treat those who are different, those who you would consider beneath you. As they can always be the most dangerous.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Magnus #2

Jul 19, 2017

By the end of Magnus #2 the direction of this story and plot has been set. Nothing was in fact as it seemed inside the A.I.s world and that was where we could grasp how far this was going to spiral out of control. I must say they put some time into this because I can't tell who we should be siding with. A strong conflict for ourselves created when you can't support the human treatment of A.I.s, but you also can't support the A.I. response to this treatment. This is definitely not one of the new stories to overlook from Dynamite.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Magnus #3

Aug 16, 2017

Magnus #3 takes us a good fair bit deeper into this unfolding plot, while giving us much more to go on about this Magnus. Taking on this case made it inevitable for her to have to confront her past, demons and old acquaintances. Things can only get worse before they get better when the enemy is pretty much steps ahead.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Magnus #4

Sep 20, 2017

The stakes have been set through the events of Magnus #4. With each passing issue you learn more of this unfolding plan, and with every new detail you are discovering that the worst is still yet to come. At this point I would say to expect the unexpected, because this is how you put your heroes back against the wall. Frederick may have been the so-called villain, but he surprisingly made his mark without being all too present.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Magnus #5

Oct 18, 2017

From start to finish this has been a great first arc for Magnus. It was smart to start off with Magnus because she defined what it means to be a hero and how to rise to the occasion. It took some time to reach that point, but she got there and press forward with the best turn of events by the end of this issue. You definitely want to see what happens when the bounty hunter takes a more proactive position to help those who need her the most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Man-Bat (2021) #1

Feb 3, 2021

Overall, Man-Bat #1 was worth the read, and worth taking the chance on. You would think that Man-Bat wouldn't be the most compelling character to produce a comic about, but it really does come down to having the right creative team on it, and this was the right team for the way that this story kicked off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #1

Oct 23, 2019

If you are looking for that one fun X-Book of the bunch, right now I have a good feeling that book will be Marauders. The first issue proved to us that there is going to be a good reason for a lot of these books and different teams. Is it important to have to read Marauders to understand everything else unfolding in the mutant world? Not really, but this is one that you are going to pick up for an X-Book you are going to get anywhere else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #2

Nov 21, 2019

There's one quote that will stick with us till the end of time thanks to Marauders #2. “I am the Red Queen, *****”. Aside from the core X-Men book, you would be crazy not to have Marauders on your pull-list. This book is only two issues in and already entertainment value at its finest. I look forward to what comes next after all the foundation we also got through this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marauders (2019) #3

Dec 4, 2019

Compared to the first two issues, Marauders #3 was a fast read. Though it was one worth getting this early in the series to further set the stage for everything that is to come once the story has really hit the ground running. For as much fun as we hope to have, there is going to be real problems to deal with, and that does not exclude the problems from within.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #4

Dec 18, 2019

Overall, Marauders #4 jumps back into this mutant team doing what they do best, and each issue successfully makes you anticipate what comes next. New problems, new destinations, new enemies. It will be a thrill to see how the Marauders, and even the Hellfire Trading Company tackles all of it when rocking the boat is almost part of their job description.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Marauders (2019) #6

Jan 24, 2020

An issue like Marauders #6 was well worth the wait. This was a roller coaster from start to finish where we have been hit with yet another book which challenges you to expect the unexpected with this Dawn of X. This was a death that was probably going to come inevitably, though the execution was on point. The nation of Krakoa is a dominant force, but that does not come without enemies stepping up their game, and enemies who will always exist within.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #7

Feb 5, 2020

We may not have gotten our answers to the fate of Kate Pryde, but we still got answers that were hard to ignore. Callisto is a welcomed addition, and it didn't hurt to know where the Morlocks now fit into this new world. Marauders #7 took advantage of world-building which should be something we get from all Dawn of X books right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Marauders (2019) #8

Feb 19, 2020

Right now, if there is any book from the Dawn of X titles you would be crazy to miss out on, it is Marauders. This book is a roller coaster of emotions, and an adventure you aren't going to get anywhere else. It is even so far along with giving us a tour of the new mutant world. Marauders #8 is one that will floor you more than Kate's death when this is what it looks like when mortality greets the currently unkillable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #9

Mar 4, 2020

At the end of the day, Marauders #9 had one objective and accomplished it. Another problem surfaced, another problem put to rest, while at the same time acknowledging an enemy who has attracted the wrong kind of attention from the mutants. It should be interesting to see where they go from here because they can either focus more on the mystery behind Kate's situation, the true reason for her death, or jump into the next Hellfire Trading Company job.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #10

May 27, 2020

When you look at the X-Men book, you enjoy the fact that there is an artist there who really knows how to render a scene, but at the same time you would find problem with the fact that the characters become stiff in turn. This art team finds a way to give you that same quality of artwork, and take extra steps towards making sure that there's life put into the characters. The are expressive through both their facial expositors and body language.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Marauders (2019) #11

Aug 12, 2020

In the end, Marauders #11 was a solid issue for the way they set a new game in play. The time for grief has passed, and with this bunch right here? Somebody is in some trouble.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marauders (2019) #12

Sep 9, 2020

Long live the Red Queen! And light a candle for Sebastian Shaw who has no idea what he is in store for. Well actually, neither do we, but it is exciting that this creative team has chosen to keep us all in the dark till her plans kick off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Marauders (2019) #13

Oct 7, 2020

Overall, Marauders #13 did not let me down like I thought it might. Tie-ins can get messy, particularly when the event it is setting up for is still something you are waiting to be fully sold on. This could have been a waste of an issue, though pleasantly it turned out to be so much more. Issue #13 is the Storm issue you never thought you needed in the Dawn of X.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Marauders (2019) #16

Dec 9, 2020

I would say that what made this was an exhilarating issue was the work on the art team's end. This wasn't an action-packed issue. Which meant that the focus really needed to be on the characters themselves and the emotion we should be feeling from them during such an intense moment. Visually every scene was a treat between Kate and Emma commanding the room with their presence, and the look of fear which washed over Shaw's face as he realized this was his reckoning. One thing I particularly loved was the looks of indifference from these two ladies as they took everything they could from Shaw. Even that pound of flesh they took from him was a cringeworthy panel for the pain they thought he should suffer. What really brought it all home was having a colorist who knows how to make all those nasty bruises, afflictions, and expressions of pain look genuine.Overall, Marauders #16 was a thrill from start to finish for everything that was hyped up when Kate made it known that she was out for bl

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Marauders (2019) #17

Jan 13, 2021

I wasn't sure what we were going to get out of Marauders #17 before picking it up, but I'm glad to see that this is still the same genuine book we were talking about before. Some things are changing, while others of course would stay the same.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Masks #6

Apr 28, 2013

Between Alex Ross and Dennis Calero, the art remains consistent and their use of both inking and shading adds to that dark feeling that the story tries to portray. Adding to this is the specific coloring of each character that makes them pop out among everything else on the page and the detail put into them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Masks #7

May 24, 2013

Again, between Alex Ross and Dennis Calero, the art remains consistent and their use of both inking and shading adds to that dark feeling that the story tries to portray.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Masks #8

Jun 27, 2013

This is a highly recommended book which is written brilliantly. This conclusion was so well executed and left you feeling like you are staring at real heroes. They don't need powers or gadgets, they just need the conviction to stand up for what they believe in. Visually this book is stunning as it's not too vivid, which is something that fits the style of the book. It gives that vibe that you could only get when your following the lives of someone who hides behind a mask which the artist Alex Ross portrayed very successfully. You actually feel like it takes place in 1938 and the faded backgrounds help add to that visualization. Not only this but the facial expressions and effects really add to making the characters believable in their reactions and when they're in combat. The combat itself are the highlight of the story because each have their own style and it does stick out very well because of Calero and Ross.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Masks 2 #1

Apr 8, 2015

Masks 2 #1 is a solid start for a story that aims to go big. Cullen Bunn shows a lot of ambition in creating a plot that really justifies the meeting of not only those we were introduced in the first Masks story, but much more to come as this is a story which challenges justice across time and space.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Metal Men (2019) #1

Oct 16, 2019

The Metal Men are back. You might not get to know them in the capacity you hoped for, but it was a deep exploration into what we knew about the Metal Men, versus the reality of their existence behind closed doors. Well I should say that one door that apparently should not be opened. Either way, Metal Men #1 turned out to be a solid debut, and makes you at least interested in seeing how this doctor tries to achieve the sentience he always wanted for these machines.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Midnighter (2015) #8

Jan 6, 2016

Midnighter #8 is a fun start to what the future holds for Midnighter. And leading us straight into the awaited clash between Spyral, Midnighter, and the Suicide Squad!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Midnighter (2015) #9

Feb 3, 2016

Midnighter #9 is fun on every level and this is only the start to a fight M might just think twice about getting himself into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Midnighter (2015) #10

Mar 2, 2016

Midnighter #10 cranks the dial to 11 and shows what both sides are capable of when they want to make a statement about who really means business.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Midnighter (2015) #11

Apr 6, 2016

Midnighter #11 serves as a great point of escalation for the plot. There are ways in which this fight can end, and that all comes down to those little things you notice that could turn the tide in anyone's favor. Waller realizing she may have made a mistake, Apollo showing them what a real God looks like, heck even maybe Deadshot making a bold move on his own accord. Anything can happen and it seems the time for personal feelings have been set aside from whatever has to be done next.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Midnighter (2015) #12

May 4, 2016

Midnighter #12 was a marvelous ending to a series you would have to be crazy to have missed. The action, the humor, the everything you got from this series that you don't from all the rest from DC at this time. Not to mention the team-up with Spyral and Suicide Squad. This is how you do comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Mighty Avengers (2013) #1

Sep 12, 2013

Good start with a great introduction that fans can roll with. It's a story worth sticking with even though the artwork of Greg Land is somewhat unappealing. This is a book with a lot of potential. Not just for doing something new, but the dynamics created with this team-up. Brevort has seemingly put a lot of thought into how these heroes interact with each other and how their personalities click or clash. If you really took the time to think about the cast he has chosen, you really do feel as though they are a team that comes together out of necessity when the other heroes are off in space. When considered you can believe they are those heroes who would stand up to fill in the roles of heroes when there aren't any others to take the initiative.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Avengers (2013) #2

Oct 3, 2013

This was just excellent all around and it really set itself apart as one which displayed some traditional heroics. Fighting the bad guys, overcoming pain, having the people you're trying to save cheer rather than run in fear. Things we haven't seen in a long time and is very much appreciated under these circumstances.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Avengers (2013) #3

Nov 7, 2013

Overall this was a very fun, Mighty Avengers proves to be that kick ass book that knows traditional heroics. The banter between Spider-Man and Spider-Hero, the action, the team dynamic, Mighty Avengers really has it all and has a great balance between them. Everything down to that final speech that Luke gave at the end was brilliant, summing up what we can expect from the rest of this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Avengers (2013) #4.INH

Dec 11, 2013

In the aftermath of Infinity, this was the best transition you could get from this team moving forward. The birth of the new Ronin from Spider-Hero has come, and now is just waiting for the big reveal as to who's behind the mask(for those of us who didn't see the spoiler a few months ago). It should be very interesting to see where this little development leads to at the very end, but it's definitely something that may catch you off guard. Not because of who it is, but just because you'd question who'd really challenge Luke in that type of manner.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Avengers (2013) #5.INH

Jan 22, 2014

As a tie-in to Inhumanity it cannot be stressed enough how much our are missing out by not reading Mighty Avengers. One of the better books to release last year and doesn't lose that intensity that comes from a team led by Luke Cage. This is a new incarnation of the team and there is so much that each has to offer when given the opportunities Al has taken to this point. Non-stop fun that you can only get when the heroes look like they love what they do. The end of the issue speaks volumes and speaks for itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Avengers (2013) #6

Feb 6, 2014

Issues like this are the kind that you can get out of Mighty Avengers and want more of it. They didn't have to get into a fight and still you could find yourself drawn in just as much to the story because you can tell that Al Ewing enjoys writing these characters. As much as they are a team, they all still stand out as individual heroes and don't lose what makes them special amongst the others. Definitely the team book you should be buying from Marvel at this moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Mighty Avengers (2013) #7

Feb 26, 2014

Praying for Gideon Mace is an understatement right now. Mighty Avengers does what it does best and cranks that knob high when things are about to get intense. This fight started out personal, and now it has turned into something much more than that by the end of the issue. Al Ewing gives you this team, but he also gives you heroes that standout in this crowd as those you care for as they deal with their personal problems and deal with how these problems affect them as a member of the team. Whatever comes next will be a defining moment for the Mighty Avenger's future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mighty Avengers (2013) #8

Mar 12, 2014

Mighty Avengers continues to get better with each passing issue. Not because of the action, but because Al Ewing knows what to do with these characters. It's not as if they are thrown as a full team into the next situation. There is clearly a direction he has for them and with how out of control things can get, you still find character development which allows us to care for what will happen to these heroes next.After how this issue ended, you certainly would want to know what is to come with Mighty Avengers #9.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Avengers (2013) #9

Apr 9, 2014

Just another entertaining issue of Mighty Avengers that shows why this team is one that stands out as it's own thing compared to other team books out there. Blue Marvel's part was excellent, while Ronin's part didn't hold up as much as I would have thought it would. Overall making this very solid and I hope that from here there can be that expectation that when something big is about to happen in this book, it can be done without it being spoiled months in advance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Avengers (2013) #10

May 29, 2014

As a tie-in to Original Sin, Mighty Avengers #10 does everything it needs to and more while adding to possibilities now open with Uatu's death. It doesn't feel like they did this for the shock value, Uatu's death is bigger than many want to admit. Doesn't matter if you know him or hate him, a Watcher is pretty much a Watcher, not much needs to be said beyond that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Avengers (2013) #11

Jun 11, 2014

Mighty Avengers #11 certainly leaves you with a lot to think of in terms of understanding that the Mighty Avengers we are familiar with is not the original. The present day counterparts are struggling to unearth the secrets they've been keeping and it's one shock after another when it's a story you could only experience because of Uatu's death.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mighty Avengers (2013) #12

Jul 23, 2014

Mighty Avengers #12 is that kind of tie-in you recommend to someone who wants to see a big effect Original Sin can have on those who were open to the secrets from the Watcher's eye. History repeating itself, and the only way to conquer this threat is to understand the past. That is what Al Ewing gives us in this issue and it sends you for a loop with the emotions felt throughout.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Avengers (2013) #13

Aug 20, 2014

Mighty Avengers #13 has reached that climax and it's one that keeps you at the edge of your seat. Their story is self-contained, but it doesn't stop them from being thrown into a situation that requires them to save all of humanity. This became a larger story than any of us readers could have imagine it could be initially and have not been given any reason to believe that we will not be delivered a big ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mighty Avengers (2013) #14

Sep 24, 2014

When before I would have said Mighty Avengers felt like a legitimate team because they established themselves to the public, it is with the conclusion of Mighty Avengers #14 they are a legitimate team because they showed what it means to be one. Now that they have this bond, only time will tell how that holds up with Captain America and The Mighty Avengers when it looks like Sam Wilson takes the lead.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Mite #1

Oct 3, 2018

Mighty Mite #1 is a very entertaining debut for a series which balances the ridiculousness of a hero who has no idea what he's doing, with the engagement of a world where the people are crude mirrors of the everyday person.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #1

Mar 2, 2016

For a legitimate start to the franchise, Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #1 has the potential to become something big. For old fans and new this is something anyone cane enjoy whether if you like epic, action-adventure fantasy stories. And you certainly want to be reading this if you find yourself excited for the movie to come in 2017.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #2

Apr 6, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #2 continues the series with promise of the same things you look forward to a comic like this delivering being an adaptation from another medium. If you like licensed titles, this one should be on your pull-list.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #3

May 11, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #3 was a tease, but it was also exciting for what this is setting up. The threat has been established, the lines have been drawn in the sand, and now it is time to attack the problem head on. They are wasting no time to show what is fun about the Power Rangers franchise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #4

Jun 22, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #4 was the full package and thrilling for it. It has character, action, and non-stop energy that challenges the Rangers rather than having the ordinary monster of the day. This gives us so much more and you admire adaptations that can take full advantage of the room given to do so.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #5

Jul 20, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #5 stands on its own, answers some interesting questions about Rita's approach towards creating her own Ranger, while also hinting at what we are going to get back into in the main storyline with the next issue. If you read one-shot and feel that you are on the fence, this is an issue you should read regardless to take in more of the new that you can only have the opportunity to get right now through the books.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #6

Aug 31, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #6 was somewhat of a fast read just because of the fight between the Rangers and Black Dragon, but it was one heck of a confrontation for what position it has thrown the Rangers into by the end. Their backs are against the wall and hopefully we will see more of their resourcefulness that has made this comic adaptation more engaging.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #7

Sep 21, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #7 was a step up for how unconventional the Rangers can be when pushing forward requires all the grit they can muster. Fast paced, and straight to the point of mounting some sort of offense against Rita. To keep the ball rolling they simply need to keep making sure that we are able to acknowledge the danger they all face.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #8

Oct 26, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #8 shakes things up as the time you awaited for the Rangers to fight back has come. Not the way you think it would, but that is the marvel of what room this creative team ha been given to do their own thing. Things that you haven't seen before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #9

Nov 30, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #9 is the issue that solidifies this book more than issues before as a must read. This story has taken us to places we haven't been before, quite literally. This is the place to be if you want a Power Rangers story that knows how to keep you guessing.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #10

Dec 28, 2016

There are plenty of ways we could have approached Billy coming to terms with what he thought was shortcomings as a Ranger, but Mighty Morphin Power Rangers#10 was a memorable journey for us and Billy to realize what makes him special. I feel like we've always known this, though it's not everyday someone is willing to shine a light on the struggles he goes through to reach this point. Whether you are a fan of the Blue Ranger or not this is a valued emphasis on what it means to be a hero overall these days.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #11

Jan 18, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #11 takes us into the thick of this mysterious new Ranger and somewhat helps us to understand why he would come to the aid of Rita from a different world. We are still missing the big picture, but I'm sure they aren't going to let that opportunity slip with Drakkon making his presence known.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #12

Feb 15, 2017

Tommy and Billy do uncover the truth that will change everything, but only really about this Earth they are stuck on. Nonetheless Mighty Morphin Power Rangers#12 keeps us on track between these new developments and progressing with a world that is falling into despair without the full power of the Power Rangers at their disposal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #13

Mar 15, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #13 took big steps to get us where we need to be when the time for talking ends and it is time to tack action. Things will definitely get worse before they get better, but it is facing adversity when the Power Rangers truly rise to the occasion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #14

Apr 19, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #14 was anything goes and right now there is no telling how this will end. Normally for a Power Rangers story you could see the end coming a mile away, but this had a lot of thought put into it where even if the Rangers succeeded there was no clear-cut way to say how.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #15

May 17, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #15 was the issue we have been needing for a character like Zordon which we all do tend to cast off to the side in favor of everyone else. He has importance and this creative team did a great job of tying Zordon to the bigger picture as there was still plenty of story to tell about this other world and Drakkon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #16

Jun 21, 2017

Truly felt like a superhero story till the very end, this is what happens when you bring a franchise to a medium where the sky is the limit. Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #16 brought this first story arc to a satisfying conclusion. We went to new places, the Rangers pulled off some impossible feats, and they proved what it means to be a Power Ranger with or without their powers. Sure one could argue that this could have felt a bit rushed, but a lot of what happened here was memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #17

Jul 19, 2017

The next Power Rangers epic starts with Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #17 as there is a true adjustment to take notice of when coming back from an intergalactic mission. That would all have been too easy if nothing changed for this team after. Hopefully how this issue left is will lead to them further pressing the Power Rangers' place in this world as superheroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #18

Aug 23, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #18 made what I would call a forgettable villain, someone to fear when he has been given the chance to stretch his legs. Rita can sometimes be a crutch and this encounter proved that. The inclusion of Grace and the government behind her also is a treat when this is a time of establishing the Rangers as independent, or open to the idea of outside aid. World-building continues to shine as key to a story evolving, rather than falling into habits.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #19

Sep 27, 2017

Never a dull moment in the life of a Power Ranger. Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #19 showed us that this is one roller coaster of an experience when just when they think they have things figured out, there's always something new for them to brace for. Finster's plot they are just going to have to deal with, but that other discovery no one could have braced for that discovery at the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #20

Oct 25, 2017

No better time to be a Power Rangers fan than now. Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #20 was a story you could only tell and possibly get away with when the Power Rangers are brought to comic book form. We now have a good idea as to what we should expect from Grace with a stronger role to play in issues to come, and why trust is not always something you can be certain of as Rangers throwing themselves into harms way every day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #21

Nov 22, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #21 turned into an excellent transition into what must be done for these Rangers to get themselves together. They've been directionless, and understanding that there was a team before them didn't help when the truth didn't come from Zordon himself. This issue gave us a new ally that we will hopefully see more of down the road and that will be needed when tensions are running high.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #22

Dec 20, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #22 was a genuine issue if you were looking for the character appeal over the action. It wasn't just about putting aside their differences and unite with Promethea to tackle a new threat. It was about everything between the lines. The things that hold them back about Zordon, about each other, about the responsibility that weighs heavier than some will let on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #23

Jan 17, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #23 shakes things up in a big way. Rita is cooking up some plot on her own, and Grace has unfortunately created her own problems by trying to working with the Rangers. No matter who the Rangers deal with first, they are going to have their hands full. I enjoy that this story and these plots are taking their time to unfold. Everything matters leading up to that next big problem.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #24

Feb 21, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #24 drew that line in the sand between what a Ranger will do, and what anyone else would do given the same resources to make a difference. An accomplishment to do this while also setting up for the big event to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #25

Mar 28, 2018

Shattered Grid is off to a good start through the events of Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #25. The threat has been established through Drakkon's actions and beyond, there was urgency by putting everyone on high alert, and even then the world didn't stop for the Rangers who still have lives to live. What foundation they laid here made this worth investing time in. The key for the next issue will be the execution in realizing what is actually at stake through the stacking of one problem over the other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #26

Apr 18, 2018

Morphin Power Rangers #26 took big leaps forward for the second chapter to this crossover event. Momentum seems to be what they are pushing for and its working. We are moving from A to B and they are pulling no punches in what is at stake every moment that they aren't putting a stop to Lord Drakkon's crusade.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #27

May 16, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #27 continues to crank that dial as this once in a lifetime war for the power grid progresses. Currently I think we can guess the direction that this story will take as the need for numbers and a proper gear increases, but that doesn't mean everything will be so straightforward either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #28

Jun 20, 2018

More players enter the fight, the tides continue shifting, and tensions run high with so much at stake. Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #28 takes everything you were prepared for and throws it right out the window. In war you expect the unexpected and Lord Drakkon did not disappoint there. I never thought he could truly be that much of a threat, but he has proven me wrong. And he has without a doubt done so with the Rangers as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #29

Jul 18, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #29 was one of the most engaging issues of the Shattered Grid story. Power Rangers will always go from one fight to the next, but it is what happens inbetween like this which makes it all worth investing in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #30

Aug 15, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #30 definitely left us with that feeling like this could easily be their last mission. I mean how do you fight someone who can snatch powers so effortlessly? Someone who commands Zords that can level theirs as if they are gnats? However this ends, I just find myself so captivated by the fact that it will take a well they have not dug into yet. This is how you breathe life into a war and make the stakes real.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #31

Sep 26, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers #31 was an okay start to a new adventure. I feel that the next issue will be the one that really says whether this is a story you can continue to follow-up on. With more clarity to the direction and understanding of where this story fits in current events, that is what I hope I can say.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) Annual: 2017

May 31, 2017

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers 2017 Annual #1 is one of the most memorable specials BOOM! has released so far. It's not about giving us stories branching off of something ongoing, it's about continuing to prove to us that this run of Mighty Morphin Power Rangers has much more to offer in storytelling that you won't get anywhere else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) Annual: 2016

Aug 24, 2016

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers 2016 Annual#1 is worth your buy as an oversized anthology given depth to the world of the Mighty Morphin Power Rangers. 40 pages of new story and art that delivers everything that has made this a memorable experience reading since the comic franchise began.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016): 25th Anniversary Special #1

Jun 27, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers Anniversary Special #1 is another one to have in your collection if you are enjoying the non-stop treat that is the Power Rangers across all periods of time and space.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016): Shattered Grid #1

Aug 30, 2018

Mighty Morphin Power Rangers: Shattered Grid #1 brings the first Power Rangers comic book event to a close, and this is one for the history books. There was so much heart put into this story, and I couldn't help but smile, even if all I wanted to do was weep at what was inevitable for the fate of the multiverse by the end of this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Mighty Morphin' Power Rangers (2016) #1

Jul 22, 2020

Through the events of Power Rangers: Ranger Slayer #1, we are now witnessing a hero on the rise. Well, a hero who was ready to redeem herself for a past of betrayal serving Lord Drakkon. The best takeaway from this story was seeing that there is a long-term plan for everything in these Power Rangers books. No one gets left behind, and this was the perfect way to make that statement.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Miles Morales: Ultimate Spider-Man #1

May 8, 2014

Miles Morales: Ultimate Spider-Man #1 is a solid start for the series. Aside from the very end which raises an eyebrow for what Bendis is plotting, there is no denying that this book has a lot of promise. As one of the three books in the Ultimate line right now with a single character focus, I hope that Bendis can pull through to make sure that characterization stands tall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Miss Fury #4

Jul 12, 2013

Great issue overall. Has a good pace, great direction, better style, and is still picking up in intensity. So much to expect from this book, but I believe it can deliver. Next to The Shadow I think this is one book you are missing out on if you are not reading it right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Miss Fury #5

Aug 29, 2013

This is an adventure that you would be crazy not to get into. Miss Fury makes time travel fun and it really doesn't have to be something you initially take itnerest in off the bat picking up this book. It is one of the most unique pulp stories of Dynamite and you will see Marla's wrath

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Miss Fury #6

Sep 26, 2013

Her personality is something which was perfectly displayed here. Seeing just how confident she is in who she is, never letting something so trivial stop her from getting the job done. That is why you read this book, she has so much drive that nothing can stop her unless she lets it. Manipulative, resourceful, tactical, everything she took advantage of by remembering who she was and why this puts her in a position of power. As a female lead, it's very admirable that Williams shows so much understanding of her character. Beyond this Miss Fury never feels as if she doesn't have an intimidating presence, which is something Abreu captures intensely.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Miss Fury Vol. 2 #1

Apr 6, 2016

Miss Fury Volume 2 #1 was a solid start to this new story and direction for Marla Drake. Still badass, cunning, and ready to jump into action at any given moment. She may be one of few Golden Age heroines Dynamite really puts in the spotlight, though when that spotlight is on her she demands attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Miss Fury Vol. 2 #2

May 4, 2016

Miss Fury Vol 2 #2 makes a lot of progress, building up to this mystery that is pulling Marla every which way with clues to things she couldn't see clearly till now. Her darker side has been teased, so has her past, and things can only get worse as these things make up who she became now. Hopefully the third issue keeps up with this momentum because Miss Fury is a character you should want to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Miss Fury Vol. 2 #3

Jun 1, 2016

Miss Fury Volume 2 #3 cranked the dial to 11 in all the right ways showing just the kind of dangers our hero is capable of facing whether she is ready or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Miss Fury Vol. 2 #4

Jul 27, 2016

It's a race against time for Marla and it is not on her side in Miss Fury Volume 2 #4. Fighting to keep up with all these things she is only now comprehending. The fifth issue you are hoping is where they capitalize on what doors they have opened in the world of the supernatural created.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Miss Fury Vol. 2 #5

Aug 24, 2016

Miss Fury Volume 2 #5 shows why this is a must read for pulp fiction fans alike. This was the start of a new adventure for Marla as Miss Fury and she started with a big bang. If these are the kind of threats she will face along the way? That is more than welcomed when there is more to learn about what makes her just as dangerous as what bumps in the night.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Moon Knight (2016) #1

Apr 14, 2016

Moon Knight #1 has potential, capitalizing on our need to understand the inner brain-makings of Marc. Engaging us on a level where we see what it can be like for someone to struggle with self-identity to an extreme.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Mother Panic #1

Nov 9, 2016

Mother Panic #1 is highly recommended if you're looking for something from DC that is different from your average vigilante story. Mother Panic doesn't hold your hand and isn't intended to as part of the Young Animals imprint. You enjoy it for the chance to see what happens when a vigilante is not out there to simply save the day.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ms. Marvel (2014) #1

Feb 7, 2014

This was the best possible start you could have asked for from a new hero, one of minority, an Inhuman, and legacy to a big time Avenger.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ms. Marvel (2014) #6

Jul 17, 2014

Ms. Marvel #6 displays the endless potential that comes with Ms. Marvel roaming the streets of New Jersey. She's more established in her role as a hero, there's a lot of mental exploration to guide her, the threat has been established, and from here anything goes now that she has had her first encounter with a legitimate superhero. As long as G. Willow Wilson has fun writing this series, it will surely continue to be fun for us as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Nailbiter #11

Apr 1, 2015

Most stories like this will lose steam at this point. Drift off into filler or maybe drag on a piece of the story that you might not find all too important. But Nailbiter has kept going strong all the way up to issue #11 which is almost the best issue of the series so far. Nailbiter #11 has brought us to that point where you are just left speechless when a story like this is given the room to show you why Buckaroo is a town you don't want to find yourself exploring. And yet we do with the consistent progression of the plot and growing of this world that holds a secret which will shake it's very foundation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Nailbiter #12

May 6, 2015

Nailbiter #12 is a solid step forward giving us an idea as to what we can expect next. Be it revelations or drastic character decisions, nobody is safe from the horrors that lurk behind Buckaroo and themselves as they look to solutions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Nailbiter #13

Jun 3, 2015

With that said, normally with a flashback there is something distinguishing about the tone. The coloring for that scene will normally be pale, a tan tint, or just have a differentiating effect altogether. For this issue that is not the case, and surprisingly it is still easy to tell what is past and what is present. For a horror book, the art team does a great job of finding a balance where things aren't just gloom and dread. That is the easy way out when you can challenge yourself to find different ways to approach one like this. Warren trying to scare the citizens, the pastor losing his mind, the innocence from the past, and the suspense from digging deeper into those tunnels. That is how you keep a reader engaged from beginning to end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Nailbiter #14

Jul 1, 2015

Nailbiter #14 messes with your emotions because this issue played with suspense. With every flip of the page you felt that something was going to go wrong. The darker color choices added to this atmosphere which worked for the mood set knowing that Warren, Finch, and Crane were headed into territory holding questionable consequences. That gloomy mood is something you especially take notice of during the flashback of Crane and Warren's crumbling relationship. That is something normally you might overlook yet holds importance here. To see how they were then and now makes a difference when seeing what separates them from everyone else in the town of Buckaroo. Lastly the underwater scene was handled very well with the cold colors and the layout. It was interested to see how much things changed visually for that little bit just switching up the scenery.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nailbiter #15

Aug 5, 2015

Nailbiter #15 is that issue from this series that you don't want to miss. A lot of plot progression was made with this issue and while there are still questions we are left with, more added as well, we are also given answers that really catch you off guard.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Nailbiter #16

Oct 7, 2015

Nailbiter #16 overall is worth reading not only as a Halloween special, but as an issue that answers most of the questions we had about where things left off in Nailbiter #15 while leading us into the next story arc. We now know what to expect with enough closure to look to the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Nailbiter #17

Nov 4, 2015

Nailbiter #17 widens the scope of the plot beyond the borders of Buckaroo. Serial killers in that town are now the least of their problems, and their problems still all lead back to Buckaroo where it all began. No matter where everyone is now, they still have a part in this mystery and it will be exciting to see how they handle themselves working from a different angle.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Nailbiter #18

Dec 2, 2015

There was a lot of progress made in Nailbiter #18 as the hunt for this new serial killer reveals things that will shake up the mystery going into the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Nailbiter #19

Jan 6, 2016

Overall Nailbiter succeeds in keeping us guessing what comes next. That end was the last thing you would have seen coming. And just one of many things that will make you feel this way considering every little thing counts from issues past.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Nailbiter #20

Feb 3, 2016

Some could be bugged by a break in a series, though creative teams need that time to breath in order to maintain quality for a series like Nailbiter.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Nailbiter #21

May 4, 2016

Nailbiter #21 is the start of “Bound by Blood”, and boy does it live up to the name right away. Nonetheless Nailbiter continues to remain character driven and always looking to make some sort of progress. There still hasn't been an issue where you feel there isn't something to take from it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Nailbiter #22

Jun 1, 2016

“Bound by Blood” part two is a big step forward in a number of ways. With the conclusion of Nailbiter #22 the stakes are higher than ever when things are going one way, and then go in a different direction altogether. Where we are now is not what you would have thought would have come out of the story arc at this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter #23

Jul 6, 2016

Nailbiter #23 is a build up and doing it right knowing that still things can only get worse before they can get any better. With Warren trying to help Alice through a defining period in her life being his daughter, they are ringing bells that they will not be able to unring. The next issue looks like it will be where crap hits the fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Nailbiter #24

Aug 3, 2016

Nailbiter #24 does give us answers and they were indeed some big ones. Progress is a big thing at this stage of the investigation and they are keeping us at the edge of our seats when you can never be too prepared knowing the enemy is pretty much two steps ahead every step of the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nailbiter #25

Sep 7, 2016

Nailbiter #25 ends another memorable story arc. We got a lot of pay-off from the way ‘Bound by Blood' as questions were raised, questions were answered, and of course big things were revealed. Best of ll is that most of the issue felt like a climax instead of building up to just that one moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Nailbiter #26

Nov 2, 2016

Nailbiter #26 was revealing, it was gut-wrenching, and set us up for what more this story still has in store for us. The games don't end until the butchers are either done and/or dead.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Nailbiter #27

Dec 7, 2016

Nailbiter #27 drives the message home that we just may be on the right track now. The only one. Either they find the truth, die finding the truth, or the worst comes and no one knows the truth. Everything that happens now matters more than it could have when they were first blissfully ignorant to what it meant to attempt solving this case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Nailbiter #28

Jan 4, 2017

Nailbiter #28 is where you could say we are hitting a climax in this story. That could be said about many different moments throughout the series, though this is the big one. Nailbiter once again proved why it is among the top go to books in comics if you want your horror fix. This issue also marks the fact that we are nearing an actual end for Nailbiter. Truthfully I admire the answer they gave to why issue #30 would mark the end. And the direction this issue took said enough about how much thought they put into us reaching this point of approaching conclusion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Nailbiter #29

Feb 1, 2017

Only one issue left and Nailbiter #29 set the stage for what is practically do or die. With March delivering the conclusion, its anything goes for our heroes. We don't know who's going to live, who's going to die, or if any of them can walk out of this the same person they were before, but that is the appeal of how horror stories push you to brace for the worst. If anyone is looking for a happy ending then they clearly came to the wrong place.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Nailbiter #30

Mar 1, 2017

This is how you do horror. I can't believe it has really been three years, but it was worth it to see this through to the end because not once did Nailbiter feel like every other horror story on shelves. They thought outside the box to always keep us on our toes. Nailbiter #30 wrapped everything up so well even if some might say that the very last scene could have been cut. Otherwise perfection.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nailbiter: Nailbiter / Hack/Slash #1

Mar 4, 2015

Be it a fan of Nailbiter or Hack/Slash, Nailbiter/Hack/Slash One-Shot is a story worth picking up for $4.99. Two favorite characters from both books meeting up for the first time and you just don't know what to expect. As a Nailbiter fan you might want to see how Warren meeting Cassie affects what he becomes later in life. And as a Hack/Slash fan you just want to see Cassie in action when you know she is bound to come into conflict with someone from Buckaroo. There just is no shortage of creative serial killers there, and that is what attracts her attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #1

Jun 3, 2020

A brand-new mystery has been set in motion, and the stakes are bigger than they have ever been before. I mean, the first mystery was all about the murders which never truly ended. Though here we are with Nailbiter: Returns #1, and it seems that the idea is to remind the world that they still have something to fear. Nothing is more dangerous than a copycat(s) who wants to make a statement. Well that and make their presence felt. As an extra-length first issue, this creative team did not disappoint in giving us every reason to look forward to more!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #2

Jul 1, 2020

If you may have somehow still found yourself on the fence about Naibiter continuing? Nailbiter: Returns #2 reminds you that a story like this knows no end when the madness of serial killers is like a fire you can't extinguish.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #3

Jul 29, 2020

New game, new rules, new players. The town of Buckaroo is destined to be anything but peaceful at this point. Nailbiter: Returns #3 really kicked things off with a statement that nowhere is safe in this town.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #4

Aug 26, 2020

In the end, Nailbiter: Returns #4 was one hell of a page-turner. So much madness packed into one issue, and they did not fail to leave us hanging with a banger of a cliffhanger. A month will be too long to find out just what the heck is going on in this town right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #5

Sep 30, 2020

All in all, Nailbiter: Returns #5 kept us on our toes as once more the game has changed. Though this time around, we now know what to actually call the game.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #7

Nov 25, 2020

In the end, Nailbiter: Returns #7 did not disappoint in further revealing what's going on in the town of Buckaroo, Oregon, and doing so in the most unique way for a book like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nailbiter Returns #9

Jan 27, 2021

After the past few issues of Nailbiter, and Nailbiter: Returns #9 in particular, now more than ever it is true to say that this book is a must-read for horror fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Nailbiter Returns #10

Feb 24, 2021

In the end, I was left feeling satisfied with the note they left us on with the conclusion of Nailbiter Returns #10. We were honestly going to miss out on a lot if this book didn't bring the story of these character full circle. And of course they couldn't help also doing this while at the same time hitting us with a twist that makes you wonder if there might not be more of this story to tell.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Naomi #1

Jan 23, 2019

Naomi #1 is definitely the moat ambitious story that DC will tackle for the Wonder Comics imprint. A story about the lengths that one girl will go to uncover the truth about her adoption and if she is actually special. Who doesn't want to believe this in the face of the impossible? For all the hype being put into this mystery, let's hope that this creative team delivers as they take us down the rabbit hole.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Naomi #2

Feb 20, 2019

Naomi #2 gave us everything they said it would and then some. There was emotion, there was plot progression, and then that cliffhanger at the end was one hell of a note to leave us on as we anxiously await for what might be the first big clue towards solving this mystery. I have to admit, this is the most exciting new character in the DC Universe because Naomi's existence doesn't rely on anything pre-existing. Her corner of the world has been carved out, and this is her time to find where that piece fits.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Naomi #3

Mar 20, 2019

By the end of this issue I was left blown away by how different things turned out from what I expected from this series. The way they built up the hype towards this book, you initially would have expected that there was going to be a lot more focus put into detective work and further snooping around the town. It was hard to argue with the drastic change in direction considering what we were treated to through the events of Naomi #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Naomi #4

Apr 17, 2019

Overall, Naomi #4 proved to us that this creative team is not messing around with this mystery. They aren't dragging us along with twists and turns, and they aren't trying to milk out a feeling of suspense. This experience has been worthwhile when each passing issue so far has revealed something major, leading up to the big discovery next month. I would be shocked if all sorts of theorizes weren't flying around immediately after this release.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Naomi #5

May 15, 2019

Was the secret to the origins of Naomi worth all of the hype put into it? Hell yes! Naomi #5 was everything you could have asked for and more. This is what readers want when they look forward to a new hero who is supposed to be able to carve our their own corner of the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Naomi #6

Jul 10, 2019

This creative team went above and beyond to bring us a spectacular cosmic tale. You never knew what you were truly in store for when it came to this girl, and it helped a lot with the surprise once it came time to reveal her origins. Naomi #6 brought her story full circle in a way that left you wanting more. She is powerful, she is brave, and she reminds you of the sense of wonder in finding out you can do something extraordinary.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Nebula (2020) #1

Feb 12, 2020

No ambition comes without a cost! Through this debut issue for Nebula, this creative team showed us exactly what they meant by Nebula's goal ending up costing her more than she's willing to pay. This is the same Nebula we've all come to admire. She's a badass, she's as dangerous as ever, and she will resort to any tactic that will get her what she wants. Don't let the new look fool you!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
New Avengers (2013) #5

Apr 28, 2013

The artwork was great as usual, between the solid colors and the shading which adding to that end of the world vibe that they try to consistently portray.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Avengers (2013) #7

Jun 20, 2013

Overall it was very intense given the situation that they find themselves in. As the Illuminati what they do stays between them as do anything that manages to go under the radar. Dangerous yes when they now have the attention of Doctor Doom, but time will tell if he will act upon his suspicions. As per usual the art is vibrant and something to admire. Not just the detail put into the characters but the environments around them as well. All in all, big things are to come and anticipate.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
New Avengers (2013) #8

Jul 25, 2013

With that said I still do like the story and the art even more. Mike Deodato is amazing and his style is amazing for this book. Not only his but just the coloring, vibrant colors, and the amount of detail put into it keeps you drawn in. While New Avengers prelude to Infinity does leave you with more questions to be answered, it's nothing new and it gives you another reason to follow this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
New Avengers (2013) #9

Aug 29, 2013

A solid issue for the New Avengers tie-in into Infinity. While what they are fighting on Earth is important, you can only hope that it has some major impact on whatever else is going on around the world given there is more than just what they are fighting against which requires their attention. This story has potential, but only if the focus is kept self-contained and doesn't rely too heavily on mysteries or questions that would throw off the readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
New Avengers (2013) #10

Sep 20, 2013

As usual, artist Mike Deodato delivers with his stunningly impressive capture of both the Illuminati and everything else as they search for Thanos' son. Everything from how intimidating Beast looks, how powerful Dr. Strange looks, to the layout of the search for Thanos' son. This including the very ends as he can make things look so gloom and doom as the scene switches from normal to all red, indicating an incursion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
New Avengers (2013) #11

Oct 17, 2013

Overall, while the Infinity War has actually shaped up to be one in space, Earth is now it's own war zone. Everyone is in on the fight, and no one is safe from what's to come. Thanos is is now in Necropolis, where the Earth destroying bombs are kept, and the Builders have finally made their way to Earth. What more could go wrong? Hickman has the answers and if anything like what we've gotten so far, it will be something monumental.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
New Avengers (2013) Annual #1

Jun 25, 2014

New Avengers Annual #1 is worth the $4.99, it is one of those annuals that you want to go out of your way to pick up. It has its connections to the main series, while giving you something genuine centered around Doctor Strange. Frank J. Barbiere is more than enough reason to want to pick this up, and the interior art is surely a style you wish you saw more often in other titles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Challengers (2018) #1

May 16, 2018

New Challengers #1 I would say successfully introduces us to the Challengers of the Unknown,and what makes them so special from everyone else who aims to solve the mysteries of the multiverse. This first mission so far is a good test for determining what these characters have to offer, and if this is a miniseries worth seeing through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
New Mutants (2019) #1

Nov 6, 2019

And here I thought that Marauders was going to be the only fun book out of these Dawn of X books. New Mutants #1 is a welcomed surprise for what can come of these young mutants taking on the cosmic world. This may not be another mutant team fighting for the sake of Krakoa or helping to maintain their place on the totem-pole, but this issue proves that they don't have to be. The best takeaway is knowing that some of these books can stand on their own, and still take risks.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Mutants (2019) #2

Nov 29, 2019

New Mutants #2 continues to captivate you on this experience you aren't going to get anywhere else. Mutants in space is nothing new, but you have to give credit where it is due that not many are willing to have fun like this with it. Be a rebel, live by your own rules, make memories along the way. That is what this team is doing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Mutants (2019) #3

Dec 11, 2019

All in all, New Mutants #3 takes a step back to focus on some other characters, and it didn't hurt the story one bit. I found a new appreciation for this book knowing that this creative team had greater ambitions than just indulging in a space adventure. Whenever they jump back into that? I'm willing to wait for it since both halves are as important as the other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Mutants (2019) #4

Dec 18, 2019

New Mutants #4 presses forward with a storyline worth telling in the early stages of the Dawn of X books. With great opportunity comes greater problems. All mutants are learning this in one way or another whether it is out in space, or down on Earth and beyond the security of Krakoa.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Mutants (2019) #5

Jan 8, 2020

It's back to space with New Mutants #5, and that is where the fun begins again. It has been bold jumping between two stories, but at the very least it is good to know that Hickman isn't trying to make it too sporadic or frustrating having to wait x amount of time to know what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
New Mutants (2019) #6

Jan 29, 2020

Overall, by the end of New Mutants #6, it was hard to argue with the reason we got back to this story so soon. It was a story worth telling for the way that it gives the mutants closer to the ground a reality-check as to the world that is still cruel. Some things just don't change, and it was a message well received.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Mutants (2019) #7

Feb 19, 2020

It's through issues like New Mutants #7 where we are really seeing this variety they said we should be getting from every X-Book. New Mutants is fun, endearing, though knows when to get real when it matters. A well-rounded book that I would recommend as much as Marauders for the very same reasons.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Mutants (2019) #8

Feb 26, 2020

Through the conclusion of New Mutants #8, we are far from done with our stories on Earth. Even if you want more of the other team, there is no denying what is gained from experiencing what others go through who are still out there fighting the good fight for mutants who still need liberation from the human world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Mutants (2019) #9

Mar 11, 2020

Overall, New Mutants #9 was a good point in the story for this creative team to give these mutants their purpose. Saving mutants in need worldwide will always be a priority, but there should be teams like this who go the extra mile to be on top of that more than anything else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
New Mutants (2019) #10

Jun 10, 2020

By the end of the issue, New Mutants #10 is back on track as a book which offers something different from the other X-Books. No matter how big the mutant world has grown this time around, their mission hasn't changed. When new mutants are activated with no one to help, and in hostile territory? Teams like this are required to step in.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
New Mutants (2019) #12

Sep 3, 2020

I gotta say that so far New Mutants #12 is the winner of this run. At least since the direction shifted from the space adventure. This is the kind of story you expected when the New Mutants decided to take the fight to the people who were still making it hard to live in this world peacefully.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
New Suicide Squad #1

Jul 9, 2014

In the end things could be better with New Suicide Squad. There needs to be a change of focus and a reason given to us to care about these new characters. Maybe you could give this a couple more issues to show this, though already it is hard to say that you're comfortable with the direction of the story so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
New Suicide Squad #9

Jun 10, 2015

New Suicide Squad #9 is a fairly fast read, though the good thing is that there's nothing from the previous issues you need to be aware of to pick up this issue. Certainly new reader friendly as well which of course should be the main focus knowing that many of these series jump-started through the DCYOU initiative are supposed to help pull in more readers along with hitting targeted audiences. From what is seen in this first issue Suicide is obviously an action series, that can be serious, but also not take itself too seriously because these are villains of course.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
New Suicide Squad #10

Jul 8, 2015

Part of the appeal in this change-up for Suicide Squad is how it engages us visually. This has been less of action and more personal than usual. With Reverse Flash, there was something human to him underneath that freak-ish appearance. You could see someone who was actually baffled by the idea that these others who are working to shave time off of their sentences aren't looking for a positive change. It should be mentioned the appreciation for Harley to be seen with the costume she wears in her solo series. These shouldn't come off as two different Harley's in the same world. Then you have the other half of the story with Boomerang, Black Manta, and Deadshot that is also a bit more personal because we are seeing them more without their full costumes. We are seeing them when they aren't in full villain mode. Also the slight touch up on their costumes work too, no matter how small.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
New Suicide Squad #11

Aug 12, 2015

New Suicide Squad #11 was heavy on the action since the mission has been carried out. Not to sound like a broken record but this relaunch of the series is a step up when the fight sequences are a lot easier to follow than before. Suicide Squad before had the issue of too much going on at once and not knowing where to really turn your attention. This art team corrects this and for the better with the energy put into it. This was a decisive assault on the Corvus facility that showed why this League is a threat to be taken out. Their way of life is a threat itself, though your views change completely when you see all the weapons and tools they have at their disposal that would make any single villain dangerous. What stood out here was the affect of the fear toxin which created different reactions from people. If Harley was dangerous before, it was fun to see her let loose when under that kind of influence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
New Suicide Squad #12

Sep 9, 2015

New Suicide Squad #12 was a fast read, but again it had character as much of this story arc so far which is a nice change of pace from before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
New Suicide Squad #13

Oct 29, 2015

New Suicide Squad #13 is a great start to a new story arc that puts Waller in the center of the action for better or for worse. They are going for a different direction which should create more unique situations for this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
New Suicide Squad #14

Nov 18, 2015

New Suicide Squad #14 has upped the stakes for everyone in the most exciting of ways. Got some character exploration, and a side to Waller which could only be seen when forced to work side by side with those who hate her.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
New Suicide Squad #15

Dec 9, 2015

New Suicide Squad #15 gets into some deep stuff. This has sometimes been looked at as a series with a lot of style over substance, but right now they are showing this series can go the distance with substance to that story and art as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
New Suicide Squad #16

Jan 14, 2016

New Suicide Squad #16 reaches its thrilling conclusion for the 'Freedom' storyline. The best stories from Suicide Squad are when this team is pushed against the wall because that is when they are at their most dangerous. Willing to be more than what they allow themselves to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
New Suicide Squad #17

Feb 10, 2016

New Suicide Squad #17 is the best time to get back into Suicide Squad. This is how the book should be written having horror, action and moments that keep us at the edge of our seats. Not to mention that on top of this the writing for this issue strikes a balance with also being funny. And it wasn't just Harley either as a crutch which is appreciated.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
New Suicide Squad #18

Mar 9, 2016

New Suicide Squad #18 puts the Suicide Squad and Amanda Waller in a position they aren't really used to. Defeated, caught off guard, and facing some impossible odds. It will be thrilling to see what rabbit they can pull out of their hat to overcome this new threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
New Suicide Squad #19

Apr 6, 2016

New Suicide Squad #19 was a heavy reality check as to the wall the Suicide Squad are up against being outnumbered. But all a build up for a real fight to look forward to with New Suicide Squad #20. This issue got dark, made us feel some sympathy, and like the first issue proved how messy they have finally allowed this book to really be. Again the potential is in the embracing of what this book can really be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Suicide Squad #20

May 4, 2016

New Suicide Squad #20 makes you wish issue #21 was coming out next week. This may be a book where people are being fed to the slaughter, yet you can still manage to get a laugh out of it. That is accomplishing a lot if you ask me. Proof of what happens when a creative team is able to stretch their legs a bit.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
New Suicide Squad #21

Jun 16, 2016

New Suicide Squad #21 brings us to the end of Tim Seeley and Juan Ferreyra's New Suicide Squad run. And I couldn't be more proud of what they accomplished here. They came with a strong understanding of what made this team tick, what made them villains, what made them human, and of what can go wrong. If you are looking for a fresh take on Suicide Squad that is entertainment value at it's finest, this would be your go to run. Here's to hoping the Rebirth team can produce something as good.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
New Suicide Squad #22

Jul 21, 2016

New Suicide Squad #22 was a genuine way to close out this chapter of the team. Again we will be back with more Suicide Squad later on, but that doesn't change the fact that this volume and run made so much progress in capturing a different side to these villains which most stories don't explore outside of. Harley might even have her own solo book, but that doesn't mean we get to see her truly challenged in the role of being a villain.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
New Suicide Squad Annual #1

Sep 30, 2015

New Suicide Squad Annual #1 as an annual is just another issue, but it is a well executed final issue to this story arc. We lose a member which was shocking this early, but nonetheless meaningful to show that characters can change and will. Character development is just as important as the action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
New Warriors (2014) #1

Feb 19, 2014

Overall a great start for New Warriors. There may not have been a forming of the team, but Christopher Yost definitely went into this knowing how to put them all into the right place at the right time. There's a lot of potential from this story as one that focuses on younger heroes, those new that have come into power(mutants and inhumans), and the threat that all of them face when up against someone like the High Evolutionary. This book certainly is worth picking up with the hope that having this many on the same team doesn't make it hard to manage.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
New Warriors (2014) #2

Mar 5, 2014

Overall, issue #2 of New Warriors is an alright transition from the first issue. Not to say that the story is dull, or uninteresting, but there are definitely ways in which it can change to avoid losing readers in all the action. We need to be able to take a step back and be able to process everything that is occurring without being dragged from one fight to the other. Development of teams is a process and a little more time could be put into each of their parts in this story to bring focus and understanding. Otherwise, New Warriors is still a book worth following if you want to know what the future has in store for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Nightwing (2011) #19

Apr 19, 2013

Though most would expect that the Prankster as he is called would have some major role in this issue, but that is left to mystery as he appears at the very end. We see him forcing a man to have to fend for his life against a wolf, for reasons of making sizable income from child trafficking. He is is basically a corrupt man in leadership, which would question why someone like the Prankster is doing this to the man. Is he a vigilante? Villain? We can only guess the latter at the moment though hopefully the next issue should explain just who he is and what his connection will be to Nightwing. He just might be the reason that Chicago is against vigilantes such as himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Nightwing (2011) #21

Jun 14, 2013

He furthers shows this by putting Nightwing in a situation where he had to turn to the Prankster for help. Something that worked in his favor yet just created more bad press for him overall as the news has already made him out to be a nuisance. What you take from this is his desperation to find what he's looking for and has shown to be willing to cross the line to get what he came for. Overall this story is shaping up to be something great and there's so much more in store for Dick Grayson as Chicago is not what it seems to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Nightwing (2011) #22

Jul 11, 2013

A solid issue that managed to escalate the plot suddenly yet in a way that added that flare or intensity that it needed. It's safe to say that we might be hitting the climax of this story and it hasn't disappointed yet. Hopefully that remains the verdict till the end of this arc because it's is a nice change-up from what we are used to which is what this whole storyline seems to impose.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Nightwing (2011) #23

Aug 15, 2013

Overall it was a good issue with a consistent build up to the final showdown which we can expect in the upcoming issue. Kyle Higgins has been able to throw Nightwing in the unlikeliest situations and that itself has spawned an exciting adventure. The art is smooth, the coloring is vibrant with a subtle use of highlights to make the characters stand out, and it's just very detailed. This is just the best transition you could have asked for of Nightwing when he left Gotham.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Nightwing (2011) #24

Oct 10, 2013

This was a great conclusion because to an extent Grayson got what he wanted. The pacing was on point and the momentum was consistently rising keeping you interest in the story. This was a well done transition for Nightwing into Chicago knowing that this was an experience he did not expect. Had some fun elements as well, especially seeing him utilize the subway system to get around faster and easier. The ending Higgins gave us is something which opens doors to more stories for Nightwing, ones in which will put him in some interesting scenarios given that he has made yet another enemy by the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninja-K (2017) #1

Nov 15, 2017

As far as debut issues go for a new ongoing series, Ninja-K #1 knocked it out of the park as the full package. No stone was left unturned between venturing into the life of Ninjak, Colin King, or the Ninja Programme. We also know what kind of threat Ninjak faces, and the urgency to fight or survive. This new ongoing has the potential to build upon a lot in Ninjak's corner of the Valiant Universe and offers more to keep you invested in what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninjak (2015) #0

Sep 13, 2017

Ninjak #0 is a milestone to celebrate for what it delivers to fans who have either followed it up to this point or are new readers finding a place to jump into the story. A bit of a fast read for the size of the issue, though you get the right idea of what makes Colin who he is a Ninjak and what you can continue to expect from him moving forward with the first issue in November.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninjak (2015) #1

Mar 11, 2015

Ninjak #1 is a solid start to an adventure we get to take with Colin as we explore his world inside and out. This is the best time for readers to know Ninjak as the badass weapons specialist and genius as everyone else makes him out to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ninjak (2015) #2

Apr 22, 2015

Ninjak #2 makes a solid transition from this first issue giving us a better idea as to what we can look forward to from this series down the road. To see how Colin takes control of his life growing up, and how he will complete this mission that makes him look like he might be in over his head.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ninjak (2015) #3

May 20, 2015

Ninjak #3 delivers on the kind of excitement you'd expect when Ninjak is given a challenge. Impressive action scenes, stunning colors, character structure and more, you don't find many this appealing to the eyes. How this issue ends certainly will leave you wondering what more he has under his sleeve when his pocket full of tricks seem infinite.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Ninjak (2015) #4

Jun 24, 2015

When it comes to the art for Ninjak #4, how the style changed approaching Roku's past was a choice worth noting. To describe it I would say messy, and that is in a good way. It is the kind of style you want to see when the state she is in is lost and quite frantic as Roku realizes what she has now become. What I liked most about it is the progressive nature of seeing Roku's weariness going through those trials. You not only see the weariness from her face and body language, you see the doubt on her face as she struggles to understand what is going on. And to see that doubt turn into strength is powerful when facing what could have been her end at any turn. Overall it is good to see that they are willing to take a chance on switching up styles to change the atmosphere to fit both the character and type of story told.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Ninjak (2015) #5

Jul 29, 2015

Overall Ninjak #5 was a fast read, yet as entertaining as the others before. You want to see what will happen when Ninjak confronts the other six and whoever his main target is if just to see how they top this high intensity first arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ninjak (2015) #6

Aug 26, 2015

We have a change in the art team going into this story arc for Ninjak. It was odd at first if not only for the fact that you flip open that first page and almost think you might be reading Dead Drop. This is a different art team from that series, but the style is familiar in both detail and color scheme using reds and blues. Not a bad thing at all either because while Clay Mann's style was beautiful, like stated before these last few changes have been for the better as they fit the kind of story told. Especially one where Colin is out in the cold. That is again why the color choice works for this issue as well. Who knows if things will change as the story progresses, though right now there is an appreciation for the fact that the art and the story match in tone perfectly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninjak (2015) #7

Sep 9, 2015

Overall another thrilling issue of Ninjak that had a lot going on but made it work. Intense action sequence, twists, and a better grasp of Colin's past that in turn better allows us to understand him as a person.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ninjak (2015) #8

Oct 14, 2015

Ninjak #8 is not what you expect at all t first glance and for that reason one of the more favorable of the series so far. An issue that shakes things up from what before was the normal formula. And adds a little urgency to the situation knowing MI:6 is not very patient with Colin's methods right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ninjak (2015) #9

Nov 4, 2015

Getting back to the question posed above about Neville and the mystery of though memories missing from him. The story at the end, the Lost Files has been a great addition to the end of each issue, especially the end in how all has been answered to bring this mission full circle. If anyone questioned the motivation for taking down the Shadow Seven, all they had to do was pay attention to the details in this short story. Everything matters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ninjak (2015) #10

Dec 9, 2015

Ninjak #10 is the start of what looks to be another memorable story arc. Pick it up for another adventure through the Deadside, for Punk Mambo, or just to find out what may have happened to the Shadowman. This one has potential and not one you can afford to miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninjak (2015) #11

Jan 13, 2016

Ninjak #11 answered many questions we had about this story arc, and for only being on part 2 that shows a sense of pacing. This goes for their sense of urgency as well because this is still a spy game that they are playing at even though the field is not one-hundred percent suited for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ninjak (2015) #12

Feb 10, 2016

Ninjak #12 answers more questions for us about the Shadowman, while also cranking up that dial for what looks to be the climax we are heading into. Can the Shadowman be redeemed? That is what we hope to find out by the end of NInjak #13.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Ninjak (2015) #13

Mar 9, 2016

The end that came with Ninjak #13 made this a memorable arc for the series. Throwing Colin out of his comfort zone, and tossing him in with the likes of someone who matches his mouthy nature and attitude.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Ninjak (2015) #14

Apr 6, 2016

“The Siege of King's Castle” already feels like another winner with this drastic change in direction for Colin. Not the big man on top right now, and easy pickings for our obvious villain who is just waiting right around the corner to make her move.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Ninjak (2015) #15

May 11, 2016

Ninjak #15 ‘THE SIEGE OF KING'S CASTLE' – part 2 it did feel like there could have been more we took from this issue aside from it now being established that Roku is behind it all. We know that taking on Roku and Weaponeer will be no simple task this time, though that is about it for right now. Hopefully the next part cranks that dial to show what happens when you back Ninjak against a wall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ninjak (2015) #16

Jun 8, 2016

Ninjak #16 raises the stakes more than before and Colin finds out that revenge really can push someone to go as far as they did to ruin his life. The wait to get to this point could have got you for the knowledge of knowing Roku was behind this, though the execution of the reveal more than made up for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Ninjak (2015) #17

Jul 13, 2016

Ninjak #17 concludes ‘THE SIEGE OF KING'S CASTLE' and it was a story worth telling. It had all the action you could ask for, it was character driven, and answered so many questions you could have had throughout the series so far that was left to assumption. Who knows what the future holds for both characters, but this was a defining chapter in both of their lives which opens the doors to much more possibilities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Ninjak (2015) #18

Aug 10, 2016

Ninjak #18 is the start of something intriguing because demons of the past don't seem to find rest. There's someone big pulling the strings of this new mystery and you want to know how that person could truly be a threat to the pairing of Ninjak and the Eternal Warrior.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ninjak (2015) #19

Sep 7, 2016

Ninjak #19 cranked the dial and if you weren't invested in The Fist & The Steel after the first issue? Surely this creative team has your full attention now with where they are taking NInjak and Gilad. Who knows specifically where this is going, but things can only get crazier from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ninjak (2015) #21

Nov 23, 2016

Ninjak #21 brings us to the end of yet another story arc worth following for the places we go and the things we see along the way. Ninjak may live is his own corner of the Valiant Universe, but he still provides the right kind of adventures worth of an espionage story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ninjak (2015) #22

Dec 7, 2016

Are you excited to see the return of Master Darque? Because if you have followed enough Valiant stories up to this point then you know what happens when this villain is set loose. You expect nothing but the worst and that expectation is where Ninjak #22 leaves us as Roku kicks into gear with her own mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Ninjak (2015) #23

Jan 12, 2017

There's a good feeling about‘The Seven Blades of Master Darque' by the end of Ninjak #23. This one final mission is going to be a big one no matter how it ends. When Master Darque is involved, and with this being so personal you can expect nothing but the best that these characters can offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ninjak (2015) #24

Feb 8, 2017

The mission has been set, the stakes, as well as the consequences to be faced if Ninjak and the Shadow Seven do not pull off the impossible against Master Darque. Ninjak #24 will be memorable for how this story arc aims to satisfy two fandoms between Ninjak and Shadowman.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ninjak (2015) #25

Mar 29, 2017

Ninjak #25 was revealing on top of being the escalation we have been awaiting Everything comes down to what happens when we reach Master Darque because that is when all will make sense. Who can be trusted, who is the real enemy, and what is right and wrong here. Some people you can tell have good intentions, though others you are just waiting for the pieces to fall into place in order to figure out. This wave of mystery at the end of the day is what keeps you coming back for more in the world of Ninjak.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Ninjak (2015) #26

Apr 19, 2017

Like any story before in this series, Ninjak #26 closed out another must read adventure. If you're someone who read The Valiant, then the end wasn't all too surprising, but the emotion and execution are the main attraction for this agent who knows how to rise above the challenge.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Ninjak (2015) #27

May 17, 2017

Ninjak #27 was a fun little adventure for Ninjak that while its own thing still sets up some new developments that I wouldn't count out getting back to after Rapture. If there's one thing you keep in mind as a reader of Ninjak, it's that all things matter in the grand scheme of this evolving world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Ninjak vs. The Valiant Universe #1

Jan 10, 2018

Ninjak Vs. The Valiant Universe #1 is off to a good start. Momentum is key for a book like this and they are nailing getting from point A to point B with impact. If you were looking for a book that is all about the thrill of taking on the world, then this is the action-packed story for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
No One Left To Fight #1

Jul 3, 2019

Does No One Left to Fight #1 live up to the hype? It really does! I felt like I was reading a manga, which is an experience in comic form that you should never pass up. This story so far takes everything you love about Dragon Ball and other fight manga, and goes wild with it. With the added bonus of course of showing you things that the other stories aren't willing to go all in with. Exploring regret, resentment, and growing older will be the driving force of this story when the entertainment value keeps you coming back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
No One Left To Fight #2

Aug 7, 2019

While the first issue was a fun introduction into the world of No One Left to Fight, this second issue was a solid transition from it for the engagement that we got out of this trio. We know that this trip is not going to be a walk in the park for any of them. Ghosts of the past whether friendly or not can become a problem for them, and it can be anything as simple as leaving things on the wrong note.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
No One Left To Fight #3

Sep 4, 2019

This was another fun issue of No One Left to Fight, but there was no denying how this creative team pulled no punches putting us through the ringer with the emotional elements to this story. Before I said that you see that they were also having fun with this, though at the same time now you can see how they also pour their hearts into the book. They care about the growth of these characters and right now it shows through every flip of the page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
No One Left To Fight #4

Oct 2, 2019

There may have been no one left to fight when this book began, but surely no one assumed that this book would actually go five issues without an actual fight? No One Left to Fight #4 struck an excellent balance between being character driven and setting things up for big finish. I for one am eager for what comes next because you know that this creative team is saving their best work for last.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
No One Left To Fight #5

Nov 6, 2019

By the end of this final issue, I wasn't telling myself this was the book I always wanted. I was telling myself that this is the book I wanted more of, because the truth is that it's never truly the end for a book like this if enough readers are behind it. Not when they even ended this on a note which makes you want to see what comes next. There was someone left to fight, and it was a fight worth waiting for. What we got here? This is what readers should expect from an issue-length brawl in a comic, because when you commit to that? You go all in! It was the kind of fight you want this creative team to be able to give to us again. That on top of a story which challenges everything that makes up your average fight manga.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Old Man Logan #1

May 28, 2015

The best decision made for this series was having Andrea Sorrentino as artist and Marcelo Maiolo on colors. These two make an amazing team on art capturing the brutal nature of Old Man Logan. From the very first page it feels as though they really had fun with this book. The panel styles, the art styles in general, and the many different gradients of colors constantly shifting and matching the shifting tone of the issue. The colors in particular you should note as vibrant and lively matching the fast pacing of the story, especially when it came to the action scenes. There was also no shortage of red and blood which looked stunning in the beginning with the characters desaturated. Aside from this the effects are something you always recognize because it takes a dedicated art team to add that touch. Smoke, blurred motions, highlights, and much more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Old Man Logan #2

Jun 18, 2015

Just like the issue before, Old Man Logan continues to be one of the more visually appealing titles spinning out of Secret Wars. The art style this art team brings to the table is so unique that you couldn't imagine this drawn any other way. You wouldn't get that same mix of grit and elegance. This is a series where are no punches pulled, and yet there is an admiration when they put the effort into making every scene distinct. That distinction is seen through the way each page is laid out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #1

Aug 14, 2019

By the end of this first issue, I could tell that Once & Future was going to be one of the most entertaining stories of magic and mysticism we were going to get this year. This one gave the impression that it was actually going to be a mix of a lot of things, which is not a bad thing at all. Who doesn't love a book that is able to get different reactions from you? I'm almost certain you might have a few issues where you will go “Oh ****”, others where you might get hit in the feels, and somewhere you might get a good laugh out of it. Though more importantly? I think this one will have you coming back for more because there is a sense of wonder to uncovering hidden truths and histories.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #3

Oct 16, 2019

They found one heck of a way to throw us into the thick of this battle to keep the sword from the stone out of the hands of Arthur. Once & Future #3 was engaging, entertaining, action-packed, and even enlightening. I'd call it the full package among fantasy series currently on shelves. Right now this is not the book to overlook from BOOM! Studios.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #4

Nov 20, 2019

By the end of Once & Future #4, its hard to say if Duncan is the hero or the victim of this tale. This is a new experience when the guy is a full adult with his world shattered between what he never knew about his family and understanding the sacrifices one must make to reach the Holy Grail. For once you really don't envy the main character being exposed to a fantasy world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #5

Dec 18, 2019

For a series like this which takes a bold step towards the dark side of fantasy, Once & Future #5 is compelling for how it struck a beautiful balance between creating the makings of a proper hero and a memorable moment shared between family. There was a lot of tension created from Gran's secrets coming to light, but this was the perfect time to truly put their bond to the test when it mattered most.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Once & Future #6

Jan 22, 2020

With the conclusion of Once & Future #6, we certainly got the full package on this adventure with Duncan, Gran, and Rose. This chapter was action-packed, it gave us a stoic hero, and it was heartwarming when it mattered most. It was awesome as a whole to get this visual of what a Duncan who finally accepts his role in the larger story looks like.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #7

Mar 25, 2020

Overall, the events of Once & Future #7 will make you believe that the right call was made to turn this book into an ongoing. Once & Future is a book that no one else is offering in this genre. What is magic when everything you knew about it that was pure, in reality is anything but?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #8

Jun 24, 2020

To say that Duncan and Bridgette are in over their heads is a heck of an understatement after what they get themselves into in Once & Future #8. They had their work cut out for them before, but standing up to the freight-train that is this Beowulf? Like me, you are going to feel the pain of having to wait till that next issue to see how they get out of this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #9

Jul 15, 2020

Expect the unexpected with this book. That is what I have come to accept by the conclusion of Once & Future #9. This is a book which thrives on the idea that the only way to keep your head is to know the story, because Duncan and Brigette are in for a rude awakening if they don't pick up on that soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #10

Aug 19, 2020

Overall, this was a very intense issue which knocks you at the edge of your seat. Knowing that Gran or Duncan might make it out of this doesn't change the fear in the fact that there is a monster on the rampage which seems almost unstoppable now that they've killed the one person who could stop it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Once & Future #11

Sep 16, 2020

In the end, this was as intense of an issue as you would have expected. Once & Future #11 knocks you at the edge of your seat because it was anyone's guess as to how this was going to end, or how this was going to be something you could put a lid on. To say that these two are in over their heads is quite the understatement at this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Once & Future #13

Nov 18, 2020

All in all, another thrilling issue of Once & Future. As the start of a new story arc, issue #13 gave us plenty to look forward to in the issues to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Once & Future #14

Dec 16, 2020

In the end, Once & Future #14 was a bloody mess which allowed us to see different sides to the women of this trio. Rose proved that she can do more than help from the sidelines, and Gran showed a side to her that you didn't know existed behind that tough exterior.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Once & Future #15

Jan 20, 2021

All in all, this was another excellent issue of Once & Future. Issue #15 was very informative for the depth given to the madness of the McGuire family. Just when you think you have seen and heard it all…

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #13

Nov 25, 2015

Outcast #13 overall was a solid issue for the build up and emotion poured into the exorcism through both writing and artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #14

Dec 23, 2015

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #14 had a solid focus on what happens when the law collides with what can't be explained. Also the struggle of people like the priest and Kyle doing what they need to do without the consequences of reality.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #15

Jan 27, 2016

There's a good consistency with the artwork for Outcast #15. This for the most part comes with the quality of the artwork. Though for this issue in particular you take the focus on the characters to stand out the most. After everything that has happened, most of them are on edge about what comes next. Dealing with that immediate outcome was the center of attention. The power in those scenes came from the expressions brought out of them to sell these moments. A lot of anger and frustration directed towards one another as you would expect.Overall Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #15 brushed through a lot of important character moments, but at least focused on what was necessary to keep the story on a steady path.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #16

Feb 24, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #16 is a step up from the past two issues when we start to get the ball rolling on these demons drawing the line as to where they stand with Outcasts.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #17

Mar 23, 2016

Not the progress in story and character development that was hoped for, but Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #17 still kept the ball rolling with much to look forward to from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #18

Apr 27, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #18 brings us to the end of another story arc that shakes up the story for the best. This may be that push we need for the pacing to pick up just a bit. The pacing isn't a problem of course, yet with so much build up the anticipation eats away at you to know how far this can go. Overall Outcast #18 did a solid job of wrapping up most loose ends that needed to be addressed before we could really move on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #19

Jul 27, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #19 changes everything, and even though it was a fast read it was self-contained to what we needed to know and only that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #20

Aug 24, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #20 is a good kind of different. We are left on a note that creates the same level of anticipation when you had with the last issue wondering what can go wrong, or what will go wrong.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #21

Sep 28, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #21 shook things up in a way that creates the kind of clarity to the situation at hand, steering this plot where you expected it to go. We know the general plan of Sidney and his people, so this was the time to put the pieces together for Kyle and Anderson to understand what they have to do next in response.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #22

Oct 26, 2016

Overall Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #22 shakes things up to the point where this is now becoming more of a legitimate conflict rather than a game of cat and mouse. Fighting back is easier said than done for these two, though it's one step after the other. From here we just need to see more depth given to what is going on behind the scenes. As in some real details to take from this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #23

Nov 23, 2016

Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #23 made a big move by the end of this issue that shifts the tide of this war. Something good could come out of Kyle's critical decision or there could be some consequences. Some bells you just can't unring and you look forward to Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #24 to figure out if Kyle chose the wrong time to ring it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #24

Jan 11, 2017

Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #24 was titled ‘No Turning Back' with good reason. We lost a great character, and we gained one full of mystery. Plenty of questions to ask yourself by the end of this issue and once again the doors to this world have been opened up just a little bit more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #25

Feb 22, 2017

Everything definitely changes by the end of Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #25. From here I do believe there can actually be direction where we can begin to know where this story is going rather than simply understanding in the moment of revelation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #26

Mar 29, 2017

‘The Sharpened Edge' doesn't quite live up to the name of the issue like most others tend to, but Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #26 gets us through a lot of set-up that pushes us way further into this new chapter than you could have hoped for. This story and plot is really picking up and I'm glad that recent events have sharpened the perspective of what needs to be done between Outcasts and these things.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #28

Jun 7, 2017

Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #28 was a big step forward in a number of ways. It definitely lived up to the title ‘His Growing Flock'. Nobody is safe, but everyone in their own way are more prepared than ever before for what comes next. Even in a period of darkness you can find the light in through this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #29

Jul 26, 2017

‘Unwelcomed' is one of the better issues to date for Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta. Aside from that one nag that goes for the book as a whole, this was an excellently written and drawn issue. It had action, and it gave us more depth to characters who we need at this point to further the plot. The gloves really came off when this became more than simply Kyle winging it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #30

Sep 6, 2017

If anybody thought this was already serious business, Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #30 corrects you on that assumption and cranks the dial. We know much more than we did from the issue before, and the story could only grow through the introduction of someone who gives you a real reason to fear the unknown. This is not some old man or middle-aged man with a failing body.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #32

Dec 27, 2017

Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #32 definitely feels like they are building up to a war with the start of 'Invasion'. With both sides of this conflict aware of the other and what each are capable of, now was the best time to see where everyone's head are at. Rowland whipping this hotbed of demonic activity into shape, and Kyle accepting that Anderson may to some extent have his head in the right place in preparing for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #33

Jan 31, 2018

Outcast By Kirkman And Azaceta #33 took us deeper into what we have to look forward to when crap hits the fan. After the events of this episode that may come sooner than you would imagine and I appreciate the pacing there. Preparing for a war is great, but it also comes with the fear that too many issues would be spent on that and nothing significant actually happening. This issue proved that fear wrong, despite who has gotten caught up in a bad situation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #34

Mar 21, 2018

Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #34 is where this war begins to get serious. The plot progression was key and they nailed it through Kyle realizing the kind of warrior he needs to be, and Rowland knowing what buttons to push for answers he can't fully rely on the others to get for him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #35

May 9, 2018

Outcast By Kirkman and Azaceta #35 was a well-paced issue for where it takes us on the fourth part of “Invasion”. Nothing is going to be the same moving forward when now is the time for everyone to put up with the choice they have made that war is the only way this will end. Truthfully this won't be a war unless someone gets a bit more than they bargained for.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #36

Jun 27, 2018

There was no better way to bring this story arc to an end, and I can't help but wish that there was more. You finish this issue and you just can't help but want more when they have now given us a taste of what it really means to be an Outcast. Outcast by Kirkman and Azaceta #36 took both story and art to new heights, and it is good to know that they can still crank that dial when the moment demands it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #37

Dec 19, 2018

Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #37 was a solid start to what will smoothly take us back into Kyle and company's fight for their lives. It's still hard to believe that this series will come to an end at issue #48, but that is still months of storytelling for us to look forward to as the plot continues to thicken. We have seen some crazy accomplishments from Kyle as an Outcast, and I want to see what else they can do when pushed to the limit.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #38

Jan 23, 2019

It is by the end of Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #38 that you certainly can feel the end game approaching. We've seen what it at stake for the people within the walls, but this was a great time to also address the stakes for the darkness. They might not be on the side that you would call good, but this is at the core a game of survival.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #39

Feb 27, 2019

The stakes keep rising, and the events of Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #39 proved once again that no one is safe at the end of the day. When you're ruled by either the unknown or fear, finding that fire to rise to the occasion will always be easier said than done. The end may be near for Outcast, but that doesn't mean this story isn't revving up to something big.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #42

Aug 7, 2019

Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #42 will definitely go down as one of the more memorable issues of the series. I still have my problems with their approach to the the end of this series, but for now I can overlook this when this issues are still quality work between the story and art. To be honest, that is all you can really ask for from a series you have invested your time in for almost forty issues now. December is going to be one heck of a wait for the cliffhanger they hit us with!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #43

Dec 26, 2019

They may have left us waiting, but Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #43 worth the wait! Credit where it is due that the release of each issue has almost always been worth the wait. Which is more than you could ever say for the tv adaptation that so quickly died in the background. Right here in this final arc is the place to be when its a new game with all the pieces now on the board.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #44

Jan 29, 2020

This turned out to be one of the slower issues, though not at all in a bad way. The thing about a book like Outcast is that many of the chapters are met with a steady pace. Something you can appreciate because everything which unfolds comes naturally. Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #44 continues to create hype for what the rest of this final arc has in store for us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #45

May 20, 2020

Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #45 was overall another good issue for the story progression, and depth that we got out of this plot. By the end of this issue the stakes were raised once more, while at the same time giving everyone just a bit more to worry about when the final confrontation comes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Outcast By Kirkman & Azaceta #46

Sep 17, 2020

To think we are just two issues away from the finale to this series, and already we are seeing some amazing feats of strength from the Outcasts again. Outcast by Kirkman & Azaceta #46 was worth the wait, and I say this because the wait for these final issues is the most frustrating thing that this creative team has done since the last arc kicked off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Outer Darkness #1

Nov 7, 2018

I feel like Outer Darkness can be another winner for Skybound for the potential that this story carries. Outer Darkness doesn't go the normal route as most horror stories would, and doesn't fear the dangers of jumping into the abyss with a mission. This series embraces it and that should make this a thrilling adventure moving forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Outlawed (2020) #1

Mar 18, 2020

Marvel has not forgotten their young heroes. It was only a matter of time before the world did not either. Unfortunately for the Champions, they aren't so forgiving when there has been one disaster too many for them to overlook. Of course there must be more to this than what we are seeing on the surface, but the purpose of this first issue was to get us excited for what's to come with these drastic changes to the hero world. Outlawed #1 nailed creating that excitement, even if there are some rough edges that will need to get smoothed out along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Peter Cannon: Thunderbolt (2019) #1

Jan 30, 2019

Peter Cannon: Thunderbolt #1 introduced us to the very definition of the reluctant hero. Hard to say if this one is worth coming back for more, but definitely not without potential for where this story could go by the end of the first issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Phantom Stranger (2012) #11

Aug 8, 2013

The way this issue was handled is just brilliant. Someone had pointed out earlier that they were disappointed because there hasn't been that “war” yet, but I don't think it's all to necessary to press towards rather than the journey to that point. This issue shows what can come out of this story internally because it's not just a fight about who was right, it's about fighting to stop something which is toying with who they are as people. It started with Superman, and now all three Justice League teams are at each others throats. It's a losing battle and right now we're just seeing how far they'll fall before it ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Phoenix Resurrection: The Return Of Jean Grey #3

Jan 10, 2018

Phoenix Resurrection: Return Jean Grey #3 starts to give us some answers and that is all you can ask for when following the madness that is the Phoenix returning. Overall this story is unpredictable which is a step up from most stories where someone is coming back to life. Needless to say they were already on the right track since by all accounts Jean is already alive.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Phoenix Resurrection: The Return Of Jean Grey #4

Jan 24, 2018

Phoenix Resurrection: The Return Of Jean Grey #4 is where even for one issue this felt like an actual X-Men book. There was a sense of danger in every direction, and sometimes the best thing about the X-Men books was the constant fear for what dangers lurk around the corner. When that danger is the Phoenix, anything goes. Nightmares and daydreams did in fact spill over into the world, revealing mind-bending cracks in this reality to both Jean and the X-Men. The next issue is where all cards should be laid on the table, and hopefully they make all of this build-up worth the investment put into this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Phoenix Resurrection: The Return Of Jean Grey #5

Jan 31, 2018

Did Phoenix Resurrection: Return Jean Grey #5 make this search for Jean worth it? It damn well did. Some writers out there can take a few pointers on how to bring a hero back to life. This was a beautiful story told where they could finally break the cycle for Jean after so many years. Habits can kill, and they did time after time because Jean never confronted the Phoenix on this level. Whatever the future holds for Jean after this story, it is good to know that she moves forward with acknowledgment of everything that was, everything that she lost, and everything that she has to live for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Pisces #1

Apr 29, 2015

Pisces is definitely a series worth giving a shot if you want a story that is not afraid to get personal.To show that life isn't fair, and neither are the people who live it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Plus Ultra #1

Jan 21, 2016

Plus Ultra #1 is a fun start to looking at the life of a superhero from a different angle. We've been opened up to her world and they have important things to explore about what it means to be a genuine hero in a superficial world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Plus Ultra #2

Feb 24, 2016

Plus Ultra #2 progressively gets better and puts substance above style. This story has heart to it, and this is the kind of book when need to see more often on shelves right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Plus Ultra #3

Apr 13, 2016

Plus Ultra #3 is a step in the direction with an actual plot developing with these activists and their aggression towards Zero Technologies.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Power Man and Iron Fist (2016) #1

Feb 17, 2016

They say expect old friends, hired goons, crime lords, weird magic, plenty of power, a flurry of fists and as much bromance as you can handle with Power Man And Iron Fist #1. This is exactly what we got and a bit more. There are plenty of books to read from Marvel right now, but if you're looking for a book which stays true to the characters and down to Earth appeal? This is the one for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Power Pack (2020) #1

Nov 25, 2020

Whether you're a longtime fan of the Power Pack, or new to these characters. Power Pack #1 offers a wholesome superhero story which you don't see often enough these days. This is a family back together and one which enjoys the brighter side of saving the day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Power Rangers: Drakkon New Dawn #1

Aug 19, 2020

Overall, Power Rangers: Drakkon New Dawn #1 was a book worth taking a chance on. You have to give credit where it is due that they have left no stone unturned in the Power Rangers multiverse.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Powers of X #1

Jul 31, 2019

This right here is as daring as it gets. If you thought Hickman's present storyline for the X-Men was mindblowing in House of X #1? Powers of X #1 challenges you to think again. In fact, it challenges you to think harder than you ever have about the mutant's place on not only Earth, but the entirety of the universe! This right here is how you get readers and fans talking about the X-Men again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Powers of X #2

Aug 14, 2019

For anyone who is still on the fence about Powers of X, I believe this second issue gives you a bit more confidence in this creative team's attempt at telling a story of mutants from start to finish within the span of six issues. Some things were expected to be a bit reaching, but the context to this grand plan is something you can't take for granted.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Powers of X #3

Aug 21, 2019

At the end of the day we were simply awaiting for when things would go south, but it was only in defeat that we could see that there was much more to this than what we were seeing on the surface. Even if at times you didn't get what was going on in the previous issues, Powers of X #3 proved to us that everything should be taken at face value when the X-Men really did come too far for this to be their only end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Powers of X #4

Sep 11, 2019

By the end of Powers of X #4, I was overly joyed to know that halfway through this mini we could still see more of how these lifetimes played through. It doesn't matter that you know that majority of these end in disaster, you would still want to know what led the X-Men to every life-changing decision they made.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Powers of X #5

Sep 25, 2019

Powers of X #5 was a lot to take in, and I have to say there was a lot to love about the info they dumped onto our laps. With each passing issue of Powers of X we understand that much more how this vision of Krakoa came to be, and where it would lead. Knowing the things we know now, it does make you wonder all the more how this set of stories will lead into the Dawn of X-Men.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Powers of X #6

Oct 9, 2019

The inevitable truth came, and it was quite the tough pill to swallow. Will that be the case with this timeline? Or this be the timeline where the mutant race conquers the truth which holds a grip over their future? Who knows! But that is what now captivates us to this new dawn of the X-Men. Powers of X #6 gave us a lot to look forward to when the X-Men have now have their future in their hands, and everything will come down to what they are willing to do to keep it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Predator: Hunters #2

Jun 7, 2017

The Predator hunters have definitely come looking for big game, and Predator: Hunters #2 was a good taste of what they have to offer when there are no victims.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Predator: Hunters #3

Jul 5, 2017

The ten-to-one odds and machine guns favor the humans, but Predator: Hunters #3 flipped everything about this right on its head. This was a good taste of what we could expect from just first contact but it is the unknown that just may do this team in. I like that something as simple as what you don't know can have such a big impact on the way this fight will end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Predator: Hunters #4

Aug 2, 2017

Now understanding that there was more than one Predator was one thing, but what we learn at the end of Predator: Hunters #4 changes everything. I'm glad I gave this book a chance because what we look for these days are AvP stories which break from the mold. Predator: Hunters does exactly that by willingly pitting human versus Predator, and an unbelievable third-party involvement.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Predator: Hunters #5

Sep 6, 2017

Predator: Hunters #5 marks the end of the first in a while that focuses solely on the Predators. This is not to say a few others recently didn't, but they didn't make their world as important as it could be. Predator: Hunters is a fresh release from the murderfest that is the unfortunate encounters with the Xenomorphs, where the humans for once are on the attack rather than running scared for issues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Predator: Hunters II #1

Aug 8, 2018

I found Predator: Hunters II #1 to be very satisfying. A stronger start than the first issue of the first mission. With the middleman cut, they were able to jumped straight into this new mission, new threat, and new set of problems to deal with along the way. Its a strange new world when humanity has the grit to take the fight to the Predators.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Predator: Hunters II #2

Sep 5, 2018

I had my thing about the pacing, but for the most part this was another solid issue of Predator: Hunters II. This second issue added much-needed context to the mission, while at the same time raising the stakes of being able to find this Predator before the wrong people do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Predator: Hunters II #3

Oct 24, 2018

Predator: Hunters II #3 was definitely the better issue of the past three. The pacing has picked up with nothing between these two forces but the Predator itself. Now that the US forces had their crack, we now know what we have to be anxious for when it is our hunter's turn. They will either rise to the occasion given the advantages they have, or buckle when push comes to shove.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Predator: Hunters II #4

Jan 9, 2019

With the end of Predator: Hunters #4, we now have two memorable stories told for these characters. This is not a series to sleep on when jumping into a story where the hunters are the prey. These Hunters jump into the fire to fight things that in other stories would simply slaughter unsuspecting humans. What better way to shake things up than to put together a team that has had enough of their existence on Earth? That is what Part I and II have given us and much more!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Predator: Hunters III #1

Feb 5, 2020

Overall, Predator: Hunters III #1 was a bloody reintroduction back into this world. It is of course recommended that you read the first two parts before jumping into this one, but if you already did? Part III is going to be worth investing in for the same reasons you did for the others. There is action, no punches are pulled either, and you know it is all going to rev up to an actual battle between two forces who know what to expect from the other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Predator: Hunters III #2

Mar 18, 2020

Predator: Hunters III #2 served as an exhilarating transition from the first issue. We walk away from this second chapter with a good sense of what to expect from this group of Predators, what to expect from the newly arrived Russian team that is after the same quarry, and from our team of Hunters who need to get themselves together if they want to survive what they are getting themselves into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Predator: Life and Death #1

Mar 2, 2016

Predator: Life and Death #1 was a good start to this new mini series. It is new reader friendly, stays true to what fans like about the Predator series, and straightforward with what you will get out of this story between the characters and plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Predator: Life and Death #2

Apr 6, 2016

Predator: Life And Death #2 had the escalation we anticipated for this stage in the miniseries. Not only this but the little twists and turns to really shake up how you could assume this ends for Paget and her team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Predator: Life and Death #3

May 4, 2016

This issue leaves us on a cliffhanger leading into the final issue, but Predator Life And Death #3 proves that they are trying to make a worthwhile story that will have a definite ending even if they all die. Because right now things are not looking so good for the Marines and everyone else stuck with them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Predator: Life and Death #4

Jun 1, 2016

As most of us know, the next story from this universe is Prometheus: Life and Death. Fans will be excited, and should be excited when finding out how Predator: Life And Death #4 leads into this next chapter. Knowing that half of the creative team will still be on for the next story gives you high hopes because Predator: Life And Death fit so well with what you find thrilling about this franchise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Project: Superpowers (2018) #1

Aug 1, 2018

Project Superpowers #1 is an excellent point for any reader to jump in whether new or old. The modern world comes with new rules, and 2018 was the best year to choose when things couldn't be more different. The people are different, the threats, and the risks to the heroes who find out that it's not as simple anymore as punching the villain and going home.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Project: Superpowers (2018) #2

Sep 5, 2018

Project Superpowers #2 wasted little time at all setting the stakes for the new threat unfolding, properly introducing our heroes, and the villain as well. What I appreciate about golden age hero stories is that they do not pull punches. You get real dangers, real consequences, and real impact from these character's actions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Project: Superpowers (2018) #3

Oct 10, 2018

Project Superpowers #3 had great momentum and progress made in this third chapter. There was so much to take in between action, discovery, and defining of what it means to be a hero at a time like this. Depth was given across the board, and we were given so much to look forward to when these relics of the past are given an enemy who knows right where to hit them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Project: Superpowers (2018) #4

Nov 21, 2018

Project Superpowers #4 raises the stakes in this fight in a big way, quite literally by the end of this issue. Excellent pacing, satisfying action, and thrilling entrance that P:andora has made to emphasize his need to reclaim his Box.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Project: Superpowers (2018) #5

Jan 2, 2019

Another thrilling issue of Project Superpowers when issue #5 was all about putting the resolve of these heroes to the test against the might of P:andora. As a superhero story, we are set up to anticipate where it will be that these heroes rise to the occasion when it matters most. Everyone gets knocked down, but it is how you get back up that stands out more than anything else.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Project: Superpowers (2018) #6

Feb 6, 2019

Project Superpowers #6 delivered on one heck of a final stand. These days it's hard to get a superhero story with this much heart, while at the same time focusing on more than one hero. This book one was memorable for everything that reminds us of what it means to be a superhero, capes or no capes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #2

Oct 15, 2014

Prometheus: Fire and Stone #2 was a great transition from the previous issue as we both learn a lot new while getting all of the horrors we should expect when a crew unaware of what lurks on this planet are facing impossible odds at survival. Really you can read this and Alien while holding off on Alien Vs. Predator since that series doesn't follow the proper order in terms of release.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #3

Nov 12, 2014

Prometheus: Fire and Stone #3 is simply a tale of what happens when you let curiosity get the best of you. To take you onto a plane where the previous crew vanished, to not be aware of the possible threat and be properly equipped, and then to tamper with things you could not possibly comprehend that has consequences. That is everything you could expect from a story like this and the execution was there from start to finish in showing just how screwed this recovery team was for stepping foot on that planet.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Prometheus: Fire and Stone #4

Dec 10, 2014

Prometheus: Fire and Stone #4 is something worse than finding yourself trapped between a rock and a hard place. That whole mission is a walking nightmare brought to life within your hands and you have nothing to do but gasp with every flip of the page. This blockbuster crossover does break new ground, and others should take notice of what happens when you take your licensed material seriously putting it in the right hands.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Prometheus: Fire and Stone - Omega #1

Feb 11, 2015

Prometheus: Fire and Stone – Omega wraps up the story of Prometheus on LV-223 and it was one worth telling. People died, they showed their best and their worst. It was all you could want from a continuation of the movie franchise and more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Prometheus: Life and Death #1

Jun 8, 2016

Prometheus: Life And Death #1 came with the same intensity as you hoped it would. You don't title this “Trapped With an Angry God” and not show that God's wrath the way it did when it first awoke. The stakes have never been higher for them to get the job done because in space no one can hear you scream.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Prometheus: Life and Death #2

Jul 13, 2016

Prometheus: Life And Death #2 is where this truly becomes a sequel to Fire and Stone indeed. No punches pulled showing the newcomers what survival really means either. This is going to be one heck of a mission that will either find its way back on track by the end or burn to ash before it can even begin again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Prometheus: Life and Death #3

Aug 10, 2016

Prometheus: Life And Death #3 made some progress and got through much of the development that we needed to get through in order to move towards an escalation. They may not have acted on the decision they made, but it is one that leaves you anticipating the next issue for anything and everything that could or would go wrong with their plan of survival. Because it is either hide or make a final stand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Prometheus: Life and Death #4

Sep 14, 2016

Prometheus: Life And Death #4 doesn't quite end the way you think it will, but it shows you that Dark Horse is planning the long game with the AVP franchise. Smart because what stories we get next focus, concentrate and consolidate on different aspects of this world progressing. By the end of this issue you will come to understand why the next chapter is called Aliens: Life And Death. Those who die really are and will be the lucky ones.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Prometheus: Life and Death (One Shot) #1

Apr 26, 2017

The end was to some extent satisfying, though not without some problems in wrapping this last installment up. The Prometheus: Life and Death One-Shot dared to ask questions which others were not bold enough to ask, and it takes us into battle where we do see what happens when capable people are put into what could be impossible odds. This creative team chose substance at the end and it was the smart move when this gave Life and Death the quality it needed to break from the mold of other stories in the AvP franchise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Psi-Lords #1

Jun 19, 2019

For anyone out there who loves a good sci-fi mystery, Psi-Lords #1 hits you with a brilliant start that gets the wheels turning in your brain. If you aren't captivated by what these four astronauts can do, you are trying to figure out just what the big plan is for them. Being an ongoing, there is luckily no rush to unravel what has been set in motion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Psi-Lords #2

Jul 24, 2019

Overall, Psi-Lords #2 does a solid job of solidifying your interest in this series. This is definitely a story where you brace yourself for the unexpected, and more than any of the other stories that have taken us into the furthest reaches of space. The end of this issue in particular sends a message that you should assume nothing, till you know everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Psi-Lords #3

Aug 21, 2019

They say that the powers of this cosmic foursome is jaw-dropping, but what about the writing in general for Psi-Lords? Issue #3 was compelling for all the ways that they captivated us through plot progression and character development, only to be hit once more with the reality that the unknown is the greatest danger to this team. How they made us drop our guard through lost histories and revelations was excellent.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Psi-Lords #5

Oct 16, 2019

Through the events of Psi-Lords #5, we see that this is another one of the more important issues of the series so far. Psi-Lords #4 brought clarity to a lot of things, but this issue took that next step forward to genuinely begin laying the foundation for everything to follow. Stopping the trajectory of the Gyre will be easier said than done, dealing with the enemies at the top will even be harder, and even then it seems like there is so much more to unfold about this story and plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Psi-Lords #6

Nov 13, 2019

Who could have guessed that through the course of one trial, everything could suddenly fall into place for this story? I talked about finding clarity in the direction of this story before, but Psi-Lords #6 laid all the cards on the table in a brilliant way. You look for that one milestone for the story progression, and this creative team nailed it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Psi-Lords #7

Dec 4, 2019

The big hype for Psi-Lords #7 at the end of the day was that one would die by the end of the issue, but I loved that there was so much more to take from this chapter than that. With each passing issue, and with greater clarity, the momentum is picking up and taking us along for the ride. We are learning a lot about these characters, and the corner of the universe they have been trapped in, but not once did they let us forget the urgency in putting a stop to the trajectory of this vampire star before it collides with Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Psi-Lords #8

Jan 8, 2020

Either way, I think the events of this cosmic climax of Psi-Lords should make it worth the wait. When the last run of Divinity came to a close, there was definitely a void in the cosmic adventures through the Valiant Universe, but Psi-Lords has more than filled it and then some. Once more proving that we have seen nothing yet when journeying outside the limits of Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punk Mambo #1

Apr 24, 2019

As they said! New characters, new places, same Punk attitude! Punk Mambo #1 is everything Punk wrapped up into an entertaining solo adventure. It's like getting to know her all over again, and fall in love with her all over again. This is the supernatural world of the Valiant Universe as you have never seen it before. In contrast to the other stories, this one is more of an experience than another thriller.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Punk Mambo #2

May 29, 2019

The supernatural spectacular continues in Punk Mambo #2, and we walked away learning a lot about this misfit mambo. Whether it was re-emphasizing things we already knew, or making sure that new readers were welcomed properly into her world, this second issue excelled for the balance given to fleshing out her character while at the same time furthering the plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Punk Mambo #3

Jun 26, 2019

It's rough when you meet your match. Worse when you don't realize this until it's too late. By the end of Punk Mambo #3, the score is definitely against Punk Mambo, but now those points have shifted to the true mastermind behind these kidnappings and acts of evil. The game has now changed with a better understanding of what is at stake, and the rules that have been set.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Punk Mambo #4

Jul 31, 2019

Punk Mambo #4 is the kind of issue you wait for from a solo series. These are never complete without that space taken advantage of to flesh out the main character or the way that their world works, in ways that other creative teams have not before. Beyond that? An excellent build-up to the finale, and embrace of what makes Punk Mambo the ultimate underdog in the.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Punk Mambo #5

Aug 14, 2019

Punk Mambo #5 brings our first solo for this fan-favorite character to a close. This was worth the wait for everything that this creative team made possible for us getting to know Punk Mambo. We knew her by her personality and reputation up to this point, but this was the time to genuinely pull back the layers for us to get to know her in a new way. Not to mention it was the time for us to really see her as the badass we know her to be in her element.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Quantum and Woody #3

Sep 5, 2013

There are many books that Valiant has which are of high quality, but if you want to get a legitimate laugh? Quantum And Woody is the book that you should be reading. They are established heroes in their own right and show that progression towards that transition even if they aren't good for the job. Quantum And Woody has a lot of potential and is one that you should anticipate every time it hits the shelves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Quantum and Woody #4

Oct 2, 2013

The layout of the story I really liked because parts of the story are broken down in a way that transitions them smoothly. When it is either changing perspective or setting you have that black bar that separates them in a way that you also know what the focus is. This issue has that gritty feel to it, and it's aided by a lot of disturbing imagery that is easy to draw a reaction from.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Quantum and Woody #5

Nov 6, 2013

Quantum and Woody #5 plays on that relationship you see everyday from two people who live together under circumstances out of their control. Something that for the most part goes without fail, and having James Asmus' great execution helps. Overall this issue leaves you feeling like you had just watched the beginning of a new sitcom. That's more than reason enough to read this book aside from the fact that Ming Doyle is now on art. It looks better than before in terms of both quality and detail.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Quantum and Woody (2017) #1

Dec 20, 2017

Quantum & Woody #1 was fun and the right opportunity to get to know these characters all over again. To fall in love with them all over again as well when there's so much unfortunate about the way they live their lives. To want more out of life but feel anchored down by one another and the need to meet every 24 hours to survive.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Quantum and Woody (2017) #2

Jan 31, 2018

Things take an unexpected turn through the events of Quantum & Woody #2. If anyone assumed another issue would be spent with these brothers mending their friendship or bonding, then this was that time to think again with the world's worst superhero team is at war with itself. You thought their careers as heroes was spotty, but their personal lives are humorously no better.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Quantum and Woody (2017) #3

Feb 22, 2018

You would think that a book like Quantum and Woody would be all about the laughs, but this special issue made the statement that this story can get personal as well. This issue was the full package for anyone who has enjoyed a good story about the Goat. They nailed birth scene, what came after, and what it ultimately led to by the end of this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Quantum and Woody (2017) #4

Mar 21, 2018

Quantum & Woody #4 was worth waiting for, since the last issue was the Goat anniversary issue. We didn't get all of what this family reunion had to offer, but they more than made up for this through an understanding of what the mysterious benefactor has in store for both the world and Woody and Eric.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Quantum and Woody (2020) #1

Jan 29, 2020

The world's worst superheroes are back at it again! Quantum & Woody #1 was an exciting return to the world of screw-ups and failures. Because even when a team like this saves the day? You can hardly call it that when they miss accomplishing just about everything superheroes are supposed to take into account when fighting the good fight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Quantum and Woody (2020) #2

Feb 26, 2020

Compared to the first issue, Quantum & Woody #2 gives you a lot more reason to invest in this new volume. Familiar foes, new allies, new powers, and again only in the second issue. What more could you ask for? Plenty, but for now there is something to love about a comical series which goes the extra mile to be compelling at the same time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Quantum and Woody (2020) #3

Mar 25, 2020

Overall, Quantum & Woody #3 was another entertaining issue for what is the second to last issue of this mini. Ground was covered in this issue breaking down the fraud that is Wood's premonitions, creating progress for Eric, and in general bettering our understanding of this duo at their core.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Quantum and Woody (2020) #4

Jul 8, 2020

Through the conclusion of Quantum & Woody #4, we have reached the end of yet another chapter in the lives of Eric and Woody Henderson. It was a worthwhile experience for everything you knew you had to brace yourself for, and everything else which was new and exciting. This is the kind of book where you toss your expectations out the window and enjoy the ride.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Radiant Black #1

Feb 10, 2021

By the end of Radiant Black #1, I could see a lot of potential that this book holds as an ongoing. Nathan is a compelling character, relatable too, and these powers only make his complicated life more interesting.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Rai #1

Apr 30, 2014

Rai #1 is an excellent book for anyone to pick up and enjoy. Exploring a man who's both a hero and a legend to all. Not only this but questioning his purpose as one. This is a series I want to love and hopefully I do with each passing issue because Rai is not a perfect character and you want to see how that plays into him handling this situation. If you don't pick this up because you aren't familiar with Rai, surely do so for the fact that Matt Kindt is a very capable writer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Rapture #1

May 24, 2017

Color me impressed by the story and plot they have set-up through this first issue. Rapture #1 was all about understanding just what is at stake in stopping this Babel from breaching the Heavens and putting all the pieces into place for the action to really begin. Tama genuinely comes into her own here and this is the first time since the last Geomancer where I have wanted to see more from their world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Rapture #2

Jun 21, 2017

This second issue was a big step forward. By the end of Rapture #2 we know a lot more than we could have hoped for between how the problem of Babel arisen and why this is Rex's fight. The reason for Shadowman again was clever and hopefully Rapture might be his turning point if this goes how you think it might.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Rapture #3

Jul 19, 2017

With the end of Rapture #3 we are set up for the final confrontation with Babel and whatever in the world he has now unleashed having his plans brought to fruition. This was always a mess of a situation for this team when they jumped into it and now things could only get worse before they get any better. Rapture is not a story you want to sleep on because the world-building here is unlike any you will get from other books on the shelves currently.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
Rapture #4

Aug 30, 2017

The final battle for life itself cam and ended with Rapture #4. They gave us the very best of both worlds whether you are a fan of Shadowman or Ninjak. We explored a new world, we saw more of one already existing, and the boundaries of fantasy overall were further pushed to their limits. It surprises me not that Valiant could pull off another memorable story and do so through yet another miniseries.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Rat Queens #2

Oct 26, 2013

Rat Queens is the book you should be reading if you want to see action. Entertaining from start to finish this book is very recommended as yet another book Image has debuted of high quality. This is a serious story that still has fun with it at the same time. All characters are likable and that much is reason to invest your time into such a tale of fantasy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Rat Queens #7

Jul 16, 2014

Rat Queens #7 is arguably one of the best, if not the best issue so far in the series. Characters have their time in the spotlight that gives us a better understanding of their pasts, some step up to the plate when action calls, and a lot of our questions about the plot are starting to unravel. Palisade is overrun with tentacle monsters, they now have an ally on their side with an innate knowledge of N'Rygoth, so from here it's all hands on deck to stop what could very well be their end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rat Queens #11

Aug 19, 2015

The usual balance of action, humor, and small personal moments is still what makes Rat Queens a fun series. We have a new art team, though the story structure remains the same which is important going into the third volume.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rat Queens (2017) #2

Apr 12, 2017

If the first issue didn't sell you on getting back into the world of Rat Queens, the second issue feels like a win. There was a lot of ground to cover with what we are dealing with this time around and this creative team made use of every moment that delivered in potential.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Rat Queens (2017) #3

May 24, 2017

Rat Queens #3 was all about the adventure and entertainment value of life with this group. Three issues in and this is once again a book that I would not hesitate to recommend to any fan of fantasy RPGs, or DnD. Each issue continues to pick up with traction and hopefully keeps capitalizing on all these new opportunities for characters, quests, and unique battles.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Rat Queens (2017) #4

Jul 5, 2017

This was exactly the kind of madness and adventure I was hoping we would be able to get back into with this second volume of Rat Queens. We got exploration, we got the thrill of the unknown, and we even got some personable moments which showed us there's still more to know about our Queens.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Rat Queens (2017) #5

Aug 16, 2017

After the events of Rat Queens #5, this book has quickly become a must read for all your fantasy needs. All anyone has to do when writing a fantasy story is tap into their true creative well, and I do think this creative team has done so marvelously. Nothing about this dungeon or where it took the Queens felt like anywhere I have been before and I have played my fair share of games in this realm.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rat Queens (2017) #6

Nov 22, 2017

‘The Colossal Magic Nothing' i off to a good start for the new story arc. The Rat Queens are running into new dangers, up to the same shenanigans, and keeping things fresh with a new approach to adventuring. With the added question of this strange wizard that wishes to end the suffering of others, you have much more to look forward to too. Its like running with your own DnD group who just seem to let the wind steer their direction for better or for worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Rat Queens (2017) #7

Jan 3, 2018

New characters, a mini quest with exploration, and plenty of revealing truths about things developing around our party of adventurers. Rat Queens #7 had a lot going for it that is both tying up loose ends while adding more potential to the storytelling at the same time. When all is said and done it really is just another day in Palisade.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Rat Queens (2017) #8

Feb 28, 2018

It is with the events of Rat Queens #8 that the ball truly gets rolling in ‘The Colossal Magic Nothing'. There are still plenty of questions to be answered, and it is that mystery which keeps us engaged. This wizard is twisting the world to his whim, and it is having unimaginable consequences for everyone who doesn't seem to be a certain smidgen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Rat Queens (2017) #9

May 16, 2018

Again, Rat Queens #9 is a standout issue for everything about it that was not what we prepared for. Not after how many months waiting for the story to continue. Hitting us with this mind**** that still managed to be so engaging and captivating was a great accomplishment. Hopefully they deliver next issue when it is time to explain just what is going on in Palisade and why.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Rat Queens (2017) #10

Jul 11, 2018

Rat Queens has always been a series where you expect a little humor, with some real moments thrown on top. However, issue #10 simply drops a bomb on our laps and walks away, quite literally. There is no preparing yourself for how stunning this story turned out once all cards were laid on the table and the mystery was put to rest. There wasn't a lot that you could piece together, and that really left us at the edge of our seats till the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Rat Queens (2017) #11

Sep 12, 2018

Rat Queens #11 is the start to something wild unfolding for the Queens. This new mission of theirs will be a true test of their resolve to push forward when they have been put through trial after trial. Some heroes are forged in fire, and that defines these ladies in every accomplishment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Rat Queens (2017) #12

Oct 24, 2018

Rat Queens #12 made sure that nothing was too simple for the Queens in their separate adventures. They may be back in their elements, but that doesn't mean their actions won't come without immediate consequences, as most quests do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Rat Queens (2017) #13

Dec 19, 2018

Rat Queens #13 was a big step up from the past two issues. Not to mention raises the stakes in a big way that challenges what you initially assumed this story would turn out to be. Where some heroes fall, a couple rise to the occasion in the best way possible for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Rat Queens (2017) #14

Feb 13, 2019

Rat Queens #14 escalated everything about this plot for better or for worse. This story isn't finished yet, so now is the time to buckle up for some hearts to get broken before this adventure is done. I think we all came for Dee to do her thing as a new goddess, but stayed for everything else which was an emotional bomb dropped on your lap.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Rat Queens (2017): Orc Dave Special #1

Sep 27, 2017

Rat Queens Special: Orc Dave #1 leaves you wanting more Dave. Hopefully this is a point to make the statement that he is still there and we will get around to rescuing Dave from the hole he has found himself in. This story had heart, and it is as genuine as you can get when other characters wish they had this kind of connection with a family member.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Rat Queens (2017): Neon Static Special #1

Jul 18, 2018

Rat Queens Special: Neon Static is another worthwhile story to add to your collection if you are a fan of everything Rat Queens main story or not. Neon Static is the most and bold and out there, succeeding because no matter the differences the Queens were true to who they are at the core.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Reborn #1

Oct 12, 2016

Reborn #1 is worth jumping into for the potential in character development and world-building. It asks real questions, it challenges possibilities and offers you the chance to see a concept which isn't explored all too often.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Red She-Hulk #65

May 3, 2013

The only thing that wasn't right with this book is that the art style changed half way through the book. The first half looked good if not great, yet the second half was drawn poorly, mainly the facial features and body structures. But then it went back to how it originally was in the beginning which was distracting.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Redlands #1

Aug 9, 2017

Redlands is not a book you want to sleep on. Hiding your bibles seems like an understatement when you see exactly how this coven of killer witches do take everything from the so-called people who run this town. This creative team struck gold finding a twist to horror that you aren't seeing anywhere else on shelves right now. Redlands is not witches cowering from the world around them or thinking not existing is a means of survival, they are the wave of change and order.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Redneck #1

Apr 19, 2017

Redneck #1 is a must read if you want to see just another family trying to keep afloat in spite of the worst way to live your life. If you are distracted by the fact that the Bowmans are vampires, then you need to know that the story writing and character development comes before the obvious. You can always find new ways to captivate readers when it comes to vampires and this creative team nailed it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Redneck #2

May 24, 2017

As if I wasn't already captivated by the first issue of Redneck, issue #2 justified everything that led you to putting this book on your pull-list. There were chills and they didn't get this from cheap tricks and tactics, they did this by getting down to the nitty gritty about what it means to be a vampire.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Regression #1

May 10, 2017

Regression #1 is supernatural terror that spoke to madness taking physical form. If you were looking for a story that really challenges what is real and what is in your head, I think that this might be the book for you. I had little worry that Cullen Bunn and this creative team could pull off a new one worthy to put on the pull-list, but they did it delivering a story that is unlike any others on shelves currently.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Regression #2

Jun 14, 2017

By the end of Regression #2 I think it is a safe bet that this is worth sticking through with. The horror is in all the things you don't know, the things you know will happen, and what happens when you are dealing with a human ticking bomb. Adrian is the product of what happens when you just aren't getting the right kind of help for things that would break anyone else in his position.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Regression #3

Jul 12, 2017

Well things went south pretty fast for Adrian. Regression #3 took some big steps forward this issue. Maybe not in us understanding just what the heck is going on, but they are captivating us with all the things you just couldn't have seen coming when you flipped open that first page. I mean we know now for sure that Adrian is neither able to account for his own whereabouts or trust his own senses.This feels like something new and that is what we can do with more from horror comics out there.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Regression #5

Oct 4, 2017

As one door closes, another one opens for Adrian. Regression #5 was dark and twisted end to this first story arc as you really didn't know what you were preparing yourself for. What's past is past, but what about the present? I had this feeling about what was developing and I'm glad I was right when now there is much more to anticipate from this story moving forward. Regression doesn't use shock value, and that is something I appreciate about a horror story. This creative team simply takes advantage of what makes your skin crawl whether it be the use of insects, the creepiness of these evils, or their agenda that isn't all too understood just yet.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Regression #6

Jan 24, 2018

After what Regression #6 delivered? I'm glad they took that break from this story after the end of the first story arc. It goes without saying that the time away from a story can add focus and refresh the efforts put into the story and art. Regression benefited from that and more. The story is picking up with clarity and more at stake with the characters involved with this mystery/case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Riverdale #3

Jun 7, 2017

Riverdale #3 constitutes to do what you look for from this book series. Opening our eyes to things that may need more emphasis on whether it is character motivations, emotions, or reasoning for the things they do that an hour episode may have not been enough for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Riverdale #1

Mar 1, 2017

Riverdale #1 was for the most part as informative as it needed to be. Probably actually a book that they should have planned to release during the earlier episodes of Riverdale, but now is better than later when the gap in time isn't too great. Whatever follows this one-shot, this did set the foundation for them to get into the things that the show doesn't. That is what we appreciate about the comic medium and should take advantage of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Robin War #1

Dec 2, 2015

Robin War #1 certainly is all out war. We know what starts the war, who is involved, and how far this will possibly go. For a two-part event this definitely has the potential to be something memorable in a Gotham that has gone through so much change.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Roku (2019) #1

Oct 30, 2019

When you want to claim a weapon, you send a weapon to go get it. If you don't know Roku? You'll come to love her among many of the deadliest comic characters Valiant has to offer through the events of this first issue. Like any solo series you will get from Valiant, Roku #1 showed us that this was going to be another experience you weren't going to get from any other series.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Roku (2019) #2

Nov 20, 2019

Usually I am on board with many books which Cullen Bunn writes, but Roku doesn't feel like it was the right fit. Neither does the art style chosen for this book, which is shocking since Valiant is normally very good about who they choose to handle interior work. This is issue two of four for this mini. I couldn't possibly see this being one of those that would continue to a second book, not without someone else taking over who understands this character a bit more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Rugrats #1

Oct 18, 2017

Rugrats #1 was a great start to the everyday life of these babies. Dealing with the electronic eyes of the babycam was perfect a the first story to tackle with them. This also seems like a more modern take which works for them having the freedom to use drones and what not. There's potential here as long as they keep pushing the boundaries of what can be done through comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Runaways (2017) #1

Sep 13, 2017

I must say that Rainbow Rowell nails her Marvel debut with Runaways #1, along with having an all-star team to handle the art. They say that the series is going to break our hearts, and I just can't believe my heart was already broken in the first issue. That scene alone set the tone for what we can expect from Runaways as their story is never sunshine and rainbows. With a debut like this I can't wait to see what everyone else has been up to or how they might feel about crossing paths again. There's a lot of catching up to do, especially for Gert who you know will have an opinion about it all.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Runaways (2017) #2

Oct 11, 2017

Runaways #2 gave us as close of an answer as to if the Runaways could ever get back together. They all have their problems and a lot that they dealt with over the course of two years. All it took was getting back the one person who served as the reason they fell apart in the first place. A push was all they needed along with some tough love. Will it be enough? Who knows, but Runaways is all about the adventure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Runaways (2017) #3

Nov 8, 2017

Runaways #3 took us to Pomona College, and while the destination wasn't all too fruitful, the takeaway was just what we needed moving forward. There are many variables to take into account when taking a chance on bringing these characters together. Two years is a long time and that is more than enough time for someone like Karolina Dean to finally find happiness, for some to realize they need each other, and for others to struggle with an uncertain future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Runaways (2017) #4

Dec 13, 2017

Runaways #4 took some bold steps in emphasizing that you can't force change on people who have finally found some sort of peace with themselves after everything that they have been through. Even if that peace might be fake, that's a comfort and luxury you wouldn't want to squander for the chance to be thrown into the next tragedy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Runaways (2017) #5

Jan 10, 2018

This impossible choice that Molly makes by the end of Runaways #5 was probably the moment we were all waiting for since the start of this volume. It goes without saying that there wasn't much to go off of to assume where this new story would take these characters. They all moved on and they were not the same as they were when they were close. This issue gets the ball rolling and not a moment too soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Runaways (2017) #6

Feb 7, 2018

With the conclusion of the first story arc, it is good to have the Runaways together for a second chance at freedom from their lives. Again there's not much to anticipate from the next story arc beyond the reveal of this threat behind the scenes, and maybe finding out what happened to some others like Klara. However, not knowing what to expect should be good for the element of surprise considering it is anything goes right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Runaways (2017) #7

Mar 21, 2018

Runaways #7 was the dealbreaker for this series. After a solid first story arc, everything came down to how they would move forward from their reunion. You can't just throw them together without direction or pushing them to work towards stability. Overall satisfying character development and set-up for the next plot to unfold.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Runaways (2017) #8

Apr 4, 2018

Runaways #8 took big steps forward when we are reminded that a quiet life is not the kind of life you live when you put these kids together. It did not take long at all for them to run into the next disaster, or better yet it didn't take long for this disaster to come knocking at their door. While we know this villain to be the big bad, the question at the same time is if this is who we think we are actually dealing with. That is something to keep in mind till the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Runaways (2017) #9

May 10, 2018

Lastly, the artwork was lively for what came next. That's the one thing I like most about Kris Anka's pencils and Triona's colors. No matter how whimsical or dark things get, you aren't left forgetting that these are younger characters that we are dealing with. I also love that there's nothing too consistent with the way these characters dress themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Runaways (2017) #10

Jun 20, 2018

Runaways #10 I would say was the strongest in terms of drama. Credit where it is due that when it comes to Runaways, no matter what they do or get themselves into, you always feel engaged on some level.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Runaways (2017) #11

Jul 18, 2018

Runaways #11 hit a lot of key plot points here and that was a big accomplishment in such a short amount of time. With that said, there is still one more to get to, and I have my fingers crossed they will not delay with the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Runaways (2017) #13

Sep 12, 2018

Overall, Runaways #13 was full of surprises. Their lives continue to get more complicated with each passing day. Either because of the things they do, or the universe that just doesn't seem to want to give them a break. When all is said and done, this series is fun for the fact that the Runaways spring into action no matter how crazy it gets.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Runaways (2017) #14

Oct 17, 2018

Runaways #14 gave us a good argument towards whether or not the children of the Gibborim should be taken seriously. It's either they go through with the sacrifice, or they try to find a loophole around killing an innocent person. Either way, a hard all is going to have to be made that will rock the boat with some of these kids.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Runaways (2017) #16

Dec 19, 2018

Runaways #16 was the full package for holiday cheer and the build-up for the big decision that these kids have to make about the fate of the world. They can give in to the request of the Gibborim, or they can find a way around this like they always do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Runaways (2017) #17

Jan 2, 2019

I wish there was more that we could have gotten out of Runaways #17, but it did get us where we needed to be for this final confrontation. It all comes down to what these kids are willing to do in order to save the world and their lives. From the look of the next issue, what they do might be groundbreaking.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Runaways (2017) #18

Feb 13, 2019

Runaways #18 gave us a conclusion to "That Was Yesterday" which made everything shaky about this story memorable. There was a point where it seemed like this story was taking its time, and another point where you wished there was more to what some of them can do in this scenario, but ending things in a Runaway kind of way is a treat you can't overlook. It really makes you wonder what could come next for these kids. How do you top fighting gods twice?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Runaways (2017) #21

May 23, 2019

Runaways #21 turned out to be one of the strongest issues we have gotten out of the series so far. It was entertaining, it was engaging, though more than that it was character driven. Focusing on some of the characters who don't get the spotlight you wish they got more of.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Runaways (2017) #22

Jun 26, 2019

Never a dull day in the mansion for these kids. Runaways #22 shook things up focusing on a couple others who have needed to take some steps forward in their stories. It's refreshing when they are out there trying to save other people, and their own people, instead of dealing with the usual drama.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Runaways (2017) #23

Aug 1, 2019

Runaways #23 is definitely one of the stronger issues of this run. It goes a long way to have chapters like this where these characters can pour their hearts to one another without leaning too hard into what tends to be cliche for their age.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #1

Dec 31, 2014

Simply S.H.I.E.L.D. #1 is the book to read if you are a fan of Agents of S.H.I.E.L.D. or love the role Coulson has already been playing in the Marvel Universe so far to this point. There's just no reason to ignore a title like this when Coulson is someone like every one of us who loves superheroes and superhero books. Only difference is that Coulson's hobby is now his job.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #2

Jan 14, 2015

S.H.I.E.L.D. #2 is action packed and fun. Though also still being able to show that this series can be a personal journey for those involved in terms of those like Jemma and Kamala. Again I have to say that the interaction between the two at the end is memorable and I'd love to see how meeting Captain Marvel could top that.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #3

Feb 25, 2015

It's hard to say, but S.H.I.E.L.D. #3 could have been better. An overall better choice of characters, better dynamic, better execution, and a style of artwork that would make supernatural elements pop out is what this issue needed. Hopefully this was just a small setback because this is one of those series where you can't really afford a slip up if you want to keep readers on board for the long run.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #5

Apr 29, 2015

Overall S.H.I.E.L.D. #5 is the story that puts this series back on track with something you can really take interest in. We should get characters that we would want to see them team up with. We should want to see more of Coulson's team in action, and we should get more of the dynamic between them and the assets they work with like what is seen in this issue between Wanda, Fitz and May. Entertainment both through story and art should be the goal going forward to keep people tuned in for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #6

May 27, 2015

S.H.I.E.L.D. #5, S.H.I.E.L.D. #6, both issues worth picking up from this series because that right there is how you show what they have to offer the world when the heroes are out of play.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #7

Jun 24, 2015

The art style chosen for S.H.I.E.L.D. #7 fits well to the mood of the story. A style that brought out how grim this meeting is between Skye and her farther. Less defined lines than the rest, darker color scheme, and expressions that could speak volumes on their own. Specifically those of Skye seeing her dealing with the pain her powers are causing her. The scarring on her face is new for those who are aware of the struggles which come with Skye's powers. The message is stronger when you can see that Skye needs more than just gloves to hide that she is not normal. Only small disappointment is that Hyde doesn't look as intimidating as he should. You know they are trying to make him look like less of a brute, but overall that is what he is. The intelligence should come from what he says and thinks.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
S.H.I.E.L.D. (2014) #8

Jul 29, 2015

Like every other issue of S.H.I.E.L.D. comes a new artist and style. Again nice to see artists chosen for this title that bring something appealing to the table. As stated before you want to make sure a title like this is as visually worthy of our attention as the story since S.H.I.E.L.D. is one of the more mission of the day kind of series. That means it's taking more risks and you have to make sure the reader wants to take that chance in picking up that next issue to see a consistent quality put forth. The penciling for S.H.I.E.L.D. #8 is clean, with great body proportions, fluent action scenes, and the facial expressions really sell the moments involving Bobbi. The colors as well are handled in a way that makes things pop out where it could come off flat. Especially when it comes to the highlights and shadows used to give depth to characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
S.W.O.R.D. (2020) #1

Dec 9, 2020

All in all, I would call S.W.O.R.D. #1 a winner in my book. Right now I would call this the strongest debut for these X-Books so far, because this is in fact what comes next. This is the kind of bold storytelling I expected from this new line of X-Men stories since this all started. If a book like Marauders took us out to sea, why not S.W.O.R.D. take us further out into space too?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
S.W.O.R.D. (2020) #2

Jan 13, 2021

Overall, I was impressed with how S.W.O.R.D. #2 turned out. I feared for things losing appeal being thrown into a tie-in in the second issue, but this creative issue is doing what they can to make this story their own.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
S.W.O.R.D. (2020) #3

Feb 10, 2021

S.W.O.R.D. #3 was a marvelous adventure in the end. If you are a fan of Manifold, this issue is just for you. If you weren't a fan of the character before? I would be surprised if this issue didn't make one of you.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Saban's Power Rangers OGN: Aftershock OGN

Mar 29, 2017

Saban's Power Rangers: Aftershock OGN SC is a must have. I felt like there is a whole new level of investment given all the things new there is to anticipate from this franchise. If you questioned the potential of where this movie universe will take us, this graphic novel eases those concerns. A better understanding of the Rangers, the kinds of dangers they can face, and the creative ways they will try to take them down. Like it or not this is the kind of Power Rangers we have needed. Beyond this I do hope this isn't the last graphic novel between now and the movie since I do think there is some ground to still cover before then.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sabrina the Teenage Witch (2019) #2

May 15, 2019

The first issue of Sabrina The Teenage Witch gave us a taste of what we have to look forward to from a world less chilling, but this second issue dived straight in to give us more of a reason to invest in this story and version of Sabrina. What we got from Sabrina The Teenage Witch #2 as a whole was uniqueness and engagement that you don't normally get from the other series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sabrina the Teenage Witch (2019) #3

Jun 19, 2019

This is a book that keeps you guessing and knocks you at the edge of your seat. No matter what kind of story you tell, the life of a witch is no walk in the woods. Sabrina The Teenage Witch #3 gave us another memorable monster battle, interaction with new characters, while at the same time raising the stakes by the end of the issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Sabrina the Teenage Witch (2019) #4

Jul 31, 2019

The best way to make a memorable Sabrina book, is to go big and bold. So far, that is exactly what this creative team has delivered through the events of Sabrina The Teenage Witch #4. Sabrina takes on one hell of an upgrade by the end of this issue, and that is a statement enough to tell you that we are in store for something big. Hopefully the time for action comes in the next issue, and hopefully they do not pull punches.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Sabrina the Teenage Witch (2019) #5

Sep 11, 2019

At the end of the day, Sabrina The Teenage Witch is a book that I would recommend to anyone who loves Sabrina. This book captured the best of both worlds, while going the extra mile to be something distinguishing all on its own. This is exactly what we need to see from books which attempt to relaunch a story. It all comes down to your selling points. In the case of Sabrina The Teenage Witch? This one succeeded in delivering a heavily supernatural experience.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Sabrina: Something Wicked #1

Apr 15, 2020

By the end of the issue, I definitely felt that it would have been a crime if BOOM! did not give this book a second volume to continue. Sabrina: Something Wicked #1 was worth the wait for the way that this creative team further immersed us into this world they are creating for Sabrina.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sabrina: Something Wicked #2

Apr 30, 2020

Overall, Sabrina: Something Wicked #2 served as an enjoyable transition from the events of the first issue. To say that things are complicated for Sabrina right now would be one heck of an understatement. Whether things out of her control or within, there's not a dull moment in Greendale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Saga #15

Oct 30, 2013

Saga #15 really plays with your emotions in a good way. Nothing is really as it seems, and your reaction won't be the same after the revelation of what actually goes on in the end. The very end of this issue being very shocking for Will considering that he can't have it both ways, and even then, he might have either choice. Great cliffhanger and one which may change things in a big way for Will's story, which in turn may have a big impact on everyone else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Saga #30

Jul 8, 2015

Seeing how these characters have fallen apart is also part of the appeal of this storyline while meeting an end. The emotions were strongest when shown through their expressions. Alana and Marko hit points where they were not the same people they were at all when separated. The synching between the narration and what actually happens is on point because it's not as if someone is telling you how any of these characters feel at that very moment, you see that as well. Alana snapped and you were convinced she did because that was true anger from someone who had almost everything and lost it all in what could have been a time of victories. Something they tend to be short of while still on the run. Beyond this the colors really popped out when necessary in this issue. Not that it ever isn't, but with this conclusion you can't help but take in those uses of effects that grab your attention.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Saga #33

Jan 28, 2016

Saga #33 takes us on a new adventure, and while many probably still want to follow Alana and Marko's story, we should all have known things would never stay that linear for that long.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Saga #34

Feb 26, 2016

Saga #34 was a step forward in some big ways. We know what to expect moving forward in this story arc, we probably know how it will end, but it is the journey that will hopefully stick with us most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Saga #35

Mar 31, 2016

Saga #35 ends on a note where everyone has a stake in what happens next. Lives hang in the balance, and only Hazel certainly not being rescued the way you wish she will is all you can correctly assume from what comes next. This was more build-up overall, though the necessity to move all piece into place was vital at this stage.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Saga #37

Aug 31, 2016

Saga #37 looks to be another story arc with potential. Still pushing us forward while addressing that war between Wreath and Landfall which has not been as big as you probably forgot it should be till this point. Because good story writing does do that to you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Saga #40

Dec 1, 2016

‘The War For Phang' part four really challenges the question of what can go wrong in Saga #40. Things can get worse and they still are. If even for a moment this creative team allowed you to let your guard down, they surely made you pay for that as there still is no happy ending in sight.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Saga #41

Jan 5, 2017

Alana and Marko got their war on. Saga #41 was thrilling for a confrontation that was inevitable, but only a taste of what may come with issue #42 which will also come out this month. If we know our Saga creators, then we'll await the next issue patiently knowing that like the end of every story arc “The War For Phang” Part Five will leave us shattered.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Saga #49

Mar 1, 2018

This issue was a solid ease back into this universe, and it was worth the wait till the end of this issue to understand exactly why this might be the start of the most shocking, most impactful chapters of Saga yet. Saga #49 found good ground for these characters to stand on, and quickly pulled the rug from under their feet. The road to freedom can be paved with good intentions, but in the case of one of these characters it will spell doom and consequences.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Saga #50

Mar 28, 2018

At the end of this 50th issue, we are reminded of just what it means to venture boldly with these characters. There's no catching a break when it is them against the universe. Saga #50 takes us to a planet that I wouldn't have called dangerous, though the danger is more in who follows them to this planet as you would assume to be the case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Saga #52

May 30, 2018

Saga #52 at the end of the day was a build-up and a tease. Neither of which hurt the story, but it sure as hell plays with our emotions after a loss was already experienced, and there being two killers loose to surprise our band of misfits. I don't like to sound like I'm rushing a plot, but right now this arc has some hype to live up to. Hopefully the next issue gets the ball running with some wheels set into motion.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Saga #54

Jul 25, 2018

Through the events of Saga #54, we come to understand what it truly means for this to be Hazel's story. This is not the time to get attached to characters, and they drove that message home when there was nothing left to do but say goodbye.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Savage #1

Nov 30, 2016

Like any of these other new stories Valiant is producing, Savage #1 is one worth diving into for a story you're not getting from anything else they have on shelves. A progressively dark tale that you don't want to overlook for its human elements.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.2
Savage Wolverine #5

Jun 3, 2013

Despite the fact that this conclusion didn't have too much of an impact on me, the art is one thing to recognize. From beginning to end of this story arc, it has been very consistent, especially for the fact that Frank Cho is both the writer and the artist. I'd point out how it is cool to see Wolverine go to hell and back fighting through the savages and see him lose about half of his costume in the process.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Scarlet Spider #17

May 26, 2013

The fight with Wolverine was decent as they both have that monster mentality when they get into a fight. Kaine does seem to have won the fight in the end, but I just can't feel much for it knowing that Wolverine can't be killed that easily. So just about everything was solid in this issue besides the call on Wolverine being the target.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Scarlet Witch #2

Jan 15, 2016

Scarlet Witch #2 overall questions whether the price is too high, while addressing what the price really is for the magic Wanda uses. It's dark, full of mystery, and exploration. Everything we need to anticipate what comes next for Wanda.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Scarlet Witch #4

Mar 17, 2016

Scarlet Witch #4 now brings everything into perspective as to who this threat is and what he wants. This is great that by the fourth issue Wanda is able to walk out of this with a new archenemy. If she did haven one before, now she does.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Scarlet Witch #5

Apr 7, 2016

Scarlet Witch #5 was okay at best for a step forward in Wanda's mission. The story was okay for what personal impact it had on her, but the artwork wasn't impressive enough. It hurts to say it, but at the moment I could probably say this one you wouldn't miss too much if you skipped over it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Scarlet Witch #6

May 5, 2016

Scarlet Witch #6 brings back the excitement with an issue that has heart and grace. Redemption is no easy task, and it means going to great lengths to make sure others can live a life without the same regrets she still has. Overall a step up in storytelling, and a better choice in artist in my opinion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Scarlet Witch #7

Jun 24, 2016

Scarlet Witch #7 is another standout issue that sets itself apart from the rest. A progressive step forward in doing something good for the magical world while forging another potential relationship along the way. Some may want something linear, but from the appeal of the last few issues and stories, why fix what's not broken?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Scarlet Witch #8

Jul 8, 2016

Scarlet Witch #8 seems to be where we draw the line between her recent adventures, and a new one that seems to be a bit more goal oriented in terms of what she is getting out of the payoff personally. Not a problem at all because this journey was worth every stone she turned to prove the person she has become.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Secret Wars (2015) #4

Jul 1, 2015

Now with that said, is there much to still look forward to in Secret Wars? Sure. You get past those few things that would bother you as fans of certain characters and as a whole this is still a cleverly written event book that you'd want to see to the end. At this point it's either someone takes Dooms power, they get someone magically strong enough, or Cyclops comes back for a second round to win and restart things. That is how things might end and just having those theories makes the experience worthwhile.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Secret Wars (2015) #5

Aug 12, 2015

The end of the issue is what gets you most excited knowing now exactly where everyone was scattered. Who knows if we'll get to all of them within Secret Wars, but if you recognize where each are placed then you know which tie-in to look out for to find out what they do next.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Secret Wars (2015) #6

Oct 7, 2015

Secret Wars #6 definitely has to pick up the pace going forward. Assume less of what we read and didn't read in the tie-ins and tell the story as if they don't exist. We have 3 more issues to go, so hopefully as well the gap in time between them isn't as large when you want to keep these moments fresh in our minds.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Secret Wars (2015) #7

Nov 11, 2015

Secret Wars #7 was grand in scope, but certainly didn't give us the sacrifice that seemed so important, and suffers from too much it expect you to follow. And too much that you are expected to follow when All-New, All-Different Marvel titles have already begun. The next issue really has to turn that dial to ten.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Secret Wars: Battleworld #1

May 20, 2015

Secret Wars: Battleworld #1 is a solid start and shows a lot of potential for what Battleworld has in store for us going forward. This will be a true test of creativity and if anything like this first issue then these upcoming stories should not disappoint with the right creative teams behind them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Secret Weapons #0

Jan 3, 2018

Secret Weapons #0 is one of the more impressive origin stories in the Valiant Universe so far. This is not someone who woke up one day and could fly or lift a car. She talks to birds, but that doesn't stop her from springing into action. Nikki's was everything you could want in a character who isn't given anything or thrust into situations of convenience. If I wanted a hero to look up to, it would be one who faces real obstacles and knows what it means to endure.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Secret Weapons #1

Jun 28, 2017

Secret Weapons is the book Livewire has deserved. By the end of this issue I felt someone who wasn't just being the face of the superhero community or the founder of Unity. This is a psiot who got a hard reality check into the life she was living and wants to rescue these others who deserve more than the danger they were thrown into. This creative team tapped into the potential from a problem in the Valiant Universe that went too long without being addressed. Not every psiot is created equal and it is time for them to have their chance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Secret Weapons #2

Jul 19, 2017

Secret Weapons #2 takes us deeper into the world of the rejected. A story that needed to be told for Livewire and these kids, and better now than never at all. Psiots aren't all equal and this was the best exploration which further establishes Harada as the monster we know him to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Secret Weapons #3

Aug 16, 2017

After an issue like Secret Weapons #3, I definitely would love to see more from Eric Heisserer. He's not the only screenwriter to tackle comics, but he proves what happens when you really immerse yourself in the world you are trying to expand upon. Anyone can definitely jump into this, and it gets more personal than any of the other psiot stories could having more established characters. This creative team as a whole understands what they are setting up here and a big stepping stone for the psiots to make their presence known in the Valiant Universe. It can be as much a story of survival as it is a story about superheroics.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Secret Weapons #4

Sep 20, 2017

What can I say after the events of Secret Weapons #4? I WANT MORE. I know that this will somehow connect them to Harbingers Wars 2, but I also want to see them take this to the next level through an eventual continuation which is the hope they gives us when they say Secret Weapons will return. You couldn't have asked for a better cast of characters and the use of powers you don't see every day. This sort of storytelling and creativeness is exactly what puts Valiant on top when it comes to quality of superhero books.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Secret Weapons: Owen's Story #0

Mar 14, 2018

Secret Weapons: Owen's Story #0 was certainly one of the most unorthodox origins to date. Through this standalone story it was easier to get to know Own and what makes him tick. His adventures open us up to more that we have to look forward to from Owen when there is no doubt that he has the potential to more than what was initially assumed of him and his powers.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #1

Jan 29, 2014

This was an excellent start which sets these characters on a new path while establishing where they are now in terms of dealing with the fallout of Serenity. If you are a fan of the series you are doing yourself a huge disservice by not figuring out what happens next. This book is all about the journey which you should enjoy that it offers compared to other books out there. Everyone wants to know what the future has in store for them, and picking this book up is the only way to know how. Plus these covers by Dan Dos Santos are more than enough of a reason itself.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #2

Feb 26, 2014

In only the second issue, Serenity has really laid the foundation of where things can and will go from here. Fans should be very pleased that this story is going in a way that you would have expected if it were any continuation from the series. The potential is there and things have been set in place having the knowledge to handle these characters. The end of this issue will have you looking for more if not because you know exactly how things went the last time they found themselves in this situation. One which they had the one person at their disposal to save them unsuspectingly.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #3

Mar 26, 2014

Things are picking up as the Serenity crew prepares for a mission that could go south easily. The mandate that River gives Mal as wakes from her self-induced sleep is something I would love to see a possibility of after seeing what she alone is capable of. If there were any reason to stay tuned for what happens next, the end of this issue made sure of that. Once again a great move to use familiar faces that Serenity/Firefly fans can recognize and be excited to see.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #4

Apr 30, 2014

With only two issues left after this, Serenity: Leaves on The Wind has made a lot of progress in exploring the lives of the Serenity crew now that they exposed the Alliance. We've seen the political side of things, the scientific, social, and even emotional when it comes to how the crew interacts with each other. Whatever comes next I hope Zack Whedon continues to show what the Firefly Universe has to offer its fans past the TV series and movie.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #5

May 28, 2014

Serenity: Leaves on the Wind #5 is hitting all the right notes bringing this story to life as a representation of the Serenity crew's lives after the events of outing the Alliance. Next issue is the end of this mini series and I want to have faith that Zack Whedon and bring everything to a close or end things in a way in which leaves room for the story to expand in another book. The only fear at this point is that not everything can be covered by the end of issue 6.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Serenity: Leaves On The Wind #6

Jun 24, 2014

Serenity: Leaves on The Wind #6 was the end that this mini-series deserved. Ended on a heartwarming note while also leaving room for another story which can take place afterwards. We all know the story is far from done for the Serenity crew and that last panel was a good way of keeping us interested in what will happen next. This is definitely a part of their story you don't want to miss if you want to know the direction their lives are taking because they are in every sense of the phrase “Leaves on The Wind”.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Serenity: No Power In The 'Verse #1

Oct 26, 2016

Serenity: No Power In The Verse #1 is the start of something new, though still familiar territory in terms of obstacles this crew must overcome dealing with each other. There is a lot of potential in this new chapter as long as it feels as though we are moving forward in a Verse that is on edge.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Serenity: No Power In The 'Verse #2

Nov 30, 2016

Serenity: No Power In The Verse #2 wastes little time getting into the thick of this story and the Serenity crew's place in the universe right now. They are doing what probably should have been their next step after revealing the truth about Miranda. But better now than later or never if you ask me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Serenity: No Power In The 'Verse #3

Dec 28, 2016

Serenity: No Power In The Verse #3 shakes things up in the best of way as it was never more vital to question how far one is willing to go to do the right thing. No Power In The Verse is that chapter where you are forced to ask what your soul is worth facing against the Alliance.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Seven Secrets #1

Aug 12, 2020

By the end of Seven Secrets #1, I was sold on this book. You can say that you have read books or followed stories about orders and secrets, but Seven Secrets is not like the rest. And with a creative team like this? You can bet that they are going to find every way to keep you at the edge of your seat!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Seven Secrets #2

Sep 16, 2020

All in all, Seven Secrets #2 continues to add investment to this story and what promise this book has down the road. Caspar has now slipped into the lead role, and through him we are learning a lot about the structure of The Order. Though it was definitely a shocker to be hit with a twist by the end of the issue which really changes everything you thought you knew about the direction this story was taking. But that would be fairly in line for this creative team.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Seven Secrets #5

Dec 9, 2020

That terrible fate which we knew was going to befall The Order. If you told me that by the end of Seven Secrets #5, we were pretty much right there for events to come full circle? I would not have believed you. Though here we are, and this creative team gave us a damn good reason to brace for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Seven Secrets #6

Jan 13, 2021

And just like that, the events of Seven Secrets #6 changes everything about the direction this story will take. Where there was actually order, now there is survival, and even chaos among their own ranks. Things should only continue to get interesting from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Seven to Eternity #1

Sep 21, 2016

Seven To Eternity #1 was worth the wait for anyone who had been awaiting this story as much as I have. A very strong start and not hard to follow if you were on the fence about your investment in the plot. They laid out the foundation for where this story is going, opened the doors to this world and the rules to it existence, and gave enough about our main character Adam to want to follow him on this journey that challenges everything he has fought for up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Shadowman (2012) #10

Sep 5, 2013

This book seems to step out of the shadow of super-heroics and it takes advantage of a grounded story, as grounded as they can make it be Justin Jordan can make it be. The main goal was to figure out the source of the Shadowmen's power, and that much was found out, everything else was a plus. When I put this book down I just could not find anything bad to say about it, no problems at all. As Shadowman's first year in the Valiant Universe, it's a story like this which really makes you appreciate what they have to offer and this is one book you should definitely be following if you're a fan of Valiant Comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Shadowman (2012) #11

Oct 2, 2013

Overall great story which set Jack up with a new ally, supposedly, and served as an entertaining distraction from all that has occurred up to this point. If you are someone who finds they are on the fence about picking up this book, do so and read this as it's a standalone story that's perfect for new readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Shadowman (2012) #12

Nov 6, 2013

Overall I think that these stories would have been much better on their own. As three separate tales in the same book, you were left wanting more from the Blackout andDeadside Blues stories. They were entertaining and had a focus that didn't bore you. With that said, it's not too much to expect from these stories given that they are just small tales before the new story arch begins. Wouldn't entirely invest in this issue unless you're that big of a fan of Shadowman, but definitely look forward to Peter Milligan and Roberto De La Torre taking over soon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shadowman (2012) #15

Feb 7, 2014

Very good start to the second arc of this story for those unsure of Shadowman's future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Shadowman (2018) #1

Mar 28, 2018

Shadowman #1 is a satisfying start to the new series. I figured there was going to be a few things shaky considering Jack's story has spanned across a number of other hero stories up to this point, but that aside this was exactly what was needed for Jack to begin taking charge of his fate once again. Or at least trying to. It was awesome to catch up with Alyssa and how she has changed herself over the course of five years as well. Everything they face from here will challenge their ability to rise to the occasion and repair their fractured relationship.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Shadowman (2018) #2

Apr 25, 2018

If the first issue didn't fully grab you, I would hope that Shadowman #2 did. By the end of this issue we are left with a very good idea as to what this story has to offer us moving forward. The enemies have been established, as well as the obstacles they will have to face if they want to stop them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Shadowman (2018) #3

May 23, 2018

Shadowman #3 was one heck of a way to up the stakes in this confrontation with Baron Samedi. Standout character development, always appreciated world exploration of the Deadside, and it is a plus to never know what's about to come next till it does. They take advantage of the things we can't foresee, and that goes a long way in investment in this plot and anticipation for the issues to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Shadowman (2018) #4

Jun 20, 2018

Shadowman #4 is the start of Jack Boniface discovering the long-hidden history of the loa, and this trip through the past changes everything that is known so far. So far, this series has been worth the wait when there are no more distractions. Everything since the return of Jack and Alyssa has been rebuilding what has been neglected, and what has been ignored that brings answers to all that is wrong with the loa currently. This is one of those times where its hard to argue with the fact that knowledge is power.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Shadowman (2018) #5

Jul 18, 2018

Shadowman #5 introduces us to what just might change the path that Jack has set upon. He may have a world of his own to save through knowledge of the past, but that same knowledge might also lead him to correct a problem that clearly has not been settled by the Boniface bloodline. When they said this was a must-read moment for Shadowman fans? That's not some line they are selling you to simply hype this up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Shadowman (2018) #6

Aug 22, 2018

Sometimes we are more used to the drama and action from Shadowman, but right now I find myself captivated by this informative story that is revealing everything we've ever wanted to know about Jack and this loa's purpose. Shadowman #6 was a great start to the big answers, even if where they decided to end things will make the wait for the next issue dreadful.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shadowman (2018) #7

Sep 19, 2018

The true shall set you free. Those are words you hope take form from the events of this story arc. Shadowman #7 gave us all the answers we could have wanted about the shadow loa and much more. I don't think I could feel any more invested than I was for these issues where there was nothing between us and exploration of what it really means to be bound to the loa.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Shadowman (2018) #8

Oct 24, 2018

Shadowman #8 sets our heroes on a new mission that will put everything changed about them to the test. So far, you couldn't be anything short of impressed when Jack and Alyssa have consistently proved that there is nothing between them and assuring the fate of the world doesn't fall to supernatural chaos.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shadowman (2018) #9

Nov 21, 2018

Shadowman #9 was just how you hoped for things to turn out from this confrontation. I think we all knew how things would go down, but it all came down to the execution of scenes up to that point. That I would say made a big difference when everything comes down to setting an atmosphere for the supernatural world and showing us things we aren't actually prepared for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Shadowman (2018) #10

Dec 12, 2018

Suspenseful was the right word to use for the events of Shadowman #10. This issue was eye-opening for anyone who thought that this meeting with Sandria Darque was going to be anything other than brutal. Her actions stun you, her words hit you right where it hurts the most. I'm glad that I could also say that the growth of both Jack and Alyssa popped out in a way that embraces everything good and bad that they have ever experienced up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Shadowman (2018) #11

Jan 16, 2019

Shadowman #11 was worth the wait as the story which has changed Shadowman's fate forever. This creative team gave us everything we wanted and more when anticipating the return to form for this hero. There was adventure, discovery, exploration, and so much more when Jack and Alyssa gave us a dynamic that is so far memorable for the Valiant Universe. What I appreciated most about this run is that we got more than four issues. There was so much to address about this character that there was no way that we could only get another mini. Valiant treated us for our patience and these eleven issues were more than enough to satisfy your supernatural needs.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Shadowman/Rae Sremmurd #1

Oct 4, 2017

Shadowman/Rae Sremmurd #1 at first I was skeptical about for what I didn't know about these two artists. Though by the end of the story I feel I would have missed out on a lot that is regrettable when a fan of the supernatural elements of this universe. Not to mention this crossover is satisfying if you want more Shadowman before March.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Shang-Chi (2020) #1

Sep 30, 2020

In the end, this debut first issue was a jaw-dropping start to this new chapter in the legend of Shang-Chi. They pulled very few punches revealing this whole new world which neither us or Shang-Chi understood existed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shaper #1

Mar 18, 2015

Shaper is an ambitious new title that aims to want to wow you. The things you see the Shapers known are astonishing creatures, and knowing this is a world where depths of space have been reached, they can turn into anything. It feels like the possibilities with this series is endless, and from here you should feel like everything you see is new.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shaper #2

Apr 15, 2015

Shaper #2 is a good sign of things to come in a series where the concept of Shapers pulls you in with a general sense of emotions and adventure. Who knows how far things will go to avoid that prophecy, but if anything like what we have seen in this issue things will only get worse before they get any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Shaper #3

May 20, 2015

Shaper #3 hits us with an ending that leaves you wondering just how wrong things can go for Spry trying to save his mom. As they say, things are only going to get worse before they get any better. Shaper being no exception at this point in the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Shaper #4

Jun 17, 2015

It's with this issue that you see more of the sci-fi elements sticking out which you expect when we are reaching that climax of the story. The rendering of space, layout of the ships, the effects that create things like hyperdrive, and of course a few more interesting forms taken by a Shaper. While some of them have personal forms of preference, it doesn't hurt to show those that are resourceful for specific situations. Aside from this the character structure remains on point which you can see mainly through Spry in this issue. It shows in the way Spry is of an average build for a male and how he was able to maneuver his body in detainment. The colors were standout for Shaper #4 because when you get to that page where Solace can be seen , it looks like a real planet. Not flat, lacking in structure of what you assume to be its atmosphere, and the color blending worked for what was seen at a distance, and what was seen up close with the hot/cold colors.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Shaper #5

Jul 15, 2015

It is great to see that with a mini like Shaper that the artwork can maintain the same quality from start to finish. Again compared to the other four issues Shaper #5 was a lot heavier in action. With the fast pace of this issue it was also good to see that the art team was able to capture everything fluently. Sometimes you might have to deal with fragmented scenes and that surprisingly has not been the case for Shaper. In fact it is partly thanks to the layout of the panels that helped with making sure that we got as much out of each scene as we should. Especially when it came to Rand taking on Ajax, and both Spry and Niva taking on Victus. Beyond that the sci-fi atmosphere of Shaper is what stands out the most between what goes on in space and the glimpse of what Solace really looks like. The diversity in species catches your attention right away and it really is interesting to see just how anyone can be one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Shazam! (2018) #1

Dec 5, 2018

What took so long indeed was the thought running through my head at the end of Shazam #1. This was one of the best debuts for a young hero this year. Obviously Shazam has it easier being an already established big hero, but that doesn't change the approach that should always be the same when you are dealing with kids who take on the responsibilities of a superhero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
She Could Fly #1

Jul 11, 2018

She Could Fly #1 is the start of such a unique story. It was very different to get to know this disturbed girl, and the impact of this Flying Woman blowing up was so much stronger than words could have described leading up to this debut. Whether you're here for the personal journey or the mystery/conspiracy, this story draws you in because it embraces the idea of being able to liberate ourselves from all that is mad-cap and wacky about this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Shuri (2018) #1

Oct 17, 2018

Shuri #1 was a pleasant surprise for me. I picked up this book looking for a new reason to jump back into this corner of the world, and was not let down one bit. Sometimes you will worry when the reason is because the success of a film. Fortunately this was not the case with Shuri. This is a creative team that cares about this character and the world she lives in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sideways #1

Feb 14, 2018

The big thing here in the debut of Sideways, was the responsibility of having this kind of power at your fingertips. We were prepared to follow this kid who will understand the dangers of what seem like a fun power on the surface, but what this spins into took matters to a whole new level. New heroes these days tend to face some harsh realities for dreaming big, and Sideways makes you question how wrong that can really go.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Sideways #2

Mar 14, 2018

The events of Sideways #2 placed this new hero right where he needed to be on the crossroads of actions and consequences. They are going to catch up with him, and the only way Derek will win any sympathy from us is if there is more strength behind his intentions and motivations.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sideways #3

Apr 11, 2018

Sideways #3 puts us in a place where a reader could find more reason to invest in this story. Currently Sideways best represents the superhero side of the New Age of DC Heroes line. His origin, interactions, costume, and encounters so far prove that he is making the most progress to something legitimate. That is if Derek can grow up fast enough to survive the rough patches that comes with this lifestyle.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sideways #4

May 9, 2018

With the conclusion of Sideways #4, Derek is really living up to the name when everything he tries to do comes up sideways. Things aren't getting better for the kid, and I think the strength of this story will come when he reaches a point to become humbled. A lot of our new heroes we admire because they had something tangible to achieve. In the case of Sideways that is both refreshing and risky when he loses appeal as a character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sideways #5

Jun 13, 2018

Sideways #5 was the issue we needed to see that there is still more to offer with the right steps taken towards Derek evolving as a hero, and as a person. Teen drama can bite, but sometimes its just something you have to get used to in order to get to what's actually appealing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Sideways #6

Jul 11, 2018

Sideways #6 made it that much harder to like Derek, and that's not the direction I feel like this story should be taking. There's tragedy, and then there's tragedy that's the hero's fault because of their neglect. Particularly when the one who suffers is family.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Sideways #7

Aug 8, 2018

Sideways #7 was a hit or miss issue. I can't stress it enough how much potential this series has, but the execution of events and actions leaves much to be desired. It's okay to be different from most rising hero stories, though not to the point where you lose what is appealing about most of them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Sideways #8

Sep 12, 2018

Sideways #8 left me with mixed feelings. I couldn't hep but feel excitement towards some of the things unfolding here, but as I keep saying, I wish this was all happening at a different time. When I can set aside that thought nagging at me, this is a solid storyline between action, exploration, and new introductions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Sideways #9

Oct 17, 2018

Yeah, everything is in fact going sideways for Derek, but I wouldn't say in the best way either for us. Sideways #9 tried, and it only really succeeds in holding our attention when it comes to circling back to the world that is still turning on Earth. A world without Derek stirs the pot a bit and gets everyone asking the same questions about the fate of Mrs. Flynn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Sideways #10

Nov 21, 2018

This was probably one of the better issues of Sideways aside from the one where Derek's mother was unfortunately killed. Sideways #10 proves that you can do wonders when you put substance over style. This is a young hero book where you want to capture the energy of being new to the world of heroes and the sacrifices, but you should never forget the moments that are supposed to help you care about the person underneath the mask. This includes the people in their circle of trust too.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Sideways #11

Dec 12, 2018

Sideways #11 had action, some big revelations, and the right combination of all of these things to kick things up a notch. I think this is the moment that most of us have been waiting for in the series where things are getting good again. I struggled with my faith in this stories direction after the death of Derek's mother, and now I have regained some of what was lost before. Hopefully this boost in momentum and pacing carries through to the end of this confrontation with Dar Star Sciences.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Sideways #12

Jan 23, 2019

Sideways #12 made it pretty hard to see this story through to the end, but at the very least the last issue should be one to look forward to for hope that there are plans for this hero beyond this solo adventure. It's just so unfortunate that at this stage there is so much rushed or left as loose ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Sideways #13

Feb 27, 2019

Sideways #13 brings the story of this young new hero to a close, for now. It honestly could have been better. This was a story that I remember at the very start saying held so much potential for the connection to Dark Nights: Metal and a power you don't see too often taken advantage of in the DC Universe. Yet here we are with a story that should have gone farther than where it ended, and offer more than it left in question. I stuck through with this to the end because hope was all that you could hold on to. This wasn't all a bad journey, but it could have become so much more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Sideways Annual #1

Nov 7, 2018

Sideways Annual #1 turned out a lot better than I initially thought it would be. It honestly just felt like another issue of Sideways, but longer than the normal. Nothing too special, though it was better written than some of the other issues up to this point. I'm glad that this issue found a way to bring things to a close so we can get back to the things that really matter for Derek back home.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Siege (2015) #1

Jul 18, 2015

The art style for Siege is one that does manage to catch you off guard. You'd expect something in your face or gritty, but instead we got something different. It looks more painted with the only real defining in shape is when we reach those scenes when they are taking on an army. A smart choice overall because this style allows for the art team to focus on the characters first and everything else second. It creates an atmosphere where it really does feel like The Shield is the end of the road on Battleworld. Especially when it came to that initial capturing of The Shield in this issue that looked stunning. Beyond this the dark color choice carried that idea that anything could go wrong which is important given the threats Brand and her army face daily.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Siege (2015) #2

Aug 5, 2015

Once again the painted style of Siege really comes off unique to the story told. A grim atmosphere created from dark colors and expressions from these characters who are always prepared for the worst. The colors as well keep us on our toes for whatever is right around the corner as it has been established what is beyond the wall. Not only do you feel that the situation is grim, you also see the despair from select characters such as Brand, Leah, Chavez, Summers clone, and Katherine who are feeling the weight of it all crashing upon them. The one page showing off Ultron's army is simply astounding. When everything else seems so uniform you reach this page and it blows you away with the detail, depth, creativity, and vastness that you can only get with a robot army of that size. Truly a sight to see with so much going on in that scene.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Siege (2015) #3

Sep 9, 2015

Siege #3 is what makes this series memorable between excellent story matching just as excellent artwork. Definitely the Secret Wars tie-in you don't want to miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Siege (2015) #4

Oct 7, 2015

If there was any Secret Wars tie-in that you could pick up and read on its own, Siege would be that mini series. One that plays off of the imperfection of Battleworld. That these people would by choice or banishment spend their final days fighting off hordes of creatures and nightmares that threaten to tear the world apart if they were to pass the wall. Not to mention the pain of realizing the truth behind why you are giving up your life to protect something and someone who doesn't really care about you. The title for this issue is “What Are You Fighting For?”, and the answer to that was spot on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Sinestro #1

Apr 16, 2014

Sinestro #1 does what it needs to do in terms of showing us where Sinestro is and the direction he is headed on this new path. We understand where he's at now, what challenges he faces, and what threats lie ahead. Though nothing big or spectacular, Cullen Bunn still did what he succeeded to do with Magneto when it comes to putting characterization above all else. We want to see Sinestro as the same Yellow Lantern he was in his prime, and here is is making that rise back to power. Sinestro definitely has my attention for a first issue, where interest takes it's place to see where this story goes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sinestro #10

Feb 26, 2015

Sinestro #10 brings us to that climax where it's all or nothing when Sinestro's life depends on the success of his rescue. Just by looking at the cover of this issue you didn't go into this wondering how Sinestro finds himself locked up, you read this awaiting to see how he gets himself out. That is where he is at his most dangerous and he doesn't even require the use of Paralax to create such fear.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sinestro #14

Aug 26, 2015

It was a fast read which felt like we didn't get as much as we wanted out of it. Though understandable because Cullen Bunn uses Sinestro #14 as both an entry point for new readers and a place to set up the plot that is still building up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sinestro #15

Sep 23, 2015

Sinestro #15 continues to show why Sinestro is the villain who is most capable of taking advantage of any given opportunity presented to him. Cunning, manipulative, and not afraid to make his end justify the means.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Sinestro #20

Feb 18, 2016

Sinestro #20 is the strongest writing from this series. It gets personal, it's action-packed, it has the heart to challenge what you thought you knew about this morally questionable Lantern. Sinestro might not ever fully redeem himself, but at least he is making progress to that point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sinestro #21

Mar 16, 2016

Sinestro #21 is the start of something new with potential. Hopefully things that will stick after Rebirth because readers need to feel as though their stories are growing rather than doing more of the same.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sinestro #22

Apr 28, 2016

Sinestro #22 was a great start to big things for the Sinestro Corps maintaining this mantle they have taken up. We know how they have settled into this new role, but now is the time for them to deal with the threats that aim to crush them, just like the Green Lanterns when they were in that position.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Sinestro #23

May 18, 2016

Sinestro #23 was the end we deserved. And gods willing with the note Bunn leaves us on here we can see more of the Yellow Lanterns throughout the DC Universe because their story is far from over. Not their story or their new impact upon the universe. He rung a bell you can't un-ring when Sinestro took over for the Green Lanterns.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Sinestro Annual #1

Apr 1, 2015

Though we do not know who the traitor is, we know what to expect when the main series follows up with this set up in June. That can easily wait when right now the most important thing we could ever get is a better understanding of our cast which should be much appreciated at this point in Sinestro's life span. Cullen Bunn knows what he wants from this series and it is good to see that he knows where and when to address things we need to know.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Skybourne #1

Sep 7, 2016

Skybourne #1 has a lot of potential which we should hopefully see more of in issues to come. We got to see what madness magic has unleashed onto this world, so with issue #2 we look forward to context to everything that has just happened as there was quite a bit to take in.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Skyman #1

Jan 15, 2014

Very solid introduction from Skyman bringing him back into a forefront of the superhero world. The Skyman Program needed a new face for their initiative and this is a character that you can attach yourself to. Not out of sympathy or pity, but out of the fact that he has never been exposed to anything like this and would have never imagined to. H e is a very likable character and I would recommend this to anyone who wants a hero who may be used as a symbol, but still is more than just that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Skyman #2

Feb 19, 2014

In the end this is how you set a new hero on their path. There will be obvious consequences along the way, but for Reid that makes this that much more exciting. While there is progress in this story, there is more focus on Reid as a person and that balance is what makes this a solid story to jump into from Dark Horse's superhero line. I'd definitely want to see what happens in the next issue when he runs into Captain Midnight knowing that both are soldiers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Skyman #3

Mar 19, 2014

Overall Skyman #3 ends giving us the hero we want to see in Eric. He now has a hero to match himself with that can show him what it really means to do what is right. Eric knows he's doing the right thing, but in a world like this you need someone else who can validate that. This was that case, and what we got from it is something you don't want to miss considering they both crossed the wrong people. The next issue you definitely want to pick up if not only to know what this threat they face is capable of.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Skyman #4

Apr 16, 2014

So Skyman comes to an end for now, a story worth telling in my opinion. They tried to make the perfect weapon, but they got a hero instead. That is the selling point and I love how this series has taken that concept and built upon it to such an extent. At the end of this issue you would want to see where Skyman ends up next in Dark Horse's world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Skyman One Shot #1

Nov 12, 2014

You only feel a bit disappointed just for the fact that the way things end makes you feel like there should definitely be an ongoing after. Otherwise we are just left wondering as usual what comes next with the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Slapstick #1

Dec 8, 2016

Slapstick #1 is a book you would be crazy to miss out on right now. He's not your average superhero and he's not your average mercenary either. He's a brand new kind of terror to the superhero and super-villain world for better or for worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Slapstick #2

Jan 5, 2017

There's actually a story to follow here and it all screams Slapstick. If you want a Marvel book with no restrictions on what will make you laugh, then this is the one for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Slapstick #3

Feb 1, 2017

Adorably deadly doesn't begin to describe what we witnessed in Slapstick #3. This creative team knows how to crank the dial and produce the best entertainment you could ask for from a Marvel book right now. Mature humor wins every time and this issue was a prime example as to why.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Snowfall #1

Feb 17, 2016

Snowfall #1 has a strong story for one of warring, political, scientific and corporate intrigue. It is a plot someone was bound to create, and this was the best creative team to tackle this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Solar: Man of the Atom #5

Sep 17, 2014

Solar: Man Of The Atom #5 is fast paced and doesn't let up on the intensity from start to finish. Be it physical or verbal there is some conflict and it goes so much deeper than you would assume. Family issues aside there is a big picture to see and it's that they need to figure out how to save each other before the Universe tears them apart for their power.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Solar: Man of the Atom #6

Nov 5, 2014

There's no other way to say that Solar: Man of the Atom is a series that fans of superheroes should be reading. There is much wonder to what someone can do when they put their mind to. When given the power to change things and go that extra mile to make miracles happen with them. That is Solar: Man of the Atom, and that is Erica in a nutshell. We get to see her grow as a superhero. A journey you surely don't want to miss.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Solar: Man of the Atom #7

Nov 19, 2014

Solar: Man of The Atom #8 serves as the defining issue that really separates the kind of person Phil is and the type of hero Erica is by the ending analysis of Erica by the robot. Now all that is left to wonder from this issue is

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Solar: Man of the Atom #8

Dec 10, 2014

Solar: Man of The Atom #8 is the end to another chapter in Erica's life as Solar which builds her up to be the hero she's always wanted to be since a child. This story is moving, inspirational, and I think a lot of us can look at her and see we have had that same fire in our hearts to strive for the impossible, all for the sake of what we think is right.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Solar: Man of the Atom #9

Feb 18, 2015

Solar: Man of The Atom #9 is a fresh start that gives Erica that opening to be the hero she wants to be on familiar grounds. She loves being a hero, though also wants to have a normal life. That is the kind of struggle we need to see, There is much to look forward to, much we don't know, and that is great moving forward having something to anticipate since the time between issues tends to feel fairly long.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Solar: Man of the Atom #10

Mar 18, 2015

Solar: Man of The Atom #10 slips on the superhero boot and cranks the intensity to 10 as the urgency to save the Earth has never been higher. What comes next will show us what the future has in store for this series when any screw up could easily be the end for our heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Solar: Man of the Atom #11

Apr 22, 2015

Solar: Man of The Atom #11 continues to be a must read that no matter what comes next you can expect that the following issue will be better than the previous.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Solar: Man of the Atom #12

May 13, 2015

Aside from the slight feeling like we were thrown into the action of the issue fast, Solar: Man of The Atom #12 was as perfect as things could get for a finale. The way this issue ends gives you an idea that there could be more, and if there was, you'd want to see what the future holds for Erica now that she fully grasps the responsibility she has to the Earth and whatever next that will come her way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Sonitus #1

Feb 21, 2018

Overall, Sonitus #1 was an interesting start to this miniseries. There was no telling what to be in store for in this issue, and certainly not for the issues to come. This is the kind of mental thriller that holds your attention when the best thing to expect is the unexpected. Especially when supernatural forces are at hand.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Sovereigns #0

Apr 5, 2017

I found myself very satisfied with Sovereigns #0. It shows that Dynamite has a plan for these heroes that shouldn't fall to the background. If that means bringing some back with a new identity, then that might just be the way to go because at the same time you want these stories to bring in new readers while still attracting the long time fans.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Sovereigns #1

May 17, 2017

By the end of Sovereigns #1 I feel that they were truly able to pull you into this story. Sovereigns leaves us wanting to know how exactly the world could end up as desolate as it is in 2525, how these major heroes could be overcome by this darkness, and what chance they could possibly have at stopping it. I have my theories, but nothing is ever as it seems when the concept of time comes into play.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Sovereigns #2

Jun 14, 2017

Sovereigns #2 took some big steps forward. We know the enemy, how strong this enemy is, and why the future we see just may be hard to fight against. This is not a story for those who were looking for a hopeful story and I appreciate that they are pulling no punches with heroes who are more than the average. I just hope that after what has happened we next pick up on what role Samson has to play in this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Sovereigns #3

Jul 13, 2017

Sovereigns #3 kicks things up a notch. We made so much more progress in this issue now that there is no denying the threat of this enemy. The fun is still in all the things we don't know, and neither do our heroes. It keeps everyone bracing for the worst since future events already tell us the fate of these sovereigns.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Sovereigns #4

Aug 9, 2017

Another great issue as we walk away knowing much more than we did last month. Sovereigns #4 expanded on our understanding of current events, past events, and events still unfolding. Powerful moments as well from characters as solving this mystery is either their salvation or their doom.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Sovereigns #5

Sep 13, 2017

The excitement and satisfaction I felt for Sovereigns #5 was like the first time I flipped open a page of ‘Masks' from Dynamite. The things you can do when you bring these heroes together is astounding. They don't exist or fight in the same way our modern superheroes do and that is something to appreciate.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Starbrand and Nightmask #1

Dec 16, 2015

Starbrand and Nightmask #1 was a solid start in giving these two some relevance in All-New, All-Different Marvel. Like other titles this one is showing the importance of who they are behind the mask, and that is the best way to flesh out superheroes who haven't had that chance to fully blossom.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Storm #1

Jul 23, 2014

Storm #1 delivers with a first issue that digs inside her head while giving us a reason to connect with a hero like her. If this issue taught us anything it's that you cannot stop her any more than you can defeat the wind. She has her own mind, she is not the naive person she used to be in the past, and still has a lot to learn about herself as an adult. This series has potential and this issue has created room for growth. Greg Pak shows interest in making Storm once again that standout hero and hopefully that is picked up by fans throughout.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Storm #2

Aug 20, 2014

Storm #2 is a step in the right direction and gives us the best of both worlds with Ororo. Hopefully we don't lose this type of storytelling for action because Greg Pak proves that fighting isn't always necessary. In this capacity we better connect with Storm and that's most necessary.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Storm #3

Sep 24, 2014

Storm #3 continues to throw Ororo back out into the world where she can do what she does best. Some want a linear story or some big plot to unfold, but honestly that is not necessary with a series like this. If there is one along the way, it will be because that is the direction she needs to take. Though to think Storm can't just be a person trying to save the world one situation at a time is just not the way to go about approaching this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Storm #4

Oct 15, 2014

A solid issue definitely that is not only worth reading just because the series has been great, but for how well it connects Storm to the rest of the world through Wolverine's death.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Storm #5

Nov 20, 2014

Storm #5 is an end to just a taste of what Storm will learn from Wolverine's past. The question from here is if she will allow anything she learns about him influence her feelings? Will she go looking to find more? And just where in general she can go from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Storm #6

Dec 17, 2014

Storm #6 tests the boundaries of what power Storm carries with her and all it took were some troopers who had every intention to make sure Storm and that plane full of civilians didn't reach it's destination. Again, you may want the big picture story, but why when you can get something truly genuine with a definite beginning and end?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Storm #7

Jan 7, 2015

Storm #7 is where Ororo shows what she is made of when diplomacy isn't always the solution to a problem that can't be talked through. The corruption runs deep, and the only way to stop it is for Storm to strike at the source.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Storm #8

Feb 19, 2015

Storm #8 is the conclusion to a story we should get more often in mainstream superhero books. Getting back to those days where you just save the day and show that you are a person just like all the people you save.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Storm #9

Mar 18, 2015

Storm #4 is another small story which gives Storm that development she needs as a leader and as Ororo. Big plots aside, they mean nothing of you can't enjoy the little things like this that should make you like the characters for who they are and not by who they punch in the face next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Storm #10

Apr 9, 2015

Storm continues to be that title everyone underestimates in quality. Read it for Storm, for another member of the X-Men who shows some individuality, or just because you like this creative team, but at the end of the day you read Storm for the fact that it is character driven and takes risks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Storm #11

May 14, 2015

Surely the way Storm #11 ended is reason enough to say that this will be a Marvel title to miss with Secret Wars marking the end. There just aren't enough books out there from Marvel like this right now. And not enough with as many stunning covers as this and those before.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strange Academy (2020) #1

Mar 4, 2020

Welcome to the Strange Academy! Hope you survive the experience! If you are looking for magic with a sense of wonder, then look no further than Strange Academy #1! This was the book you always wanted from the magic corner of the Marvel Universe. Even in this book the lure of discovery does not end when there is still much to learn about the way that magic works in this world. Especially after some of the more significant changes magic has gone through in recent times.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strange Academy (2020) #2

Jul 8, 2020

Overall, this was a solid transition from the first issue of Strange Academy #1. This creative team did not waste the opportunity to set the tone for everything we should look forward to from the academy's curriculum. No disrespect to Harry Potter fans, but this is what it looks like when you are actually being taught magic, and the rules of magic.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Strange Academy (2020) #3

Sep 30, 2020

Strange Academy #3 was a lot of things upon this book's return. Though this is an experience unlike any you're going to get from Marvel right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strange Academy (2020) #6

Dec 9, 2020

All in all, Strange Academy #6 created a drastic shift in tone that you just were not prepared for from this book. This is a dangerous world these kids have been brought into, and now everyone better understands how seriously that should be taken.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strikeforce (2019) #1

Sep 25, 2019

These aren't the first heroes you would choose to face the darkness, but they sure do know how to raise hell! Strikeforce #1 served as an excellent introduction to this team, the villain that they will have to deal with, and the obstacles that are sure to make this mission easier said than done. Especially with one slip-up by the end that should make you anxious to see what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strikeforce (2019) #2

Oct 24, 2019

The minute I saw the cover to this issue, I knew that Strikeforce #2 was going to be excitement from start to finish. There is never a wrong time to take us back to Las Vegas to indulge in the demons, debauchery and action. Well, let's just say it how it is, decapitations. Because with a team like this? You love the action for the lack of restraint they tend to use.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Strikeforce (2019) #5

Jan 9, 2020

They didn't tell a lie, no one was prepared for this digital revolution. Strikeforce #5 was playing with fire between the use of Ghost and messing around with the clashing of science and magic, but the effort paid off by the end. At the end of the day, impossible situations like this is exactly what this team signed up for in the first place.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strikeforce (2019) #6

Feb 5, 2020

Through the conclusion of Strikeforce #6, this chapter in the lives of these heroes comes to a close. Action-packed, great sense of urgency, and a memorable villain in the form of Moonstone. It was a good end which left little to question aside from what is going to keep this team together now their main reason for coming together is done with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Strikeforce (2019) #7

Mar 4, 2020

Strikeforce #7 brings us to the next stretch in this story, and Monster Island might be one of the more exciting destinations next to the Casino. There was action, there was some humor thrown in, but what brought it all together was getting some notable character moments. Striking that kind of balance works to the benefit of a book like this when you want to give readers a reason to keep coming back for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Strikeforce (2019) #8

Jul 15, 2020

I know that Strikeforce might not be that book everyone is clamoring to pick up compared to some other books out there, but I wouldn't sleep on this one either. Strikeforce as a team book captures what we should see from most which stick random heroes together. It's all about what you do to make it genuine, and not just another gimmick.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2011) #20

May 10, 2013

What is great is that we all already knew that Waller was cynical. This is nothing new and now we get to see the degree of which she would take things to get the results she wants. Bringing them back to life just so they can't escape their sentences(Deadshot), and caring less when they actually die. You see little humanity or decency from her as she treats them like tools. The type of person so drawn in to their job that reality escapes them. To make matters worse, she calls on the aid of two remorseless human beings. One an unknown soldier who beat a fellow teammate to death, then the other who is revealed to be the psychotic sister of Barbara Gordon who we all thought was supposedly dead when they last confronted each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2011) #21

Jun 13, 2013

Story progressively getting better, the characterization of the team is handled very well, and their motivations too which drives a boo like this. The art and mainly the coloring matched the tone of this issue which was very intense given that they finally made their move in retaliation for their treatment. Whatever comes next, Suicide Squad looks to be able to deliver on shocking you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2011) #22

Jul 11, 2013

The chaotic dynamic of the team has to be what really sticks out so far. You see that they work so well together when they actually do, yet have no regard for each others well-being. Aside from this the dialogue stands out when you have those like Harley who always has something funny to say or Deadshot who always sounds like a sarcastic ass. The gritty style of the book makes the story look just as creepy as it feels. Good issue overall that is hopefully setting up for something climatic to come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Suicide Squad (2011) #23

Aug 15, 2013

The one problem with this issue is the change of artists. I felt that many panels looked off and it was very distracting when it wasn't all too appealing. Not everything looked bad, but too much which made it look inconsistent. That is a problem when it was something I could usually compliment about the book.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2011) #24

Oct 10, 2013

James seems to be the main focus here and it's something different yet welcome seeing how he sees the big picture. Through his eyes this situation is easier to be explored and understood being the insightful criminal mind he is. Best choice overall and has the most motivation for rescuing Waller, as he is still in love with her. Hopefully we get to see what he is really capable of when he has something to fight for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2011) #25

Nov 16, 2013

Suicides Squad is one of the many books out there that really gains something from its ties to Forever Evil. Seeing the evils that resurface and what that means for this world when majority of the heroes are MIA. It's clever that Kindt takes this opportunity to remind us of how unpredictable Harley can be. In fact it is something he emphasizes heavily through Thinker. That is something to look forward to because anything can happen when it's involving her. Aside from this Patrick Zircher brings back that style which makes this book feel so grim, yet thrilling. The darkness in everyone's expressions and the action scenes that makes this high-octane.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2011) #26

Dec 11, 2013

In the end another great issue that brings to life that over the top nature of this book that we do like to see. Everyone has a stake in this fight, some more than others, but no one is safe when the biggest issue is the trust they have in one another. The art was great, very consistent with the dark tone of this plot, but then after page 18 things changed too noticeably. I really felt a bit turned off by how the style shifted and it wasn't any better either. It is the only problem that came with this issue though luckily that was not at the climax of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #1

Aug 17, 2016

Suicide Squad #1 is a solid start that read fast for a first issue, yet delivers promise of the thrill of everything and anything goes when the mission starts. The best time for anyone who is a fan of this team to jump in without feeling lost, or without a need to really read the Rebirth #1. Overall a good balance between plot progression, and character development sectioned off at the end through the Personnel File.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #2

Sep 14, 2016

Saying they are screwed may be an understatement by the end of this issue. ‘The Black Vault' part 2 cranked the dial to 10 with Suicide Squad #2 and quickly making this a must read. It was a fast read, but there was so much to take in and awe at both through the story and art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #3

Sep 28, 2016

Suicide Squad #3 was practically a ****show, and that is said in the best way possible. This right here is what it means to wing it and they do that to the best of their ability when the odds are clearly not in their favor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #4

Oct 12, 2016

Suicide Squad #4 was another fun issue for not only what happen to conclude this fight with General Zod, but also the exploration of why they continue to allow Harley as a part of the team knowing she can be a wildcard. It seems like we aren't done with this yet, so anticipation remains knowing the madness has only begun.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #5

Oct 26, 2016

By the end of Suicide Squad #5 I'd call this the start of the next chapter in this book because it feels like we are dealing with a whole new ind of monster. The mission is one thing, though what happens after is like something different altogether.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2016) #6

Nov 16, 2016

Suicide Squad #6 is madness in the best of ways when Waller's curiosity invites trouble to her own doorstep. Could the main stories be a little bit longer? Sure, but as long as the stories at the end are still quality we are still getting our monies worth in action and exploration.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #7

Nov 30, 2016

Suicide Squad #7 is where things begin to make sense which didn't take too long and came with a creative approach down to the big twist had the end that might have your head spinning. This book continues to keep us at the edge of our seats and that is what we need for this story that doesn't let up in delivering action you won't get from the other books.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Suicide Squad (2016) #8

Dec 14, 2016

With an end to ‘The Black Vault', you do wonder where we go next after Suicide Squad #8. This was an exciting way to kick off Suicide Squad's first chapter. As a prelude we didn't quite get to what creates this upcoming ‘Justice League Vs Suicide Squad‘ crossover, though nonetheless this is something to look forward to. I mean they did just take down General Zod of all beings to have the misfortune of running into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #9

Jan 11, 2017

By the end of Suicide Squad #9 you do struggle finding reason to side with Waller knowing this harsh truth. Maybe this is why she concocted this risky plan to somehow ask the Justice League for help, but you certainly want to see what happens when she faces something she failed to cover up.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Suicide Squad (2016) #10

Jan 25, 2017

Suicide Squad #10 will and should be remembered for any who forget that Suicide Squad can't be compelling. Even the likes of Waller have a story to them, and it won't always be the cold boos whose ready to blow your brains out. It can be enlightening to the reason why she is that person. For that reason this story is as memorable as they come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2016) #11

Feb 8, 2017

Aside from the choice in artist that I struggle to justify, Suicide Squad #11 does still hold potential in where this is taking us having Amanda Waller face the consequences of the lengths she was willing to go to get Batman off her back. Its odd when this time around it's the story at the back which holds your interest more for what happens then and what it leads to for the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #12

Feb 22, 2017

Suicide Squad #12 for the most part is another solid issue. They made their big move killing off Waller and one really has to wonder if they want us to look at what's right in front of us or continue to expect the unexpected as we always should when it comes to Suicide Squad.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2016) #13

Mar 8, 2017

‘Burning Down the House' continues to live up to the name this issue. After Suicide Squad #13 it will be hard to ever look at things the same way again. The team can't be the way it was given the loss and the betrayal they have gone through. Not that I'm still with the person who was killed off, but the story and plot continues picking up in intensity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Suicide Squad (2016) #14

Mar 22, 2017

Shocking twist at the end aside, Suicide Squad is on a roll bringing definition to what it means to be on this team. Not Amanda Waller's meaning, but the meaning of the ones who put their lives on the line every mission. Suicide Squad #14 is another issue showing us why this isn't a book to overlook. There is just as much substance to this story as there is wall-to-wall action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Suicide Squad (2016) #15

Apr 12, 2017

Suicide Squad #15 brings us to the end of another story arc and it sure did pack a punch. Shaky in a few areas, but still everything you love about what this team does best. Still some questions to answer down the road as well as addressing how this team is holding up internally, but for now things keep moving forward. If there's anything to take from this story arc most, it is that you simply don't underestimate Waller.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2016) #16

Apr 26, 2017

You may call this mission anti-climatic, but Suicide Squad #16 delivered everything exciting about this team with all the things you just don't see coming. We jump into 'Earthlings on Fire' with the same team, different problems, and some interesting interactions that you definitely want to see explored more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #17

May 10, 2017

You really never know what to expect from this book. Just when you think you have a grasp of what direction this is heading in, all it takes is an issue like Suicide Squad #17 to shake things up entirely. Storylines wrapped up, new troubles arise, and some deeper exploration of character personalities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Suicide Squad (2016) #18

May 24, 2017

Sitting in a Belle Reve prison cell is the biggest gamble the Wall has ever played, and Suicide Squad #18 was the perfect platform to answer why in her case this is never goes well. You could say this development is predictable yet you couldn't ask for a better conflict created from Waller biting off more than she can chew. The only way to have fun with a character who loves control is to challenge what should be impossible, or ill-advised.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Suicide Squad (2016) #19

Jun 14, 2017

Ouch is the only word that could pass my lips by the end of Suicide Squad #19. This ended the only way it could and there's a lot of backlash that will come from this. Waller might have some things to answer for, one person in particular walked away from this broken, and controlling this team just got a whole lot harder. ‘Black Vault' turned out to be a winner in my book for a number of memorable moments which shined a different light on this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #20

Jun 28, 2017

Who Waller chooses to lead the Suicide Squad was pretty shocking even if on the surface it made sense. Suicide Squad #20 definitely made us work for that answer and the exploration was worth it for some crucial character development. These may be villains, but they are still people underneath. It was sad, it was suspenseful, yet above all it was moving to an extent.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #21

Jul 12, 2017

Suicide Squad #21 bring us to the start of ‘Kill Your Darlings'. Now I don't know what that is supposed t mean, but we'll cross that bridge as both the Suicide Squad and Waller find themselves in tough spots. They've been in some tough spots before, though I must say they are going into this with a different mindset than we're used to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Suicide Squad (2016) #22

Jul 26, 2017

Big changes are ahead for Task Force X after the events of Suicide Squad #22. That encounter with Karla went nothing like what you would have assumed from it, that may have been for the best as well. A change in direction like this keeps things fresh in my opinion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2016) #23

Aug 9, 2017

Any reader should have been very skeptical about where ‘KILL YOUR DARLINGS' part three would take us. The Suicide Squad have done some crazy things in the past, but to challenge Batman like this? I'm not the biggest Batman reader, but I don't think I've ever seen the guy this pissed and ready to strike back. What could have lost us reignited a need to anticipate the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #24

Aug 23, 2017

Who knew this war against The People could have evolved into this grand move against the world of heroes and villains? Suicide Squad #24 is where it all begins for war descending upon metahuman populations around the world at Amanda Waller's command. We know the sides, the stakes, and who is truly pulling the strings behind one of the biggest powerplays since the start of Rebirth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Suicide Squad (2016) #25

Sep 13, 2017

I wouldn't say that Suicide Squad #25 felt too much like an anniversary issue, though it was great for just being the finale to ‘Kill Your Darlings'. Many characters made their time in the spotlight count and this was just as chaotic as you would have expected it to be. Maybe not through the action primarily, but there were many things that needed to be addressed between characters that they nailed with execution. This twist for what comes next is quite interesting because I think at this point we all would have thought we knew everything about the original Suicide Squad by now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Suicide Squad (2016) #27

Oct 11, 2017

Harley Quinn and the Suicide Squad do somewhat boldly go where no sociopath has gone before. Suicide Squad #27 was a solid start with us mostly getting through a catch-up of the current status of the team, with some mild suspense towards the big reveal (for the team). In general this is a good jumping-on point for new readers as well since there's not too much to know about the arc before aside from Rick Flag being dead.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #28

Oct 25, 2017

Suicide Squad #28 opened us up to what he hope is the truth to this secret Task Force X. Solid character moments and build-up to what will be an intense confrontation with whatever put them in such a desperate situation to call for help. Overall you want to believe this story because it opens a door to the history of the DC Universe that you couldn't haven't done any other way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #29

Nov 8, 2017

Suicide Squad #29 takes us into the most crucial part of this story arc. There was action, exploration, and plenty of intrigue to take from just knowing that a team like the Suicide Squad of the 1950s existed. They may not be all that they are expected to be in person, but the history behind them is cool nonetheless.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2016) #30

Nov 22, 2017

It could always be better, it can always be worse, that is the life of this team whenever they spring into action. Suicide Squad #30 added so much context to this plot and story that was worth the wait to reach. Great suspense up to this point when there were a number of times when you thought you may have figured things out only for the creative team to tease something else.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Suicide Squad (2016) #31

Dec 13, 2017

Suicide Squad #31 was a good mix of emotion and action, just how you like it when it comes to this book. The theme again is sacrifice, and it never hurts to emphasize that this is a big part of the job description. Well that and its also in the name. The events here were defining and memorable when almost everything about this story had tragic written all over it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Suicide Squad (2016) #32

Dec 27, 2017

Suicide Squad #32 brings ‘The Secret History of Task Force X' to a close and I couldn't have found myself more satisfied with what came of this mission. It stung like hell because with the end of every mission, this team is yanked and twisted in a way that changes everything when you get back to them for the next arc. You care about what happens to these characters and that is all you can ask for when it is a book about villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2016) #33

Jan 10, 2018

Suicide Squad #33 begins to answer the age-old question. If this is a Suicide Squad, where are these people actually being expendable? Juan Soria serves as that lamb to the slaughter, and while it is funny for how doomed he was from the start, it goes without saying that you do feel some sympathy for this guy by the end. He dreamed big, he fell hard, and everything just went downhill from there. Credit when it is due that this creative team is actually willing to show this team as one full of villains.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Suicide Squad (2016) #34

Jan 24, 2018

Suicide Squad #34 brings ‘The Chosen Juan', and this was one heck of a self-contained story to tell involving a character new. One that we probably won't ever see again, though regardless a character worth meeting for the experience alone. This is what happens when you are truly used, manipulated, and discarded when under the authority of Amanda Waller.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #35

Feb 14, 2018

So far, this new story arc has all the makings of becoming one of the better stories told in this volume. Suicide Squad #35 came guns blazing from the very start, and that is the kind of intensity you expect from this book. Above I was talking about how each arc begins by shaking thing up, but this was just flipping the whole damn table.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Suicide Squad (2016) #36

Feb 28, 2018

Suicide Squad #36 cranked the dial to ten as Hack is a woman on a mission. It only hurt this issue that something so obvious as people knowing who killed Hack is being willfully neglected. There's no way the Squad suddenly forgot who killed her when they all face death if she gets no answer. That aside, this story is still exciting with a great balance in character development as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Suicide Squad (2016) #37

Mar 14, 2018

While I do feel like this story arc could have used a different name, it was exciting from start to finish. This finale for the most part satisfied when there was no telling how the events of Suicide Squad #37 would conclude till the very end. It had intensity and emotion, which are two things you get used two for a book dealing with killers and murderers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2016) #38

Mar 28, 2018

Suicide Squad #38 begins the story that is the product of what happens when the government has the power to be judge, jury, and executioner. We've seen what happens when others try to mimic their own version of the team, but The Wall is what happens when you take that step further towards absolute power. The only question was if they could do so and handle the control.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #39

Apr 11, 2018

Suicide Squad #39 cranked the dial at a time when we needed this creative team to the most. As close as we have gotten to these characters, you have to push some boundaries if they are to live up to the name of Suicide Squad. This issue created that reminder that no one is safe and that is the best feeling to have putting down this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #40

Apr 25, 2018

Suicide Squad #40 brings ‘Break Through The Wall' to a stunning conclusion. This had nothing to do with the action, and that is what makes this a welcomed finish to a story arc. As you would expect, nothing will be the same moving forward, and the headspace of these characters should hopefully change the atmosphere that comes with this team in the following missions. It would be a crime to move to the next story and see nothing from the fallout.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #41

May 9, 2018

Suicide Squad #41 starts us off on the right track with a new mission, and new stakes involved on all sides of this conflict. It was only a matter of time before Batman made his presence known again, and he did not fail to make an impact on those he encountered. At the same time, it was only a matter of time before Deadshot could be the center of attention again. For a guy who has been taking some losses as of late, this is a time where you want to see some real heroics and redemption.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #42

May 23, 2018

Suicide Squad #42 was both action-packed and engaging for the second chapter of this story arc. This issue added satisfying depth to the team-ups and where they could go right or wrong. The anticipation still stands to see how far Deadshot will be willing to go in order to save Zoe, and how these other forces will challenge him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2016) #43

Jun 13, 2018

The plot continues to thicken through the events of Suicide Squad #43. Batman and Deadshot don't see eye to eye about a lot of things, but these past two issues have been perfect for addressing what it means to put everything on the line for someone you care for most. Motivations were challenged, lines were crossed, and tensions reached a boiling point when there's so much to lose on all sides of this board.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Suicide Squad (2016) #44

Jul 11, 2018

Suicide Squad #44 brings this story to a close and it was one worth telling. If you felt that Deadshot has been getting the short end of the stick as of late, this short arc more than makes up for it in a way that truly only focuses on him without the reliance on the rest of the Suicide Squad to work off of. It goes without saying that Deadshot is not like the other villains, even if he thinks he is, and this story drove that message home through emotion, action, and character dissection.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #45

Aug 8, 2018

‘Sink Atlantis' is a story arc that introduces a mission that's right up the alley of Task Force X. You look for the kind of mission that they are meant to be doing, and this was the answer. One where they face a superpower, and at worst they are used to deny any involvement of the US government. Not to mention you have the moments where they show again that they aren't your average villains who act without second-guessing the why. Suicide Squad #45 is a great point to jump back into the action without needing to read Aquaman or have read Dark Nights: Metal. A big plus if you ask me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Suicide Squad (2016) #46

Sep 12, 2018

Suicide Squad #46 was an excellent set-up for a sense of urgency that this arc had not faced before. So much can go wrong when you challenge the kingdom of the sea, and this issue truly reminded us of what is at stake beyond what will happen if Atlantis falls.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2016) #47

Oct 10, 2018

I honestly don't know how to sum up my feelings about Suicide Squad #47. If you were looking for Captain Boomerang shenanigans, then that is what you got. Now if you weren't also looking for a strong character exploration, then this was also a treat. We got down to the very foundation of what makes this bloke tick. The things that made him despicable, and the things that make him somewhat redeemable. You couldn't have asked for a better version of him than what was delivered here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad (2016) #48

Nov 14, 2018

Suicide Squad #48 starts us off with a bold new direction for the team. Williams loves putting this team through the ringer, and has no problem making sure that everyone faces some obstacle directly or indirectly. "Rocket to Russia" will be a memorable story depending on the choices and reveals to be made as it continues.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Suicide Squad (2016) #49

Dec 12, 2018

Suicide Squad #49 hit us with another emotional roller coaster for everyone trapped in this game of vengeance. A lot happened here, but nothing stood out more than digging into the past of Rick Flag and what really happened that day when his mission went south. Putting an image to the story makes a world of difference in getting this guy better.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Suicide Squad (2016) #50

Jan 16, 2019

With this week's fiftieth issue of Suicide Squad, once again we reach the end of this book. At this point I'm almost convinced that there must always be a Suicide Squad for DC. So while this is the finale, you do have it in the back of your head that there is always a chance for more. Just with a different creative team. With that said, Suicide Squad #50 was an exciting end to this last mission. There was action, there was heart, and there was all the madness that these pages could contain for a day in the life of Task Force X.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Suicide Squad (2016) Annual #1

Aug 22, 2018

Suicide Squad Annual #1 was an enjoyable side mission for what it ended up being. We pretty much were led to take this for what it is. A different team, more expendable, bolder mission parameters, but all the same a fairly somber finish. The intent didn't seem to be aiming for memorable, but I will give credit that this was thinking outside of the box.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Suicide Squad (2019) #1

Dec 18, 2019

They didn't lie, this just might be the wildest incarnation of the Squad ever seen. Suicide Squad #1 is a strong departure from everything we once knew about the way this team worked. After so many iterations of the team, the feeling is good to finally have a creative team that is bold enough to give us something we have never seen before. It's a new frontier that should pay off s long as Tom Taylor continues digging into his bag of tricks to keep us at the edge of our seats.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #2

Jan 29, 2020

All in all, if the first issue didn't get you? There is no doubt in my mind that this second issue will pull you in. Suicide Squad #2 reinforced everything that you love about this creative team being back in their element. This is a story that will keep you on your toes, make you gasp, and change everything you once knew about the way this team operates.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #3

Feb 26, 2020

This is a book which keeps getting better and better. If you thought this was going to be too different from your average Suicide Squad book to jump in? Rest assured, you are investing in the same high-octane action, violence, and shock. Better yet, this is Suicide Squad which starts off on a better note than most with momentum and high stakes from the get-go. Suicide Squad #3 was a wake-up call as well that you should simply sit back and let this story unfold on its own. This creative team clearly has plans to flip the script on us when we least expect it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #4

Mar 25, 2020

Another exhilarating issue of Suicide Squad, though for different reasons than the usual. That is of course what you get from a creative team like this that knows how you give you a well-rounded story for an action book. Suicide Squad #4 was a good reminder that this Harley Quinn is not one to confuse with who she used to be outside of Task Force X. Nothing new to longtime readers, but leaning towards more substance goes a long way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #5

May 27, 2020

Never say you have anything to read from DC when you have a book like this ongoing. Suicide Squad #5 was exhilarating and everything which makes an issue of Suicide Squad perfect. If you thought you had this creative team's plans for the book figured out? Forget about it and just let them blow your mind, because it's only with a book like this where that is guaranteed!

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Suicide Squad (2019) #6

Jun 24, 2020

The hunters were definitely hunted this week. Suicide Squad #6 did not disappoint one bit showing these guys what they have stepped into trying to take down the puppet master who's been pulling their strings. Not only that, but reminding these guys that this is a daring mission to accomplish in a world of heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Suicide Squad (2019) #7

Jul 29, 2020

Some bonds just can't be broken. If there's one thing to love most about this run of Suicide Squad, it is the fact that this creative team chose genuine storytelling over everything which could have easily turned out superficial.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Suicide Squad (2019) #8

Aug 26, 2020

Overall, another standout issues of Suicide Squad as the final stretch of their mission is underway. They know their target, and they know what he wants. Though the best takeaway was without a doubt finally getting an origin story for Wink and The Aerie.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #9

Sep 23, 2020

And just like that, this creative team broke the one rule of Suicide Squad that we hold sacred. Issue #9 went there, but made it a moment to remember. Though one death only leads to many more questions about what comes next, because a character like Deadshot as he is now, does not get offed without a proper response to the act.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Suicide Squad (2019) #11

Nov 25, 2020

If you haven't read this run of Suicide Squad? What are you waiting for!?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Suicide Squad (2021) #1

Mar 3, 2021

All in all, Suicide Squad #1 feels like a book worth investing in. If you were a fan of this title before, this first issue leaves you feeling confident that this new creative team can offer the same entertainment value.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Suicide Squad: Rebirth #1

Aug 3, 2016

Suicide Squad: Rebirth #1 eases any concern you may have about at least Rob Williams taking over as writer for the Rebirth relaunch. As for Jim Lee and Scott Williams, we'll just have to wait and see when the actual issue #1 comes out later this month. All in all this is Suicide Squad. They know what we want out of these characters, the kind of violence we should get out of them, and the possibilities for story development we can get out of them too.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Sunstone #2

Apr 29, 2015

Sunstone Volume 2 is worth reading for every reason you picked up the first volume plus more. Digging into the personal lives of these characters has added layers which does way more for us than you'd imagine. Trust is a big part of their lives and pushing that button made it all the while what they experience when having to confront it head on. To question it and challenge it from here is what will take them the distance.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Super Sons (2017) #7

Aug 16, 2017

Super Sons #7 gave us the first of what I do hope is more team-ups with the likes of the Titans. This was still all about Robin and Superboy, but the way they interacted with everyone else made you almost forget for a second that this was a solo adventure book. Not a bad feeling of course when this book captures the fun side in being a superhero. It's no easy life or without darkness, but Super Sons gives you the best of both worlds.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Super Sons (2017) #8

Sep 20, 2017

Super Sons #8 was a fast read, but it was the same fun you get every issue when they spring into action. Definitely the toughest situation these two have been thrown into together being pulled from their own dimension. The biggest takeaway you could ask for is now understanding why this story has been called ‘Planet of The Capes'. This creative team put some thought into what this has been building up to and the context.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Super Sons (2017) #9

Oct 18, 2017

Super Sons #9 brings this story arc to a close and while I was shaky on it at the start, I loved the way they brought this to an end. This story was full of action, emotion, and showed what it means to be a hero when you rise to the occasion. Staring at what looks like the end of the world may stop some heroes cold in their tracks, but the Super Sons along with Big Shot, Hard Line, and an unlikely ally pulled off the impossible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Super Sons (2017) #10

Nov 15, 2017

If you weren't all in for Super Sons and their adventures together, Super Sons #10 gave you so much more to invest in this series. The big thing for this issue, aside from giving these kids a break, was also proving that there is much more to offer in potential storytelling and encounters. Their dynamic is fun, so is Batman and Superman, and hopefully that was only a taste of what more can be done with these characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Super Sons (2017) #11

Dec 20, 2017

Super Sons #11 took a creative approach with the next plot for these kids. They could be doing a lot of things, but the bar keeps raising for them dealing with extraordinary situations. This thing with the Batman of Tomorrow was a long time coming and I'm glad this nook was the one they chose to finally get around to him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Super Sons (2017) #13

Feb 21, 2018

Super Sons #13 was the perfect start to a new story arc. This new plot is one that you can sink your teeth into and it was only a matter of time before Jon truly began to understand who his friend is. We don't see much of this conflict hurting the Super Sons' partnership from the discovery, though the discovery at the very end of the issue just might be the push needed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Super Sons (2017) #14

Mar 21, 2018

Sometimes you read Super Sons because it is light-hearted fun from two young heroes who come from two very different worlds, but you truly stay because these two somehow manage to remind you of what it means to be a superhero and a friend. Super Sons #14 was a means to cement the bond between Damian and Jon, and they nailed it. Great character development, exciting action, it was the full package.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Super Sons (2017) #15

Apr 18, 2018

The Super Sons have definitely gotten themselves into some trouble this time. Kid Amazo's return has served as the most intense enemy they have dealt with so far. Fighting your average psychopath or world conqueror is a normal day, but this flipped their world right on its head.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Super Sons (2017) #16

May 24, 2018

Super Sons #16 was an excellent story arc for fans of this book looking for another reason to believe in this team being more than a younger version of the World's Finest. They have their own way of tackling problems, and their solutions aren't so predictable either. For another arc that was a few issues, the pacing was excellent and held momentum from start to finish.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Super Sons (2017) Annual #1

Nov 29, 2017

Super Sons Annual #1 is as advertised and much more. These pets steal the spotlight and engage you on a whole different level through emotion and action. They had their mission and it took us to places you didn't think we would get to in Super Sons of all books. This was one of those times as well where it was more important to let the artwork tell the story. A great example of how stories can grab you without too much reliance on actual words. Not a bad way to use an annual since you don't want to create too much of a distraction from what the boys are up to currently.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Superboy (2011) #20

May 9, 2013

The one question we have left to wonder is what exactly it is he did that affected what Jocelyn was doing in the Temporal Base.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Superboy (2011) #21

Jun 14, 2013

Overall it is a step up and is continuing to show that Justin Jordan was right to take on Superboy given the somewhat lackluster stories that preceded this.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Supergirl (2011) #20

May 19, 2013

Overall it was a nice end to their meeting. Nothing too special, but it was entertaining nonetheless just because having both Kara's in the same story was handled very well. Even set things in motion for a story to come either next or in the future since eventhough they escaped Sanctuary, it seems to have now made itself mobile to finish the job.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.8
Supergirl (2011) #21

Jun 20, 2013

Overall I think that Supergirl had a good thing going for her on Earth despite anything that was used to get her away. The whole storyline so far feels like a cop out from what she could have been rather than what's happening to her now. The art work is decent, wouldn't say it has been all that great compared to past issues, but that's about it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Supergirl (2011) #37

Dec 18, 2014

Supergirl #37 is the best time to get back into the series if you fell off before. Better direction, interesting cast, a concept that is grand in scope, and most importantly it gets back to showing the importance of being a hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Supergirl (2011) #38

Jan 21, 2015

Supergirl #38 again shakes things up in a good way. You will question the whereabouts of Superboy up to this point, but he is still put in a good position when Supergirl has to make that choice between the Crucible Academy which she begins to question and someone she knows already, enough to be family to some extent.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Supergirl (2011) #39

Feb 18, 2015

Supergirl #39 looks like it's reaching that climax to this story surrounding the Crucible Academy. How it ends and where things could possibly go from here is up in the air, but this is a side to Kara that we needed to see. A lot more humanizing, and something that feels more genuine considering all the craziness of her past. For once you don't feel like it has to be all about the fighting which works for a character like Kara.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Supergirl (2011) #40

Mar 18, 2015

Despite the ending, Supergirl #40 is an amazing issue that proves there is much to look forward to from Kara in the DC Universe when she's just plain being a hero. Hopefully the next story arc doesn't fall into the same pattern as with the other stories and House of El, but we'll just have to wait till the next issue for that.

View Issue       View Full Review
5.5
Superior Carnage #1

Jul 18, 2013

If you read this book and you find it worth sticking to then by all means it might just be for you. But as many who wanted to give Carnage another shot in hopes that something could be done with him like Venom, you will find yourself very disappointed. I am very disappointed and can't help but wonder why it deserves the tag “Superior” when it hardly stacks up to the rest.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Superior Iron Man #5

Feb 25, 2015

A solid issue of Superior Iron Man that you enjoy because it is more than filler. Teen Abomination has been given value as a character we should want to care for. And his past sets up another for Tony as there was more to Teen Abomination's story than just what happened to him in that lab. What Tony did that day as well is what is up for exploration as well. Something worth anticipating in coming weeks.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Superior Iron Man #6

Mar 11, 2015

Big things are coming in Superior Iron Man as another force is willing and able to take the fight to Tony in order to protect the world from what ways he would take advantage of their trust. A nice guy no more, you pick up Superior Iron Man and every issue after this to see a Tony Stark you will love to hate when all is said and done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Superior Iron Man #7

Apr 15, 2015

This issue takes us that much closer to the hopeful fight between Pepper and Tony that these teased covers foreshadow. If Tony wasn't motivated for that, certainly what happened in this issue has put him in that position where he might cross that line to once again make sure no one gets in his way.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Superior Iron Man #9

Jun 4, 2015

The artwork for this issue was especially exciting because it really has been a long time since we last saw these versions of the Iron Man suit. That feeling of nostalgia hit hard and drives home the reminder of how far we have come with Iron Man suits that one suit has really been all Tony has needed in recent times.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Superior Octopus #1

Oct 3, 2018

I don't know about you, but I definitely feel as though Otto Octavius's new super hero strategies may make Spider-Man regret letting him free following the events of Superior Octopus #1. He is not your average superhero, and doesn't play by the same rules. This is a refreshing series for anyone who wants storytelling that will without a doubt change the way you look at superhero comics.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #8

Apr 19, 2013

For a while now the biggest complaint about the series has been Peter's side conversations as he tried to take back control of his body. But, as all things come with patience, Otto has now realized that Peter is still up there and has been pulling his strings when he didn't agree with his actions. It was a nice twist, though now that they both are able to recognize each other we can feel that there will be a fight for absolute control rather than Peter trying to expose him. It was a good issue, but just good at best. There wasn't much to say that could make this issue stand out among the others, but it did well enough in setting the stage for something bigger to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #9

May 2, 2013

The dialogue between the two was nothing short of amazing with how Peter not only called Otto out on everything that he has done up to now, but for forgetting what he promised when he took the mantle Spider-Man. Most would have expected that with his time as Spider-Man he would have learned what it meant to be a hero, and given that one chance he squandered it just to be what he believes to be the more Superior. When Slott said that this book will change the course of either lives, he delivered on by doing the unthinkable and killing the very memory of his uncle and others he lost which were only memories. They all shaped who he is today and just losing an inch of this fight with Otto will have repercussions in the near future if he makes it out on top. It does end on a cliffhanger which more than likely ended in Otto's favor, but this is the excitement that Slott is able to generate with his writing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #10

May 24, 2013

Something big is definitely brewing and the Goblin King revealed at the end is the focal point of it all. He knows Otto's tech, and has even managed to bring many of Otto's enemies together to put an end to Otto's violent watch over New York. If he really wants to be Superior, the moment will sure come soon when he puts that to the test.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #11

Jun 7, 2013

What the next issue has in store for Otto is questionable, but if he is able to give Spider Slayer such a hard time without much effort, then who knows if the others who are now restored can handle him.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #12

Jun 20, 2013

Fans of Peter may not agree with what is transpiring in this story arc, but being Otto this has been nothing short of spectacular writing by Slott. This isn't even accounting for the layout and art for the book which matches the tone of it all. A hero that thinks outside the box and does not falter when faced with the normal situations other heroes stumble upon. Like I have said many times before, there are many directions this story can take and this is one which is most appealing for his character. Though these are 4 villains who never gave him much of a problem alone, together he's handling them as if it's nothing new to him. Whatever comes next, it's worth reading.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #13

Jul 11, 2013

This issue delivered on what we have come to expect from Otto as he becomes the hero that he wants to be. There's nothing more or less that you could want from him and in the end the only thing you have to question is his intentions. Always thinking, expanding, love him or hate him he is doing a better job of being a hero than most who have been one since the start. What you may take from this overall is the flaws of both heroes and villains and how it only takes a genius to be able to exploit them in a manner that is most efficient.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #14

Jul 25, 2013

This is a great transition from the conflict at the Rift because you really start to see that Slott put thought into this story. You'd almost forget about the Goblin King and then you realize with everything Otto is doing now, he's just making room for the Goblin King to take over. I think when he makes his move finally it should be something pretty awesome because he seems to equal him in both tactics and intelligence.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #15

Aug 8, 2013

A solid issue and transition from the explosive issue previous. Again if you want something different and something that questions the status quo of super heroics? This is the book for you to read because Slott and Otto both bring something new and exciting to the table.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #16

Aug 22, 2013

Aside from this a great way by Dan Slott to show how Otto really does prove himself to be the Superior Spider-Man. Not because he says he is, but because he proves it every time he steps into a fight prepared. Maybe the army and robots could be excessive, but who would not want that kind of power to back you up? If you are a Spidey fan, do not turn your back for the fact that he doesn't do things the same way as Pete, enjoy the fact that he is something new, and maybe someone the world deserves more at the time.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #17

Sep 5, 2013

Overall I felt a bit let down by this introduction. It could have been handled a bit better and I hope that down the road as the story progresses it can do some justice to what was pretty weak. That's not to say the whole issue was weak as everything else made this redeemable with the plot progression. Slott has taken a step back to address some of the things that Otto has neglecting in Pete's life and this is one which took him by surprise and led to something which could have been avoidable.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #18

Sep 20, 2013

Solid issue, but definitely could be better. It's great to see Spider-Man 2099 again, but it would be better to see that this story doesn't drag on with his presence too long. It was a good effort to have both cross paths though it could have been handled a lot better than it has been up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #19

Oct 17, 2013

Overall this provided us with much developments for Spider-Man's cast. Spider-Man 2099 is now a part of this story as he keeps an eye on Stone, Modell has gone his way, MJ has finally moved on, and Carlie continues her search for answers as to if it really is Peter under the mask. Well she has a pretty good idea as of now, but we'll see if she can really capitalize on this new opportunity because many chances for Otto's secret to be revealed ended up failing under the most disappointing circumstances.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #20

Oct 31, 2013

Good issue that could have been a bit better. It was a necessary transition into a new chapter of Peter's life, but one that you would find hard to get through because it falls flat of excitement. That of course doesn't stop it from setting the story up for the unavoidable Stunner Vs. Superior Spider-Man, and seeing how Otto deals with what will make or break his career.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Superior Spider-Man (2013) #21

Nov 16, 2013

This was a great issue that once again narrowly manages to keep Otto from losing what he had fought so hard to achieve. Fought for his reputation, his future, his love, and to stay ahead of those who want to discredit him. With this said you might feel a bit bored with the escapades of Carlie, it's been a constant step forward and two steps back with her and you know that she won't be getting any closer to revealing Otto as Peter any time soon. Aside from this the fight between Spider-Man and Stunner looked very lively, something we haven't seen in a while and Camuncoli does well in capturing their expressions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #1

Dec 26, 2018

An impressive start with Superior Spider-Man #1 that reminds you of everything you enjoy about what this hero has to offer the Spider Family. Whether Superior Spider-Man, Elliot Tolliver, or Octavius, there is something to prove here by the way that this former villain tries to be the best version of himself. It won't be easy, but the thrill is in following all those bumps and hurdles. One that just so happens to take the form of an ex, and the other being one of the most powerful forces you can encounter in the universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #2

Jan 23, 2019

Superior Spider-Man #2 was for the most part all battle, but so far it has been one worth following from start to finish in this second issue. If you weren't already invested in this book, the events of this clash with Terrax has surely enough given you a reason to come back for more. Superior tactics seems like the right choice of words to describe the way that Otto has attempted to turn this fight in his favor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #3

Feb 28, 2019

If you were looking for another shallow adventure for Otto Octavius, then you were surely mistaken by the end of Superior Spider-Man #3. This third chapter gave us a pretty clear idea of which version of Otto we are dealing with, and what is now at stake for him setting up shop in San Francisco. Whether it was the endearing character moments, the action, or the clever twists, this series has more than proved its potential as an ongoing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #6

May 29, 2019

Superior Spider-Man #6 brings yet another story to a close. This one was quick and to the point. A new team-up, a new kind of danger for Otto to overcome, and another step taken in Otto's pursuit for the better version of himself. I just hope that with the next issue of Superior Spider-Man being a tie-in to War of the Realms, this is not going to be an issue you have to skip. Some creative teams fail at this when they leave you feeling as though you are missing something because they don't take into account who is and isn't caught up. The best thing they can do is make sure that this still feels like just another Superior Spider-Man story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #7

Jun 12, 2019

Unlike some of the other tie-ins, this was thrilling for a lot of things going on with it that this creative team went wild with. Superior Spider-Man #7 just went guest appearance after appearance and indulged in every interaction that you would not get to see under different circumstances.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #8

Jun 26, 2019

With Superiority Comes Responsibility! If you ask me, THIS sounds much better than the original. Superior Spider-Man #8 gave us a perfect conclusion to Superior Spidey's inclusion in the War of the Realms event. I can't help but be impressed by all of these creative teams who have shown us that we can have tie-ins without feeling as though we are spending money on something that you would otherwise call filler. This tie-in was fun, engaging, and never let-up with the character development that you consistently expect from Otto.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #9

Jul 18, 2019

Superior Spider-Man #9 is not the issue where old enemies make their way back into Otto's life, but we got something way better before that. There has never been a better time to say the words “all lives matter” in a superhero world. This creative team has changed the game for event tie-ins. You can always do so much more with them, and Superior Spider-Man #9 set the bar with what can come after.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #10

Aug 21, 2019

They got one thing right, Superior Spider-Man right now is one of Marvel's least predictable comics on the stands. It was a welcoming surprise that this new threat to Otto could kick off on two different fronts. One you expected, the other coming from left field and yet awesome for the delivery of another endearing issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #11

Sep 25, 2019

I think so far this was one of the most shocking twists that this book has thrown at us. We have all been prepared for Otto to be thrown through the rings and fire, but not like this! If you were waiting for a breaking point, Superior Spider-Man #11 did not disappoint in giving one to us. This issue messes with your emotions so much that you might not be sure if it was more endearing or heartbreaking.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Superior Spider-Man (2018) #12

Oct 30, 2019

The die was cast one last time. I wished for a different ending, but this was the end that we were going to inevitably get one of these days. It was probably best that this also ended with the writer who made this such a compelling character. Superior Spider-Man #12 wraps up what will be one of the boldest stories told for any Spider person in the Spiderverse.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Survive #1

Mar 26, 2014

Survive! is the transition that the Ultimate Universe deserves and a great set-up up to the new titles we can expect to see soon. Especially from the All-New Ultimates that will possibly define what it is that the Ultimate Universe stands for. You could easily pass off this issue as something that you could skip and go straight into the new books. But you always want to know what led them to making those choices, what was going through their heads mentally and emotionally as they decided what was best for the world.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Swamp Thing (2011) #20

May 2, 2013

In terms of characterization this was very appealing to see that he wants to do something that is important. He wants to feel like a hero just like Superman. Someone who is a superhero, has so much power, isn't human, yet is able to still able to feel human. When someone has that much power they tend to lose them self to it which is what Swamp Thing feared most. The interaction between the two was well executed because only someone like Superman can understand the situation that Swamp Thing finds himself in. Though he may have told Alec that it's probably best he stay away from the population, his words of advice on how to be who he wants to be is gold.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Swamp Thing (2011) #34

Aug 6, 2014

Swamp Thing #34 concludes "The Wolf and The Lady", and while the outcome was obvious, everything in between was just awesome. This isn't the kind of story where the end is expected to be happy, surely not everyone will live in this constant fight for the Green either. You put this down and wonder what comes next in the life of Doctor Holland as the Swamp Thing because things will probably only get worse before they get any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Swamp Thing (2011) #35

Oct 1, 2014

Swamp Thing #35 is the start of a story that can really go somewhere depending on what happens between the Green and the Machine. While this issue does answer questions about the things we saw in Swamp Thing Future's End #1, it is better that you didn't have to read it to get what's going on in the present. As one of the better tie-ns to Future's End, Charles Soule made the wise choice in taking advantage of the opportunities this eventual war of Kingdoms has created.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Swamp Thing (2011) #36

Nov 5, 2014

Swamp Thing #36 "THE MACHINE QUEEN," part 2 is an issue that throws us straight into the action while ending with a shocker we could not have seen coming. The Metal obviously take notice of what makes Swamp Thing and the other avatars better and made the appropriate response to level the playing field.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Swamp Thing (2011) #37

Dec 3, 2014

Swamp Thing #37 "The Machine Queen" part 3 is all about setting up for the long haul because we know how this ends, but it's all about what happens between point A and point B. Lines are drawn and strange allies are formed as the Machine Queen assembles her army. Whatever that is Arcane has up his sleeve, it looks to be the game changer that the Machines just may need.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Swamp Thing (2011) #38

Jan 7, 2015

Swamp Thing #38 is the point where you see just how Alec could have found himself in the situation he was in at the end of this story. It's never that easy for him and no one should ever go into this expecting any less than the Avatars pulling no punches against each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Swamp Thing (2011) #39

Feb 5, 2015

Swamp Thing #39 takes a big step in this chess game where everyone looks to be making their powerplays. The Machine Queen and Holland are doing what they have to do for their Kingdoms and that means a sacrifice has to be made in some form. Again we know the ending for this story, though everything in-between is up in the air when these unpredictable forces come to a clash.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Swamp Thing (2011) #40

Mar 4, 2015

Sure Swamp Thing #40 didn't end where the Future's End story picked up which leaves that gap in time, but you are left more than satisfied when we were given a definite beginning and end to this series. Swam Thing wasn't one of those which struggled to make ends meet with each passing issue. This series saw an end that was worthy at 40 issues. That is impressive compared to many other ongoings that have come and passed over the years.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Swamp Thing (2011) Annual #3

Oct 30, 2014

Swamp Thing Annual #3 is the kind of story you tell when you want to express how saying goodbye can really be that hard. That one word can bring about so many emotions and reactions and it's only human to do so. Again Charles Soule was almost meant to write this story and you want to cherish the stories you get like this until that fateful day.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Swamp Thing (2011): Futures End #1

Sep 3, 2014

Overall, Swamp Thing – Futures End #1 was beautifully told and shines a bright light on everything you like about Swamp Thing as a hero. Enjoy it for the story, or enjoy it for the art, there's a lot to like about a story which gives you the best of Swamp Thing's world.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Swamp Thing Winter Special #1

Feb 7, 2018

The Swamp Thing Winter Special is a real treat to anyone who is a fan of this character. A beautiful tribute to the creator of this character and a reminder that creators can get the most amazing stories out of characters like this with the right approach. This story was a real tear-jerker. It felt impossible not to get sentimental about this which it takes a lot for a readers such as myself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Switch #1

Oct 14, 2015

Switch #1 is an exciting start to the series that throws us straight into the thick of it, while being a series accessible to any reader to pick up on. The 41 pages is just what Switch needed to go above and beyond for a first issue. Enough to invest in between characters and plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Thanos Rising #2

May 3, 2013

What was entertaining is that we still know what is to become of Thanos, but to see what he did is a whole new experience. To be the first eternal to murder, let alone 17 people, plus his own mother at the very end. He did this and enjoyed it. The artwork done by Bianchi captured every sick moment and you see how twisted his actions are.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.6
Thanos Rising #3

Jun 7, 2013

While the story doesn't deliver as much as you'd expect, you can only hope that now with Thanos older, there is something to push to towards the end of your seat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Batman Who Laughs (2018) #1

Dec 12, 2018

Was the Batman Who Laughs #1 worth the wait? Without a doubt. I don't normally recommend books centered around villains, but this one is definitely one of the exceptions for the way it embraces the brand of madness this monster has brought with him from the Dark Multiverse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Batman Who Laughs (2018) #2

Jan 16, 2019

The Batman Who Laughs #2 is yet another issue which knock you at the edge of your seat. This villain knows how to make an entrance and does so in a way that sends a message. How does one beat Batman? That is the only question that matters right now, because this fight is over before it begun if Bruce can't figure this one out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Black Bat #2

Jun 6, 2013

This story proves to be full of mystery as you explore his character, the plot which is still unfolding, and the woman helping him. Better yet the question at the end is if he's willing to kill in order to get the job done?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Black Bat #3

Jul 12, 2013

Solid issue, and the Black Bat is becoming a character that you can really enjoy when he comes into the role we expect him to. The hues of the book really do make it feel like its a pulp story and that much I do come to like when I read this book. Doesn't try too hard, yet is still convincing with those differences.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Black Bat #4

Aug 8, 2013

Then there's the two watching him as he does his job. Carol Baldwin has an angle, something to gain from using Black Bat, and I enjoy that it's still being kept a secret because when you have a wild card like her it's easy to forget when something unexpected will occur.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Black Bat #5

Sep 6, 2013

With a shocking ending, Black Bat remains a fast paced story which allows you to see the potential badass he can be when pushed to that point. While you could say that what happens is predictable, it was all in the execution which made this something believable when in other cases writers might have made this feel cliche. This stories progression is on point and something that both current fans of Black Bat and new fans can come to enjoy from Brian Buccellato's approach to the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Black Bat #6

Oct 3, 2013

Very exciting issue in which Buccellato has written a great build up to a conclusion worth reading. It's dark, it's gritty, and Cliquet maintains that consistency which makes the scenes so intense. Black Bat is a fun book that you wouldn't regret reading if not because he kicks ass. Sure it took some time for things to pick up, but when they did it was for the better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Black Bat #7

Dec 4, 2013

Overall a great transition from what occurred at the end of the previous issue. Black Bat proves to be able to gives us just as much action as emotion seeing how everyone is affected by this. Tony and Carol are both at their lowest point and even then they aren't out. What we are given is a story which has shifted to one of redemption for both. To bring down the man responsible for everything gone wrong right now and you know that big things are coming from there. This is really one book you want to read if you want to see people who go all in for the sake of justice when the stakes are not in their favor. Dark, intense, and again it continues to get better with each passing issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Black Bat #8

Jan 8, 2014

At the end of this issue the best thing you come to realize is how there are consequences to every action. No one is safe here when the people you should be able to put your trust in aren't to be trusted. Looking for scapegoats, jumping down each others throats about ethics, quick to pull a gun on one another, and so much more that leads to only loss. Something which Tony is very familiar with at this point when again no matter how much good he does its one step forward and two steps back. Where this will land him as the stakes are being raised is unknown but you can tell he's reach that breaking point as he is slowly slipping. You read this for the action, but you stay for the heavy focus on his characterization. You care to want to know what Black Bat will do next as his back is against the wall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Black Order #1

Nov 15, 2018

The Black Order limited series is not going to be a book that you sleep on. If you love a good villain's story? Then this one is going to be right up your alley.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Black Order #2

Dec 13, 2018

The Black Order #2 changed everything that you thought you knew about the direction that this series was taking. Once this team jumped into their mission, it was a steady rise in intensity, action, stakes, all leading to a decision that could elevate these five to a place where they have never been before. The only question is if they can see this plan through to the end, and if they are willing to defy the roles they are so accustomed to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Chilling Adventures of Sabrina #7

Jul 5, 2017

Was The Chilling Adventures of Sabrina #7 worth the wait? You're damn right it was. Never thought I would be so relieved to be thrown back into this twisted tale. The Spellman family really has some problems, and it seems the worst of them is getting his second chance. First we still had Madam Satan out and about, but now there is the danger of Edward Spellman which could only be understood through a look into his murderous past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Chilling Adventures of Sabrina #8

Aug 23, 2017

Chilling Adventures of Sabrina #8 gets the heart racing when Sabrina makes one bold move after the other. This is a girl who has truly reached a place where her happiness trumps the rules. And we all know that is a no-no when you are dealing with witches. The creative team for this book continue to capture this dark world where you either live by the rules or must be one hell of a witch to take what happens when you don't.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Curse of Brimstone #1

Apr 4, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #1 delivered the start of another story that is unlike anything else we are getting from DC currently. A simple character, with desperate desires, and a curse that is more than he bargained for. Being careful of what you ask for is the big takeaway from this debut. Hopefully the second issue will reinforce exactly why that is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Curse of Brimstone #4

Jul 4, 2018

Through the events of The Curse of Brimstone #4, this was a wake-up call for Joe and Annie. They see what is possible, and they now see what may be the inevitable future of Joe if they do not succeed in getting to the Salesman or bringing down the Home Office. The ball has now gotten rolling, and this isn't a series you want to overlook if you are a fan of the supernatural.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Curse of Brimstone #5

Aug 1, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #5 did not miss the opportunity to shock these siblings with the reality that they still had not see the worst that can come of the Salesman's dealings. This story continues to stand out as one where we are getting the worst of what happens when the dark multiverse is trying everything to find footing in this universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Curse of Brimstone #6

Sep 5, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #6 was a roller coaster of emotions when there was so much to consider morally about how to handle a town full of murderous kids. Could they save these kids? Save Slackjaw from himself? Save themselves from making a hard call? Anything could have gone right or wrong. One thing was for sure, and that's a new determination to see this mission through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Curse of Brimstone #7

Oct 3, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #7 spent more time pushing us into that area where it is now becoming a race against time to put a stop to this madness before it consumes Joe and Annie. Some may say the quickening of the pacing was sudden, but we did ultimately need to see some problems arise given the time Joe has already spent as Brimstone.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Curse of Brimstone #8

Nov 7, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #8 did not play around when it came to the lesson that this Bel Dame had to teach Joe in sacrifice. It was as clever as it gets for taking Joe to that tipping point where he could both lose himself to Brimstone and lose the trust that his sister has in him. I knew heartbreak was coming for this brother-sister duo inevitably, but not like this. This is a story that knows how you play with your emotions in the best of ways.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Curse of Brimstone #9

Dec 5, 2018

The Curse of Brimstone #9 was everything you could have wanted to see and more from this monster when let off of his leash. We learn some things about the monster within Joe that is so much more than what we are seeing on the surface.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Curse of Brimstone #10

Jan 9, 2019

The Curse of Brimstone #10 I believe solidifies this title as the most consistently thrilling book from the New Age of Heroes line of books. Self-contained, character driven, action-packed where it counts, and it has so much heart shared between two siblings. This was just the issue that Annie needed to elevate herself to the character you hoped for her to be existing in a world of monsters and demons.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Curse of Brimstone #11

Feb 6, 2019

I don't like to be too harsh about certain things with The Curse of Brimstone, but this was not that time where you should favor the story but feel let down by the interiors. This is an important chapter for Brimstone being part one of the finale, I do hope that the art picks up when the next issue drops because that will be the one where you want readers to say this is memorable. Anything like this will tell us that they gave up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Curse of Brimstone Annual #1

Jan 23, 2019

The Curse of Brimstone Annual #1 was a memorable set of stories told. With Brimstone coming to an end, we learned so much about this situation that will help us with the final farewell to come next month.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Death-Defying Devil (2019) #1

Aug 7, 2019

Overall, Death-Defying Devil #1 was an exciting start to a story centering a pulp hero that you don't see nearly enough of. This creative team was perfect for this book because they brought the story into a modern setting, and vigilante work takes on a whole different meaning when you're not dealing with the old school criminal underground.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Expanse #1

Dec 16, 2020

As with all comic adaptations like this, The Expanse #1 is worth the read for the extra content that you aren't going to get in the show.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Fearless Defenders #4AU

May 25, 2013

It was a great twist to see that behind the curtain of the city in which they stand prisoners, Hippotlyta's father, Ares was the real enemy. Disgraced an hiding away to enact his vengeance against the Amazons for killing his daughter. Again, motivations are what really drives this event and story. The art for this book as well might have been the best out of the whole series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Green Hornet (2013) #2

May 19, 2013

Overall again it was a step up from the first issue. This was a great transition into what we can expect from the rest of this series as his latest act of vigilantism has ended with him surrounded by the cops.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
The Green Hornet (2013) #4

Jul 26, 2013

Aside from anything I have said in terms of lack of interest, the story still has layers to it which are worth sticking with to explore. The gentlemen who have been pushing for Reid to run for mayor seem to have a hidden agenda which draws you back in. At this point you just want to know what everyone's motivations are and just what their end game is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Green Hornet (2013) #5

Aug 29, 2013

Overall I'm finding myself more interested in investing my time in this book knowing this is the Green Hornet I am more familiar with. It is the Green Hornet and Kato that most fans are familiar with and from here things can only get better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Green Hornet (2013) #6

Oct 3, 2013

With a target now on Green Hornet's back, finding the master minds behind these murders has never been more urgent. Waid has set this up as to see who can deal the better hand and if Hornet's pockets run deep enough he just may be able to get a step ahead of them before it's too late to pin the crimes on them. We'll just have to see how long Reid can go before he does something he'll actually regret.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Green Hornet (2013) #7

Nov 7, 2013

This is is both fun and dark, something that is easily pulled off when dealing with the Green Hornet. Ronilson Freire helps create this atmosphere with his excellent use of inking and shadows to make those moments look serious. This new foe seems to be even more ruthless than him and I think that will create a great confrontation when both try to see who is the big dog. Green Hornet has ruled through fear and that just may not be enough anymore. Again asking the question which Casey herself posed, where do they draw the line?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Green Hornet (2013) #8

Dec 19, 2013

This issue is a solid distraction from the events unfolding in the main progression. If you want to just keep your attention on that then maybe you might skip this issue, but if not you're in for something a bit more light-hearted than you're used to. This is good in a sense that Green Hornet comes off as more of a hero in this story rather than playing the role of something that he's really not. Again Mark Waid excels at these kind of grounded stories and it shows as you have a bit more of an understanding of how Green Hornet operates through his networks. It's worth a read in the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Immortal Men #1

Apr 11, 2018

The Immortal Men #1 I will say now probably has had the best debut in contrast to the rest of the New Age of DC Heroes titles so far. This one has all the intrigue and creativeness of a story that has gone on forever, and yet a story we are only exploring now. The team itself is a crazy match on top of our main character, and it is worth seeing just what everyone brings to the table for the House of Action to stand against the House of Conquest once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Immortal Men #2

May 10, 2018

The Immortal Men #2 took big steps forward in addressing what both sides are fighting for. There's still a lot for them to explain about this secret war, but for now every bit makes a difference. The character development as well makes a big difference where now we can decide what our investment in what more this story has to offer. So far the balance is okay between character, plot, and action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Infected: Scarab #1

Nov 20, 2019

If you care about anything dealing with the Batman Who Laugh's dark reign across a doom-won DC Universe, then The Infected: Scarab #1 is obviously going to be the book for you to pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Infected: King Shazam #1

Nov 6, 2019

The Infected: King Shazam #1 is worth the read. It helped in the end that this book wasn't all about how Billy became infected. Instead they gave us a whole issue embracing what kind of darkness could be unleashed from this kid who is now the embodiment of rebellion against higher authorities.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Last God (2019) #1

Oct 30, 2019

The Last God #1, or The Last God: Book One of the Fellspyre Chronicles, is mind-blowing for only the first of twelve issues! How we experienced this last god and his army was the stuff of nightmares. There was not a single lie told that this was going to be bloody, or high fantasy, or horrific. It was all of those things and so much more. This is another fantasy story that takes the idea of heroes and throws it out of the window immediately, but at the same time they took that concept and twisted it. There is nothing about The Last God that is for the faint of heart, and that is the best way that I would describe it. So far I would call this the strongest debut from Black Label.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Last God (2019) #2

Nov 27, 2019

DC's dark fantasy epic hits a good stride through the events of The Last God #2. This was the best time to begin setting a pace for a story which takes place between two points in time. I'm glad that there is also a strong transition between the two which doesn't lose you along the way. There's madness in the present, but to understand that you must also know what happened in the past.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Last God (2019) #12

Jan 27, 2021

Like I said with the first issue, The Last God #12 The Last God: Book One of the Fellspyre Chronicles is mind-blowing, and it is a mind-blowing experience that will take your emotions for a spin. This was a quest, an adventure, and a tragedy I felt fortunate enough to follow all the way through. There should always be more books like this existing in the comic world.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Legend of Luther Strode #6

Aug 8, 2013

Not a book for everyone, but for those that it was for? I find this to be a step up from the first volume and Justin really didn't seem like he was afraid to take the gloves off to turn this up. Not a single punch was pulled and what you wanted to see was a fist making contact with another' face. This was an amazing conclusion to the mini series and with the ending, I can only hope that this story can continue in the future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Magicians #1

Nov 6, 2019

By the end of the first issue, there is a twist that will shock just about everyone, particularly longtime fans of The Magicians. As I said above, the acceptance of hedge magicians was only one of the big changes going on around Brakebills. The other was a twist which changed the game within the classroom. This didn't quite explain what motivated the changes at Brakebills, but for the first issue it is understandable that they want to give us a good reason to come back for issue #2. Overall, The Magicians #1 is a book worth picking up whether you are a new or longtime fan. The time was spent wisely to make sure this was a new experience at the core.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Magicians #3

Jan 8, 2020

With each passing issue The Magicians proves to be just as much of a rollercoaster as it is as a novel or show. Things got dark fast, and I hope this creative team does not let up on the breaks with so much that is now at stake.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Magicians #4

Feb 5, 2020

The Magicians #4 ended up being a thrilling transition from the carnage issue #3 dropped on our laps last-minute. This issue moved with momentum, pulled no punches with the truth to this situation, and really did give us something that trumps the squabbles between students of Brakebills and hedge witches.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Magicians #5

Mar 4, 2020

By the end of The Magicians #5, I found myself impressed by what this grew into, and what this still has the chance to become if this is not the end of the story. Personally, I hope it is not. This mini series proved that even in comic for this is a story which can go the distance with the right set of characters to focus on, and the right kind of danger to drive its longevity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Mighty Thor (2015) #6

Apr 20, 2016

Mighty Thor #6 is a fun little story told that doesn't feel like filler as some might look at it. This is a Loki people want to see explained and so far does not disappointed by the example he is trying to make about what he can do for the people he allies with.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Mighty Thor (2015) #7

May 26, 2016

Again The Mighty Thor #7 serves as a solid set up for something that should escalate events more than they already have. This was definitely the smart play to cement Loki on this path he has chosen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Mighty Thor (2015) #8

Jun 24, 2016

The Mighty Thor #8 had a great start to a new arc. What came before was a story of necessity that we haven't quite seen the payoff to yet, but what is going on right now is where you would rather be at diving back into the main storyline.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Mighty Thor (2015) #14

Dec 29, 2016

Mighty Thor #14 is where the true fight begins. Someone had to make the move that would get this war started and luckily it was our heroes doing what they do best. For better or for worse you want to see how the rest of the realms will prepare for themselves for the inevitable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Mighty Thor (2015) #15

Jan 12, 2017

The Mighty Thor #15 pulls you into the ‘Asgard/Shi'ar War' effortlessly. This is the best time to be reading Thor if you haven't been following events up to this point. It feels like there may be a different war we are preparing for and you definitely want to see where this goes during such a critical time for the Ten Realms.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Mighty Thor (2015) #703

Jan 17, 2018

We have seen some madness in throughout the War of The Ten Realms, but The Mighty Thor #703 proved that things could always be worse. Asgardia thought they could turn a blind eye to the chaos around them, and that decision right there is what brought this nightmare to their doorstep. Any reader will want to see what comes next, but that will not come without fear of what else and who else can be lost to the Mangog.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
The Mighty Thor (2015) #704

Feb 21, 2018

The beauty of Jane Foster could not have been captured any better, and neither could the pain of what it means to sacrifice everything to stick to your guns as a hero. The Mighty Thor #704 is the issue that takes us on the road to The Death of The Mighty Thor, and its hard to say if you want to shed a tear or cheer.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Mighty Thor (2015) #705

Mar 21, 2018

The Mighty Thor #705 cements this series as the longest running quality book that Marvel has released since the first wave of Marvel NOW! titles. I don't think there was ever a time where I felt that I didn't look forward to the next issue or story arc. Whether it was Odinson or Jane Foster the story was powerful, and the emotions weighed heavily. This final act as Thor was enough to make you choke up because that is what it means to sacrifice yourself for the something more than yourself.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Mighty Thor (2015) #706

Apr 25, 2018

So with that said, I will also urge readers to stay tuned for Mighty Thor: At The Gates of Valhalla #1, because if you don't understand what's in the realm of possibility for Thor after this, it's because you missed out once again!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Movement #2

Jun 6, 2013

The art style is very simple, not to the point where you feel it can't be taken seriously, but it's styled in a way that makes you feel like they are young heroes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Movement #3

Jul 3, 2013

The Movement has shown great pacing for only being on its third issue and is a promising story to unfold. The art style is good, fits the mature tone of the book, and adds to that feeling that you should take the book seriously. In general it does take itself seriously, yet allows freedom for so much of this world to be explored because this is a part of the DC Universe that we haven't really gotten a chance to see. This is one action packed story which I have to recommend you to pick up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Movement #4

Aug 8, 2013

This story yet again is one that is underrated and has a lot of potential. 4 issues in and I can already see that this book can go the distance if given the chance. It's a street level story and it's different from most other books that readers expose themselves to in the DC Universe. Filled with tragedy, emotion, and driven by the prospect of a better tomorrow for people who can't defend themselves from the corruption that surrounds them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Movement #5

Oct 3, 2013

Gail Simone has a great handle on exposing the corruption that runs the streets. Everything from the Council, to the page where the cop turns over the girl in the wheelchair. You see how angry this made her, not only for the fact that she is in a wheelchair, but these are people she treated well That is more than enough to support the plot that this story is centered around. Giving the readers a reason to care for the cause they fight for and believe in the evils they face every day.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Movement #6

Nov 7, 2013

The insertion of messages from people viewing the fight between Katharsis and Tremor was very central to this issue. Not to mention it's great that it looked like actual messages in text speech. Not only did it capture everything going wrong for The Movement at that moment, but it gave them bad publicity which was not what they needed at a time like this. Their image as heroes of the people is something which they really do need to make any progress.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Movement #9

Feb 6, 2013

The movement has had their first encounter with a superhero, and of course we could all guess how this interaction could go south. Batgirl comes to Coral City in pursuit of a superhuman who is trying to join the Movement, something which created an interesting situation because both sides have different views on what it means to be a hero. This conflict of interest of course bringing out something different in each of them as they want to prove to the other who is right about how they go about their business. This was an entertaining issue for that and the action was on point as well

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Occultist #1

Sep 25, 2013

The story doesn't do anything big as an introduction which may be a reason to question if it's something to invest your time in, though if you want a story that takes advantage of the mixed elements of a superhero and horror story this is for you. Give it a try and you won't regret it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Occultist #2

Oct 30, 2013

This was a solid issue that really just shows the stress that being the Occultist has had on Rob and what he is willing to do to relieve himself of it. Even to go so far as do what these students are doing knowing good well that everything about it is wrong. Just another day in the life of Rob Bailey and a lot of this is supposed to be personal exploration along with the progression of harnessing this new power.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Occultist #3

Dec 4, 2013

Another solid issue that throws Rob into a situation that he could not imagine the consequences to. They said bear witness as Robert Bailey breaks the ancient pact between the living and the dead, and that moment when it happens had great execution. This isn't just another day in the life of Rob Bailey, right now we see some sense of urgency to stop him before he does something he may soon regret and the cliffhanger at the end is a great way to keep us guessing about what is to come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Occultist #4

Dec 31, 2013

Overall this issue displays the strongest part of this book, and that is the fact that there is a lot of personal growth. There is a clear progression that Tim shows as Rob is beginning to accept who he is to overcome being that classic accidental hero. No longer is he that victim of circumstance seeing how he understands the responsibility that has been placed on him by the Sword. The dialogue is so well done for Rob having notice that there is more authority in his voice as to an extent he's grown up from this experience. He may not have asked for it, but as someone chose he has something to prove. Where this takes us next issue is unsure, but it will be something hopefully just as defining to who he might become which says a lot when this is issue four of five. For a new series and pseudo-supernatural hero, The Occultist is one you must read that this year produced.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Occultist #5

Feb 5, 2014

Overall this was a great conclusion to a book which brought about a hero who has a lot to offer in the world Dark Horse is building. The Grim Reaper so to speak and that enough reason to take interest in Rob who has a long way to go now that he knows what his role is in the world. For five issues Tim Seeley didn't waste time developing Rob as a character who was a hero of circumstance, putting that and his relationship with other character above over the top action. You want to read this because The Occultist is a thrilling supernatural take on super-heroics, as heroic as it can get.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Once And Future Queen #1

Mar 1, 2017

The past, future, and present collide is a marvelous way through this first issue of Once And Future Queen. It has potential through just creativity in this world and its inner workings. The next step for us is to get to know this cast of characters a little better while pushing forward with what kind of future we're fighting for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Orville #1

Jul 17, 2019

The Orville #1: New Beginnings Part 1 of 2 was a solid start to something that could only happen within the pages of a comic. This first part plays out entirely like an episode of the show. If you're a fan of the show, then it won't hurt to dive into a book that only adds to the story. You aren't even required to watch the show again to understand what is going on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Orville: Launch Day #1

Sep 2, 2020

In the end, you have to love this book for reminding you of the good that can come of a show being adapted to comic form. It's not that easy in a show to land on a new planet and walk through the streets without a lot of CGI which takes you out of the immersion. The Orville Season 2.5 #1 " Launch Day Part 1 Of 2 accomplished this, while at the same time reminding us of everything we have been missing from The Orville.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Orville #2

Oct 7, 2020

With the conclusion of The Orville #2: Launch Day (Part 2 of 2), the first story of season 2.5 comes to a close. Still I must say that I love what this comic has to offer. Still self-contained stories, everything you love about The Orville, and doing more with what the medium allows.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Orville #3

Sep 11, 2019

The name of the game is identity politics and freedom to choose the way you live. This is the kind of storytelling that I believe many of our comics out there are missing, and it's a shame we don't get that because we don't want to scare off those who want to live in a fantasy world. The Orville #3: The Word of Avis Part 1 of 2 doesn't care about any of that. This creative team jumps into the same hard-hitting topics as the show and instantly making this a must have for a TV-to-comic adaptation.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Orville #4

Oct 16, 2019

The Orville #4: The Word of Avis Part 2 of 2 brings our second story to a close, and it was one worth telling. People lose their way all the time, but it's how you bounce back which matters most. Unfortunately in the case of these xenoanthropologists, they chose the will of Avis to guide them down a questionable path.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Precinct #1

Dec 9, 2015

Precinct #1 makes a good impression as a series which aims to be more than what is seen on the surface. More than just another crime-drama, and takes those small opportunities to make these characters with appeal for their differences, flaws, and views on the world they live in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Precinct #2

Jan 13, 2016

Precinct #2 turns up the dial with more action, magic, and now even political intrigue. Found a steady pacing for the stories development, and gave us enough to start building our own predictions on just what is going on behind the scenes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Precinct #3

Feb 10, 2016

Precinct #3 keeps us guessing which is all that you can ask for when you want a story which keeps you at the edge of your seat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Precinct #4

Mar 9, 2016

Precinct #4 leads us to some big moments that finally lays all the cards on the table. The true threat is established, the villains step out of the shadows, and we are left with one last conflict that we will anticipate seeing through to the end with Precinct #5. We hit the climax of this story and hit it hard. This here is what you hoped Precinct would shape up to be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Precinct #5

Apr 20, 2016

The Precinct #5 is the kind of conclusion you expect from this kind of story, and it is great that even at the very end it leaves us with the tiniest sliver of hope that in the future this could be continued. Who knows. But this was a great story told overall that you will come for the action, and stay for the characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
The Ravagers #12

May 9, 2013

Now despite the disappointment in how it turned out in the end, they still did manage to keep you interested up to that point. Especially the fight with Fairchild and her many deformed clones. It was entertaining to see her let lose on them which is a side of her we really didn't see that often and it was shocking for us that don't read Team 7 to find out that she really isn't the real Fairchild either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Revisionist #1

Jun 1, 2016

The start to this adventure about fathers, sons, and time travel did not disappoint for a first issue. The Revisionist has a lot of potential for the limitless possibilities created when dealing with time and time travel.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Shadow #0

Jul 16, 2014

The Shadow #0 is everything you want to see from a story involving the Shadow. No vampires and no drawn out hunt for someone who doesn't really make you feel is worth it. It's sad that this is only a one-shot because Cullen Bunn proves that there are things to do with The Shadow that some don't take advantage of. He clearly likes the character and that's what makes this fun and worth picking up. Overall it's a good sign of things to come from Cullen Bunn as he does more with Dynamite in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow #13

May 19, 2013

It did feel as though the dialogue fell a bit flat, but overall it was solid for what's to come next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Shadow #14

Jun 14, 2013

Giovanni Timpano's artwork again is just stunning as it captured the nature of both The Shadow and Lady Phantom. This is from his used of bold and vibrant colors, to displaying those graphic moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Shadow #15

Jul 5, 2013

Another solid issue as tensions are rising. Enjoyed every second reading this and the dark layout makes the tone convincing when the story itself does that well enough. Feels like a detective story, looks like one and is such a thrilling story so far while it's only getting better. This story keeps you anticipating what comes next and the next issue is something to look forward to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Shadow #16

Aug 8, 2013

As per usual, Chris Roberson has given us more to go on when understanding Esclarmonde. You see how her training makes her a match for Shadow. You get an idea of just how devout she is in her belief that she is serving a higher purpose that she's blinded by even false corruption. Though it's shaping up to be something predictable concerning her upbringing, you still find interest in waiting for she herself to see that her views of the world are wrong. Basically as the reader you're waiting for that inevitable train wreck to come and she's that train wreck.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Shadow #17

Sep 12, 2013

Great issue that creates an intense atmosphere from conflict of beliefs. That is enough for any two people to have a disagreement over and it almost always leads to violence as we see displayed. Not to such extent, but it can always reach that point if justice, and the right brand is not served. The cliffhanger this ended on is something I like to see when the climax has been reached. Both done running and chasing, ready to put everything on the line and end it at that very moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Shadow #18

Oct 17, 2013

Overall this was an epic conclusion to the Shadow vs the Light. Timpano's focus on light and dark emphasized the story being told. From Esclarmonde's past, to the glow that radiates from her and the Shadow when face to face. Again I have to mention the layout of the panels which really makes the book very appealing, not something you see in other books that often. Funny enough Margo said what I was thinking throughout the whole issue, while they were fighting over what they stand for, a lot of it was debating. In reality that is the type of thinking that separates heroes from villains. If you are a fan of a great pulp story, or just The Shadow in general, this is a must read and one of the best that Dynamite has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Shadow #19

Nov 21, 2013

Overall a great transition from the last story arc of The Shadow. If you are a new reader and see The Shadow as something of interest, it is recommended that you pick it up now. If you like it then you go back and enjoy everything up to this point which has been nothing short of exciting to read. We get to see more of Miss Lane, and through her a reintroduction into The Shadow's world and how he operates. Good start that should lead to something that should hopefully wow us as much as the last story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Shadow #20

Nov 27, 2013

This was a solid issue that has put the Shadow on a new adventure to find The White Tiger. One of many from his past who is able to dig up skeletons from lives he has left behind. Not as exciting as the previous storyline, but it's something different no less. In this issue Cranston is meeting people who have no idea of what to expect from someone like him who they haven't seen for such a long time. Makes for interesting interactions when you compare how they remember him to how he is now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Shadow #21

Jan 8, 2014

In the end this is another solid issue that puts characterization before all and still manages to take us through this story progression. Sure anyone could want more action considering the story arc previous, but I think that Chris knows what he wants from The Shadow and what more this story has to offer than just fighting the next person who commits a murder. This is more than just the next crime, this is a mystery that in the end allows us to understand what kind of person Lamont is as a many who has lived a long life and more than one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
The Shadow #22

Feb 5, 2014

This issue was definitely better than the last two, though at the moment you may find yourself struggling to stay interested when you feel like you just want to see The Shadow and more of him than anything else given attention. That is not to say that this story is bad, though it's a double edge sword to go for a plot that doesn't entirely give you everything that you may usually want to see from The Shadow. Maybe picking up the pace may change this, but it is just good to see that there is still clear progress towards what The Shadow is looking for.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
The Shadow #23

Mar 19, 2014

So The Shadow #23 ends with a good conclusion, though overall I found it hard to see anything from it memorable. I want to see more of what we expect from The Shadow rather than what we got from this story arc and hopefully what comes next will deliver on that. This issue and story arc wasn't bad, though it surely is something you could read and feel like you already forgot it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
The Shadow Annual #2

Sep 21, 2013

This was supposed to be a heartbreaking tale of loss, betrayal, and vengeance, set against the neon of Sin City as per the description given for this book, but it didn't quite deliver on this. Not perfect, but still gives you what you want from The Shadow as a hero. The story is gritty, mature, and his presence is always known when he takes the stage. Like any other annual it still manages to stand on its own and has a story which is character-driven. In the end it's fun if you are a fan of The Shadow, can't ask for anything more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Shadow (2017) #1

Aug 9, 2017

It feels good to have another Shadow book in my pull-list again. The Shadow (Vol. 3) #1 was a great start full of intrigue and mystery. Mary Jerez is a solid main character who we get to know pretty organically and it does wonders having someone who knows him in present day. Moving a character to modern times means all-new, but familiar, even just to The Shadow is preferred.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
The Shadow (2017) #2

Sep 13, 2017

After the events of Shadow #2, the mystery behind Mary's burn patient is becoming clearer with everyone seeming to be on the same train of thought about the vanished vigilante. Considering the setting of his story, I'm glad that they have found a way to properly play into the legend of the Shadow. He is someone to be both feared and praised, for better or for worse with current circumstances.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Shadow (2017) #3

Oct 25, 2017

The Shadow #3 takes some big steps forward. What started as a story where we were hunting for the truth behind this burned man quickly evolved into something new. The next issue will be one to anticipate when the time for questions is settling, and there is more need to take action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Shadow Now #1

Oct 3, 2013

The art style is just astounding. Fully painted and is smooth yet vibrant. Even set in modern time Worley still makes it feel like a pulp story. On page five where the Shadow enters with his laugh, that was the highlight of this issue to me. That is something you always want to get right when dealing with The Shadow and the combined efforts of Liss and Worley made this happen. Seeing how the tone becomes so sinister and there is a mesh between red and black. The layout looks unique, and you can see the upgrade in technology using those large maps and computers. Just to point out you can even spot a “Spider” comic that one of the thugs is reading before confronted by The Shadow. Overall a great start and has a lot of potential to grab new readers. Definitely one I'd recommend for the story and art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Shadow Now #2

Nov 7, 2013

The Shadow Now is the Shadow like you've never seen him before. David Liss has put him in a position where he is really out of his element. A new world, new allies, and facing foes who are more prepared for him than he is for them. Colton Worley continues to amaze with his work on art. The painting makes every character look so real that you feel the emotion from them with every close up. You even see those subtle changes like when Batu or Kahn is using hypnosis.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Shadow Now #3

Dec 4, 2013

The Shadow Now is surely the beginning of a battle between the greatest pulp hero and villain of all time. Both know each other well enough and that alone makes this just as much a fight to see who can out think the other and keep the other on their toes. Colton Worley yet continues to amaze with his work on art. I'd point out that the way this book is laid out works to its advantage being able to have these scenes move with ease and doesn't drag anything on more than it should. Keeps the pacing for those moments of action swift and intense. The way these characters look again is amazing as Worely is able to bring them to life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Shadow Now #4

Jan 15, 2014

In general this issue was all about putting the pieces into place, and then waiting to put them into play. This is a carefully constructed storyline which creates so much suspense as you wait for one side to do something bold. Neither Shiwan, Batu, The Shadow or Margo have any room for error or mistake and that much David Liss puts emphasis on as everyone is asking the same question, what's next? A question which is why this is the book that you want to be reading if you are a long time or new fan of The Shadow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Shadow Now #5

Mar 5, 2014

Things are reaching a boiling point in The Shadow Now #5 and what comes next will be that final showdown that we have waited for since the start of this book. Makes you almost wish this were an ongoing series considering that this is the kind of confrontation that you want from a hero and villain. One that goes beyond punching, and looks to actual tactics to claim victory. David Liss has made this a modern telling of The Shadow's story, but keeps everything that makes this pulp for those who are longtime fans of the character.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
The Shadow Now #6

Apr 23, 2014

The Shadow Now #6 marks the final chapter of the Shadow's return, and it was one you would not forget. For a mini there was excellent pacing from start to finish with a clear end. That is what I want to see from a story like this and for me to wish this were the main title for The Shadow at the moment is quite the achievement. It's not every day that you will love a book with a pulp hero like The Shadow in modern times, but David Liss made it work.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Shadow Special 2014 #1

Jan 14, 2015

The Shadow Special 2014: Death Factory is a solid story that you should pick up mostly if The Shadow is someone you favor. It's the same Shadow, just a different mission as a whole.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
The Shadow/Green Hornet: Dark Nights #1

Jul 12, 2013

The story has potential, that much I can say. Maybe this issue didn't show all of it, but the way it ended at least gives you some promise of how the story will play out and that is something worth reading. Good, could be better, but decent start all the same.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Shadow: Year One #3

May 31, 2013

I will say that the transition between parts of this issue felt a bit choppy, it felt like those 3 parts to the story were a bit rushed. Aside from that we have the villain of the story introduced, Dr. Zorn, and that should create an interesting conflict to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spider #12

Jun 18, 2013

The artwork by Roriguez is both solid and smooth. A combination between the smooth outlines and the very solid use of colors which even though took away the feeling of the tone portrayed, made every scene appealing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spider #12

Jun 7, 2013

The artwork by Roriguez is both solid and smooth. A combination between the smooth outlines and the very solid use of colors which even though took away the feeling of the tone portrayed, made every scene appealing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Spider #13

Jul 18, 2013

David Liss has written a great villain. The Fly is someone who only thinks with his wallet. His motivations and stake in this conflict is all just to obtain wealth, and nobody seems to be worth his time if they aren't helping him get what he wants. For someone who really doesn't get his hands dirty, he was very quick to call for the deaths of both Wentworth and Hilt. Two who were on his side as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Spider #14

Sep 12, 2013

Things are reaching that boiling point and both are making their move against the other in hopes of getting the job done soon. Wentworth is fighting an uphill battle and every time The Fly makes a move against him, things are just looking more grim for when things come to a close. We'll see if he can dig himself out of this hole, but seeing him showcase that resourcefulness that he is known for is why we anticipate what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Spider #15

Nov 30, -0001

If you want modern-day pulp mayhem, this is that book for you. Red Hand Vs. The Spider, now we see who is more willing to do what has to be done to make a statement. The stakes have been set and there's an urgency now more than ever for the Red Hand to be stopped. Can the Spider pull through this time when innocents are now in danger of suffering as much as the guilty? That is a reason to pick up the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Spider #15

Oct 24, 2013

If you want modern-day pulp mayhem, this is that book for you. Red Hand Vs. The Spider, now we see who is more willing to do what has to be done to make a statement. The stakes have been set and there's an urgency now more than ever for the Red Hand to be stopped. Can the Spider pull through this time when innocents are now in danger of suffering as much as the guilty? That is a reason to pick up the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Spider #16

Dec 19, 2013

It's take no prisoners for The Spider as he makes sure the guilty suffer. What is so great about this book is that The Spider isn't the kind of hero to give you mercy or a slap on the wrist. He is one who comes up with a permanent solution and even if that makes this a more mature story for it, so be it when it's not like other stories out there that fall to the cliche of letting the wicked walk the streets to do the same thing twice. David Liss doesn't pull any punches here and it works in The Spider's favor in this situation. The Spider is a book you want to pick up right now if you want something that packs a punch.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Spider #17

Feb 7, 2014

What is great about this transition from the last issue which had the Red Hand go to prison is that for The Spider there is always a threat out there to handle. Both as The Spider and Worthington there is a good balance of showing the worth of each half of his life to him and their influence on how right and wrong things can go.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Terrifics #1

Feb 28, 2018

The Terrifics #1 had a solid start for a book that is not like others on shelves from DC. If you are looking for an obscure team book that focuses on the adventure and exploration, then this is the book for you. Another creative addition to their New Age of Heroes if you ask me.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Terrifics #2

Mar 28, 2018

The Terrifics #2 cements this team as one of the most unconventional of the DC Universe. I'm glad to be able to say this because normally unconventional would be the word I would use to describe books like Justice League Dark or Suicide Squad. This shows initiative and risk taking to add something to shelves that we don't get enough of. Not everything needs to be springing into action to save a city or the world. It can journeying into mystery and places you wouldn't dare go under normal circumstances.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Terrifics #3

Apr 25, 2018

Emotions are running high after the events of The Terrifics #3. If anyone thought this was going to be another straightforward wacky adventure, this issue said otherwise. Things are only going to get worse before they get better for this team that just can't seem to get on the same page.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Terrifics #4

May 23, 2018

The Terrifics #4 so far is one of the best issues of the series. Great exploration, character moments, and a mixed bag of emotions from start to finish. Right now I would say this is not the book to sleep on from the line of New Heroes of DC.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Terrifics #5

Jun 27, 2018

The Terrifics #5 struck a great balance between adventure and personal exploration. We got the best of both worlds without the need to prioritize one thing over the other. Every issue that they are working to better their situation, break this bond, or fight off evil, that is a worthwhile investment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #6

Jul 25, 2018

The Terrifics #6 had great urgency, giving us a definite beginning and end to the madness of this Element World. It was a great challenge for this team who before would have brought about their own ruin. The mysteries of this series keep us invested, but getting answers keeps us coming back for more. I'm glad that they did not disappoint with what this was all leading to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #7

Aug 22, 2018

The Terrifics #7 overall gets us on the right track. We are right where we want to be for the answers to questions that have gotten us from the first issue to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Terrifics #8

Sep 26, 2018

The Terrifics #8 was a fun change of pace for the team after finally finding Tom Strong. There was an excellent dynamic to the teams they broke off into, and this creative team really stretched their legs with the unusual situations these characters found themselves in while on their new mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Terrifics #9

Oct 24, 2018

The Terrifics #9 was a fun chapter they put all the pieces into place for the climax to this arc. As I said above, everything is coming full circle for this main storyline. Who is behind the mask of Doc Dread was no big shocker, but it was the personal stakes set through the reveal that grabs your attention most.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Terrifics #10

Nov 28, 2018

The Terrifics #10 was all the excitement you could ask for from this team, and from the Strong Family. Great dynamics, perfect boss battle scenario, didn't fail to throw in some science, and really put the team to the test when questioning where they could go from how this concluded.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Terrifics #11

Jan 2, 2019

The Terrifics #11 was a good start to this new story arc. There was a lot more depth given to these characters and the hurdles they have had to climb since the first issue. This time apart was the perfect opportunity taken to explore what these guys really had to look forward to on their own. Some have something worthwhile to turn back to, others not so much. It should be interesting to see who is willing to jump back into the fire when the call comes.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Terrifics #12

Jan 30, 2019

This month gave us yet another engaging issue of The Terrifics. These moments that our cast have had to themselves was worth the wait for everything that was there to go back to. Being a hero and having a personal life is always going to be easier said than done. It helps to also make that statement in a team book where no matter where you turn, the problems are bigger than yourself.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Terrifics #13

Feb 27, 2019

As a whole, the best word I could use for The Terrifics #13 is endearing. That is something that separates this book from a lot out there which might focus on action over characters. This creative team strikes a brilliant balance between the two and keeps you coming back for more. It may have taken some time apart, but these heroes genuinely represented what it means to have a sense of duty and a need to answer the call to action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Terrifics #15

Apr 24, 2019

The Terrifics #15 brings us to a point that for the most part has been a long time coming. This new chapter in the lives of Mr. Terrific, Phantom Girl, Metamorpho and Plastic Man was fun, action-packed, and still managed to be endearing when it mattered most. I just hope they are able to dodge the areas where they run the risk of things getting predictable. This is a story that has so far nailed the excitement in being able to embrace the unknown.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Terrifics #16

May 22, 2019

Credit where it is due, The Terrifics reminds us with every passing issue why this is one of the last books to have survived from DC's initiative, The New Age of Heroes. Most of the other books did not survive because they couldn't take advantage of the room to give us something new, the time it should take to sell us on the characters/story, or the reasons to continue coming back for more. The Terrifics knocks it out of the park in every category. Hopefully this series can continue to do so!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #17

Jun 26, 2019

The Terrifics #17 adds another memorable issue into the collection. Who am I kidding, just about everything from this new story arc has been memorable so far. New direction, and no limits to what this team can encounter. One would think the Dark Multiverse would be hitting the ceiling, and then you would be proven wrong after this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #18

Jul 24, 2019

With this week's issue of The Terrifics, another story comes to a close. Maybe not in the way this team would have agreed to, but this was a race against time to stop the Noosphere before it became too strong to stop. There was action, there was heart, and there was a fair amount of set-up for what the next arc has in store for them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #19

Aug 28, 2019

Our biggest takeaway from this issue of The Terrifics? Doom doesn't just mean spreading this to the far corners of the universe. That would be too simple. Spreading doom means hitting every conceivable place of importance which order exists. For Bizarro, his true nature is chaos whether intention or not, so Lex really let it rip on this one. All of this was a great build-up towards how this fits into the lives of The Terrifics, and making you question how they might put a cap on this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #20

Sep 25, 2019

The invasion of the backwards was one hell of a trip this week. The Terrifics #20 proved once more that we have fun when this creative team clearly looks like they have fun breathing life into this madness. This is definitely one of those stories where we just have to brace for the unexpected, because right now it is anything goes with Bizarro in the driver's seat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #21

Oct 23, 2019

While we ultimately knew that doom was going to prevail over The Terrifics before this issue released, this did not change the thrill of everything which led to that point. This is probably the first time I have ever read a story where time regressed, but as a first this has been fun for every opportunity this creative team took to embrace the pre-2000's culture and entertainment. They even get bonus points for referring to favorite games such as Titanfall.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #22

Nov 27, 2019

It's a bad time to be a hero. Especially a time where you still are not done with the villains who put them into a doom-filled world. After what The Terribles put The Terrifics through this month, I couldn't imagine that things will get any better before they get worse. Better yet, before they get crazier.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #24

Jan 29, 2020

I'm not going to lie and say I didn't have my reservations about this story arc and tie-in, because I did. For as big as the Justice/Doom War has been, getting into the craziness of time and space can get messy. Lucky for us that a book like The Terrifics is in capable hands to hand this type of storytelling.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Terrifics #25

Feb 12, 2020

Choose your fate, choose your action, choose your destiny! This was the pitch, and this creative team delivered on it! The Terrifics #25 was the boldest story told in this series so far, and that is saying something considering everything this team has been through since the very first issue. It paid off at the end, and the whole plot was clever for the way that it took advantage of what transpired in the previous story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #26

Mar 11, 2020

A bold new direction for The Terrifics was right! This book right here is a nonstop adventure, and it goes a long way that this is a creative team which consistently pushes the envelope as to where these new adventures can take us, how the team will grow along the way. The Terrifics #26 started us off on the right note with the team doing the kind of work they should have always been doing and kicked off a new plot which takes us where we never thought we would go.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #27

May 27, 2020

Overall, The Terrifics #27 nailed the intensity of this situation which Stagg created, and the introduction of the Terrific Council. When the dust settles from this, things are going to get very interesting in the following issue when there's no way to dodge the conversation this will stir up. Questions about secrets, matters of blame, issues with choices. Hopefully nothing is left off the table from that.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #28

Jul 8, 2020

Some problems just can't be fixed with science, though how easy of a life these guys would live if it did? Trouble once again came with the Stagg name, and it was hard to ignore the problem that comes with scientists who follow different codes of ethics. The Terrifics #28 succeeded in setting the stage for much more that this team will have to deal with. Even if there was some other things they should have addressed from the previous arc first.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Terrifics #29

Aug 5, 2020

For anyone like myself who was still on the fence about the direction this book has been taking, The Terrifics #29 did just what was needed to create more investment in what's to come. This book started with a Stagg problem, so it only makes sense that we would come back around to the same trouble this family brings to the team.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Terrifics #30

Sep 2, 2020

As the dramatic conclusion to the fight for Gateway City and for the Stagg fortune, The Terrifics #30 stayed true to everything you loved about this book from issue one. It's sad to say goodbye to The Terrifics after this issue, but honestly? How often does a book this unique from DC make it to thirty issues? That is something to applaud from this creative team, and everyone who has had a hand in it from day one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Unexpected (2018) #1

Jun 6, 2018

The Unexpected #1 is another contender for one of the best debuts from The New Age of Heroes line. Firebrand is a new kind of hero entirely, and her story slices a unique corner of the DC Universe that we have never explored before. It was exciting to follow this introduction from start to finish thinking it was going to be one thing, and then become another thing. Keeping us on our toes about what comes next is going to be key to creating investment in what this series has to offer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Union (2020) #1

Dec 2, 2020

In the end, The Union #1 felt like a breath of fresh air from everything else unfolding in the Marvel Universe. The story is down to Earth, the problems these heroes face are relatable, and their first job as a team is going to put their longterm success as a team to the test.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Unworthy Thor #1

Nov 2, 2016

Unworthy Thor #1 is the start of a new chapter full of potential in storytelling. You don't know where this story will take us, but enough was done to make this worth the ride to Odinson reclaiming his power. Hopefully the journey will be as exciting as the destination.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Unworthy Thor #2

Dec 7, 2016

Unworthy Thor #2 made the stakes real for Odinson taking back this hammer that really should at a time like this be wielded by someone worthy. If Odinson seemed challenged before, this creative team cranked the dial in a way that makes you want to see how far he will go for something that is now within his reach.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Unworthy Thor #3

Jan 4, 2017

Unworthy Thor #3 is where they continue to crank that dial. Who knows who will end up with the hammer by the end of this skirmish, or if anyone will get the chance at all. Just the aggressiveness to be the one to have it is what continues to make Unworthy Thor a must read. You look at others who may have died to give up their mantle, but here is the Odinson ready to spill blood and all to have it back. To be worthy enough for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
The Unworthy Thor #4

Feb 8, 2017

Unworthy Thor #4 raised the bar for this story and they have continued to do this since the first issue. If you ever questioned the heart of a god then Unworthy Thor paints a pretty good picture of what it is life for them to have everything to gain and nothing left to lose. The cliffhanger stung being the moment we are all awaiting, though we have two more issues for an actuality to sink in.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Unworthy Thor #5

Mar 22, 2017

Life will never be the same for the Odinson, but the events of Unworthy Thor #5 prove that he is anything but unworthy for the person he is right now. If the mission was to give us an Odinson who can be just as amazing without his hammer, then this creative team succeeds in every way. Excellent action, driven cast of characters, and satisfying reveal. The fact that even something at the very end could add a new layer to this corner of this world was a plus.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Valiant #1

Dec 10, 2014

The Valiant # 1 is a solid start that in the same capacity as Unity shows what can happen when a great force out there calls upon the need for greater heroes to rise to the occasions. Especially when an aged Gilad has pretty much had enough of failure that can now be avoided.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Valiant #2

Jan 21, 2015

The Valiant #2 is making good time balancing out intense action scenes with much more character development than you would have initially expected from this series. You just hope that with everything going on that this can bring The Valiant to a satisfying end with no loose ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
The Valiant #3

Feb 18, 2015

We only have one more issue left for The Valiant, though after an intense third act like this, you wonder just how they will close this and leave us satisfied. That isn't to say that isn't possible when there is much going on between Bloodshot and Kay that must be addressed above all considering the effect she has been able to have on him.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Valiant #4

Mar 25, 2015

The Valiant #4 was brilliant from start to finish. It had a definite start, it had an ending with impact, and kept us glued in for everything in between. For as much action as we got in these four issues, there was just as much character development and focus which made us love a character most of us only just got introduced to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
The Visitor (2019) #1

Dec 18, 2019

If anything, The Visitor #1 should stir up some interest towards seeing what comes next simply for the fact that we walk away from this with so many questions, rather than answers. They did not disappoint when it came to creating a mystery between asking who this character is, and what he hopes to gain through these strings of attacks.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
The Wake #1

Jun 1, 2013

What we can expect from this book is something dark that will unravel. Something that will keep us at the edge of our seats and that's what makes this such a great team up between Snyder and Murphy. Whatever is to come next remains unknown, but as a first issue this was on the mark.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Walking Dead #111

Jun 15, 2013

Sure everything before Negan appeared fell a bit flat, but it's how it all transitions which grabs you. Every character is thrown out of their comfort zone in some way, whether for the best or for the worst. Changes in emotion, sanity, reasoning, conviction, it's all there and the most important aspect of Walking Dead is character development. Overall an exciting issue that's building up to something worth anticipating.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Walking Dead #112

Jul 14, 2013

So even though the direction of the story has been put in question till this issue, it's easy to say that there might still be hope when Kirkman is finally able to turn that dial again to crank up the intensity. Of course that means that means that things are going south for Rick and his crew, but it's nothing new and what we like to see is them overcome these kind of situations. Pacing I find to be very important to this story and hopefully it can keep up this momentum and see this story through to the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Walking Dead #114

Sep 11, 2013

Aside from this, a solid issue and the story is now moving in a direction that readers can feel drawn to. Took a while, but we are reaching that climax of the story whether anything can go and things are somewhat moving towards an end. Negan is prepared to do what he has to in order to ensure his authority is met without question, and Rick is trying to make his final move and do so without the chance is error like moves he's made up to this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Walking Dead #115

Oct 10, 2013

Of course this doesn't stop things from going wrong at the last-minute. That much is always expected and that is what we got here at the very end. The one person you could have guessed to turn on them did, and while predictable added to that sense of unpredictability that will come of the next issue. They feared casualties, well that will more than likely come now and Rick hope to god should have a back up plan if he thought everything through. There just can't be room for errors like this when it's a possible scenario.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Walking Dead #116

Nov 16, 2013

Really if you were someone who had to drop The Walking Dead because of its pacing, or worry of its direction, I'd say The Walking Dead #116 is where you should pick it back up. There's a clear sign of getting some of that excitement back which made the book worthy of its praise. Rick is now back into a position of leadership that he's a lot more comfortable with, Negan is far from willing to back down considering both his superiority complex and ego, you just know that something will go wrong for either and it's a given.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
The Wicked + The Divine #30

Aug 9, 2017

The Wicked & The Divine #30 for the most part was a tame issue which is different for this book. Not a bad thing, though hopefully the next issue pushes their need to find Sakhmet, to get this machine rolling, or make us fear the great darkness again. Till then I guess you're just enjoying the everyday life of a god.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
The Wicked + The Divine #31

Sep 6, 2017

You ask and you receive right? Mind my language but shit happened and shit really hit the fan, or the floor if you want to be technical. The Wicked + The Divine #31 got some wheels turning and I almost wish I could take back my wants, because without a doubt you are going to have some tears rolling from readers who also didn't see this coming.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Wicked + The Divine #32

Oct 11, 2017

The Wicked + The Divine #32 will definitely leave some jaws on the floor for better or for worse. Nothing can truly be like it was before after what has happened here. I mean is there anything left to actually salvage from this period of reincarnation? Still some answers to unveil, but is it already too late? I don't know, though this exciting story is not done until its done.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Wicked + The Divine #33

Nov 15, 2017

The Wicked + The Divine #33 in one issue rocked your world and these characters' when everyone is seeing that nothing is as it seems. While this issue has shocked me, I'm also relieved that this wasn't your usual story arc conclusion for The Wicked + The Divine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
The Wicked + The Divine #34

Mar 7, 2018

When everything right now is about getting answers, The Wicked & The Divine #34 does not disappoint in what it delivers. So much you wouldn't expect to learn through the events of this issue and they are proving that the sky is the limit in terms of what the past has to offer. Some might argue that the mystery of the past is best kept a mystery, but the things we know now you would never have learned in a different situation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Wicked + The Divine #35

Apr 4, 2018

The Mothering Intervention so far has proven to be a major story arc. I can see why the events of this arc they took their time getting to. It has all been so well thought out and planned between the things we needed to know and when we needed to know them. The Wicked & The Divine #35 was a great example of one of those times with perfect execution. There was plenty we learned new about this game, the players, and other things about the cycle that were overlooked till now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Wicked + The Divine #36

May 16, 2018

The Wicked & The Divine #36 gave us the best of both worlds through plot progression and exploration. What we got was something more revealing about the history of this game and that might give us something to talk about for a while considering how cold-blooded Ananke(?) really is.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
The Wicked + The Divine #37

Jun 27, 2018

The Wicked + The Divine #37 tied up one hell of a loose end that should take us further when this situation calls for all hands on deck. With Dio out, the Norns locked up, and others untrustworthy, there's little room left for the pettiness that would turn them against each other.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
The Wicked + The Divine #39

Sep 12, 2018

The Wicked & The Divine #39 was not at all the finale you thought it to be. I'm actually glad that this time around the creative team broke from the mold. This issue was excellent because it wasn't what we expected. It was so much more because exploration and discovery overshadowed everything else. That is how you capture the true beauty in this kind of fantasy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
The Wicked + The Divine #40

Dec 5, 2018

This creative team's five-years-in-the-making conclusion has now been set into motion and they have our full attention. The Wicked & The Divine #40 really toys with your emotions when there is everything to lose. What does it mean to save the world? The people you care about most? It seems those are the two big questions to keep in mind knowing that the worst is still yet to come. I just hope that this will be an end that we are satisfied with for the pacing that has picked up once again.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
The Wicked + The Divine #41

Jan 16, 2019

Overall, The Wicked & The Divine #41 embraced a lot that was issues in the making. We have reached that point in the series where things are really happening on both sides. It's not the time for gods to still be figuring things out, now is the time for them to make real decisions about their futures. Particularly those who have something to still fight for.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
The Wicked + The Divine #42

Feb 27, 2019

When they said "We're actually going to do all this in an issue?", they really meant that they were going to do some things that will leave you with some obscenities running through your head. In the best of ways of course. The Wicked & The Divine #42 cut the middleman in so many ways, and in such a short amount of time. Most creative teams at this stage would get called out for things seeming rushed, but this was all excellently crafted from start to finish. This is a time where everyone has a choice to make, and moves to play. You were either going to see this through to the end or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Wicked + The Divine #43

Apr 24, 2019

Two more issues after this, and this tale comes to an end. The Wicked & The Divine #43 gave us the revelations we have been waiting for a long time now. Everything came full circle, while at the same time presenting us with the last of the obstacles that our cast of heroes should have to face before their stories end. That is if everyone makes it to that hopeful ending.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Wicked + The Divine #44

Jul 24, 2019

The Wicked & The Divine #44 was worth the wait for everything jaw-dropping experienced from these once-gods who find themselves faced with the real world again. The rules were different for them at a point, but now they are playing the same game of life that the rest of us do. And that comes with a strongest sense of acceptance and ownership to everything we do wrong and take advantage of.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
The Wicked + The Divine #45

Sep 4, 2019

It was hard saying goodbye to The Wicked & The Divine. This book felt like an experience with every new discovery, twist, the drama, the action, and the spectacle. You could have loved this book for so many reasons, yet what kept you coming back for more is that this creative team being able to rekindle your love in this with each passing issue. I think we all fell for this one hook, line, and sinker from the end of the debut release.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
The Wicked + The Divine Annual #1

Dec 13, 2017

The Wicked & The Divine Christmas Annual #1 was satisfying for everything they treated us to. The best fan service you could ask for from this series and kept a lot of these lost characters alive in for even just a moment longer. You couldn't have asked for a better art team to tackle these stories and they did so perfectly. This Christmas Annual had it all and was the full package for anyone who needs something extra to hold them till February next year.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Thor (2018) #1

Jun 13, 2018

Thor #1 was an excellent start to a new series which did a great job of picking up from where Mighty Thor ended. This creative team met us halfway between delivering a story that progresses, and has a draw-in to new readers who want to see what it is like when the gods are not living a life of fortune.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Thor (2018) #16

Aug 28, 2019

This issue right here probably gave us one of the most heartfelt conclusions to an event that we have ever gotten in a while. Thor #16 wrapped this event up perfectly, addressed where the gods go from here, and what to expect next in Jason Aaron's final story to come. It wasn't too surprising to see where they were going with it, but it has been a long time coming. It would be madness to not want to see what happens as King Thor takes on this final foe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Thor (2020) #2

Jan 29, 2020

Overall, Thor #2 is the issue of the series that will hook you if the first issue only grabbed your attention. The Black Winter may be on its way, but there is more than one danger to brace for when at the end of the day nothing changes the fact that this is Galactus being treated as the universe's only hope.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Thor (2020) #3

Feb 12, 2020

I'm not the type to give in to hype, but right now this book is the hype! After these past three issues, it is much easier to say that this series is still in good hands. Thor #3 was Earth-shattering for the position that Thor is put into when confronted for his decision to help Galactus of all people.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Thor (2020) #4

Mar 11, 2020

With each issue, this book continues to keep you at the edge of your seat. I don't know if this would be categorized as Thor's greatest enemy yet, but it is certainly one which has left him more vulnerable than he has been since the time he was unworthy. Overall, Thor #4 served as a perfect set-up for what is to come when the sacrifices to get to this point can't be in vain for the God of Thunder.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Thor (2020) #5

Jun 24, 2020

Right now there's no other way to say that this is one of Marvel's best books on shelves. It was a long wait to finally get our hands on Thor #5, but boy was it worth the wait. There was character depth, there was action, and there was twists and turns. This issue had my attention from start to finish. If it hasn't been said yet, then now is the best time to say that there is no reason for you to not still be reading Thor. A change of creative team took nothing away from the exhilaration this book gives you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor (2020) #7

Sep 16, 2020

All in all, a solid issue that we got out of Thor #7. Though as I said, there is much work that will have to be done in order to sell us on the situation with Mjolnir, and whatever is coming for Thor and Asgard.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Thor (2020) #8

Oct 7, 2020

All in all, this was a story worth telling through Thor #7 and 8. It didn't hurt one bit to ask what it meant for Thor if the hammer was getting heavier for him. And it didn't hurt to show what it looks like when someone else is able to pick up his hammer with ease.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Thor (2020) #11

Jan 6, 2021

Overall, Thor #11 continues to pull me deeper into this book. These past three issues so far are everything which makes this run of Thor worthwhile. You simply aren't going to get this kind of storytelling anywhere else from Marvel right now. And yes, I will say that with King in Black still ongoing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Thor: God of Thunder #8

May 9, 2013

In the end it is a progressive issue that finally put all three Thor's together and sets them up for the final fight against Gorr.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Thor: God of Thunder #9

Jun 13, 2013

When it comes to this very issue the art sold every moment. From the expressions from each character, to the dramatic effects added to make it feel like 4 gods are actually clashing with one another.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Thor: God of Thunder #10

Jul 18, 2013

This was a truly powerful issue which has shown what we do love most about not only Thor, but his lore as well. What we love is that even when he seems defeated, he will come back. Sounds cliche, yet handled correctly like this very moment and it makes all the difference. This is a tale of gods which I find to be very memorable and the cliff hanger it ended on was a great one knowing that the next issue is the conclusion.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #11

Aug 15, 2013

The narration throughout this entire arc has been nothing but breathtaking. Some might say it was not necessary or it took away from the story, but it never really did. It gave every moment importance, as if . The layout and the art was just spectacular. Esad Ribic was meant to be the artist for this book because I felt as if I was actually reading a Norse tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Thor: God of Thunder #12

Aug 29, 2013

I can only hope to see more stories about Thor in this tone. Not sure if something like this could be consistent, but it's something you appreciate when he's not out there bashing skulls with his hammer. Gods are gods, but seeing what makes them like every other being in existence is enlightening. Normally after something as big as a 10 which the conclusion to GodBomb was, you'd expect something weaker, but this still gets to you. This is another reason why Thor God of Thunder should be on your pull list

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Thor: God of Thunder #13

Sep 20, 2013

This was an excellent start to a new story and The Accursed shows potential to be just as memorable if not more than the previous story arc. Polished style, handle of gore, and the overall historic feel that makes this feel as though it's an epic tale.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Thor: God of Thunder #14

Oct 10, 2013

This will be another book to remember as it has started strong and continues to astound with how few punches Jason Aaron doesn't pull. Ride till Malekith is dead, or they are, that much is enough to describe what we can expect from the rest of this story. He has committed the most atrocious crimes and will answer for them. There's so much potential for this story and we are only on the second part. Thor God of Thunder remains the must read book for Marvel NOW! and is one you are recommended to read even if you aren't the biggest fan of Thor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Thor: God of Thunder #15

Nov 16, 2013

A solid issue of Thor God of Thunder. Being the third part there has been a lot of progress since the League of Realms formed. You have to appreciate that Jason Aaron has not dragged on this chase for Malekith to the point where this becomes folly. The confrontation between them is inevitable and hopefully the next issue pushes a bit further to see one side actually start to take control of this fight. The League has suffered one loss, tragic, but very well may be the kick they need to really start to work together when not drunk.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Thors #1

Jun 17, 2015

You would think following the standard crime drama formula would make things predictable, though that does not seem to be the case for Thors. They take what they need from that formula, but what makes Thors entertaining is everything seen that makes a Thor who they are. The arrogance, power, need to drink. Those little things matter when seeing all these versions of Thor who still carry those distinguishing personalities.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Thors #2

Jul 29, 2015

The atmosphere for Thors #2 is much darker than the first issue. The first issue felt a bit more light as we are introduced to the life of a Thor. But the minute Beta Ray died you could feel a colder tone take over. For the best considering this case is calling for the utmost urgency from the Thors. Something you could see easily in the way they took to the skies rounding up suspects. They literally brought the thunder which was captured in a way that shows why they are to be feared. With that said it is also enjoyable to pick out any of the versions of Thors that you may not have seen before. It's cool when this art team is able to put that kind of effort into making most of these Thors distinct from one another. Thors #2 had no lack of action too and there's no better fight to take from a story like this than two Thors going at it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Thors #3

Sep 2, 2015

Thors #3 is another step in the right direction keeping us invested in a mystery that goes all the way to the top. We will get to that big reveal, though the most important question of all is if these Thors and all involved can grasp the truth to the answers they have turned every rock and tree for?

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Tinker #1

Feb 10, 2016

Tinker #1 is an entertaining start which looks to have potential. This first issue showed some of what you can look forward to, though it looks like the second issue is where the adventure really begins for Amy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Triage #1

Sep 4, 2019

Would I recommend Triage #1? I feel as if I would to anyone who is looking for a story that hits you for being both personal and out there as something sci-fi. I mean, how does a nurse measure up to a superhero and a commander? I would want to see this through to the end for how an underdog like that rises to the occasion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Triage #2

Oct 9, 2019

With the events of Triage #2, I definitely find myself more confident in my investment in this series. It has personal stakes, it has worldly stakes, it's sci-fi that you can digest, and it is action-packed. I'd say that is pretty much a winner in my books so far. If this is what we've already gotten in the second issue? I look forward to what they next three have in store for us!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Triage #3

Nov 13, 2019

Overall, Triage #3 gives us a lot to digest. After that intense action scene in the beginning, the majority of this issue made use of the space given for strong character moments and development across the board. There was not a single character from this cast by the end who we didn't get to understand in a new way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Triage #4

Dec 11, 2019

It has been a while since I had a book like this to look forward to from Dark Horse. When we think of stories involving infinite existences, it is easy to lean towards thinking about DC's Multiverse. Though Triage in a short amount of time succeeds in breaking the mold to breathe life into a multiverse of its own. Triage #4 served as a strong reminder in the reason why these were characters you wanted to see unraveled through their experiences together. Sometimes the best way to figure yourself out is to look at your reflection. Only in their case, it's quite literal.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Triage #5

Jan 22, 2020

The finale of this exhilarating miniseries arrived, and far from disappointed too! Triage #5 rewarded us all for the investment we put into these characters, their worlds, their concepts of science. Not to mention this story which engaged us from start to finish whether it was through these characters, or the brutal action scenes.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Trinity of Sin: Pandora #1

Jul 4, 2013

In the end it was a solid issue that to say the least shows potential for the rest of the books progression. If the main point of this was to show her importance then it was achieved because the ending alone let us know to an extent what we should expect to come and how it will affect the war as a whole. The duo of Daniel Sampere and Vicente Cifuentes made the art style of this book unique to the tone it has set. You felt that time was changing and the detail put into it stood out.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Trinity of Sin: Pandora #2

Aug 2, 2013

The one problem I still do find is what part the evils from the box really play in all of this. Yes we know that they corrupted humanity and still do, but as individuals what are they doing that is affecting this war right now. All we see from them is concern that Pandora wants to put them back in the box

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Trinity of Sin: Pandora #3

Aug 22, 2013

Sure you could be happy that things finally start moving in the direction in which they should, though it took way too long. Especially for this book to be in its third issue. It's hard to say this was decent at best, but it still has it's importance in moving this event along knowing the core storyline is not going to be dragged along or dragged down by this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Turok (2017) #1

Aug 2, 2017

Turok #1 had a solid start for what so far has come of his mission to infiltrate the prison. We don't get to known him intimately, but as a man of action you do enjoy that his actions do the talking for him. There are still plenty of questions to ask about this world, the Lost Valley, though we got more than enough answers to look forward to the next issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Turok (2017) #2

Sep 27, 2017

Little time was wasted when the second issue gives us our reason to invest in Turok. There's an understanding of why he is where he is now, the attitude he carries about the world around him, and why nothing is going to stop him from finding this girl. For a new character like Turok it is important not to hold out on these details that help readers find favor in the story and where it is taking them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Turok (2017) #3

Oct 25, 2017

If the second issue didn't pull you in, Turok #3 really gets the ball rolling with the dangers this group is running into. They have their destination, they have their goals, so now it is all about making it without this world swallowing them up in its madness. If you're looking for fast-paced action, Turok is the one you should be following.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Turok (2017) #4

Nov 22, 2017

Turok #4 set the wheels in motion for the man himself when he now realizes that it is a race against time to save his daughter. All this time I assumed he knew the stakes, but now they have been set and you'd pray for whoever gets in his way. This was a revealing issue that we needed to fully grasp the big picture in this story and plot.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.7
Turok (2017) #5

Dec 27, 2017

Turok #5 ended with a huge contrast to a story like Magnus'. One that was filled with so much hope for the future was followed by Turok who filled us with the tragedy of loss. I think part of us knew how this was going to and, or maybe needed to end, but that couldn't help you when the time came for all answers to be laid on the table. This was a thrilling adventure that really captivates you for all the right reasons when a father is trying to save his daughter. Including the exploration that I don't think you will get from any of the other all-new versions on this level.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #22

Apr 27, 2013

The end was truly shocking and shows that Bendis does not hold back punches. It was an emotional scene when Miles fights Venom because even with just a small part of his mask ripped off his mom knew it was him instantly. And as any loving mother opened fire on Venom putting herself in danger. Bendis has managed to portray the one thing that shaped Peter's life which was never letting those closest to him die on his account. A failure by Miles that in turn caused him to rip apart his costume and declare that he's done. This issue here truly felt like Spider-Man in it's entirety.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #23

May 20, 2013

This was another emotional issue, and leads into more issues that might leave you with the same feeling. Something that Spidey fans are very familiar with.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #24

Jun 20, 2013

Overall it was a balanced issue between the fight between Cloak and Dagger vs. Bombshell and Gwen trying to get Miles to suit up. It does well to make you question what it will take to push him to be Spider-Man again because while the fight that broke loose wasn't much to give him reason, you know that something bigger is coming his way in which he will have to make a choice.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #25

Jul 18, 2013

This was definitely an emotional roller-coaster. Things that Peter suffered over the course of years, Miles is going through in such a short period of time and that creates an intensity that Bendis managed to pull off. Now that this downward spiral is handled, Miles can now move on to something real which will have an impact on the Ultimate Universe as a whole. What he and Jess will do first is still in question though the team-up should be exciting.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #26

Aug 29, 2013

Again I like this new direction because to an extent we are being taken back to old school heroics. Whether they are on the hunt matters little, but there is now that fight for the greater good. We have the heroes, we have those in-between, and now we have an established villain who looks to be able to give them a run for their money. Everything to get this back on track in terms of a Spider-Man story is there and again this is one book you must be reading from the Ultimate line if you are a Spidey fan.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #27

Sep 26, 2013

The best thing about this issue was seeing Miles basically warming up to being Spider-Man again. A lot of these stunt he hasn't pulled in over a year and he is very rusty. It shows and this was all about that progression as he got back into the groove of things. Everything was fluent in terms of the transitions of the fight sequences, and how lively it felt seeing them all over the place. Marquez does an amazing job and makes everything look as real as he possibly can make them.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Ultimate Comics Spider-Man (2011) #28

Oct 24, 2013

This issue looked great. Clean, great use of the color tones, and the layout of the fights was well enough to display the potential their dynamic had. It's as if they were meant to be a team and having that one goal in mind kept them on the same page. Whatever comes next, you want to be reading this book. There is fun to be had in being a superhero, and they felt that while getting their retribution. That's not including the emotion put into this, especially seeing Miles finally make up with Ganke, those two really made the book fun when they were friends.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #24

May 9, 2013

Again another standout moment when Cap finally realized that being a President and a soldier just wasn't working for him. He never asked for it, and what he does best is out on the battlefield, protecting the people so they may lead themselves.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #26

Jun 21, 2013

It has been a layered story in which all sides have their purpose in a fight that has proven to not be in their favor from the start. Whatever happened in this issue will lead to something shocking if Fialkov can keep up with the progression of the story and focus less on cliche dialogue or narration.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #27

Jul 11, 2013

It's a great issue that still has a steady momentum its carrying and you know it's only going to get worse before it gets better. While not completely loving the art, I do find that moments where it matters most it does sell them. The expressions, fight sequences, everything that is gory is well portrayed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #28

Aug 2, 2013

Aside from this I still find myself very much engaged in this story because with everything that has happened so far we are still reaching the climax of this arc. Call it cliche, but the execution is there and so is the intensity when needed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #29

Aug 22, 2013

A solid issue as everything occurring lives up to the arc being named Disassembled. This is one book from the Ultimate line that you should not underestimate. Pick it up if you care for the fate of the Ultimate Universe because it starts with The Ultimates and it ends with them as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Ultimate Comics: Ultimates #30

Sep 12, 2013

A very excellent peak at what we can expect from Cataclysm when it begins and a great end to this story despite some inconsistencies. This was a story worth telling if not for showing us the reason why the Avengers answer that call when the world is in danger. It's not about going up against the biggest villain and showing them whose boss, it's about rising to the occasion when they are that last line of defense. If there's anything to take from this story it's that in particular.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #26

May 3, 2013

If there were two things that stood out most throughout this series, it's Kitty needing to solidify her place as leader of the mutants and preparing for the inevitable war to come. This is her moment and everything she worked towards is on the line as she not only is dealing with the army, but the rebel mutants and Jean Grey. It was Jean who we finally see make her move as she now wants Kitty to succeed. Up to that point she hated Kitty because she believed that Utopia was no better than Tian. What her end game is after she does her part is unknown, but just by striking the army, even with an EMP, she could start up a fight that will no doubt end in violence. Overall we still don't know what to expect when so many have their own agendas, but that is what Wood accomplished which makes you want to know how it plays out for each side.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #27

Jun 14, 2013

Overall we are met with mysteries, twists, emphasis on loyalties and so on. This story has proven to show that nothing is as simple as it looks and too usually expect the worst to come. The only set back you can find is that even as the book hits it's climax, nothing too big has happened to really occurred to wow you. That will come in time, but for now the pace is decent at best.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #28

Jun 27, 2013

The art here is great and dynamic. It has remain consistent throughout and it fits the story, not much can be said there. Overall there's nothing but good things to say about this book and this storyline all together. Its been an exciting perspective on the mutant issue and full of action that keeps you wanting more. It had great pacing, it was balanced and you never felt like there was a need to rush this. This was a natural as you could get from the conflict Wood brought to life. The dialogue between Jean and Kitty was brilliant and after everything is said and done, you can't help but wonder what comes next because Jean looked infuriated.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #29

Jul 25, 2013

Continued intensity and still remains to go off track for even a second. Ultimate X-Men is one book that you hope to continue to strive when most believe their world to be coming to an end. In fact you appreciate this book more when you see how concentrated their world is that what goes on around them isn't really as important than their internal conflicts. This war has only become and you already feel the animosity brewing between everyone.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #30

Aug 16, 2013

The best thing to come out of this so far is that no one is playing the victim. Not one of them is letting their ideology get in the way of what they have built, The pacing continues to be the most consistent element of this book and it has done it's part in putting every character that matters where they need to be just for this very moment. This is the mutant war to end all mutant wars as Jean said and this is one story you should be following if you are a fan of the Ultimate Universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #31

Sep 20, 2013

Things are heating up and you should not count out the mutant's importance in the Ultimate Universe. They are making a statement and doing so in a way that you would not get from the 616 Universe. That is what makes these events unique and Woods has really set them apart from what we find familiar with them. Meaning we get something new and we can easily be surprised because of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #32

Oct 10, 2013

The story maintains that gritty look to it which is to be expected when things are so intense. The end is nigh and if you aren't following this story, you'd best do so or miss out on what really should be the biggest moment for mutantkind in the Ultimate Universe. The transition from against the world to against each other has been the best story decision that Brian Wood could have made. They have their freedom, but now it's their choice as to what they should do with it. This is a conflict of interest and the two heads of this conflict will end it before it gets any worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Ultimate Comics: X-Men #33

Oct 31, 2013

The conclusion to World War X shows that the Ultimate X-Men have so much to offer the Ultimate Comics as a whole. What started as broken people, ended as the X-Men of tomorrow. This was the best ending you could hope for the X-Men going into Cataclysm because that will be the real test in terms of what they can really do united. If you are an X-Men fan and want something different that keeps you at the edge of your seat, this book is what you should be reading, Woods understands the X-Men.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ultimates (2015) #1

Nov 11, 2015

Ultimates #1 sets the foundation for what this series stands for going forward. We know the team, we know the state of the individuals and their motivations, and we know the overall team mission. There is a lot to look forward from this team that in one issue shows a lot more promise than most of the other team books either released or to be released. Diversity was a big appeal for this title, but honestly at this point it is just a well written and drawn series constantly evolving.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ultimates (2015) #2

Dec 9, 2015

Ultimates #2 ends with the team solving their first problem, and surely after this issue you'll want to follow them to the ends of space and back as they pull off the impossible.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ultimates (2015) #3

Jan 7, 2016

Ultimates #3 dives more into what this series has to offer and proves the sky seems to be the limit. This creative team knows what they want from this team and they waste no time putting them in a position to do what they do best.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ultimates (2015) #4

Feb 11, 2016

Ultimates #4 was packed with so many things you either didn't see coming or new to us. That is what you like to see from a story so fixed around the science of the universe. An adventure that's daring from start to finish when fixing a problem can still create a whole new set of others to follow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimates (2015) #5

Mar 24, 2016

With the conclusion of Ultimates #5 it is easy to say that Ultimates is just a well written and drawn series that is constantly evolving. There is nowhere but up for Ultimates and the aim is far from overreaching.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ultimates (2015) #7

May 11, 2016

Ultimates #7 while takes some time to set up for Civil War, is an excellent issue for the focus on diplomacy and choice in what must be done to make sure the things they witnessed don't come to light. They may not have seen exactly what they were looking for, though they saw enough to justify this fallout.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimates (2015) #8

Jun 23, 2016

Whatever happened with the fight against Thanos and the circumstances of what happened next, Ultimates #8 made this interesting to follow. They make this worthwhile with a team mission statement that separates them from any other team in the Marvel Universe that thinks they are unique.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ultimates (2015) #9

Jul 21, 2016

Ultimates #9 makes progress at its own pace and again this is a book you keep on your pull-list because it continues to be self-contained whether the cover says Road to Civil War II or Civil War II. In general the characters matter, the story matters, they have a handle on the pacing they want to take this, and the artwork consistently finds a way to impress you.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Ultimates (2015) #10

Aug 17, 2016

The hope in general was for this creative team to crank the dial with Ultimates #10, and that is exactly what they did. All for the best when the future of this team is now at stake, the future of the world is at stake, and the soul of what most of these heroes are fighting for is at stake.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ultimates 2 (2016) #1

Nov 23, 2016

Ultimates 2 #1 is the start of something extraordinary for Captain Marvel, Black Panther, Blue Marvel, Spectrum and Ms. America. This is where you need to be if you want a cosmic story with true substance to it. They care about these characters, their place in this world and getting to those things which most readers wouldn't see as problems till presented with solutions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Ultimates 2 (2016) #2

Dec 21, 2016

Ultimates 2 #2 pulls you in completely if you were still waiting for something big to put you at ease about getting to whose caged Eternity. It will be a ways to go to reach that point, but all the things set up through this issue? Yeah, that says enough about what we've been missing caring too much about Earth's problems. The Ultimates solve big problems, and they've got more than enough to handle now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Ultimates 2 (2016) #3

Jan 18, 2017

The stakes have never been higher. Ultimates 2 #3 gave us a huge power shift in the universe the likes of which should have big consequences to those who aren't too high on the current food chain. The fate of the multiverse hangs in the balance, and hopefully we will push past all Earthly affairs that would anchor us down from such a spectacle that can only happen here.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Ultimates 2 (2016) #4

Feb 15, 2017

Ultimates 2 #4 really shook up everything you thought you knew was going on or going to happen. That is the most you can ask for from a cosmic story like this. Ultimates pushes boundaries and continues to do so with each passing issue. If you want refreshing storytelling then you should look nowhere else but to the Ultimates.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Ultimates 2 (2016) #5

Mar 22, 2017

Ultimates 2 #5 is where things get serious. The creation of Logos was mad enough, but this being pulling the strings of discord challenges how impossible a task can be. But who if not the Ultimates to charge head first into the impossible? I feel like this is the roof and they are going to blow it wide open with what is unleashed and what will be given back in response.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Ultimates 2 (2016) #7

May 18, 2017

Ultimates 2 #7 definitely has you feeling some sort of way about the trouble this team finds themselves in at the hands of Steve Rogers, HYDRA, and this endless horde of Chitauri. I can't say that I find myself caring for the Secret Empire plot, but this issue still managed to make me care for where the Ultimates stand being locked outside of Earth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Ultimates 2 (2016) #8

Jun 22, 2017

Ultimates 2 #8 was every bit the epic issue they said it would be. I was really bracing for something further tied to Secret Empire, and was delighted by something much more. Al Ewing once again proves why this is a book you should not overlook. They dare to acknowledge the unknown, to bring depth to it, and deliver to us one heck of a turn of events to this war.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Ultimates 2 (2016) #9

Jul 20, 2017

Who knew that all it would take is two surprise elements to this Eternity War to flip this whole story on its head? Their ultimate plan for the multiverse was both shocking and quite literal when you reach that last page. Ultimates 2 #9 for the most part felt like it came out of nowhere, but at least there is more clarity to what is being fought for. I mean this is one heck of a mess created just from the wrong person taking advantage of this broken hierarchy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Ultimates 2 (2016) #100

Aug 16, 2017

It's hard to believe that Ultimates 2 #100 is the last of this series, but one heck of a number to end it on if you ask me. A book like this you don't get everyday. I feel proud to have seen this series of stories evolve from Mighty Avengers (kind of different but a stepping stone for many of these characters), to Ultimates, to Ultimates 2. When we didn't have Fantastic Four, we had Ultimates to take us to infinity and beyond. Anyone who wasn't reading this book has missed out on a corner of the Marvel Universe that dared to go where no one else would.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Uncanny Avengers #9

Jun 20, 2013

As I said before, Remender consistently cranks that dial as this issue reaches it's boiling point. It's intense, leaves you in suspense, and certainly delivers on the action. Everyone in this book stands out on their own and it's their own personal drive that supports the plot which continues to grow. We all knew from the start that this team wasn't going to last together, and it was basically following that belief all the way to their breaking point which leads to anticipation for what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Uncanny Avengers #12

Sep 26, 2013

Overall what keeps this story going strong is the conflict of interest for the mutant population. This has always been from the perspective of the Avengers and how they see the issue at hand. It is their time to do something right and that is what we get here. A chance to make up for how much they ignored the mutant problems, a chance to seek redemption for acts against the mutants, and a chance to stop a future that may not have mutants all together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny Avengers #13

Oct 24, 2013

Things are reaching their boiling point overall. Loyalties in question, questionable actions to expect, and there's still that one death they have been hyping up which could be anyone right now. Everything has led to this upcoming issue having Rogue Vs. the Scarlet Witch. Since the beginning they have represented to sides of the same coin and now we await to see what happens when one of them finally decides to take action against the other, that being Rogue who isn't all too appreciative of anyone who's not with them.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Uncanny X-Force (2013) #4

May 10, 2013

Not too much happened overall, there just seemed like there was too much going on at once to really enjoy what was happening.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Uncanny X-Force (2013) #5

May 31, 2013

Though at the end, yet again, I'm baffled as to the importance of the Cluster, Fantomex and the evil one.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.6
Uncanny X-Force (2013) #6

Jun 14, 2013

As stated in the last issue, the inclusion of Fantomex and Cluster does feel like a distraction, though it's hard to argue with their problems given that it's key to Psylocke's troubled past between the conclusion of the previous Uncanny X-Force book and now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #5

Apr 25, 2013

Though a few panels and facial expressions were off, Irving did a great job with the style of his artwork for the book. Not too much color, and the dark atmosphere during Magiks confrontation with Dormamu in Limbo was solid. You felt the grim tone that not only she portrayed, but the tone Limbo brings forth.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #6

May 23, 2013

The artwork was just spectacular. Some don't like Irving's art style, but in this very issue, and for this very storyline, it captures every moment perfectly. Detailed, great shading, lighting, and the heavy use of color makes every character and action stand out.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #7

Jun 27, 2013

It was a great issue with a focus on both Magik and how unprepared everyone is at this moment. We are now going to see more development as the teachers hone their broken powers and the students find out what they are capable of doing and how to defend themselves. Frazier Irvings style has proven to be stunning and matches the tone of this part of the story perfectly. The negative effect and very bold use of colors that makes everything on the page stand out. Wish there was more to say other than it's one of the best parts of this book despite if his style isn't personally for you.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #8

Jul 11, 2013

Aside from the story, the coloring was what I really liked. Between the gradients and blending, it had it's own unique look to it. I really have come to enjoy the back and forth between Bachalo and Irving thus far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #9

Aug 1, 2013

The only disappointment is Dazzler's part in the story. Everything was going great and I had expectations from her, and then the end came with Mystique up to her games again. I was already getting bored with her antics in All New X-Men and now it's brought into Uncanny where her intentions are still far from clear. She just seems to be that obstacle in both teams paths. If there was some indication of what she was up to I'd like to know, but until then she just feels like a bother because I wanted Dazzler to be that character who finds herself conflicted on who's right.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #10

Aug 15, 2013

The art style of Frazer Irving is what I come to prefer most with this book because it somehow it just fits the story most. That is aside from the color work he does and he has one of the most amazing senses of design and storytelling I've ever come across.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #11

Aug 29, 2013

This was a spectacular issue leading into Battle of The Atom. Now with that said, you could still fear the transition from this cliffanger, but hopefully this all still carries over into the crossover event and has some influence on his actions. Uncanny has done a great job of standing on it's own, but this is a point where things have to click.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #12

Sep 20, 2013

If you aren't following this crossover event because of your stance against them, do yourself a favor and pick it up if you are an X-Men fan. Everything after AvX has been leading to this moment and Bendis has left no stone unturned. This was a good transition into the thick of it by bringing the fight to the Uncanny X-Men.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #13

Oct 17, 2013

By the end of this we come out with an understanding of how the future story comes to be. Maybe this is just a consequence of time still being broken? Either way they are here to stay and now the fake X-Men have to answer for what they've done. Though we know how this will end in terms of what happens with the Original X-Men, we still have to hope that Bendis gives us the desired ending to make this crossover event memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #22

Jun 18, 2014

Uncanny X-Men #22 was a clever way to end the war between the X-Men and S.H.I.E.L.D. which could only escalate so far. Mysteries were solved, the damage had been done, though some questions do still remain which leaves room for future storylines. This is what you like about Uncanny X-Men, with all the stories surrounding the Phoenix and time/space, Uncanny remains down to Earth in a way that reminds you that things aren't perfect for the mutant population on a street-level.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #23

Jul 16, 2014

Uncanny X-Men #23 sets the X-Men up for a big story that will unfold. The suspense is torture and hopefully Bendis delivers on what will shake the very foundation of the X-Men's world. We got some action, drama, emotions, and a little bit of mystery that keeps us drawn in. A lot happened and there is potential as well, let's hope that it can all be capitalized upon.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #24

Jul 30, 2014

Uncanny X-Men #24 opened Pandora's Box for the X-Men and pretty much anything can happen from here. Their world has been turned upside down in a day, and we all just want to see how they each cope with it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #25

Sep 3, 2014

While there's obviously still more to The Last Will & Testament of Charles Xavier that we didn't get in Uncanny X-Men #25, that doesn't change the impact of what we do learn from this issue. The point was to really shake things up, and what they found out was more than enough of a bomb to drop in their laps. Now we just have to see the reaction from what they are being asked to do, and how that will affect the opposing factions between the X-Men.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #26

Sep 17, 2014

Again, a lot happens in Uncanny X-Men #26 and not a single part of this you want to overlook. This is the period in the X-Men's story where things are being shaken up between everyone and their choices from here will determine where they stand in this schism after dealing with Matthew, SHIELD, the last bit of Xavier's will, and the relevancy of the revolution.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #27

Oct 15, 2014

Uncanny X-Men #27 is a solid issue for the focus on Cyclops and Mathew even though you might feel that some important things were rushed over. It is also important to make sure that this doesn't drag on too much, though when we as readers want to see points struck about the schism, those would be the times to deliver on it. Aside from this Cyclops has done what would have been considered impossible, and the next issue will tell if that was the right move.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #28

Nov 19, 2014

Uncanny X-Men #28 was fairly short, but does more than enough to get you anticipating what comes next now that Scott's intentions are more clear, and Magneto weigh's in on the situation. Anything can happen, and surely things will only get worse before they get any better.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #31

Feb 18, 2015

Uncanny X-Men #31 concludes this story while flipping everything we knew right on its head. How will our new mutants fit in at the Jean Grey School? Emma and Illyana? What will Eva do next? And who might these “Monsters” be? So much more that we want to know and so little time after finding out that Bendis' run on Uncanny X-Men is reach and end in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #32

Mar 25, 2015

Uncanny X-Men leaves you very eager to see what the future has in store for Cyclops and Havok in the Marvel Universe. Everyone else as well when it is hard to imagine just what they will turn to now that the revolution is no more. In fact what the revolution really is, is the biggest shock you could take from a threat which puts the fear of god into both the Avengers and SHIELD.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #33

Apr 15, 2015

Uncanny X-Men #33 at the end of the day is an issue we needed. Makes you wish we got just a bit more of this before Secret Wars brings about the final issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #34

May 20, 2015

With whatever conclusion comes with Uncanny X-Men #600, hopefully we see a lot more loose ends tied up because that is what will make this series have been worth following to the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #35

Jul 23, 2015

It came to no shock that even at the end of it all there would be another new artist taking over. Valerio Schiti being that artist on the other hand is far from a bad thing. For those familiar with his works this is one of the more appealing issues from the series which is also disappointing being the last before Uncanny X-Men #600.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) #600

Nov 4, 2015

Uncanny X-Men #600 is an almost perfect end that should satisfy X-Men fans who saw this series to the very end. We got great storytelling, new characters, memorable costume changes, and the status quo for a good time was changed for the better.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Uncanny X-Men (2013) Annual #1

Dec 10, 2014

WithUncanny X-Men Annual #1we have now had a taste of part one of what Eva Bell has had to endure to cause her to keep her story secret from her fellow X-Men. Love Eva for what she is capable of with her powers, feel sympathy for what she found and lost, or take interest in her for how she will affect the outcome of what's going on in the present. All you need to know is that this now matured time traveler holds cards that you would have never expected when first introduced to her. It only saddens you to know that even with the knowledge of this experience, that's all it will ever be since the future isn't written in stone.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #12

Feb 20, 2019

Uncanny X-Men #12 sets the return of the X-Men on the right path. This was a fast read and to the point, but ultimately gave everyone a picture of how terrifying it is now to be a mutant. Facing the mobs and dealing with the corrupt politicians are the least of their worries right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #16

Apr 17, 2019

Uncanny X-Men #16 was the perfect reminder of what these mutants are fighting for, and a reminder of how dangerous this world can be for even them. Mutant problems have been a consistent theme so far, and I would like this think that this creative team is nailing the message sent.

View Issue       View Full Review
6
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #18

May 15, 2019

The struggle is fine, but with this chapter of the X-Men I for one hoped that there would be a bit more fighting back than being struck with more failure than they have already suffered. Uncanny X-Men #18 is the first that came up short, and the last thing we should fear is that this is the start of a downward spiral.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #19

Jun 5, 2019

Uncanny X-Men #19 was a big step up from the issue before. Focusing just on Emma Frost and the role she plays in all of this madness was refreshing. A new set of problems and seen from a different angle to what the X-Men are dealing with. And with next month's issue things are only going to get more interesting when more of her bold actions come back to bite her. How will she get out of this one? That is the big question!

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #20

Jun 19, 2019

Uncanny X-Men #20 raised the stakes at a time where we needed to see the boat rocked. Saving the future of mutantkind was always going to be easier said than done, but never has that been more true than it is now. Particularly when Cyclops and this team have no idea that they have been puppets this entire time. Playing a game that has not truly been theirs. Hopefully after the events of this issue that changes moving forward.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #21

Jul 3, 2019

They didn't lie, it all did end here. To say this is forever? That is hard to believe until we get to that next issue of Uncanny X-Men. Till then, it was a treat to see just what lengths these mutants will go in order to protect their place in this world. They took a gamble, it was one they probably would have never took in the past, but it got the desired result despite the losses taken too.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
Uncanny X-Men (2018) #22

Jul 18, 2019

Uncanny X-Men #22 could have ended on a much better note. I wish I could have loved it till the bitter end, but sometimes this is what you sign up for with the X-Men books. Some story decisions you will love, others will leave you asking why. Here's to hoping that Marvel has figured out what they want to do with these characters in their next chapter.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Undiscovered Country #1

Nov 6, 2019

That's what the US has become!? Yes, that is what you will find yourself asking by the end of this first issue. It was worth the price as well being a special oversized first issue too. Undiscovered Country #1 takes every plausible outcome of the United States of America walling itself off from the rest of the world, and throws it out the window. If you even had any assumption that this was going to be a story grounded to reality? You can also toss that right out the window. High adventure is what you're bracing yourself for. This is a bold world we are stepping into, and you damn well sure will want to explore every bit of it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Undiscovered Country #2

Dec 11, 2019

Through the events of Undiscovered Country #2, the mystery only runs deeper as there are more questions than answers for this team. The mysteries which are the driving force fr this story, aside from the elements of horror in the unknown. They faced their concerns, they re-evaluated what their priorities were, and they found a reason to keep pushing into this mad world. What comes next will be big considering their new motivations will once more be put to the test.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Undiscovered Country #3

Jan 15, 2020

Just when you think you have things somewhat figured out, boom! Nothing is as it seems, or is it? I don't know! The conclusion of Undiscovered Country #3 marks that point where you know you're along for the ride or not. To me, I think this creative team succeeded in giving us a reason to come back for more because this is a brilliant story woven. Right now these characters are screwed, though what matters more than anything else is how much worse things can get before they get better.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Undiscovered Country #4

Feb 19, 2020

If you weren't already invested in this book, Undiscovered Country #4 makes this a book you will want to stick with to the bitter end. What we get out of the pages of Undiscovered Country is a rare experience in comics. A bold idea which is taken to new heights with each passing issue. I can't wait to see how this series continues to astonish in the issues to come!

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Undiscovered Country #5

Mar 18, 2020

Compared to some of the issues before, Undiscovered Country #5 served more as build-up. Though that is not to take away from everything we still managed to discover about this situation. Any issue is wasted if we aren't getting more depth added to these characters, and pushing further into the la of this land. If you aren't running from something, you are sure as hell running towards it if you are Sam or the Destiny Man.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Undiscovered Country #6

Jun 10, 2020

This is an experience you are not going to get anywhere else in comics. Undiscovered Country #6 proved just how ambitious this book is, and I could not see a reason not to look forward to more after the note that this story arc ended on. This is a dangerous game they have stepped into, and I get the feeling that we are far from seeing the worst that it has in store for them. Surely we haven't seen all the major players involved in this either.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Undiscovered Country #7

Aug 5, 2020

In the end Undiscovered Country #7 did not let us down thrusting us from one mystery into another. So far you have to love these zones, because they take on a life of their own from within.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Undiscovered Country #8

Sep 23, 2020

Through the events of Undiscovered Country #8, we have entered into the zone of progression. It looks like a dream come true, but it does make you question where things are going to go wrong here. This doesn't seem like the kind of story that will let them pass through without jumping some hurdles. Particularly since these guys did not proceed into the spiral alone…

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Undiscovered Country #10

Nov 25, 2020

In the end, Undiscovered Country #10 did not fail to remind us that this story is horror in its own way. I for one let myself get swept up in the impossible, and that made it simple enough to forget that it takes some sacrifice to create it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Unfollow #1

Nov 4, 2015

Unfollow #1 has so much potential as not only one that tackles familiar social and personal issues, but a build-up to a thriller that will test how far humanity can sink for the chance at more money than they will earn in a lifetime.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Unfollow #5

Mar 3, 2016

Unfollow #5 is where things get real and realize there are worse things than simply dying. The situation this has put these characters in is torturing. This could be you, or me, this could be anyone around the world and the way they behave is unfortunately true to the world around us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #6

Apr 6, 2016

Unfollow #6 got intense taking this issue to dig deeper than they have with any of the other characters so far. It was a smart move to choose Deacon because there's so much effort that went into creating this man who had a broken past, a questionable present on his holy mission, and a future that needed to be further explained given his current situation. At this point they put character development above over-the-top action or shock value, and I think that grabs our attention more for making sure everything matters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Unfollow #7

May 4, 2016

Unfollow #7 gives you more reason to care for Courtney if you didn't already. She is fun, she has depth to her, and a fresh perspective of the world around her. She really represents the messed up world we live in both in real life and through various forms of media. The shallow life of a celebrity mocked. Because of the quality work they have put into these past two issues, I wouldn't mind if the next still focused on a single character or Akira's island.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #8

Jun 1, 2016

Unfollow #8 set up a lot through this issue. Getting our characters right where they need to be, and making some big moves very fast. We know what we are in store for now pressing forward and it will be both thrilling and full of cringe. I know I've said humanity at it's finest, though who are we kidding? The things we see or are about to see will be as low as it gets because that is just the world around us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #9

Jul 7, 2016

Unfollow #9 marks where things are going to get legitimately complicated. It's hard not to love Unfollow for it's complexities because a story that refuses to hold your hand is one that will captivate you in ways you couldn't have expected.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #10

Aug 3, 2016

Unfollow #10 continues to impress as the numbers steadily drop and that light at the end of the tunnel grows dimmer with the human error these characters can seem to shake off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Unfollow #11

Sep 7, 2016

I think if more people read Unfollow they might come to understand the kind of presence they create on the web. With Unfollow #11 the count is at 129 and dropping. And in just one move that number will dramatically be so much more different. It's crazy how the end of each issue makes you more excited for the next than you were for the last.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Unfollow #12

Oct 12, 2016

Nothing could ever have been the same after the 140 were called upon, but now with the conclusion of Unfollow #12 nothing could ever be the same from where you thought this story was going. This truly shatters any feeling of hope you might have had in humanity, and unfortunately that is a loose rope we struggle with ourselves as readers these days.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #13

Nov 2, 2016

Unfollow #13 may send the message that Akira has made his move against Larry Ferrell's 140 experiment, but it sends one bigger that sheds a light on the fact that there are no true heroes in spite of this. Again, humanity at it's finest, yet captivating all the same.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Unfollow #14

Dec 7, 2016

The truth of the Unfollow experiment is revealed and it hit hard by the end of Unfollow #14. There was no bracing yourself for what could have either gone right or wrong for Larry to think an experiment putting regular people's lives in danger was ever ethically right. This could have turned into the most quiet issue of Unfollow, but execution came through. Only in a way this book knows how to hit you with. The human condition plays a big part in the way the world of Unfollow is shaped. At this point we should be grateful this creative team knows how to fully flesh out what that means in terms of the way social media has actually disconnected us.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #15

Jan 4, 2017

From words taken from within the pages of Unfollow #15, “That is ****ing gold”. That is all I can say by the time I reached the end of this issue. This creative has a message, they have a strong and engaging story with real people. Most of all they have a world that matches ours good and bad.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unfollow #16

Feb 15, 2017

Everything we once knew about the Unfollow we can pretty much toss out the window right now. The players have evolved, the stakes have been raised, and no person doesn't feel the effect of Ferrell bearing the fruits of his experiment. Social media can be a blessing and a curse these days, though Unfollow takes great pleasure in hitting us with the blunt truth about the way it has taken over our lives.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Unfollow #17

Mar 29, 2017

Unfollow each month just keeps giving you reason to fall in love with this book all over again. You love Unfollow for these characters who are flawed in every way like us, living in a world as broken as ours, and fighting against a foe who unfortunately for them understands how the world works better than they ever could.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Unfollow #18

Apr 26, 2017

Unfollow will be missed. Who knows when another book will be this bold to hit us with the hard reality of the world we live in rather than mincing words. If you were looking for a happy ending, then this was the wrong book to turn to. Maybe there was some glimmer of hope, but even that is reaching when you've processed everything this story has put us through.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
Unity #0

Oct 15, 2014

Unity #0 is another zero issue worth picking up, though it does have some places where it could have been better to make us feel truly invested in the story. Like X-O Manowar #0, Unity #0 gave us an idea of what this team stood for back then, and what it continues to stand for now in a world which is rebuilding from a cosmic war they never saw coming.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Unity #1

Nov 8, 2013

Unity #1 is the perfect entry point for new readers. You would not regret picking up this book and seeing for yourself why the launching of Valiant's first-ever superteam is that big of a deal. Not many from these books you can say disappoint and Unity #1 surely won't. Great plot, characterization, it's nothing short of visually stunning through the style of Doug Braithwaite. The penciling brings everything to life, the detail in their faces, and the environments which look very real. He sells every moment and that is why you will enjoy this book.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Unity #2

Dec 11, 2013

Unity #2 is helping to shape this story into something memorable. Great plot, characterization, it's nothing short of visually stunning through the style of Doug Braithwaite. Kindt is turning up the dial on the insanity that comes with taking on a threat like Aric and this is certainly not going to be a walk in the park for Unity. It's good to see some struggle as even having so much power themselves they are still being pushed to the limit by a single person in armor. That fear of nuclear war drives them and you can see that they are in it to the end. In fact the end holds a turn of events that will leave you wanting to pick up the next issue that much more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Unity #3

Jan 15, 2014

If you wanted to know more about Livewire, then this is the issue you wanted to pick up. You wouldn't know much about her unless you were up to date with the Harbinger books or an old fan of the books, but this gave you everything you needed to know about her so simply. It was an excellent example of what she is capable of as the Harbinger Foundation's most seasoned technopath. You want to read this book now if not already because there is so much than what's on the surface. Considering everything you know about the Harbinger storyline, even the most recent issue today, you'd know that this twist was inevitable. It was unexpected, clever, and a good reason to stay tuned in for more.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Unity #4

Feb 19, 2014

Being the fourth issue, Unity continues with the same momentum it began with and delivers on that action that makes this team justified for forming. Unity shows why it is the center of what affects the Valiant world most as everyone involved is growing as individuals and making those tough choices now which they wouldn't have before. Matt Kindt knows these characters and how they should react in a situation like this. Allowing for them to let their colors show what they stand for when it comes to the safety of the world. Just hopefully whatever comes next, we can have more of that sense of shock and awe instead of having an idea of how things end before they actually do.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Unity #5

Mar 12, 2014

This was a good start for Unity #5 as we head into this all new story arc. Webnet proves to have potential as this team will be put to the test to see if they have what it takes to save the world from a threat bigger than any single one of them could face alone. I wouldn't hold it against this issue that it took a while to pick up, though hopefully that pacing remains consistent after the way it ended. Unity does best when their actions speak more than their words.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #6

Apr 10, 2014

Overall this was a solid issue. I personally expected a bit more from the confrontation between Unity and Dr. Silk, but obviously there are bigger things to come now that the threat has been established. It's good since you know that there won't just be a bunch of fighting rather than them taking a step back to really think their actions through. Something which will also come to building this team which is as they say anything but unified right now. On the surface they may look that way, but they really aren't.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Unity #7

May 21, 2014

Unity #7 shows exactly why Valiant knows how to spotlight their big heroes. Matt Kindt obviously knew what he wanted to get out of this story and has plans for more to come from it's conclusion. From here as we go into Armor Hunters, I am very curious as to how Bloodshot will join the team and what the future has in store for them as a whole because the sky is the limit for them at this point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Unity #8

Jun 18, 2014

Unity #8 is a great starting point for their tie-in to Armor Hunters. You should definitely be reading the other titles connected to this event if you're reading Unity as well. Unity may be a team book, but above all it serves as an anchor to the rest of the Valiant Universe. Where they go from here is the big question and hopefully Matt Kindt continues to gives us that unique experience with a team of heroes who have to prove their worthiness as Earth's last hope.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Unity #9

Jul 16, 2014

Unity #9 serves as a bridge between a focus on the Unity team and what is going on around the world in Armor Hunters. It's a crazy adventure that throws everyone outside of their comfort zone when its do or die. Surely they will prevail, and surely there will be loss by the end, but we all want to see what happens in-between, which is what Unity delivers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #10

Aug 13, 2014

Unity #10 was a solid issue at best. Some things did feel off, but overall it does deliver one giving you a better understanding of whats going on in this event from different perspectives. In general what Unity has consistently done well is showing you more than what you see on the surface in the other books connected to the Armor Hunters event. As we approach the climax to this story hopefully it's one that leaves us as satisfied as we should be considering how it all started.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Unity #11

Sep 17, 2014

Unity #11 is great for the character development foremost, while setting Ninjak and Eternal Warrior up for the final fight against the Armor Hunters. Sure they didn't make that much of an impact on the situation, but you for the most part enjoy Ninjak and Eternal Warrior's part in terms of action. The action sequences are intense and always in your face. That much you can always expect if you are looking for a bit of style to your heroics.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #12

Nov 12, 2014

Unity #12 is that first step to Valiant creating a cohesive Universe in which the impossible is something everyone is aware of. Many opportunities created by revealing those who have powers to the world and it all starts with this eventual conflict with The United.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Unity #13

Dec 24, 2014

Unity #13 both escalates the situation of Unity Vs. The United while making Faith question her place on the team. The end is both a shock and also not very shocking when Faith makes her decision as to how she feels about being there.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Unity #15

Feb 18, 2015

Unity #15 overall is an issue you enjoy because this is seeing the other side to Colin's life as Ninjak, yet one that you can also skip over and not miss much . This may be the start of a new story arc though the mark was missed showing the damage from that fight with The United.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
Unity #16

Mar 11, 2015

Unity #16 was a solid story taken from Gilad's personal life. Though if you are someone who follows any and all stories with the Eternal Warrior out there, you will find that this is just like all the rest. It needed to be something more and rely less on what makes Gilad immortal or a warrior. We should want to now see who the man is behind the warrior. Hopefully Unity #17 gives us something new about Livewire beyond what is known from her origins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Unity #17

Apr 15, 2015

This was an end to an okay story arc giving us a breather from the constant action to give us more focus on the characters outside of the Unity team.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.3
Unity #19

Jun 10, 2015

The art style was okay, surprisingly better than the story for this first part. But what this issue of Unity suffered from visually is multiple artists, four in fact. It was only really that part explaining War-Monger's past which looked best. The detail, color, capturing of the barbaric life she was born into.That right there was the best part of Unity #19 because you could see what truly lied within her heart beneath what looked human. Evil in a small package so to speak. Beyond this the other styles were not working as there was no consistency with the quality, and that is something we tend to expect with a majority of Valiant titles picked form the shelves.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Unity #20

Jul 8, 2015

Overall things could just be better. Who knows what the next story arc will have in store for us, but right now it wouldn't hurt if to just skip this story altogether. This is a superhero story and that is not the vibe that this gives off, It comes off direction-less and that is not what we want to see from Unity. It can be so much more for the events up to this point that have shaped the Valiant Universe. To keep interest for those that are giving this a chance there needs to be less censored profanity(as in saturation of profanity as a whole, we get that she's bad), less walking through past versions of Unity that we already know probably exist, and give us something with more appeal to keep us drawn in.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Unity #21

Aug 12, 2015

This is not to be harsh, though Unity is that title you have big hopes for from Valiant. Again you would rather hold off till the end of this story arc before getting back into the series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Unity #22

Sep 9, 2015

Unity #22 you won't struggle through and that is all you can ask for from a story arc that could have been better. Hopefully the next one gets back to what we love most about this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Unity #23

Oct 14, 2015

Despite the reveal that readers could see coming, Unity #23 marks a new direction for the series that will get many back on board now that the War Monger story arc is over.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Unity #24

Nov 11, 2015

With the end of Unity #24 and this story arc, this is exactly what Unity needed to be again. They are a team, and while dysfunctional in some areas they are still developing into the one the world needs. This had action, emotion, and it all meant something for all parties in that conflict.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #1

Jul 24, 2019

Valkyrie: Jane Foster #1 feels like the start of something memorable, just like Mighty Thor. Right now, there is no one tearing down the walls to the mythos of iconic heroes better than Al Ewing and Jason Aaron. After reading this first issue? I put this book down understanding that we never knew Valkyrie as much as we should have!

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #2

Aug 21, 2019

Valkyrie: Jane Foster #2 introduced us to a new kind of god, and he unarguably gives most enemies that Jane has faced so far a run for their money. They definitely proved that Bullseye had the power to bring a god to their knees, and didn't waste the opportunity to show it. In only two issues, this creative team successfully found a way to bring this new hero to a boiling point. There was no better time than now to question where Jane Foster ends and Valkyrie begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #4

Oct 24, 2019

You gotta hand it to this creative team, they have stood true to this story exploring the tug of war between life and death. Valkyrie: Jane Foster #4 took us straight into the next challenge, and so far hitting all the right notes for this warrior who is not ready for the death that is knocking at her door.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #6

Dec 12, 2019

Credit where it is due that there is nothing about Valkyrie: Jane Foster so far that you could have predicted they would have done within these eight issues. This is a new experience all around. New situations, new problems, new team-ups, and even new destinations. I assumed that this would be a fairly tame story, and I'm glad that this assumption was proven wrong in the best of ways.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #7

Jan 15, 2020

Already I can see Valkyrie: Jane Foster being one of the top books to hit shelves for Marvel. This is the kind of book you can appreciate when it takes a character you see one way, and reinvent the way you see that character. Valkyrie: Jane Foster #7 not only continued to accomplish that, but took that step further to explore a corner of the Marvel Universe that not many creatives are bold enough to journey into.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #8

Feb 19, 2020

We've jumped from the death of Death to the death of Midgard. Yet this is just another day for Jane Foster as Valkyrie. So far Valkyrie: Jane Foster #8 started us off with a gripping introduction to this new story arc. The stakes have never been higher, and dangers which Valkyrie now face couldn't be more of a challenge. We are all going to want to see how she overcomes this one.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Valkyrie: Jane Foster #9

Mar 18, 2020

Again this was Valkyrie like you have never experienced the character before. Jane Foster consistency proves that there is something about this job that you should never underestimate, particularly when you are properly equipped for the task. Valkyrie: Jane Foster #9 was a mind-blowing experience for how she fought back against this infectious power, and how the end of one danger only made room for another much worse. This is not the book from Marvel to

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Vampironica #1

Mar 16, 2018

Vamperonica #1 is another book out there doing vampires right. I felt a real chill from understanding just how we could end up with Vampreronica in Riverdale. This is obviously one of those stories where the sky is the limit in what the creative team is able to do, and that seems to be when Archie Comics strikes gold.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Vampironica #2

May 30, 2018

Vamperonica #2 was a solid transition into the second life of Veronica. If she ever wants a chance at being the rich girl with normal ambitions, it starts with knowing her enemy and what that means in terms of returning to normal. Right now, this is the book you want on your pull-list if it is lacking horror that is different from what other publishers are offering. There wasn't a real scare from this very issue, but it got us to a point where the next issue we can look forward to bolder moves taken.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Vampironica #3

Sep 5, 2018

Vampironica #3 took some time to get around to, but four months didn't change what is so awesome about the world of Archie's take on vampires. They do not pull punches with the horror, the terror, or exactly what makes the introduction of vampirism in any form, a cause for alarm.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Vampironica #4

Oct 24, 2018

Vampironica #4 was an interesting execution of events for this siege of Riverdale. I do feel as though the siege could have been bigger, with a more memorable conclusion at the pool party, but this is undeniably leading to a development that is pretty cool for a story about vampires.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Vampironica #5

Dec 12, 2018

I unfortunately expected a bit more than what we got from the events of Vampironica #5. There was a lot they could have done to go out with a bang, and I hate to say that it felt like they played it safe with this story. For the most part this was still a thrilling twist to a version of Veronica that you would not see under different circumstances. I remain confident at the end of the day that I also look forward to what the future has in store for this Vampironica who still at the very least has a crossover story coming out next year.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Velvet #1

Oct 23, 2013

This book is highly recommended if you like noir stories with just as much story as action. Velvet has a strong start and shows a lot of potential down the road given what this issue leaves you with. Pick it up, enjoy it, and anticipate the next issue because Brubaker really has done it again with this complex heroine, giving her a voice and appealing direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Venom (2011) #35

May 31, 2013

It was a nice change to see them team up for a change. Of course they still hate each other, but they're still driven by the same goal to protect the innocent. The one thing about Eddie's story that really is interesting is that unlike everyone who has been infected by a symbiote, he controls it all on his own, his willpower saves him. He has shown that he will use Venom for good and do so to his last breathe, and is willing to throw his life away if he lost control. That's what a hero does, and that is the character Bunn has been trying to create.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Venom (2011) #36

Jun 14, 2013

Overall this story is progressively getting better and if there's one thing to take out of Cullen's approach to Venom, it's humanity. Flash's humanity of course and exploring that when the world around him isn't so sane.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Venom (2011) #37

Jul 4, 2013

Decent issue, definitely could have been better. I expected things to progress a bit faster, but too much time was wasted with the reporter just to simply ask her for help. It was made into something nigger than it really needed to be and it took away from the real conflict in finding Lord Ogre. Unless she's actually helping, I find Katy to be in the way. Hopefully that doesn't become a big issue down the road, but it also doesn't seem that

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #39

Aug 22, 2013

Solid issue that gave us something rare. You aren't going to see two Venoms on the same panel like that and this sets up for future team-ups between them.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Venom (2011) #40

Sep 5, 2013

Great build up, solid story, but brought down by lackluster artwork. Venom still has much to offer as it reaches the end of it's run and whatever happens next will be something worth anticipating because it looks as if something big will occur.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Venom (2011) #41

Sep 20, 2013

The one issue I find is that the characters look stiff. Symbiotes are supposed to feel free and unhinged when they are shapeshifting and what not, yet you see mainly with Mania that her movements look stiff and boring. Seeing more freedom in their actions would make things a lot more appealing if there was someone who knew how to handle them. Aside from this, the facial features again look simplistic to the point that it's distracting.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Venom (2011) #42

Oct 24, 2013

This may be the end, though sadly it's time has come. Hopefully if this story continues in a different capacity Mania is the main character, but after what Mephisto let them with, there's still reason for this story to be given another chance. With a better artist definitely, that much I'm sorry to say but George Coelho hasn't done much good for this book since coming in on art.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Vikings #1

Apr 27, 2016

Vikings #1 is an okay start for the comic series. Not perfect, but hopefully some of those rough edges will smooth out as the story progresses. The big thing as I can emphasize enough is that they stay true to the things fans and viewers of the show are familiar with. They are the ones this is catering to, and you can easily lose them if given anything less. Aside from this it was as entertaining and intense as should be.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Vikings #2

Jun 17, 2016

With Vikings #2 things are starting to pick up for the book compared to how it begun. Vikings #1 was a nice introduction, but the second issue is where this really starts to branch off to become its own thing. Nothing significant like character deaths you may look forward to, or feel shock for, though for everything else there is still now an element of surprise which holds up interest in this world-building.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Vikings #3

Aug 3, 2016

Overall Vikings #3 is still on the right track with the potential in these stories which is striking the proper balance between character and story development. Feels somewhat of a fast read, though there is not too much you can expect they will try to drag out of between moments.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Vikings #4

Aug 31, 2016

Vikings #4 brings Godhead to an end staying true to everything you love about Vikings now in comic book form. Hopefully whatever comes next will continue to bring something new to the table, though at the same time reach points where they can take more risks with characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Vikings vs. Unicorns #1

Apr 6, 2016

Vikings vs. Unicorns # 1 is something I think anyone can get into if they give it a chance. Good for a laugh and that makes any book like this worth paying attention to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Vision (2015) #7

May 12, 2016

Vision #7 continues to astound proving the kind of story you get when a creative team really is given this kind of room to make a story that will bring a tear to your eye, while making you cringe at what could happen next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Vision (2015) #8

Jun 9, 2016

‘Little Better Than a Beast' is a masterpiece in the making. You can call this an over-exaggeration, but when you truly invest yourself in this story it takes you places you wish most mainstream comics would. Vision #8 is where moves against the Visions begin, and for better or for worse things will escalate more than they already have before.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
Vision (2015) #9

Jul 14, 2016

Vision is the only Marvel book next to Weirdworld that can bring a tear to my eye. Vision #9 hit right where it hurt the most because the answer to what causes the Vision to lose it was not the answer you were prepared for. Again a masterpiece in the making because this is a family who has tried so hard to be normal and just when they were hanging by a thread it took a monumental loss to shatter that American dream.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Vision (2015) #10

Aug 11, 2016

By the end of Vision #10 I feel that I am left asking myself “Marvel why is this book so damn heartbreaking?”. Pardon my french I do say this in the best way possible, if people are talking about Vision then it is for how beautifully down to Earth this is. They are just like you and me, and it will be thrilling to see what happens when someone like Vision finds himself ready to look for justice for the sake of his family.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Wayward #1

Aug 26, 2014

Wayward #1 really is Buffy The Vampire Slayer for a new generation. For how many times Buffy is brought up in this review, that is not to say that they are copies of each other because they really are not. Jim Zub took a concept that connects us with supernatural tales on another level and made it his own. Wayward is fun, interesting, looks great and is easy to follow. Sure there are many questions we need answered before we are 100% understanding of the story, but there is good faith that the creative team for this series can pull it off.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wayward #2

Sep 24, 2014

This was a solid issue. Not too much happened though it seems that for now we might be taking more time to learn about what other supernatural mysteries lurk within Japan. Hopefully this will lead to more clarity as to what Rori can do and who Ayane is because if we are taking elements from Buffy, character development is everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wayward #8

May 27, 2015

Wayward #8 makes a lot of progress in a single issue. We know the fate of Rori and Shirai, and we see how far the others have come along since taking matters into their own hands. It's a big world, one full of mystery and it's fun when with every passing issue there is something new we learn.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wayward #9

Jun 24, 2015

This is indeed Images supernatural sensation because this creative team goes there and digs deep into that well of distinction which brings this world to life. At this point more than distinguishing itself from the influences of Buffy or Hellboy to dare give us a more thought out plot that continues to evolve in a short amount of time. You really wouldn't have guessed that by issue #9 we would be so far along that the stakes would feel so high.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Wayward #10

Jul 29, 2015

Wayward #10 is one of the more action packed issues in the series. Nothing was held back in showing what was at stake in this fight and that made it all the more intense. It really looked like a war and a good taste of what can be expected to come as these Yokai don't seem like the worst they will face.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Wayward #12

Dec 16, 2015

Wayward #12 gets back to why this series is an acclaimed supernatural spectacle. We got a lot of progress through some character development, an interesting twist that will shake things up going forward, and a conflict found with the points The Nurarihyon makes against the new gods and the chaos they bring with them.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Wayward #13

Jan 20, 2016

Wayward #13 aimed to start making some making some waves in this war and nailed it with the ramifications of picking the wrong fight. A lot is set up as well because there has been plenty of subplot with potential to be capitalized upon over time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wayward #14

Feb 24, 2016

Wayward #14 changes the direction and stakes of the fight in a big way. Just when we thought things were heading down a certain path, all it took was the right motivation to make us think again. This keeps the story fresh, and the characters from becoming stagnant.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.3
Wayward #15

Mar 29, 2016

Wayward #15 was explosive, it was war, and it flipped the world we knew on its head. If you thought you knew what to expect from Wayward from the events that take place in Japan? Boy does this end get the wheels turning in your head wondering where we go from here. Things won't ever be the same after this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Wayward #16

Sep 28, 2016

Wayward #16 is a great time for anyone who hasn't seen what's so great about Wayward to now join in on the adventure. The past is never truly just the past and the future is rich with potential for so much of the supernatural world that is yet to be explored. Tokyo Japan had its own power which fueled its inhabitants, so you have to wonder if the same can be said for Ireland.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Wayward #18

Nov 23, 2016

Wayward #18 takes us deeper into the dangers of this new path they have been set on where it seems the truth may be their strongest weapon to survive it. The Emerald Isle is dark and full of terrors, but it is also a treat to the eyes depending on your perspective.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wayward #19

Dec 28, 2016

With the conclusion of Wayward #19 big things do happen and the best thing is that the future is uncertain for anyone. This is unknown territory we are running into and anything can happen when the world is reacting so crazily to what these kids have unleashed through their actions. Wayward finds new ways each month to further our investment in this world, and this issue was no exception.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Wayward #20

Jan 27, 2017

Concluding another story arc, “Wayward” continues to find new ways each month to further our investment in this world, and this issue was no exception. Saving the world is easier said than done. This creative team pulls no punches in the sacrifices you face along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wayward #21

Jun 28, 2017

This new story arc opens us up to a stronger push into these kids taking on their roles as new gods. Up to this point they were strong, but they all had ways to go if they were to really stand up to this world where the old gods aren't willing to disappear without a fight. Wayward #21 finally takes us into what makes a kid like Nikaido powerful, and the end of this issue teases another who will find out what she can really do whether she wants to or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wayward #22

Jul 26, 2017

Now we are really getting somewhere by the end of Wayward #22. After everything gained and lost up to this point, now there has been meaning given to what Rori and company are fighting for, and what they have to fear if they do not succeed. There are still some big questions to be answered, but we come a long way with things that are answered and explained across the board. Especially when a lot of answers give us more insight into the Irish culture and lore.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wayward #23

Sep 20, 2017

We got some excellent character development from Wayward #23 as Ohara now proves to be just a much of a danger to herself as she can be in an offensive situation. Controlling her powers could make her the most useful asset in the group, but for now that is a big if with the way this issue concluded. I'm glad that this wasn't a situation dealt with so quickly. They clearly put thought into what she is capable of, with elements of fable/myth to back it up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Wayward #24

Oct 25, 2017

Wayward #24 was everything exciting that you could ask for from a journey into the unknown, but also painful when you now know the depths in madness that comes from a fight for magic. I mean who really won here? Because I can tell you who didn't and that was the toughest pill to swallow as we await the next issue that will pick up from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wayward #25

Nov 22, 2017

Fates tied together was a strong message they sent through this end to another story arc. They accomplished this beautifully by showing us what it means to actually understand destiny and defy it. Getting to where they are now was never going to be a walk in the park or without losses along the way. Wayward #25 blasted open the doors to what can be, what could be, and can still hold them back when the fight is far from over.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Wayward #26

Jun 20, 2018

Gut-wrenching is the right word to use for Wayward right now. Wayward continues to be that drama with teens that rescues you from all of the cliche. Issue #26 brings these kids together again, but only to challenge the things that keep them sane, and keep them on the right side of this war. The truth that the Yokai have hid about the Weavers was mind-blowing and could not have come at a better time.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wayward #27

Jul 25, 2018

If the events of Wayward #27 are any indication of what we have to look forward to from the final confrontation, then this will be one hell of a bloodbath. Right now I just love Wayward because this creative team embraces everything supernatural, buried in myth, and twisted about a teen adventure that slaps you with more than just emotional moments. The Nurarihyon and Ohara saw to that last part specifically in this issue.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
Wayward #28

Aug 29, 2018

Wayward #28 throws everyone right into the fray, and I don't think there has been a bigger stage then now for either success or failure. This issue laughs in the face of anyone who was really hyped up for a turnaround, but even then this remains a story where you expect the unexpected. Especially when there's still one special element introduced that can still shake things up.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Wayward #29

Sep 26, 2018

Wayward #29 will have you jumping for joy, going through the motions, and rooting for our heroes showing once more that they aren't to be underestimated. Its down to the wire, and again we expect the unexpected when both sides are willing to do just about anything to either preserve their future, or fight for a better one.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
We Are Robin #1

Jun 24, 2015

This creative team did just as advertised for We Are" Robin! #1. They created a story where these young ordinary teens turned heroes are more than sidekicks with the name Robin. They are an army and they are sending a message. For now we just have the gist of that message, but it is enough to get an idea as to what Duke Thomas will get himself mixed into.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
We Are Robin #3

Aug 27, 2015

We Are" Robin! #3 has some great pacing for a series involving so many new characters and moving plot pieces. It was full of action, suspense, emotion, and heartbreak. This creative team is holding nothing back as they should capturing the cost of being a hero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
We Are Robin #4

Sep 23, 2015

We Are" Robin! #4 took a different approach with a different member of the Robins that captures the heart of this series. At the core this is the experience we are looking for picking up a title that we want to make us care for as these new heroes could be somebody tomorrow.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
We Are Robin #5

Oct 28, 2015

We Are" Robin! #5 gets us back on track and raises the stakes for our heroes. There was always that fear that it would be hard to get to know all of these characters, but this creative team is progressively introducing us to who they are while showing evolution with the plot. A solid balance of character development and storytelling.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
We Are Robin #6

Nov 25, 2015

Is it worth the risk to wear the R? We Are" Robin! #6 answers that question and so much more when this is that point where you truly start to recognize the potential of this series and its characters.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
We Are Robin #9

Feb 25, 2016

We Are Robin #9 gets deep, personal, and borderline insane. Gotham is a mixed bag of possibilities, and the right focus was given to the lives people can live that doesn't always have to be as tragic as everyone makes it seem.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
We Are Robin #10

Mar 25, 2016

Things get real by the end of We Are Robin #10. The kind of plot and storytelling you come to expect from a street-level book like this. It's anything goes at this point when Duke, Riko, Dre and the rest will have to choose now whether they have any future as heroes again.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
We Are Robin #12

May 25, 2016

We Are Robin #12 has been perfect from start to finish. I do have to admit that I didn't read much of the tie-in to Robin Wars because of feelings towards crossovers, but that aside you couldn't have asked for a more genuine story told about what it means to be a hero in a world where regular people sometimes have to take a stand for what they believe is right and just.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Weapon H #8

Oct 4, 2018

As they said, for fans of PLANET HULK and Marvel Studios' Thor: Ragnarok, this was a time to rejoice for the return of the stone man Korg. If you are someone like me, then there's the added rejoicing of Weirdworld being incorporated into this story. This issue didn't have much action, but it more than made up for this with excellent character writing and dialogue before the journey into craziness begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Weapon H #9

Oct 17, 2018

Weapon H #9 so far has been worth the adventure into Weirdworld. This issue was action-packed, fun, and full of twists at every corner when dealing with Roxxon.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Weapon H #10

Nov 21, 2018

Weapon H #10 really dug into the mind of Clay when he is given too many choices to make from untrustworthy characters. This mission could have gone south in many ways, but the moment they actually chose was the best way to keep us on our toes about what comes next.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Weapon H #11

Dec 19, 2018

It was very hard to see how this situation could improve for Weapon H and company before Weapon H #11. Morgan Le Fay had her army, she had her Hulk, and she was more than ready to do whatever it takes to assure her reclamation of Weirdworld from the likes of Dario Agger. How our heroes fought back was everything you could have hoped for and more when not every solution includes who can hit hardest.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Weapon H #12

Jan 30, 2019

Weapon H #12 was a perfect conclusion to a story that leaves you wanting to see more of Weapon H, Clay, and Sonia. Heck, I wouldn't mind seeing a lot of these characters again. This creative team made every character appearance stick with you from start to finish. Weapon H stands out because this book found consistency in giving is adventure, a personal journey, action, and what a real marriage looks like in this line of work.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Weird Detective #1

Jun 16, 2016

Weird Detective #1 is exciting new story for all the otherworldly things happening in this world that this one Detective will tackle for the sake of saving his own people. For a miniseries that kicked off in a big way making sure that we knew exactly what is in store for us. Already having issues done in advance also helps. The best reason why the Dark Horse Presents anthology is not something to overlook.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Weird Detective #2

Jul 22, 2016

Transitioning into Weird Detective #2 this is definitely a mini series from Dark Horse that you want to be following. It has all the makings of a good horror crime story that will keep you guessing. It's fun, creative and these are characters you want to learn more about as they learn about each other for better or for worse.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Weirdworld (2015) #1

Dec 16, 2015

Wierdworld #1 is a page turner for a first issue. It was sad to see the reason why Becca even got on that plane in the first place. Unfortunate the way in which she had to come to terms with her current situation. However it will be exciting to continue this adventure through Wierdworld and all the things new that we won't see coming till it does.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Weirdworld (2015) #2

Jan 8, 2016

Weirdworld #2 gets serious as Becca's life hangs in the balance, plays with the idea of hope, and establishes character motivations for all involved in this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Weirdworld (2015) #3

Feb 11, 2016

Weirdworld #3 is another action-packed, fun, and engaging chapter in Becca's adventures to return home. The cast of this title has been a treat, and that goes for Morgan Le Fey herself whose story has been a slow crawl, but appealing nonetheless when you want to see how far she will go for her own goals.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Weirdworld (2015) #4

Mar 11, 2016

Weirdworld #4 got very personal. Hit some topics people can relate to while creating a true obstacle for our heroes so to speak. Whatever comes next, we move forward with a stronger motivation for this group to complete their quest. Not to mention a stronger mindset for whatever else this world will throw at them(or Morgan Le Fay).

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Weirdworld (2015) #5

Apr 13, 2016

Weirdworld #5 is where the stakes have been raised, and more depth from this plot created where the fate of Weirdworld matters regardless of personal intentions or desires.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Weirdworld (2015) #6

May 25, 2016

Weirdworld #6 played with your emotions, cranked the dial to 11 and opened our eyes to many things that weren't clear up till now. We are reaching that climax, and it still feels like there's so much we are going to have to prepare ourselves for before this ends.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Welcome Back #1

Aug 19, 2015

We(l)come Back #1 is a unique take on a familiar concept. Reincarnated assassins who are forever fighting, killing, and loving each other throughout endless lives. What's more to love about that? This of course is a title worth giving a shot because Christopher Sebela is one of those new writers that has shown the potential to create that next hit story. We(l)come Back definitely has potential for a mini series and you want to see just where this story can go knowing how the cycle always end for people like our main characters Mali and Tessa.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
What If? AVX #1

Jul 4, 2013

For those who didn't like Avengers Vs X-Men, I say pick this book up. It may not have a direct effect on the main story, but it's the story that you deserve because for the most part the original was lackluster. When someone tells you that the end is more important than the content, in this case the content will be just as important because I believe it is in capable hands. Being What If, we are left guessing what actions will be taken and just seeing the different choices some of the characters made in this issue made me believe that this war could go any way possible given the library of heroes who took part and their views on this situation. Whatever happens next this book is worth following.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
What If? AVX #2

Jul 18, 2013

A great transition into the second issue and it certainly has delivered on being a What If. Hopefully Palmoitti can keep this momentum strong or even turn it up next issue as we can only assume that there will be destruction and much more lost before anything good comes out of Hope being possessed by the Phoenix Force.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.7
What If? AVX #3

Jul 25, 2013

Another solid issue, where even though you could possibly worry about how the story ends, you know that with the next issue being the conclusion it will be something big. No one is safe this time around and that creates a sense of urgency for everyone. It's a great way to shake things up and I can only hope that this story pulls through in the end to become something memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
What If? AVX #4

Aug 1, 2013

For a What If story, and one of which we haven't gotten in a long while, I can say this was satisfying. It took a different route, Jimmy Palmoitti didn't pull any punches involving losses of either X-Men or Avengers either. When presented with this kind of twist of a story you always want to toy with the impossible and that is what happened here. I did not see many things coming even though I was aware of the intentions. Sure much of it was for shock value, though I expect no less. Solid issue for a conclusion.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
William Gibson's Alien 3 #1

Nov 14, 2018

I'm not going to lie that I was unsure about the way that William Gibson's Alien 3 #1 would grab me. I always want to like an Aliens story, but this one for me was during a time where someone like me would have to go back and watch the previous movie just to feel up to date on what's unfolding. Fortunately I think this script made it easy to jumping into the next chapter knowing simply what makes it dangerous to cross paths with this alien threat and people who have no business trying to weaponize it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
William Gibson's Alien 3 #2

Dec 12, 2018

William Gibson's Alien 3 #2 was a solid transition for this book. I got to the end feeling a lot more confidence in what this story has to offer than I initially did after the first issue. There was a lot of talking that might lose some readers, but if that isn't you there was plenty to be captivated by knowing where everyone now stands.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
William Gibson's Alien 3 #3

Jan 9, 2019

William Gibson's Alien 3 #3 was a big step up from the first two issues. Not because they were bad, but because something has started happened. Wheels have begun turning and the pacing has been cranked up. The ball has got rolling as well when greed and curiosity has thrust us into the dangers of crossing path with Xenomorphs. Now the only question is who will adapt to the situation, and who will fall prey to this unwelcome guest?

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
William Gibson's Alien 3 #4

Feb 13, 2019

William Gibson's Alien 3 #4 keeps us on the right track with this story that is consistently climbing in urgency and danger. Now that the stakes are set, everything came down to what these characters are willing to do to both survive and do what's best for anyone else who might be at risk of exposing themselves to the Xenomorph threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
Witchblade (2017) #1

Dec 6, 2017

Witchblade #1 was a solid start to a new vessel to this host. Alex Underwood is a character who hasn't seemed to have the best luck in making a big difference, but with the power she is now granted, maybe that luck will turn around? For better or for worse her life has changed completely. From here it is all about seeing what Alex does with this power and this threat that would love nothing more than to see her dead before she becomes too strong.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Wolverine and the X-Men #28

Apr 27, 2013

In the end not only did the students grow up to an extent, but Wolverine did as well as he confronted his brother. He chose not to fight while his brother only wanted to fight like the dog he is, so to speak. He felt that he deserved everything Wolverine had, but he did nothing to earn it and his approach came off childish which is a comparison Aaron did well. Aaron did right by ending this story in a way that leaves room for arching stories between the Hellfire Club and Wolverine's relationship with the student which is now very weak.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Wolverine and the X-Men #29

May 20, 2013

As usual we can tell that something big is coming. The Hellfire Club is proving to be calling in the big guns as now they have added Idie and Dog, who killed his father for striking him in the previous issue, to their arsenal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Wolverine and the X-Men #30

May 31, 2013

The art was the real standout among many other aspects of this issue. The combined work of Ferry, Larraz, and Espin made this book look clean. When I first picked up this book I was a bit scared about how the interior would look based on the cover. The cover just didn't grab me and almost made me put it back down, but the interior made you want to read it. This was possibly the best artwork done in this series to date.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.1
Wolverine and the X-Men #31

Jun 14, 2013

The art was a bit disappointing given how well it was for the prequel. Most of it felt consistent, but you notice those small inconsistencies like with Mystique's appearance and facial expressions.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Wolverine and the X-Men #36

Sep 26, 2013

While it was pretty obvious that there is more to the supposed future X-Men's story than what's on the surface, it's great that a second story was able to develop as to finding out what it is. I mean what's the harm in more time jumping when time is already broken right? Well now everything is not as it seems, and where we thought we may have been getting some answers, we are left with more questions that should eventually lead to what the main point of this plot. We just have to hope that this crossover can maintain the momentum it's building now because anything less could be harmful and of course interest might be lost given something this big is a gamble.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.8
Wolverine and the X-Men #37

Oct 24, 2013

With the Brotherhood's Plan A squashed, and turning to their far more sinister Plan B on the grounds of the X-Men's first clash with Magneto, things have quickly taken a turn for the worst. If that is what they consider tough love, then their future must really be as bad as they make it seem. I mean we saw Dazzler die, but that was about it.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
Wolverine: Japan's Most Wanted #1

Jul 10, 2013

For a Wolverine book, this is actually one I can say I want to follow. You can't say that for many books focused on him, but Jason Aaron managed to make this one more than just action. It's story driven and it pushes Wolverine into situations where he's out of his comfort zone. Who knows what the end to this issue will lead to, but just knowing that he will become Japan's most wanted can't be good for him. This is a great book to break into Marvel Infinite and makes you hopeful for whatever else they produce.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
Wonder Twins (2019) #1

Feb 13, 2019

Through the events of this first issue, Wonder Twins #1 has given us a brand new way to look at Zan and Jayna. They are more than their signature costumes, and much more than what is mocked about their powers. All of us should be able to look forward to what this new adventure has in store for these two twins who offer down to Earth experiences that you would be crazy to sleep on.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
Wonder Twins (2019) #4

May 8, 2019

Wonder Twins #4 gave us a fun twist to date night. Many things can go wrong, and this creative team got bold with the situations Jayne, Zan, and Polly got themselves into. It was commendable that at the same time they were able to also get in some solid character development for a character you didn't expect to hold as much relevance as she has so far.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Twins (2019) #6

Jul 10, 2019

When you picked up that first issue of Wonder Twins, I don't think that you ever got the impression that we would get this deep into the meaning of justice. There's something to recognize about a story which actually embraces a real conversation about right versus wrong. It's never that clear-cut as you think it is. It only pains me that we will have to wait till September to see where this story takes the Wonder Twins next from here.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Wonder Woman (2011) #21

Jun 22, 2013

Overall this is Wonder Woman. You get the action, the banter which flows, and mythology that is appealing to follow. The art work by Cliff Chiang showed everything from the emotion, battle scars, just made the battles alone pop out more than they already did. You felt like there were a bunch of powerhouses throwing down. This issue shows why among the many DC titles out there, this is a must read.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wonder Woman (2011) #22

Jul 17, 2013

It's issues like this that makes me agree with the consensus that Wonder Woman is one of the best that DC has to offer. Brian Azzarello really shows his understanding of Wonder Woman and her lore. Personally I found myself very drawn in when Highfather was explaining what New Genesis. I wouldn't say it's just because of this part here that made me appreciate the mythological aspects more, the accompaniment of the style made it look so exciting. Though it was a step down from all the action leading up to this issue, the context I find to be very important here. That and the ending makes you really want to know how they get out of this situation they find themselves in as they confront the First Born.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
Wonder Woman (2011) #23

Aug 21, 2013

This was an epic tale of storytelling which I think many books out there should mimic. There's no need for something over-the-top, or just there for shock. Wonder Woman has found that balance which breeds consistent quality that you just can't ignore. This is one book from the New 52 that you have to be reading at this moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Wonder Woman (2011) #24

Oct 17, 2013

Solid issue that really takes advantage of the kind of person Wonder Woman is. Great balance between her real life and life as a God, something that gives this story depth beyond the myths. Though once again both will clash as Diana's choice to avoid her responsibilities as God of War have now forced the others to consider an Olympus without one. Not only this but having evoked the wrath of War's sister who wants her head. So much potential for this new story and we'll see if Diana can really turn away from her new path.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2011) #25

Nov 20, 2013

Another solid issue of Wonder Woman. Not too much going on, but this was an interesting set up for what is to come next. Wonder Woman's life has changed forever since killing War, she had no choice, though now she has another to make that will determine her future as a new God. This issue focuses more on her normal life than that as a God, given she doesn't want to replace War. She has evoked the wrath of War's sister who wants her head, and now her plan has been set into motion for her revenge. So much potential for this new story and we'll see if Diana can survive what is really a fight on two fronts, both unexpected.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Wonder Woman (2011) #26

Dec 18, 2013

If you read this for any reason it is because Azzarello means to tell a story. Action aside which can be exciting, he focuses on these characters to make them more than they seem on the surface. Self sacrifice, family, the mythic nature of it all is handled in a way that you forget that they are even gods in their own right to enjoy them as people trying to do the right thing. Especially Diana as you see her question her decisions as everything has a consequence given past occurrences and losses.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wonder Woman (2011) #27

Jan 22, 2014

This issue is exciting because you see everyone making their moves. Cassandra and Wonder Woman doing what they have to for what they want the most. Wonder Woman in particular when she takes a challenge that turns out to be the highlight of this issue for how intense it became. Here we see how Wonder Woman is as smart as she looks and that is something you like to be emphasized when others might expect her to be the one to always be ready to jump into the fray. Visually as well which is not to say is any different from the rest of the book which is always done consistently. Everything mythological or supernatural sticks out and brings out the tone of those situations these characters find themselves in. Specifically such as the time spent between First Born and Apollo.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wonder Woman (2011) #28

Feb 20, 2014

This is the issue where you feel the most drawn in. The First Born is more determined than ever to claim his birthright, Cassandra is making progress, then Wonder Woman and her friends are still trying their best to keep up as there is a stake for everyone in this fight. Making sure there is a clear motivation for these characters is what keeps it strong.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Wonder Woman (2011) #29

Mar 19, 2014

Amazing issue of Wonder Woman, delivery, impact, and ending. Never have I anticipated the next issue to come more than right now. Azzarello really knew what he was doing constructing the way things played out up to now. Wonder Woman has been turned into a character that you can look up to for the choices she makes, and the way you relate to the situations she finds herself in. The way Diana has been humanized has done nothing but wonderful things for the potential she now holds. There really is no questioning right now why Wonder Woman is one of the best books out there from DC.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wonder Woman (2011) #30

Apr 17, 2014

Wonder Woman #30 delivered on what you like most about this series, it continues to remain down to Earth. In the midst of everything surreal and mythological, Brian Azzarello manages to make sure that you don't forget that these are all people, even if some prove themselves to be less than such. Seeing Wonder Woman as more than a God or Queen is very helpful to bringing out the best in her supporting cast. Whatever comes next, I would like to pick up issue #31 seeing that the intensity can pick up without losing the consistent characterization we've been given throughout.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Wonder Woman (2011) #31

May 21, 2014

With the conclusion to Wonder Woman #31, it's obvious that things are going to get worse before they get any better. The Amazons have new allies, they had their squabble about the future they want to step into, and they all see just how far of a reach the Firstborn has grabbed for power. It may be too far for any other person to jump in or catch up if far behind, but if you are following this book issue to issue, expect as I that this is shaping up to be something memorable.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Wonder Woman (2011) #32

Jun 18, 2014

Wonder Woman #32 is pretty much the beginning of the end for a fight that was inevitable since the start. What better way to show how serious this is than to bring Gods, Amazons, and the Sons of the Amazons together fighting for the same cause? It's hard to say that this will ever happen again, and if it did it wouldn't be for a long time after. What comes after this is uncertain, but it's clear by the looks on everyone's faces that the moment has come whether they are ready or not.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
Wonder Woman (2011) #33

Jul 23, 2014

Wonder Woman #33 marks the beginning of the end as writer Brian Azzarello and artist Cliff Chiang kick off the astonishing finale of their epic run. This issue again was more of a build up, but it certainly leaves you wanting to see what happens next. This is a family that must band together to save each other from certain doom, figure out who can pick them up from the ashes, and that person will have to be trusted to rule with decency and justice. That is why we should see this series through to the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wonder Woman (2011) #34

Oct 1, 2014

Wonder Woman #34 marks the beginning of the end for this tale, and on the note we left off on in this issue you can tell things are going to get dire as we see our heroes endgame in action. The only fear at this moment is wondering if everything can be covered by the end of the next issue. We have been given no reason to feel disappointed up to this point, though how this tale ends is crucial to how this whole run will be remembered as we move on to a new creative team in issue #36.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Wonder Woman (2011) #35

Oct 30, 2014

Wonder Woman #35 speaks to humanity that you must keep with you at all times. Even in the face of trials that might demand of you to cast it away. That is what made Wonder Woman likable, and the entire supporting cast who stood by her side. Sure the fate of the rest is still up in the air, but what you see from all of them, start to finish is admirable. The creative team to come next has a lot of work cut out for them considering the direction they wish to take Wonder Woman.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.9
Wonder Woman (2011) #36

Nov 20, 2014

Wonder Woman #36 has the potential, though has a long way to go in order to live up to what came before. In general more Diana, more Amazon's and more everything that should be in this title that you don't already get in Justice League or Superman Wonder Woman.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Wonder Woman (2011): Futures End #1

Sep 17, 2014

Wonder Woman – Futures End #1 was solid aside from those few things pointed out above, though it obviously could have been better. Pick it up if you are reading Superman/Wonder Woman or if you have the money to pick up both since Futures End tie-ins don't require that much investment in them. Definitely pick it up if you like the interior art because that is the selling point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman (2016) #1

Jun 22, 2016

Wonder Woman #1 is a solid start. There wasn't too much to take from it that's significant, though as a follow-up from the Rebirth issue there is direction to this story. Hopefully the same can be said for Etta and Trevor's part with issue #2. Aside from this the end of the issue gives you something to look forward to which is all that matters for a new release.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
Wonder Woman (2016) #3

Jul 27, 2016

Wonder Woman #3 is a step up from the first issue and a good sign for the direction the present storyline is taking as long as we are not held up too much by the things we don't fully comprehend. Good writing followed by improving artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
Wonder Woman (2016): Witching Hour #1

Oct 3, 2018

Wonder Woman & Justice League Dark: Witching Hour #1 changes the landscape for this fight for the future of magic in a big way. Expect the unexpected when it will take more than magical solutions to solve these magical problems. It will also take a miracle. Especially Wonder Woman and Justice League Dark have to depend on a power that they do not grasp. Now I don't know how I feel about also having to pick up another ongoing series to continue this story, but so far it is worth the extra addition to my reading list.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Wonder Woman: Rebirth #1

Jun 8, 2016

Wonder Woman: Rebirth #1 is mostly set-up, and sort of a fast read as well, though gets you excited for all the right reasons when nothing will stand between Diana and finding out who is behind the twisting of her tale. This issue gives us the idea that unlike others, she will be more proactive in finding answers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
WWE #1

Jan 18, 2017

An impressive start for WWE #1 as well. If you've been following a lot of BOOM! Studios' licensed books up to now then there wasn't much to fear about how this first issue would turn out. This was the right creative team to make sure of that too. The name of the game is entertainment, and this was entertaining from start to finish.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
WWE: Then. Now. Forever #1

Nov 9, 2016

WWE: Then. Now. Forever.#1 lived up to the hype without a doubt by indeed capturing that versatility and diversity of WWE throughout its various eras. Overall best step to take in order for readers to want to anticipate that release of WWE #1 in January with no fear of BOOM! Studios doing this franchise justice.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X #10

Feb 12, 2014

In general this was another fun issue because while there is progression, every issue of X gives you something new with a different focus. Tango being the villain and giving X a reason to let loose knowing that this army Tango has released upon the streets after staging a citywide blackout to loot the city shows no restraint to innocents that end up in their way. This book continues to show how much it offers in terms of action, having a hero who would do what none other would dare or take things to such an extreme.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X #11

Mar 12, 2014

Overall, there is no taking a break for X and Leigh as things continue to pick up in intensity. Great ending as well which gives you good reason to pick up the next issue to find out Leigh's fate. Things aren't looking good for her, and you want to see just what Duane has up his sleeve to show us just how serious this is for the both of them. Another high-octane issue of X that displays the lengths people will go for power in the face of those who will go to greater lengths to stop the corruption.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
X #12

Apr 9, 2014

X #12 really shows you the type of friends X makes when he decides that he wants to take the fight to everyone who stands for what he's “now” against. The way that this issue ends just leaves you with so many questions because you know nothing good can come out of what decisions X is left to make with how that fight ended. Not to mention what he will have to face once faced with that stab that comes from a friend. This is a game changer for the series and one you wouldn't want to miss if already following this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X #13

May 14, 2014

X #13 surely gives you every reason to like X as a hero and monster. It's not about what he does, or what he can do, it's all about what X stands for. Arcadia is his city and he won't fail it twice. Now with all the Project Black Sky talk, I want to start to see where X will fit into this world as a part of the bigger picture. I see that teased, but there's no solid direction as to where X is going that will take him to that point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X #14

Jun 11, 2014

The way X #14 ends really was a powerful statement made by X, from him to everyone else. You reach that point and can't help but see how easy it is for the tides to shift in another's favor. If you were to imagine a fight for a city on the brink of collapse, this is certainly how I would envision it. That and having a one man army like X leading the charge in Arcadia's defense.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X #15

Jul 9, 2014

X #15 ends on a note where the fate of our hero is up in the air. It's been an uphill battle since Carmine entered the fray and no different when Mr. Winter did the same. How he will get himself out of this situation we definitely want to figure out because we can always be assured things will get messy.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X #16

Aug 13, 2014

X #16 didn't have the end to Better Off Dead you might expect, but it was a crazy ride nonetheless. This is Arcadia for you, power-hungry mobsters, a vigilante with questionable sanity, and everything in between that makes you question just what makes this city so special that the worst is always yet to storm by. The fight between X and Winter may have come to a close, but hopefully that isn't the last we see of Winter when there are things about this man that makes you very curious. And not just about his freakish strength.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X #17

Sep 10, 2014

X #17 is the best time to jump into this series as a new reader, and a great time to get back to the basic methods of X as he continues his fight to keep crime off the streets of Arcadia.The end proves that there is something bigger at work that should reveal itself in time, and that is more than enough reason to stick with X to see what these new players have in store.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X #18

Oct 8, 2014

X #18 is just another example of how Dark Horse takes risks with their books. Many of them are dark, and they don't waste your time sugarcoating those stories with anything less. While X is not your conventional hero, there is no denying that his brand of heroism gets the job done. You can compare him to Wolverine, but that would never be true when X takes full advantage of what he can live through, which is a lot.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
X #19

Nov 12, 2014

Now this isn't even getting to the last page which sends shivers down your spine when you realize that out of all this madness a new monster has been created and released unto the streets.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X #20

Dec 10, 2014

X #20 puts an end to the Skin Traders and their psycho leader, Dr. Heide. A gruesome and yet exciting story that you would not forget simply because that is almost as real as you can get when you want to show how deep corruption can go in a city that is the farthest thing from safe. You know how the end result will be, though what you take from this is the thrilling ways in which X pulls all stops and resources to get the job done. Not to mention with 3 words at the end many Project Black Sky fans will want to start reading X if not already.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X #21

Jan 14, 2015

X #21 is another start to a story you don't want to miss when X finds himself facing forces he doesn't know how to fight against. We've moved beyond just simply fighting street gangs, robbers, skin traders, mobsters, drug dealers, and arm dealers. The conclusion of this issue takes things to a whole new level.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
X #22

Feb 11, 2015

X #22 brings about the conclusion of Marked For Death, and with the return of The Archon comes the lowest that Arcadia has ever fallen. What comes next is mostly unknown, though what we do know is that when Captain Midnight enters the story, things have truly escalated. Which is saying a lot with the state that Arcadia and X is left in at the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X #23

Mar 11, 2015

X #23 is a solid start to what will be a new direction for X as he tries to rebuild a city that already a mess in corruption before The Mark and the Archon arrived.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
X #24

Apr 8, 2015

X #24 hits you with twists that you might appreciate more than any given in the series so far. Who knows what comes next after this issue, though one thing is certain that we are breaking new grounds.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X Of Swords (2020): Creation #1

Sep 23, 2020

All in all, X Of Swords: Creation #1 did a lot for me as a reader who still needed to see more to complete that investment in the event. If you thought this run of X-Men was ambitious, Hickman jumped into this event telling you to hold his beer.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X-23 (2018) #1

Jul 11, 2018

X-23 #1 is a strong debut for Laura and Gabby carving out their own path. Where Wolverine and others have slacked off fighting back the manipulation of mutant genes, this series now addresses that problem again with greater importance. Everything about X-23 and Honey Badger was fun, be it their personality or love for doing what they do best.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-23 (2018) #2

Jul 25, 2018

X-23 #2 adds more direction to this plot as now we have a good idea as to where this is all leading up to. I wouldn't hope for the worst to come to the Stepford Cuckoos, but it is tragic to see that there is no mutant clone out there who isn't affected by what it means to live that hollow life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
X-23 (2018) #3

Aug 31, 2018

Why I really wanted to make sure I had a review out for this book, is because this series couldn't happen without amazing book put out by Tom Taylor previously. When some ungrateful comic readers refuse to acknowledge what this book and many others have to offer the rest of us, the opportunity needs to be taken to drown out that negativity. Especially when X-23 #3 is yet another exciting issue with so much at stake between Laura, Gabby, and the Stepford Cuckoos.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-23 (2018) #4

Sep 12, 2018

X-23 #4 was a fast read, but it was one heck of a roller coaster for these sisters who are fighting to keep their loved one alive and kicking. I fear for Gabby, but I also fear for the Stepford Cuckoos. They aren't united, they're not all unkillable, and they've knocked on the door of the wrong monster.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
X-23 (2018) #5

Oct 10, 2018

X-23 #5 brings this story arc to a close, and I do have to say that when all is said and done that this had been a bold story to tell. While the focus on clones was uniquely taken from Laura, Gabby, and the Stepford Cuckoos, this at the same time changes the direction of the Stepford Cuckoos dramatically. They've always been characters who come and go to help under special circumstances, but where do they go from here? What kind of life will they live now that they have made such a poor decision? Only time will tell, but for now this story was engaging for what it was.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-23 (2018) #6

Nov 7, 2018

X-23 #6 was a one and done story that was worth telling if you wanted to see Gabby where she shines best. I'm impressed that even though this series is called X-23, liberties are taken to make sure that we are getting the best of both worlds from Laura and Gabby. Their dynamic and bond is what we invest in.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-23 (2018) #7

Dec 13, 2018

X-23 #7 is an excellent start to the new story arc. We are back to familiar ground for this duo, but all the same the story carries the same heart that has kept you engaged in their lives as clone sisters from the start.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
X-Factor (2005) #255

May 2, 2013

The art was solid and had a dark tone which matched the end of the world tone of this story arc.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
X-Factor (2005) #256

May 20, 2013

If anything the ending to this story sold it all. Guido doing the most humane thing he could as someone who lost his soul. He damned himself to be King of Hell, and just to save Monet. Someone who mocked him for having no soul, blamed him for things out of his control, and tried to kill him when she assumed he was her enemy. It was a great story arc from beginning to end, and you can only anticipate the fallout from these events. Rahne has to deal with her son's death, Monet has to deal with her resurrection, and we don't know if Jamie is back to normal.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-Force (2018) #1

Dec 26, 2018

X-Force #1 was a solid start for the series. I was hoping for a bit more from the confrontation with Cable, but all good things do still come in time. This first issue was a satisfying set-up from what we can expect from this murderous bunch, and for establishing where Cable stands in the current state of the MU.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Force (2019) #1

Nov 6, 2019

Menace and mayhem don't just await you in this debut issue of X-Force for the Dawn of X, it slaps you in the face with the reality that there is still a world out there to protect themselves from. X-Force exists because Orchis is the least of mutantkind's problems. Not every danger will be one that the X-Men can fly out and take care of, they can be like this new enemy who made the bold decision to take the fight to Krakoa. X-Force #1 lived up to the hype where there had to be that one X-Book which took us to that dark place.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Force (2019) #3

Dec 13, 2019

After this issue, X-Force has now jumped up to a must-read title from the Dawn of X books. Being bold enough to have Xavier killed at the end of the first issue was definitely a clever way of keeping us coming back for more, but what creates investment is seeing how the writing tries to captivate us through more than shock value. X-Force #3 introduced us to a major new enemy, once again set the stakes for mutantkind, and emphasized how these aren't the same mutants who would have once ran back licking their wounds.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Force (2019) #5

Jan 8, 2020

By the end of X-Force #4, it was easy to say that this isn't a book that you should sleep on. This isn't the same kind of X-Force you usually deal with, yet at the same time they are still doing what they do best. The only difference is that there is a little bit of conscience in the motivation driving this war machine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Force (2019) #6

Jan 29, 2020

Overall, this was another engaging issue of X-Force which gave us the right kind of exposure to the function of this team. Now we understand their structure better, and where intelligence plays the biggest role in being different from every other version of this team we have gotten up to this point. Not to mention, this may be the best writing we have gotten out of Beast in a good long while.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Force (2019) #9

Mar 18, 2020

It's back to work for X-Force, but facing a threat which apparently was not fully dealt with before. X-Force #9 was the full package for the shock, the character development, asking the right questions about the direction of this team, and once more giving us a story where these mutants are doing the work that no one else can handle in their position.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Force (2019) #10

Jul 8, 2020

We're back with X-Force, and this issue was worth the wait for the conversation that these mutants were not ready to have about their choices, and their responsibility as part of this team.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Force (2019) #11

Aug 14, 2020

Overall, X-Force #11 offered the kind of story you want to see more often from this book. When you can't replication processes and technology the same as the mutants? You end up with the madness the mutants are now dealing with on their doorstep. I only hope that the lead into Swords of X connections doesn't distract from what good this book has going for it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.5
X-Force (2019) #12

Sep 9, 2020

Well they didn't lie. After the events of X-Force #12, the first drumbeats of war have begun to sound.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Force (2019) #14

Nov 18, 2020

Overall, not a bad issue of X-Force, though as a chapter to X of Swords? Unfortunately it left much to be desired.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Force (2019) #16

Jan 20, 2021

X-Force #16 was just the kind of issue I needed to jump back into this book. And this issue did right by us for the opportunity taken to question just how appreciative the mutants should be for a paradise that can kill them just as easily as an outside threat.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
X-Men (2013) #1

May 30, 2013

Coipel's art for the book as well fits the story. The facial expressions from each character was well done. As women you feel as though there's nothing really making that statement which is a good thing. The flashy poses and what not are unnecessary and for the good of the book not there, something to appreciate about Coipel's art direction.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
X-Men (2013) #2

Jun 27, 2013

It's another solid issue for this new team of X-Men, and shows that this book has the potential to be something great. Brian Wood shows to have a capable grasp of all the characters this plot is centered around. It ended on shocking cliffhanger that leaves you wondering what Wood has up his sleeve because it is not an encouraging sight for anyone at the school, let alone anyone in the proximity of that device as it hits zero.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-Men (2013) #3

Aug 2, 2013

I do have to say that I expected a bigger confrontation with Akrea, even see exactly what Karima did to herself, but can't have everything. Overall it was a great conclusion to the introduction of what could be a great team. They have the dynamic, motivation, and this book is already impressive for bringing back some characters that we have felt were neglected up to this point. Hopefully some of those characters and students have more time to shine in the near future.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
X-Men (2013) #4

Aug 22, 2013

We have definitely been taken back to school. And while that's all we'll get of this experience as X-Men heads into Battle of The Atom, we can only hope that Woods shifts back to this kind of storytelling because no matter how far the Marvel Universe expands or grows, no school is better than the old school.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-Men (2013) #5

Sep 12, 2013

Another great issue and this crossover event shows to have that pacing required to make readers want to pick up the varying books despite it being something many speak out for disliking the need to. Everything is coming full circle throughout the X-Men titles and no stone is left unturned as their progress holds some meaning to the effectiveness of this story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-Men (2013) #6

Oct 10, 2013

Very entertaining issue as the fake future X-Men are finally revealed. Some twists were revealed even if a bit obvious and it's all great to see now that things are reaching an end with three issues left. We can only hope that there is enough room to flesh out a proper ending knowing that much time was spent with a focus on whether the original X-Men should go back rather than them taking action.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men (2019) #1

Oct 16, 2019

If you are going to pick up any of the new X-Books to make up this Dawn of X? Make sure that X-Men #1 is number one on your list. This book gave us a proper introduction into this new world of possibility. We got to see some of the new team, the new personalities to some of our favorite X-Men, more of Krakoa that we didn't see before, and the enemies we should brace ourselves for. It's a brave new world for the X-Men! And never before has those words stood more true.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men (2019) #2

Nov 13, 2019

By the end of X-Men #2, this was not at all what you would have expected from a core X-book. Not a problem either when Hickman continues doing what others aren't daring enough to do with these mutants, or with this mutant nation. This new island mattered, but so did Krakoa. It was a welcomed surprise to see what connection could be drawn between these two islands which brings us back to the discoveries we made not too long ago about Krakoa's past.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #3

Dec 5, 2019

Overall, the idea was great for what unfolded in X-Men #3. Where they missed the mark was the impact that we should have gotten from this visually. Something is going to have to change moving forward considering that this is the core X-Men title for Dawn of X. Though if we are looking at this for what it is? There was still some entertainment to take from getting an example of the kind of danger that can hit these from left field. They clearly have not prepared for everything.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #5

Jan 29, 2020

All in all, X-Men #5 was worth the wait for the new danger set-up through this chapter, and the return of X-Men who truly are too much of difference-makers to ever be forgotten in the Dawn of X.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men (2019) #6

Feb 12, 2020

If anyone had any doubts about the detour we took with this issue, rest assured that by the end of this issue you will find that X-Men #6 is a game changer. To Mystique goes to extraordinary lengths to get what she wants was one heck of an understatement. You would not have expected one like this so soon in the story, but here this creative team is dropping it right on our laps. Mystique has set a dangerous game in motion, and one which could have been prevented if there were not so much mystery behind a future for mutantkind so few have seen with their own eyes.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men (2019) #7

Feb 26, 2020

With legitimacy given to the Resurrection Protocols, this creative team could have chosen a better time to jump into what other ways the Krakoans take advantage of this life they have been given where death is meaningless, and yet meaningful at the same time. For that, X-Men #7 came out as one of the most compelling issues of the series so far. There is nothing to be lost from spending issues like this further exploring what life is like for all mutants on this paradise.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #8

Mar 12, 2020

If it's not hate groups trying to get a piece of the pie, apparently there's always a chance of Brood raining from the sky! X-Men #8 marked the start of something exhilarating. When you create a problem which involved the Shi'ar, Imperial Guard, and Brood? You go big or go home. This creative team went big for what madness the New Mutants dropped on Krakoa's doorstep.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Men (2019) #9

Mar 25, 2020

This was an exhilarating issue of X-Men from start to finish. This creative team brought their A-game in X-Men #9 when it came to the reveal of what makes the King Egg so important, so dangerous, and why it was so important to keep this out of the hands of the Brood Queens.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
X-Men (2019) #10

Jul 29, 2020

At the end of the day, I think I might have to pass on anything X-Men related that has to do with Empyre. I wanted to get to the end of this issue and say that this might be worth sticking with if you aren't following the events of Empyre, but the sad truth is that it may not be.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men (2019) #11

Aug 26, 2020

I picked up this issue of X-Men expecting to be let down. Yet somehow I walked away from this satisfied in ways I did not think possible for a tie-in to Empyre of all stories. This creative team made this story their own, and the best takeaway was knowing that Krakoa is more prepared than any other attempt at making an island nation.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #12

Sep 16, 2020

After the events of X-Men #12? I would say that there is much more confidence in what is about to unfold when X of Swords kicks off.

View Issue       View Full Review
7
X-Men (2019) #15

Nov 25, 2020

Overall, X-Men #15 was definitely one of the better issues since X of Swords kicked off. My opinion of the event hasn't change, but my confidence in this creative team just writing the "X-Men" is still there.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men (2019) #16

Dec 31, 2020

In the end, there was nothing to look forward to involving the Captain Commander of Krakoa. However, the events of X-Men #16 gave us something else to take interest in for what has been set in motion for the whole of mutants, instead of a few.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Men (2019) #18

Feb 24, 2021

In the end, X-Men #18 was well worth the wait. I for one want to see what comes next too, because there still seems to be more to this that the following issue should get back to.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-Men Prime #1

Mar 29, 2017

X-Men Prime #1 leaves me very interested for what books like X-Men Gold and Blue have in store for us next month. If this is one of those situations where they break your favorite toy and begin to put it back together again, I do hope that this is a sign that the X-Men books can reach that point where they are a must buy once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X-Men: Battle of the Atom #1

Sep 5, 2013

This crossover event shows a lot of promise as this will once again shake up the mutants world. We are not aware of who will take what side just yet on this issue, but that is something that this is building up for. I find this issue made to give us a reason to continue to follow this event and Bendis gives good reason to for current fans and new readers.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-Men: Blue (2017) #1

Apr 12, 2017

When we come to understand the purpose of this team by the end of X-Men Blue #1, I am instantly pulled in because someone got what was lost about this team when they first saw what their future had in store for them. Two main titles so far for the X-Men are worth it, that says a lot about Marvel getting their crap together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-Men: Blue (2017) #3

May 10, 2017

X-Men Blue #3 makes this series feel more like a journey than anything else. These X-Men are looking for self-discovery and understanding in a world/future they have to get used to. They were brought up to believe a lot of things, but this new world challenges much of what they think they are fighting for.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-Men: Blue (2017) #4

May 25, 2017

This is only the start to Jimmy Hudson's integration into this world, so it is hard to say just yet if this is a development we can fully roll with. Aside from that, X-Men Blue #4 this was undeniably a story a long time coming for anyone who has been looking for more engagement with mutants from a dead universe.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-Men: Blue (2017) #6

Jun 28, 2017

No sunshine and no lollipops to be found in X-Men: Blue #6. Is it ever really a perfect day in Madripoor? That is the question you have to ask yourself here and still it is just another day in this crazy place. You're either looking for a good time or you're looking for some trouble. Hank, Jean and Jimmy got the best of both worlds here and this was worth the issue to enjoy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-Men: Gold #1

Nov 16, 2013

As the untold story of the X-Men starring Cyclops, Wolverine, Nightcrawler, Colossus, Kitty Pryde and Rogue, this was a great treat for X-Men fans. Again as the 50th Anniversary of the X-Men, this is a fun way to remember the glory days of the X-Men. X-Men Gold is a book you should want to pick up if you want a sense of nostalgia, or maybe you read it to help keep that hope alive that the X-Men of now will soon come together and forget their conflicts of interest.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-Men: Gold (2017) #1

Apr 5, 2017

X-Men Gold #1 is everything you should want as we are finally moving forward rather than taking steps back. This story fills us with hope and the joy in what it means to be an X-Man once again. What it also means to be a mutant without falling to an extinction level event. They are facing similar problems, grounded problems, familiar foes, everything about this was a call back to what was lost along the way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Men: Gold (2017) #4

May 17, 2017

X-Men Gold #4 takes us into a whole new set of problems, along with a familiar face. There's a lot going on here, but Marc Guggenheim finds a solid balance between it all making sure that most of it connects in some way. Better than anything else this issue is the assurance that we shouldn't have much to worry about in terms of artwork.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-Men: Gold (2017) #7

Jul 5, 2017

X-Men: Gold #7 was satisfying as a tie-n to Secret Empire. While you can see the connection, I loved that X-Men: Gold can be one of those shinning examples of how you can still make the story your own. For this issue at least you don't feel like you have to be reading Secret Empire, and what happens here is simply following what's already been set up from issues past.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
X-Men: Gold (2017) #9

Aug 2, 2017

New struggle and more problems await the X-Men when they just can't seem to catch a break. Even when showing that they are the heroes these people don't deserve. X-Men Gold #9 gets a little shaky when they decide these relationships need to happen, and Russia doesn't quite fit into this yet, but we are exploring problems the X-Men haven't faced in a long time which is the big takeaway.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-Men: Gold (2017) #26

Apr 18, 2018

X-Men Gold #26 was a good start to what will lead to a long-awaited wedding. I think I found myself more satisfied with the idea that they didn't just jump into the wedding like some others would. This is taking steps to that point, where just about anything can go because these are X-Men we are dealing with here. Even if they get their happy ending, it will come at a price.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-Men: Legacy (2012) #11

May 26, 2013

And the biggest question is how does all of this tie into the evil ghost of Xavier currently plaguing David's mind? Is he just being manipulated or is there something legitimate to the treatment of the mutants in this program. All we know is that a fight is brewing as Blindfold has readied her team to save who she has come to love. We can only wonder if this will end in his death seeing as she was predicted to be his enemy.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-Men: Red (2018) #1

Feb 7, 2018

X-Men: Red #1 is everything an X-fan could want and more from a new series. I'm sure there are plenty of readers out there skeptical that we might be getting one too many X-books, but this issue proves that there is nothing to fear when there are stories to be told, and all it takes is a bold creative team to tell it. This Jean Grey finally sees the world without the corruption of the Phoenix, and now is her time to show that she can make an impact with a new outlook and perspective on life.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-Men: Red (2018) #2

Mar 7, 2018

Overall X-Men: Red #2 was another solid issue that chooses substance over style. This creative team continues to deliver more of what separates this one from other X-books on shelves which is more important than you think with so many ongoing currently and still to come.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-Men: Red (2018) #5

Jun 7, 2018

X-Men: Red is not the X-Book to sleep on if you are looking for a story that changes the game. This is a team that has learned from experience, and working towards peace without falling to what would be predictable for those who don't know HOW to take action.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-Men: Red (2018) #6

Jul 18, 2018

X-Men: Red #6 did not disappoint one bit. X-Men are supposed to fix problems, not slap a banda-aid on it and move to the next one. This team is what you get when the dream is fought for correctly.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men: Red (2018) #7

Aug 22, 2018

Time and time again, X-Men: Red proves to be the star of the X-Books ongoing currently. This story has all the heart of the mutants who are truly trying to fight against hate in the most ingenious ways. It's never going to be easy, and there will always be obstacles, but this is what it means to look for peace without falling to violent tactics. I haven't felt this uplifted by an X-Men story in a long time, and that is a crime honestly.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
X-Men: Red (2018) #8

Sep 26, 2018

X-Men: Red #8 was an issue I honestly had to read twice. Not because there was anything I missed or misunderstood, but because this was such a brilliant climax to everything this series has been built towards so far. Their objectives mattered, their sacrifice, their bravery, and their trust in each other to do what it took without crossing a line. This could only be matched with the right villain to push all the right buttons. Cassandra continued to be one of the most despicable villains in the X-Books till the very end.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-Men: Red (2018) #9

Oct 24, 2018

I like to be wrong. I was very wrong when I thought initially that nothing could top the events of the previous issue of X-Men: Red. It was a great feeling knowing that Tom Taylor knows how to hit you with a heavy story that genuinely represents what it means to fight for the future of a group of people. Why hasn't this guy been writing more of the X-Men stories?

View Issue       View Full Review
9.1
X-Men: Red (2018) #10

Nov 7, 2018

X-Men: Red #10 was another masterpiece of an issue for this series. It is moving to see an X-Men book where there is another option to saving the world and mutants where you don't have to either become like Xavier or Magneto. They aren't the only figureheads to aspire to become. Jean represents option C and does it marvelously. The rules did not really change for Jean, not when her rules involved breaking the one rules that has honestly up to this point has set mutants back.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
X-Men: Red (2018) #11

Dec 12, 2018

X-Men: Red #11 has been a ride that you wish never stopped. I remember when Cassandra Nova popped up as the villain and I was wary of what this could turn into using an old foe. Never more was I happy to be wrong about the way I felt. This was X-Men storytelling at its best when the fight for peace took on a whole new meaning. No twists, or need for shock value. Just a reflection of the kind of world we fight for today. It's never easy, and its hard not to make compromises, but someone has to take that stand for things to be better.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-O Manowar (2012) #0

Oct 8, 2014

X-O Manowar #0 is a zero issue worth reading. I'm very skeptical about zero issues for the fact that they tend to be used as quick ways to make a buck off of popular characters, though this one is fairly enjoyable. Through all the action you can still find yourself humbled by the way Aric's past shaped the way he is now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.6
X-O Manowar (2012) #17

Sep 22, 2013

You can really tell that there's a difference in worlds when you see how Volo and Tammus go from the fields to a modern setting, seeing Markets and food openly available while they drag their feet in the dirt to work for their own food. Aside from this you see how well all the characters are drawn, and how much detail is put into Aric's X-O Manowar armor when it comes on and off. Things are about to get intense and given what we have seen so far, Lee Garbett should be able to deliver on the graphic nature this story is about to take on.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2012) #18

Oct 16, 2013

The first attack that just very well may lead us straight into Unity. Aric now knows that he will have to fight for what he thinks is his own. Him and his people who he has to also fight to regain trust as their supposed King. What was diplomacy has now turned into war, one which Harada is now ready to step into. Lee Garbett is very capable of handling a lot of what goes on in these pages and that is something to appreciate when there is so much action, and much more to be expected as this story progresses. If you are interested in Valiant's upcoming crossover event, Unity, this is a must read to understand what will lead to this monumental clash of Valiant's strongest against the X-O Manowar.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2012) #19

Nov 20, 2013

Whatever is to come next, X-O Manowar is ground zero for what can only amaze. Unity #2 will be where the real fight can be expected, this has all been a subtle yet welcome build up of excitement to come. Built upon those very human like qualities that make us who we are, the same is given to Aric and his people to make this a compelling story that you find a connection to. Yes Aric is the villain to the rest of the world, but it is issues like this in which Robert Venditti is able to remind you of the man behind the X-O Manowar armor.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2012) #20

Dec 18, 2013

Overall a great transition from what was seen in Unity #2 as a tie-in. If you are reading Valiant comic then this is the book which you should pick up if you wants something that has an impact on the world you know. They are fighting to save the world from itself and not a moment goes by that you aren't reminded of the consequences if they don't stop Aric before the fear he has created throws the world into a nuclear war. As usual the team of Cary Nord and Vicente Cifuentes continue to amaze with how they have brought this to life. Their style really does suit the story seeing how sleek the X-O Manowar armor looks, the detail put into both the water and the structure around them, then also the expressions on their faces which are very convincing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-O Manowar (2012) #21

Jan 22, 2014

Imprisoned and interrogated at an off-the-grid black site. it may seem like the end for Aric of Dacia, but this issue proves to only be the beginning. Now it does have some slight bumps in the road, though that is not to say this story doesn't have a lot of potential to mold Aric into a character who can find his place in this world. Things will definitely be better in the long run as long as we can see the importance of the Visigoth's past without spending too much time there instead of the present.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-O Manowar (2012) #22

Feb 26, 2014

As the Aftermath to Unity, this is a great change in direction for the X-O Manowar series. The focus remains on Aric, though now more than ever before he has to show his worth and someone willing to do what has to be done for the sake of his people and the world around him. How he handles this as time progresses is the biggest you have to ask, and better reason to continuing Aric on this new path. You know that this can only go right for so long, especially when his own people can start asking questions at any point.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X-O Manowar (2012) #23

Mar 19, 2014

As the prelude to Armor Hunters, you finish this issue with the anticipation of their inevitable arrival to Earth. The biggest question has always been what will follow Aric to Earth now that he holds one of the most powerful weapons in the Universe. Now that question is answered and the danger is real. Now it is all a matter of how Venditti will approach Aric's confrontation with these hunters, and how that will affect the rest of the world which we know by now will get caught in the fray.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2012) #24

Apr 16, 2014

Overall this is a great way to increase interest in Valiant's upcoming event while giving us the readers a better idea of what we need to know before it all begins.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-O Manowar (2012) #25

May 21, 2014

X-O Manowar #25 is the celebration of X-O Manowar's 25th issue that the series deserves. With so many writers and artists having a hand from this we come to understand Aric from many perspectives while also understanding what's to come in Armor Hunters as the hunters continue their purge of the X-O Manowar armors from existence.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-O Manowar (2012) #26

Jun 25, 2014

X-O Manowar #26 serves as a good starting point, while fleshing out characters who have a higher purpose in the Armor Hunters event. We don't see Aric, but this is a necessary break that we have from him in order to bring characterization to the villains considering the main series is only 8 issues. Where things go from here is uncertain, but we can all be assured that any questions we've had about the hunters will be explained through X-O Manowar.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
X-O Manowar (2012) #28

Aug 27, 2014

Some depth has been given to the Armor Hunters through X-O Manowar, and particularly X-O Manowar #28. Though it's hard not to feel like there is a bit you might want out of this. Of course this origin tale is far from over, though you can't help but feel that the Armor Hunter's story is at their best when they are in conflict with Earth. That might change, but we'll have to see with issue #29.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
X-O Manowar (2012) #29

Sep 24, 2014

While Armor Hunters had a solid conclusion, you have to read X-O Manowar #29 to understand what really came out of this event. The Unity team will be around in the same capacity that we have an Avengers team or Justice League, but the X-O Manowar is now someone the world can look up to and use as a symbol of strength when they have to pull themselves together.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-O Manowar (2012) #30

Nov 19, 2014

X-O Manowar #30 is another opportunities to get into what is the centerpiece of the Valiant Universe as our heroes have been established to the world, we have a new villain, and much progress is being made by Capshaw to make sure that politics don't come in the way of her doing the job she needs to do for their protection.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-O Manowar (2012) #31

Dec 31, 2014

X-O Manowar #31 ends setting up to what will be Aric vs the Armorines. Strong individually and deadly as a unit it should be a show to see what they can do against the man of war himself.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
X-O Manowar (2012) #32

Jan 28, 2015

With X-O Manowar #32 comes an end to “Enter Armorines”. Slightly short-lived story, fun for what it's worth, though could possibly have been something bigger if more time was given for this story to get into a lot more than what was seen.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.2
X-O Manowar (2012) #34

Mar 4, 2015

X-O Manowar #34 is the start of a story which is necessary to complete what we know and don't know about the Armor Hunters. Not only this, but challenge Aric in a way that might give us a better understanding of what it is the armor is, and the lengths the Armor Hunters will go to make sure the presence of the armors in the galaxy is eradicated.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.4
X-O Manowar (2012) #35

Apr 1, 2015

X-O Manowar #35 is a proper start for big things to come when a greater threat comes in the wake of one which already took so much from Earth. This may not be event worthy, but certainly still a big story which should bring up past feelings which can only be felt knowing that nothing good can really come out of what the Armor Hunters unleashed.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-O Manowar (2012) #37

Jun 17, 2015

What could be found disappointing was the little seen of what happened to the hunters. We know their fate, and that is of course what led to Dead Hand, but for such an event to unfold it could have at least a little more time dedicated to it. If not only to feel some way about the slaughter of the hunters felt like it could have been necessary. Possibly could also be said that with this issue we could have done without what was happening on Earth. Their relevance wasn't all there and took time away from a very good confrontation between Dead Hand and Aric as they argued ethics.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
X-O Manowar (2012) #38

Jul 1, 2015

The stories at the end were just as well written and drawn as the main story for the wedding. Those in particular that added to what happened before the wedding are those you appreciate much more because they give you a perspective that allows you to see just how the past influenced who Aric and Saana are positively.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-O Manowar (2012) #39

Aug 12, 2015

Visually X-O Manowar #39 grabs you the same as X-O Manowar #39 when we start to experience the same feeling of suspense and urgency that we did when the planet of Loam was facing its doom. The Vine were unprepared for this attack and you sympathize with their unawareness of what they were getting themselves into when they decided Earth would be their new home. To see their happiness finding a new home, and then what came next is a crushing visual to take in and this art team delivered in capturing what it means to live in fear, and what it means to suffer. Again there were so many ways this could have happened, and the art team took the more in-depth approach to show how people reacted to their very way of life ending in such a short amount of time. As usual the colors are distinguishing when so much was going on at once. Used very well when it comes to creating the atmosphere for the story. Especially when things seem bleak.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2012) #40

Sep 2, 2015

X-O Manowar #40 shows you that a lot of action is in store for us as things will inevitably escalate, but you must look past that to see the importance of the true story being told. We are steadily reaching an end to this run and there is no better time to be following the adventure of Aric as he tries to keep those he loves safe, as well as the world he has sworn to protect.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X-O Manowar (2012) #41

Oct 14, 2015

X-O Manowar #41 is an excellent issue that escalates things as we go into part 3 of EXODUS. The inevitable we have to look forward to in the next issue, and that much will be worth looking forward to as no one truly wins from a war like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-O Manowar (2012) #42

Nov 25, 2015

X-O Manowar #42 stands for everything you love about what this series has evolved into, what Aric has evolved into as the X-O Manowar. It wasn't about who had the bigger guns, or who was the toughest. This story arc finished on a note that questioned and gave an answer as to what it takes to lead. It has been made clear that Trill will be a big villain down the road, and this was the best way of putting him in that position where not only that is established but other possible storylines created as well.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-O Manowar (2012) #43

Jan 6, 2016

X-O Manowar #43 is a good start to a new mission with big expectations of Aric and Ninjak for making sure peace is kept between human and Vine.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-O Manowar (2012) #44

Feb 3, 2016

X-O Manowar #44 makes progress with another well paced issue. Something big is coming and these two past issues have been a good build up to that moment.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
X-O Manowar (2012) #45

Mar 23, 2016

X-O Manowar #45 gave us escalation as you would not have expected. When they say the X-O Manowar's world will never be the same by the end of this run, they were not messing around or teasing.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-O Manowar (2012) #49

Aug 31, 2016

X-O Manowar #49 was excellent for the heart that lies at the core as Valiant's flagship title. It deserves to be so, and it will be sad for whatever happens after the 50th issue because we've come along way with Aric growing with him as a big shaper of this world.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.8
X-O Manowar (2012) #50

Sep 28, 2016

X-O Manowar #50 was everything it was hyped to be. I don't think there could have been anything more you could have asked for these fifty issues that they didn't deliver unto us. Long Live The King because I don't think there has ever been a superhero like Aric who has achieved so much and been through as much as he has in the span of a single run. This is evolution that other superhero universe can take queues from.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-O Manowar (2012) Annual #1

May 17, 2016

Overall, X-O Manowar Annual 2016 #1 is worth the read for all the little things we get to explore from all corners of the X-O Manowar's world. The very thing that give us more insight to things overlooked, or things that have a lot more relevance that you probably aren't seeing from the main title.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
X-O Manowar (2012): Commander Trill #0

Dec 2, 2015

So with X-O Manowar: Commander Trill #0, Commander Trill now finds himself amongst the ranks of Toyo Harada, Master Darque and Dr. Silk as Valiant's greatest villains whose story has now been told.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
X-O Manowar (2012): Valiant 25th Anniversary Special #1

Jun 10, 2015

X-O Manowar Valiant 25th Anniversary Special #1 is a book that all fans of Valiant should pick up because this is a big part of this series' history revealed, and in such a beautiful way.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.1
X-O Manowar (2017) #1

Mar 7, 2017

This is still Aric at the end of the day, but this is a whole new warrior we are dealing with. A satisfactory start to a new direction for the X-O Manowar that everyone can enjoy because this is war in its raw form. Always is and always will be when one of the most powerful beings in the universe enters the fray once more.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.3
X-O Manowar (2017) #11

Jan 24, 2018

So far the hype has been met through the initial engagement with these bounty hunters through the events of X-O Manowar #11. As an all-new jumping-on point, this creative team hit the mark in starting a new chapter without feeling as though you were missing something. All you needed to know is that Aric has come a long way from where he started. As they said, from soldier to general to emperor, and now outcast.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-O Manowar (2017) #12

Feb 28, 2018

Things got real pretty fast by the end of X-O Manowar #12. This was one of those issues where you are better off throwing your expectations right out of the window. Aric had his plan, he went with it, crap hit the fan, but at the end of the day he finds the power he needs to fight back. Kings and Emperors will always fall, but heroes will rise again given the opportunity.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.4
X-O Manowar (2017) #19

Sep 27, 2018

X-O Manowar #19 wasn't anything too special for the 75th issue celebration, but it was an excellent point to jump back into the action when both Aric and Capshaw seem to need this mission more than anything else going on in their lives right now.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-O Manowar (2017) #20

Oct 24, 2018

X-O Manowar #20 wasted little time jumping into that madness to ensue when the dangers of the Unknown make their way to Earth. That danger took many forms here, and all of them explosive forces that you can't wait to see clash next month. This Aric seems like one who has less tolerance than usual. That is something to fear when in most cases he is a humble warrior who will hold back.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
X-O Manowar (2017) #21

Nov 28, 2018

X-O Manowar #21 was another issue that was well worth the wait. The Unknown is a well of untapped potential in storytelling, and this story arc is so far taking full advantage of it. This is the kind of havoc that one can wreak when messing with forces they should not know how to comprehend. You thought I was probably going to say can't, but that's not the case for this Cartographer.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.6
X-O Manowar (2017) #22

Dec 19, 2018

Lets take us back to my original statement at the start of this story arc. When you want to genuinely challenge Aric, how do you challenge the guy who wields the most powerful weapon in the universe? You throw something at him that exists outside of it! Credit where it is due for this creative team tackling a story that perfectly bridges the events of Divinity to this series.

View Issue       View Full Review
10
X-O Manowar (2017) #26

Apr 17, 2019

You couldn't have asked for a more beautiful ending to a run than what we got out of X-O Manowar #26. Other books try to see this as that opportunity to crank the dial one last time, but sometimes all you need is to take a step back and use that time for appreciating everything which led to this point. I was moved because Aric is the very definition of what you get when exploring the importance of the person behind the mask, or helmet in his case.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2020) #1

Mar 11, 2020

By the end of X-O Manowar #1, I am confident in saying that this is still a must-read book from Valiant. There's a refreshing change of direction to this series, a new cast of characters, and new enemies too. Overall, there was a bit of something for everyone who has interest in a hero like this.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2020) #2

Nov 25, 2020

In the end, X-O Manowar #2 was worth waiting all these months to jump into. Right now I would say that this is the book to have in your pull-list if any from Valiant.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
X-O Manowar (2020) #3

Dec 23, 2020

In the end, X-O Manowar #3 was a thrill from start to finish as Aric continues to fight with his priorities. With a hero like this, you just don't know what you are going to get when he springs into action. Everything he does comes with the worry of reactions and responses.

View Issue       View Full Review
9
X-O Manowar (2020) #4

Jan 27, 2021

Action-packed and one heck of an emotional ride as usual. X-O Manowar #4 was worth the anticipation that we felt since that insane cliffhanger they left us on in issue #3.

View Issue       View Full Review
6.5
X-Termination #2

Apr 28, 2013

Despite a decent story, the art for the crossover at times was uneven. That's not to say it wasn't good enough to really make those moments that mattered pop out, but there were many changes that were noticeable and which distracted.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.5
Year of the Villain: Sinestro #1

Aug 7, 2019

Sinestro: Year of the Villain #1 served as a strong reminder that Luthor is not the only one to fear from the Legion of Doom right now. He may have become this Apex Predator, but he is just another guy trying to play God. Sinestro is the same as he has ever been, and that means being the guy who

View Issue       View Full Review
8.9
Young Avengers (2013) #4

Apr 25, 2013

Young Avengers yet again proves to be the Marvel NOW! book that manages to balance being serious and humorous at the same time. This issue has built up to something big to come as they take on the swarm of infected and as we await to see what it is that Loki has up his sleeve since it's hard to believe he'd leave them without a good reason.

View Issue       View Full Review
9.5
Young Avengers (2013) #5

May 24, 2013

Being a short story arc, it was a great way to bring the team together. The most important thing was trying to bring the team together and they are given a reason to remain together which is great storytelling. They can't interact with any parents or anywhere in which their parents live, they have to isolate themselves just to protect everyone else. With the exception of Chavez America who sees through Loki and he knows she does too. So now we have the Young Avengers as their story has only begun!

View Issue       View Full Review
9.2
Young Avengers (2013) #6

Jun 27, 2013

It seems like there will be some transition for them to overcome this slump they find themselves in and become heroes again. But until then it is a fun story in which you find both of their clashing personalities entertaining along with their humorous banter. It's definitely more down to Earth than what we have read previously, but it's refreshing to say the least and I can say I'm itching to find out what happens next.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Young Avengers (2013) #7

Jul 11, 2013

Aside from this the book still shows a lot of potential when it comes to what these characters are capable of. Miss Chavez apparently can do a little more than just punch and kick, while Loki as per usual still has many tricks up his sleeve which he's hiding. Story-wise, it is still the one book out there which can be serious yet doesn't take itself too seriously.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.8
Young Avengers (2013) #8

Jul 25, 2013

Young Avengers still remains that go to book if you are looking for something fun. Not just because of Loki's humor which is very humorous, but because Gillen manages to surprise you consistently. This issue should have surprised many and we can only follow what happens here and hope it's something we can understand. Well we should also want to see if Teddy can understand because he is probably more shocked than we could be knowing he's still in a relationship.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Young Avengers (2013) #9

Aug 29, 2013

Good enough finish to this storyline though I felt it could have been better. It was rushed and I just didn't feel that same fun vibe that the book originally gave me at the start. Of course the story would eventually get serious, but at the cost of the entertainment value I felt that it was a bit harmful to the overall tone. Hopefully what comes next will take us back to what we liked most about Young Avengers, though there's a split chance for that given the surprise appearance at the end of the story.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Young Avengers (2013) #10

Sep 26, 2013

This is a great start of a new story arc because the book gained that sense of humor which was lost some time ago. That was what really made this one of the more entertaining books to read. And for once it didn't rely on just Loki to accomplish this. Mother you find so much more interesting now that you know why she is after Billy and how she and Loki were apparently connected. More so in the very beginning when you see how that random person was spying on her and her reaction to it.

View Issue       View Full Review
7.9
Young Avengers (2013) #11

Oct 24, 2013

Overall this issue makes you very excited for what's to come. As Young Avengers you figure that there would be more interaction with other young heroes all over. That much you see as Prodigy called up pretty much every known and active young hero available for the final conflict. Which would also lead to the eventual “Afterparty” issue #15. So many answers revealed throughout, though the only fear that remains is hoping that too many heroes involved doesn't hurt the impact of the end.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Z Nation #1

Apr 12, 2017

Z Nation #1 was a strong start to this new six-issue miniseries. It captured everything you love about Z Nation through these new and familiar faces. Expect the unexpected and cling to no one as this world knows how to chew you up and spit you back out. And this is only one year in, so if there was any way to generate hype for what the next five issues have to offer they nailed it.

View Issue       View Full Review
8
Z Nation #2

May 10, 2017

Just when you thought you had thing figured out, in a Z Nation kind of way things became complicated. Well even more complicated. Z Nation #2 doesn't bring us that much closer to Johnson and Cutter retrieving the Soylent-Z, but we sure as heck understand now what obstacles will stand between them and completing what seems like an almost impossible mission.

View Issue       View Full Review
8.7
Zero #2

Oct 16, 2013

Zero #2 is a solid issue that allows us room to understand the direction this story is taking, what it's shaping up to be. Here we saw Edward experience his first kill, to be able to prove himself. It was the best moment to show that question of whether what he was doing is right. Bellaire's graphic style really added to this moment when it came to that point where he had to take someone's life. The gore, violence, blood, all coming down to the treatment of the targets they are assigned to take out. They aren't seen as people, men, women, kids, just targets. It allows for more freedom to do things that engage you more as someone who sympathizes with the choices they have to make in order to do what they believe is right.

View Issue       View Full Review

Reviews for the Week of...

April

March

More